B-1726(2)

FC6A SERIES

LAD Programming Manual

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
• Read the "FC6A Series MicroSmart LAD Programming Manual" to ensure correct operation before starting installation, wiring, operation,
maintenance, and inspection of the FC6A Series MicroSmart.
• All FC6A Series MicroSmart modules are manufactured under IDEC’s rigorous quality control system, but users must add a backup or failsafe
provision to the control system when using the FC6A Series MicroSmart in applications where heavy damage or personal injury may be caused,
in case the FC6A Series MicroSmart should fail.
• In this manual, safety precautions are categorized in order of importance:

Warning Warning notices are used to emphasize that improper operation may cause severe personal injury or death.

• The FC6A Series MicroSmart is not designed for use in applications requiring a high degree of reliability and safety. The FC6A Series MicroSmart
should not be used for such applications.
• When using the FC6A Series MicroSmart in applications (not described above) that require a high degree of reliability in terms of functionality
and precision, appropriate measures such as failsafe mechanisms and redundant mechanisms must be taken for the system containing the
FC6A Series MicroSmart. The following are specific examples.
• Emergency stop and interlocking circuits must be configured outside the FC6A Series MicroSmart.
• If relays or transistors in the FC6A Series MicroSmart output circuits should fail, outputs may remain at on or off state. For output signals
which may cause serious accidents, configure monitor circuits outside the FC6A Series MicroSmart.
• The FC6A Series MicroSmart self-diagnostic function may detect internal circuit or program errors, stop programs, and turn outputs off.
Configure circuits so that the system containing the FC6A Series MicroSmart is not jeopardized when outputs turn off.
• Turn off power to the FC6A Series MicroSmart before installation, removal, wiring, maintenance, and inspection of the FC6A Series MicroSmart.
Failure to turn power off may cause electrical shocks or fire hazard.
• Special expertise is required to install, wire, program, and operate the FC6A Series MicroSmart. People without such expertise must not use the
FC6A Series MicroSmart.
• Install the FC6A Series MicroSmart according to the instructions described in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s Manual".
Improper installation will result in falling, failure, or malfunction of the FC6A Series MicroSmart.

Caution Caution notices are used where inattention might cause personal injury or damage to equipment.

• The FC6A Series MicroSmart is designed for installation in a cabinet. Do not install the FC6A Series MicroSmart outside a cabinet.
• Install the FC6A Series MicroSmart in environments described in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s Manual". If the FC6A Series
MicroSmart is used in places where the FC6A Series MicroSmart is subjected to high-temperature, high-humidity, condensation, corrosive gases,
excessive vibrations, or excessive shocks, then electrical shocks, fire hazard, or malfunction will result.
• The environment for using the FC6A Series MicroSmart is "Pollution degree 2." Use the FC6A Series MicroSmart in environments of pollution
degree 2 (according to IEC 60664-1).
• Prevent the FC6A Series MicroSmart from falling while moving or transporting the FC6A Series MicroSmart, otherwise damage or malfunction of
the FC6A Series MicroSmart will result.
• Wiring must use lead sizes that are appropriate for the applied voltage and current. Terminal screws must be tightened with the prescribed
tightening torque.
• Prevent metal fragments and pieces of wire from dropping inside the FC6A Series MicroSmart housing. Put a cover on the FC6A Series
MicroSmart modules during installation and wiring. Ingress of such fragments and chips may cause fire hazard, damage, or malfunction.
• Use a power supply of the rated value. Use of a wrong power supply may cause fire hazard.
• Use an IEC 60127-approved fuse on the power line outside the FC6A Series MicroSmart. This is required when equipment containing the FC6A
Series MicroSmart is destined for Europe.
• Use an IEC 60127-approved fuse on the output circuit. This is required when equipment containing the FC6A Series MicroSmart is destined for
Europe.
• Use an EU-approved circuit breaker. This is required when equipment containing the FC6A Series MicroSmart is destined for Europe.
• Make sure of safety before starting and stopping the FC6A Series MicroSmart or when operating the FC6A Series MicroSmart to force outputs on
or off. Incorrect operation of the FC6A Series MicroSmart may cause machine damage or accidents.
• Do not connect the ground wire directly to the FC6A Series MicroSmart. Connect a protective ground to the cabinet containing the FC6A Series
MicroSmart using an M4 or larger screw. This is required when equipment containing the FC6A Series MicroSmart is destined for Europe.
• Do not disassemble, repair, or modify the FC6A Series MicroSmart modules.
• The FC6A Series MicroSmart contains electronic parts and batteries. When disposing of the FC6A Series
MicroSmart, do so in accordance with national and local regulations.

Preface-1 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

ABOUT THIS MANUAL
This manual describes functions, specifications, installation, and operation basics of the FC6A Series MicroSmart. Also included is
information on the powerful communications tools of the FC6A Series MicroSmart, as well as troubleshooting procedures.
Chapter 1: Operation Basics
General information about setting up the basic FC6A Series MicroSmart system for programming, starting and stopping the FC6A
Series MicroSmart operation, and simple operating procedures. Everything from creating a user program using WindLDR on a
computer to monitoring the FC6A Series MicroSmart operation.
Chapter 2: Devices
Descriptions of the allocations of devices such as inputs, outputs, internal relays, registers, timers, and counters that are used in
the basic and advanced instructions, as well as details about the allocations of special internal relays and special data registers.
Chapter 3: Installation and Wiring
Methods and precautions for installing and wiring the FC6A Series MicroSmart.
Chapter 4: Instructions Reference
List of basic and advanced instructions to program the FC6A Series MicroSmart and general rules of using advanced instructions.
Chapter 5: Basic Instructions
Programming of the basic instructions, available devices, and sample programs.
Chapter 6 through Chapter 27:
Detailed descriptions for advanced instructions.
Appendix
Additional information about execution times and byte sizes for instructions.
Index
Alphabetical listing of key words.

Publication history
December 2015: First Edition
December 2016: Second Edition
March 2017: Third Edition
Trademarks
FC6A Series MicroSmart is a trademark of IDEC Corporation.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 Preface-2

Regarding laws and compatible standards
This product adheres to the laws and compatible standards of all countries involved, as shown below.
European laws and standards
This product complies with the following EU directives.
• Low Voltage Directive
• EMC Directive
To comply with these directives, this product has been designed and evaluated on the basis of the following international and
European standard.
• IEC/EN 61131-2: 2007
For details on the compatible standards and EU Directives, contact the distributor from which you purchased this product or visit our web site.
North America laws and standards
This product complies with the following standards.
• UL508
• CSA C22.2 No.142
• ANSI/ISA 12,12,01*1
• CAN/CSA C22.2 No.213*1
*1 Certain FC6A Series MicroSmart models are not compatible. For details, please contact IDEC Corporation.
For details on compatible standards and EU directives, please contact the dealer where purchased or check the IDEC website.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION
Under no circumstances shall IDEC Corporation be held liable or responsible for indirect or consequential damages resulting from
the use of or the application of IDEC PLC components, individually or in combination with other equipment.
All persons using these components must be willing to accept responsibility for choosing the correct component to suit their
application and for choosing an application appropriate for the component, individually or in combination with other equipment.
All diagrams and examples in this manual are for illustrative purposes only. In no way does including these diagrams and
examples in this manual constitute a guarantee as to their suitability for any specific application. To test and approve all
programs, prior to installation, is the responsibility of the end user.

Preface-3 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

RELATED MANUALS
The following manuals related to the FC6A Series MicroSmart are available. Refer to them in conjunction with this manual.

Type No. Manual Name Description

Describes product specifications, installation and wiring instructions, instructions for
FC6A Series MicroSmart basic programming operations and special functions, device and instruction lists,
FC9Y-B1722
All-in-One Type User’s Manual communication functions, and troubleshooting procedures for the FC6A Series
MicroSmart series.
FC6A Series MicroSmart Describes basic operations for programming with ladders on the FC6A Series
FC9Y-B1726 LAD Programming Manual MicroSmart, monitoring methods, device and instruction lists, and details of each
(this manual) instruction.
FC6A Series MicroSmart
Describes specifications related to FC6A Series MicroSmart communication,
FC9Y-B1730 All-in-One Type Communication
descriptions of functions, configuration methods, and usage examples.
Manual
FC6A Series MicroSmart
FC9Y-B1734 Describes PID module specifications and functions.
PID Module User's Manual
Describes usage instructions for WindLDR, programming software for the FC6A
WindLDR Help
Series MicroSmart series.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 Preface-4

NAMES AND ABBREVIATIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL
Model Names

Name Used in This Manual Type Number, Part Code, or Official Name
FC6A Series MicroSmart FC6A Series MICROSmart
FC6A-C16R1AE, FC6A-C16R1CE, FC6A-C16K1CE, FC6A-C16P1CE,
FC6A-C24R1AE, FC6A-C24R1CE, FC6A-C24K1CE, FC6A-C24P1CE,
All-in-One Type
FC6A-C40R1AE, FC6A-C40R1CE, FC6A-C40K1CE, FC6A-C40P1CE,
FC6A-C40R1DE, FC6A-C40R1DE, FC6A-C40K1DE, FC6A-C40P1DE
FC6A-C40R1AEJ, FC6A-C40R1CEJ, FC6A-C40K1CEJ, FC6A-C40P1CEJ,
CAN J1939 All-in-One Type
FC6A-C40R1DEJ, FC6A-C40K1DEJ, FC6A-C40P1DEJ
The general term for the model with 16 I/O points
16-I/O type
(FC6A-C16R1AE, FC6A-C16R1CE, FC6A-C16K1CE, FC6A-C16P1CE)
The general term for the model with 24 I/O points
24-I/O type
(FC6A-C24R1AE, FC6A-C24R1CE, FC6A-C24K1CE, FC6A-C24P1CE)
The general term for the model with 40 I/O points
(FC6A-C40R1AE, FC6A-C40R1CE, FC6A-C40K1CE, FC6A-C40P1CE,
40-I/O type FC6A-C40R1DE, FC6A-C40R1DE, FC6A-C40K1DE, FC6A-C40P1DE,
FC6A-C40R1AEJ, FC6A-C40R1CEJ, FC6A-C40K1CEJ, FC6A-C40P1CEJ,
CPU module
FC6A-C40R1DEJ, FC6A-C40K1DEJ, FC6A-C40P1DEJ)
AC power type FC6A-C16R1AE, FC6A-C24R1AE, FC6A-C40R1AE, FC6A-C40R1AEJ
FC6A-C16R1CE, FC6A-C24R1CE, FC6A-C40R1CE, FC6A-C16K1CE,
24V DC power type FC6A-C24K1CE, FC6A-C40K1CE, FC6A-C16P1CE, FC6A-C24P1CE,
DC power type FC6A-C40P1CE, FC6A-C40R1CEJ, FC6A-C40K1CEJ, FC6A-C40P1CEJ
FC6A-C40R1DE, FC6A-C40K1DE, FC6A-C40P1DE, FC6A-C40R1DEJ,
12V DC power type
FC6A-C40K1DEJ, FC6A-C40P1DEJ
FC6A-C16R1AE, FC6A-C16R1CE, FC6A-C24R1AE, FC6A-C24R1CE,
Relay output type FC6A-C40R1AE, FC6A-C40R1CE, FC6A-C40R1DE, FC6A-C40R1AEJ,
FC6A-C40R1CEJ, FC6A-C40R1DEJ
Transistor sink output FC6A-C16K1CE, FC6A-C24K1CE, FC6A-C40K1CE, FC6A-C40K1DE,
type FC6A-C40K1CEJ, FC6A-C40K1DEJ
Transistor output type
Transistor protection FC6A-C16P1CE, FC6A-C24P1CE, FC6A-C40P1CE, FC6A-C40P1DE,
source output type FC6A-C40P1CEJ, FC6A-C40P1DEJ
Expansion module Expansion I/O module, functional module
Expansion I/O module Input module, output module, mixed I/O module
Functional module Analog module, PID module
Analog input module, analog output module,
Analog module
mixed analog I/O module
HMI module, expansion interface module,
Option module
analog cartridge, communication cartridge
Cartridge Analog cartridge, communication cartridge
WindLDR WindLDR application software
USB maintenance cable (HG9Z-XCM42),
USB cable
USB Mini-B extension cable (HG9Z-XCE21)

Name Used in this Manual WindLDR Operating Procedure

Function area settings Configuration tab > Function Area Settings group
Monitors Select Online > Monitor > Start Monitor.
PLC status Select Online > PLC > Status.
Communication settings Select Online > Communication > Set Up.
On the Configuration tab, in Function Area Settings, click Communication Ports, and in the
Modbus master request table displayed Function Area Settings dialog box, for Communication Mode under Communication
Ports, select Modbus RTU Master or Modbus TCP Client
The button displayed on the left side of the menu bar. Click to display the menu with New, Save, and
Application button
Save As, recent projects, WindLDR Options, and Exit WindLDR.

Preface-5 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Safety Precautions............................................................................................................................. Preface-1
About This Manual............................................................................................................................. Preface-2
Related Manuals................................................................................................................................ Preface-4
Names and Abbreviations Used in this Manual ..................................................................................... Preface-5

CHAPTER 1: Operation Basics

Start WindLDR ............................................................................................................................................ 1-1
PLC Selection .............................................................................................................................................. 1-2
Create Program ........................................................................................................................................... 1-3
Save Project................................................................................................................................................ 1-8
Simulate Operation...................................................................................................................................... 1-9
Download Program .................................................................................................................................... 1-10
Monitor Operation ..................................................................................................................................... 1-12
Exit WindLDR ............................................................................................................................................ 1-12
Checking the WindLDR Version Number ...................................................................................................... 1-13
Ladder Program Operation ......................................................................................................................... 1-14
Start/Stop Operation.................................................................................................................................. 1-15

CHAPTER 2: Devices
Device Addresses ........................................................................................................................................ 2-1
Special Internal Relay .................................................................................................................................. 2-3
Special Data Register................................................................................................................................. 2-13

CHAPTER 3: Instructions Reference

Basic Instruction List.................................................................................................................................... 3-1
Advanced Instruction List ............................................................................................................................. 3-3
Structure of an Advanced Instruction ............................................................................................................ 3-6
Input Condition for Advanced Instructions..................................................................................................... 3-6
Source and Destination Devices.................................................................................................................... 3-6
Using Timer or Counter as Source Device...................................................................................................... 3-6
Using Timer or Counter as Destination Device ............................................................................................... 3-6
Data Types for Advanced Instructions ........................................................................................................... 3-7
Discontinuity of Device Areas ..................................................................................................................... 3-11
NOP (No Operation) .................................................................................................................................. 3-11

CHAPTER 4: Basic Instructions

LOD (Load) and LODN (Load Not) ................................................................................................................ 4-1
OUT (Output) and OUTN (Output Not).......................................................................................................... 4-1
SET and RST (Reset) ................................................................................................................................... 4-3
AND and ANDN (And Not)............................................................................................................................ 4-4
OR and ORN (Or Not) .................................................................................................................................. 4-4
AND LOD (Load) ......................................................................................................................................... 4-5
OR LOD (Load) ........................................................................................................................................... 4-5
BPS (Bit Push), BRD (Bit Read), and BPP (Bit Pop)......................................................................................... 4-6
TML, TIM, TMH, and TMS (Timer) ................................................................................................................ 4-7
TMLO, TIMO, TMHO, and TMSO (Off-Delay Timer) ...................................................................................... 4-10
CNT, CDP, and CUD (Counter).................................................................................................................... 4-11
CNTD, CDPD, and CUDD (Double-Word Counter)......................................................................................... 4-14
CC= and CC>= (Counter Comparison) ........................................................................................................ 4-18
DC= and DC>= (Data Register Comparison) ............................................................................................... 4-20
SFR and SFRN (Forward and Reverse Shift Register).................................................................................... 4-22
SOTU and SOTD (Single Output Up and Down) ........................................................................................... 4-26
MCS and MCR (Master Control Set and Reset) ............................................................................................. 4-27
JMP (Jump) and JEND (Jump End) ............................................................................................................. 4-29
END ......................................................................................................................................................... 4-30
Restriction on Ladder Programming ............................................................................................................ 4-31

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 Preface-6

TABLE OF CONTENTS

CHAPTER 5: Move Instructions

MOV (Move) ............................................................................................................................................... 5-1
MOVN (Move Not)....................................................................................................................................... 5-5
IMOV (Indirect Move).................................................................................................................................. 5-6
IMOVN (Indirect Move Not) ......................................................................................................................... 5-8
BMOV (Block Move) .................................................................................................................................... 5-9
IBMV (Indirect Bit Move) ............................................................................................................................5-10
IBMVN (Indirect Bit Move Not)....................................................................................................................5-12
NSET (N Data Set) .....................................................................................................................................5-13
NRS (N Data Repeat Set)............................................................................................................................5-14
XCHG (Exchange) ......................................................................................................................................5-15
TCCST (Timer/Counter Current Value Store) ................................................................................................5-16

CHAPTER 6: Data Comparison Instructions

CMP= (Compare Equal To) .......................................................................................................................... 6-1
CMP<> (Compare Unequal To).................................................................................................................... 6-1
CMP< (Compare Less Than) ........................................................................................................................ 6-1
CMP> (Compare Greater Than).................................................................................................................... 6-1
CMP<= (Compare Less Than or Equal To) .................................................................................................... 6-1
CMP>= (Compare Greater Than or Equal To) ............................................................................................... 6-1
ICMP>= (Interval Compare Greater Than or Equal To).................................................................................. 6-6
LC= (Load Compare Equal To)..................................................................................................................... 6-8
LC<> (Load Compare Unequal To) .............................................................................................................. 6-8
LC< (Load Compare Less Than)................................................................................................................... 6-8
LC> (Load Compare Greater Than) .............................................................................................................. 6-8
LC<= (Load Compare Less Than or Equal To)............................................................................................... 6-8
LC>= (Load Compare Greater Than or Equal To) .......................................................................................... 6-8

CHAPTER 7: Binary Arithmetic Instructions

ADD (Addition) ........................................................................................................................................... 7-1
SUB (Subtraction) ....................................................................................................................................... 7-1
MUL (Multiplication) .................................................................................................................................... 7-1
DIV (Division) ............................................................................................................................................. 7-1
INC (Increment) ........................................................................................................................................7-13
DEC (Decrement).......................................................................................................................................7-13
ROOT (Root) .............................................................................................................................................7-14
SUM (Sum)................................................................................................................................................7-15
RNDM (Random)........................................................................................................................................7-18

CHAPTER 8: Boolean Computation Instructions

ANDW (AND Word) ..................................................................................................................................... 8-1
ORW (OR Word) ......................................................................................................................................... 8-1
XORW (Exclusive OR Word) ......................................................................................................................... 8-1

CHAPTER 9: Shift / Rotate Instructions

SFTL (Shift Left) ......................................................................................................................................... 9-1
SFTR (Shift Right) ....................................................................................................................................... 9-3
BCDLS (BCD Left Shift)................................................................................................................................ 9-5
WSFT (Word Shift)...................................................................................................................................... 9-7
ROTL (Rotate Left)...................................................................................................................................... 9-8
ROTR (Rotate Right) ..................................................................................................................................9-10

CHAPTER 10: Data Conversion Instructions

HTOB (Hex to BCD) ...................................................................................................................................10-1
BTOH (BCD to Hex) ...................................................................................................................................10-3
HTOA (Hex to ASCII) .................................................................................................................................10-5
ATOH (ASCII to Hex) .................................................................................................................................10-7
BTOA (BCD to ASCII) .................................................................................................................................10-9
ATOB (ASCII to BCD) ...............................................................................................................................10-12
ENCO (Encode)........................................................................................................................................10-15
DECO (Decode) .......................................................................................................................................10-16

Preface-7 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

BCNT (Bit Count)..................................................................................................................................... 10-17

ALT (Alternate Output) ............................................................................................................................ 10-18
CVDT (Convert Data Type)....................................................................................................................... 10-19
DTDV (Data Divide) ................................................................................................................................. 10-21
DTCB (Data Combine) ............................................................................................................................. 10-22
SWAP (Data Swap).................................................................................................................................. 10-23

CHAPTER 11: Week Programmer Instructions

WEEK (Weekly Timer)................................................................................................................................ 11-3
YEAR (Yearly Timer) ................................................................................................................................ 11-16

CHAPTER 12: Display Instructions

MSG (Message) ......................................................................................................................................... 12-1
DISP (Display)......................................................................................................................................... 12-20
DGRD (Digital Read) ................................................................................................................................ 12-22

CHAPTER 13: Program Branching Instructions

LABEL (Label) ........................................................................................................................................... 13-1
LJMP (Label Jump) .................................................................................................................................... 13-1
LCAL (Label Call) ....................................................................................................................................... 13-3
LRET (Label Return) .................................................................................................................................. 13-3
DJNZ (Decrement Jump Non-zero) ............................................................................................................. 13-5

CHAPTER 14: Refresh Instructions

IOREF (I/O Refresh) .................................................................................................................................. 14-1
HSCRF (High-speed Counter Refresh) ......................................................................................................... 14-3
FRQRF (Frequency Measurement Refresh) .................................................................................................. 14-4
COMRF (Communication Refresh) ............................................................................................................... 14-5

CHAPTER 15: Interrupt Control Instructions

DI (Disable Interrupt) ................................................................................................................................ 15-1
EI (Enable Interrupt) ................................................................................................................................. 15-1

CHAPTER 16: Coordinate Conversion Instructions

XYFS (XY Format Set) ................................................................................................................................ 16-1
CVXTY (Convert X to Y) ............................................................................................................................. 16-2
CVYTX (Convert Y to X) ............................................................................................................................. 16-3

CHAPTER 17: Average Instructions

AVRG (Average) ........................................................................................................................................ 17-1

CHAPTER 18: Pulse Output Instructions

PULS (Pulse Output) .................................................................................................................................. 18-1
PWM (Variable Duty Cycle Pulse Output)..................................................................................................... 18-8
RAMP (Trapezoidal Control) ..................................................................................................................... 18-15
ZRN (Zero Return)................................................................................................................................... 18-27
ARAMP (RAMP with Table) ....................................................................................................................... 18-37
ABS (Set Absolute Position)...................................................................................................................... 18-59
JOG (JOG Operation) ............................................................................................................................... 18-63

CHAPTER 19: PID Control Instruction

PID (PID Control) ...................................................................................................................................... 19-1
PIDA (PID Control) .................................................................................................................................... 19-3
PIDD (PID with Derivative Decay)............................................................................................................. 19-26
PID Monitor ............................................................................................................................................ 19-36
Application Example ................................................................................................................................ 19-42

CHAPTER 20: Dual / Teaching Timer Instructions

DTML (1-s Dual Timer) .............................................................................................................................. 20-1
DTIM (100-ms Dual Timer) ........................................................................................................................ 20-1
DTMH (10-ms Dual Timer) ......................................................................................................................... 20-1
DTMS (1-ms Dual Timer) ........................................................................................................................... 20-1
TTIM (Teaching Timer) .............................................................................................................................. 20-3

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 Preface-8

TABLE OF CONTENTS

CHAPTER 21: Trigonometric Function Instructions

RAD (Degree to Radian) .............................................................................................................................21-1
DEG (Radian to Degree) .............................................................................................................................21-2
SIN (Sine) .................................................................................................................................................21-3
COS (Cosine) .............................................................................................................................................21-4
TAN (Tangent)...........................................................................................................................................21-5
ASIN (Arc Sine) .........................................................................................................................................21-6
ACOS (Arc Cosine) .....................................................................................................................................21-7
ATAN (Arc Tangent)...................................................................................................................................21-8

CHAPTER 22: Logarithm / Power Instructions

LOGE (Natural Logarithm) ..........................................................................................................................22-1
LOG10 (Common Logarithm) ......................................................................................................................22-2
EXP (Exponent) .........................................................................................................................................22-3
POW (Power).............................................................................................................................................22-4

CHAPTER 23: File Data Processing Instructions

FIFOF (FIFO Format)..................................................................................................................................23-1
FIEX (First-In Execute) ...............................................................................................................................23-3
FOEX (First-Out Execute)............................................................................................................................23-3
NDSRC (N Data Search) .............................................................................................................................23-5

CHAPTER 24: Clock Instructions

TADD (Time Addition) ................................................................................................................................24-1
TSUB (Time Subtraction) ............................................................................................................................24-5
HTOS (HMS to Sec)....................................................................................................................................24-9
STOH (S to HMS) .....................................................................................................................................24-10
HOUR (Hour Meter) .................................................................................................................................24-11

CHAPTER 25: Data Log Instructions

DLOG (Data Log) .......................................................................................................................................25-1
TRACE (Data Trace) ...................................................................................................................................25-7

CHAPTER 26: Script

SCRPT (Script)...........................................................................................................................................26-1
Script Function Overview ............................................................................................................................26-3
Script Programming and Management .........................................................................................................26-5
Programming Scripts ................................................................................................................................26-12
Script Programming Examples...................................................................................................................26-19
Important Notes ......................................................................................................................................26-42
About the Priority of the Operator .............................................................................................................26-42

CHAPTER 27: Flow Calculation Instructions

SCALE (Convert Analog Input) ....................................................................................................................27-1
FLWA (Analog Flow Totalizer) .....................................................................................................................27-9
FLWP (Pulse Flow Totalizer)......................................................................................................................27-18

CHAPTER 28: User-defined Macro Instruction

UMACRO (User-defined Macro) ...................................................................................................................28-1

APPENDIX
Execution Times for Instructions .................................................................................................................. A-1
Breakdown of END Processing Time ............................................................................................................. A-5
Differences between User-defined Macros and Subroutines ............................................................................ A-5
Instruction Bytes......................................................................................................................................... A-6
User Program Execution Error ...................................................................................................................... A-9

INDEX

Preface-9 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

1: OPERATION BASICS
Introduction
WindLDR (version 8.0.0 or later) is required for FC6A Series MicroSmart programming and maintenance. For details on how to
check the version, see "Checking the WindLDR Version Number" on page 1-13.
This chapter describes basic procedures for operating WindLDR, programming and maintenance software for the FC6A Series
MicroSmart.

Start WindLDR
■ Windows 8
Click WindLDR in the tiles on the Start screen.

■ Windows 7, Windows Vista

Click Start and then Programs > Automation Organizer V2 > WindLDR > WindLDR.

■ Windows XP
From the Start menu of Windows, select Programs > Automation Organizer V2 > WindLDR > WindLDR.
WindLDR starts and a blank ladder editing screen appears with menus and tool bars shown on top of the screen.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 1-1

1: OPERATION BASICS

PLC Selection
Before programming a user program on WindLDR, select a PLC type.

1. Select Configuration from the WindLDR menu bar, then select PLC Type.
The PLC Selection dialog box appears.

2. Select a PLC type in the selection box and the programming language to use.

3. Click OK.

In WindLDR, the FC6A Series MicroSmart is categorized by the number of

inputs and outputs and the PLC type names are displayed as follows.

PLC Selection Option Type No.

FC6A-C16R1AE
FC6A-C16R1CE
FC6A-C16X1XE
FC6A-C16P1CE
FC6A-C16K1CE
FC6A-C24R1AE
FC6A-C24R1CE
FC6A-C24X1XE
FC6A-C24P1CE
FC6A-C24K1CE
FC6A-C40R1AE
FC6A-C40R1CE
FC6A-C40P1CE
FC6A-C40X1XE FC6A-C40K1CE
FC6A-C40R1DE
FC6A-C40P1DE
FC6A-C40K1DE
FC6A-C40R1AEJ
FC6A-C40R1CEJ
FC6A-C40P1CEJ
Select the PLC type from the list and click Use as FC6A-C40X1XEJ FC6A-C40K1CEJ
Default to set the selected PLC type as the default FC6A-C40R1DEJ
type when WindLDR starts. FC6A-C40P1DEJ
FC6A-C40K1DEJ

PLC selection is now complete. Next, create a ladder program.

1-2 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 1: OPERATION BASICS

Create Program
Create Ladder Program
This section describes the operating procedure to create a ladder program in WindLDR.
Note: For details about devices, see "Devices" on page 2-1.

Sample User Program

Create a simple program using WindLDR. The sample program performs the following operation:
When only input I0 is turned on, output Q0 is turned on.
When only input I1 is turned on, output Q1 is turned on.
When both inputs I0 and I1 are turned on, output Q2 flashes in 1-s increments.

Rung No. Input I0 Input I1 Output Operation

1 ON OFF Output Q0 is turned ON.
2 OFF ON Output Q1 is turned ON.
3 ON ON Output Q2 flashes in 1-s increments.

Note: One collection of a group of instructions that control output or advanced instructions is called a rung. WindLDR manages programs in rung
units. Function descriptions can be configured as rung comments for individual rungs.

Start WindLDR
From the Start menu of Windows, select Programs > Automation Organizer V2 > WindLDR > WindLDR.
WindLDR starts and a blank ladder editing screen appears with menus and tool bars shown on top of the screen.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 1-3

1: OPERATION BASICS

Edit User Program Rung by Rung

Start the user program with the LOD instruction by inserting a NO contact of input I0.

1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Home > Basic > A (Normally Open).

2. Move the mouse pointer to the first column of the first line where you want to insert a NO contact, and click the left mouse
button.

3. Double-click Normally Open.

The A (Normally Open) dialog box is displayed.

1-4 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 1: OPERATION BASICS

4. Enter I0 in the Tag Name field, and click OK.

Note:
• To enter an NO contact from the right-click menu, right-click at the location to insert the NO contact, and on the right-click menu, click Basic
Instructions (B), then A (Normally Open).
• To enter an NO contact from the keyboard, press (A) to display the Coil Selection dialog box. Select A (Normally Open), and then
press (Enter).

A NO contact of input I0 is programmed in the first column of the first ladder line.
Next, program the ANDN instruction by inserting a NC contact of input I1.

5. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Home > Basic > B (Normally Closed).

6. Move the mouse pointer to the second column of the first ladder line where you want to insert a NC contact, and click the left
mouse button.

7. Double-click Normally Closed.

The B (Normally Closed) dialog box is displayed.

8. Enter I1 in the Tag Name field, and click OK.

An NC contact of input I1 is programmed in the second column of the first ladder line.
At the end of the first ladder line, program the OUT instruction by inserting a NO coil of output Q0.

9. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Home > Basic > OUT (Output).

10. Move the mouse pointer to the third column of the first ladder line where you want to insert an output coil, and click the left
mouse button.

Note: Another method to insert an instruction (either basic or advanced) is to type the instruction symbol, OUT, where you want to insert the
instruction.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 1-5

1: OPERATION BASICS

11. Double-click Output.

The Out (Output) dialog box is displayed.

12. Enter Q0 in the Tag Name field, and click OK.

A NO output coil of output Q0 is programmed in the right-most column of the first ladder line. This completes programming for
rung 1.

Continue programming for rungs 2 and 3 by repeating similar procedures.

A new rung is inserted by pressing the Enter key while the cursor is on the preceding rung. A new rung can also be inserted
by selecting Home > Append > Append a Rung.
When completed, the ladder program looks like below.

To insert a new ladder line

without creating a new rung,
press the down arrow key when
the cursor is on the last line or
press the right arrow key when
the cursor is at the right-most
column of the last line.

1-6 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 1: OPERATION BASICS

Convert Program
The program can be checked whether it contains any user program syntax error.
From the menu bar, select Home > Convert (Program group).
When the instruction/FB symbols are connected correctly, the program conversion is completed successfully. If any error is found,
the errors are listed on the Info Window. Then, make corrections as necessary.

Info Window

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 1-7

1: OPERATION BASICS

Save Project
This section describes the operating procedure to save the created ladder program as a project file.

1. Save the current project with a new name.

Click (application) button > Save As > WindLDR Project.

2. Enter the file name in File name, specify the folder to save to, and click Save.

This completes the procedure to save a project to a file.

Note: The saved file is called a project file. The extension is ".pjw".

1-8 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 1: OPERATION BASICS

Simulate Operation
This section describes the operating procedure to check the operation of the user program before transferring it to the FC6A Series
MicroSmart.
From the WindLDR menu bar, select Online > Simulation. The Simulation screen appears.

Select and right-click the input contact you want to change, and on the right-click menu, click Set or Reset.
To quit simulation, from the WindLDR menu bar, select Online > Simulation.
Notes:
• You can also change the status of an input contact by double-clicking it.
• To quit simulation, from the WindLDR menu bar, once more select Online > Simulation > Simulation.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 1-9

1: OPERATION BASICS

Download Program
While WindLDR is running on a PLC, you can download the user program to the FC6A Series MicroSmart.
User programs can be downloaded to the FC6A Series MicroSmart from WindLDR using USB or Ethernet.
This section describes the operating procedure from configuring communication settings to downloading the user program using a
USB connection as an example.

FC6A Series MicroSmart

Windows Computer

USB Cable
USB Port HG9Z-XCM42 USB Maintenance Cable

Type A Plug Mini-B Plug

USB Port
(USB 2.0 Mini-B Connector)

Notes:
• In order for WindLDR to communicate with the FC6A Series MicroSmart via USB, a dedicated USB driver must be installed on the computer.
See Appendix "USB Driver Installation Procedure" in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s Manual".
• A user program is a combination of a ladder program and the setting details (Function Area Settings).

Ladder Program Details programmed with a ladder diagram

User Program
Details of the FC6A Series MicroSmart settings
Function Area Settings The majority of these items are those set on the Configuration tab.

1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Online > Set Up.
The Communication Settings dialog box is displayed.

2. Click the USB tab and then click OK.

The communication method is now set to USB. Next, download a user program.

1-10 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 1: OPERATION BASICS

3. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Online > Download. The Download dialog box appears, then click OK. The user
program is downloaded to the FC6A Series MicroSmart.

Note: The Download dialog box can also be opened by

selecting Home > Download.

Note: When downloading a user program, all values and

selections in the Function Area Settings are also
downloaded to the FC6A Series MicroSmart. For details on
function settings, see Chapter 5 "Functions and Settings" in
the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s Manual".

When the following message appears, the download has completed successfully. Click OK.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 1-11

1: OPERATION BASICS

Monitor Operation
Another powerful function of WindLDR is to monitor the PLC operation on the computer. The input and output statuses of the
sample program can be monitored in the ladder diagram.
From the WindLDR menu bar, select Online > Monitor > Monitor.
When both inputs I0 and I1 are on, the ladder diagram on the monitor screen looks as follows:

Rung 1:
When both inputs I0 and I1 are on,
output Q0 is turned off.
Rung 2:
When both inputs I0 and I1 are on,
output Q1 is turned off.
Rung 3:
When both input I0 and I1 are on,
internal relay M10 is turned on.
M8121 is the 1-s clock special
internal relay.
While M10 is on, output Q2 flashes
in 1-s increments.

Exit WindLDR
This section describes the operating procedure to exit WindLDR.
When you have completed monitoring, you can exit WindLDR either directly from the monitor screen or from the editing screen. In
both cases, from the WindLDR application button, click Exit WindLDR.

1-12 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 1: OPERATION BASICS

Checking the WindLDR Version Number

This section describes how to check the WindLDR version.

1. Click (application) button > WindLDR Options.

The WindLDR Options dialog box appears.

2. Click the Resources tab, and then click About.

The About WindLDR dialog box appears.

You can check the WindLDR version. When finished, click OK.

Note: When using the FC6A Series MicroSmart, use version 8.0.0 or later of WindLDR.
If you are using a version of WindLDR that does not meet this condition, click Check for Updates on the Resources tab to obtain the latest
version of WindLDR.

This concludes the procedure for checking the WindLDR version.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 1-13

1: OPERATION BASICS

Ladder Program Operation

The FC6A Series MicroSmart performs the following operations to process ladder programs.

The ON/OFF status of the input terminal

(external input) is applied to the input
The input device values are applied to the
circuit. The input refresh loads the external
ladder program.
input status into the input devices (I) by
Input Device way of the input circuit.
I0: ON A delay occurs until the ON/OFF status of Input Terminals
I1: OFF the input circuit is applied to the input
devices (I). The delay time is equal to filter
I2: ON 0: ON
time + 1 scan time.

Input Circuit
1: OFF
2: ON
Input Refresh

Repeat operations
One sequence of operations is set as one Processing other than the ladder
scan, and the time required is set as the processing is called the END
scan time. processing.

Other Processing Output Terminals

Q0: ON Ladder Processing 0: ON

Output Circuit
Q1: OFF 1: OFF
Q2: ON 2: ON
Output Refresh

The output refresh applies the status of the

output devices (Q) to the output circuit, and
Output Device then the ON/OFF status of the output
The output devices are updated terminals (external input) is updated.
according to the ladder program. A delay occurs until the values of the output
devices (Q) are applied to the output circuit.
The delay time is at maximum 1 scan time.

Notes:
• The delay time of the hardware is added to the actual input and output delay times.
For details on the hardware input/output delay times, see Chapter 2 "Product Specifications" in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type
User’s Manual".
• The filter time differs depending on the input used.
• When the input is a CPU module input (I0 to I27)
See the input filter time configured in the WindLDR Function Area Settings. The initial value is 3 ms.
• When the input is an expansion input (I30 or greater)
There is no filter time.

1-14 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 1: OPERATION BASICS

Start/Stop Operation
This section describes how to run and stop the FC6A Series MicroSmart.

Make sure of safety before starting and stopping the FC6A Series MicroSmart. Incorrect operation of the FC6A Series
Caution
MicroSmart may cause machine damage or accidents.

Start/Stop Schematic
You can start and stop FC6A Series MicroSmart operations by using WindLDR operations, FC6A Series MicroSmart operations,
function switch operations, menu operations using an HMI module, by turning the FC6A Series MicroSmart on or off, or by using
the stop/reset input function by way of external input.
• For operations using WindLDR, see "Start/Stop Operation Using WindLDR" on page 1-15.
• For operations using the FC6A Series MicroSmart power supply, see "Start/Stop Operation Using the Power Supply" on page
1-16.
• For operations using the function switch, see Chapter 5 "Function Switch Configuration" in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-
One Type User’s Manual".
• For operations using an HMI module, see Chapter 7 "HMI Function" in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s
Manual".
• For the stop input settings, see Chapter 5 "Stop Input" in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s Manual".
• For the reset input settings, see Chapter 5 "Reset Input" in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s Manual".

The switch from start to stop is performed during the END processing of the user program, and the following functions are also
stopped when the user program is stopped. For details on END processing, see the "Breakdown of END Processing Time" on page
A-5.
High-speed counter/frequency measurement/user interrupt/catch input/timer interrupt/user communication/pulse output
• You can use M8025 (Maintain Outputs While Stopped) to select whether to maintain or clear the outputs while the CPU is
stopped.
For details on M8025 (Maintain Outputs While Stopped), see "M8025: Maintain Outputs While Stopped" on page 2-8.
• The current value of the timer instruction is reset.
For details on timer instructions, see "TML (1-s Timer)" on page 4-7".
Also, when you switch from stop to start, the device status is cleared or kept depending on Memory Backup in the Function
Area Settings. For details, see Chapter 5 "Memory Backup" in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s Manual".

Start/Stop Operation Using WindLDR

The FC6A Series MicroSmart can be started and stopped using WindLDR run on a Windows computer connected to the FC6A
Series MicroSmart. When the Start button is pressed in the menu bar shown below, start control special internal relay M8000 is
turned on to start the FC6A Series MicroSmart. When the Stop button is pressed, M8000 is turned off to stop the FC6A Series
MicroSmart.

1. Connect the computer to the FC6A Series MicroSmart, start WindLDR, and power up the FC6A Series MicroSmart.

2. Check that a stop input is not designated using Configuration > Run/Stop Control > Stop and Reset Inputs. See
Chapter 5 "Stop Input and Reset Input" in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s Manual".

Note: When a stop input is designated, the FC6A Series MicroSmart cannot be started or stopped by turning start control special internal relay
M8000 on or off.

3. Select Online from the WindLDR menu bar.

The Online tab appears.

4. Click the Start button to start operation, then the start control special internal relay M8000 is turned on.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 1-15

1: OPERATION BASICS

5. Click the Stop button to stop operation, then the start control special internal relay M8000 is turned off.
The PLC operation can also be started and stopped while WindLDR is in the monitor mode. Select Online > Monitor >
Monitor and click the Start or Stop button.

Note: Special internal relay M8000 is a keep type internal relay and stores the status when power is turned off. M8000 retains its previous status
when power is turned on again. However, when the backup battery is dead, M8000 loses the stored status, and can be turned on or off as
programmed when the FC6A Series MicroSmart is powered up. The selection is made in Configuration > Run/Stop Control > Run/Stop
Selection at Memory Backup Error. See Chapter 5 "Run/Stop Selection at Keep Data Error" in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type
User’s Manual".
The backup duration is approximately 30 days (typical) at 25°C after the backup battery is fully charged.
Start/Stop Operation Using the Power Supply
The FC6A Series MicroSmart can be started and stopped by turning power on and off.

1. Power up the FC6A Series MicroSmart to start operation.

2. Turn power on and off to start and stop operation.

1-16 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

2: DEVICES
This chapter provides detailed descriptions of the allocations of devices such as inputs, outputs, internal relays, registers, timers,
and counters that are used in the basic and advanced instructions, as well as details about the allocations of special internal relays
and special data registers.
Please use this chapter as a reference for the devices.
Note: The entry and operation of FC6A Series MicroSmart user programs requires specialist knowledge.
Take the time to develop a thorough understanding of the contents and programs in this manual before using the FC6A Series MicroSmart.

Device Addresses

Range (Points)
Device Symbol Unit
16-I/O Type 24-I/O Type 40-I/O Type
*1 I0 - I10 I0 - I15 I0 - I27
Inputs I Bit
(9 points) (14 points) (24 points)
I30 - I187 I30 - I307
*1 (128 points) (224 points)
Expansion Input Relays I Bit
I190 - I507*2 I310 - I627*3
(256 points) (256 points)
Q0 - Q6 Q0 - Q11 Q0 - Q17
Output*1 Q Bit
(7 points) (10 points) (16 points)
Q30 - Q187 Q30 - Q307
*1*3 (128 points) (224 points)
Expansion Outputs Q Bit
Q190 - Q507*2 Q310 - Q627*3
(256 points) (256 points)
M0 - M7997
*1 (6,400 points)
Internal Relay M Bit
M10000 - M17497
(6,000 points)
M8000 - M8317
Special Internal Relay*1 M Bit
(256 points)
R0 - R255
Shift Register R Bit
(256 points)
T0 - T1023
Timer T Bit/Word
(1,024 points)
C0 - C511
Counter C Bit/Word
(512 points)
D0000 - D7999
(8,000 points)
Data Register D Bit/Word
D10000 to D55999
(46,000 points)
D8000 - D8499
Special Data Register D Bit/Word
(500 points)

*1 The least significant digit of the device address is an octal number (0 to 7).
*2 I190 to I507 and Q190 to Q507 are devices that can only be used when an expansion module (expansion interface side) is connected using the
expansion interface module.
*3 I310 to I627 and Q310 to Q627 are devices that can only be used when an expansion module (expansion interface side) is connected using the
expansion interface module.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 2-1

2: DEVICES

■ Inputs (I), Expansion Inputs (I)

Devices that input on/off information from external devices to the FC6A Series MicroSmart.

■ Outputs (Q), Expansion Outputs (Q)

Devices that output on/off information from the FC6A Series MicroSmart to external devices.

■ Internal Relays (M)

Bit devices used internally on the FC6A Series MicroSmart.

■ Special Internal Relays (M)

Bit devices used internally on the FC6A Series MicroSmart. Special functions are assigned to each bit.

■ Shift Registers (R)

Bit devices that are used with the SFR instruction and the SFRN instruction. The bit sequence of the data is shifted according to
pulse input.

■ Timer (T)
Timers used internally in the FC6A Series MicroSmart. There are three devices: Timer bits (symbol: T, unit: bit), timer preset
values (symbol: TP, unit: word), and timer current values (symbol: TC, unit: word).
These can be used as an on-delay timer or an off-delay timer. For details on timers (T), see "Using Timer or Counter as Source
Device" on page 3-6.

■ Counters (C)
Counters used internally in the FC6A Series MicroSmart. There are three devices: Counter bits (symbol: C, unit: bit), counter
preset values (symbol: CP, unit: word), and counter current values (symbol: CC, unit: word). These can be used as an adding
counter or a reversible counter. For details on counters (C), see "Using Timer or Counter as Source Device" on page 3-6.

■ Data Registers (D)

Word devices that are used for writing numerical data internally in the FC6A Series MicroSmart. These can also be used as bit
devices.

■ Special Data Registers (D)

Word devices that are used for writing numerical data internally in the FC6A Series MicroSmart. Special functions are assigned to
each data register. These can also be used as bit devices.
Notes:
• Although the device symbol for internal relays (M0000 to M7997, M10000 to M17497) and special internal relays (M8000 to M8317) is the
same ("M"), the device characteristics are different. Special functions are assigned to each bit of the special internal relays.

• Although the device symbol for the data registers (D0000 to D7999, D10000 to D55999) and special data registers (D8000 to D8499) is the
same ("D"), the device characteristics are different. Special functions are assigned to each special data register.

2-2 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 2: DEVICES

Special Internal Relay

Special Internal Relay Device Addresses

Do not write to data in the area marked as reserved in the special internal relays list. Otherwise the system may not operate
Warning
correctly.

Note: R/W is an abbreviation for read/write.

The notation for the R/W field is as follows.
R/W: The device can be both read from and written to
R: Read-only
W: Write-only

Device When Power

Description R/W
Address Stopped OFF
M8000 Start Control Maintained Maintained R/W
M8001 1-s Clock Reset Cleared Cleared R/W
M8002 All Outputs OFF Cleared Cleared R/W
M8003 Carry (Cy) or Borrow (Bw) Cleared Cleared R/W
M8004 User Program Execution Error Cleared Cleared R/W
M8005 Communication Error Maintained Cleared R/W
M8006 Communication Prohibited Flag (When Data Link Master) Maintained Maintained R/W
Initialization Flag (When Data Link Master)/Stop Communication Flag (When
M8007 Cleared Cleared R/W
Data Link Slave)
M8010 Status LED Operation Operating Cleared R/W
M8011
— Reserved — — — —
M8012
M8013 Calendar/Clock Data Write/Adjust Error Flag Operating Cleared R/W
M8014 Calendar/Clock Data Read Error Flag Operating Cleared R/W
M8015 — Reserved — — — —
M8016 Calendar Data Write Flag Operating Cleared R/W
M8017 Clock Data Write Flag Operating Cleared R/W
M8020 Calendar/Clock Data Write Flag Operating Cleared R/W
M8021 Clock Data Adjust Flag Operating Cleared R/W
M8022 User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 1) Cleared Cleared R/W
M8023 User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 2) Cleared Cleared R/W
M8024 BMOV/WSFT Executing Flag Maintained Maintained R/W
M8025 Maintain Outputs While Stopped Maintained Cleared R/W
M8026 User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 3) Cleared Cleared R/W
M8027 Count Direction Flag Maintained Cleared R/W
M8030 Comparison Output Reset Cleared Cleared R/W
High-speed Counter (Group 1/I0)
M8031 Gate Input Maintained Cleared R/W
M8032 Reset Input Maintained Cleared R/W
M8033 — Reserved — — — —
M8034 Comparison Output Reset Cleared Cleared R/W
M8035 High-speed Counter (Group 3/I3) Gate Input Maintained Cleared R/W
M8036 Reset Input Maintained Cleared R/W
M8037 — Reserved — — — —
M8040 Comparison Output Reset Cleared Cleared R/W
M8041 High-speed Counter (Group 4/I4) Gate Input Maintained Cleared R/W
M8042 Reset Input Maintained Cleared R/W
M8043 Count Direction Flag Cleared Cleared R/W
M8044 Comparison Output Reset Maintained Cleared R/W
High-speed Counter (Group 5/I6)
M8045 Gate Input Maintained Cleared R/W
M8046 Reset Input Maintained Cleared R/W
M8047
— Reserved — — — —
M8050

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 2-3

2: DEVICES

Device When Power

Description R/W
Address Stopped OFF
M8051 Comparison Output Reset Cleared Cleared R/W
M8052 Gate Input Maintained Cleared R/W
M8053 High-speed Counter (Group 2/I1) Reset Input Maintained Cleared R/W
M8054 Comparison ON Status Maintained Cleared R
M8055 Overflow Maintained Cleared R
M8056 — Reserved — — — —
M8057 Comparison Output Reset Cleared Cleared R/W
M8060 Gate Input Maintained Cleared R/W
M8061 High-speed Counter (Group 6/I7) Reset Input Maintained Cleared R/W
M8062 Comparison ON Status Maintained Cleared R
M8063 Overflow Maintained Cleared R
M8064 to
— Reserved — — — —
M8067
M8070 SD Memory Card Mount Status Maintained Cleared R
M8071 Accessing SD Memory Card Maintained Cleared R
M8072 Unmount SD Memory Card Operating Cleared R/W
M8073 Function Switch Status Operating Cleared R
M8074 Battery Voltage Measurement Flag Operating Cleared R/W
M8075 to
— Reserved — — — —
M8077
M8080 Data Link Slave 1 Communication Completed Relay (When Data Link Master) Operating Cleared R
M8081 Data Link Slave 2 Communication Completed Relay Operating Cleared R
M8082 Data Link Slave 3 Communication Completed Relay Operating Cleared R
M8083 Data Link Slave 4 Communication Completed Relay Operating Cleared R
M8084 Data Link Slave 5 Communication Completed Relay Operating Cleared R
M8085 Data Link Slave 6 Communication Completed Relay Operating Cleared R
M8086 Data Link Slave 7 Communication Completed Relay Operating Cleared R
M8087 Data Link Slave 8 Communication Completed Relay Operating Cleared R
M8090 Data Link Slave 9 Communication Completed Relay Operating Cleared R
M8091 Data Link Slave 10 Communication Completed Relay Operating Cleared R
M8092 Data Link Slave 11 Communication Completed Relay Operating Cleared R
M8093 Data Link Slave 12 Communication Completed Relay Operating Cleared R
M8094 Data Link Slave 13 Communication Completed Relay Operating Cleared R
M8095 Data Link Slave 14 Communication Completed Relay Operating Cleared R
M8096 Data Link Slave 15 Communication Completed Relay Operating Cleared R
M8097 Data Link Slave 16 Communication Completed Relay Operating Cleared R
M8100 Data Link Slave 17 Communication Completed Relay Operating Cleared R
M8101 Data Link Slave 18 Communication Completed Relay Operating Cleared R
M8102 Data Link Slave 19 Communication Completed Relay Operating Cleared R
M8103 Data Link Slave 20 Communication Completed Relay Operating Cleared R
M8104 Data Link Slave 21 Communication Completed Relay Operating Cleared R
M8105 Data Link Slave 22 Communication Completed Relay Operating Cleared R
M8106 Data Link Slave 23 Communication Completed Relay Operating Cleared R
M8107 Data Link Slave 24 Communication Completed Relay Operating Cleared R
M8110 Data Link Slave 25 Communication Completed Relay Operating Cleared R
M8111 Data Link Slave 26 Communication Completed Relay Operating Cleared R
M8112 Data Link Slave 27 Communication Completed Relay Operating Cleared R
M8113 Data Link Slave 28 Communication Completed Relay Operating Cleared R
M8114 Data Link Slave 29 Communication Completed Relay Operating Cleared R
M8115 Data Link Slave 30 Communication Completed Relay Operating Cleared R
M8116 Data Link Slave 31 Communication Completed Relay Operating Cleared R
M8117 Data Link All Slaves Communication Completed Relay Operating Cleared R
M8120 Initialize Pulse Cleared Cleared R
M8121 1-s Clock Operating Cleared R
M8122 100-ms Clock Operating Cleared R

2-4 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 2: DEVICES

Device When Power

Description R/W
Address Stopped OFF
M8123 10-ms Clock Operating Cleared R
M8124 Timer/Counter Preset Value Changed Maintained Cleared R
M8125 In-operation Output Cleared Cleared R
M8126 1 Scan ON After Run-Time Download Completes Cleared Cleared R
M8127 — Reserved — — — —
M8130 Reset Status Maintained Cleared R
High-speed Counter (Group 1/I0)
M8131 Comparison ON Status Maintained Cleared R
M8132 — Reserved — — — —
M8133 High-speed Counter (Group 3/I3) Comparison ON Status Maintained Cleared R
M8134 High-speed Counter (Group 4/I4) Comparison ON Status Maintained Cleared R
M8135 Reset Status Maintained Cleared R
High-speed Counter (Group 5/I6)
M8136 Comparison ON Status Maintained Cleared R
M8137 Interrupt Input I0 Status (Group 1/I0) Cleared Cleared R
M8140 Interrupt Input I1 Status (Group 2/I1) Cleared Cleared R
M8141 Interrupt Input I3 Status (Group 3/I3) (ON: Allowed, OFF: Prohibited) Cleared Cleared R
M8142 Interrupt Input I4 Status (Group 4/I4) Cleared Cleared R
M8143 Interrupt Input I6 Status (Group 5/I6) Cleared Cleared R
M8144 Timer Interrupt Status Cleared Cleared R
M8145 to
— Reserved — — — —
M8147
M8150 Comparison Result 1 Maintained Cleared R
M8151 Comparison Result 2 Maintained Cleared R
M8152 Comparison Result 3 Maintained Cleared R
M8153 Group 1/I0 Maintained Cleared R
M8154 Group 2/I1 Maintained Cleared R
M8155 Group 3/I3 Maintained Cleared R
Catch Input ON/OFF Status
M8156 Group 4/I4 Maintained Cleared R
M8157 Group 5/I6 Maintained Cleared R
M8160 Group 6/I7 Maintained Cleared R
M8161 Overflow Maintained Cleared R
High-speed Counter (Group 1/I0)
M8162 Underflow Maintained Cleared R
M8163 Overflow Maintained Cleared R
High-speed Counter (Group 5/I6)
M8164 Underflow Maintained Cleared R
M8165 High-speed Counter (Group 3/I3) Overflow Maintained Cleared R
M8166 High-speed Counter (Group 4/I4) Overflow Maintained Cleared R
M8167 Interrupt Input I7 Status (Group 6/I7) (ON: Allowed, OFF: Prohibited) Maintained Cleared R
M8170
— Reserved — — — —
M8171
M8172 Group 1 Operating Cleared R
M8173 Transistor Source Output Overcurrent Group 2 Operating Cleared R
M8174 Detection Group 3 Operating Cleared R
M8175 Group 4 Operating Cleared R
M8176 to
— Reserved — — — —
M8183
M8184 Change HMI Module Network Settings Trigger Operating Cleared R/W
M8185 In Daylight Saving Time Period Operating Cleared R
M8186 Executing Auto Ping Operating Cleared R
M8187 Auto Ping Stop Flag Operating Cleared R/W
M8190 Change CPU Module Network Settings Trigger Operating Cleared R/W
M8191 SNTP Acquisition Flag Operating Cleared R/W

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 2-5

2: DEVICES

Device When Power

Description R/W
Address Stopped OFF
M8192 Interrupt Input I0 Edge Cleared Cleared R
M8193 Interrupt Input I3 Edge Cleared Cleared R
M8194 Interrupt Input I4 Edge On: Rising Edge Cleared Cleared R
M8195 Interrupt Input I6 Edge Off: Falling Edge Cleared Cleared R
M8196 Interrupt Input I7 Edge Cleared Cleared R
M8197 Interrupt Input I1 Edge Cleared Cleared R
M8200 Connection 1 Cleared Cleared R/W
M8201 Connection 2 Cleared Cleared R/W
M8202 Connection 3 Cleared Cleared R/W
M8203 User Communication Receive Connection 4 Cleared Cleared R/W
M8204 Instruction Cancel Flag Connection 5 Cleared Cleared R/W
M8205 Connection 6 Cleared Cleared R/W
M8206 Connection 7 Cleared Cleared R/W
M8207 Connection 8 Cleared Cleared R/W
M8210 — Reserved — — — —
M8211 Send E-mail Server Settings Initialization Operating Cleared R/W
M8212 Connection 1 Operating Cleared R
M8213 Connection 2 Operating Cleared R
M8214 Connection 3 Operating Cleared R
M8215 Connection Status Connection 4 Operating Cleared R
M8216 (ON: Connected, OFF: Not Connected) Connection 5 Operating Cleared R
M8217 Connection 6 Operating Cleared R
M8220 Connection 7 Operating Cleared R
M8221 Connection 8 Operating Cleared R
M8222 Connection 1 Operating Cleared R/W
M8223 Connection 2 Operating Cleared R/W
M8224 Connection 3 Operating Cleared R/W
M8225 Disconnect User Communication Connection 4 Operating Cleared R/W
M8226 Connection Connection 5 Operating Cleared R/W
M8227 Connection 6 Operating Cleared R/W
M8230 Connection 7 Operating Cleared R/W
M8231 Connection 8 Operating Cleared R/W
M8232 HMI Module Connection Information Reference Connection Status Operating Cleared R
M8233 to
— Reserved — — — —
M8247
M8250 Download from SD Memory Card Execution Flag Operating Cleared R/W
M8251 Upload to SD Memory Card Execution Flag Operating Cleared R/W
M8252 Executing SD Memory Card Download Operating Cleared R
M8253 Executing SD Memory Card Upload Operating Cleared R
M8254 SD Memory Card Download/Upload Execution Completed Output Operating Cleared R
M8255 SD Memory Card Download/Upload Execution Error Output Operating Cleared R
M8256
— Reserved — — — —
M8257
M8260 Write Recipe Execution Flag Operating Cleared R/W
M8261 Read Recipe Execution Flag Operating Cleared R/W
M8262 Executing Write Recipe Operating Cleared R/W
M8263 Executing Read Recipe Operating Cleared R/W
M8264 Recipe Execution Completed Output Operating Cleared R/W
M8265 Recipe Execution Error Output Operating Cleared R/W
M8266 to
— Reserved — — — —
M8297
M8300 J1939 Communication Permitted Flag Cleared Cleared R/W
M8301 J1939 Online Status Cleared Cleared R
M8302 J1939 Local Station Address Confirmation Status Cleared Cleared R
M8303 J1939 Communication Error Output Cleared Cleared R

2-6 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 2: DEVICES

Device When Power

Description R/W
Address Stopped OFF
M8304 J1939 Communication Bus Off Occurrence Output Cleared Cleared R
M8305 to
— Reserved — — — —
M8310
M8311 ESC+Key Input (Up) ESC+Key Input ( ) Cleared Cleared R
M8312 ESC+Key Input (Down) ESC+Key Input ( ) Cleared Cleared R
M8313 ESC+Key Input (Left) ESC+Key Input ( ) Cleared Cleared R
M8314 ESC+Key Input (Right) ESC+Key Input ( ) Cleared Cleared R
M8315 to
— Reserved — — — —
M8317

Supplementary Descriptions of the Special Internal Relays

■ M8000: Start Control
M8000 controls the run/stop status of the FC6A Series MicroSmart. The CPU is set to run when M8000 is turned on, and the CPU
is set to off when M8000 is turned off. See "Start/Stop Operation" on page 1-15. However, the function switch, stop input, and
reset input have precedence over start control. M8000 maintains its status when the CPU is powered down. When data to be
maintained during a power failure disappears after the CPU has been off for a period longer than the battery backup duration,
the CPU restarts operation as selected in Configuration > Run/Stop Control > Run/Stop Selection at Keep Data Error. For details,
see Chapter 5 "Run/Stop Selection at Keep Data Error" in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s Manual".

■ M8001: 1-s Clock Reset

While M8001 is on, M8121 (1-s clock) is always off.

■ M8002: All Outputs OFF

While M8002 is on, all outputs are off. The self-holding circuit created in the ladder program is also off.

■ M8003: Carry/Borrow
When a carry (Cy) or borrow (Bw) results from executing an addition or subtraction instruction, M8003 is turned on. For details,
see "Carry and Borrow" on page 3-10".

■ M8004: User Program Execution Error

When an error occurs while executing a user program, M8004 is turned on. For details on user program execution errors, see
Chapter 13 "User Program Execution Error" in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s Manual".

■ M8005: Communication Error

When an error occurs during data link communication, M8005 is turned on. The state is retained even when the error is cleared.

■ M8006: Communication Prohibited Flag (When Data Link Master)

During data link communication, communication is stopped while M8006 is on.

■ M8007: Initialization Flag (When Data Link Master)/Stop Communication Flag (When Data Link Slave)

When data link master: When this flag is turned on in the run status, the data link is initialized just once to check the connection
status. Use this when the slave configured in the data link is powered at a timing slower than the
master.
When data link slave : This flag is turned on when communication from the master is interrupted for 10 s or longer. This flag is
turned off when communication can be normally received.

■ M8010: Status LED Operation

While M8010 is on, the status LED [STAT] is turned on. While off, the status LED [STAT] is turned off.

■ M8013: Calendar/Clock Data Write/Adjust Error Flag

When the clock writing or clock adjustment processing could not be executed normally, M8013 is turned on. It is turned off
when the processing completes normally.

■ M8014: Calendar/Clock Data Read Error Flag

When an error occurs while calendar/clock data is read from the internal clock to the special data registers (D8008 to D8021),
M8014 is turned on. It is turned off when reading completes normally.

■ M8016: Calendar Data Write Flag

When M8016 is turned on after writing data to the calendar data (write-only) special data registers (D8015 to D8018), the
calendar data (year, month, day, day of the week) is written to the internal clock.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 2-7

2: DEVICES

■ M8017: Clock Data Write Flag

When M8017 is turned on after writing data to the clock data (write-only) special data registers (D8019 to D8021), the clock
data (hours, minutes, seconds) is written to the internal clock.

■ M8020: Calendar/Clock Data Write Flag

When M8020 is turned on after writing data to the calendar/clock data (write-only) special data registers (D8015 to D8021), the
calendar data (year, month, day, day of the week) and the clock data (hours, minutes, seconds) is written to the internal clock.

■ M8021: Clock Data Adjust Flag

When M8021 is turned on, the clock is adjusted with respect to seconds.
• When M8021 is turned on, if the seconds are between 0 and 29, the seconds will be set to 0 and the minutes remain the
same.
• When M8021 is turned on, if the seconds are between 30 and 59, the seconds will be set to 0 and 1 will be added to the
minutes.

■ M8022: User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 1)

While M8022 is on, user communication (receive instruction) executing on Port 1 is canceled.

■ M8023: User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 2)

While M8023 is on, user communication (receive instruction) executing on Port 2 is canceled.

■ M8024: BMOV/WSFT Executing Flag

While the WSFT (word shift) instruction or the BMOV (block move) instruction is executing, M8024 is turned on. When
completed, M8024 is turned off.

■ M8025: Maintain Outputs While Stopped

When the FC6A Series MicroSmart is stopped while running with M8025 turned on, the outputs maintain their runtime status.
When set to run again, M8025 is automatically turned off.

■ M8026: User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag (Port 3)

While M8026 is on, user communication (receive instruction) executing on Port 3 is canceled.

■ M8027 to M8032, M8034 to M8036, M8040 to M8046, M8051 to M8055, M8057 to M8063, M8130, M8131,
M8133 to M8136, M8161 to M8167: Special Internal Relays for High-speed Counter
Special internal relays used for the high-speed counter. For details, see Chapter 5 "High-Speed Counter" in the "FC6A Series
MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s Manual".
M8027 to M8032, M8130, M8131, M8161, M8162 = High-speed counter (group 1/I0)
M8034 to M8036, M8133, M8165 = High-speed counter (group 3/I3)
M8040 to M8042, M8134, M8166 = High-speed counter (group 4/I4)
M8043 to M8046, M8135, M8136, M8163, M8164 = High-speed counter (group 5/I6)
M8051 to M8055 = High-speed counter (group 2/I1)
M8057 to M8063 = High-speed counter (group 6/I7)

■ M8070: SD Memory Card Mount Status

When an SD memory card is inserted in the FC6A Series MicroSmart and it has been recognized and can be used, M8070 is
turned on. M8070 is turned off if no SD memory card has been inserted or if it is not recognized.

■ M8071: Accessing SD Memory Card

M8071 is turned on while the SD memory card is being accessed. It is turned off when access has finished.

■ M8072: Unmount SD Memory Card

When M8072 is turned on, access to the SD memory card is stopped. To make an SD memory card accessible that has had
access to it stopped, insert the card once again.

■ M8073: Function Switch Status

This relay indicates the status of the function switch on the front of the CPU module.
M8073 is on when the function switch is 1. M8073 is off when the function switch is 0.

■ M8074: Battery Voltage Measurement Flag

This relay indicates the battery voltage measurement status of the backup battery.
When M8074 is turned on, the battery voltage starts being measured, and it is turned off when the measurement has finished.

■ M8080 to M8117: Data Link Communication Completed Relay

Special internal relays used for data link communication. For details, see Chapter 7 "Data Link Communication" in the "FC6A
Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type Communication Manual".

2-8 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 2: DEVICES

■ M8120: Initialize Pulse

When operation (RUN) starts, M8120 is turned on for a period of one scan. 1 scan time

M8120

Start

■ M8121: 1-s Clock

While M8001 is off, M8121 generates clock pulses in a 1 s cycle, with a duty 500 ms 500 ms
ratio of 1:1 (500 ms on and 500 ms off).
M8121
1s

■ M8122: 100-ms Clock

M8122 generates clock pulses in a 100 ms cycle, with a duty ratio of 1:1 50 ms 50 ms
(50 ms on and 50 ms off).
M8122

100 ms

■ M8123: 10-ms Clock

M8123 generates clock pulses in a 10 ms cycle, with a duty ratio of 1:1 5 ms 5 ms
(5 ms on and 5 ms off).
M8123

10 ms

■ M8124: Timer/Counter Preset Value Changed

When timer or counter preset values are changed, M8124 is turned on. When a user program is transferred or when the
changed data is cleared, M8124 is turned off.

■ M8125: In-operation Output

M8125 is on during the run status.

■ M8126: Scan ON After Run-Time Download Completes

When the user program is changed during the run status (run-time download), after the download completes, M8126 is turned
on for one scan only when the user program starts operation.

■ M8137 to M8143, M8167: Interrupt Input Status

These relays are turned on when the corresponding user interrupt is allowed. These relays are turned off when the user
interrupt is prohibited.
M8137 = Interrupt input I0 status
M8140 = Interrupt input I1 status
M8141 = Interrupt input I3 status
M8142 = Interrupt input I4 status
M8143 = Interrupt input I6 status
M8167 = Interrupt input I7 status

■ M8144: Timer Interrupt Status

When the timer interrupt is allowed, M8144 is turned on. When the timer interrupt is prohibited, M8144 is turned off.

■ M8150 to M8152: Comparison Result

M8150 to M8152 turn on according to the comparison results of the CMP= (Compare(=)) instruction and the ICMP>= (Interval
comparison) instruction.
For details, see "Special Internal Relays M8150, M8151, and M8152 in ICMP>=" on page 6-6.

■ M8153 to M8160: Catch Input ON/OFF Status

When the rising or falling input edge of the input contact specified as the catch input is detected during a scan, the input contact
status is captured. The detectable edges are once per scan.
M8153 = Group 1/I0 status
M8154 = Group 2/I1 status
M8155 = Group 3/I3 status
M8156 = Group 4/I4 status
M8157 = Group 5/I6 status
M8160 = Group 6/I7 status

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 2-9

2: DEVICES

■ M8172 to M8175: Transistor Source Output Overcurrent Detection

When overcurrent output occurs in a transistor protection source output on the CPU module, a special internal relay (M8172 to
M8175) is turned on. The following special internal relays have been allocated with four outputs set as one group. If overcurrent
output occurs in any of the special internal relays, it is turned on.
Even if the overcurrent output has been cleared, these special internal relays are not reset to off. To reset a special internal relay
to off, create programming to do so in the ladder program.
M8172 = Group 1 (Q0 to Q3) status
M8173 = Group 2 (Q4 to Q7) status
M8174 = Group 3 (Q10 to Q13) status
M8175 = Group 4 (Q14 to Q17) status

■ M8184: Change HMI Module Network Settings Trigger

When M8184 is turned on, the values written to D8437 to D8456 are set as the HMI module IP address.
The IP address is not set just by changing the values of D8437 to D8456. For details on changing the HMI module network
settings, see Chapter 3 "Network settings by HMI module special data registers" in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type
Communication Manual".

■ M8185: In Daylight Saving Time Period

When the daylight saving time function is enabled, M8185 is on during the daylight saving time period. When outside of the
daylight saving time period, M8185 is off.
When the daylight saving time function is disabled, M8185 is off.

■ M8186: Executing Auto Ping

M8186 is on when auto ping is operating. M8186 is off when auto ping is stopped. For details on auto ping, see Chapter 3 "Auto
Ping Function" in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type Communication Manual".

■ M8187: Auto Ping Stop Flag

While M8187 is on, auto ping stops. While M8187 is off, auto ping is executed. At that time, auto ping is executed from the
smallest remote host number specified in the remote host list, regardless of the previous end status.

■ M8190: Change CPU Module Network Settings Trigger

When M8190 is turned on, the values written to D8304 to D8323 are set as the CPU module IP address.
The IP address is not set just by changing the values of D8304 to D8323. For details on changing the CPU module network
settings, see Chapter 3 "Network settings by special data registers" in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type
Communication Manual".

■ M8191: SNTP Acquisition Flag

When M8191 is turned on, the time information is acquired from the SNTP server.

■ M8192 to M8197: Interrupt Input Edge

These relays turn on when an interrupt occurs with the rising edge of an interrupt input. They turn off when an interrupt occurs
with the falling edge of an interrupt input.
M8192 = Interrupt input I0 edge
M8193 = Interrupt input I3 edge
M8194 = Interrupt input I4 edge
M8195 = Interrupt input I6 edge
M8196 = Interrupt input I7 edge
M8197 = Interrupt input I1 edge

■ M8200 to M8207: User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag

When M8200 to M8207 are turned on, the user communication receive instruction being executed is stopped.
M8200 = User communication receive instruction being executed on client connection 1
M8201 = User communication receive instruction being executed on client connection 2
M8202 = User communication receive instruction being executed on client connection 3
M8203 = User communication receive instruction being executed on client connection 4
M8204 = User communication receive instruction being executed on client connection 5
M8205 = User communication receive instruction being executed on client connection 6
M8206 = User communication receive instruction being executed on client connection 7
M8207 = User communication receive instruction being executed on client connection 8

■ M8211: Send E-mail Server Settings Initialization

When M8211 is turned on, the send E-mail server settings are initialized.

2-10 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 2: DEVICES

■ M8212 to M8221: Connection Status

While connected to a network device via the maintenance communication server, user communication server/client, or Modbus
TCP server/client, the connection status is turned on. While not connected to a network device, the connection status is turned
off.
M8212 = Connection 1
M8213 = Connection 2
M8214 = Connection 3
M8215 = Connection 4
M8216 = Connection 5
M8217 = Connection 6
M8220 = Connection 7
M8221 = Connection 8

■ M8222 to M8231: Disconnect User Communication Connection

When connected to a remote host via user communication, the corresponding connection is disconnected when M8222 to
M8231 is turned on.
M8222 = Connection 1
M8223 = Connection 2
M8224 = Connection 3
M8225 = Connection 4
M8226 = Connection 5
M8227 = Connection 6
M8230 = Connection 7
M8231 = Connection 8
These relays are enabled only when a user communication client is used.

■ M8232: HMI Module Connection Information Reference Connection Status

M8232 is turned on when there is a connection with the connection number specified by D8429. M8232 is turned off when there
is no connection.

■ M8250: Download from SD Memory Card Execution Flag

When M8250 is turned on, a ZLD file is downloaded from the SD memory card. The file that will be downloaded is the ZLD file
specified in the autoexec.ini file.

■ M8251: Upload to SD Memory Card Execution Flag

When M8251 is turned on, a ZLD file is uploaded to the SD memory card.
A ZLD file is created with the file name specified in the autoexec.ini file.

■ M8252: Executing SD Memory Card Download

M8252 is turned on when starting execution of the download from the SD memory card, and when the download has completed,
it is turned off.

■ M8253: Executing SD Memory Card Upload

M8253 is turned on when starting execution of the upload to the SD memory card, and when the upload has completed, it is
turned off.

■ M8254: SD Memory Card Download/Upload Execution Completed Output

M8254 is turned off when starting execution of the download from the SD memory card or the upload to the SD memory card,
and when the download or upload has completed, it is turned on.

■ M8255: SD Memory Card Download/Upload Execution Error Output

M8255 is updated when execution of the download from the SD memory card or the upload to the SD memory card has
completed. M8255 is turned on when D8255 (Download/Upload Execution Status) is a value other than 0.

■ M8260: Write Recipe Execution Flag

When M8260 is turned on, write recipe is executed.

■ M8261: Read Recipe Execution Flag

When M8261 is turned on, read recipe is executed.

■ M8262: Executing Write Recipe

M8262 is turned on when the write recipe processing starts, and it is turned off when the processing has completed. M8262 also
is turned off when read recipe processing starts.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 2-11

2: DEVICES

■ M8263: Executing Read Recipe

M8263 is turned on when the read recipe processing starts, and it is turned off when the processing has completed. M8263 also
is turned off when write recipe processing starts.

■ M8264: Recipe Execution Completed Output

M8264 is turned off when starting to read or write a recipe, and it is turned on when reading or writing a recipe has completed.

■ M8265: Recipe Execution Error Output

M8265 is turned on when recipe execution has completed and D8264 (Recipe Execution Status) is a value other than 0. For
details on recipes, see Chapter 11 "Recipe Function" in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s Manual".

■ M8300 to M8304: J1939 Communication

Special data registers used in J1939 communication. For details, see Chapter 8 "J1939 Communication" in the "FC6A Series
MicroSmart All-in-One Type Communication Manual".

■ M8311 to M8314: Key Input Status

While the ESC button and direction buttons on the HMI module are simultaneously pressed, the corresponding special internal
relays are turned on. When the keys are not pressed, the relays are turned off.
M8311 = ESC key + Up ( ) key
M8312 = ESC key + Down ( ) key
M8313 = ESC key + Left ( ) key
M8314 = ESC key + Right ( ) key

2-12 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 2: DEVICES

Special Data Register

Special Data Register Device Addresses

Do not write to data in the area marked as reserved in the special data registers list. Otherwise the system may not operate
Warning
correctly.

Note: R/W is an abbreviation for read/write.

The notation for the R/W field is as follows.
R/W: The device can be both read from and written to
R: Read-only
W: Write-only

Device
Description Update Timing R/W
Address
D8000 Quantity of Inputs When I/O initialized R
D8001 Quantity of Outputs When I/O initialized R
D8002 CPU Module Type Information Power-up R
D8003
— Reserved — ― -
D8004
D8005 General Error Code When error occurred R/W
D8006 User Program Execution Error Code When error occurred R
D8007 — Reserved — ― -
D8008 Year Every 500 ms R
D8009 Month Every 500 ms R
D8010 Day Every 500 ms R
Calendar/Clock Current Data
D8011 Day of the Week Every 500 ms R
(Read only)
D8012 Hour Every 500 ms R
D8013 Minute Every 500 ms R
D8014 Second Every 500 ms R
D8015 Year ― W
D8016 Month ― W
D8017 Day ― W
Calendar/Clock New Data
D8018 Day of the Week ― W
(Write only)
D8019 Hour ― W
D8020 Minute ― W
D8021 Second ― W
D8022 Constant Scan Time Preset Value (1 to 1,000 ms) ― W
D8023 Scan Time Current Value (ms) Every scan R
Scan Time Data
D8024 Scan Time Maximum Value (ms) At occurrence R
D8025 Scan Time Minimum Value (ms) At occurrence R
D8026 Communication Mode Information (Port 1 to Port 3) Every scan R
D8027
— Reserved — ― -
D8028
D8029 System Software Version Power-up R
D8030 Communication Adapter Information Power-up R
D8031 Optional Cartridge Connection Information Power-up R
D8032 Interrupt Input Jump Destination Label No. (I1) ― R/W
D8033 Interrupt Input Jump Destination Label No. (I3) ― R/W
D8034 Interrupt Input Jump Destination Label No. (I4) ― R/W
D8035 Interrupt Input Jump Destination Label No. (I6) ― R/W
D8036 Timer Interrupt Jump Destination Label No. ― R/W
D8037 Number of Connected I/O Modules When I/O initialized R
D8038 to
— Reserved — ― ―
D8051
D8052 J1939 Communication Error Code Every scan R/W
D8053 to
— Reserved — ― ―
D8055
D8056 Battery Voltage ― R

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 2-13

2: DEVICES

Device
Description Update Timing R/W
Address
D8057 Analog Volume (AI0) Every scan R
D8058 Built-in Analog Input (AI1) Every scan R
D8059 Analog Input Status AI0 Every scan R
D8060 Analog Input Status AI1 Every scan R
D8061 to
— Reserved — ― ―
D8066
D8067 Backlight ON Time ― R/W
D8068 — Reserved — ― ―
Slave 1 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode)
D8069 When error occurred R
Slave Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Slave Mode)
D8070 Slave 2 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode) When error occurred R
D8071 Slave 3 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode) When error occurred R
D8072 Slave 4 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode) When error occurred R
D8073 Slave 5 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode) When error occurred R
D8074 Slave 6 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode) When error occurred R
D8075 Slave 7 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode) When error occurred R
D8076 Slave 8 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode) When error occurred R
D8077 Slave 9 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode) When error occurred R
D8078 Slave 10 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode) When error occurred R
D8079 Slave 11 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode) When error occurred R
D8080 Slave 12 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode) When error occurred R
D8081 Slave 13 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode) When error occurred R
D8082 Slave 14 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode) When error occurred R
D8083 Slave 15 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode) When error occurred R
D8084 Slave 16 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode) When error occurred R
D8085 Slave 17 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode) When error occurred R
D8086 Slave 18 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode) When error occurred R
D8087 Slave 19 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode) When error occurred R
D8088 Slave 20 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode) When error occurred R
D8089 Slave 21 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode) When error occurred R
D8090 Slave 22 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode) When error occurred R
D8091 Slave 23 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode) When error occurred R
D8092 Slave 24 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode) When error occurred R
D8093 Slave 25 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode) When error occurred R
D8094 Slave 26 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode) When error occurred R
D8095 Slave 27 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode) When error occurred R
D8096 Slave 28 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode) When error occurred R
D8097 Slave 29 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode) When error occurred R
D8098 Slave 30 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode) When error occurred R
D8099 Slave 31 Communication Status/Error (When Data Link Master Mode) When error occurred R
D8100 Slave Number (Port 1) ― R/W
D8101 — Reserved — ― ―
D8102 Slave Number (Port 2) ― R/W
D8103 Slave Number (Port 3) ― R/W
D8104 Control Signal Status (Port 1 to 3) Every scan R
When sending/
D8105 RS232C DSR Input Control Signal Option (Port 1 to 3) R
receiving data
When sending/
D8106 RS232C DTR Output Control Signal Option (Port 1 to 3) R
receiving data
D8107 to
— Reserved — ― ―
D8119
D8120 Type ID/Status ― R
HMI Module Information
D8121 System Software Version ― R
D8122 Type ID/Status ― R
Cartridge Slot 1 Information
D8123 System Software Version ― R

2-14 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 2: DEVICES

Device
Description Update Timing R/W
Address
D8124 Type ID/Status ― R
Cartridge Slot 2 Information
D8125 System Software Version ― R
D8126 Type ID/Status ― R
Cartridge Slot 3 Information
D8127 System Software Version ― R
D8128 to
— Reserved — ― ―
D8169
D8170 Analog Cartridge I/O AI2/AQ2 Every scan R
D8171 Analog Cartridge I/O AI3/AQ3 Every scan R
D8172 Analog Cartridge Status AI2/AQ2 Every scan R
D8173 Analog Cartridge Status AI3/AQ3 Every scan R
D8174 Analog Cartridge I/O AI4/AQ4 Every scan R
D8175 Analog Cartridge I/O AI5/AQ5 Every scan R
D8176 Analog Cartridge Status AI4/AQ4 Every scan R
D8177 Analog Cartridge Status AI5/AQ5 Every scan R
D8178 Analog Cartridge I/O AI6/AQ6 Every scan R
D8179 Analog Cartridge I/O AI7/AQ7 Every scan R
D8180 Analog Cartridge Status AI6/AQ6 Every scan R
D8181 Analog Cartridge Status AI7/AQ7 Every scan R
D8182 to
— Reserved — ― ―
D8191
D8192 High Word Current Value/Frequency Measurement (I1) Current Every scan R
D8193 Low Word Value Every scan R
High-speed
D8194 High Word ― R/W
Counter Preset Value
D8195 Low Word ― R/W
(Group 2/I1)
D8196 High Word ― R/W
Preset Value
D8197 Low Word ― R/W
D8198 High Word Current Value/Frequency Measurement (I7) Current Every scan R
D8199 Low Word Value Every scan R
High-speed
D8200 High Word ― R/W
Counter Preset Value
D8201 Low Word ― R/W
(Group 6/I7)
D8202 High Word ― R/W
Preset Value
D8203 Low Word ― R/W
D8204 to
— Reserved — ― ―
D8209
D8210 High Word Current Value/Frequency Measurement (I0) Current Every scan R
High-speed
D8211 Low Word Value Every scan R
Counter
D8212 High Word ― R/W
(Group 1/I0) Preset Value
D8213 Low Word ― R/W
D8214 Interrupt Input Jump Destination Label No. (I7) ― R/W
D8215 Interrupt Input Jump Destination Label No. (I0) ― R/W
D8216 High-speed High Word ― R/W
Counter Preset Value
D8217 (Group 1/I0) Low Word ― R/W
D8218 High Word Current Value/Frequency Measurement (I3) Current Every scan R
High-speed
D8219 Low Word Value Every scan R
Counter
D8220 High Word ― R/W
(Group 3/I3) Preset Value
D8221 Low Word ― R/W
D8222 High Word Current Value/Frequency Measurement (I4) Current Every scan R
High-speed
D8223 Low Word Value Every scan R
Counter
D8224 High Word ― R/W
(Group 4/I4) Preset Value
D8225 Low Word ― R/W
D8226 High Word Current Value/Frequency Measurement (I6) Current Every scan R
High-speed
D8227 Low Word Value Every scan R
Counter
D8228 High Word ― R/W
(Group 5/I6) Preset Value
D8229 Low Word ― R/W

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 2-15

2: DEVICES

Device
Description Update Timing R/W
Address
D8230
— Reserved — ― ―
D8231
D8232 High-speed High Word ― R/W
Counter Preset Value
D8233 (Group 5/I6) Low Word ― R/W

D8234 High-speed High Word ― R/W

Counter Preset Value
D8235 (Group 3/I3) Low Word ― R/W

D8236 High-speed High Word ― R/W

Counter Preset Value
D8237 (Group 4/I4) Low Word ― R/W
D8238 — Reserved — ― ―
D8239 Absolute Position Control Status Every scan R
D8240 Absolute Position High Word Every scan R
Absolute Position
D8241 Counter 1 Low Word Every scan R
D8242 Absolute Position High Word Every scan R
Absolute Position
D8243 Counter 2 Low Word Every scan R
D8244 Absolute Position High Word Every scan R
Absolute Position
D8245 Counter 3 Low Word Every scan R
D8246 Absolute Position High Word Every scan R
Absolute Position
D8247 Counter 4 Low Word Every scan R
D8248
— Reserved — ― ―
D8249
D8250 Read SD Memory Card Capacity Every scan R
D8251 Read SD Memory Card Free Capacity Every scan R
D8252
— Reserved — ― ―
D8253
When processing has
D8254 SD Memory Card Download/Upload Execution Information R
completed
When processing has
D8255 SD Memory Card Download/Upload Execution Status R
completed
D8256 to
— Reserved — ― ―
D8359
D8260 Recipe Block Number ― R/W
When recipe execution
D8261 Recipe Execution Block Number R
has completed
When recipe execution
D8262 Recipe Execution Channel No. R
has completed
When recipe execution
D8263 Recipe Execution Operation R
has completed
When recipe execution
D8264 Recipe Execution Status R
has completed
When recipe execution
D8265 Recipe Execution Error Information R
has completed
D8266 to
— Reserved — ― ―
D8277
D8278 Communication Mode Information Connection 1 to 4 ― R
D8279 (Client Connection) Connection 5 to 8 ― R
D8280 to
— Reserved — ― ―
D8283
D8284 Communication Mode Information HMI Connection 1 to 4 ― R
D8285 (HMI Connection) HMI Connection 5 to 8 ― R
D8286 to
— Reserved — ― ―
D8303

2-16 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 2: DEVICES

Device
Description Update Timing R/W
Address
D8304 ― W
D8305 ― W
CPU Module IP Address (Write-only)
D8306 ― W
D8307 ― W
D8308 ― W
D8309 ― W
CPU Module Subnet Mask (Write-only)
D8310 ― W
D8311 ― W
D8312 ― W
D8313 ― W
CPU Module Default Gateway (Write-only)
D8314 ― W
D8315 ― W
D8316 ― W
D8317 ― W
CPU Module Preferred DNS Server (Write-only)
D8318 ― W
D8319 ― W
D8320 ― W
D8321 ― W
CPU Module Alternate DNS Server (Write-only)
D8322 ― W
D8323 ― W
D8324 Every 1 s R
D8325 Every 1 s R
D8326 Every 1 s R
CPU Module MAC Address (Current Value Read-only)
D8327 Every 1 s R
D8328 Every 1 s R
D8329 Every 1 s R
D8330 Every 1 s R
D8331 Every 1 s R
CPU Module IP Address (Current Value Read-only)
D8332 Every 1 s R
D8333 Every 1 s R
D8334 Every 1 s R
D8335 Every 1 s R
CPU Module Subnet Mask (Current Value Read-only)
D8336 Every 1 s R
D8337 Every 1 s R
D8338 Every 1 s R
D8339 Every 1 s R
CPU Module Default Gateway (Current Value Read-only)
D8340 Every 1 s R
D8341 Every 1 s R
D8342 Every 1 s R
D8343 Every 1 s R
CPU Module Preferred DNS Server (Current Value Read-only)
D8344 Every 1 s R
D8345 Every 1 s R
D8346 Every 1 s R
D8347 Every 1 s R
CPU Module Alternate DNS Server (Current Value Read-only)
D8348 Every 1 s R
D8349 Every 1 s R
D8350 Every 1 s R
D8351 Every 1 s R
Connection 1 Connected IP Address
D8352 Every 1 s R
D8353 Every 1 s R
D8354 Every 1 s R
D8355 Every 1 s R
Connection 2 Connected IP Address
D8356 Every 1 s R
D8357 Every 1 s R

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 2-17

2: DEVICES

Device
Description Update Timing R/W
Address
D8358 Every 1 s R
D8359 Every 1 s R
Connection 3 Connected IP Address
D8360 Every 1 s R
D8361 Every 1 s R
D8362 Every 1 s R
D8363 Every 1 s R
Connection 4 Connected IP Address
D8364 Every 1 s R
D8365 Every 1 s R
D8366 Every 1 s R
D8367 Every 1 s R
Connection 5 Connected IP Address
D8368 Every 1 s R
D8369 Every 1 s R
D8370 Every 1 s R
D8371 Every 1 s R
Connection 6 Connected IP Address
D8372 Every 1 s R
D8373 Every 1 s R
D8374 Every 1 s R
D8375 Every 1 s R
Connection 7 Connected IP Address
D8376 Every 1 s R
D8377 Every 1 s R
D8378 Every 1 s R
D8379 Every 1 s R
Connection 8 Connected IP Address
D8380 Every 1 s R
D8381 Every 1 s R
D8382 Every 1 s R
D8383 Every 1 s R
D8384 Every 1 s R
HMI Module MAC Address (Current Value Read-only)
D8385 Every 1 s R
D8386 Every 1 s R
D8387 Every 1 s R
D8388 Every 1 s R
D8389 Every 1 s R
HMI Module IP Address (Current Value Read-only)
D8390 Every 1 s R
D8391 Every 1 s R
D8392 Every 1 s R
D8393 Every 1 s R
HMI Module Subnet Mask (Current Value Read-only)
D8394 Every 1 s R
D8395 Every 1 s R
D8396 Every 1 s R
D8397 Every 1 s R
HMI Module Default Gateway (Current Value Read-only)
D8398 Every 1 s R
D8399 Every 1 s R
D8400 Every 1 s R
D8401 Every 1 s R
HMI Module Preferred DNS Server (Current Value Read-only)
D8402 Every 1 s R
D8403 Every 1 s R
D8404 Every 1 s R
D8405 Every 1 s R
HMI Module Alternate DNS Server (Current Value Read-only)
D8406 Every 1 s R
D8407 Every 1 s R
D8408 to
— Reserved — ― ―
D8412
D8413 Time Zone Offset ― R/W
D8414 SNTP Operation Status ― R
D8415 SNTP Access Elapsed Time ― R

2-18 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 2: DEVICES

Device
Description Update Timing R/W
Address
D8416 to
— Reserved — ― ―
D8428
D8429 Connection No. ― R/W
D8430 Every 1 s R
D8431 HMI Module Connection Every 1 s R
Connected IP Address
D8432 Information Reference Every 1 s R
D8433 Every 1 s R
D8434 Connected Port No. Every 1 s R
D8435
— Reserved — ― ―
D8436
D8437 ― W
D8438 ― W
HMI Module IP Address (Write-only)
D8439 ― W
D8440 ― W
D8441 ― W
D8442 ― W
HMI Module Subnet Mask (Write-only)
D8443 ― W
D8444 ― W
D8445 ― W
D8446 ― W
HMI Module Default Gateway (Write-only)
D8447 ― W
D8448 ― W
D8449 ― W
D8450 ― W
HMI Module Preferred DNS Server (Write-only)
D8451 ― W
D8452 ― W
D8453 ― W
D8454 ― W
HMI Module Alternate DNS Server (Write-only)
D8455 ― W
D8456 ― W
D8457 EMAIL Instruction Detailed Error Information ― R
D8458 to
— Reserved — ― ―
D8469
D8470 Expansion Module Slot 1 Type ID/Status ― R
D8471 Information System Software Version ― R
D8472 Expansion Module Slot 2 Type ID/Status ― R
D8473 Information System Software Version ― R
D8474 Expansion Module Slot 3 Type ID/Status ― R
D8475 Information System Software Version ― R
D8476 Expansion Module Slot 4 Type ID/Status ― R
D8477 Information System Software Version ― R
D8478 Expansion Module Slot 5 Type ID/Status ― R
D8479 Information System Software Version ― R
D8480 Expansion Module Slot 6 Type ID/Status ― R
D8481 Information System Software Version ― R
D8482 Expansion Module Slot 7 Type ID/Status ― R
D8483 Information System Software Version ― R
D8484 Expansion Module Slot 8 Type ID/Status ― R
D8485 Information System Software Version ― R
D8486 Expansion Module Slot 9 Type ID/Status ― R
D8487 Information System Software Version ― R
D8488 Expansion Module Slot 10 Type ID/Status ― R
D8489 Information System Software Version ― R
D8490 Expansion Module Slot 11 Type ID/Status ― R
D8491 Information System Software Version ― R

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 2-19

2: DEVICES

Device
Description Update Timing R/W
Address
D8492 Expansion Module Slot 12 Type ID/Status ― R
D8493 Information System Software Version ― R
D8494 Expansion Module Slot 13 Type ID/Status ― R
D8495 Information System Software Version ― R
D8496 Expansion Module Slot 14 Type ID/Status ― R
D8497 Information System Software Version ― R
D8498 Expansion Module Slot 15 Type ID/Status ― R
D8499 Information System Software Version ― R

Supplementary Descriptions of the Special Data Registers

■ D8000: Quantity of Inputs
The number of FC6A Series MicroSmart inputs is written to this register.
The total number of inputs for the CPU module and the expansion modules is written to this register.

■ D8001: Quantity of Outputs

The number of FC6A Series MicroSmart outputs is written to this register.
The total number of outputs for the CPU module and the expansion modules is written to this register.

■ D8002: CPU Module Type Information

CPU module type information is written this register.
0 (00h): 16-I/O type
1 (01h): 24-I/O type
2 (02h): 40-I/O type (All-in-One Type)
18 (12h): 40-I/O type (CAN J1939 All-in-One Type)

■ D8005: General Error Code

FC6A Series MicroSmart general error information is written to this register. When a general error occurs, the bit corresponding
to the error occurred turns on. The general error and user program execution error can be cleared by writing "1" to the most
significant bit of D8005. For details on general error codes, see Chapter 13 "General Error Codes" in the "FC6A Series
MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s Manual".

■ D8006: User Program Execution Error Code

FC6A Series MicroSmartuser program execution error information is written to this register. When a user program execution
error occurs, the error code corresponding to the error that occurred is written to this register. For details on user program
execution errors, see Chapter 13 "User Program Execution Error" in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s Manual".

■ D8008 to D8021: Calendar/Clock Data

D8008 through D8021 are used for reading calendar/clock data from the internal clock and for writing calendar/clock data to the
internal clock. For details on the calendar/clock data, see Chapter 5 "Clock Function" in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One
Type User’s Manual".

■ D8022 to D8025: Scan Time Data

D8022 through D8025 are special data registers for checking the scan time and configuring the constant scan time. For details
on the scan time, see Chapter 5 "Constant Scan Time" in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s Manual".

■ D8026: Communication Mode Information (Port 1 to 3)

This register indicates communication mode information for Port 1 to Port 3.
The allocation of communication ports in the device (bit assignment) is as follows.
Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit
15 11 8 7 4 3 0

Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
0 (0000): Maintenance communication
1 (0001): User communication
2 (0010): Modbus RTU master
3 (0011): Modbus RTU slave
4 (0100): Data link communication

2-20 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 2: DEVICES

■ D8029: System Software Version

The CPU module system software version number is written to this register.

■ D8030: Communication Adapter Information

This register indicates information about the communication cartridges in Port 2 and Port 3.
The allocation of communication ports in the device (bit assignment) is as follows.
Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit
15 8 7 3 2 1 0

Port 2
0 (00): No communication cartridges
Port 3
1 (01): RS-232C communication cartridge
2 (10): RS-485 communication cartridge
3 (11): Free

■ D8031: Optional Cartridge Connection Information

Optional cartridge connection information is written to this register.
The allocation of bits in the device (bit assignment) is as follows.
Bit Bit Bit Bit
15 8 7 3 2 1 0

Reserved=0
0: No optional cartridge
SD Memory Card
1: Has optional cartridge Cartridge Slot 1
Cartridge Slot 2
Cartridge Slot 3

■ D8032 to D8035, D8214, D8215: Interrupt Input Jump Destination Label No.
Jump destination label numbers for interrupt inputs are written to these registers. When using interrupt inputs, write the label
number that corresponds to the special data register that has been allocated to the interrupt input. For details on interrupt
inputs, see Chapter 5 "Interrupt Input" in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s Manual".
D8032 = I1
D8033 = I3
D8034 = I4
D8035 = I6
D8214 = I7
D8215 = I0

■ D8036: Timer Interrupt Jump Destination Label No.

The jump destination label number when the timer interrupt occurs is written to this register. When using the timer interrupt,
store the corresponding label number.
For details on the timer interrupt, see Chapter 5 "Timer Interrupt" in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s
Manual".

■ D8037: Number of Connected Expansion Modules

The number of expansion modules connected to the CPU module (expansion I/O modules and functional modules) is written to
this register.

■ D8052: J1939 Communication Error Code

When an error occurs in J1939 communication, the error code is written to this register. For details on J1939 communication
error codes, see Chapter 8 "J1939 Communication Error Code (D8052)" in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type
Communication Manual".

■ D8056: Battery Voltage

The measurement result of the backup battery voltage is written to this register in 1 mV units.
0: Measurement error

■ D8057: Analog Volume (AI0)

The analog volume value is converted to a digital value and written to this register. For details, see Chapter 5 "Analog Volume"
in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s Manual".

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 2-21

2: DEVICES

■ D8058: Built-in Analog Input (AI1)

The analog input's analog value (0 to 10V DC) is converted to a digital value and written to this register. For details, see
Chapter 5 "Analog Voltage Input" in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s Manual".

■ D8059: Analog Input Status AI0

The analog volume's analog input status is written to this register. For details, see Chapter 5 "Analog Volume" in the "FC6A
Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s Manual".

■ D8060: Analog Input Status AI1

The analog input's analog input status is written to this register. For details, see Chapter 5 "Analog Voltage Input" in the "FC6A
Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s Manual".

■ D8067: Backlight ON Time

The backlight on time for the HMI module is written to this register. The backlight on time can be set by modifying the value of
D8067 in a range between 1 and 65,535 s. When D8067 is 0 s, the backlight is always on. The backlight on time can also be
changed with the HMI environment settings. For details, see Chapter 7 "Setting the LCD Backlight ON Time" in the "FC6A Series
MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s Manual".

■ D8069 to D8099: Slave (1 to 31) Communication Status/Error

Special data registers used in data link communication. For details, see Chapter 7 "Master Station" in the "FC6A Series
MicroSmart All-in-One Type Communication Manual".

■ D8100, D8102, D8103: Slave Number (Port 1 to 3)

The slave number is written to these registers when the Port 1 to 3 communication mode is maintenance communication,
Modbus RTU slave, or data link communication. The slave number can be changed by changing the value of D8100, D8102, and
D8103 in Function Area Settings
D8100 = Port 1 Slave No.
D8102 = Port 2 Slave No.
D8103 = Port 3 Slave No.
For details on communication modes, see the following in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type Communication Manual".
• Maintenance communication: Chapter 4 "Maintenance Communication"
• Modbus RTU slave: Chapter 6 "Modbus Communication"
• Data link communication: Chapter 7 "Data Link Communication"

2-22 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 2: DEVICES

■ D8104: Control Signal Status (Port 1 to 3)

The signal statuses of the DSR and DTR controls lines are written to this register. This register is updated in END processing
when stopped and while running. The allocation of communication ports in the device (bit assignment) is as follows.
Bit Bit Bit Bit
15 8 7 5 4 3 2 1 0

0 (00): DTR and DSR are both off. Port 1

Port 2
1 (01): DTR is off and DSR is on.
Port 3
2 (10): DTR is on and DSR is off.
3 (11): DTR and DSR are both on.

■ D8105: RS232C DSR Input Control Signal Option (Port 1 to 3)

The signal statuses of the DSR and DTR controls lines are written to this register. This register is updated in END processing
when stopped and while running. The allocation of communication ports in the device (bit assignment) is as follows.
Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit
15 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Port 1
Port 2
Port 3

0 (000): The DSR signal status is not used for FC6A Series MicroSmart transmission control.
Use this status when DSR signal control is not required.
1 (001): When the DSR signal is on, the FC6A Series MicroSmart can transmit and receive.
ON
DSR signal
OFF

Transmit/receive Not possible Possible Not possible

2 (010): When the DSR signal is off, the FC6A Series MicroSmart can transmit and receive.
ON
DSR signal
OFF

Transmit/receive Not possible Possible Not possible

3 (011): When the DSR signal is on, transmission is possible (reception is always possible).
ON
DSR signal
OFF

Transmit Not possible Possible Not possible

This is normally called "busy control" and is used for transmission control for devices with a slow
processing speed such as printers.
(As viewed from the connected device, there is a limit on the data that can be input.)
4 (100): When the DSR signal is off, transmission is possible.
ON
DSR signal
OFF

Transmit Not possible Possible Not possible

5 or higher: The operation is the same as the setting "000".

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 2-23

2: DEVICES

■ D8106: RS232C DTR Output Control Signal Option (Port 1 to 3)

This register is used when indicating the FC6A Series MicroSmart control status and the transmit/receive status to the connected
device. This control line is an output signal from the FC6A Series MicroSmart to the connected device. This register is only valid
during user communication.
The allocation of communication ports in the device (bit assignment) is as follows.
Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit
15 8 7 5 4 3 2 1 0

Port 1
Port 2
Port 3

0 (00): The signal is on when the FC6A Series MicroSmart is set to run and off when stopped.
While running, the signal is always on regardless of transmitting or receiving data. Set this value when it is
necessary to indicate the run status.
Running Stopped Running

ON
DTR signal
OFF

1 (01): Always off.

2 (10): Set this value when performing flow control for received data. The signal is on when data from the
connected device can be received.
The signal is off when data cannot be received.
Receive Not possible Possible Not possible

ON
DTR signal
OFF

3 (11): The operation is the same as the setting "0".

■ D8120, D8121: HMI Module Information

HMI module type information is written to these registers.
The allocation of information (bit assignment) is as follows.
Bit Bit Bit Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

D8120 Status Type ID

D8121 Reserved System Software Version

The system software version displays the version of the software written to the device.
For details on the type IDs and statuses, see "List of Type IDs and Statuses" on page 2-31.

■ D8122 to D8127: Cartridge Slot Information

Cartridge Slot 1 to 3 information is written to these registers.
The allocation of information (bit assignment) is as follows.
Bit Bit Bit Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

D8122, D8124, D8126 Status Type ID

D8123, D8125, D8127 Reserved System Software Version

D8122, D8123 = Cartridge Slot 1 Information

D8124, D8125 = Cartridge Slot 2 Information
D8126, D8127 = Cartridge Slot 3 Information
For details on the type IDs and statuses, see "List of Type IDs and Statuses" on page 2-31.

2-24 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 2: DEVICES

■ D8170, D8171, D8174, D8175, D8178, D8179: Analog Cartridge I/O

Analog I/O values for the analog cartridges are written to these registers.
For the analog input type : The analog values input to the analog cartridge are converted to digital values and written to the
registers.
For the analog output type : The digital values stored as digital values are converted to analog values and output from the
analog cartridges.
For details, see Chapter 10 "Analog Cartridge" in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s Manual".
D8170 = AI2/AQ2
D8171 = AI3/AQ3
D8174 = AI4/AQ4
D8175 = AI5/AQ5
D8178 = AI6/AQ6
D8179 = AI7/AQ7

■ D8172, D8173, D8176, D8177, D8180, D8181: Analog Cartridge Status

The analog status of analog cartridges is written to these registers.
For details, see Chapter 10 "Analog Cartridge" in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s Manual".
D8172 = AI2/AQ2
D8173 = AI3/AQ3
D8176 = AI4/AQ4
D8177 = AI5/AQ5
D8180 = AI6/AQ6
D8181 = AI7/AQ7

■ D8192 to D8203, D8210 to D8213, D8216 to D8229, D8232 to D8237: High-speed Counter
These special data registers are used with the high-speed counter function and the frequency measurement function.
For details on high-speed counters, see Chapter 5 "High-Speed Counter" in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s
Manual".
D8210 to D8213, D8216, D8217 = High-speed counter (group 1/I0)
D8218 to D8221, D8234, D8235 = High-speed counter (group 3/I3)
D8222 to D8225, D8236, D8237 = High-speed counter (group 4/I4)
D8226 to D8229, D8232, D8233 = High-speed counter (group 5/I6)
D8192 to D8197 = High-speed counter (group 2/I1)
D8198 to D8203 = High-speed counter (group 6/I7)

■ D8239: Absolute Position Control Status

This register indicates the status of absolute position control.
The allocation of the absolute position counter initialized flags in the device (bit assignment) is as follows. For details on the
absolute position control status, see "ABS (Set Absolute Position)" on page 18-59.
Bit Bit Bit Bit
15 8 7 3 2 1 0

0: Not initialized Absolute Position Counter 1 Initialized Flag

Absolute Position Counter 2 Initialized Flag
1: Initialized Absolute Position Counter 3 Initialized Flag
Absolute Position Counter 4 Initialized Flag

■ D8240 to D8247: Absolute Position Counter 1 to 4

The absolute position is written to these registers according to pulse output. The absolute position can be initialized with the
ABS instruction.
When reversible control is set in the pulse output instructions (RAMP/ARAMP/ZRN/JOG), the absolute position is incremented or
decremented according to the output result. For details on absolute position counters, see "ABS (Set Absolute Position)" on page
18-59.
D8240, D8241 = Absolute position counter 1
D8242, D8243 = Absolute position counter 2
D8244, D8245 = Absolute position counter 3
D8246, D8247 = Absolute position counter 4

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 2-25

2: DEVICES

■ D8250: Read SD Memory Card Capacity

This register indicates the capacity of the recognized SD or SDHC (maximum size 32 GB) memory card in megabytes.
It is 0 when no SD memory card has been inserted or if it is not recognized.

■ D8251: Read SD Memory Card Free Capacity

This register indicates the free capacity of the SD memory card in megabytes.
It is 0 when no SD memory card has been inserted or if it is not recognized.

■ D8254: SD Memory Card Download/Upload Execution Information

Information about the SD memory card download/upload that was executed.
For details, see Chapter 11 "SD Memory Card" in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s Manual".

■ D8255: SD Memory Card Download/Upload Execution Status

The status of the SD memory card download/upload that was executed.
For details, see Chapter 11 "SD Memory Card" in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s Manual".

■ D8260: Recipe Block Number

The recipe block number to read or write using special internal relays.
All channels for the specified block number are applicable.

■ D8261: Recipe Execution Block Number

The recipe block number of the recipe that was executed.
This is updated when the recipe block starts, and the status is retained when completed.

■ D8262: Recipe Execution Channel No.

The channel number of the recipe that was executed.
This is updated when the channel processing starts, and the status is retained when completed.

■ D8263: Recipe Execution Operation

Information about the operation of the recipe that was executed.
For details on recipes, see Chapter 11 "Recipe Function" in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s Manual".

■ D8264: Recipe Execution Status

The status of the recipe that was executed.
For details on recipes, see Chapter 11 "Recipe Function" in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s Manual".

■ D8265: Recipe Execution Error Information

Error information about the recipe that was executed.
For details on recipes, see Chapter 11 "Recipe Function" in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s Manual".

■ D8278, D8279: Communication Mode Information (Client Connection) (Connection 1 to 8)

D8278 = Indicates the communication mode of connections 1 through 4.
D8279 = Indicates the communication mode of connections 5 through 8.
The allocation of connections in the device (bit assignment) is as follows.
Bit Bit Bit Bit
15 8 7 0

D8278

Connection 1
Connection 2
Connection 3
Connection 4

Bit Bit Bit Bit

15 8 7 0

D8279

Connection 5
Connection 6
Connection 7
Connection 8
• Client connection (most significant bit = 0)
0000: Unused
0001: User Communication
0010: Modbus TCP client

2-26 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 2: DEVICES

• Server connection (most significant bit = 1)

1000: Maintenance Communication
1001: User Communication
1010: Modbus TCP server

■ D8284, D8285: Communication Mode Information (HMI Connection) (HMI Connection 1 to 8)

D8284: Indicates the communication mode of HMI connections 1 through 4.
D8285: Indicates the communication mode of HMI connections 5 through 8.
The allocation of connections in the device (bit assignment) is as follows.
Bit Bit Bit Bit
15 8 7 0

D8284

HMI Connection 1
HMI Connection 2
HMI Connection 3
HMI Connection 4

Bit Bit Bit Bit

15 8 7 0

D8285

HMI Connection 5
HMI Connection 6
HMI Connection 7
HMI Connection 8

• Client connection (most significant bit = 0)

0000: Unused
• Server connection (most significant bit = 1)
1000: Maintenance Communication

■ D8304 to D8307: CPU Module IP Address (Write-only)

These registers are used to write the CPU module's IP address.
IP address: To set as aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd, write the following.
D8304=aaa, D8305=bbb, D8306=ccc, D8307=ddd

■ D8308 to D8311: CPU Module Subnet Mask (Write-only)

These registers are used to write the CPU module's subnet mask.
Subnet mask: For aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd, write the following.
D8308=aaa, D8309=bbb, D8310=ccc, D8311=ddd

■ D8312 to D8315: CPU Module Default Gateway (Write-only)

These registers are used to write the CPU module's default gateway.
Default gateway: For aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd, write the following.
D8312=aaa, D8313=bbb, D8314=ccc, D8315=ddd

■ D8316 to D8319: CPU Module Preferred DNS Server (Write-only)

These registers are used to write the CPU module's preferred DNS server.
Preferred DNS server: For aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd, write the following.
D8316=aaa, D8317=bbb, D8318=ccc, D8319=ddd

■ D8320 to D8323: CPU Module Alternate DNS Server (Write-only)

These registers are used to write the CPU module's alternate DNS server.
Alternate DNS server: For aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd, write the following.
D8320=aaa, D8321=bbb, D8322=ccc, D8323=ddd

■ D8324 to D8329: CPU Module MAC Address (Current Value Read-only)

The CPU module's MAC address is written to the special data registers as follows.
Example: MAC address: AA-BB-CC-DD-EE-FF
D8324=AA, D8325=BB, D8326=CC, D8327=DD, D8328=EE, D8329=FF

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 2-27

2: DEVICES

■ D8330 to D8333: CPU Module IP Address (Current Value Read-only)

The CPU module's IP address is written to the special data registers as follows.
Example: The CPU module's own IP address aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
D8330=aaa, D8331=bbb, D8332=ccc, D8333=ddd

■ D8334 to D8337: CPU Module Subnet Mask (Current Value Read-only)

The CPU module's subnet mask value is written to the special data registers as follows.
Example: Subnet mask: aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
D8334=aaa, D8335=bbb, D8336=ccc, D8337=ddd

■ D8338 to D8341: CPU Module Default Gateway (Current Value Read-only)

The CPU module's default gateway address is written to the special data registers as follows.
Example: Default gateway: aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
D8338=aaa, D8339=bbb, D8340=ccc, D8341=ddd

■ D8342 to D8345: CPU Module Preferred DNS Server (Current Value Read-only)
The CPU module's preferred DNS server address is written to the special data registers as follows.
Example: Preferred DNS server: aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
D8342=aaa, D8343=bbb, D8344=ccc, D8345=ddd

■ D8346 to D8349: CPU Module Alternate DNS Server (Current Value Read-only)
The CPU module's alternate DNS server address is written to the special data registers as follows.
Example: Alternate DNS server: aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
D8346=aaa, D8347=bbb, D8348=ccc, D8349=ddd

■ D8350 to D8381: Connection Connected IP Address

The IP address of the connected device that is being accessed through a connection is written as follows.
Connection 1 Connected IP Address: For aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
D8350=aaa, D8351=bbb, D8352=ccc, D8353=ddd
Connection 2 Connected IP Address: For aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
D8354=aaa, D8355=bbb, D8356=ccc, D8357=ddd
Connection 3 Connected IP Address: For aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
D8358=aaa, D8359=bbb, D8360=ccc, D8361=ddd
Connection 4 Connected IP Address: For aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
D8362=aaa, D8363=bbb, D8364=ccc, D8365=ddd
Connection 5 Connected IP Address: For aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
D8366=aaa, D8367=bbb, D8368=ccc, D8369=ddd
Connection 6 Connected IP Address: For aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
D8370=aaa, D8371=bbb, D8372=ccc, D8373=ddd
Connection 7 Connected IP Address: For aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
D8374=aaa, D8375=bbb, D8376=ccc, D8377=ddd
Connection 8 Connected IP Address: For aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
D8378=aaa, D8379=bbb, D8380=ccc, D8381=ddd

■ D8382 to D8387: HMI Module MAC Address (Current Value Read-only)

The MAC address is written to the special data registers as follows.
Example: MAC address: AA-BB-CC-DD-EE-FF
D8382=AA, D8383=BB, D8384=CC, D8385=DD, D8386=EE, D8387=FF

■ D8388 to D8391: HMI Module IP Address (Current Value Read-only)

The HMI module's IP address is written to the special data registers as follows.
Example: HMI module IP address: aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
D8388=aaa, D8389=bbb, D8390=ccc, D8391=ddd

■ D8392 to D8395: HMI Module Subnet Mask (Current Value Read-only)

The HMI module's subnet mask value is written to the special data registers as follows.
Example: HMI module subnet mask: aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
D8392=aaa, D8393=bbb, D8394=ccc, D8395=ddd

2-28 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 2: DEVICES

■ D8396 to D8399: HMI Module Default Gateway (Current Value Read-only)

The HMI module's default gateway address is written to the special data registers as follows.
Example: HMI module default gateway: aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
D8396=aaa, D8397=bbb, D8398=ccc, D8399=ddd

■ D8400 to D8403: HMI Module Preferred DNS Server (Current Value Read-only)
The HMI module's preferred DNS server address is written to the special data registers as follows.
Example: HMI module preferred DNS server: aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
D8400=aaa, D8401=bbb, D8402=ccc, D8403=ddd

■ D8404 to D8407: HMI Module Alternate DNS Server (Current Value Read-only)
The HMI module's alternate DNS server address is written to the special data registers as follows.
Example: HMI module alternate DNS server: aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
D8404=aaa, D8405=bbb, D8406=ccc, D8407=ddd

■ D8413: Time Zone Offset

The time zone configured in the function area settings can be finely adjusted in 15-minute increments.
For details, see Chapter 3 "SNTP Settings" in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type Communication Manual".

■ D8414: SNTP Operation Status

The operation status is written to this register when the time information is acquired through operation of M8191 (SNTP Time
Acquisition Flag) or when time information acquisition was executed by automatic acquisition.
For details, see Chapter 3 "SNTP Settings" in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type Communication Manual".

■ D8415: SNTP Access Elapsed Time

The elapsed time in minutes from when the time information was last acquired from the SNTP server.
For details, see Chapter 3 "SNTP Settings" in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type Communication Manual".

■ D8429: HMI Module Connection Information Reference Connection Number

The connection information for the specified connection number is reflected in D8430 to D8434. When 0 is written, 0 is written
to D8430 to D8434. If a connection number that does not exist is specified, 0 is written to D8430 to D8434.

■ D8430 to D8433: HMI Module Connection Information Reference Connected IP Address

The IP address of the terminal being accessed through the connection is written to the special data registers as follows.
Example: IP address to read: aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
D8430=aaa, D8431=bbb, D8432=ccc, D8433=ddd

■ D8434: HMI Module Connection Information Reference Connected Port No.

The port number of the terminal being accessed through the connection is written to this register.

■ D8437 to D8440: HMI Module IP Address (Write-only)

These registers are used to write the HMI module's IP address.
HMI module IP address: To set as aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd, write the following.
D8437=aaa, D8438=bbb, D8439=ccc, D8440=ddd

■ D8441 to D8444: HMI Module Subnet Mask (Write-only)

These registers are used to write the HMI module's subnet mask.
HMI module subnet mask: For aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd, write the following.
D8441=aaa, D8442=bbb, D8443=ccc, D8444=ddd

■ D8445 to D8448: HMI Module Default Gateway (Write-only)

These registers are used to write the HMI module's default gateway.
HMI module default gateway: For aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd, write the following.
D8445=aaa, D8446=bbb, D8447=ccc, D8448=ddd

■ D8449 to D8452: HMI Module Preferred DNS Server (Write-only)

These registers are used to write the HMI module's preferred DNS server.
HMI module preferred DNS server: For aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd, write the following.
D8449=aaa, D8450=bbb, D8451=ccc, D8452=ddd

■ D8453 to D8456: HMI Module Alternate DNS Server (Write-only)

These registers are used to write the HMI module's alternate DNS server.
HMI module alternate DNS server: For aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd, write the following.
D8453=aaa, D8454=bbb, D8455=ccc, D8456=ddd

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 2-29

2: DEVICES

■ D8457: EMAIL Instruction Detailed Error Information

Detailed error information for the EMAIL instruction is written to this register.
For details, see Chapter 10 "Confirm the error detail of EMAIL instruction" in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type
Communication Manual".

■ D8470 to D8499: Expansion Module Slot Information

Expansion module type information is written to these registers.
The allocation of information (bit assignment) is as follows.
Bit Bit Bit Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Upper Status Type ID

Lower Reserved System Software Version

Upper Lower
D8470, D8471 = Expansion Module Slot 1 Information
D8472, D8473 = Expansion Module Slot 2 Information
D8474, D8475 = Expansion Module Slot 3 Information
D8476, D8477 = Expansion Module Slot 4 Information
D8478, D8479 = Expansion Module Slot 5 Information
D8480, D8481 = Expansion Module Slot 6 Information
D8482, D8483 = Expansion Module Slot 7 Information
D8484, D8485 = Expansion Module Slot 8 Information
D8486, D8487 = Expansion Module Slot 9 Information
D8488, D8489 = Expansion Module Slot 10 Information
D8490, D8491 = Expansion Module Slot 11 Information
D8492, D8493 = Expansion Module Slot 12 Information
D8494, D8495 = Expansion Module Slot 13 Information
D8496, D8497 = Expansion Module Slot 14 Information
D8498, D8499 = Expansion Module Slot 15 Information

For details on the type IDs and statuses, see "List of Type IDs and Statuses" on page 2-31.

2-30 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 2: DEVICES

List of Type IDs and Statuses

■ Type ID

Expansion module and HMI module

Type ID
Type No.
Hexadecimal Binary
0x00 0000 0000 FC6A-N16B1, FC6A-N16B3
0x01 0000 0001 FC6A-R161, FC6A-T16K1, FC6A-T16P1, FC6A-T16K3, FC6A-T16P3
0x02 0000 0010 FC6A-N32B3
0x03 0000 0011 FC6A-T32K3, FC6A-T32P3
0x04 0000 0100 FC6A-N08B1, FC6A-N08A11
0x05 0000 0101 FC6A-R081, FC6A-T08K1, FC6A-T08P1
0x06 0000 0110 FC6A-M08BR1
0x07 0000 0111 FC6A-M24BR1
0x18 0001 1000 FC6A-PH1
0x19 0001 1001 FC6A-EXM2
0x20 0010 0000 FC6A-J2C1
0x21 0010 0001 FC6A-J4A1
0x22 0010 0010 FC6A-J8A1
0x24 0010 0100 FC6A-K4A1
0x25 0010 0101 FC6A-L06A1
0x26 0010 0110 FC6A-L03CN1
0x27 0010 0111 FC6A-J4CN1
0x28 0010 1000 FC6A-J8CU1
0x29 0010 1001 FC6A-F2M1
0x2A 0010 1010 FC6A-F2MR1
0xFF 1111 1111 Not connected

Cartridge
Type ID
Type No.
Hexadecimal Binary
0x00 0000 0000 FC6A-PJ2A
0x01 0000 0001 FC6A-PK2AV
0x02 0000 0010 FC6A-PK2AW
0x03 0000 0011 FC6A-PJ2CP
0x06 0000 0110 FC6A-PC1
0x07 0000 0111 FC6A-PC3
0xFF 1111 1111 Not connected

■ Status

Status
Description
Hexadecimal Binary
0x00 0000 0000 Normal
Communication error (An error has occurred in the communication between the CPU module and an
0x81 1000 0001
expansion module, HMI module, or cartridge.)
0x82 1000 0010 Unknown device detected (A device other than the FC6A Series MicroSmart is connected.)
Device setting error (No device is connected or the connected device is different from that set in the
0x83 1000 0011
user program.)
0x84 1000 0100 Device writing error (The attempt to set the operation of the device failed.)
0x85 1000 0101 System update error (The system update failed.)

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 2-31

2: DEVICES

2-32 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

3: INSTRUCTIONS REFERENCE
Introduction
This chapter provides a list of FC6A Series MicroSmart instructions and describes their functions.
The instructions are divided into basic instructions, which perform sequencing, and advanced instructions, which perform moves,
comparisons, Boolean computations, binary arithmetic operations, bit shifts, and other operations.

Basic Instruction List

Symbol Name Function See Page

AND And Series connection of NO contact 4-4
AND LOD And Load Series connection of circuit blocks 4-5
ANDN And Not Series connection of NC contact 4-4
BPP Bit Pop Restores the result of bit logical operation which was saved temporarily 4-6
BPS Bit Push Saves the result of bit logical operation temporarily 4-6
BRD Bit Read Reads the result of bit logical operation which was saved temporarily 4-6
CC= Counter Comparison (=) Equal to comparison of counter current value 4-18
CC>= Counter Comparison (>=) Greater than or equal to comparison of counter current value 4-18
CDP Dual Pulse Reversible Counter Dual pulse reversible counter (0 to 65,535) 4-11
Double-Word Dual Pulse
CDPD Double-word dual pulse reversible counter (0 to 4,294,967,295) 4-14
Reversible Counter
CNT Adding Counter Adding counter (0 to 65,535) 4-11
CNTD Double-Word Adding Counter Double-word adding counter (0 to 4,294,967,295) 4-14
Up/Down Selection
CUD Up/down selection reversible counter (0 to 65,535) 4-11
Reversible Counter
Double-Word Up/Down Double-word up/down selection reversible counter
CUDD 4-14
Selection Reversible Counter (0 to 4,294,967,295)
DC= Data Register Comparison (=) Equal to comparison of data register value 4-20
DC>= Data Register Comparison (>=) Greater than or equal to comparison of data register value 4-20
END End Ends a program 4-30
JEND Jump End Ends a jump instruction 4-29
JMP Jump Jumps a designated program area 4-29
LOD Load Stores intermediate results and reads contact status 4-1
LODN Load Not Stores intermediate results and reads inverted contact status 4-1
MCR Master Control Reset Ends a master control 4-27
MCS Master Control Set Starts a master control 4-27
OR Or Parallel connection of NO contact 4-4
OR LOD Or Load Parallel connection of circuit blocks 4-5
ORN Or Not Parallel connection of NC contact 4-4
OUT Output Outputs the result of bit logical operation 4-1
OUTN Output Not Outputs the inverted result of bit logical operation 4-1
RST Reset Resets output, internal relay, or shift register bit 4-3
SET Set Sets output, internal relay, or shift register bit 4-3
SFR Shift Register Forward shift register 4-22
SFRN Shift Register Not Reverse shift register 4-22
SOTD Single Output Down Falling-edge differentiation output 4-26
SOTU Single Output Up Rising-edge differentiation output 4-26
TIM 100-ms Timer Subtracting 100-ms timer (0 to 6,553.5 s) 4-7
TIMO 100-ms Off-delay Timer Subtracting 100-ms off-delay timer (0 to 6,553.5 s) 4-10

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 3-1

3: INSTRUCTIONS REFERENCE

Symbol Name Function See Page

TMH 10-ms Timer Subtracting 10-ms timer (0 to 655.35 s) 4-7
TMHO 10-ms Off-delay Timer Subtracting 10-ms off-delay timer (0 to 655.35 s) 4-10
TML 1-s Timer Subtracting 1-s timer (0 to 65,535 s) 4-7
TMLO 1-s Off-delay Timer Subtracting 1-s off-delay timer (0 to 65,535 s) 4-10
TMS 1-ms Timer Subtracting 1-ms timer (0 to 65.535 s) 4-7
TMSO 1-ms Off-delay Timer Subtracting 1-ms off-delay timer (0 to 65.535 s) 4-10

3-2 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 3: INSTRUCTIONS REFERENCE

Advanced Instruction List

Valid Data Type

Group Symbol Name See Page
W I D L F
NOP NOP No Operation 3-11
MOV Move X X X X X 5-1
MOVN Move Not X X X X 5-5
IMOV Indirect Move X X X 5-6
IMOVN Indirect Move Not X X 5-8
BMOV Block Move X 5-9
Move IBMV Indirect Bit Move X 5-10
IBMVN Indirect Bit Move Not X 5-12
NSET N Data Set X X X X X 5-13
NRS N Data Repeat Set X X X X X 5-14
XCHG Exchange X X 5-15
TCCST Timer/Counter Current Value Store X X 5-16
CMP= Compare Equal To X X X X X 6-1
CMP<> Compare Unequal To X X X X X 6-1
CMP< Compare Less Than X X X X X 6-1
CMP> Compare Greater Than X X X X X 6-1
CMP<= Compare Less Than or Equal To X X X X X 6-1
CMP>= Compare Greater Than or Equal To X X X X X 6-1
Data Comparison ICMP>= Interval Compare Greater Than or Equal To X X X X X 6-6
LC= Load Compare Equal To X X X X X 6-8
LC<> Load Compare Unequal To X X X X X 6-8
LC< Load Compare Less Than X X X X X 6-8
LC> Load Compare Greater Than X X X X X 6-8
LC<= Load Compare Less Than or Equal To X X X X X 6-8
LC>= Load Compare Greater Than or Equal To X X X X X 6-8
ADD Addition X X X X X 7-1
SUB Subtraction X X X X X 7-1
MUL Multiplication X X X X X 7-1
DIV Division X X X X X 7-1
INC Increment X X X X 7-13
Binary Arithmetic
DEC Decrement X X X X 7-13
ROOT Root X X X 7-14
Sum (ADD) X X X X X 7-15
SUM
Sum (XOR) X 7-15
RNDM Random X 7-18
ANDW AND Word X X 8-1
Boolean Computation ORW OR Word X X 8-1
XORW Exclusive OR Word X X 8-1
SFTL Shift Left 9-1
SFTR Shift Right 9-3
BCDLS BCD Left Shift X 9-5
Shift and Rotate
WSFT Word Shift X 9-7
ROTL Rotate Left X X 9-8
ROTR Rotate Right X X 9-10

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 3-3

3: INSTRUCTIONS REFERENCE

Valid Data Type

Group Symbol Name See Page
W I D L F
HTOB Hex to BCD X X 10-1
BTOH BCD to Hex X X 10-3
HTOA Hex to ASCII X 10-5
ATOH ASCII to Hex X 10-7
BTOA BCD to ASCII X X 10-9
ATOB ASCII to BCD X X 10-12
ENCO Encode 10-15
Data Conversion
DECO Decode 10-16
BCNT Bit Count 10-17
ALT Alternate Output 10-18
CVDT Convert Data Type X X X X X 10-19
DTDV Data Divide X 10-21
DTCB Data Combine X 10-22
SWAP Data Swap X X 10-23
WKTIM Week Timer 11-1
WKTBL Week Table 11-1
Week Programmer
WEEK Weekly Timer 11-3
YEAR Yearly Timer 11-16
MSG Message 12-1
Interface DISP Display 12-20
DGRD Digital Read 12-22
LABEL Label 13-1
LJMP Label Jump 13-1
LCAL Label Call 13-3
LRET Label Return 13-3
DJNZ Decrement Jump Non-zero 13-5
Program Branching DI Disable Interrupt 15-1
EI Enable Interrupt 15-1
IOREF I/O Refresh 14-1
HSCRF High-speed Counter Refresh 14-3
FRQRF Frequency Measurement Refresh 14-4
COMRF Communication Refresh 14-5
XYFS XY Format Set X X 16-1
CVXTY Convert X to Y X X 16-2
Coordinate Conversion
CVYTX Convert Y to X X X 16-3
AVRG Average X X X X X 17-1
PULS1 Pulse Output 1 18-1
PULS2 Pulse Output 2 18-1
PULS3 Pulse Output 3 18-1
PULS4 Pulse Output 4 18-1
PWM1 Pulse Width Modulation 1 18-8
PWM2 Pulse Width Modulation 2 18-8
PWM3 Pulse Width Modulation 3 18-8
PWM4 Pulse Width Modulation 4 18-8
Pulse
RAMP1 Ramp Pulse Output 1 18-15
RAMP2 Ramp Pulse Output 2 18-15
ZRN1 Zero Return 1 18-27
ZRN2 Zero Return 2 18-27
ARAMP1 Advanced Ramp 1 18-37
ARAMP2 Advanced Ramp 2 18-37
ABS Set Absolute Position 18-59
JOG JOG Operation 18-63
PID PID Control (FC5A compatible) 19-1
PID Control PIDA PID Control 19-3
PIDD PID with Derivative Decay 19-26

3-4 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 3: INSTRUCTIONS REFERENCE

Valid Data Type

Group Symbol Name See Page
W I D L F
DTML 1-s Dual Timer 20-1
DTIM 100-ms Dual Timer 20-1
Dual / Teaching Timer DTMH 10-ms Dual Timer 20-1
DTMS 1-ms Dual Timer 20-1
TTIM Teaching Timer 20-3
RAD Degree to Radian X 21-1
DEG Radian to Degree X 21-2
SIN Sine X 21-3
COS Cosine X 21-4
Trigonometric Function
TAN Tangent X 21-5
ASIN Arc Sine X 21-6
ACOS Arc Cosine X 21-7
ATAN Arc Tangent X 21-8
LOGE Natural Logarithm X 22-1
LOG10 Common Logarithm X 22-2
Logarithm / Power
EXP Exponent X 22-3
POW Power X 22-4
FIFOF FIFO Format X 23-1
FIEX First-In Execute X 23-3
File Data Processing
FOEX First-Out Execute X 23-3
NDSRC N Data Search X X X X X 23-5
TADD Time Addition 24-1
TSUB Time Subtraction 24-5
Clock HTOS HMS to S 24-9
STOH S to HMS 24-10
HOUR Hour Meter 24-11
DLOG Data Logging 25-1
Data Logging
TRACE Data Trace 25-7
Script SCRPT Script X X X X X 26-1
SCALE Convert Analog Input X X 27-1
Flow Volume Calculation FLWA Analog Flow Totalizer 27-9
FLWP Pulse Flow Totalizer X X 27-18
User-defined Macro UMACRO User-defined Macro 28-1
Communication
TXD2 Transmit 2 Manual
5-2
Communication
TXD3 Transmit 3 Manual
5-2
User Communication
Communication
RXD2 Receive 2 Manual
5-10
Communication
RXD3 Receive 3 Manual
5-10
Communication
PING PING Ping Manual
9-1
Communication
E-mail EMAIL Send E-mail Manual
10-1

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 3-5

3: INSTRUCTIONS REFERENCE

Structure of an Advanced Instruction

Opcode
Source Device Destination Device
The opcode is a symbol used to identify the advanced instruction.
Opcode Repeat Cycles
Data Type
Specifies word (W), integer (I), double word (D), long (L), or float
MOV(W) S1 R D1 R REP
(F) data.
I0 ***** ***** **
Source Device
Data Type Repeat The source device specifies the 16- or 32-bit data to be processed
Designation by the advanced instruction. Some advanced instructions require
two source devices.
Repeat Designation
Destination Device
Specifies whether repeat is used for the device or not.
The destination device specifies the 16- or 32-bit data to store the
Repeat Cycles result of the advanced instruction. Some advanced instructions
Specifies the quantity of repeat cycles: 1 through 99. require two destination devices.

Input Condition for Advanced Instructions

Almost all advanced instructions must be preceded by a contact, except NOP (no operation), LABEL (label), and LRET (label
return) instructions. The input condition can be programmed using a bit device such as input, output, internal relay, or shift
register. Timer and counter can also be used as an input condition to turn on the contact when the timer times out or the counter
counts out.

While the input condition is on, the advanced instruction is

executed in each scan. To execute the advanced instruction MOV(W) S1 – D1 – REP
SOTU
only at the rising or falling edge of the input, use the SOTU or I0 D10 D20
SOTD instruction.
While the input condition is off, the advanced instruction is not executed and device statuses are held.

Source and Destination Devices

The source and destination devices specify 16- or 32-bit data, depending on the selected data type. When a bit device such as
input, output, internal relay, or shift register is designated as a source or destination device, 16 or 32 points starting with the
designated number are processed as source or destination data. When a word device such as timer or counter is designated as a
source device, the current value is read as source data. When a timer or counter is designated as a destination device, the result
of the advanced instruction is set to the preset value for the timer or counter. When a data register is designated as a source or
destination device, the data is read from or written to the designated data register.

Using Timer or Counter as Source Device

Since all timer instructions—TML (1-s timer), TIM (100-ms timer), TMH (10-ms timer), and TMS (1-ms timer)—subtract from the
preset value, the current value is decremented from the preset value and indicates the remaining time. As described above, when
a timer is designated as a source device of an advanced instruction, the current value, or the remaining time, of the timer is read
as source data. Adding counters CNT start counting at 0, and the current value is incremented up to the preset value. Reversible
counters CDP and CUD start counting at the preset value and the current value is incremented or decremented from the preset
value. When any counter is designated as a source device of an advanced instruction, the current value is read as source data.

Using Timer or Counter as Destination Device

As described above, when a timer or counter is designated as a destination device of an advanced instruction, the result of the
advanced instruction is set to the preset value of the timer or counter. Timer and counter preset values can be 0 through 65,535.
When a timer or counter preset value is designated using a data register, the timer or counter cannot be designated as a
destination of an advanced instruction. When executing such an advanced instruction, a user program execution error will
result. For details of user program execution error, see Chapter 13 "User Program Execution Error" in the "FC6A Series
MicroSmart All-in-One Type User's Manual".
Note: When a user program execution error occurs, the result is not set to the destination.

3-6 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 3: INSTRUCTIONS REFERENCE

Data Types for Advanced Instructions

When using move, data comparison, binary arithmetic, Boolean computation, bit shift/rotate, data conversion, and coordinate
conversion instructions, data types can be selected from word (W), integer (I), double word (D), long (L), or float (F). For other
advanced instructions, the data is processed in units of 16-bit word.

Quantity of Data Range of Decimal Values

Data Type Symbol Bits
Registers Used Decimal Hexdecimal
Word (Unsigned 16 bits) W 16 bits 1 0 to 65,535 $0000 to $FFFF
Integer (Signed 16 bits) I 16 bits 1 –32,768 to 32,767 $8000 to $7FFF
$00000000 to
Double Word (Unsigned 32 bits) D 32 bits 2 0 to 4,294,967,295
$FFFFFFFF
–2,147,483,648 to $80000000 to
Long (Signed 32 bits) L 32 bits 2
2,147,483,647 $7FFFFFFF
–3.402823×1038 to
Float (Floating point) F 32 bits 2 —
3.402823×1038

• When a constant is set in WindLDR, it can be set as decimal or hexadecimal number. Prefix the number with "$" to set it as a hexadecimal
number.

Decimal Values and Hexadecimal Storage (Word, Integer, Double, and Long Data)
The following table shows hexadecimal equivalents which are stored in the CPU, as a result of addition and subtraction of the
decimal values shown:

Data Type Result of Addition Hexadecimal Storage Result of Subtraction Hexadecimal Storage
65,535 FFFF
0 0000 0 0000
Word 65,535 FFFF –1 (BW) FFFF
131,071 (CY) FFFF –65,535 (BW) 0001
–65,536 (BW) 0000
65,534 (CY) 7FFE 65,534 (BW) 7FFE
32,768 (CY) 0000 32,768 (BW) 0000
32,767 7FFF 32,767 7FFF
0 0000 0 0000
Integer –1 FFFF –1 FFFF
–32,767 8001 –32,767 8001
–32,768 8000 –32,768 8000
–32,769 (CY) FFFF –32,769 (BW) FFFF
–65,535 (CY) 8001 –65,535 (BW) 8001
4,294,967,295 FFFFFFFF
0 00000000 0 00000000
Double Word 4,294,967,295 FFFFFFFF –1 (BW) FFFFFFFF
8,589,934,591 (CY) FFFFFFFF –4,294,967,295 (BW) 00000001
–4,294,967,296 (BW) 00000000
4,294,967,294 (CY) 7FFFFFFE 4,294,967,294 (BW) 7FFFFFFE
2,147,483,648 (CY) 00000000 2,147,483,648 (BW) 00000000
2,147,483,647 7FFFFFFF 2,147,483,647 7FFFFFFF
0 00000000 0 00000000
Long –1 FFFFFFFF –1 FFFFFFFF
–2,147,483,647 80000001 –2,147,483,647 80000001
–2,147,483,648 80000000 –2,147,483,648 80000000
–2,147,483,649 (CY) FFFFFFFF –2,147,483,649 (BW) FFFFFFFF
–4,294,967,295 (CY) 80000001 –4,294,967,295 (BW) 80000001

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 3-7

3: INSTRUCTIONS REFERENCE

Floating-Point Data Format

The FC6A Series MicroSmart can specify floating-point data (F) for advanced instructions. Like double word (D) and long integer
(L) data, floating-point data also uses two consecutive data registers to execute advanced instructions. The FC6A Series
MicroSmart supports the floating-point data based on the single storage format of the IEEE (The Institute of Electrical and
Electronics Engineers) Standard 754.

Single Storage Format

The IEEE single storage format consists of three fields: a 23-bit fraction, f; an 8-bit biased exponent, e; and 1-bit sign, s. These
fields are stored contiguously in one 32-bit word, as shown in the figure below. Bits 0:22 contain the 23-bit fraction, f, with bit 0
being the least significant bit of the fraction and bit 22 being the most significant; bits 23:30 contain the 8-bit biased exponent, e,
with bit 23 being the least significant bit of the biased exponent and bit 30 being the most significant; and the highest-order bit 31
contains the sign bit, s.

31 30 23 22 0

s e[30:23] f[22:0]

8-bit biased exponent 23-bit fraction

Sign bit (0: positive, 1: negative)

The table below shows the correspondence between the values of the three constituent fields s, e, and f and the value represented
by the single storage format bit pattern. When any value out of the bit pattern is entered to the advanced instruction or when
execution of advanced instructions, such as division by zero, has produced any value out of the bit pattern, a user program
execution error will result, turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart.

Value Exponent Field e Fraction Field f Representation in WindLDR

±0 e=0 f=0 0.0
Denormal numbers e=0 f≠0 -1.175494E-38 to 1.175494E-38
-3.402823E+38 to -1.175494E-38
Normal numbers 0<e<255 Arbitrary
1.175494E-38 to 3.402823E+38
±∞ (± infinities) f=0 INF
e=255
NaNs (Not a number values) f≠0 NAN

Carry and Borrow in Floating-Point Data Processing

When advanced instructions involving floating-point data are executed, special internal relay M8003 (carry and borrow) is updated.

M8003 Execution Result Value

1 ≠0 Overflow (exceeds the range between –3.402823×1038 and 3.402823×1038)
1 0 Not zero (within the range between –1.175495×10–38 and 1.175495×10–38)
0 0 Zero

Not Zero
Overflow Overflow

M8003 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

Execution Result –3.402823×1038 –1.175495×10–38 0 1.175495×10–38 3.402823×1038

3-8 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 3: INSTRUCTIONS REFERENCE

32-bit Data Storage

The 32-bit data for D (double word) and L (long word) is stored in devices according to the method selected in WindLDR under
Device Settings in Function Area Settings.
For applicable devices and instructions, see Chapter 5 "32-bit Data Storage Setting" in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One
Type User’s Manual".

Word devices*1: The data storage when From Upper Word is selected under Device Settings
When D0 is specified as the source or destination device, the upper word is stored in D0 and the lower
word is stored in D1.

Double word data (constant)

Upper word Lower word

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 D0: 1 2 3 4 Upper word

(Hexadecimal)

D1: 5 6 7 8 Lower word

The data storage when From Lower Word is selected under Device Settings
When D0 is specified as the source or destination device, the lower word is stored in D0 and the upper
word is stored in D1.

Double word data (constant)

Upper word Lower word

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 D0: 5 6 7 8 Lower word

(Hexadecimal)

D1: 1 2 3 4 Upper word

Bit devices*1: The data storage when From Upper Word is selected under Device Settings
When R0 is specified as the source or destination device, the upper word is stored in R0 to R15 and the
lower word is stored in R16 to R31.

Double word data (constant)

Upper word Lower word R15 R0

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 R0 to R15: 1 2 3 4 Upper word

(Hexadecimal) R31 R16

R16 to R31: 5 6 7 8 Lower word

The data storage when From Lower Word is selected under Device Settings
When R0 is specified as the source or destination device, the lower word is stored in R0-R15 and the
upper word is stored in R16-R31.

Double word data (constant)

Upper word Lower word R15 R0

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 R0 to R15: 5 6 7 8 Lower word

(Hexadecimal)
R31 R16

R16 to R31: 1 2 3 4 Upper word

*1 For bit devices and word devices, see "Devices" on page 2-1.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 3-9

3: INSTRUCTIONS REFERENCE

User Program Execution Errors

When an advanced instruction is executed, a user program execution error occurs when any of the following conditions are met.
• the result of the adavnced instruction is invalid

• source or destination device that is indirectly specified in the advanced instruction exceeds the valid device range

• the advanced instruction does not operate correctly

For example, the data in the source device does not comply with the normal floating-point format when the data type is Float (F).
For details about device ranges, see "Devices" on page 2-1.
When a user program execution error occurs, special internal relay M8004 turns on and the corresponding error code is stored in
special data register D8006. For details about the error codes, see Chapter 13 "User Program Execution Error" in the "FC6A Series
MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s Manual".

When a user program execution error occurs, instructions operate as follows:

• When the source data is invalid, the execution of the advanced instruction is canceled and the data in the destination device is not changed.

• When the execution result is invalid, a value is stored in the destination device.
For details on stored values, see the descriptions of relevant instructions.

• If a user program execution error occurred during a repeat operation, the operation is canceled and the next repeat operation is executed.
M8004 is retained even when no further user program execution errors occur during subsequent repeat operations.

Example: User program execution error during a repeat operation

When the source data does not comply with the normal floating-point format.
When the second repeat operation is executed, special internal relay M8004 turns on because the source data is not a normal
number in floating-point format.
The second repeat operation is canceled and the third repeat operation is executed.

MOV(F) S1(R) D1(R) REP

D0 D100 3

(D0, D1) 3.14 (D100, D101) 3.14

Not a normal Not executed Previous value is

(D2, D3) (D102, D103)
number M8004=ON retained

(D4, D5) 1.414 (D104, D105) 1.414

Carry and Borrow

When the result of an operation exceeds the valid device range, a carry (CY) or borrow (BW) occurs.
Carrying and borrowing occur in the following conditions according to the data type:

Data Type Status

Word Exceeds range between 0 and 65,535
Integer Exceeds range between -32,768 and 32,767
Double Word Exceeds range between 0 and 4,294,967,295
Long Exceeds range between -2,147,483,648 and 2,147,483,647
If an overflow or underflow occurs
Float For details on overflow and underflow, see "Carry and Borrow in Floating-Point Data Processing" on
page 3-8.

When a carry or borrow occurs, special internal relay M8003 (carry and borrow) turns on.

For example, when D0 has a value of FFFF (hex) and +1 is added using an INC instruction, the result is 10000 (hex), but when the
data type is Word (W), 0000 (hex) is stored in D0 and 1 is stored in M8003.

3-10 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 3: INSTRUCTIONS REFERENCE

Discontinuity of Device Areas

Each device area is discrete and does not continue, for example, from input to output or from output to internal relay. In addition,
special internal relays M8000 through M8317 are in a separate area from internal relays M0 through M7997 and M10000 through
M17497. Data registers D0 through D7999 and D10000 through D55999, and special data registers D8000 through D8499 are in
separate areas and do not continue with each other.

The internal relay ends at M7997. Since the MOV (move) instruction reads 16 internal
MOV(W) S1 – D1 – REP relays, the last internal relay exceeds the valid range, resulting in a user program
M8125 M7990 D0
syntax error.

This program results in a user program syntax error. The destination of the
MUL(W) S1 – S2 – D1 – REP MUL (multiplication) instruction requires two data registers D55999 and
I0 D100 D200 D55999 D56000. Since D56000 exceeds the valid range, a user program syntax error
occurs.

Advanced instructions execute operation only on the available devices in the valid area. If a user program syntax error is found
during programming, WindLDR rejects the program instruction and shows an error message.

The MOV (move) instruction sets data of data register D0 to 16 internal relays M7980
MOV(W) S1 – D1 R REP through M7997 in the first repeat cycle. The destination of the second cycle is the next
M8125 D0 M7980 2 16 internal relays M8000 through M8017, which are invalid, resulting in a user program
syntax error.

For details about repeat operations of each advanced instruction, see the following
chapters.

NOP (No Operation)

No operation is executed by the NOP instruction.
NOP The NOP instruction may serve as a place holder. It can also be used to add a delay to the CPU scan time, in order to
simulate communication with a machine or application, for debugging purposes.

The NOP instruction does not require an input and device.

Details of the other advanced instructions are described in the following chapters.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 3-11

3: INSTRUCTIONS REFERENCE

3-12 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

4: BASIC INSTRUCTIONS
Introduction
This chapter describes the basic instructions that perform sequence control.

LOD (Load) and LODN (Load Not)

The LOD instruction starts the logical operation with a NO (normally open) contact. The LODN instruction starts the logical
operation with a NC (normally closed) contact.
A total of eight LOD and/or LODN instructions can be programmed consecutively.

Valid Devices
Ladder Diagram
Instruction I Q M T C R D
0-27 0-17
LOD 0-7997 0.0-7999.15
30-307 30-307 0-1023 0-511 0-225
LODN 10000-17497 10000.15-55999.15
310-627 310-627
The valid device range depends on the FC6A Series MicroSmart type. For details, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.
Specify the bit by inserting a "." between the data register number and the bit position.

OUT (Output) and OUTN (Output Not)

The OUT instruction outputs the result of bit logical operation to the specified device. The OUTN instruction outputs the inverted
result of bit logical operation to the specified device.

Valid Devices
Ladder Diagram
Instruction I Q M T C R D
0-17
OUT 0-7997 0.0-7999.15
— 30-307 — — —
OUTN 10000-17497 10000.15-55999.15
310-627
The valid device range depends on the FC6A Series MicroSmart type. For details, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.
Specify the bit by inserting a "." between the data register number and the bit position.

Note: For restrictions on ladder programming of OUT and OUTN instructions, see "Restriction on Ladder Programming" on page 4-31.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 4-1

4: BASIC INSTRUCTIONS

Multiple OUT and OUTN

There is no limit to the number of OUT and OUTN instructions that can be programmed Ladder Diagram
into one rung.

I1 I2 Q0

Q1

Q2

Programming multiple outputs of the same output number is not recommended. However, Ladder Diagram
if doing so, it is good practice to separate the outputs with the JMP/JEND set of
instructions, or the MCS/MCR set of instructions. These instructions are detailed later in ON

this chapter.
I1 Q0
When the same output number is programmed more than once within one scan, the
output nearest to the END instruction is given priority for outputting. In the example on the OFF OFF
right, output Q0 is off.
I2 Q0

OFF

I3

END

4-2 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 4: BASIC INSTRUCTIONS

Examples: LOD (Load), OUT (Output), and NOT

Ladder Diagram Program List Timing Chart

ON
Instruction Data I0 OFF
I0 Q0 LOD I0
ON
OUT Q0 I1 OFF
LOD I1
ON
I1 Q1 OUTN Q1 Q0 OFF

ON
Q1 OFF

Ladder Diagram Program List

Instruction Data
M2 Q0 LOD M2
OUT Q0

Ladder Diagram Program List

Instruction Data

Q0 Q1 LODN Q0
OUT Q1

Ladder Diagram Program List

Instruction Data

T0 Q2 LOD T0
OUTN Q2

Ladder Diagram Program List

Instruction Data

C1 Q10 LODN C1
OUT Q10

SET and RST (Reset)

The SET and RST (reset) instructions are used to set (on) or reset (off) outputs, internal relays, and shift register bits. The same
output can be set and reset many times within a program. SET and RST instructions operate in every scan while the input is on.

Ladder Diagram Program List Timing Chart

ON
Instruction Data I0
S OFF
I0 Q0 LOD I0
ON
SET Q0 I1 OFF
R LOD I1
I1 Q0 ON
RST Q0 Q0 OFF
Valid Devices

Instruction I Q M T C R D
0-17
SET 0-7997 0.0-7999.15
— 30-307 — — 0-225
RST 10000-17497 10000.15-55999.15
310-627
The valid device range depends on the FC6A Series MicroSmart type. For details, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.
Specify the bit by inserting a "." between the data register number and the bit position.

Note: For restrictions on ladder programming of SET and RST instructions, see "Restriction on Ladder Programming" on page 4-31.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 4-3

4: BASIC INSTRUCTIONS

AND and ANDN (And Not)

The AND instruction is used for programming a NO contact in a series. The ANDN instruction is used for programming a NC contact
in a series. The AND or ANDN instruction is entered after the first set of contacts.

Ladder Diagram Program List Timing Chart

ON
Instruction Data I0 OFF
I0 I1 Q0 LOD I0
ON
AND I1 I1 OFF
OUT Q0
ON
LOD I0 Q0 OFF
I0 I1 Q1 ANDN I1
OUT Q1 ON
Q1 OFF

When both inputs I0 and I1 are on, output Q0 is on. When either input I0 or I1 is off, output Q0 is off.
When input I0 is on and input I1 is off, output Q1 is on. When either input I0 is off or input I1 is on, output Q1 is off.

Valid Devices

Instruction I Q M T C R D
0-27 0-17
AND 0-7997 0.0-7999.15
30-307 30-307 0-1023 0-511 0-225
ANDN 10000-17497 10000.15-55999.15
310-627 310-627
The valid device range depends on the FC6A Series MicroSmart type. For details, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.
Specify the bit by inserting a "." between the data register number and the bit position.

OR and ORN (Or Not)

The OR instruction is used for programming a NO contact in parallel. The ORN instruction is used for programming a NC contact in
parallel. The OR or ORN instruction is entered after the first set of contacts.

Ladder Diagram Program List Timing Chart

Instruction Data ON
I0 OFF
I0 Q0 LOD I0
ON
OR I1 I1 OFF
OUT Q0
I1 LOD I0 ON
Q0 OFF
ORN I1
OUT Q1 ON
I0 Q1 Q1 OFF

I1

When either input I0 or I1 is on, output Q0 is on. When both inputs I0 and I1 are off, output Q0 is off.
When either input I0 is on or input I1 is off, output Q1 is on. When input I0 is off and input I1 is on, output Q1 is off.

Valid Devices

Instruction I Q M T C R D
0-27 0-17
OR 0-7997 0.0-7999.15
30-307 30-307 0-1023 0-511 0-225
ORN 10000-17497 10000.15-55999.15
310-627 310-627
The valid device range depends on the FC6A Series MicroSmart type. For details, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.
Specify the bit by inserting a "." between the data register number and the bit position.

4-4 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 4: BASIC INSTRUCTIONS

AND LOD (Load)

The AND LOD instruction is used to connect, in a series, two or more circuits starting with the LOD instruction. The AND LOD
instruction is the equivalent of a “node” on a ladder diagram.
When using WindLDR, the user does not need to program the AND LOD instruction. The circuit in the ladder diagram shown below
is converted into AND LOD when the ladder diagram is compiled.

Ladder Diagram Program List

Instruction Data

I0 I2 Q0 LOD I0
LOD I2
OR I3
I3 ANDLOD
OUT Q0

Timing Chart
ON When input I0 is on and either input I2 or I3 is on,
I0 OFF
output Q0 is on.
ON
I2 OFF
When input I0 is off or both inputs I2 and I3 are off,
output Q0 is off.
ON
I3 OFF

ON
Q0 OFF

OR LOD (Load)
The OR LOD instruction is used to connect, in parallel, two or more circuits starting with the LOD instruction. The OR LOD
instruction is the equivalent of a “node” on a ladder diagram.
When using WindLDR, the user does not need to program the OR LOD instruction. The circuit in the ladder diagram shown below
is converted into OR LOD when the ladder diagram is compiled.

Ladder Diagram Program List

Instruction Data
I0 I1 Q0 LOD I0
AND I1
LOD I2
I2 I3 AND I3
ORLOD
OUT Q0

Timing Chart
ON When both inputs I0 and I1 are on or when both
I0 OFF
inputs I2 and I3 are on, output Q0 is on.
ON
I1 When either input I0 or I1 is off and either input I2 or
OFF
I3 is off, output Q0 is off.
ON
I2 OFF

ON
I3 OFF

ON
Q0 OFF

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 4-5

4: BASIC INSTRUCTIONS

BPS (Bit Push), BRD (Bit Read), and BPP (Bit Pop)
The BPS (bit push) instruction is used to temporarily save the result of bit logical operation.
The BRD (bit read) instruction is used to read the result of the temporarily saved bit logical operation.
The BPP (bit pop) instruction is used to restore the result of the temporarily saved bit logical operation.
When using WindLDR, the user does not need to program the BPS, BRD, and BPP instructions. The circuit in the ladder diagram
shown below is converted into BPS, BRD, and BPP when the ladder diagram is compiled.

Ladder Diagram
Program List
BPS Instruction Data
I0 I1 Q1 LOD I0
BPS
BRD AND I1
I2 Q2 OUT Q1
BRD
BPP AND I2
I3 Q3
OUT Q2
BPP
AND I3
OUT Q3

Timing Chart
ON
I0 OFF

ON
I1 OFF

ON
I2 OFF

ON
I3 OFF

ON
Q1 OFF

ON
Q2 OFF

ON
Q3 OFF

When both inputs I0 and I1 are on, output Q1 is turned on.

When both inputs I0 and I2 are on, output Q2 is turned on.

When both inputs I0 and I3 are on, output Q3 is turned on.

4-6 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 4: BASIC INSTRUCTIONS

TML, TIM, TMH, and TMS (Timer)

Four types of on-delay timers are available; 1-s timer TML, 100-ms timer TIM, 10-ms timer TMH, and 1-ms timer TMS. A total of
1024 on- and off-delay timers can be programmed in a user program. Each timer must be allocated to a unique number T0
through T1023.
Timer Device Address Range Increments Preset Value
TML (1-s timer) T0 to T1023 0 to 65,535 s 1s Constant: 0 to 65,535

TIM (100-ms timer) T0 to T1023 0 to 6,553.5 s 100 ms Data registers: D0 to D7999

D10000 to D55999
TMH (10-ms timer) T0 to T1023 0 to 655.35 s 10 ms

TMS (1-ms timer) T0 to T1023 0 to 65.535 s 1 ms

For details about device ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.
To indirectly specify the value, specify it with a data register number, and specify the value of the data register in the range of 0 to 65,535.

TML (1-s Timer)

Ladder Diagram (TML) Program List Timing Chart

Instruction Data ON
TML T0 I0 OFF
I0 4 LOD I0 4s
ON
TML T0 T0 OFF
4
I1 T0 Q0 LOD I1 ON
I1 OFF
AND T0
OUT Q0 ON
Q0 OFF

TIM (100-ms Timer)

Ladder Diagram (TIM) Program List Timing Chart

Instruction Data ON
TIM T1 I0 OFF
I0 20 LOD I0
ON 2s
TIM T1 T1 OFF
20
I1 T1 Q1 LOD I1 ON
I1 OFF
AND T1
OUT Q1 ON
Q1 OFF

TMH (10-ms Timer)

Ladder Diagram (TMH) Program List Timing Chart

Instruction Data ON
TMH T2 I0 OFF
I0 100 LOD I0 1s
ON
TMH T2 T2 OFF
100
I1 T2 Q2 LOD I1 ON
I1 OFF
AND T2
OUT Q2 ON
Q2 OFF

TMS (1-ms Timer)

Ladder Diagram (TMS) Program List Timing Chart

Instruction Data ON
TMS T3 I0 OFF
I0 500 LOD I0 0.5 s
ON
TMS T3 T3 OFF
500
I1 T3 Q3 LOD I1 ON
I1 OFF
AND T3
OUT Q3 ON
Q3 OFF

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 4-7

4: BASIC INSTRUCTIONS

Timer Circuit
The preset value 0 through 65,535 can be designated using a data register D0 thorough D7999 or D10000 through D55999; then
the data of the data register becomes the preset value. Directly after the TML, TIM, TMH, or TMS instruction, the OUT, OUTN, SET,
RST, TML, TIM, TMH, TMS, TMLO, TIMO, TMHO, or TMSO instruction can be programmed.

Ladder Diagram Program List

TIM T5 Instruction Data

I1 D10 Q0 LOD I1
Note: For restrictions on ladder programming of
TIM T5
timer instructions, see "Restriction on Ladder
D10
Programming" on page 4-31.
OUT Q0

• Countdown from the preset value is initiated when the operation result directly before the timer input is on.
• The timer output turns on when the current value (timed value) reaches 0.
• The current value returns to the preset value when the timer input is off.
• Timer preset and current values can be changed using WindLDR without downloading the entire program to the CPU again. From the
WindLDR menu bar, select Online > Monitor > Monitor, then Online > Custom > New Custom Monitor.
• If a timer preset value is changed during countdown, the timer remains unchanged for that cycle. The change will be reflected in the next
time cycle.
• If a timer preset value is changed to 0, then the timer stops operation, and the timer output is turned on immediately.
• If a current value is changed during countdown, the change becomes effective immediately.
• For data movement when changing, confirming, and clearing preset values, see "Changing, Confirming, and Clearing Preset Values for Timers
and Counters" on page 4-17. Preset values can also be changed and confirmed using the LCD screen and pushbuttons.
• WindLDR ladder diagrams show TP (timer preset value) and TC (timer current value) in advanced instruction devices.
• The timer instructions (TML, TIM, TMH, TMS) and off-delay timer instructions (TMLO, TIMO, TMHO, TMSO) cannot be used in an interrupt
program.
• If used, a user program execution error will result, turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart.
For details about the user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

Timer Accuracy
Timer accuracy due to software configuration depends on three factors: timer input error, timer counting error, and timeout output
error. These errors are not constant but vary with the user program and other causes.

Timer Input Error

The input status is read at the END processing and stored to the input RAM. So, an error occurs depending on the timing when the
timer input turns on in a scan cycle. The same error occurs on normal input and catch input. The timer input error shown below
does not include input delay caused by the hardware.

Minimum Error Maximum Error

END TIM END END TIM END TIM
Program Processing Program Processing

ON ON
Actual Input OFF
Actual Input OFF
Tie
ON ON
Input RAM OFF
Input RAM OFF

Timer Start Timer Start

Tet Tie Tet

1 scan time 1 scan time

When the input turns on immediately before END processing, When the input turns on immediately after END processing, Tie is
Tie is almost 0. Then the timer input error is only Tet (behind almost equal to one scan time. Then the timer input error is Tie +
error) and is at its minimum. Tet = one scan time + Tet (behind error) and is at its maximum.

Tie: Time from input turning on to END processing

Tet: Time from END processing to the timer instruction execution

4-8 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 4: BASIC INSTRUCTIONS

Timer Counting Error

Every timer instruction operation is individually based on asynchronous 16-bit reference timers. Therefore, an error can occur
depending on the status of the asynchronous 16-bit timer when the timer instruction is executed. Use of a TMS (1-ms timer) is
recommended to reduce advance errors.

TML TIM TMH TMS

Error
(1-s timer) (100-ms timer) (10-ms timer) (1-ms timer)
Advance error 1,000 ms 100 ms 10 ms 1 ms
Maximum
Behind error 1 scan time 1 scan time 1 scan time 1 scan time

Timeout Output Error

The output RAM status is set to the actual output when the END instruction is processed. When timeout output turns from off to
on, an error occurs depending on the position where the timer instruction is programmed in the user program. The timeout output
error shown below does not include output delay caused by the hardware.

END TIM END

Program Processing
Timeout output error is equal to Tte (behind error) and can be between
ON 0 and one scan time.
Timeout Output RAM OFF 0 < Tte < 1 scan time
ON Tte: Time from the timer instruction execution to the END processing
Actual Output OFF
Tte

1 scan time

Error Maximum and Minimum

Timer Counting Timeout Output
Error Timer Input Error Total Error
Error Error
Advance error 0 (Note) 0 0 (Note) 0
Minimum
Behind error Tet + Tie 0 Tte 0
Advance error 0 (Note) Increment 0 (Note) Increment – (Tet + Tte)
Maximum 1 scan time +
Behind error 1 scan time Tte (1 scan time) 2 scan times + (Tet + Tte)
Tet (1 scan time)

Notes: Advance error does not occur at the timer input and timeout output.
Tet + Tte = 1 scan time
Increment is 1 s (TML), 100 ms (TIM), 10 ms (TMH), or 1 ms (TMS).
The maximum advance error is: Increment – 1 scan time
The maximum behind error is: 3 scan times

The timer input error and timeout output error shown above do not include the input response time (behind error) and output response
time (behind error) caused by hardware.

Power Failure Memory Protection

Timers TML, TIM, TMH, and TMS do not have power failure protection. To provide a timer with this protection use a counter
instruction and special internal relay M8121 (1-s clock), M8122 (100-ms clock), or M8123 (10-ms clock).

Ladder Diagram Program List Timing Chart

(10-s Timer)
ON
Instruction Data I1
Reset
OFF
CNT C2 LODN I1 10 s
ON
I1 1000 LOD M8123 C2 OFF
Pulse CNT C2
1000
M8123
Note: Designate counter C2 used in this program as a keep type counter. See Chapter 5 "Memory Backup" in
the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s Manual".

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 4-9

4: BASIC INSTRUCTIONS

TMLO, TIMO, TMHO, and TMSO (Off-Delay Timer)

Four types of on-delay off-delay timers are available; 1-s off-delay timer TMLO, 100-ms off-delay timer TIMO, 10-ms off-delay
timer TMHO, and 1-ms off-delay timer TMSO. A total of 1024 on- and off-delay timers can be programmed in a user program. Each
timer must be allocated to a unique number T0 through T1023.

Timer Device Address Range Increments Preset Value

TMLO (1-s off-delay timer) T0 to T1023 0 to 65,535 s 1s Constant: 0 to 65,535

TIMO (100-ms off-delay timer) T0 to T1023 0 to 6,553.5 s 100 ms Data registers: D0 to D7999
D10000 to D55999
TMHO (10-ms off-delay timer) T0 to T1023 0 to 655.35 s 10 ms

TMSO (1-ms off-delay timer) T0 to T1023 0 to 65.535 s 1 ms

For details about device ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

To indirectly specify the value, specify it with a data register number, and specify the value of the data register in the range of 0 to 65,535.

TMLO (1-s Off-delay Timer)

Ladder Diagram (TMLO) Program List Timing Chart

Instruction Data ON
TMLO T0 I0 OFF
I0 4 LOD I0 4s
ON
TMLO T0 T0 OFF
4
I1 T0 Q0 LOD I1 ON
I1 OFF
AND T0
OUT Q0 ON
Q0 OFF

TIMO (100-ms Off-delay Timer)

Ladder Diagram (TIMO) Program List Timing Chart

Instruction Data ON
TIMO T1 I0 OFF
I0 20 LOD I0 2s
ON
TIMO T1 T1 OFF
20
I1 T1 Q1 LOD I1 ON
I1 OFF
AND T1
OUT Q1 ON
Q1 OFF

TMHO (10-ms Off-delay Timer)

Ladder Diagram (TMHO) Program List Timing Chart

Instruction Data ON
TMHO T2 I0 OFF
I0 100 LOD I0 1s
ON
TMHO T2 T2 OFF
100
I1 T2 Q2 LOD I1 ON
I1 OFF
AND T2
OUT Q2 ON
Q2 OFF

TMSO (1-ms Off-delay Timer)

Ladder Diagram (TMSO) Program List Timing Chart

Instruction Data ON
TMSO T3 I0 OFF
I0 500 LOD I0 0.5 s
ON
TMSO T3 T3 OFF
500
I1 T3 Q3 LOD I1 ON
I1 OFF
AND T3
OUT Q3 ON
Q3 OFF

4-10 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 4: BASIC INSTRUCTIONS

CNT, CDP, and CUD (Counter)

Three types of counters are available; adding (up) counter CNT, dual-pulse reversible counter CDP, and up/down selection
reversible counter CUD. A total of 512 counters can be programmed in a user program. Each counter must be allocated to a unique
number C0 through C511.

Counter Device Address Preset Value

CNT (adding counter) C0 to C511 Constant: 0 to 65,535

CDP (dual-pulse reversible counter) C0 to C511 Data registers: D0 to D7999

D10000 to D55999
CUD (up/down selection reversible counter) C0 to C511

For details about device ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

To indirectly specify the value, specify it with a data register number, and specify the value of the data register in the range of 0 to 65,535.

CNT (Adding Counter)

When counter instructions are programmed, two addresses are required. The circuit for an adding (UP) counter must be
programmed in the following order: reset input, pulse input, the CNT instruction, and a counter number C0 through C511, followed
by a counter preset value from 0 to 65,535.
The preset value can be designated using a decimal constant or a data register. When a data register is used, the data of the data
register becomes the preset value.

Ladder Diagram Program List • A single counter number cannot be programmed more than once.
Reset • While the reset input is off, the counter counts the leading edges
CNT C0 Instruction Data
of pulse inputs and compares them with the preset value.
I0 5 LOD I0
• When the current value reaches the preset value, the counter
Pulse LOD I1
turns output on. The output stays on until the reset input is
CNT C0
I1 turned on.
5
LOD I2 • When the reset input changes from off to on, the current value is
AND C0 reset.
I2 C0 Q0
OUT Q0 • When the reset input is on, all pulse inputs are ignored.
• The reset input must be turned off before counting may begin.

Timing Chart • When power is off, the counter’s current value is held, and can
also be designated as “clear” type counters using Function Area
ON
Reset Input I0 Settings (see Chapter 5 "Memory Backup" in the "FC6A Series
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s Manual".).
ON
Pulse Input I1 OFF
••• • Counter preset and current values can be changed using
WindLDR without downloading the entire program to the CPU
ON
Counter C0 OFF
again. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Online > Monitor >
Monitor, then Online > Custom > New Custom Monitor.
ON
Input I2 Change the current value while the counter reset input is off.
OFF
• When the preset or current value is changed during counter
ON
Output Q0 OFF
operation, the change becomes effective immediately.
• When power is off, the preset values that were changed are
cleared and the original preset values are loaded.
• The preset value 0 through 65,535 can be designated using a data
register D0 thorough D7999 or D10000 through D55999; then the • For data movement when changing, confirming, and clearing
data of the data register becomes the preset value. preset values, see "Changing, Confirming, and Clearing Preset
Values for Timers and Counters" on page 4-17. Preset values can
• Directly after the CNT instruction, the OUT, OUTN, SET, RST, TML,
also be changed and confirmed using the LCD screen and
TIM, TMH, or TMS instruction can be programmed.
pushbuttons.
• WindLDR ladder diagrams show CP (counter preset value) and
CC (counter current value) in advanced instruction devices.
Reset
CNT C28 • The CNT instruction cannot be used in an interrupt program.
I0 D5 Q0 If used, a user program execution error will result, turning on
Pulse special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the FC6A Series
MicroSmart. For details about the user program execution errors,
I1 see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 4-11

4: BASIC INSTRUCTIONS

CDP (Dual-Pulse Reversible Counter)

The dual-pulse reversible counter CDP has up and down pulse inputs, so the three inputs are required. The circuit for a dual-pulse
reversible counter must be programmed in the following order: preset input, up-pulse input, down-pulse input, the CDP
instruction, and a counter number C0 through C511, followed by a counter preset value from 0 to 65,535.
The preset value can be designated using a decimal constant or a data register. When a data register is used, the data of the data
register becomes the preset value.
Ladder Diagram Program List • A single counter number cannot be programmed more
Preset Input than once.
CDP C1 Instruction Data
• The preset input must be turned on initially so that the
I0 500 LOD I0 current value returns to the preset value.
Up Pulse LOD I1 • The preset input must be turned off before counting may
LOD I2 begin.
I1 CDP C1
Down Pulse
• When the up pulse and down pulses are on
500
simultaneously, no pulse is counted.
LOD I3
I2 • The counter output is on only when the current value is 0.
AND C1
• After the current value reaches 0 (counting down), it
OUT Q1
changes to 65,535 on the next count down.
I3 C1 Q1 • After the current value reaches 65,535 (counting up), it
changes to 0 on the next up count.
• When power is off, the counter’s current value is held, and
Timing Chart
can also be designated as “clear” type counters using the
ON Function Area Settings (see Chapter 5 "Memory Backup"
Preset Input I0 OFF
in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s
ON Manual".).
Up Pulse I1 OFF
• Counter preset and current values can be changed using
ON WindLDR without downloading the entire program to the
Down Pulse I2 OFF
•••
CPU again. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Online >
500 501 502 501 500 499 • • • 0 1 500 500 Monitor > Monitor, then Online > Custom > New
Counter C1 Value
Custom Monitor. Change the current value while the
ON counter preset input is off.
Counter C1 OFF • When the preset or current value is changed during
counter operation, the change becomes effective
immediately.
• When power is off, the changed preset values are cleared
and the original preset values are loaded.
• For data movement when changing, confirming, and
clearing preset values, see "Changing, Confirming, and
Clearing Preset Values for Timers and Counters" on page
4-17. Preset values can also be changed and confirmed
using the LCD screen and pushbuttons.
• WindLDR ladder diagrams show CP (counter preset value)
and CC (counter current value) in advanced instruction
devices. The CDP instruction cannot be used in an
interrupt program.
• If used, a user program execution error will result, turning
on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the
FC6A Series MicroSmart. For details about the user
program execution errors, see "User Program Execution
Errors" on page 3-10.

Note: For restrictions on ladder programming of counter instructions, see "Restriction on Ladder Programming" on page 4-31.

Counter Operation after Count out

Condition Counter Output

When the counter has counted out, either the current value or preset
The counter maintains the counted out status.
value is changed.
Before the counter has counted out, the current value is changed to a
The counter output is turned on.
larger value than the preset.
The preset value is changed to 0. The counter output is turned on without regard to the current value.
When the reset input is on, the preset value is changed to 0. The counter output is not turned on.

4-12 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 4: BASIC INSTRUCTIONS

CUD (Up/Down Selection Reversible Counter)

The up/down selection reversible counter CUD has a selection input to switch the up/down gate, so the three inputs are required.
The circuit for an up/down selection reversible counter must be programmed in the following order: preset input, pulse input, up/
down selection input, the CUD instruction, and a counter number C0 through C511, followed by a counter preset value from 0 to
65,535.
The preset value can be designated using a decimal constant or a data register. When a data register is used, the data of the data
register becomes the preset value.

Ladder Diagram Program List • A single counter number cannot be programmed more
Preset Input than once.
CUD C2 Instruction Data
• The preset input must be turned on initially so that the
I0 500 LOD I0 current value returns to the preset value.
Pulse Input
LOD I1
• The preset input must be turned off before counting may
LOD I2
I1 begin.
CUD C2
U/D Selection
500 • The up mode is selected when the up/down selection
LOD I3 input is on.
I2
AND C2 • The down mode is selected when the up/down selection
OUT Q2 input is off.
I3 C2 Q2 • The counter output is on only when the current value is 0.
• After the current value reaches 0 (counting down), it
Timing Chart changes to 65,535 on the next count down.
• After the current value reaches 65,535 (counting up), it
ON
Preset Input I0 changes to 0 on the next count up.
OFF
• When power is off, the counter’s current value is held, and
ON
Pulse Input I1 OFF
••• can also be designated as “clear” type counters using the
Function Area Settings (see Chapter 5 "Memory Backup"
U/D Selection ON
in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s
Input I2 OFF
Manual".).
Counter C2 Value 500 501 502 501 500 499 • • • 0 1 500 500
• Counter preset and current values can be changed using
WindLDR without downloading the entire program to the
ON
Counter C2 OFF CPU again. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Online >
Monitor > Monitor, then Online > Custom > New
Custom Monitor. Change the current value while the
counter preset input is off.
• When the preset or current value is changed during
counter operation, the change becomes effective
Valid Pulse Inputs
immediately.
The reset or preset input has priority over the pulse input. One
• When power is off, the changed preset values are cleared
scan after the reset or preset input has changed from on to off,
and the original preset values are loaded.
and the counter starts counting the pulse inputs as they change
• For data movement when changing, confirming, and
from off to on.
clearing preset values, see "Changing, Confirming, and
Clearing Preset Values for Timers and Counters" on page
4-17. Preset values can also be changed and confirmed
ON
Reset/Preset using the LCD screen and pushbuttons.
OFF
• WindLDR ladder diagrams show CP (counter preset value)
ON
Pulse and CC (counter current value) in advanced instruction
OFF
Valid Invalid Valid devices. The CUD instruction cannot be used in an
More than one scan interrupt program.
time is required.
• If used, a user program execution error will result, turning
on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the
FC6A Series MicroSmart. For details about the user
program execution errors, see "User Program Execution
Errors" on page 3-10.
Note: For restrictions on ladder programming of counter instructions, see "Restriction on Ladder Programming" on page 4-31.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 4-13

4: BASIC INSTRUCTIONS

CNTD, CDPD, and CUDD (Double-Word Counter)

Three types of double-word counters are available; adding (up) counter CNTD, dual-pulse reversible counter CDPD, and up/down
selection reversible counter CUDD. A total of 512 double-word counters can be programmed in a user program. Each double-word
counter uses 2 consecutive devices starting with the allocated device, which can be C0 through C510. Once used in a user
program, counters cannot be used in any other counter instructions.

Counter Device Address Preset Value

CNTD (double-word adding counter) C0 to C510 Constant: 0 to 4,294,967,295

CDPD (double-word dual-pulse reversible counter) C0 to C510 Data registers: D0 to D7999

D10000 to D55999
CUDD (double-word up/down selection reversible counter) C0 to C510

For details about device ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.
The preset value can be 0 through 4,294,967,295 and designated using a constant or a data register. If a data register is designated as the preset
value, two consecutive data registers are used.

CNTD (Double-Word Adding Counter)

For a constant, specify the value in the range of 0 to 4,294,967,295.
To indirectly specify the value, specify it with a data register number, and specify the value of the data register in the range of 0 to
4,294,967,295.
The preset value can be designated using a constant or a data register. When a data register is used, the double-word data of two
consecutive data registers becomes the preset value. For 32-bit data storage setting, see Chapter 5 "32-bit Data Storage Setting"
in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s Manual".
Ladder Diagram Program List • Double-word counter instructions use two consecutive counters,
Reset and counters cannot be used more than once in a user program.
CNTD C0 Instruction Data
• While the reset input is off, the counter counts the leading edges
I0 100000 LOD I0 of pulse inputs and compares them with the preset value.
Pulse LOD I1 • When the current value reaches the preset value, the counter
CNTD C0 turns output on. The output stays on until the reset input is
I1 100000 turned on.
LOD I2 • When the reset input changes from off to on, the current value is
AND C0
I2 C0 Q0 reset.
OUT Q0
• When the reset input is on, all pulse inputs are ignored.
Timing Chart • The reset input must be turned off before counting may begin.
• When power is off, the counter’s current value is held, and can
ON
Reset Input I0 also be designated as “clear” type counters using Function Area
OFF
99998 99999 100000 Settings (see Chapter 5 "Memory Backup" in the "FC6A Series
ON
Pulse Input I1 ••• MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s Manual".).
OFF
• Counter preset and current values can be changed using
ON WindLDR without downloading the entire program to the CPU
Counter C0 OFF
again. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Online > Monitor >
ON Monitor, then Online > Custom > New Custom Monitor. To
Input I2 OFF
change a counter preset value, select DEC(D) in the pull-down
ON list box.
Output Q0 OFF
• When the preset or current value is changed during counter
• The preset value 0 through 4,294,967,295 can be designated operation, the change becomes effective immediately.
using a data register D0 through D1998; then the data of the data • When power is off, the changed preset values are cleared and the
registers becomes the preset value. original preset values are loaded.
• For data movement when changing, confirming, and clearing
• Directly after the CNTD instruction, the OUT, OUTN, SET, RST,
preset values, see "Changing, Confirming, and Clearing Preset
TML, TIM, TMH, TMS, TMLO, TIMO, TMHO, or TMSO instruction
Values for Timers and Counters" on page 4-17.
can be programmed.
• WindLDR ladder diagrams show CP (counter preset value) and
CC (counter current value) in advanced instruction devices.
Reset • The CNTD instruction cannot be used in an interrupt program.
CNTD C28 • If used, a user program execution error will result, turning on
I0 D5 Q0 special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the FC6A Series
Pulse
MicroSmart. For details about the user program execution errors,
see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.
I1

4-14 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 4: BASIC INSTRUCTIONS

CDPD (Double-Word Dual-Pulse Reversible Counter)

The double-word dual-pulse reversible counter CDPD has up and down pulse inputs, so the three inputs are required. The circuit
for a double-word dual-pulse reversible counter must be programmed in the following order: preset input, up-pulse input, down-
pulse input, the CDPD instruction, and a counter number C0 through C198, followed by a counter preset value from 0 to
4,294,967,295.
The preset value can be designated using a constant or a data register. When a data register is used, the double-word data of two
consecutive data registers becomes the preset value. For 32-bit data storage setting, see Chapter 5 "32-bit Data Storage Setting"
in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s Manual".

Ladder Diagram Program List • Double-word counter instructions use two consecutive
Preset Input
counters, and counters cannot be used more than once in
CDPD C2 Instruction Data a user program.
I0 100000 LOD I0 • The preset input must be turned on initially so that the
Up Pulse
LOD I1 current value returns to the preset value.
LOD I2
I1 • The preset input must be turned off before counting may
CDPD C2
Down Pulse begin.
100000
LOD I3 • When the up and down pulses are on simultaneously, no
I2 pulse is counted.
AND C2
OUT Q1 • The counter output is on only when the current value is 0.
I3 C2 Q1 • After the current value reaches 0 (counting down), it
changes to 4,294,967,295 on the next count down.
• After the current value reaches 4,294,967,295 (counting
Timing Chart
up), it changes to 0 on the next count up.
ON
Preset Input I0 • When power is off, the counter’s current value is held, and
OFF
can also be designated as “clear” type counters using the
ON
Up Pulse I1 Function Area Settings (see Chapter 5 "Memory Backup"
OFF
in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s
ON Manual".).
Down Pulse I2 •••
OFF
• Counter preset and current values can be changed using
Counter C2 Value 100000 100001 100000 99999 ••• 0 1 100000 100000 WindLDR without downloading the entire program to the
CPU again. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Online >
ON
Counter C2 Monitor > Monitor, then Online > Custom > New
OFF
Custom Monitor. To change a counter preset value,
select DEC(D) in the pull-down list box.
• When the preset or current value is changed during
counter operation, the change becomes effective
immediately.
• When power is off, the changed preset values are cleared
and the original preset values are loaded.
• For data movement when changing, confirming, and
clearing preset values, see "Changing, Confirming, and
Clearing Preset Values for Timers and Counters" on page
4-17.
• WindLDR ladder diagrams show CP (counter preset value)
and CC (counter current value) in advanced instruction
devices. The CNPD instruction cannot be used in an
interrupt program.
• If used, a user program execution error will result, turning
on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the
FC6A Series MicroSmart. For details about the user
program execution errors, see "User Program Execution
Errors" on page 3-10.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 4-15

4: BASIC INSTRUCTIONS

CUDD (Double-Word Up/Down Selection Reversible Counter)

The double-word up/down selection reversible counter CUDD has a selection input to switch the up/down gate, so the three inputs
are required. The circuit for a double-word up/down selection reversible counter must be programmed in the following order:
preset input, pulse input, up/down selection input, the CUDD instruction, and a counter number C0 through C198, followed by a
counter preset value from 0 to 4,294,967,295.
The preset value can be designated using a constant or a data register. When a data register is used, the double-word data of two
consecutive data registers becomes the preset value. For 32-bit data storage setting, see Chapter 5 "32-bit Data Storage Setting"
in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s Manual".

Ladder Diagram Program List • Double-word counter instructions use two

Preset Input consecutive counters, and counters cannot be used
CUDD C4 Instruction Data
more than once in a user program.
I0 100000 LOD I0 • The preset input must be turned on initially so that
Pulse Input LOD I1 the current value returns to the preset value.
LOD I2 • The preset input must be turned off before counting
I1 CUDD C4
U/D Selection
may begin.
100000 • The up mode is selected when the up/down selection
LOD I3
I2 input is on.
AND C4
• The down mode is selected when the up/down
OUT Q2
selection input is off.
I3 C4 Q2 • The counter output is on only when the current value
is 0.
• After the current value reaches 0 (counting down), it
Timing Chart
changes to 4,294,967,295 on the next count down.
ON • After the current value reaches 4,294,967,295
Preset Input I0
OFF (counting up), it changes to 0 on the next count up.
ON • When power is off, the counter’s current value is
Pulse Input I1 •••
OFF held, and can also be designated as “clear” type
ON counters using the Function Area Settings (see
U/D Selection Input I2
OFF Chapter 5 "Memory Backup" in the "FC6A Series
MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s Manual".).
Counter C4 Value 100000 100001 100000 99999 ••• 0 1 100000 100000
• Counter preset and current values can be changed
ON
using WindLDR without downloading the entire
Counter C4 program to the CPU again. From the WindLDR menu
OFF
bar, select Online > Monitor > Monitor, then
Online > Custom > New Custom Monitor. To
change a counter preset value, select DEC(D) in the
pull-down list box.
Valid Pulse Inputs
• When the preset or current value is changed during
The reset or preset input has priority over the pulse input. One counter operation, the change becomes effective
scan after the reset or preset input has changed from on to off, immediately.
the counter starts counting the pulse inputs as they change from • When power is off, the changed preset values are
off to on. cleared and the original preset values are loaded.
• For data movement when changing, confirming, and
clearing preset values, see "Changing, Confirming,
ON and Clearing Preset Values for Timers and Counters"
Reset/Preset OFF on page 4-17.
ON
• WindLDR ladder diagrams show CP (counter preset
Pulse OFF value) and CC (counter current value) in advanced
Valid Invalid Valid instruction devices. The CUDD instruction cannot be
More than one scan used in an interrupt program.
time is required.
• If used, a user program execution error will result,
turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR
LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart. For details
about the user program execution errors, see "User
Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

4-16 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 4: BASIC INSTRUCTIONS

Changing, Confirming, and Clearing Preset Values for Timers and Counters
Preset values for timers and counters can be changed by selecting Online > Monitor > Monitor, followed by Online > Custom
> New Custom Monitor on WindLDR for transferring a new value to the FC6A Series MicroSmart RAM as described on preceding
pages. After changing the preset values temporarily, the changes can be written to the user program in the FC6A Series
MicroSmart ROM or cleared from the RAM.
When the power is off, the temporarily changed preset values in the RAM are cleared and the original preset values are loaded.
Confirm the changed preset values to store them in the ROM. The timer/counter preset values can be confirmed only when FC6A
Series MicroSmart is stopped.

To access the PLC Status dialog box from the WindLDR menu bar, select Online > Monitor > Monitor, then Online > Status.

Clear Button
After pressing the Clear or
Confirm button, the display
Confirm Button
changes to “Unchanged.”

Data movement when changing a timer/counter preset value

When changing a timer/counter preset value using WindLDR FC6A Series MicroSmart
Custom Monitor on WindLDR, the new preset value is
ROM
written to the FC6A Series MicroSmart RAM. The user
program and preset values in the ROM are not User Program
changed. User Program Custom Monitor RAM
Note: The LCD screen and pushbuttons can also be used to
change preset values and confirm changed preset values.

New Preset Value

Data movement when confirming changed preset values

When the Confirm button is pressed before pressing WindLDR FC6A Series MicroSmart
the Clear button, the changed timer/counter preset
ROM
values in the FC6A Series MicroSmart RAM are written
to the ROM. User Program
Changed
When uploading the user program after confirming, User Program Confirm RAM Preset
the user program with changed preset values is Values
uploaded from the FC6A Series MicroSmart ROM to
WindLDR.

Data movement when clearing changed preset values to restore original values
Changing preset values for timers and counters in the WindLDR FC6A Series MicroSmart
FC6A Series MicroSmart RAM does not automatically
ROM
update preset values in the user memory, ROM. This
is useful for restoring original preset values. When User Program
Original
the Clear button is pressed before pressing the User Program Clear RAM Preset
Confirm button, the changed timer/counter preset Values
values are cleared from the RAM and the original
preset values are loaded from the ROM to the RAM.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 4-17

4: BASIC INSTRUCTIONS

CC= and CC>= (Counter Comparison)

The CC= instruction is an equivalent comparison instruction for counter current values. This instruction will constantly compare
current values to the value that has been programmed in. When the counter value equals the given value, the desired output will
be initiated.
The CC>= instruction is an equal to or greater than comparison instruction for counter current values. This instruction will
constantly compare current values to the value that has been programmed in. When the counter value is equal to or greater than
the given value, the desired output will be initiated.
When a counter comparison instruction is programmed, two addresses are required. For a constant, specify the value in the range
of 0 to 65,535.
To indirectly specify the value, specify it with a data register number, and specify the value of the data register in the range of 0 to
65,535.
The preset value can be designated using a decimal constant or a data register D0 through D1999. When a data register is used,
the data of the data register becomes the preset value.

Ladder Diagram (CC=) Program List

Counter # to compare with
Instruction Data

CC= C2 CC= C2
10 10
Q0
OUT Q0
Preset value to compare

Ladder Diagram (CC>=) Program List

CC>= C3 Instruction Data

D15 Q1 CC>= C3
D15
OUT Q1

• The CC= and CC>= instructions can be used repeatedly for different preset values.
• The comparison instructions only compare the current value. The status of the counter does not affect this function.
• The comparison instructions also serve as an implicit LOD instruction.
• The comparison instructions can be used with internal relays, which are ANDed or ORed at a separate program address.
• Like the LOD instruction, the comparison instructions can be followed by the AND and OR instructions.

Ladder Diagram Ladder Diagram Ladder Diagram

CC= C5 CC= C5 CC= C5

10 M0 10 I0 Q0 10 Q0

I0 M0 Q0 I0

Program List Program List Program List

Instruction Data Instruction Data Instruction Data
CC= C5 CC= C5 CC= C5
10 10 10
OUT M0 AND I0 OR I0
LOD I0 OUT Q0 OUT Q0
AND M0
OUT Q0

4-18 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 4: BASIC INSTRUCTIONS

Examples: CC= and CC>= (Counter Comparison)

Ladder Diagram 1 Program List

Reset
CNT C2 Instruction Data
I0 10 LOD I0
Pulse LOD I1
CNT C2
I1 10
CC= C2 CC= C2
5 5
Q0
OUT Q0
CC>= C2 CC³ C2
3 Q1 3
OUT Q1

Timing Chart
ON
Reset Input I0 OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ON
Pulse Input I1 OFF
•••

ON Output Q0 is on when counter C2 current value is 5.

C2 OFF
Output Q1 is turned on when counter C2 current
ON
Output Q0 value reaches 3 and remains on until counter C2 is
OFF
reset.
ON
Output Q1 OFF

Ladder Diagram 2 Program List Timing Chart

Reset 1 2 500 501 502
CNT C30 Instruction Data ON
1000 Pulse Input I2 •••
I1 LOD I1 OFF
Pulse
LOD I2 ON
Output Q0
CNT C30 OFF
I2
1000 Output Q0 is on when counter C30 current value is
CC= C30 CC= C30 500.
500 Q0 500
OUT Q0

Ladder Diagram 3 Program List Timing Chart

Reset 1 2 350 351 352
CNT C31 Instruction Data ON
500 Pulse Input I4 OFF
•••
I3 LOD I3
Pulse LOD I4 ON
CNT C31 Output Q1 OFF
I4 500 Output Q1 is turned on when counter C31 current
CC>= C31 CC>= C31 value reaches 350 and remains on until counter C31
350 350 is reset.
Q1
OUT Q1

Ladder Diagram 4 Program List Timing Chart

100 101 150 151 152
Reset Instruction Data
CNT C20 ON
500 Pulse Input I6 ••• •••
I5 LOD I5 OFF

Pulse LOD I6 ON
CNT C20 C20 (100) OFF
I6 500 ON
CC>= C20 Output Q2 OFF
CC>= C20
150 150
Q2 ON
OUT Q2 Output Q3 OFF
CC>= C20 CC>= C20
Output Q3 is on when counter C20 current value is
100 Q2 Q3 100
between 100 and 149.
ANDN Q2
OUT Q3 When the current value of C20 is between 150 and
500, Q2 is on.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 4-19

4: BASIC INSTRUCTIONS

DC= and DC>= (Data Register Comparison)

The DC= instruction is an equivalent comparison instruction for data register values. This instruction will constantly compare data
register values to the value that has been programmed in. When the data register value equals the given value, the desired output
will be initiated.
The DC>= instruction is an equal to or greater than comparison instruction for data register values. This instruction will constantly
compare data register values to the value that has been programmed in. When the data register value is equal to or greater than
the given value, the desired output will be initiated.
When a data register comparison instruction is programmed, two addresses are required. For a constant, specify the value in the
range of 0 to 65,535.
To indirectly specify the value, specify it with a data register number, and specify the value of the data register in the range of 0 to
65,535.
The preset value can be designated using a decimal constant or a data register D0 through D1999. When a data register is used,
the data of the data register becomes the preset value.
For LC (Load Compare) instructions, see "LC= (Load Compare Equal To)" on page 6-8.

Ladder Diagram (DC=) Program List

Data register # to compare with
Instruction Data

DC= D2 DC= D2
50 Q0 50
OUT Q0
Preset value to compare

Ladder Diagram (DC>=) Program List

DC>= D3 Instruction Data

D15 Q1 DC>= D3
D15
OUT Q1

• The DC= and DC>= instructions can be repeated for different preset values.
• The comparison instructions also serve as an implicit LOD instruction.
• The comparison instructions can be used with internal relays, which are ANDed or ORed at a separate program address.
• Like the LOD instruction, the comparison instructions can be followed by the AND and OR instructions.

Ladder Diagram Ladder Diagram Ladder Diagram

DC= D5 DC= D5 DC= D5

10 M0 10 I0 Q0 10 Q0

I0 M0 Q0 I0

Program List Program List Program List

Instruction Data Instruction Data Instruction Data

DC= D5 DC= D5 DC= D5
10 10 10
OUT M0 AND I0 OR I0
LOD I0 OUT Q0 OUT Q0
AND M0
OUT Q0

4-20 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 4: BASIC INSTRUCTIONS

Examples: DC= and DC>= (Data Register Comparison)

Ladder Diagram 1 Program List

MOV(W) S1 – D1 – REP Instruction Data

I1 D10 D2 LOD I1
MOV(W)
DC= D2
D10 –
5 Q0 D2 –
DC>= D2 DC= D2
3 5
Q1
OUT Q0
DC³ D2
3
OUT Q1
Timing Chart
ON
Input I1 OFF

4 4 10 10 5 5 3 3 7 3 5 2 2 2
D10 Value

0 4 10 10 5 5 3 3 3 3 5 2 2 2
D2 Value
Output Q0 is on when data register D2 value is 5.
ON
Output Q0 Output Q1 is on when data register D2 value is 3
OFF
or more.
ON
Output Q1 OFF

Ladder Diagram 2 Timing Chart

400 500 500 210 210 0 500 700
MOV(W) S1 – D1 – REP D30 Value
I1 D50 D30
ON
Output Q0 OFF
DC= D30
500 Q0 Output Q0 is on when data register D30 value is 500.

Ladder Diagram 3 Timing Chart

200 355 521 249 200 350 390 600
MOV(W) S1 – D1 – REP D15 Value
I1 D0 D15
ON
Output I0 OFF
DC>= D15
350 Q1 Output Q1 is on when data register D15 value is 350 or more.

Ladder Diagram 4 Timing Chart

90 120 180 150 80 160 110 95
MOV(W) S1 – D1 – REP D20 Value
I1 D100 D20
ON
Output Q0 OFF
DC>= D20
150 Q0 ON
Output Q2 OFF
DC>= D20
100 Output Q2 is on while data register D20 value is between 149 and 100.
Q0 Q2
When the value of D20 is 150 or higher, output Q0 is on.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 4-21

4: BASIC INSTRUCTIONS

SFR and SFRN (Forward and Reverse Shift Register)

FC6A Series MicroSmart have a shift register consisting of 256 bits which are allocated to R0 through R255. Any number of
available bits can be selected to form a train of bits which store on or off status. The on/off data of constituent bits is shifted in the
forward direction (forward shift register) or in the reverse direction (reverse shift register) when a pulse input is turned on.

Forward Shift Register (SFR)

When SFR instructions are programmed, two addresses are always required. The SFR instruction is entered, followed by a shift
register number selected from appropriate device addresses. The shift register number corresponds to the first, or head bit. The
number of bits is the second required address after the SFR instruction.
The SFR instruction requires three inputs. The forward shift register circuit must be programmed in the following order: reset
input, pulse input, data input, and the SFR instruction, followed by the first bit and the number of bits.

Ladder Diagram First Bit Program List

Reset
Instruction Data
SFR R0
I0 4 LOD I0
Pulse
First Bit R0 to R255 LOD I1
# of Bits
LOD I2
I1 # of Bits 1 to 256
SFR R0
Data
4

I2

Structural Diagram

Shift Direction
Reset

I0
Data
R0 R1 R2 R3
I2
Pulse

I1 First Bit: R0 # of Bits: 4

Reset Input
The reset input will cause the value of each bit of the shift register to return to zero. Initialize pulse special internal relay, M8120,
may be used to initialize the shift register at start-up.

Pulse Input
The pulse input triggers the data to shift. The shift is in the forward direction for a forward shift register and in reverse for a
reverse shift register. A data shift will occur upon the leading edge of a pulse; that is, when the pulse turns on. If the pulse has
been on and stays on, no data shift will occur.

Data Input
The data input is the information which is shifted into the first bit when a forward data shift occurs, or into the last bit when a
reverse data shift occurs.
Note: When power is turned off, the statuses of all shift register bits are normally cleared. It is also possible to maintain the statuses of shift
register bits by using the Function Area Settings as required. See Chapter 5 "Functions and Settings" - "Memory Backup" in the "FC6A Series
MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s Manual".

Note: The SFR instruction cannot be used in an interrupt program. If used, a user program execution error will result, turning on special internal
relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart. For details about the user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution
Errors" on page 3-10.

Note: For restrictions on ladder programming of shift register instructions, see "Restriction on Ladder Programming" on page 4-31.

4-22 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 4: BASIC INSTRUCTIONS

Ladder Diagram
Program List
Reset
SFR R0 Instruction Data
I0 4
LOD I0
Pulse
LOD I1
LOD I2
I1
SFR R0
Data
4
I2 LOD R0
OUT Q0
LOD R1
R0 Q0 OUT Q1
LOD R2
OUT Q2
R1 Q1 LOD R3
OUT Q3
R2 Q2
Timing Chart

R3 Q3 ON
Reset Input I0 OFF
One or more scans are required
ON
Pulse Input I1 OFF

ON
Data Input I2 OFF

ON
R0/Q0 OFF

ON
R1/Q1 OFF

ON
R2/Q2 OFF

ON
R3/Q3 OFF

Ladder Diagram Program List

Reset
Instruction Data
SFR R0
I1 4 Q3 LOD I1
Pulse LOD I2
LOD I3
I2 SFR R0
Data
4
OUT Q3
I3
LOD R0
OUT Q0
R0 Q0 LOD R1
OUT Q1

R1 Q1
• The last bit status output can be programmed directly after the SFR
instruction. In this example, the status of bit R3 is read to output Q3.
• Each bit can be loaded using the LOD R# instruction.

Setting and Resetting Shift Register Bits

• Any shift register bit can be turned on using the SET instruction.
S • Any shift register bit can be turned off using the RST instruction.
I0 R0 • The SET or RST instruction is actuated by any input condition.

R
I1 R3

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 4-23

4: BASIC INSTRUCTIONS

Reverse Shift Register (SFRN)

For reverse shifting, use the SFRN instruction. When SFRN instructions are programmed, two addresses are always required. The
SFRN instructions are entered, followed by a shift register number selected from appropriate device addresses. The shift register
number corresponds to the lowest bit number in a string. The number of bits is the second required address after the SFRN
instructions.
The SFRN instruction requires three inputs. The reverse shift register circuit must be programmed in the following order: reset
input, pulse input, data input, and the SFRN instruction, followed by the last bit and the number of bits.

Ladder Diagram Last Bit Program List

Reset
Instruction Data
SFRN R20
I0 7 Q0 LOD I0
Pulse
Last Bit R0 to R255 LOD I1
# of Bits LOD I2
I1 # of Bits 1 to 256
SFRN R20
Data
7
OUT Q0
I2
LOD R21
OUT Q1
R21 Q1 LOD R23
OUT Q2
LOD R25
R23 Q2 OUT Q3

R25 Q3

• The last bit status output can be programmed directly after the SFRN instruction. In this example, the status of bit R20 is read to output Q0.
• Each bit can be loaded using the LOD R# instructions.
• For details of reset, pulse, and data inputs, see "Forward Shift Register (SFR)" on page 4-22.

Structural Diagram

Shift Direction
Reset

I0
Data
R20 R21 R22 R23 R24 R25 R26
I2
Pulse

Last Bit: R20 # of Bits: 7 I1

Note: Output is initiated only for those bits highlighted in bold print.

Note: When power is turned off, the statuses of all shift register bits are normally cleared. It is also possible to maintain the statuses of shift register
bits by using the Function Area Settings as required. See Chapter 5 "Functions and Settings" - "Memory Backup" in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-
in-One Type User’s Manual".

Note: The SFRN instruction cannot be used in an interrupt program. If used, a user program execution error will result, turning on special internal
relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart. For details about the user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution
Errors" on page 3-10.

Note: For restrictions on ladder programming of shift register instructions, see "Restriction on Ladder Programming" on page 4-31.

4-24 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 4: BASIC INSTRUCTIONS

Bidirectional Shift Register

A bidirectional shift register can be created by first programming the SFR instruction as detailed in the "Forward Shift Register
(SFR)" on page 4-22. Next, the SFRN instruction is programed as detailed in the "Reverse Shift Register (SFRN)" on page 4-24.

Ladder Diagram Program List

Reset
SFR R22 Instruction Data
I1 6 LOD I1
Pulse LOD I2
LOD I3
I2 SFR R22
Data
6
LOD I4
I3
Reset
LOD I5
SFRN R22 LOD I6
I4 6 SFRN R22
Pulse 6
LOD R23
I5 OUT Q0
Data
LOD R24
OUT Q1
I6
LOD R26
OUT Q2
R23 Q0

R24 Q1

R26 Q2

Structural Diagram
Forward Shifting

Reset First Bit: R22 # of Bits: 6 Reset

I1 I4
Data Data
R22 R23 R24 R25 R26 R27
I3 I6
Pulse Pulse
Last Bit: R22 # of Bits: 6
I2 I5
Reverse Shifting

Note: Output is initiated only for those bits highlighted in bold print.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 4-25

4: BASIC INSTRUCTIONS

SOTU and SOTD (Single Output Up and Down)

The SOTU instruction “looks for” the transition of a given input from off to on. The SOTD instruction looks for the transition of a
given input from on to off. When this transition occurs, the desired output will turn on for the length of one scan. The SOTU or
SOTD instruction converts an input signal to a “one-shot” pulse signal.
A total of 1,024 SOTU and SOTD instructions can be used in a user program.
If operation is started while the given input is already on, the SOTU output will not turn on. The transition from off to on is what
triggers the SOTU instruction.
The SOTU or SOTD instructions cannot be used in an interrupt program.
If used, a user program execution error will result, turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the FC6A Series
MicroSmart. For details about the user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.
When a CPU relay is defined as the SOTU or SOTD output, it may not operate if the scan time is not compatible with relay
requirements.

Ladder Diagram Program List

Instruction Data
SOTU
I0 Q0 LOD I0
SOTU
SOTD OUT Q0
I0 Q1 LOD I0
SOTD
OUT Q1

Note: For restrictions on ladder programming of SOTU and SOTD instructions, see "Restriction on Ladder Programming" on page 4-31.

Timing Chart
ON
Input I0 OFF

ON
Output Q0 OFF

ON T T
Output Q1 OFF
T T

Note: “T” equals one scan time (one-shot pulse).

There is a special case when the SOTU and SOTD instructions are used between the MCS and MCR instructions (see "MCS and
MCR (Master Control Set and Reset)" on page 4-27). If input I2 to the SOTU instruction turns on while input I1 to the MCS
instruction is on, then the SOTU output turns on. If input I2 to the SOTD instruction turns off while input I1 is on, then the SOTD
output turns on. If input I1 turns on while input I2 is on, then the SOTU output turns on. However, if input I1 turns off while input
I2 is on, then the SOTD output does not turn on as shown below.

Ladder Diagram Timing Chart

ON
MCS Input I1 OFF
I1
ON
Input I2 OFF
SOTU
I2 M1 ON
SOTU Output M1 OFF
SOTD ON
I2 M2 SOTD Output M2 OFF

MCR
No Output No Output

4-26 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 4: BASIC INSTRUCTIONS

MCS and MCR (Master Control Set and Reset)

The MCS (master control set) instruction is usually used in combination with the MCR (master control reset) instruction. The MCS
instruction can also be used with the END instruction, instead of the MCR instruction.
When the input preceding the MCS instruction is off, the MCS is executed so that all inputs to the portion between the MCS and the
MCR are forced off. When the input preceding the MCS instruction is on, the MCS is not executed so that the program following it
is executed according to the actual input statuses.
When the input condition to the MCS instruction is off and the MCS is executed, other instructions between the MCS and MCR are
executed as follows:

Instruction Status
SOTU Rising edges (ON pulses) are not detected.
SOTD Falling edges (OFF pulses) are not detected.
OUT All are turned off.
OUTN All are turned on.
SET and RST All are held in current status.
Current values are reset to zero.
TML, TIM, TMH, and TMS
Timeout statuses are turned off.
Current values are held.
CNT, CDP, and CUD Pulse inputs are turned off.
Countout statuses are turned off.
Shift register bit statuses are held.
SFR and SFRN Pulse inputs are turned off.
The output from the last bit is turned off.

Input conditions cannot be set for the MCR instruction.

More than one MCS instruction can be used with one MCR instruction.
Corresponding MCS/MCR instructions cannot be nested within another pair of corresponding MCS/MCR instructions.

Ladder Diagram Program List

Instruction Data
MCS
I0 LOD I0
MCS
LOD I1
OUT Q0
I1 Q0 MCR

MCR

Timing Chart
ON
Input I0 OFF

ON
Input I1 OFF

ON
Output Q0 OFF

When input I0 is off, MCS is executed so that the subsequent input is forced off.

When input I0 is on, MCS is not executed so that the following program is
executed according to the actual input statuses.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 4-27

4: BASIC INSTRUCTIONS

Multiple Usage of MCS instructions

Ladder Diagram Program List

Instruction Data
MCS
I1 LOD I1
MCS
LOD I2
I2 Q0 OUT Q0
LOD I3
MCS MCS
I3
LOD I4
OUT Q1
I4 Q1 LOD I5
MCS
MCS LOD I6
I5 OUT Q2
MCR

I6 Q2

MCR

This master control circuit will give priority to I1, I3, and I5, in that order.
When input I1 is off, the first MCS is executed so that subsequent inputs I2 through I6 are forced off.
When input I1 is on, the first MCS is not executed so that the following program is executed according to the actual input statuses
of I2 through I6.
When I1 is on and I3 is off, the second MCS is executed so that subsequent inputs I4 through I6 are forced off.
When both I1 and I3 are on, the first and second MCSs are not executed so that the following program is executed according to
the actual input statuses of I4 through I6.

Counter and Shift Register in Master Control Circuit

Ladder Diagram
When input I1 is on, the MCS is not executed so that the counter and shift register are executed according
MCS to the actual status of subsequent inputs I2 through I4.
I1
Reset When input I1 is off, the MCS is executed so that subsequent inputs I2 through I4 are forced off.
CNT C2
When input I1 is turned on while input I2 is on, the counter and shift register pulse inputs are turned on as
I3 10
shown below.
Pulse

I2
Reset
SFR R0
I3 4
Pulse Timing Chart
ON
Input I1 OFF
I2
Data ON
Input I2 OFF
I4
ON
Counter Pulse Input OFF
MCR
ON
Shift Register Pulse Input OFF

4-28 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 4: BASIC INSTRUCTIONS

JMP (Jump) and JEND (Jump End)

The JMP (jump) instruction is usually used in combination with the JEND (jump end) instruction. At the end of a program, the JMP
instruction can also be used with the END instruction, instead of the JEND instruction.
These instructions are used to proceed through the portion of the program between the JMP and the JEND without processing.
This is similar to the MCS/MCR instructions, except that the portion of the program between the MCS and MCR instruction is
executed.
When the operation result immediately before the JMP instruction is on, the JMP is valid and the program is not executed. When
the operation result immediately before the JMP instruction is off, the JMP is invalid and the program is executed.
When the input condition to the JMP instruction is on and the JMP is executed, other instructions between the JMP and JEND are
executed as follows:

Instruction Status
SOTU Rising edges (ON pulses) are not detected.
SOTD Falling edges (OFF pulses) are not detected.
OUT and OUTN All are held in current status.
SET and RST All are held in current status.
Current values are held.
TML, TIM, TMH, and TMS
Timeout statuses are held.
Current values are held.
CNT, CDP, and CUD Pulse inputs are turned off.
Countout statuses are held.
Shift register bit statuses are held.
SFR and SFRN Pulse inputs are turned off.
The output from the last bit is held.

Input conditions cannot be set for the JEND instruction.

More than one JMP instruction can be used with one JEND instruction.
Corresponding JMP/JEND instructions cannot be nested within another pair of corresponding JMP/JEND instructions.

Ladder Diagram Program List

Instruction Data
JMP
I0 LOD I0
JMP
LOD I1
OUT Q0
I1 Q0 JEND

JEND

Timing Chart
ON
Input I0 OFF

ON
Input I1 OFF

ON
Output Q0 OFF

When input I0 is on, JMP is executed so that the subsequent output

status is held.

When input I0 is off, JMP is not executed so that the following program is
executed according to the actual input statuses.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 4-29

4: BASIC INSTRUCTIONS

Ladder Diagram Program List

Instruction Data
JMP
I1 LOD I1
JMP
LOD I2
I2 Q0 OUT Q0
LOD I3
JMP
JMP
I3
LOD I4
OUT Q1
I4 Q1 LOD I5
JMP
JMP LOD I6
I5 OUT Q2
JEND

I6 Q2

JEND

This jump circuit will give priority to I1, I3, and I5, in that order.

When input I1 is on, the first JMP is executed so that subsequent output statuses of Q0 through Q2 are held.

When input I1 is off, the first JMP is not executed so that the following program is executed according to the actual input statuses of I2 through
I6.

When I1 is off and I3 is on, the second JMP is executed so that subsequent output statuses of Q1 and Q2 are held.
When both I1 and I3 are off, the first and second JMPs are not executed so that the following program is executed according to the actual input
statuses of I4 through I6.

END
The END instruction is always required at the end of a program; however, it is not necessary to program the END instruction after
the last programmed instruction. WindLDR automatically appends the END instruction at the end of a program.
A scan is the execution of all instructions from address zero to the END instruction. The time required for this execution is referred
to as one scan time. The scan time varies with respect to program length, which corresponds to the address where the END
instruction is found.
During the scan time, program instructions are processed sequentially. This is why the output instruction closest to the END
instruction has priority over a previous instruction for the same output. No output is initiated until all logic within a scan is
processed.
Output occurs simultaneously, and this is the first part of the END instruction execution. The second part of the END instruction
execution is to monitor all inputs, also done simultaneously. Then program instructions are ready to be processed sequentially
once again.

Ladder Diagram Program List

Instruction Data

I0 Q0 LOD I0
OUT Q0
LOD I1
I1 Q1 OUT Q1
END
END

4-30 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 4: BASIC INSTRUCTIONS

Restriction on Ladder Programming

Due to the structure of WindLDR, the following ladder diagram cannot be programmed — a closed circuit block is formed by
vertical lines, except for right and left power rails, and the closed circuit block contains one or more prohibited instructions shown
in the table below.

Left Power Rail Right Power Rail

Program Prohibited Program

Relay 1 Instruction

Vertical Vertical
Line A Relay 2 Line B

Closed Circuit Block

OUT, OUTN, SET, RST, TML, TIM, TMH, TMS, TMLO, TIMO, TMHO, TMSO, CNT, CDP, CUD, CNTD, CDPD,
Prohibited Instructions
CUDD, SFR, SFRN, SOTU, SOTD
When converting the ladder program, an error message is shown, such as “TIM follows an invalid device.”
Error Detection
Conversion fails to create mnemonics and the program is not downloaded to the FC6A Series MicroSmart.

Modifying Prohibited Ladder Programs

Intended operation can be performed by modifying the prohibited ladder program as shown in the examples below:

Prohibited Ladder Program 1 Modified Ladder Program 1

TIM T0 TIM T0
M0 M1 100 Q0 M0 M1 100

M2 M0 T0 Q0

M2

Prohibited Ladder Program 2 Modified Ladder Program 2

TIM T0 TIM T0
M0 M1 100 Q0 M0 M1 100

TIM T1 TIM T1
M2 50 M2 50

T0 Q0

T1

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 4-31

4: BASIC INSTRUCTIONS

4-32 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

5: MOVE INSTRUCTIONS
Introduction
Data can be moved using the MOV (move), MOVN (move not), IMOV (indirect move), or IMOVN (indirect move not) instruction.
The moved data is 16- or 32-bit data, and the repeat operation can also be used to increase the quantity of data moved. In the
MOV or MOVN instruction, the source and destination device are designated by S1 and D1 directly. In the IMOV or IMOVN
instruction, the source and destination device are determined by the offset values designated by S2 and D2 added to source device
S1 and destination device D1.
The BMOV (block move) instruction is useful to move consecutive blocks of timer, counter, and data register values.
The IBMV (indirect bit move) and IBMVN (indirect bit move not) instructions move one bit of data from a source device to a
destination device. Both devices are determined by adding an offset to the device.
NSET (N data set) and NRS (N data repeat set) instructions can be used to set values to a group of devices. The XCHG (exchange)
instruction is used to swap word or double-word data between two devices. The current timer or counter values can be changed
using the TCCST (timer/counter current value store) instruction.
Since the move instructions are executed in each scan while input is on, a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be
used.

MOV (Move)
S1 → D1
MOV(*) S1(R) D1(R) REP When input is on, 16- or 32-bit data from device assigned by S1 is moved to device
***** ***** ** assigned by D1.

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) First device address to move X X X X X X X X 1-99
D1 (Destination 1) First device address to move to — X X X X X — 1-99

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

Internal relays M0 through M7997 and M10000 through M17497 can be designated as D1. Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1.
Both internal relays M0 through M7997 and M10000 through M17497 and special internal relays can be designated as source devices.

When T (timer) or C (counter) is used as S1, the timer/counter current value (TC or CC) is displayed. When T (timer) or C (counter) is used as D1,
the data is written in as a preset value (TP or CP) which can be 0 through 65,535.

When F (float) data is selected, only data register and constant can be designated as S1, and only data register can be designated as D1.

When F (float) data is selected and S1 does not comply with the normal floating-point format, a user program execution error will result, turning on
special internal relay M8004 and ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart. For user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors"
on page 3-10.

Valid Data Types

W (word) X When a bit device such as I (input), Q (output), M (internal relay), or R (shift register) is assigned as the source
I (integer) X or destination, 16 points (word or integer data) or 32 points (double-word or long data) are used. When repeat is
D (double word) X assigned for a bit device, the quantity of device bits increases in 16- or 32-point increments.
L (long) X When a word device such as T (timer), C (counter), or D (data register) is assigned as the source or destination,
F (float) X 1 point (word or integer data) or 2 points (double-word, long, or float data) are used. When repeat is assigned for
a word device, the quantity of device words increases in 1- or 2-point increments.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 5-1

5: MOVE INSTRUCTIONS

Examples: MOV
Data Type: Word

D10 → M0
MOV(W) S1 – D1 – REP When input I2 is on, data in data register D10 assigned by source device S1 is moved to
I2 D10 M0 16 internal relays starting with M0 assigned by destination device D1.

D10 12345 M0 through M7, M10 through M17

Data in the source data register is converted into 16-bit binary data, and the ON/ MSB LSB
OFF statuses of the 16 bits are moved to internal relays M0 through M7 and M10
0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1
through M17. M0 is the LSB (least significant bit). M17 is the MSB (most significant M17 M10 M7 M0
bit).

Data Type: Word

810 → D2
When input I0 is on, constant 810 assigned by source D0
MOV(W) S1 – D1 – REP
I0 810 D2 device S1 is moved to data register D2 assigned by D1
destination device D1. D2 810 810

Data move operation for integer data is the same as for word data.

Data Type: Double Word

810 → D2·D3
MOV(D) S1 – D1 – REP When input I0 is on, constant 810 assigned by source D0
I0 810 D2 device S1 is moved to data registers D2 and D3 assigned D1
by destination device D1.
D2 0 0
D3 810 810

Data move operation for the long data type is the same as for the double-word data type.

Data Type: Word

D10 → D2
When input I1 is on, data in data register D10 assigned D0
MOV(W) S1 – D1 – REP
I1 D10 D2 by source device S1 is moved to data register D2 D1
assigned by destination device D1. D2 930

D10 930

Data Type: Double Word

D10·D11 → D2·D3
When input I1 is on, data in data registers D10 and D11 D0
MOV(D) S1 – D1 – REP
I1 D10 D2 assigned by source device S1 is moved to data registers D1
D2 and D3 assigned by destination device D1. D2
D3

D10 Double-
word
D11 Data

Double-word Data Move in Data Registers

When a data register, timer, or counter is selected as a double-word device, the upper-word data is loaded from or stored to the
first device selected. The lower-word data is loaded from or stored to the subsequent device.

Double-word Destination Device: Data Register

Double-word Data Move to Data Registers
MOV(D) S1 – D1 – REP Source Data
4660
305419896 D0 High Word D0
I1 305419896 (1234h)
(12345678h)
22136
Low Word D1
(5678h)

5-2 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 5: MOVE INSTRUCTIONS

Repeat Operation in the Move Instructions

Repeat Source Device
When the S1 (source) is set to repeat, as many devices as the repeat cycles, starting with the device designated by S1, are moved
to the destination. As a result, only the last of the source devices is moved to the destination.
• Data Type: Word

Source (Repeat = 3) Destination (Repeat = 0)

MOV(W) S1 R D1 – REP
D10 110 D20 112
I1 D10 D20 3
D11 111 D21
D12 112 D22
• Data Type: Double Word

Source (Repeat = 3) Destination (Repeat = 0)

MOV(D) S1 R D1 – REP
D10 110 D20 114
I2 D10 D20 3
D11 111 D21 115
D12 112 D22
D13 113 D23
D14 114 D24
D15 115 D25

Repeat Destination Device

When the D1 (destination) is designated to repeat, the source device designated by S1 is moved to all destination devices as many
times as the repeat cycles, starting with the destination designated by D1.
• Data Type: Word

Source (Repeat = 0) Destination (Repeat = 3)

MOV(W) S1 – D1 R REP
D10 110 D20 110
I3 D10 D20 3
D11 111 D21 110
D12 112 D22 110
• Data Type: Double Word

Source (Repeat = 0) Destination (Repeat = 3)

MOV(D) S1 – D1 R REP
D10 110 D20 110
I4 D10 D20 3
D11 111 D21 111
D12 112 D22 110
D13 113 D23 111
D14 114 D24 110
D15 115 D25 111

Repeat Source and Destination Devices

When both S1 (source) and D1 (destination) are set to repeat, as many devices as the repeat cycles, starting with the device
designated by S1, are moved to the same quantity of devices starting with the device designated by D1.
Note: The BMOV (block move) instruction has the same effect as the MOV instruction with both the source and destination designated to repeat.

• Data Type: Word

Source (Repeat = 3) Destination (Repeat = 3)

MOV(W) S1 R D1 R REP
D10 110 D20 110
I5 D10 D20 3
D11 111 D21 111
D12 112 D22 112

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 5-3

5: MOVE INSTRUCTIONS

• Data Type: Double Word

Source (Repeat = 3) Destination (Repeat = 3)

MOV(D) S1 R D1 R REP
I6 D10 D20 3 D10 110 D20 110
D11 111 D21 111
D12 112 D22 112
D13 113 D23 113
D14 114 D24 114
D15 115 D25 115
• Data Type: Float

When the source data does not comply with the normal floating-point format in any repeat operation, a user program execution
error occurs, and the source data is not moved to the destination.

Source (Repeat = 3) Destination (Repeat = 3)

MOV(F) S1 R D1 R REP D10·D11 1.5 D20·D21 1.5
I1 D10 D20 3
D12·D13 Invalid D22·D23 11.1
D14·D15 3.44 D24·D25 3.44

Repeat Bit Devices

The MOV (move) instruction moves 16-bit data (word or integer data) or 32-bit data (double-word or integer data). When a bit
device such as input, output, internal relay, or shift register is designated as the source or destination device, 16 or 32 bits starting
with the one designated by S1 or D1 are the target data. If a repeat operation is designated for a bit device, the target data
increases in 16- or 32-bit increments, depending on the selected data type.
• Data Type: Word

Source (Repeat = 0) Destination (Repeat = 3)

MOV(W) S1 – D1 R REP
D10 M0 3 D10 110 M0 through M7, M10 through M17
I10
D11 111 M20 through M27, M30 through M37
D12 112 M40 through M47, M50 through M57

• Data Type: Double Word

Source (Repeat = 0) Destination (Repeat = 3)

MOV(D) S1 – D1 R REP
D10 M0 3 D10 110 M0 through M7, M10 through M17
I11
D11 111 M20 through M27, M30 through M37
D12 112 M40 through M47, M50 through M57
D13 113 M60 through M67, M70 through M77
D14 114 M80 through M87, M90 through M97
D15 115 M100 through M107, M110 through M117

Overlapped Devices by Repeat

If the repeat operation is set for both the source and destination and if a portion of the source and destination areas overlap each
other, then the source data in the overlapped area also changes.

Before Execution After Execution

SOTU MOV(W) S1 R D1 R REP
I12 D10 D12 4 D10 1 D10 1
D11 2 D11 2
Source: D10 through D13 (Repeat = 4)
Destination: D12 through D15 (Repeat = 4) D12 3 D12 1
D13 4 D13 2
D14 D14 1
D15 D15 2

5-4 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 5: MOVE INSTRUCTIONS

MOVN (Move Not)

S1 NOT → D1
MOVN(*) S1(R) D1(R) REP When input is on, 16- or 32-bit data from device assigned by S1 is inverted bit by bit
***** ***** ** and moved to device assigned by D1.

Valid Devices
Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat
S1 (Source 1) First device address to move X X X X X X X X 1-99
D1 (Destination 1) First device address to move to — X X X X X — 1-99

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

Internal relays M0 through M7997 and M10000 through M17497 can be designated as D1. Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1.

When T (timer) or C (counter) is used as S1, the timer/counter current value (TC or CC) is displayed. When T (timer) or C (counter) is used as D1,
the data is written in as a preset value (TP or CP) which can be 0 through 65,535.

Valid Data Types

W (word) X When a bit device such as I (input), Q (output), M (internal relay), or R (shift register) is assigned as the source
I (integer) X or destination, 16 points (word or integer data) or 32 points (double-word or long data) are used. When repeat is
D (double word) X set for a bit device, the quantity of device bits increases in 16- or 32-point increments.
L (long) X When a word device such as T (timer), C (counter), or D (data register) is assigned as the source or destination, 1
F (float) — point (word or integer data) or 2 points (double-word or long data) are used. When repeat is set for a word device, the
quantity of device words increases in 1- or 2-point increments.

Examples: MOVN
M10 NOT → M50
MOVN(W) S1 – D1 – REP When input I0 is on, the 16 internal relays, starting with M10 assigned by source device
I0 M10 M50
S1, are inverted bit by bit and moved to 16 internal relays starting with M50 assigned by
destination device D1.

M10 through M17, M20 through M27 NOT M50 through M57, M60 through M67
The ON/OFF statuses of the 16 internal relays M10 through M17
MSB S1 LSB
Before inversion and M20 through M27 are inverted and moved to 16 internal
(M0027-M0010): 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 relays M50 through M57 and M60 through M67. M50 is the LSB
D1 (least significant bit), and M67 is the MSB (most significant bit).
MSB LSB
After inversion
(M0067-M0050): 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0

810 NOT → D2
MOVN(W) S1 – D1 – REP When input I1 is on, decimal constant 810 assigned by source device S1 is converted into
I1 810 D2 16-bit binary data, and the ON/OFF statuses of the 16 bits are inverted and moved to
data register D2 assigned by destination device D1.

MSB S1 LSB
Before inversion (810): 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 D0

D1 D1
MSB LSB
After inversion (64725): 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 D2 64725 810

D30 NOT → D20

D20 64605
MOVN(W) S1 – D1 – REP When input I2 is on, the data in data register D30,
I2 D30 D20
assigned by S1, is inverted bit by bit and moved to data
register D20 assigned by D1. D30 930

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 5-5

5: MOVE INSTRUCTIONS

IMOV (Indirect Move)

S1 + S2 → D1 + D2
IMOV(*) S1(R) S2 D1(R) D2 REP When input is on, the values contained in devices assigned by S1 and
***** ***** ***** ***** ** S2 are added together to determine the data source. The 16- or 32-
bit data is then moved to the destination, which is determined by the
sum of values contained in devices assigned by D1 and D2.

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) Base address to move from X X X X X X X — 1-99
S2 (Source 2) Offset for S1 X X X X X X X — —
D1 (Destination 1) Base address to move to — X X X X X — 1-99
D2 (Destination 2) Offset for D1 X X X X X X X — —
For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

Internal relays M0 through M7997 and M10000 through M17497 can be designated as D1. Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1.

When T (timer) or C (counter) is used as S1, S2, or D2, the device data is the timer/counter current value (TC or CC). When T (timer) or C (counter)
is used as D1, the device data is the timer/counter preset value (TP or CP) which can be 0 through 65,535.

When F (float) data is selected, only data register can be designated as S1 or D1.

When F (float) data is selected and S1 does not comply with the normal floating-point format, a user program execution error will result, turning on
special internal relay M8004 and ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart.

Source device S2 or destination device D2 does not have to be assigned. If S2 or D2 is not assigned, the source or destination device is determined
by S1 or D1 without offset.

Make sure that the source data determined by S1 + S2 and the destination data determined by D1 + D2 are within the valid device range. If the
derived source or destination device exceeds the valid device range, a user program execution error will result, turning on special internal relay
M8004 and the ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart. For user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

Valid Data Types

W (word) X When S1 (source 1) is a word device and D1 (destination 1) is a Q, M, or R bit device, the data is transferred as
I (integer) — 16 points or 32 bits, depending on the data type. When repeat is assigned for a bit device, the quantity of device
D (double word) X bits increases in 16- or 32-point increments.
L (long) — When a word device such as T (timer), C (counter), or D (data register) is assigned as the source or destination,
F (float) X 1 point (word data) or 2 points (double-word or float data) are used. When repeat is assigned for a word device,
the quantity of device words increases in 1- or 2-point increments.

5-6 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 5: MOVE INSTRUCTIONS

Example: IMOV
• Data Type: Word

IMOV(W) S1 – S2 D1 – D2 REP
I0 D20 C10 D10 D25 D20

D20 + C10 → D10 + D25 D21

D22
Source device S1 and destination device D1 determine the type of device. Source device S2 and destination device D2
are the offset values to determine the source and destination devices. D23

If the current value of counter C10 assigned by source device S2 is 4, the source data is determined by adding the D24 6450
offset value to data register D20 assigned by source device S1: D25 20
D(20 + 4) = D24

If data register D25 contains a value of 20, the destination is determined by adding the offset value to data register D30 6450
D10 assigned by destination device D1:

D(10 + 20) = D30 C10 4

As a result, when input I0 is on, the data in data register D24 is moved to data register D30.

• Data Type: Float

D20
IMOV(F) S1 – S2 D1 – D2 REP
I0 D20 D50 D10 D51 D21
D22·D23 2.73
D20 + D50 → D10 + D51

If data register D50 contains a value of 2, the source data is determined by adding the offset value to data register
D30·D31 2.73
D20 assigned by source device S1: D(20 + 2) = D22

If data register D51 contains a value of 20, the destination is determined by adding the offset value to data register
D50 2
D10 assigned by destination device D1: D(10 + 20) = D30
D51 20
As a result, when input I0 is on, the data in data registers D22·D23 is moved to data registers D30·D31.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 5-7

5: MOVE INSTRUCTIONS

IMOVN (Indirect Move Not)

S1 + S2 NOT → D1 + D2
IMOVN(*) S1(R) S2 D1(R) D2 REP When input is on, the values contained in devices assigned by S1 and
***** ***** ***** ***** ** S2 are added together to determine the data source. The 16- or 32-bit
data is then inverted and moved to the destination, which is determined
by the sum of values contained in devices assigned by D1 and D2.

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) Base address to move from X X X X X X X — 1-99
S2 (Source 2) Offset for S1 X X X X X X X — —
D1 (Destination 1) Base address to move to — X X X X X — 1-99
D2 (Destination 2) Offset for D1 X X X X X X X — —

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.
Internal relays M0 through M7997 and M10000 through M17497 can be designated as D1. Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1.
When T (timer) or C (counter) is used as S1, S2, or D2, the device data is the timer/counter current value (TC or CC). When T (timer) or C (counter)
is used as D1, the device data is the timer/counter preset value (TP or CP), 0 through 65,535.
Source device S2 or destination device D2 does not have to be assigned. If S2 or D2 is not assigned, the source or destination device is determined
by S1 or D1 without offset.
Make sure that the source data determined by S1 + S2 and the destination data determined by D1 + D2 are within the valid device range. If the
derived source or destination device exceeds the valid device range, a user program execution error will result, turning on special internal relay
M8004 and the ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart. For user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

Valid Data Types

W (word) X When S1 (source 1) is a word device and D1 (destination 1) is a Q, M, or R bit device, the data is transferred as
I (integer) — 16 points or 32 bits, depending on the data type. When repeat is set for a bit device, the quantity of device bits
D (double word) X increases in 16- or 32-point increments.
L (long) — When a word device such as T (timer), C (counter), or D (data register) is assigned as the source or destination,
F (float) — 1 point (word data) or 2 points (double-word data) are used. When repeat is assigned for a word device, the
quantity of device words increases in 1- or 2-point increments.

Example: IMOVN

D10 4
IMOVN(W) S1 – S2 D1 – D2 REP
I0 C10 D10 D30 D20
D19
C10 + D10 NOT → D30 + D20
D20 15
Source device S1 and destination device D1 determine the type of device. Source device S2 and destination device D2
D21
are the offset values used to determine the source and destination devices.

If the data of data register D10 assigned by source device S2 is 4, then the source data is determined by adding the
offset value to counter C10 assigned by source device S1: D45 59085

C(10 + 4) = C14 D46

If data register D20 assigned by destination device D2 contains a value of 15, then the destination is determined by
adding the offset value to data register D30 assigned by destination device D1: C13

D(30 + 15) = D45 C14 6450

As a result, when input I0 is on, the current value of counter C14 is inverted and moved to data register D45. C15

5-8 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 5: MOVE INSTRUCTIONS

BMOV (Block Move)

S1, S1+1, S1+2, ... , S1+N–1 → D1, D1+1, D1+2, ... , D1+N–1
BMOV(W) S1 N-W D1 When input is on, N blocks of 16-bit word data starting with device assigned by S1 are
***** ***** ***** moved to N blocks of destinations, starting with device assigned by D1. N-W specifies
the quantity of blocks to move.

N blocks of 16-bit data N blocks of 16-bit data

S1 First 16-bit data D1 First 16-bit data

S1+1 Second 16-bit data Block Move D1+1 Second 16-bit data
S1+2 Third 16-bit data D1+2 Third 16-bit data

S1+N–1 Nth 16-bit data D1+N–1 Nth 16-bit data

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) First device address to move X X X X X X X — —
N-W (N words) Quantity of blocks to move X X X X X X X X —
D1 (Destination 1) First device address to move to — X X X X X — —

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.
Internal relays M0 through M7997 and M10000 through M17497 can be designated as D1. Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1.
When T (timer) or C (counter) is used as S1 or N-W, the timer/counter current value (TC or CC) is displayed. When T (timer) or C (counter) is used
as D1, the data is written in as a preset value (TP or CP) which can be 0 through 65,535.
Make sure that the last source data determined by S1+N–1 and the last destination data determined by D1+N–1 are within the valid device range.
If the derived source or destination device exceeds the valid device range, a user program execution error will result, turning on special internal relay
M8004 and the ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart. For user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

Valid Data Types

W (word) X When a bit device such as I (input), Q (output), M (internal relay), or R (shift register) is assigned as the source,
I (integer) — N-W, or destination, 16 points (word data) are used.
D (double word) — When a word device such as T (timer), C (counter), or D (data register) is assigned as the source, N-W, or
L (long) — destination, 1 point (word data) is used.
F (float) —

Special Internal Relay M8024: BMOV/WSFT Executing Flag

While the BMOV or WSFT is executed, M8024 turns on. When completed, M8024 turns off. If the CPU is powered down while
executing BMOV or WSFT, M8024 remains on when the CPU is powered up again.

Example: BMOV

SOTU BMOV(W) S1 N-W D1 D10 2005 D20 2005

I0 D10 5 D20 12 12
D11 D21
D10 through D14 → D20 through D24 D12 25 D22 25
When input I0 is turned on, data of 5 data registers, starting with D10 assigned by source device D13 12 D23 12
S1, is moved to 5 data registers starting with D20 assigned by destination device D1.
D14 30 D24 30

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 5-9

5: MOVE INSTRUCTIONS

IBMV (Indirect Bit Move)

S1 + S2 → D1 + D2
IBMV S1(R) S2 D1(R) D2 REP When input is on, the values contained in devices assigned by S1
***** ***** ***** ***** ** and S2 are added together to determine the source of data. The 1-
bit data is then moved to the destination, which is determined by
the sum of values contained in devices assigned by D1 and D2.

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) Base address to move from X X X X — — X 0 or 1 1-99
S2 (Source 2) Offset for S1 X X X X X X X 0-65,535 —
D1 (Destination 1) Base address to move to — X X — — X — 1-99
D2 (Destination 2) Offset for D1 X X X X X X X 0-65,535 —

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

Internal relays M0 through M7997 and M10000 through M17497 can be designated as D1. Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1.

When T (timer) or C (counter) is used as S2 or D2, the timer/counter current value (TC or CC) is displayed.

Make sure that the last source data determined by S1+S2 and the last destination data determined by D1+D2 are within the valid device range. If
the derived source or destination device exceeds the valid device range, a user program execution error will result, turning on special internal relay
M8004 and ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart. For user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

Source device S2 or destination device D2 does not have to be assigned. If S2 or D2 is not assigned, the source or destination device is determined
by S1 or D1 without offset.

Examples: IBMV

M10 + D10 → Q0 + C5
SOTU IBMV S1 – S2 D1 – D2 REP
I0 M10 D10 Q0 C5

Source device S1 and destination device D1 determine the type of device. Source device S2 and destination device D2 are the offset values to
determine the source and destination devices.

If the value of data register D10 assigned by source device S2 is 5, the M27 M20 M17 M15 M10
source data is determined by adding the offset value to internal relay M10
assigned by source device S1.

5th from M10

If the current value of counter C5 assigned by destination device D2 is 12, Q17 Q14 Q10 Q7 Q0

the destination is determined by adding the offset value to output Q0

assigned by destination device D1.
12th from Q0

As a result, when input I0 is on, the ON/OFF status of internal relay M15 is moved to output Q14.

5-10 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 5: MOVE INSTRUCTIONS

D10 + 5 → D20 + 12
SOTU IBMV S1 – S2 D1 – D2 REP
I0 D10 5 D20 12

Since source device S1 is a data register and the value of source device Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
S2 is 5, the source data is bit 5 of data register D10 assigned by source D10
device S1.
Bit 5
Since destination device D1 is a data register and the value of source
device D2 is 12, the destination is bit 12 of data register D20 assigned by
destination device D1.
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
As a result, when input I0 is on, the ON/OFF status of data register D10 D20
bit 5 is moved to data register D20 bit 12.
Bit 12

Repeat Operation in the Indirect Bit Move Instructions

Repeat Bit Devices (Source and Destination)
If a repeat operation is set for bit devices such as input, output, internal relay, or shift register, as many bit devices as the repeat
cycles are moved.

M10 + 5 → Q0 + 9
SOTU IBMV S1 R S2 D1 R D2 REP Repeat = 3
I1 M10 5 Q0 9 3

Since source device S1 is internal relay M10 and the value of source M27 M20 M17 M15 M10
device S2 is 5, the source data is 3 internal relays starting with M15.

Since destination device D1 is output Q0 and the value of destination

device D2 is 9, the destination is 3 outputs starting with Q11. 5th from M10
As a result, when input I1 is on, the ON/OFF statuses of internal relays
M15 through M17 are moved to outputs Q11 through Q13. Q17 Q14 Q13 Q11 Q7 Q0

9th from Q0

Repeat Word Devices (Source and Destination)

If a repeat operation is for word devices such as data register, as many bit devices as the repeat cycles in the designated data
register are moved.

D10 + 5 → D20 + 12
SOTU IBMV S1 R S2 D1 R D2 REP Repeat = 3
I2 D10 5 D20 12 3

Since source device S1 is data register D10 and the value of source Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
device S2 is 5, the source data is 3 bits starting with bit 5 of data register D10
D10.
Bit 5
Since destination device D1 is data register D20 and the value of
destination device D2 is 12, the destination is 3 bits starting with bit 12 of
data register D20.
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
As a result, when input I2 is on, the ON/OFF statuses of data register D10 D20
bits 5 through 7 are moved to data register D20 bits 12 through 14.
Bit 12

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 5-11

5: MOVE INSTRUCTIONS

IBMVN (Indirect Bit Move Not)

S1 + S2 NOT → D1 + D2
IBMVN S1(R) S2 D1(R) D2 REP When input is on, the values contained in devices assigned by S1
***** ***** ***** ***** ** and S2 are together added to determine the data source. The 1-bit
data is then inverted and moved to the destination, which is
determined by the sum of values contained in devices assigned by
D1 and D2.

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) Base address to move from X X X X — — X 0 or 1 1-99
S2 (Source 2) Offset for S1 X X X X X X X 0-65,535 —
D1 (Destination 1) Base address to move to — X X — — X — 1-99
D2 (Destination 2) Offset for D1 X X X X X X X 0-65,535 —
For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

Internal relays M0 through M7997 and M10000 through M17497 can be designated as D1. Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1.

When T (timer) or C (counter) is used as S2 or D2, the timer/counter current (TC or CC) value is displayed.

Make sure that the last source data determined by S1+S2 and the last destination data determined by D1+D2 are within the valid device range. If
the derived source or destination device exceeds the valid device range, a user program execution error will result, turning on special internal relay
M8004 and ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart. For user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

Source device S2 or destination device D2 does not have to be used. If S2 or D2 are not used, the source or destination device is determined by S1
or D1 without offset.

Examples: IBMVN

M20 + D10 NOT → Q0 + C5

SOTU IBMVN S1 – S2 D1 – D2 REP
I0 M20 D10 Q0 C5

Source device S1 and destination device D1 determine the type of device. Source device S2 and destination device D2 are the offset values used to
determine the source and destination devices.

If the value of data register D10 assigned by source device S2 is 8, the source M37 M30 M27 M20
data is determined by adding the offset value to internal relay M20 assigned
by source device S1.
NOT 8th from M20

If the current value of counter C5 assigned by destination device D2 is 10, the

destination is determined by adding the offset value to output Q0 assigned by Q17 Q12 Q10 Q7 Q0
destination device D1.

10th from Q0
As a result, when input I0 is on, the ON/OFF status of internal relay M30 is inverted and moved to output Q12.

5-12 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 5: MOVE INSTRUCTIONS

NSET (N Data Set)

S1, S2, S3, ... , Sn → D1, D2, D3, ... , Dn
NSET(*) S1 ..... Sn D1
When input is on, N blocks of 16- or 32-bit data in devices assigned by S1, S2,
***** ***** *****
S3, ... , Sn are moved to N blocks of destinations, starting with device
assigned by D1.

N blocks of 16-/32-bit data N blocks of 16-/32-bit data

S1 First 16-/32-bit data D1 First 16-/32-bit data

S2 Second 16-/32-bit data N Data Set D1+1 or D1+2 Second 16-/32-bit data
S3 Third 16-/32-bit data D1+2 or D1+4 Third 16-/32-bit data

Sn Nth 16-/32-bit data D1+N–1 or D1+2N–2 Nth 16-/32-bit data

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) First device address to move X X X X X X X X —
D1 (Destination 1) First device address to move to — X X X X X — —

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1.

When T (timer) or C (counter) is used as S1, the timer/counter current value (TC or CC) is displayed. When T (timer) or C (counter) is used as D1,
the data is written in as a preset value (TP or CP).

When F (float) data is selected, only data register and constant can be designated as S1, and only data register can be designated as D1.

When F (float) data is selected and S1 does not comply with the normal floating-point format, a user program execution error will result, turning on
special internal relay M8004 and ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart.

Make sure that the last destination data determined by D1+N-1 (word or integer data) or D1+2N-2 (double-word, long, or float data) is within the
valid device range. If the derived destination device exceeds the valid device range, a user program execution error will result, turning on special
internal relay M8004 and ERROR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart. For user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on
page 3-10.

Valid Data Types

W (word) X When a bit device such as I (input), Q (output), M (internal relay), or R (shift register) is assigned as the source
I (integer) X or destination, 16 points (word or integer data) or 32 points (double-word or long data) are used.
D (double word) X When a word device such as T (timer), C (counter), or D (data register) is assigned as the source or destination,
L (long) X 1 point (word or integer data) or 2 points (double-word, long, or float data) are used.
F (float) X

Example: NSET(F)

NSET(F) S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 D1 0.51 D20·D21 0.51

SOTU
I0 0.51 2.34 7.89 3.33 10.0 D20 D22·D23 2.34
2.34
7.89 D24·D25 7.89
Five constants 0.51, 2.34, 7.89, 3.33, and 10.0 → D20 through D29
3.33 D26·D27 3.33
When input I0 is turned on, 5 constants assigned by source devices S1 through S5 are moved to 10
data registers starting with D20 assigned by destination device D1. 10.0 D28·D29 10.0

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 5-13

5: MOVE INSTRUCTIONS

NRS (N Data Repeat Set)

S1 → D1, D2, D3, ... , Dn–1
NRS(*) N-W S1 D1 When input is on, 16- or 32-bit data assigned by S1 is set to N blocks of destinations,
***** ***** ***** starting with device assigned by D1.

N blocks of 16-/32-bit data

D1 First 16-/32-bit data

Source data for repeat set
N Data Repeat Set D1+1 or D1+2 Second 16-/32-bit data
S1 16-/32-bit data D1+2 or D1+4 Third 16-/32-bit data

D1+N–1 or D1+2N–2 Nth 16-/32-bit data

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

N-W (N blocks) Quantity of blocks to move X X X X X X X X —
S1 (Source 1) First device address to move X X X X X X X X —
D1 (Destination 1) First device address to move to — X X X X X — —

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

For the N-W, 1 word (16 bits) is always used without regard to the data type.

Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1.

When T (timer) or C (counter) is used as N-W or S1, the timer/counter current value (TC or CC) is displayed. When T (timer) or C (counter) is used
as D1, the data is written in as a preset value (TP or CP).
When F (float) data is selected, only data register and constant can be designated as S1, and only data register can be designated as D1.

When F (float) data is selected and S1 does not comply with the normal floating-point format, a user program execution error will result, turning on
special internal relay M8004 and ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart.

Make sure that the last destination data determined by D1+N-1 (word or integer data) or D1+2N-2 (double-word, long, or float data) is within the
valid device range. If the derived destination device exceeds the valid device range, a user program execution error will result, turning on special
internal relay M8004 and ERROR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart. For user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on
page 3-10.

Valid Data Types

W (word) X When a bit device such as I (input), Q (output), M (internal relay), or R (shift register) is assigned as the source
I (integer) X or destination, 16 points (word or integer data) or 32 points (double-word or long data) are used.
D (double word) X When a word device such as T (timer), C (counter), or D (data register) is assigned as the source or destination,
L (long) X 1 point (word or integer data) or 2 points (double-word, long, or float data) are used.
F (float) X

Example: NRS(F)

NRS(F) N-W S1 D1 D25·D26 123.4 D30·D31 123.4

SOTU
I0 5 D25 D30 D32·D33 123.4
D25·D26 → D30 through D39 D34·D35 123.4
When input I0 is turned on, data of data registers D25·D26 assigned by source device S1 is moved to 10 D36·D37 123.4
data registers starting with D30 assigned by destination device D1. 123.4
D38·D39

5-14 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 5: MOVE INSTRUCTIONS

XCHG (Exchange)
Word data: D1 ↔ D2
XCHG(*) D1 D2 Double-word data: D1·D1+1 → D2, D2+1
***** *****
When input is on, the 16- or 32-bit data in devices assigned by D1 and D2 are exchanged with
each other.

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

D1 (Destination 1) First device address to exchange — X X — — X — —
D2 (Destination 2) First device address to exchange — X X — — X — —

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

Internal relays M0 through M7997 and M10000 through M17497 can be designated as D1 or D2. Special internal relays cannot be designated as
D1 or D2.

Valid Data Types

W (word) X When a bit device such as Q (output), M (internal relay), or R (shift register) is assigned as the destination, 16
I (integer) — points (word data) or 32 points (double-word data) are used.
D (double word) X When a word device such as D (data register) is assigned as the destination, 1 point (word data) or 2 points
L (long) — (double-word data) are used.
F (float) —

Examples: XCHG
• Data Type: Word

XCHG(W) D1 D2 Before Exchange After Exchange

SOTU
I0 D21 D24 1000 2000
D21 D21

D21 ↔ D24 D22 D22

When input I0 is turned on, data of data registers D21 D23 D23
and D24 assigned by devices D1 and D2 are exchanged D24 2000 D24 1000
with each other.

• Data Type: Double Word

Before Exchange After Exchange

SOTU XCHG(D) D1 D2
D31 D37 D31·D32 1234567890 D31·D32 9876543
I1
D33·D34 D33·D34
D31·D32 ↔ D37·D38
D35·D36 D35·D36
When input I1 is turned on, data of data registers
D37·D38 9876543 D37·D38 1234567890
D31·D32 and D37·D38 assigned by devices D1 and D2
are exchanged with each other.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 5-15

5: MOVE INSTRUCTIONS

TCCST (Timer/Counter Current Value Store)

S1 → D1
TCCST(*) S1(R) D1(R) REP When input is on, 16- or 32-bit data assigned by S1 is displayed and stored to the
***** ***** ** current value of device assigned by D1.

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) First device address to move X X X X X X X X 1-99
D1 (Destination 1) First device address to move to — — — — X X — — 1-99

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

When T (timer) or C (counter) is used as S1, the timer/counter current value (TC or CC) is displayed. T (timer) or C (counter) is used as D1, and the
data is written in as a current value (TP or CP).

Since the TCCST instruction is executed in each scan while input is on, a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used.

Valid Data Types

W (word) X When a bit device such as I (input), Q (output), M (internal relay), or R (shift register) is assigned as the source,
I (integer) — 16 points (word data) or 32 points (double-word data) are used. When repeat is assigned for a bit device, the
D (double word) X quantity of device bits increases in 16- or 32-point increments.
L (long) — When a word device such as T (timer), C (counter), or D (data register) is assigned as the source or destination,
F (float) — 1 point (word data) or 2 points (double-word data) are used. When repeat is assigned for a word device, the
quantity of device words increases in 1- or 2-point increments.

Example: TCCST
When input I2 is turned on, 99,998 is written to the current value of counter C23.

Ladder Diagram Timing Chart

ON
CNTD C23 Reset Input I0 OFF
I0 100000 99998 99999 99998 99999 100000
ON
Pulse Input I1 OFF

I1 ON
Counter C23 OFF
LC=(D)
ON
C23 99999 Q0 Input I2 OFF

SOTU TCCST(D) S1 – D1 – REP ON

Output Q0
I2 99998 C23 OFF

5-16 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

6: DATA COMPARISON INSTRUCTIONS
Introduction
Data can be compared using data comparison instructions, such as equal to, unequal to, less than, greater than, less than or equal
to, and greater than or equal to. When the comparison result is true, an output or internal relay is turned on. The repeat operation
can also be used to compare more than one set of data.
When the repeat operation is enabled, repeated comparison results of CMP instructions can be selected from AND or OR operation,
and the result is outputted to an output or internal relay.
Three values can also be compared using the ICMP>= instruction.
Load comparison instructions load comparison results so that the following instructions can be initiated.
Since the data comparison instructions are executed in each scan while input is on, a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction
should be used.

CMP= (Compare Equal To)

Data type W or I: S1 = S2 → D1 on
CMP=(*) S1(R) S2(R) D1(R) REP Data type D, L, or F: S1·S1+1 = S2·S2+1 → D1 on
AND/OR When input is on, 16- or 32-bit data assigned by source devices S1 and S2 are
***** ***** ***** **
compared. When S1 data is equal to S2 data, destination device D1 is turned
on. When the condition is not met, D1 is turned off.

CMP<> (Compare Unequal To)

Data type W or I: S1≠ S2 → D1 on
CMP<>(*) S1(R) S2(R) D1(R) REP Data type D, L, or F: S1·S1+1 ≠ S2·S2+1 → D1 on
AND/OR When input is on, 16- or 32-bit data assigned by source devices S1 and S2 are
***** ***** ***** **
compared. When S1 data is not equal to S2 data, destination device D1 is
turned on. When the condition is not met, D1 is turned off.

CMP< (Compare Less Than)

Data type W or I: S1 < S2 → D1 on
CMP<(*) S1(R) S2(R) D1(R) REP Data type D, L, or F: S1·S1+1 < S2·S2+1 → D1 on
AND/OR When input is on, 16- or 32-bit data assigned by source devices S1 and S2 are
***** ***** ***** **
compared. When S1 data is less than S2 data, destination device D1 is turned
on. When the condition is not met, D1 is turned off.

CMP> (Compare Greater Than)

Data type W or I: S1 > S2 → D1 on
CMP>(*) S1(R) S2(R) D1(R) REP Data type D, L, or F: S1·S1+1 > S2·S2+1 → D1 on
AND/OR When input is on, 16- or 32-bit data assigned by source devices S1 and S2 are
***** ***** ***** **
compared. When S1 data is greater than S2 data, destination device D1 is
turned on. When the condition is not met, D1 is turned off.

CMP<= (Compare Less Than or Equal To)

Data type W or I: S1 ≤ S2 → D1 on
CMP<=(*) S1(R) S2(R) D1(R) REP Data type D, L, or F: S1·S1+1 ≤ S2·S2+1 → D1 on
AND/OR When input is on, 16- or 32-bit data assigned by source devices S1 and S2 are
***** ***** ***** **
compared. When S1 data is less than or equal to S2 data, destination device
D1 is turned on. When the condition is not met, D1 is turned off.

CMP>= (Compare Greater Than or Equal To)

Data type W or I: S1 ≥ S2 → D1 on
CMP>=(*) S1(R) S2(R) D1(R) REP Data type D, L, or F: S1·S1+1 ≥ S2·S2+1 → D1 on
AND/OR When input is on, 16- or 32-bit data assigned by source devices S1 and S2 are
***** ***** ***** **
compared. When S1 data is greater than or equal to S2 data, destination
device D1 is turned on. When the condition is not met, D1 is turned off.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 6-1

6: DATA COMPARISON INSTRUCTIONS

Valid Devices
Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat
Repeat Result Logical AND or OR operation — — — — — — — — —
S1 (Source 1) Data to compare X X X X X X X X 1-99
S2 (Source 2) Data to compare X X X X X X X X 1-99
D1 (Destination 1) Comparison output — X — — — — — 1-99

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

When only S1 and/or S2 is repeated, the logical operation type can be selected from AND or OR.

Internal relays M0 through M7997 and M10000 through M17497 can be designated as D1. Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1.

When T (timer) or C (counter) is used as S1 or S2, the timer/counter current value (TC or CC) is displayed.

When F (float) data is selected, only data register and constant can be designated as S1 and S2.

When F (float) data is selected and S1 or S2 does not comply with the normal floating-point format, a user program execution error will result,
turning on special internal relay M8004 and ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart. For user program execution errors, see "User Program
Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

Valid Data Types

W (word) X When a bit device such as I (input), Q (output), M (internal relay), or R (shift register) is assigned as the source,
I (integer) X 16 points (word or integer data) or 32 points (double-word or long data) are used. When repeat is assigned for a
D (double word) X bit device, the quantity of device bits increases in 16- or 32-point increments.
L (long) X When a word device such as T (timer), C (counter), or D (data register) is assigned as the source, 1 point (word
F (float) X or integer data) or 2 points (double-word, long, or float data) are used. When repeat is assigned for a word
device, the quantity of device words increases in 1- or 2-point increments.

When an output or internal relay is assigned as the destination, only 1 point is used regardless of the selected
data type. When repeat is assigned for the destination, outputs or internal relays as many as the repeat cycles
are used.

Special Internal Relays M8150, M8151, and M8152 in CMP=

Three special internal relays are available to indicate the comparison result of the CMP= instruction. Depending on the result, one
of the three special internal relays turns on.

When S1 > S2, M8150 turns on.

D1
When S1 = S2, M8151 turns on. S2 Value M8150 M8151 M8152
Status
When S1 < S2, M8152 turns on.
(1) S1 > S2 ON OFF OFF OFF
S1 (2) S1 = S2 OFF ON OFF ON
(3) S1 < S2 OFF OFF ON OFF
Small Large
When repeat is designated, the comparison result of the last repeat cycle
S2 (1) (2) (3) turns on one of the three special internal relays.

When more than one CMP = or ICMP>= instruction is used, M8150, M8151, or M8152 indicates the result of the instruction that
was executed last.

6-2 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 6: DATA COMPARISON INSTRUCTIONS

Examples: CMP>=
The following examples are described using the CMP≥ instruction. Data comparison operation for all other data comparison
instructions is the same for the CMP≥ instruction.
• Data Type: Word

S1 S2 D1
CMP>=(W) S1 – S2 – D1 – REP
D10 127 D20 50 Q0 turned on
I0 D10 D20 Q0

D10 42 D20 56 Q0 turned off

• Data Type: Integer

S1 S2 D1
CMP>=(I) S1 – S2 – D1 – REP
D30 12 D40 –3 Q1 turned on
I1 D30 D40 Q1

D30 –4 D40 –3 Q1 turned off

• Data Type: Double Word

CMP>=(D) S1 – S2 – D1 – REP
I2 D50 D60 Q2

S1 S2 D1

D50·D51 23456789 D60·D61 12345678 Q2 turned on

D50·D51 23456789 D60·D61 34567890 Q2 turned off

• Data Type: Long

CMP>=(L) S1 – S2 – D1 – REP
I3 D70 D80 Q3

S1 S2 D1

D70·D71 12345678 D80·D81 –12345678 Q3 turned on

D70·D71 –12345678 D80·D81 34567890 Q3 turned off

• Data Type: Float

CMP>=(F) S1 – S2 – D1 – REP
I4 D90 D95 Q4

S1 S2 D1

D90·D91 12.4 D95·D96 12.345 Q4 turned on

D90·D91 –1 D95·D96 –0.99 Q4 turned off

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 6-3

6: DATA COMPARISON INSTRUCTIONS

Repeat Operation in the Data Comparison Instructions

The following examples use the CMP>= instruction of word and double word data. Repeat operation for all other data comparison
instructions and other data types is the same as the following examples.
When the repeat operation is enabled, repeated comparison results of CMP instructions can be selected from AND or OR operation,
and the result is output to an output or internal relay.

Repeat One Source Device

When only S1 (source) is designated to repeat, source devices (as many as the repeat cycles, starting with the device designated
by S1) are compared with the device designated by S2. The comparison results are ANDed or ORed and set to the destination
device designated by D1.
• Data Type: Word (Repeat Logical Operation AND)

S1 (Repeat = 3) S2 (Repeat = 0) D1 (Repeat = 0)

CMP>=(W) S1 R S2 – D1 – REP
I0 AND D10 15 M10 3 D10 10 15
D11 15 15 AND M10
D12 20 15
• Data Type: Word (Repeat Logical Operation OR)

S1 (Repeat = 3) S2 (Repeat = 0) D1 (Repeat = 0)

CMP>=(W) S1 R S2 – D1 – REP
OR D10 15 M10 3 D10 10 15
I0
D11 15 15 OR M10

D12 20 15
• Data Type: Double Word (Repeat Logical Operation AND)

S1 (Repeat = 3) S2 (Repeat = 0) D1 (Repeat = 0)

CMP>=(D) S1 R S2 – D1 – REP
AND D20 D30 M50 3 D20·D21 D30·D31
I0
D22·D23 D30·D31 AND M50
D24·D25 D30·D31

Repeat Two Source Devices

When S1 (source) and S2 (source) are designated to repeat, source devices (as many as the repeat cycles, starting with the
devices designated by S1 and S2) are compared with each other. The comparison results are ANDed or ORed and set to the
destination device designated by D1.
• Data Type: Word (Repeat Logical Operation AND)

S1 (Repeat = 3) S2 (Repeat = 3) D1 (Repeat = 0)

CMP>=(W) S1 R S2 R D1 – REP
AND D10 D20 M10 3 D10 10 D20 0
I0
D11 20 D21 20 AND M10
D12 30 D22 100
• Data Type: Word (Repeat Logical Operation OR)

S1 (Repeat = 3) S2 (Repeat = 3) D1 (Repeat = 0)

CMP>=(W) S1 R S2 R D1 – REP
OR D10 D20 M10 3 D10 10 D20 0
I0
D11 20 D21 20 OR M10
D12 30 D22 100
• Data Type: Double Word (Repeat Logical Operation AND)

S1 (Repeat = 3) S2 (Repeat = 3) D1 (Repeat = 0)

CMP>=(D) S1 R S2 R D1 – REP
AND D20 D30 M50 3 D20·D21 D30·D31
I0
D22·D23 D32·D33 AND M50
D24·D25 D34·D35

6-4 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 6: DATA COMPARISON INSTRUCTIONS

Repeat Source and Destination Devices

When S1, S2 (source), and D1 (destination) are designated to repeat, source devices (as many as the repeat cycles, starting with
the devices designated by S1 and S2) are compared with each other. The comparison results are set to destination devices (as
many as the repeat cycles, starting with the device designated by D1).
• Data Type: Word

S1 (Repeat = 3) S2 (Repeat = 3) D1 (Repeat = 3)

CMP>=(W) S1 R S2 R D1 R REP
D10 D20 M10 3 D10 10 D20 0 M10 turned on
I0
D11 20 D21 20 M11 turned on
D12 30 D22 100 M12 turned off
• Data Type: Double Word

S1 (Repeat = 3) S2 (Repeat = 3) D1 (Repeat = 3)

CMP>=(D) S1 R S2 R D1 R REP
I0 D20 D30 M50 3 D20·D21 D30·D31 M50
D22·D23 D32·D33 M51
D24·D25 D34·D35 M52

Comparison Output Status

The comparison output is usually maintained while the input to the data comparison instruction is off. If the comparison output is
on, the on status is maintained when the input is turned off as demonstrated by this program.

ON
CMP>=(W) S1 – S2 – D1 – REP Input I0 OFF
I0 D10 C1 Q0
Comparison D10 ≥ C1
Result D10 < C1

Comparison ON
Output Q0 OFF
This program turns the output off when the input is off.

ON
CMP>=(W) S1 – S2 – D1 – REP Input I0 OFF
I0 D10 C1 M0
Comparison D10 ≥ C1
Result D10 < C1

M0 Q0 ON
Output Q0 OFF

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 6-5

6: DATA COMPARISON INSTRUCTIONS

ICMP>= (Interval Compare Greater Than or Equal To)

Data type W or I: S1 ≥ S2 ≥ S3 → D1 on
ICMP>=(*) S1 S2 S3 D1 Data type D, L, F: S1·S1+1 ≥ S2·S2+1 ≥ S3·S3+1 → D1 on
When input is on, the 16- or 32-bit data assigned by S1, S2, and S3 are
***** ***** ***** *****
compared. When the condition is met, destination device D1 is turned on.
When the condition is not met, D1 is turned off.

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) Data to compare X X X X X X X X —
S2 (Source 2) Data to compare X X X X X X X X —
S3 (Source 3) Data to compare X X X X X X X X —
D1 (Destination 1) Comparison output — X — — — — — —

For the valid device address range, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

Internal relays M0 through M7997 and M10000 through M17497 can be designated as D1. Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1.

When T (timer) or C (counter) is used as S1, S2, or S3, the timer/counter current value (TC or CC) is displayed.

When F (float) data is selected, only data register and constant can be designated as S1, S2, and S3.

When F (float) data is selected and S1, S2, or S3 does not comply with the normal floating-point format, a user program execution error will result,
turning on special internal relay M8004 and ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart.

When the data of S1 is smaller than that of S3 (S1 < S3), a user program execution error will result, turning on special internal relay M8004 and ERR
LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart. For user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

W (word) X When a bit device such as I (input), Q (output), M (internal relay), or R (shift register) is assigned as the source,
I (integer) X 16 points (word or integer data) or 32 points (double-word or long data) are used.
D (double word) X When a word device such as T (timer), C (counter), or D (data register) is assigned as the source, 1 point (word
L (long) X or integer data) or 2 points (double-word, long, or float data) are used.
F (float) X
The destination uses only one output or internal relay regardless of the selected data type.

Special Internal Relays M8150, M8151, and M8152 in ICMP>=

Three special internal relays are available to indicate the comparison result of the ICMP>= instruction. Depending on the result,
one of the three special internal relays turns on. S1 must always be greater than or equal to S3 (S1 ≥ S3).

When S2 > S1, M8150 turns on. D1

When S2 < S3, M8151 turns on. S2 Value M8150 M8151 M8152
Status
When S1 > S2 > S3, M8152 turns on. (1) S2 < S3 OFF ON OFF OFF
(2) S2 = S3 OFF OFF OFF ON
S3 S1
M8151 M8152 M8150 (3) S3 < S2 < S1 OFF OFF ON ON
Small Large (4) S2 = S1 OFF OFF OFF ON
(5) S2 > S1 ON OFF OFF OFF
S2 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

When more than one ICMP>= or CMP= instruction is used, M8150, M8151, or M8152 indicates the result of the instruction that
was executed last.

6-6 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 6: DATA COMPARISON INSTRUCTIONS

Example: ICMP>=

D10 ≥ D11 ≥ D12 → Q1 goes on

SOTU ICMP>=(W) S1 S2 S3 D1
I0 D10 D11 D12 Q1

When input I0 is turned on, data of data registers D10, D11, and D12 assigned by source devices S1, S2, and S3 are compared. When the condition
is met, internal relay Q1 assigned by destination device D1 is turned on. When the condition is not met, Q1 is turned off.

S1 S2 S3 D1 M8150 M8151 M8152 M8004

D10 17 > D11 15 = D12 15 Q1 goes on OFF OFF OFF OFF

D10 15 < D11 18 < D12 19 Q1 goes off ON ON OFF ON

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 6-7

6: DATA COMPARISON INSTRUCTIONS

LC= (Load Compare Equal To)

Data type W or I: S1 = S2
LC=(*) Data type D, L, or F: S1·S1+1 = S2·S2+1
This instruction constantly compares 16- or 32- bit data assigned by S1 and S2. When S1 data is equal to
***** *****
S2 data, the output to the following instructions is turned on. When the condition is not met, the output
is turned off.

LC<> (Load Compare Unequal To)

Data type W or I: S1 ≠ S2
LC<>(*) Data type D, L, or F: S1·S1+1 ≠ S2·S2+1
This instruction constantly compares 16- or 32- bit data assigned by S1 and S2. When S1 data is not
***** *****
equal to S2 data, the output to the following instructions is turned on. When the condition is not met, the
output is turned off.

LC< (Load Compare Less Than)

Data type W or I: S1 < S2
LC<(*) Data type D, L, or F: S1·S1+1 < S2·S2+1
This instruction constantly compares 16- or 32- bit data assigned by S1 and S2. When S1 data is less than
***** *****
S2 data, the output to the following instructions is turned on. When the condition is not met, the output
is turned off.

LC> (Load Compare Greater Than)

Data type W or I: S1 > S2
LC>(*) Data type D, L, or F: S1·S1+1 > S2·S2+1
This instruction constantly compares 16- or 32- bit data assigned by S1 and S2. When S1 data is greater
***** *****
than S2 data, the output to the following instructions is turned on. When the condition is not met, the
output is turned off.

LC<= (Load Compare Less Than or Equal To)

Data type W or I: S1 ≤ S2
LC<=(*) Data type D, L, or F: S1·S1+1 ≤ S2·S2+1
This instruction constantly compares 16- or 32- bit data assigned by S1 and S2. When S1 data is less than
***** *****
or equal to S2 data, the output to the following instructions is turned on. When the condition is not met,
the output is turned off.

LC>= (Load Compare Greater Than or Equal To)

Data type W or I: S1 ≥ S2
LC>=(*) Data type D, L, or F: S1·S1+1 ≥ S2·S2+1
This instruction constantly compares 16- or 32- bit data assigned by S1 and S2. When S1 data is greater
***** *****
than or equal to S2 data, the output to the following instructions is turned on. When the condition is not
met, the output is turned off.

Valid Devices
Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat
S1 (Source 1) Data to compare X X X X X X X X —
S2 (Source 2) Data to compare X X X X X X X X —

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.
When T (timer) or C (counter) is used, the timer/counter current value (TC or CC) is displayed.
When F (float) data is selected, only data register and constant can be designated.
When F (float) data is selected and S1 or S2 does not comply with the normal floating-point format, a user program execution error will result,
turning on special internal relay M8004 and ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart. The output to the following instructions is turned off. For user
program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

Valid Data Types

W (word) X When a bit device such as I (input), Q (output), M (internal relay), or R (shift register) is assigned, 16 points
I (integer) X (word or integer data) or 32 points (double-word or long data) are used.
D (double word) X When a word device such as T (timer), C (counter), or D (data register) is assigned, 1 point (word or integer
L (long) X data) or 2 points (double-word, long, or float data) are used.
F (float) X

6-8 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 6: DATA COMPARISON INSTRUCTIONS

Examples: LC

Ladder Diagram 1 Program List

Reset
CNTD C2 Instruction Data
I0 100000
LOD I0
Pulse
LOD I1
CNTD C2
I1
100000
LC=(D) LC=(D) C2
C2 99997 Q0 99997
OUT Q0
LC>=(D)
C2 99996 LC>=(D) C2
Q1
99996
OUT Q1
Timing Chart
ON
Reset Input I0 OFF
99995 99996 99997 99998 99999 100000
ON
Pulse Input I1 •••
OFF

ON Output Q0 is on when counter C2 current value is

C2 OFF
99,997.
ON
Output Q0 Output Q1 is turned on when counter C2 current
OFF
value reaches 99,996 and remains on until counter
ON
Output Q1 C2 is reset.
OFF

Ladder Diagram 2 Program List

ADD(I) S1 – S2 – D1 – REP Instruction Data

SOTU
I2 D10 1 D10 LOD I2
SOTU
LC<=(I) ADD(I) D10
D10 –2 Q2 1
LC<=(I) D10
3 D10 LC<=(I) D10
–2
LC<=(I) LC<=(I) LC<=(I) 3
–3 D10 D10 5 Q3 D10
ORLOD
OUT Q2
LC<=(I) –3
D10
LC<=(I) D10
Timing Chart
5
ON ANDLOD
Input I2
OFF
OUT Q3
–7 –6 –5 –4 –3 –2 –1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
D10 Value
Output Q2 is on when data register D10 is less than
ON or equal to –2 and greater than or equal to 3.
Output Q2 OFF
Output Q3 is on while data register D10 is between –
ON 3 and 5.
Output Q3 OFF

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 6-9

6: DATA COMPARISON INSTRUCTIONS

6-10 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

7: BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS
Introduction
This chapter describes the arithmetic operation instructions that perform arithmetic based on specified data and store those results
in devices. For addition and subtraction devices, internal relay M8003 is used to carry or to borrow.
The ROOT instruction can be used to calculate the square root of the value stored in one or two data registers.

ADD (Addition)
Data type W or I: S1 + S2 → D1, CY
ADD(*) S1(R) S2(R) D1(R) REP Data type D, L, or F: S1·S1+1 + S2·S2+1 → D1·D1+1, CY
***** ***** ***** ** When input is on, 16- or 32-bit data assigned by source devices S1 and S2 are
added together. The result is set to destination device D1 and internal relay
M8003 (carry or borrow).

SUB (Subtraction)
Data type W or I: S1 – S2 → D1, BW
SUB(*) S1(R) S2(R) D1(R) REP Data type D, L, or F: S1·S1+1 – S2·S2+1 → D1·D1+1, BW
***** ***** ***** ** When input is on, 16- or 32-bit data assigned by source device S2 is
subtracted from 16- or 32-bit data assigned by source device S1. The result is
set to destination device D1 and internal relay M8003 (carry or borrow).

MUL (Multiplication)
Data type W or I: S1 × S2 → D1·D1+1
MUL(*) S1(R) S2(R) D1(R) REP Data type D, L, or F: S1·S1+1 × S2·S2+1 → D1·D1+1
***** ***** ***** ** When input is on, 16- or 32-bit data assigned by source device S1 is multiplied
by 16- or 32-bit data assigned by source device S2. The result is set to
destination device D1.

When the result exceeds the valid range for data types D or L, the ERR LED
and special internal relay M8004 (user program execution error) are turned on.

DIV (Division)
Data type W or I: S1 ÷ S2 → D1 (quotient), D1+1 (remainder)
DIV(*) S1(R) S2(R) D1(R) REP Data type D or L: S1·S1+1 ÷ S2·S2+1 → D1·D1+1 (quotient),
D1+2·D1+3 (remainder)
***** ***** ***** **
Data type F: S1·S1+1 ÷ S2·S2+1 →D1·D1+1 (quotient)

When input is on, 16- or 32-bit data assigned by source device S1 is divided
by 16- or 32-bit data assigned by source device S2. The quotient is set to 16-
or 32-bit destination device D1, and the remainder is set to the next 16- or 32-
bit data. Data type F does not generate a remainder.

When S2 is 0 (dividing by 0), the ERR LED and special internal relay M8004
(user program execution error) are turned on.

A user program execution error also occurs in the following division

operations.

Data type I: –32768 ÷ (–1)

Data type L: –2147483648 ÷ (–1)

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 7-1

7: BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) Data for calculation X X X X X X X X 1-99
S2 (Source 2) Data for calculation X X X X X X X X 1-99
D1 (Destination 1) Destination to store results — X X X X X — 1-99

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

Internal relays M0 through M7997 and M10000 through M17497 can be designated as D1. Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1.

When T (timer) or C (counter) is used as S1 or S2, the timer/counter current value (TC or CC) is displayed. When T (timer) or C (counter) is used as
D1, the data is written in as a preset value (TP or CP) which can be 0 through 65,535.

When F (float) data is selected, only data register and constant can be designated as S1 and S2.

When F (float) data is selected and S1 or S2 does not comply with the normal floating-point format, a user program execution error will result,
turning on special internal relay M8004 and ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart. For user program execution errors, see "User Program
Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

Since the binary arithmetic instructions are executed in each scan while input is on, a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used.

Valid Data Types

W (word) X When a bit device such as I (input), Q (output), M (internal relay), or R (shift register) is assigned as the source,
I (integer) X 16 points (word or integer data) or 32 points (double-word, long, or float data) are used. When repeat is
D (double word) X assigned for a bit device, the quantity of device bits increases in 16- or 32-point increments.
L (long) X When a word device such as T (timer), C (counter), or D (data register) is assigned as the source, 1 point (word
F (float) X or integer data) or 2 points (double-word, long, or float data) are used. When repeat is assigned for a word
device, the quantity of device words increases in 1- or 2-point increments.

Using Carry or Borrow Signals

When the D1 (destination) data exceeds the valid data range as a result of any binary arithmetic operation, a carry or borrow
occurs, and special internal relay M8003 is turned on.

Data Type Carry/borrow Occurs when D1 Exceeds the Range between

W (word) 0 and 65,535
I (integer) –32,768 and 32,767
D (double word) 0 and 4,294,967,295
L (long) –2,147,483,648 and 2,147,483,647
–3.402823×1038 and –1.175495×10–38
F (float)
1.175495×10–38 and 3.402823×1038

7-2 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 7: BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS

Examples: ADD
• Data Type: Word

This example demonstrates the use of a carry signal from special internal relay M8003 to set an alarm signal.
D2 + 500 → D2
SOTU ADD(W) S1 – S2 – D1 – REP
I0 D2 500 D2
When a carry occurs, output Q0 is assigned as a warning indicator.

S
Acknowledge M8003 Q0 When the acknowledge pushbutton (input I1) is pressed, the warning
Pushbutton indicator is reset.
R
I1 Q0

• Data Type: Integer

ADD(I) S1 – S2 – D1 – REP D10 –4 + D20 –11 D30 –15

I0 D10 D20 D30

• Data Type: Double Word

ADD(D) S1 – S2 – D1 – REP
I0 D10 D20 D30

D10·D11 1957400 + D20·D21 4112600 D30·D31 6070000

• Data Type: Long

ADD(L) S1 – S2 – D1 – REP
I0 D10 D20 D30

D10·D11 216283 + D20·D21 –964355 D30·D31 –748072

• Data Type: Float

ADD(F) S1 – S2 – D1 – REP
I0 D10 D20 D30

D10·D11 1.414 + D20·D21 3.14 D30·D31 4.554

Example: SUB
• Data Type: Word

The following example demonstrates the use of special internal relay M8003 to process a borrow.

SUB(W) S1 – S2 – D1 – REP D12 – 7000 → D12

SOTU
I0 D12 7000 D12 Borrow is processed so that the number of times a borrow
occurs is subtracted from D13.
SUB(W) S1 – S2 – D1 – REP
M8003 D13 1 D13 When a borrow occurs, D13 is decremented by one.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 7-3

7: BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS

Examples: MUL
• Data Type: Word

MUL(W) S1 – S2 – D1 – REP 500 600 300000

D10 D20 D30
D10
(01F4h)
× D20
(0258h)
D30·D31
(000493E0h)
I1

4
When input I1 is on, data of D10 is multiplied by data of D20, and the result is set to D30 and D31. D30
(0004h)

37856
D31
(93E0h)
• Data Type: Integer

MUL(I) S1 – S2 – D1 – REP –500 600 –300000

D10 D20 D30
D10
(FE0Ch)
× D20
(0258h)
D30·D31
(FFFB6C20h)
I1

65531
D30
(FFFBh)

27680
D31
(6C20h)
• Data Type: Double Word

MUL(D) S1 – S2 – D1 – REP
I1 D10 D20 D30

D10·D11 100000 × D20·D21 5000 D30·D31 500000000

Note: In multiplication of double word data, the lower 32-bit data of the result is set to destination device D1·D1+1.

• Data Type: Long

MUL(L) S1 – S2 – D1 – REP
I1 D10 D20 D30

D10·D11 –100000 × D20·D21 –5000 D30·D31 500000000

Note: In multiplication of long data, the lower 32-bit data of the result is set to destination device D1·D1+1.

• Data Type: Float

MUL(F) S1 – S2 – D1 – REP
I1 D10 D20 D30

D10·D11 4.554 × D20·D21 1.414 D30·D31 6.439356

Note: Since the destination uses two word devices in the multiplication operation, data register D7999 or D55999 cannot be used as destination
device D1. When using a bit device such as internal relay for destination, 32 internal relays are required; so internal relay M7966 through M9999,
M17466 or a larger number cannot be used as destination device D1.

7-4 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 7: BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS

Examples: DIV
• Data Type: Word

DIV(W) S1 – S2 – D1 – REP D10 50 ÷ D20 7 D30 7 D31 1

I2 D10 D20 D30 Quotient Remainder

When input I2 is on, D10 data is divided by D20 data. The quotient is set to D30,
and the remainder is set to D31.

Note: Since the destination uses two word devices in the division operation of word data, data register D7999 or D55999 cannot be used as
destination device D1. When using a bit device, such as internal relay for destination, 32 internal relays are required; so M7966 through M9999,
M17466 or a larger number cannot be used as destination device D1.

• Data Type: Integer

DIV(I) S1 – S2 – D1 – REP D10 50 ÷ D20 –7 D30 –7 D31 1

I2 D10 D20 D30 Quotient Remainder

Note: Since the destination uses two word devices in the division operation of integer data, data register D7999 or D55999 cannot be used as
destination device D1. When using a bit device, such as internal relay for destination, 32 internal relays are required; so M7966 through M9999,
M17466 or a larger number cannot be used as destination device D1.

• Data Type: Double Word

DIV(D) S1 – S2 – D1 – REP
I1 D10 D20 D30

D10·D11 100000 ÷ D20·D21 70000 D30·D31 1 D32·D33 30000

Quotient Remainder
Note: Since the destination uses four word devices in the division operation of double-word data, data registers D7999 or D55999 cannot be used
as destination device D1. When using a bit device such as internal relay for destination, 64 internal relays are required; so M7934 trough M9999,
17434 or a larger number cannot be used as destination device D1.

• Data Type: Long

DIV(L) S1 – S2 – D1 – REP
I1 D10 D20 D30

D10·D11 100000 ÷ D20·D21 –70000 D30·D31 –1 D32·D33 30000

Quotient Remainder
Note: Since the destination uses four word devices in the division operation of long data, data registers D7999 or D55999 cannot be used as
destination device D1. When using a bit device, such as internal relay for destination, 64 internal relays are required; so M7934 trough M9999,
17434 or a larger number cannot be used as destination device D1.

• Data Type: Float

DIV(F) S1 – S2 – D1 – REP
I1 D10 D20 D30

D10·D11 4.43996 ÷ D20·D21 3.14 D30·D31 1.414

Quotient

Note: Since the destination uses two word devices in the division operation of float data, data register D7999 or D55999 cannot be used as
destination device D1.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 7-5

7: BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS

Repeat Operation in the ADD and SUB Instructions

Source devices S1 and S2 and destination device D1 can be assigned to repeat individually or in combination. When destination
device D1 is not set to repeat, the final result is set to destination device D1. When repeat is assigned, as many consecutive
devices as the repeat cycles, starting with the designated device, are used. Since the repeat operation works similarly on the ADD
(addition) and SUB (subtraction) instructions, the following examples are described using the ADD instruction.

Repeat One Source Device

• Data Type: Word and Integer

When only S1 (source) is assigned to repeat, the final result is set to destination device D1.

S1 (Repeat = 3) S2 (Repeat = 0) D1 (Repeat = 0)

SOTU ADD(W) S1 R S2 – D1 – REP
D10 D20 D30 3 D10 10 + D20 25 D30 (35)
I1
D11 15 + D20 25 D30 (40)
D12 20 + D20 25 D30 45
• Data Type: Double Word, Long, and Float

When only S1 (source) is assigned to repeat, the final result is set to destination device D1·D1+1.

S1 (Repeat = 3) S2 (Repeat = 0) D1 (R ep eat = 0)

SOTU ADD(D) S1 R S2 – D1 – REP
D10 D20 D30 3 D10·D11 + D20·D21 (D30·D31)
I1
D12·D13 + D20·D21 (D30·D31)
D14·D15 + D20·D21 D30·D31

Repeat Destination Device Only

• Data Type: Word and Integer

When only D1 (destination) is assigned to repeat, the same result is set to 3 devices starting with D1.

S1 (Repeat = 0) S2 (Repeat = 0) D1 (Repeat = 3)

SOTU ADD(W) S1 – S2 – D1 R REP
D10 D20 D30 3 D10 10 + D20 25 D30 35
I1
D10 10 + D20 25 D31 35
D10 10 + D20 25 D32 35
• Data Type: Double Word, Long, and Float

When only D1 (destination) is assigned to repeat, the same result is set to 3 devices starting with D1·D1+1.

S1 (Repeat = 0) S2 (Repeat = 0) D1 (R ep eat = 3)

SOTU ADD(D) S1 – S2 – D1 R REP
I1 D10 D20 D30 3 D10·D11 + D20·D21 D30·D31
D10·D11 + D20·D21 D32·D33
D10·D11 + D20·D21 D34·D35

Repeat Two Source Devices

• Data Type: Word and Integer

When S1 and S2 (source) are assigned to repeat, the final result is set to destination device D1.

S1 (Repeat = 3) S2 (Repeat = 3) D1 (Repeat = 0)

SOTU ADD(W) S1 R S2 R D1 – REP
D10 D20 D30 3 D10 10 + D20 25 D30 (35)
I1
D11 15 + D21 35 D30 (50)
D12 20 + D22 45 D30 65
• Data Type: Double Word, Long, and Float

When S1 and S2 (source) are assigned to repeat, the final result is set to destination device D1·D1+1.

S1 (Repeat = 3) S2 (Repeat = 3) D1 (R ep eat = 0)

SOTU ADD(D) S1 R S2 R D1 – REP
I1 D10 D20 D30 3 D10·D11 + D20·D21 (D30·D31)
D12·D13 + D22·D23 (D30·D31)
D14·D15 + D24·D25 D30·D31

7-6 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 7: BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS

Repeat Source and Destination Devices

• Data Type: Word and Integer

When S1 (source) and D1 (destination) are assigned to repeat, different results are set to 3 devices starting with D1.

S1 (Repeat = 3) S2 (Repeat = 0) D1 (Repeat = 3)

SOTU ADD(W) S1 R S2 – D1 R REP
D10 D20 D30 3 D10 10 + D20 25 D30 35
I1
D11 15 + D20 25 D31 40
D12 20 + D20 25 D32 45
• Data Type: Double Word, Long, and Float

When S1 (source) and D1 (destination) are assigned to repeat, different results are set to 3 devices starting with D1·D1+1.

S1 (Repeat = 3) S2 (Repeat = 0) D1 (R ep eat = 3)

SOTU ADD(D) S1 R S2 – D1 R REP
I1 D10 D20 D30 3 D10·D11 + D20·D21 D30·D31
D12·D13 + D20·D21 D32·D33
D14·D15 + D20·D21 D34·D35

Repeat All Source and Destination Devices

• Data Type: Word and Integer

When all devices are assigned to repeat, different results are set to 3 devices starting with D1.

S1 (Repeat = 3) S2 (Repeat = 3) D1 (Repeat = 3)

SOTU ADD(W) S1 R S2 R D1 R REP
D10 D20 D30 3 D10 10 + D20 25 D30 35
I1
D11 15 + D21 35 D31 50
D12 20 + D22 45 D32 65
• Data Type: Double Word, Long, and Float

When all devices are assigned to repeat, different results are set to 3 devices starting with D1·D1+1.

S1 (Repeat = 3) S2 (Repeat = 3) D1 (R ep eat = 3)

SOTU ADD(D) S1 R S2 R D1 R REP
I1 D10 D20 D30 3 D10·D11 + D20·D21 D30·D31
D12·D13 + D22·D23 D32·D33
D14·D15 + D24·D25 D34·D35

Note: Special internal relay M8003 (carry/borrow) is turned on when a carry or borrow occurs in the last repeat operation. When a user program
execution error occurs in any repeat operation, special internal relay M8004 (user program execution error) and the ERR LED are turned on and
maintained while operations for other instructions continues.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 7-7

7: BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS

Repeat Operation in the MUL Instruction

Since the MUL (multiplication) instruction uses two destination devices, the result is stored to destination devices as described
below. Source devices S1 and S2 and destination device D1 can be designated to repeat individually or in combination. When
destination device D1 is not assigned to repeat, the final result is set to destination device D1 and D1+1. When repeat is
designated, consecutive devices as many as the repeat cycles starting with the designated device are used.
Since the repeat operation works similarly on word and integer data, the following examples are described using word data.

Repeat One Source Device

When only S1 (source) is assigned to repeat, the final result is set to destination device D1·D1+1.
• Data Type: Word and Integer

S1 (R epeat = 3) S2 (Repeat = 0) D1 (Rep eat = 0)

SOTU MUL(W) S1 R S2 – D1 – REP
I1 D10 D20 D30 3 D10 × D20 (D30·D31)
D11 × D20 (D30·D31)
D12 × D20 D30·D31

• Data Type: Double Word, Long, and Float

S1 (Repeat = 3) S2 (Repeat = 0) D1 (R ep eat = 0)

SOTU MUL(D) S1 R S2 – D1 – REP
I1 D10 D20 D30 3 D10·D11 × D20·D21 (D30·D31)
D12·D13 × D20·D21 (D30·D31)
D14·D15 × D20·D21 D30·D31

Repeat Destination Device Only

When only D1 (destination) is assigned to repeat, the same result is set to 3 devices starting with D1·D1+1.
• Data Type: Word and Integer

S1 (R epeat = 0) S2 (Repeat = 0) D1 (Rep eat = 3)

SOTU MUL(W) S1 – S2 – D1 R REP
D10 D20 D30 3 D10 × D20 D30·D31
I1
D10 × D20 D32·D33
D10 × D20 D34·D35

• Data Type: Double Word, Long, and Float

S1 (Repeat = 0) S2 (Repeat = 0) D1 (R ep eat = 3)

SOTU MUL(D) S1 – S2 – D1 R REP
I1 D10 D20 D30 3 D10·D11 × D20·D21 D30·D31
D10·D11 × D20·D21 D32·D33
D10·D11 × D20·D21 D34·D35

Repeat Two Source Devices

When S1 and S2 (source) are assigned to repeat, the final result is set to destination device D1·D1+1.
• Data Type: Word and Integer

S1 (R epeat = 3) S2 (Repeat = 3) D1 (Rep eat = 0)

SOTU MUL(W) S1 R S2 R D1 – REP
I1 D10 D20 D30 3 D10 × D20 (D30·D31)
D11 × D21 (D30·D31)
D12 × D22 D30·D31

• Data Type: Double Word, Long, and Float

S1 (Repeat = 3) S2 (Repeat = 3) D1 (R ep eat = 0)

SOTU MUL(D) S1 R S2 R D1 – REP
I1 D10 D20 D30 3 D10·D11 × D20·D21 (D30·D31)
D12·D13 × D22·D23 (D30·D31)
D14·D15 × D24·D25 D30·D31

7-8 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 7: BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS

Repeat Source and Destination Devices

When S1 (source) and D1 (destination) are assigned to repeat, different results are set to 3 devices starting with D1·D1+1.
• Data Type: Word and Integer

S1 (R epeat = 3) S2 (Repeat = 0) D1 (Rep eat = 3)

SOTU MUL(W) S1 R S2 – D1 R REP
D10 D20 D30 3 D10 × D20 D30·D31
I1
D11 × D20 D32·D33
D12 × D20 D34·D35

• Data Type: Double Word, Long, and Float

S1 (Repeat = 3) S2 (Repeat = 0) D1 (R ep eat = 3)

SOTU MUL(D) S1 R S2 – D1 R REP
I1 D10 D20 D30 3 D10·D11 × D20·D21 D30·D31
D12·D13 × D20·D21 D32·D33
D14·D15 × D20·D21 D34·D35

Repeat All Source and Destination Devices

When all devices are assigned to repeat, different results are set to 3 devices starting with D1·D1+1.
• Data Type: Word and Integer

S1 (R epeat = 3) S2 (Repeat = 3) D1 (Rep eat = 3)

SOTU MUL(W) S1 R S2 R D1 R REP
I1 D10 D20 D30 3 D10 × D20 D30·D31
D11 × D21 D32·D33
D12 × D22 D34·D35

• Data Type: Double Word, Long, and Float

S1 (Repeat = 3) S2 (Repeat = 3) D1 (R ep eat = 3)

SOTU MUL(D) S1 R S2 R D1 R REP
I1 D10 D20 D30 3 D10·D11 × D20·D21 D30·D31
D12·D13 × D22·D23 D32·D33
D14·D15 × D24·D25 D34·D35

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 7-9

7: BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS

Repeat Operation in the DIV Instruction

Since the DIV (division) instruction (except float data) uses two destination devices, the quotient and remainder are stored as
described below. Source devices S1 and S2 and destination device D1 can be assigned to repeat individually or in combination.
When destination device D1 is not assigned to repeat, the final result is set to destination device D1 (quotient) and D1+1
(remainder). When repeat is assigned, assigned as many consecutive devices as the repeat cycles starting with the designated
device are used.
Division instructions in float data do not generate remainders and use two consecutive data registers to store quotients. When
repeat is assigned for destination of float data, as many consecutive data registers as the repeat cycles are used.

Repeat One Source Device

• Data Type: Word and Integer

When only S1 (source) is assigned to repeat, the final result is set to destination devices D1 and D1+1.

S1 (Repeat = 3) S2 (Repeat = 0) D1 (Repeat = 0)

SOTU DIV(W) S1 R S2 – D1 – REP
D10 D20 D30 3 D10 ÷ D20 (D30) (D31)
I1
D11 ÷ D20 (D30) (D31)
D12 ÷ D20 D30 D31
Quotient Remainder
• Data Type: Double Word and Long

When only S1 (source) is assigned to repeat, the final result is set to destination devices D1·D1+1 and D1+2·D1+3.

S1 (R epeat = 3) S2 (Repeat = 0) D1 (Rep eat = 0)

SOTU DIV(D) S1 R S2 – D1 – REP
D10 D20 D30 3 D10·D11 ÷ D20·D21 (D30·D31) (D32·D33)
I1
D12·D13 ÷ D20·D21 (D30·D31) (D32·D33)
D14·D15 ÷ D20·D21 D30·D31 D32·D33
Quotient Remainder
• Data Type: Float

When only S1 (source) is assigned to repeat, the final result is set to destination devices D1·D1+1.

S1 (Repeat = 3) S2 (Repeat = 0) D1 (R epeat = 0)

SOTU DIV(F) S1 R S2 – D1 – REP
I1 D10 D20 D30 3 D10·D11 ÷ D20·D21 (D30·D31)
D12·D13 ÷ D20·D21 (D30·D31)
D14·D15 ÷ D20·D21 D30·D31
Quotient

Repeat Destination Device Only

• Data Type: Word and Integer

When only D1 (destination) is assigned to repeat, the same result is set to 6 devices starting with D1.

S1 (Repeat = 0) S2 (Repeat = 0) D1 (Repeat = 3)

SOTU DIV(W) S1 – S2 – D1 R REP
D10 D20 D30 3 D10 ÷ D20 D30 D33
I1
D10 ÷ D20 D31 D34
D10 ÷ D20 D32 D35
Quotient Remainder
• Data Type: Double Word and Long

When only D1 (destination) is assigned to repeat, the same result is set to 6 devices starting with D1·D1+1.

S1 (R epeat = 0) S2 (Repeat = 0) D1 (Rep eat = 3)

SOTU DIV(D) S1 – S2 – D1 R REP
D10 D20 D30 3 D10·D11 ÷ D20·D21 D30·D31 D36·D37
I1
D10·D11 ÷ D20·D21 D32·D33 D38·D39
D10·D11 ÷ D20·D21 D34·D35 D40·D41
Quotient Remainder
• Data Type: Float

When only D1 (destination) is assigned to repeat, the same result is set to 3 devices starting with D1·D1+1.

S1 (Repeat = 0) S2 (Repeat = 0) D1 (R epeat = 3)

SOTU DIV(F) S1 – S2 – D1 R REP
I1 D10 D20 D30 3 D10·D11 ÷ D20·D21 D30·D31
D10·D11 ÷ D20·D21 D32·D33
D10·D11 ÷ D20·D21 D34·D35
Quotient

7-10 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 7: BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS

Repeat Two Source Devices

• Data Type: Word and Integer

When S1 and S2 (source) are assigned to repeat, the final result is set to destination devices D1 and D1+1.

S1 (Repeat = 3) S2 (Repeat = 3) D1 (Repeat = 0)

SOTU DIV(W) S1 R S2 R D1 – REP
D10 D20 D30 3 D10 ÷ D20 (D30) (D31)
I1
D11 ÷ D21 (D30) (D31)
D12 ÷ D22 D30 D31
Quotient Remainder
• Data Type: Double Word and Long

When S1 and S2 (source) are assigned to repeat, the final result is set to destination devices D1·D1+1 and D1+2·D1+3.

S1 (R epeat = 3) S2 (Repeat = 3) D1 (Rep eat = 0)

SOTU DIV(D) S1 R S2 R D1 – REP D10·D11 ÷ D20·D21 (D30·D31) (D32·D33)
I1 D10 D20 D30 3
D12·D13 ÷ D22·D23 (D30·D31) (D32·D33)
D14·D15 ÷ D24·D25 D30·D31 D32·D33
Quotient Remainder
• Data Type: Float

When S1 and S2 (source) are assigned to repeat, the final result is set to destination devices D1·D1+1.

S1 (Repeat = 3) S2 (Repeat = 3) D1 (R epeat = 0)

SOTU DIV(F) S1 R S2 R D1 – REP
D10 D20 D30 3 D10·D11 ÷ D20·D21 (D30·D31)
I1
D12·D13 ÷ D22·D23 (D30·D31)
D14·D15 ÷ D24·D25 D30·D31
Quotient

Repeat Source and Destination Devices

• Data Type: Word and Integer

When S1 (source) and D1 (destination) are assigned to repeat, different results are set to 6 devices starting with D1.

S1 (Repeat = 3) S2 (Repeat = 0) D1 (Repeat = 3)

SOTU DIV(W) S1 R S2 – D1 R REP
D10 D20 D30 3 D10 ÷ D20 D30 D33
I1
D11 ÷ D20 D31 D34
D12 ÷ D20 D32 D35
Quotient Remainder
• Data Type: Double Word and Long

When S1 (source) and D1 (destination) are assigned to repeat, different results are set to 6 devices starting with D1·D1+1.

S1 (R epeat = 3) S2 (Repeat = 0) D1 (Rep eat = 3)

SOTU DIV(D) S1 R S2 – D1 R REP
D10 D20 D30 3 D10·D11 ÷ D20·D21 D30·D31 D36·D37
I1
D12·D13 ÷ D20·D21 D32·D33 D38·D39
D14·D15 ÷ D20·D21 D34·D35 D40·D41
Quotient Remainder
• Data Type: Float

When S1 (source) and D1 (destination) are assigned to repeat, different results are set to 3 devices starting with D1·D1+1.

S1 (Repeat = 3) S2 (Repeat = 0) D1 (R epeat = 3)

SOTU DIV(F) S1 R S2 – D1 R REP
D10 D20 D30 3 D10·D11 ÷ D20·D21 D30·D31
I1
D12·D13 ÷ D20·D21 D32·D33
D14·D15 ÷ D20·D21 D34·D35
Quotient

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 7-11

7: BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS

Repeat All Source and Destination Devices

• Data Type: Word and Integer

When all devices are assigned to repeat, different results are set to 6 devices starting with D1.

S1 (Repeat = 3) S2 (Repeat = 3) D1 (Repeat = 3)

SOTU DIV(W) S1 R S2 R D1 R REP
D10 D20 D30 3 D10 ÷ D20 D30 D33
I1
D11 ÷ D21 D31 D34
D12 ÷ D22 D32 D35
Quotient Remainder
• Data Type: Double Word and Long

When all devices are assigned to repeat, different results are set to 6 devices starting with D1·D1+1.

S1 (R epeat = 3) S2 (Repeat = 3) D1 (Repeat = 3)

SOTU DIV(D) S1 R S2 R D1 R REP
D10 D20 D30 3 D10·D11 ÷ D20·D21 D30·D31 D36·D37
I1
D12·D13 ÷ D22·D23 D32·D33 D38·D39
D14·D15 ÷ D24·D25 D34·D35 D40·D41
Quotient Remainder
• Data Type: Float

When all devices are assigned to repeat, different results are set to 3 devices starting with D1·D1+1.

S1 (Repeat = 3) S2 (Repeat = 3) D 1 ( R ep ea t = 3)
SOTU DIV(F) S1 R S2 R D1 R REP
D10 D20 D30 3 D10·D11 ÷ D20·D21 D30·D31
I1
D12·D13 ÷ D22·D23 D32·D33
D14·D15 ÷ D24·D25 D34·D35
Quotient

Note: When a user program execution error occurs in any repeat operation, special internal relay M8004 (user program execution error) and the
ERR LED are turned on and maintained while operations for other instructions continues.

7-12 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 7: BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS

INC (Increment)
Data type W or I: S/D + 1 → S/D
Data type D or L: S/D·S/D+1 + 1 → S/D·S/D+1
INC(*) S/D
***** When input is on, one is added to the 16- or 32-bit data assigned by device S/D and the result is stored to
the same device.

DEC (Decrement)
Data type W or I: S/D – 1 → S/D
Data type D or L: S/D·S/D+1 – 1 → S/D·S/D+1
DEC(*) S/D
***** When input is on, one is subtracted from the 16- or 32-bit data assigned by device S/D and the result is
stored to the same device.

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S/D (Source/Destination) Device to increment data — — — — — — X — —

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

Since the INC and DEC instructions are executed in each scan while input is on, a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used.

Valid Data Types

W (word) X When a word device such as D (data register) is assigned as the source/destination, 1 point (word or integer
I (integer) X data) or 2 points (double-word or long data) are used.
D (double word) X
L (long) X
F (float) —

Increment beyond Limits

When the S/D value is at its maximum and is incremented by one, the value returns to 0, turning on the carry (M8003).

Decrement beyond Limits

When the S/D value is at its minimum and is decremented by one, the value returns to its maximum value (word or double-word
data) or to –1 (integer or long data), turning on the internal relay M8003 (carry or borrow).

Example: INC

SOTU INC(W) S/D D10 100 + 1 D10 101

I0 D10
When input I0 is turned on, the data of D10 is incremented by one.
If SOTU is not programmed, the data of D10 is incremented in each scan.

Example: DEC

SOTU DEC(W) S/D D20 100 – 1 D20 99

I1 D20
When input I1 is turned on, the data of D20 is decremented by one.
If SOTU is not programmed, the data of D20 is decremented in each scan.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 7-13

7: BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS

ROOT (Root)

Data type W: S1 → D1
ROOT(*) S1 D1
When input is on, the square root of the device assigned by S1 is extracted
***** *****
and stored to the destination assigned by D1.

The square root is calculated to two decimals, omitting the figures below
the second place of decimals, and multiplied by 100.
Data type D: S1·S1+1 → D1·D1+1
When input is on, the square root of the device assigned by S1·S1+1 is
extracted and is stored to the destination assigned by D1·D1+1.

The square root is calculated to two decimals, omitting the figures below
the second place of decimals, and multiplied by 100.
Data type F: S1·S1+1 → D1·D1+1
When input is on, the square root of the device assigned by S1·S1+1 is
extracted and is stored to the destination assigned by D1·D1+1.

Valid Devices
Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat
S1 (Source 1) Binary data — — — — — — X X —
D1 (Destination 1) Destination to store results — — — — — — X — —

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.
When F (float) data is selected and source device S1 contains a negative value, a user program execution error will result, turning on special internal
relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart.
When F (float) data is selected and S1 does not comply with the normal floating-point format, a user program execution error will result, turning on
special internal relay M8004 and ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart.
When a user program execution error occurs, the execution of the instruction is canceled. The value of D1 is left unchanged and the next instruction
is executed. For user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.
Since the ROOT instruction is executed in each scan while input is on, a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used.

Valid Data Types

W (word) X When a word device such as D (data register) is assigned as the source or destination, 1 point (word data) or 2
I (integer) — points (double-word or float data) are used.
D (double word) X
L (long) —
F (float) X

Examples: ROOT

Before Execution After Execution

ROOT(W) S1 D1
D10 55 D20 741 55 = 7.4161
I0 D10 D20

ROOT(D) S1 D1 D11·D12 4294967295 D21·D22 6553599

I1 D11 D21
4294967295 = 65535.99999

D13·D14 20.738916 D23·D24 4.554

ROOT(F) S1 D1
I2 D13 D23 20.738916 = 4.554...

7-14 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 7: BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS

SUM (Sum)
Calculates the total of assigned data, depending on the calculation option.
SUM(*) S1 S2 D1
ADD:
ADD/XOR ***** ***** *****
When input is on, N blocks of 16- or 32-bit data starting at device assigned by S1 are
added together and the result is stored to the device assigned by D1. S2 specifies the
quantity of data blocks.

XOR:
When input is on, N blocks of 16-bit data starting at the device assigned by S1 are
XORed and the result is stored to the device assigned by D1. S2 specifies the quantity of
data blocks.

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) First device address to calculate — — — — X X X — —
S2 (Source 2) Quantity of data blocks — — — — — — X X —
D1 (Destination 1) Destination to store results — — — — — — X — —

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

When T (timer) or C (counter) is used as S1, the timer/counter current value (TC or CC) is displayed.

When F (float) data is selected, only a data register can be designated as S1.

For source S2, 1 word is always used without regard to the data type.

When F (float) data is selected and S1 does not comply with the normal floating-point format, a user program execution error will result, turning on
special internal relay M8004 and ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart.

When S2 is 0 or exceeds the correct value range for the selected device, a user program execution error will result, turning on special internal relay
M8004 and ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart. For user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

Valid Data Types

Calculation ADD XOR When ADD is selected, all data types can be used.
W (word) X X When XOR is selected, only W (word) data can be used.
I (integer) X —
When a word device such as T (timer), C (counter), or D (data register) is assigned as the source or
D (double word) X —
destination, 1 point (word or integer data) or 2 points (double-word, long, or float data) are used.
L (long) X —
F (float) X —

Quantity of Source and Destination Devices

Depending on the ADD or XOR operation for W (word) and I (integer) data, the destination uses a different quantity of devices.

Operation W (word), I (integer) D (double word), L (long), F (float)

S1, S2: 1 word device S1, D1: 2 word devices
ADD
D1: 2 word devices S2: 1 word device
XOR S1, S2, D1: 1 word device —

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 7-15

7: BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS

Carry and Borrow

In advanced instructions involving D (double word), L (long), or F (floating point) data, special internal relay M8003 (carry and
borrow) is turned on when the execution of the instruction results in the following value.

Data Type M8003 Execution Result

D (double word) 1 Exceeds the range between 0 to 4,294,967,295
L (long) 1 Exceeds the range between –2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647
F (float) 1 See the figure below.

Carry and Borrow in Floating-Point Data Processing

When advanced instructions involving floating-point data are executed, special internal relay M8003 (carry and borrow) is updated.

M8003 Execution Result Value

1 ≠0 Overflow (exceeds the range between –3.402823×1038 and 3.402823×1038)
1 0 Not zero (within the range between –1.175495×10–38 and 1.175495×10–38)
0 0 Zero

Not Zero
Overflow Overflow

M8003 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

Execution Result –3.402823×1038 –1.175495×10–38 0 1.175495×10–38 3.402823×1038

Examples: SUM
• Data Type: Word

SOTU SUM(W) S1 S2 D1 D0
1
D100·D101
10
I0 ADD D0 4 D100 (0001h) (0000000Ah)

2
D1
(0002h)

3
D2
(0003h)

4
D3
(0004h)

SOTU SUM(W) S1 S2 D1 D0
261
D100
1276
I0 XOR D0 4 D100 (0105h) (04FCh)

758
D1
(02F6h)

775
D2
(0307h)

1032
D3
(0408h)

XOR Operation
D0 (0105h) 0000 0001 0000 0101
D1 (02F6h) 0000 0010 1111 0110
D2 (0307h) 0000 0011 0000 0111
XOR D3 (0408h) 0000 0100 0000 1000
D100 (04FCh) 0000 0100 1111 1100

7-16 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 7: BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS

• Data Type: Integer

SOTU SUM(I) S1 S2 D1 D0
–500
D100·D101
–4566
I0 ADD D0 4 D100 (FE0Ch) (FFFFEE2Ah)

25
D1
(0019h)

–4095
D2
(F001h)

4
D3
(0004h)

• Data Type: Double Word

SOTU SUM(D) S1 S2 D1 D0·D1

100000
D100·D101
1000000
I0 ADD D0 4 D100 (000186A0h) (000F4240h)

200000
D2·D3
(00030D40h)

300000
D4·D5
(000493E0h)

400000
D6·D7
(00061A80h)

• Data Type: Long

SOTU SUM(L) S1 S2 D1 D0·D1

–500000
D100·D101
–10253086
I0 ADD D0 4 D100 (FFF85EE0h) (FF638CE2h)

123456
D2·D3
(0001E240h)

–9876543
D4·D5
(FF694BC1h)

1
D6·D7
(00000001h)

• Data Type: Float

SOTU SUM(F) S1 S2 D1 D0·D1 12.345 D100·D101 18.3926

I0 ADD D0 4 D100

D2·D3 1.56

D4·D5 0.9876

D6·D7 3.5

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 7-17

7: BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS

RNDM (Random)

Generates pseudorandom numbers.

RNDM(W) S1 S2 D1
***** ***** ***** When the input is on, a pseudorandom number is generated with the data specified by
S1 as the lower limit and the data specified by S2 as the upper limit, and that value is
stored in D1.

The result is stored to the destination designated by device D1.

This instruction is available on upgraded CPU modules with system program version 210
or higher.

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) Minimum value of pseudorandom numbers — — — — — — X X*1 —
S2 (Source 2) Maximum value of pseudorandom numbers — — — — — — X X*1 —
D1 (Destination 1) Destination to store results — — — — — — X — —

*1 0 to 32,767 can be input.

For the valid device address range, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

• When the data in S1 or S2 is outside the range of 0 to 32,767, the result is a user program execution error.

• When the data specified by S1 is the same value as the data specified by S2 or a larger value, the result is a user program execution error.
For user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

Valid Data Types

W (word) X When a word device such as D (data register) is designated as the source or destination, 1 point (word) is
I (integer) — used.

D (double word) —
L (long) —
F (float) —

Example: RNDM

When the input is turned on, a pseudorandom number is generated in the

SOTU RNDM(W) S1 S2 D1 range of 1 to 6, and the result is stored in D0010.
I0 1 6 D0010

7-18 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

8: BOOLEAN COMPUTATION INSTRUCTIONS
Introduction
Boolean computations use the AND, OR, and exclusive OR statements as carried out by the ANDW, ORW, and XORW instructions in
the word or double-word data, respectively.

ANDW (AND Word)

S1 · S2 → D1
ANDW(*) S1(R) S2(R) D1(R) REP
***** ***** ***** ** When input is on, 16- or 32-bit data assigned by source devices S1 and S2
are ANDed, bit by bit. The result is set to destination device D1.

AND Truth Table

S1 S2 D1
S1 = 1 1 1 0 0 1
0 0 0
S2 = 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0
1 0 0
D1 = 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

ORW (OR Word)

S1 + S2 → D1
ORW(*) S1(R) S2(R) D1(R) REP
***** ***** ***** ** When input is on, 16- or 32-bit data assigned by source devices S1 and S2
are ORed, bit by bit. The result is set to destination device D1.

AND Truth Table

S1 = 1 1 1 0 0 1 S1 S2 D1
0 0 0
S2 = 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1
1 0 1
D1 = 1 1 1 0 1 1
1 1 1

XORW (Exclusive OR Word)

S1 ⊕ S2 → D1
XORW(*) S1(R) S2(R) D1(R) REP
***** ***** ***** ** When input is on, 16- or 32-bit data assigned by source devices S1 and S2
are exclusive ORed, bit by bit. The result is set to destination device D1.

AND Truth Table

S1 = 1 1 1 0 0 1 S1 S2 D1
0 0 0
S2 = 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1
1 0 1
D1 = 0 1 1 0 1 0
1 1 0

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 8-1

8: BOOLEAN COMPUTATION INSTRUCTIONS

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) Data for computation X X X X X X X X 1-99
S2 (Source 2) Data for computation X X X X X X X X 1-99
D1 (Destination 1) Destination to store results — X X X X X — 1-99

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

Internal relays M0 through M7977 and M10000 through M17497 can be assigned as D1. Special internal relays cannot be assigned as D1.

When T (timer) or C (counter) is used as S1 or S2, the timer/counter current value (TC or CC) is displayed. When T (timer) or C (counter) is used as
D1, the data is written in as a preset value (TP or CP) which can be 0 through 65,535.

Since the Boolean computation instructions are executed in each scan while input is on, a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be
used.

Valid Data Types

W (word) X When a bit device such as I (input), Q (output), M (internal relay), or R (shift register) is assigned as the source
I (integer) — or destination, 16 points (word data) or 32 points (double-word data) are used. When repeat is assigned for a bit
D (double word) X device, the quantity of device bits increases in 16- or 32-point increments.
L (long) — When a word device such as T (timer), C (counter), or D (data register) is assigned as the source or destination,
F (float) — 1 point (word data) or 2 points (double-word data) are used. When repeat is assigned for a word device, the
quantity of device words increases in 1- or 2-point increments.

Example: XORW
To convert optional output status among a series of 10 output points, use the XORW instruction in combination with 10 internal
relay points.

Q11 Q10 Q7 Q0

This program will invert the status of the shaded outputs on the left from on to
off, and those not shaded from off to on.
10 points

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

M17 M10 M7 M0

Ten outputs Q0 through Q11 are assigned to 10 internal relays M0

S
through M11.
M8120 M0

S
M2 Five internal relays M0, M2, M4, M6, and M10 are set by initialize pulse
special internal relay M8120.
S
M4

S
M6

S
M10 When input I1 is turned on, the XORW instruction is executed to invert
the status of outputs Q0, Q2, Q4, Q6, and Q10.
SOTU XORW(W) S1 – S2 – D1 – REP
I1 M0 Q0 Q0

8-2 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 8: BOOLEAN COMPUTATION INSTRUCTIONS

Repeat Operation in the ANDW, ORW, and XORW Instructions

Source devices S1 and S2 and destination device D1 can be assigned to repeat individually or in combination. When destination
device D1 is not designated set to repeat, the final result is set to destination device D1. When repeat is assigned, consecutive
devices as many as the repeat cycles starting with the designated device are used. Since the repeat operation works similarly on
the ANDW (AND word), ORW (OR word), and XORW (exclusive OR word) instructions, the following examples use the ANDW
instruction.

Repeat One Source Device

• Data Type: Word

When only S1 (source) is assigned to repeat, the final result is set to destination device D1.

S1 (Repeat = 3) S2 (Repeat = 0) D1 (Repeat = 0)

SOTU ANDW(W) S1 R S2 – D1 – REP
D10 D20 D30 3 D10 · D20 (D30)
I1
D11 · D20 (D30)
D12 · D20 D30
• Data Type: Double Word

When only S1 (source) is assigned to repeat, the final result is set to destination device D1·D1+1.

S1 (Repeat = 3) S2 (Repeat = 0) D1 (Repeat = 0)

SOTU ANDW(D) S1 R S2 – D1 – REP
D10 D20 D30 3
D10·D11 · D20·D21 (D30·D31)
I1
D12·D13 · D20·D21 (D30·D31)
D14·D15 · D20·D21 D30·D31

Repeat Destination Device Only

• Data Type: Word

When only D1 (destination) is assigned to repeat, the same result is set to 3 devices starting with D1.

S1 (Repeat = 0) S2 (Repeat = 0) D1 (Repeat = 3)

SOTU ANDW(W) S1 – S2 – D1 R REP
D10 D20 D30 3 D10 · D20 D30
I1
D10 · D20 D31
D10 · D20 D32
• Data Type: Double Word

When only D1 (destination) is assigned to repeat, the same result is set to 3 devices starting with D1·D1+1.

S1 (Repeat = 0) S2 (Repeat = 0) D1 (Repeat = 3)

SOTU ANDW(D) S1 – S2 – D1 R REP
D10 D20 D30 3 D10·D11 · D20·D21 D30·D31
I1
D10·D11 · D20·D21 D32·D33
D10·D11 · D20·D21 D34·D35

Repeat Two Source Devices

• Data Type: Word

When S1 and S2 (source) are assigned to repeat, the final result is set to destination device D1.

S1 (Repeat = 3) S2 (Repeat = 3) D1 (Repeat = 0)

SOTU ANDW(W) S1 R S2 R D1 – REP
D10 D20 D30 3 D10 · D20 (D30)
I1
D11 · D21 (D30)
D12 · D22 D30
• Data Type: Double Word

When S1 and S2 (source) are assigned to repeat, the final result is set to destination device D1·D1+1.

S1 (Repeat = 3) S2 (Repeat = 3) D1 (Repeat = 0)

SOTU ANDW(D) S1 R S2 R D1 – REP
D10 D20 D30 3 D10·D11 · D20·D21 (D30·D31)
I1
D12·D13 · D22·D23 (D30·D31)
D14·D15 · D24·D25 D30·D31

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 8-3

8: BOOLEAN COMPUTATION INSTRUCTIONS

Repeat Source and Destination Devices

• Data Type: Word

When S1 (source) and D1 (destination) are assigned to repeat, different results are set to 3 devices starting with D1.

S1 (Repeat = 3) S2 (Repeat = 0) D1 (Repeat = 3)

SOTU ANDW(W) S1 R S2 – D1 R REP D10 · D20 D30
I1 D10 D20 D30 3
D11 · D20 D31
D12 · D20 D32
• Data Type: Double Word

When S1 (source) and D1 (destination) are assigned to repeat, different results are set to 3 devices starting with D1·D1+1.

S1 (Repeat = 3) S2 (Repeat = 0) D1 (Repeat = 3)

SOTU ANDW(D) S1 R S2 – D1 R REP
D10 D20 D30 3 D10·D11 · D20·D21 D30·D31
I1
D12·D13 · D20·D21 D32·D33
D14·D15 · D20·D21 D34·D35

Repeat All Source and Destination Devices

• Data Type: Word

When all devices are assigned to repeat, different results are set to 3 devices starting with D1.

S1 (Repeat = 3) S2 (Repeat = 3) D1 (Repeat = 3)

SOTU ANDW(W) S1 R S2 R D1 R REP
D10 D20 D30 3 D10 · D20 D30
I1
D11 · D21 D31
D12 · D22 D32
• Data Type: Double Word

When all devices are assigned to repeat, different results are set to 3 devices starting with D1·D1+1.

S1 (Repeat = 3) S2 (Repeat = 3) D1 (Repeat = 3)

SOTU ANDW(D) S1 R S2 R D1 R REP
D10 D20 D30 3 D10·D11 · D20·D21 D30·D31
I1
D12·D13 · D22·D23 D32·D33
D14·D15 · D24·D25 D34·D35

Note: When a user program error occurs in any repeat operation, special internal relay M8004 (user program execution error) and the ERROR LED
are turned on and maintained while operations for other instructions continues. For an advanced instruction that has caused a user program
execution error due to an error in the source devices, results are not set to any destination.

8-4 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

9: SHIFT / ROTATE INSTRUCTIONS
Introduction
Bit shift instructions are used to shift the data string starting with source device S1 to the left or right by 1 to 15 bits as designated.
The data string can be 1 to 65,535 bits. The result is set to the source device S1 and special internal relay M8003 (carry or
borrow). The LSB or MSB is filled with 0 or 1 as designated.
Bit shift and rotate instructions are used to shift the 16- or 32-bit data string in the designated source device S1 to the left or right
by the quantity of bits designated. The result is set to the source device S1 and special internal relay M8003 (carry or borrow).
The BCD left shift instruction shifts the BCD digits in two consecutive data registers to the left.
The word shift instruction is used to move 16-bit data to a destination data register and shifts down the data of subsequent data
registers as many as designated.

SFTL (Shift Left)

CY ← S1
SFTL S1 S2 N_B Bits When input is on, N_B-bit data string starting with source device S1 is shifted
***** ***** ***** ** to the left by the quantity of bits assigned by device Bits.

The result is set to source device S1, and the last bit status shifted out is set to
special internal relay M8003 (carry or borrow). Zero or 1 assigned by source
device S2 is set to the LSB.

• S2 = 0, N_B = 16, Bits = 1

CY MSB S1 LSB S2
Before shift: 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
M8003 Shift to the left

CY MSB S1 LSB
After shift: 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
M8003

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) First data for bit shift — X X — — X — —
S2 (Source 2) Data to shift into the LSB X X X X — — — 0 or 1 —
N_B Number of bits in the data string — — — — — — X 1-65,535 —
Bits Quantity of bits to shift — — — — — — X 1-15 —

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

Internal relays M0 through M7977 and M10000 through M17497 can be designated as S1. Special internal relays cannot be designated as S1.

Since the SFTL instruction is executed in each scan while input is on, a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 9-1

9: SHIFT / ROTATE INSTRUCTIONS

Examples: SFTL
• N_B = 16 bits

M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay.

MOV(W) S1 – D1 – REP When the CPU starts operation, the MOV (move) instruction sets
M8120 43690 D10
43,690 to data register D10.

SOTU SFTL S1 S2 N_B Bits Each time input I0 is turned on, 16-bit data of data register D10 is
I0 D10 0 16 1 shifted to the left by 1 bit as assigned by device Bits. The last bit
status shifted out is set to special internal relay M8003 (carry or
borrow). Zeros are set to the LSB.

Bits to shift = 1
CY MSB D10 LSB S2
Before shift: D10 = 43690 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0
M8003 Shift to the left

CY MSB D10 LSB

After first shift: D10 = 21844 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0
M8003

CY MSB D10 LSB

After second shift: D10 = 43688 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0
M8003

• N_B = 32 bits

M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay.

MOV(W) S1 – D1 – REP
When the CPU starts operation, the MOV (move) instructions set
M8120 0 D10
0 and 65,535 to data registers D10 and D11, respectively.
MOV(W) S1 – D1 – REP Each time input I0 is turned on, 32-bit data of data registers D10
65535 D11 and D11 is shifted to the left by 2 bits as assigned by device Bits.
D10 is the low word, and D11 is the high word.
SOTU SFTL S1 S2 N_B Bits
I0 D10 1 32 2 The last bit status shifted out is set to a carry (special internal
relay M8003). Ones are set to the LSBs.

Bits to shift = 2

Before shift:
CY MSB D11 D10 LSB S2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
M8003 Shift to the left

After shift:
CY MSB D11 D10 LSB
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
M8003

9-2 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 9: SHIFT / ROTATE INSTRUCTIONS

SFTR (Shift Right)

S1 → CY
SFTR S1 S2 N_B Bits When input is on, N_B-bit data string starting with source device S1 is
***** ***** ***** ** shifted to the right by the quantity of bits assigned by device Bits.

The result is set to source device S1, and the last bit status shifted out is set
to a carry (special internal relay M8003). Zero or 1 assigned by source
device S2 is set to the MSB.

• S2 = 0, N_B = 16, Bits = 1

S2 MSB S1 LSB CY
Before shift: 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0
Shift to the right M8003

MSB S1 LSB CY
After shift: 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0
M8003

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) First data for bit shift — X X — — X — —
S2 (Source 2) Data to shift into the MSB X X X X — — — 0 or 1 —
N_B Number of bits in the data string — — — — — — X 1-65,535 —
Bits Quantity of bits to shift — — — — — — X 1-15 —

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

Since the SFTR instruction is executed in each scan while input is on, a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 9-3

9: SHIFT / ROTATE INSTRUCTIONS

Example: SFTR
• Data Type: Word

M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay.

MOV(W) S1 – D1 – REP
When the CPU starts operation, the MOV (move) instruction sets
M8120 29 D10
29 to data register D10.

SOTU SFTR S1 S2 N_B Bits Each time input I0 is turned on, 16-bit data of data register D10
I0 D10 0 16 2 is shifted to the right by 2 bits as assigned by device Bits. The last
bit status shifted out is set to special internal relay M8003 (carry
or borrow). Zeros are set to the MSB.

Bits to shift = 2
MSB D10 LSB CY
Before shift: D10 = 29 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1
Shift to the right M8003

MSB D10 LSB CY

After first shift: D10 = 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0
M8003

MSB D10 LSB CY

After second shift: D10 = 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
M8003

• Data Type: Double Word

M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay.

MOV(W) S1 – D1 – REP
When the CPU starts operation, the MOV (move) instructions set
M8120 65535 D10
65,535 and 0 to data registers D10 and D11, respectively.
MOV(W) S1 – D1 – REP Each time input I0 is turned on, 32-bit data of data registers D10
0 D11 and D11 is shifted to the right by 1 bit as assigned by device Bit.
D10 is the low word, and D11 is the high word.
SOTU SFTR S1 S2 N_B Bits
I0 D10 1 32 1 The last bit status shifted out is set to special internal relay
M8003 (carry or borrow). Ones are set to the MSB.

Bits to shift = 1

Before shift:
S2 MSB D11 D10 LSB CY
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Shift to the right M8003

After shift:
MSB D11 D10·D11 D10 LSB CY
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
M8003

9-4 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 9: SHIFT / ROTATE INSTRUCTIONS

BCDLS (BCD Left Shift)

When input is on, the 32-bit binary data assigned by S1 is converted into 8 BCD digits, shifted
BCDLS S1 S2 to the left by the quantity of digits assigned by S2, and converted back to 32-bit binary data.
***** * Valid values for each of S1 and S1+1 are 0 through 9,999.

The number of digits that can be shifted is 1 through 7.

Zero is set to the lowest digit after each shift.

When S2 = 1 (digits to shift) S1 S1+1

Before shift: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0
Shift to the left

After shift: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 0
MSD LSD

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) Data for BCD shift — — — — — — X — —
S2 (Source 2) Quantity of digits to shift X X X X X X X 1-7 —

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

When T (timer) or C (counter) is used as S2, the timer/counter current value (TC or CC) is displayed.

The number of digits that can be shifted as S2 are 1 through 7.

Make sure that the source data determined by S1 and S1+1 is between 0 and 9,999 for each data register. If either source data is over 9,999, a user
program execution error will result, turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart. When S2 is higher than
7, a user program execution error will also result.

When a user program execution error occurs, the execution of the instruction is canceled. The data in S1 and S1+1 is left unchanged and the next
instruction is executed. For user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

Valid Data Types

When a word device such as D (data register) is assigned as source S1, 2 points (double-word data) are used.

When a bit device such as I (input), Q (output), M (internal relay), or R (shift register) is assigned as source S2, 16 points are used.

When a word device such as T (timer), C (counter), or D (data register) is assigned as source S2, 1 point is used.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 9-5

9: SHIFT / ROTATE INSTRUCTIONS

Example: BCDLS
M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay.
MOV(W) S1 – D1 – REP When the CPU starts operation, the MOV (move) instructions set 123 and 4,567 to
M8120 123 D10
data registers D10 and D11, respectively.
MOV(W) S1 – D1 – REP Each time input I0 is turned on, the 32-bit binary data of data registers D10 and D11
4567 D11 assigned by S1 is converted into 8 BCD digits, shifted to the left by 1 digit as assigned
by device S2, and converted back to 32-bit binary data.
SOTU BCDLS S1 S2
I0 D10 1 Zero is set to the lowest digit after each shift.

When S2 = 1 (digits to shift)

D10 D11
Before shift: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0
Shift to the left

After first shift: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 0

After second shift: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 0

MSD LSD

9-6 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 9: SHIFT / ROTATE INSTRUCTIONS

WSFT (Word Shift)

When input is on, N blocks of 16-bit word data, starting with device assigned by D1,
WSFT S1 S2 D1 are shifted up to the next 16-bit positions. At the same time, the data assigned by
***** ***** ***** device S1 is moved to the device assigned by D1. S2 specifies the quantity of blocks to
move.

When S2 = 3 (quantity of blocks to shift)

S1 16-bit data S1 16-bit data

D1+0 First 16-bit data D1+0 S1 data

D1+1 Second 16-bit data D1+1 First 16-bit data
D1+2 Third 16-bit data D1+2 Second 16-bit data
D1+3 Fourth 16-bit data 3 blocks (S2) D1+3 Third 16-bit data
D1+4 Fifth 16-bit data D1+4 Fifth 16-bit data

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) Source data for word shift X X X X X X X X —
S2 (Source 2) Quantity of blocks to shift X X X X X X X X —
D1 (Destination 1) First device address to shift — — — — — — X — —

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

When T (timer) or C (counter) is used as S1 or S2, the timer/counter current value (TC or CC) is displayed.

Valid Data Types

When a bit device such as I (input), Q (output), M (internal relay), or R (shift register) is assigned as source S1 or S2, 16 points are used.

When a word device such as T (timer), C (counter), or D (data register) is assigned as source S1 or S2, 1 point is used.

Special Internal Relay M8024: BMOV/WSFT Executing Flag

While the BMOV or WSFT is executed, M8024 turns on. When completed, M8024 turns off. If the CPU is powered down while
executing BMOV or WSFT, M8024 remains on when the CPU is powered up again.

Example: WSFT

SOTU WSFT S1 S2 D1 Before shift: After first shift:

I0 D10 3 D100
D10 12345 D10 12345
D100 through D102 → D101 through D103
D100 1111 D100 12345
D10 → D100
D101 2222 D101 1111
When input I0 is turned on, data of 3 data registers, starting with D100 assigned by
D102 3333 D102 2222
destination device D1, is shifted to the next data registers. Data of data register D10,
assigned by source device S1, is moved to D100 assigned by destination device D1. D103 4444 D103 3333
D104 5555 D104 5555

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 9-7

9: SHIFT / ROTATE INSTRUCTIONS

ROTL (Rotate Left)

When input is on, 16- or 32-bit data of the assigned source device S1 is rotated to the left by the
ROTL(*) S1 bits quantity of bits assigned by device bits.
***** **
The result is set to the source device S1, and the last bit status rotated out is set to a carry (special
internal relay M8003).

• Data Type: Word (bits to rotate = 1)

CY MSB S1 LSB
Before rotation: 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0
M8003 Rotate to the left

CY MSB S1 LSB
After rotation: 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1
M8003

• Data Type: Double Word (bits to rotate = 1)

Before rotation:
CY MSB S1 LSB
1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0
M8003 Rotate to the left

After rotation:
CY MSB S1 LSB
1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1
M8003

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) Data for bit rotation — X X — — X — —
bits Quantity of bits to rotate — — — — — — — 1-15, 1-31 —

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

Internal relays M0 through M7977 and M10000 through M17497 can be designated as S1. Special internal relays cannot be designated as S1.

The quantity of bits to rotate can be 1 through 15 for word data, or 1 through 31 for double-word data.

Since the ROTL instruction is executed in each scan while input is on, a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used.

Valid Data Types

W (word) X When a bit device such as Q (output), M (internal relay), or R (shift register) is assigned as the source, 16 points
I (integer) — (word data) or 32 points (double-word data) are used.
D (double word) X When a word device such as D (data register) is assigned as the source, 1 point (word data) or 2 points (double-
L (long) — word data) are used.
F (float) —

9-8 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 9: SHIFT / ROTATE INSTRUCTIONS

Example: ROTL
• Data Type: Word

M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay.

MOV(W) S1 – D1 – REP
When the CPU starts operation, the MOV (move) instruction sets 40,966 to data register
M8120 40966 D10
D10.
SOTU ROTL(W) S1 bits Each time input I0 is turned on, 16-bit data of data register D10 is rotated to the left by
I0 D10 1
1 bit as assigned by device bits.

The status of the MSB is set to special internal relay M8003 (carry or borrow).

Bits to rotate = 1
CY MSB D10 LSB
Before rotation: D10 = 40966 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
M8003

CY MSB D10 LSB

After first rotation: D10 = 16397 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1
M8003

CY MSB D10 LSB

After second rotation: D10 = 32794 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0
M8003

• Data Type: Double Word

Each time input I1 is turned on, 32-bit data of data registers D10 and D11 is rotated to
SOTU ROTL(D) S1 bits the left by 1 bit as assigned by device bits.
I1 D10 1
The status of the MSB is set to special internal relay M8003 (carry or borrow).

Bits to rotate = 1

Before rotation: D10·D11 = 2,684,788,742

CY MSB D10·D11 LSB
1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
M8003 Rotate to the left

After rotation: D10·D11 = 1,074,610,189

CY MSB D10·D11 LSB
1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1
M8003

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 9-9

9: SHIFT / ROTATE INSTRUCTIONS

ROTR (Rotate Right)

When input is on, 16- or 32-bit data of the assigned source device S1 is rotated to the right by the
ROTR(*) S1 bits quantity of bits assigned by device bits.
***** ** The result is set to the source device S1, and the last bit status rotated out is set to special internal
relay M8003 (carry or borrow).

• Data Type: Word (bits to rotate = 1)

MSB S1 LSB CY
Before rotation: 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0
Rotate to the right M8003

MSB S1 LSB CY
After rotation: 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0
M8003

• Data Type: Double Word (bits to rotate = 1)

Before rotation:
MSB S1 LSB CY
1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0
Rotate to the right M8003

After rotation:
MSB S1 LSB CY
0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0
M8003

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) Data for bit rotation — X X — — X — —
1-15,
bits Quantity of bits to rotate — — — — — — — —
1-31

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.
Internal relays M0 through M7977 and M10000 through M17497 can be designated as S1. Special internal relays cannot be designated as S1.

The number of bits that can be rotated is 1 through 15 for word data, or 1 through 31 for double-word data.

Since the ROTR instruction is executed in each scan while input is on, a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used.

Valid Data Types

W (word) X When a bit device such as Q (output), M (internal relay), or R (shift register) is assigned as the source, 16 points
I (integer) — (word data) or 32 points (double-word data) are used.
D (double word) X When a word device such as D (data register) is assigned as the source, 1 point (word data) or 2 points (double-
L (long) — word data) are used.
F (float) —

9-10 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 9: SHIFT / ROTATE INSTRUCTIONS

Example: ROTR
• Data Type: Word

M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay.

MOV(W) S1 – D1 – REP When the CPU starts operation, the MOV (move) instruction sets 13 to data register
M8120 13 D20
D20.

SOTU ROTR(W) S1 bits Each time input I1 is turned on, 16-bit data of data register D20 is rotated to the right by
I1 D20 2 2 bits as assigned by device bits.

The last bit status rotated out is set to special internal relay M8003 (carry or borrow).

Bits to rotate = 2
MSB D20 LSB CY
Before rotation: D20 = 13 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1
M8003

MSB D20 LSB CY

After first rotation: D20 = 16387 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
M8003

MSB D20 LSB CY

After second rotation: D20 = 53248 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
M8003

• Data Type: Double Word

Each time input I1 is turned on, 32-bit data of data registers D20 and D21 is rotated to
SOTU ROTR(D) S1 bits the right by 1 bit as assigned by device bits.
I1 D20 1
The last bit status rotated out is set to special internal relay M8003 (carry or borrow).

Bits to rotate = 1

Before rotation: D20·D21 = 851,981

MSB D20·D21 LSB CY
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1
Rotate to the right M8003

After rotation: D20·D21 = 2,147,909,638

MSB D20·D21 LSB CY
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1
M8003

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 9-11

9: SHIFT / ROTATE INSTRUCTIONS

9-12 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

10: DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS
Introduction
This chapter describes the data conversion instructions that convert data to the specified format.
The ENCO (encode), DECO (decode), and BCNT (bit count) instructions processes bit device data.
The ALT (alternate output) instruction turns an output on and off each time an input button is pressed.
The CVDT (convert data) instruction converts data types among W (word), I (integer), D (double word), L (long), and F (float).
The DTDV and DTCB instructions convert data between two one-byte data and one word data. The SWAP exchanges upper and
lower byte- or word-data for word- or double-word-data respectively.

HTOB (Hex to BCD)

S1 → D1
HTOB(*) S1 D1 When input is on, the 16- or 32-bit data assigned by S1 is converted into BCD and stored to the
***** ***** destination assigned by device D1.

Valid values for the source device are 0 through 9,999 for word data, and 0 through 99,999,999
for double-word data.

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) Binary data to convert X X X X X X X X —
D1 (Destination 1) Destination to store conversion results — X X X X X — —

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

Internal relays M0 through M7977 and M10000 through M17497 can be designated as D1. Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1.

When T (timer) or C (counter) is used as S1, the timer/counter current value (TC or CC) is displayed. When T (timer) or C (counter) is used as D1,
the data is written in as a preset value (TP or CP) which can be 0 through 65,535.

When the data type is W (word), the valid range of S1 (binary data) is 0 to 9,999.
When the data type is D (double word), the valid range of S1 (binary data) is 0 to 99,999,999.

Make sure that the source designated by S1 is within the valid value range. If the source data exceeds the valid range, a user program execution
error will result, turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart.

When a user program execution error occurs, the execution of the instruction is canceled. The value of D1 is left unchanged and the next instruction
is executed. For user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

Since the HTOB instruction is executed in each scan while input is on, a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used.

Valid Data Types

W (word) X When a bit device such as I (input), Q (output), M (internal relay), or R (shift register) is assigned as the source,
I (integer) — 16 points (word data) or 32 points (double-word data) are used.
D (double word) X When a word device such as T (timer), C (counter), or D (data register) is assigned as the source, 1 point (word
L (long) — data) or 2 points (double-word data) are used.
F (float) —

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 10-1

10: DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS

Examples: HTOB
• Data Type: Word

Binary BCD
SOTU HTOB(W) S1 D1
D10 D20 0 0
I1 D10 D20
(0000h) (0000h)

1234 4660
D10 D20
(04D2h) (1234h)

9999 39321
D10 D20
(270Fh) (9999h)

• Data Type: Double Word

Binary BCD
SOTU HTOB(D) S1 D1
D10 D20 0 0
I2 D10 D20
(0000h) (0000h)
0 0
D11 D21
(0000h) (0000h)

188 4660
D10 D20
(00BCh) (1234h)
24910 22136
D11 D21
(614Eh) (5678h)

1525 39321
D10 D20
(05F5h) (9999h)
57599 39321
D11 D21
(E0FFh) (9999h)

10-2 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 10: DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS

BTOH (BCD to Hex)

S1 → D1
BTOH(*) S1 D1 When input is on, the BCD data assigned by S1 is converted into 16- or 32-bit binary data and
***** ***** stored to the destination assigned by device D1.

Valid values for the source device are 0 through 9,999 (BCD) for word data, and 0 through
99,999,999 (BCD) for double-word data.

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) BCD data to convert X X X X X X X X —
D1 (Destination 1) Destination to store conversion results — X X X X X — —

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

Internal relays M0 through M7977 and M10000 through M17497 can be designated as D1. Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1.

When T (timer) or C (counter) is used as S1, the timer/counter current value (TC or CC) is displayed. When T (timer) or C (counter) is used as D1,
the data is written in as a preset value (TP or CP) which can be 0 through 65,535.

When the data type is W (word), the valid range of S1 (BCD data) is 0 to 9,999.

When the data type is D (double word), the valid range of S1 (BCD data) is 0 to 99,999,999.

Make sure that each digit of the source designated by S1 is 0 through 9. If the source data exceeds the valid range, a user program execution error
will result, turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart.

When a user program execution error occurs, the execution of the instruction is canceled. The value of D1 is left unchanged and the next instruction
is executed. For user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

Since the BTOH instruction is executed in each scan while input is on, a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used.

Valid Data Types

W (word) X When a bit device such as I (input), Q (output), M (internal relay), or R (shift register) is assigned as the source,
I (integer) — 16 points (word data) or 32 points (double-word data) are used.
D (double word) X When a word device such as T (timer), C (counter), or D (data register) is assigned as the source, 1 point (word
L (long) — data) or 2 points (double-word data) are used.
F (float) —

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 10-3

10: DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS

Examples: BTOH
• Data Type: Word

BCD Binary
SOTU BTOH(W) S1 D1
D10 D20 0 0
I1 D10 D20
(0000h) (0000h)

4660 1234
D10 D20
(1234h) (04D2h)

39321 9999
D10 D20
(9999h) (270Fh)

• Data Type: Double Word

BCD Binary
SOTU BTOH(D) S1 D1
D10 D20 0 0
I2 D10 D20
(0000h) (0000h)
0 0
D11 D21
(0000h) (0000h)

4660 188
D10 D20
(1234h) (00BCh)
22136 24910
D11 D21
(5678h) (614Eh)

39321 1525
D10 D20
(9999h) (05F5h)
39321 57599
D11 D21
(9999h) (E0FFh)

10-4 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 10: DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS

HTOA (Hex to ASCII)

S1 → D1, D1+1, D1+2, D1+3
HTOA(W) S1 S2 D1 When input is on, the 16-bit binary data assigned by S1 is read from the lowest digit as
***** ***** ***** many times as the quantity of digits assigned by S2, converted into ASCII data, and
stored to the destination starting with the device assigned by D1.

The quantity of digits to convert can be 1 through 4.

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) Binary data to convert X X X X X X X X —
S2 (Source 2) Quantity of digits to convert X X X X X X X 1-4 —
D1 (Destination 1) Destination to store conversion results — — — — — — X — —

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

When T (timer) or C (counter) is used as S1 or S2, the timer/counter current value (TC or CC) is displayed.

Make sure that the quantity of digits designated by S2 is within the valid range. If the S2 data exceeds the valid range, a user program execution
error will result, turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart.

When a user program execution error occurs, the execution of the instruction is canceled. The value of D1 is left unchanged and the next instruction
is executed. For user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

Since the HTOA instruction is executed in each scan while input is on, a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used.

Valid Data Types

W (word) X When a bit device such as I (input), Q (output), M (internal relay), or R (shift register) is assigned as the source,
I (integer) — 16 points (word data) are used.
D (double word) — When a word device such as T (timer), C (counter), or D (data register) is assigned as the source or destination,
L (long) — 1 point (word data) is used.
F (float) —

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 10-5

10: DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS

Examples: HTOA
• Quantity of Digits: 4

Binary ASCII

SOTU HTOA(W) S1 S2 D1 4660 49

D10 4 D20 D10 D20
I0 (1234h) (0031h)

50
D21
(0032h)

51
D22
(0033h)

52
D23
(0034h)

• Quantity of Digits: 3

Binary ASCII

SOTU HTOA(W) S1 S2 D1 4660 50

D10 3 D20 D10 D20
I1 (1234h) (0032h)

51
D21
(0033h)

52
D22
(0034h)

• Quantity of Digits: 2

Binary ASCII

SOTU HTOA(W) S1 S2 D1 4660 51

D10 2 D20 D10 D20
I2 (1234h) (0033h)

52
D21
(0034h)

• Quantity of Digits: 1

Binary ASCII

SOTU HTOA(W) S1 S2 D1 4660 52

D10 1 D20 D10 D20
I3 (1234h) (0034h)

10-6 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 10: DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS

ATOH (ASCII to Hex)

S1, S1+1, S1+2, S1+3 → D1
ATOH(W) S1 S2 D1 When input is on, the ASCII data, assigned by S1, is converted into 16-bit binary data.
***** ***** ***** The number of times is determined by the quantity of digits assigned by S2. The data
is then stored to the destination assigned by device D1.

Valid values for source data to convert are 30h to 39h and 41h to 46h.

The quantity of digits to convert can be 1 through 4.

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) ASCII data to convert — — — — — — X — —
S2 (Source 2) Quantity of digits to convert X X X X X X X 1-4 —
D1 (Destination 1) Destination to store conversion results — X X X X X — —

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

Internal relays M0 through M7977 and M10000 through M17497 can be designated as D1. Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1.

When T (timer) or C (counter) is used as S2, the timer/counter current value (TC or CC) is displayed. When T (timer) or C (counter) is used as D1,
the data is written in as a preset value (TP or CP) which can be 0 through 65,535.

Valid values for source S1 data to convert are 30h to 39h and 41h to 46h. Make sure that the values for each source designated by S1 and the
quantity of digits designated by S2 are within the valid range. If the S1 or S2 data exceeds the valid range, a user program execution error will
result, turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart.

When a user program execution error occurs, the execution of the instruction is canceled. The value of D1 is left unchanged and the next instruction
is executed. For user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

Since the ATOH instruction is executed in each scan while input is on, a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used.

Valid Data Types

W (word) X When a bit device such as I (input), Q (output), M (internal relay), or R (shift register) is assigned as the source
I (integer) — or destination, 16 points (word data) are used.
D (double word) — When a word device such as T (timer), C (counter), or D (data register) is assigned as the source or destination,
L (long) — 1 point (word data) is used.
F (float) —

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 10-7

10: DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS

Examples: ATOH
• Quantity of Digits: 4

ASCII Binary

SOTU ATOH(W) S1 S2 D1 49 4660

D10 4 D20 D10 D20
I0 (0031h) (1234h)

50
D11
(0032h)

51
D12
(0033h)

52
D13
(0034h)
• Quantity of Digits: 3

ASCII Binary

SOTU ATOH(W) S1 S2 D1 49 291

D10 3 D20 D10 D20
I1 (0031h) (0123h)

50
D11
(0032h)

51
D12
(0033h)
• Quantity of Digits: 2

ASCII Binary

SOTU ATOH(W) S1 S2 D1 49 18
D10 2 D20 D10 D20
I2 (0031h) (0012h)

50
D11
(0032h)
• Quantity of Digits: 1

ASCII Binary

SOTU ATOH(W) S1 S2 D1 49 1
D10 1 D20 D10 D20
I3 (0031h) (0001h)

10-8 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 10: DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS

BTOA (BCD to ASCII)

Word data: S1 → D1, D1+1, D1+2, D1+3, D1+4
BTOA(*) S1 S2 D1 Double-word data: S1·S1+1 → D1, D1+1, D1+2, ... , D1+9
When input is on, the 16- or 32-bit binary data assigned by S1 is converted into BCD,
***** ***** *****
and converted into ASCII data. The data is read from the lowest digit as many times
as the quantity of digits assigned by S2. The result is stored to the destination starting
with the device assigned by D1.

The number of digits that can be converted is 1 through 5 for word data, and 1
through 10 for double-word data.

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) Binary data to convert X X X X X X X X —
S2 (Source 2) Quantity of digits to convert X X X X X X X 1-5, 1-10 —
D1 (Destination 1) Destination to store conversion results — — — — — — X — —
For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

When T (timer) or C (counter) is used as S1 or S2, the timer/counter current value (TC or CC) is displayed.

When the data type is W (word), the valid range of S2 (quantity of digits to convert) is 1 to 5.

When the data type is D (double word), the valid range of S2 (quantity of digits to convert) is 1 to 10.

Make sure that the quantity of digits designated by S2 is within the valid range. If the S2 data exceeds the valid range, a user program execution
error will result, turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart.

Make sure that the last destination data determined by D1+S2-1 is within the valid device range. If the derived destination device exceeds the valid
device range, a user program execution error will result, turning on special internal relay M8004 and ERROR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart.

When a user program execution error occurs, the execution of the instruction is canceled. The value of D1 is left unchanged and the next instruction
is executed. For user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

Since the BTOA instruction is executed in each scan while input is on, a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used.

Valid Data Types

W (word) X When a bit device such as I (input), Q (output), M (internal relay), or R (shift register) is assigned as the source,
I (integer) — 16 points (word data) or 32 points (double-word data) are used.
D (double word) X When a word device such as T (timer), C (counter), or D (data register) is assigned as the source or destination,
L (long) — 1 point (word data) or 2 points (double-word data) are used.
F (float) —

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 10-9

10: DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS

Examples: BTOA(W)
• Quantity of Digits: 5

BCD
Binary ASCII
SOTU BTOA(W) S1 S2 D1
D10 5 D20 12345 49
I0 D10 D20
(3039h) (0031h)

50
D21
(0032h)

51
D22
(0033h)

52
D23
(0034h)

53
D24
(0035h)
• Quantity of Digits: 4

BCD
Binary ASCII
SOTU BTOA(W) S1 S2 D1
D10 4 D20 12345 50
I1 D10 D20
(3039h) (0032h)

51
D21
(0033h)

52
D22
(0034h)

53
D23
(0035h)
• Quantity of Digits: 3

BCD
Binary ASCII
SOTU BTOA(W) S1 S2 D1
D10 3 D20 12345 51
I2 D10 D20
(3039h) (0033h)

52
D21
(0034h)

53
D22
(0035h)
• Quantity of Digits: 2

BCD
Binary ASCII
SOTU BTOA(W) S1 S2 D1
D10 2 D20 12345 52
I3 D10 D20
(3039h) (0034h)

53
D21
(0035h)
• Quantity of Digits: 1

BCD
Binary ASCII
SOTU BTOA(W) S1 S2 D1
D10 1 D20 12345 53
I4 D10 D20
(3039h) (0035h)

10-10 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 10: DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS

Examples: BTOA(D)
• Quantity of Digits: 10

BCD
Binary ASCII
SOTU BTOA(D) S1 S2 D1
D10 10 D20 1234567890 49
I0 D10·D11 D20
(499602D2h) (0031h)

50
D21
(0032h)

51
D22
(0033h)

52
D23
(0034h)

53
D24
(0035h)

54
D25
(0036h)

55
D26
(0037h)

56
D27
(0038h)

57
D28
(0039h)

48
D29
(0030h)

• Quantity of Digits: 6

BCD
Binary ASCII
SOTU BTOA(D) S1 S2 D1
D10 6 D20 1234567890 53
I1 D10·D11 D20
(499602D2h) (0035h)

54
D21
(0036h)

55
D22
(0037h)

56
D23
(0038h)

57
D24
(0039h)

48
D25
(0030h)

• Quantity of Digits: 3

BCD
Binary ASCII
SOTU BTOA(D) S1 S2 D1
D10 3 D20 1234567890 56
I2 D10·D11 D20
(499602D2h) (0038h)

57
D21
(0039h)

48
D22
(0030h)

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 10-11

10: DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS

ATOB (ASCII to BCD)

Word data: S1, S1+1, S1+2, S1+3, S1+4 → D1
ATOB(*) S1 S2 D1 Double-word data: S1, S1+1, S1+2, ... , S1+9 → D1·D1+1
***** ***** ***** When input is on, the ASCII data assigned by S1 as many times as the quantity of
digits assigned by S2 is converted into BCD, and converted into 16- or 32-bit binary
data. The result is stored to the destination assigned by device D1.

Valid values for source data to convert are 30h through 39h.

The number of digits that can be converted is through 5 for word data, and 1 through
10 for double-word data.

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) ASCII data to convert — — — — — — X — —
S2 (Source 2) Quantity of digits to convert X X X X X X X 1-5, 1-10 —
D1 (Destination 1) Destination to store conversion results — X X X X X — —
For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

Internal relays M0 through M7977 and M10000 through M17497 can be designated as D1. Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1.

When T (timer) or C (counter) is used as S2, the timer/counter current value (TC or CC) is displayed. When T (timer) or C (counter) is used as D1,
the data is written in as a preset value (TP or CP).

Valid values for source S1 data to convert are 30h through 39h. When the data type is W (word), the valid range of S2 (quantity of digits to convert)
is 1 to 5.

When the data type is D (double word), the valid range of S2 (quantity of digits to convert) is 1 to 10.

Make sure that the values for each source designated by S1 and the quantity of digits designated by S2 are within the valid range. If the S1 or S2
data exceeds the valid range, a user program execution error will result, turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the FC6A Series
MicroSmart.

Make sure that the last source data determined by S1+S2-1 is within the valid device range. If the derived source device exceeds the valid device
range, a user program execution error will result, turning on special internal relay M8004 and ERROR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart.

When a user program execution error occurs, the execution of the instruction is canceled. The value of D1 is left unchanged and the next instruction
is executed. For user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

Since the ATOB instruction is executed in each scan while input is on, a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used.

Valid Data Types

W (word) X When a bit device such as I (input), Q (output), M (internal relay), or R (shift register) is assigned as the source
I (integer) — or destination, 16 points (word data) or 32 points (double-word data) are used.
D (double word) X When a word device such as T (timer), C (counter), or D (data register) is assigned as the source or destination,
L (long) — 1 point (word data) or 2 points (double-word data) are used.
F (float) —

10-12 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 10: DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS

Examples: ATOB(W)
• Quantity of Digits: 5

BCD
ASCII Binary
SOTU ATOB(W) S1 S2 D1
D10 5 D20 49 12345
I0 D10 D20
(0031h) (3039h)

50
D11
(0032h)

51
D12
(0033h)

52
D13
(0034h)

53
D14
(0035h)
• Quantity of Digits: 4

BCD
ASCII Binary
SOTU ATOB(W) S1 S2 D1
D10 4 D20 49 1234
I1 D10 D20
(0031h) (04D2h)

50
D11
(0032h)

51
D12
(0033h)

52
D13
(0034h)
• Quantity of Digits: 3

BCD
ASCII Binary
SOTU ATOB(W) S1 S2 D1
D10 3 D20 49 123
I2 D10 D20
(0031h) (007Bh)

50
D11
(0032h)

51
D12
(0033h)
• Quantity of Digits: 2

BCD
ASCII Binary
SOTU ATOB(W) S1 S2 D1
D10 2 D20 49 12
I3 D10 D20
(0031h) (0018h)

50
D11
(0032h)
• Quantity of Digits: 1

BCD
ASCII Binary
SOTU ATOB(W) S1 S2 D1
D10 1 D20 49 1
I4 D10 D20
(0031h) (0001h)

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 10-13

10: DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS

Examples: ATOB(D)
• Quantity of Digits: 10

BCD
ASCII Binary
SOTU ATOB(D) S1 S2 D1
D10 10 D20 49 1234567890
I0 D10 D20·D21
(0031h) (499602D2h)

50
D11
(0032h)

51
D12
(0033h)

52
D13
(0034h)

53
D14
(0035h)

54
D15
(0036h)

55
D16
(0037h)

56
D17
(0038h)

57
D18
(0039h)

48
D19
(0030h)

• Quantity of Digits: 6

BCD
ASCII Binary
SOTU ATOB(D) S1 S2 D1
D10 6 D20 49 123456
I1 D10 D20·D21
(0031h) (0001E240h)

50
D11
(0032h)

51
D12
(0033h)

52
D13
(0034h)

53
D14
(0035h)

54
D15
(0036h)

• Quantity of Digits: 3

BCD
ASCII Binary
SOTU ATOB(D) S1 S2 D1
D10 3 D20 49 123
I2 D10 D20·D21
(0031h) (0000007Bh)

50
D11
(0032h)

51
D12
(0033h)

10-14 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 10: DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS

ENCO (Encode)
When input is on, a search begins for the first bit that is set to on. The search begins at S1 until
ENCO S1 D1 the first set (on) point is located. The number of points from S1 to the first set point (offset) is
Bits ***** ***** stored to the destination assigned by device D1.

If no point is on in the searched area, 65,535 is stored to D1.

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) First bit to start search X X X X — — X — —
D1 (Destination 1) Destination to store search results — X X — — X — —
Bits Quantity of bits searched — — — — — — — 1-256 —

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

Internal relays M0 through M7977 and M10000 through M17497 can be designated as D1. Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1.

Make sure that the search area designated by S1 plus Bits is within the valid value range. If the source data exceeds the valid range, a user program
execution error will result, turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart.

When a user program execution error occurs, the execution of the instruction is canceled. The value of D1 is left unchanged and the next instruction
is executed. For user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

Since the ENCO instruction is executed in each scan while input is on, a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used.

Examples: ENCO
When input I0 is on, a search begins for a bit that is set on in an array of 64 bits starting at
ENCO S1 D1 internal relay M4 assigned by device S1.
I0 64 M4 D100
Since internal relay M30 is the first point that is on, the offset from the first search point is 20,
and 20 is stored to data register D100 assigned by device D1.

M17 M0
M37 M20 D100 20
M57 M40
M77 M60 ON
M97 M80
M117 M100 Searched area

When input I1 is on, a search begins for a bit that is set on in an array of 64 bits starting at bit
ENCO S1 D1 0 of data register D10 assigned by device S1.
I1 64 D10 D100
Since bit 8 of data register D11 is the first point that is on, the offset from the first search point
is 24, and 24 is stored to data register D100 assigned by device D1.

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
D10
D11 D100 24
D12
D13 ON
D14
D15 Searched area

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 10-15

10: DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS

DECO (Decode)
When input is on, the values contained in devices assigned by S1 and D1 are added together to
DECO S1 D1 determine the destination, and the bit is then turned on.
***** *****

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) Offset X X X X — — X X —
D1 (Destination 1) First bit to count offset — X X — — X — —

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

Internal relays M0 through M7977 and M10000 through M17497 can be designated as D1. Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1.

Valid values for the offset designated by source device S1 are 0 through 255. Make sure that the offset designated by S1 and the last bit of
destination data determined by the sum of S1 and D1 are within the valid value range. If the offset or destination data exceeds the valid range, a
user program execution error will result, turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart.

When a user program execution error occurs, the execution of the instruction is canceled. The value of D1 is left unchanged and the next instruction
is executed. For user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

Since the DECO instruction is executed in each scan while input is on, a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used.

Examples: DECO
When input I0 is on, the destination bit is determined by adding the value contained in data
DECO S1 D1 register D20 assigned by device S1 to internal relay M104 assigned by destination device D1.
I0 D20 M104
Since the 19th bit from internal relay M104 is internal relay M127, the bit is then turned on.

M117 M100
D20 19 M137 M120
M157 M140
First bit M177 M160
M197 M180
ON M217 M200

When input I1 is on, the destination bit is determined by adding the value contained in data
DECO S1 D1 register D10 assigned by device S1 to data register D30 assigned by destination device D1.
I1 D10 D30
Since the 39th bit from data register D30 bit 0 is data register D32 bit 7, the bit is then turned
on.

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
D30
D10 39 D31
D32
D33
ON
D34
D35

10-16 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 10: DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS

BCNT (Bit Count)

When input is on, a search begins for the total number of bits that are on an array of
BCNT S1 S2 D1 consecutive bits starting at the point assigned by source device S1. Source device S2
***** ***** ***** assigns the quantity of bits searched. The quantity of bits which are on is stored to the
destination assigned by device D1.

Valid Devices
Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat
S1 (Source 1) First bit to start search X X X X — — X — —
S2 (Source 2) Quantity of bits searched X X X X X X X X —
D1 (Destination 1) Destination to store quantity of ON bits — X X X X X — —

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

Internal relays M0 through M7977 and M10000 through M17497 can be designated as D1. Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1.

When T (timer) or C (counter) is used as S2, the timer/counter current value (TC or CC) is displayed. When T (timer) or C (counter) is used as D1,
the data is written in as a preset value (TP or CP) which can be 0 through 65,535.

The valid range of S2 (quantity of bits searched) is 1 to 256. Make sure that the search area designated by S1 plus S2 is within the valid value range.
If the source data exceeds the valid range, a user program execution error will result, turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on
the FC6A Series MicroSmart.

When a user program execution error occurs, the execution of the instruction is canceled. The value of D1 is left unchanged and the next instruction
is executed. For user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

Since the BCNT instruction is executed in each scan while input is on, a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used.

Examples: BCNT
When input is on, a search begins for the total number of bits that are on in an array
BCNT S1 S2 D1 of 64 bits starting at internal relay M4 assigned by source device S1.
I0 M4 64 D100
Since 3 bits are on in the searched area, the quantity is stored to data register D100
assigned by destination device D1.

M17 M0
M37 M20 D100 3
M57 M40
M77 M60 ON
M97 M80
M117 M100 Searched area

When input I0 is on, a search begins for the total number of bits that are on in an
BNCT S1 S2 D1 array of 60 bits starting at bit 0 of data register D10 assigned by device S1.
I1 D10 60 D100
Since 2 bits are on among the 60 bits, 2 is stored to data register D100 assigned by
device D1.

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
D10
D11 D100 2
D12
D13 ON
D14
D15 Searched area

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 10-17

10: DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS

ALT (Alternate Output)

When input is turned on, output, internal relay, or shift register bit assigned by D1 is turned on and
SOTU ALT D1 remains on after the input is turned off.
***** When input is turned on again, the assigned output, internal relay, or shift register bit is turned off.

The ALT instruction must be used with a SOTU or SOTD instruction, otherwise the assigned output,
internal relay, or shift register bit repeats to turn on and off in each scan.

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

D1 (Destination 1) Bit to turn on and off — X X X — — — — —

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

Since the ALT instruction is executed in each scan while input is on, a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction must be used. For the SOTU
instruction and the SOTD instruction, see "SOTU and SOTD (Single Output Up and Down)" on page 4-26.

Example: ALT
When input I0 is turned on, output Q0 assigned by device D1 is turned on and remains after input
SOTU ALT D1 I0 is turned off.
I0 Q0
When input I0 is turned on again, output Q0 is turned off.

ON
Input I0
OFF

ON
Output Q0
OFF

10-18 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 10: DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS

CVDT (Convert Data Type)

S1 → D1

CVDT S1(R) D1(R) REP When input is on, the data type of the 16- or 32-bit data assigned by S1 is converted and
*TO* ***** ***** ** stored to the destination assigned by device D1.

Data types can be assigned for the source and destination, separately

Data Type W, I D, L, F
Source S1 S1·S1+1
Destination D1 D1·D1+1

When the same data type is assigned for both source and destination, the CVDT
instruction has the same function as the MOV instruction.

Unless F (float) data is selected for both source and destination, only the integral number
is moved, omitting the fraction.

When the source data exceeds the range of destination data, the destination stores a
value closest to the source data within the destination data.

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) First device address to convert data type X*1 X*1 X*1 X*1 X*1*2 X*2 X X 1-99
D1 (Destination 1) First device address to store converted data — X*1 X*1*3 X*1 X*1*4 X*1*4 X — 1-99

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

*1 Cannot be used with data type F (float).

*2 When T/C is used as S1, this is the current value area.
*3 Internal relays M0 through M7977 and M10000 through M17497 can be designated as D1. Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1.
*4 When T (timer) or C (counter) is used as S1, the timer/counter current value (TC or CC) is displayed. When T (timer) or C (counter) is used as
D1, the data is written in as a preset value (TP or CP) which can be 0 through 65,535.
When a user program execution error occurs, the execution of the instruction is canceled. The value of D1 is left unchanged and the next instruction
is executed. For user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

Valid Data Types

W (word) X When a bit device such as I (input), Q (output), M (internal relay), or R (shift register) is assigned as the source
I (integer) X or destination, 16 points (word or integer data) or 32 points (double-word, long, or float data) are used. When
D (double word) X repeat is assigned for a bit device, the quantity of device bits increases in 16- or 32-point increments.
L (long) X When a word device such as T (timer), C (counter), or D (data register) is assigned as the source or destination,
F (float) X 1 point (word or integer data) or 2 points (double-word, long, or float data) are used. When repeat is assigned for
a word device, the quantity of device words increases in 1- or 2-point increments.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 10-19

10: DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS

Examples: CVDT
• Data Type: Either S1 or D1 is not F (float)

Unless F (float) data is selected for both source and destination, only the integral number is moved, omitting the fraction.

Device Data Type Value

SOTU CVDT S1 – D1 – REP
Source F 3.141593
I0 FTOW D0 D2
Destination W 3

When input I0 is turned on, 3 is stored to data register D2.

S1 D1

D0·D1 3.141593 D2 3

• Data Type: S1 has a larger data range than D1

When the source data exceeds the range of destination data type, the destination stores a value closest to the source data within the destination
data type.
.

Device Data Type Value

SOTU CVDT S1 – D1 – REP
Source D 4,294,967,295
I0 DTOW D0 D2
Destination W 65,535

When input I0 is turned on, 65,535 is stored to data register D2.

S1 D1

D0·D1 4294967295 D2 65535

10-20 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 10: DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS

DTDV (Data Divide)

S1 → D1, D1+1
DTDV(W) S1 D1
When input is on, the 16-bit binary data assigned by S1 is divided into upper and lower bytes. The
***** *****
upper byte data is stored to the destination assigned by device D1. The lower byte data is stored to
the device next to D1.

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) Binary data to divide X X X X X X X X —
D1 (Destination 1) Destination to store results — — — — — — X — —

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

When T (timer) or C (counter) is used as S1, the timer/counter current value (TC or CC) is displayed.

Destination device D1 uses 2 data registers starting with the device assigned by D1.

Since the DTDV instruction is executed in each scan while input is on, a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used.

Valid Data Types

W (word) X When a bit device such as I (input), Q (output), M (internal relay), or R (shift register) is assigned as the source,
I (integer) — 16 points (word data) are used.
D (double word) — When a word device such as T (timer), C (counter), or D (data register) is assigned as the source or destination,
L (long) — 1 point (word data) is used.
F (float) —

Example: DTDV
Before Execution After Execution
SOTU DTDV(W) S1 D1
D10 D20 12345 48 Upper byte
I1 D10 D20
(3039h) (30h)

57
D21 Lower byte
(39h)

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 10-21

10: DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS

DTCB (Data Combine)

S1, S1+1 → D1
DTCB(W) S1 D1 When input is on, the lower-byte data is displayed from 2 consecutive sources starting with device
***** ***** assigned by S1 and combined to make 16-bit data. The lower byte data from the first source device
is moved to the upper byte of the destination assigned by device D1, and the lower byte data from
the next source device is moved to the lower byte of the destination.

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) Binary data to combine — — — — — — X — —
D1 (Destination 1) Destination to store results — X X X X X — —

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1.

When T (timer) or C (counter) is used as D1, the data is written in as a preset value (TP or CP) which can be 0 through 65,535.

Source device S1 uses 2 data registers starting with the device assigned by S1.

Since the DTCB instruction is executed in each scan while input is on, a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used.

Valid Data Types

W (word) X When a bit device such as I (input), Q (output), M (internal relay), or R (shift register) is assigned as the
I (integer) — destination, 16 points (word data) are used.
D (double word) — When a word device such as T (timer), C (counter), or D (data register) is assigned as the source or destination,
L (long) — 1 point (word data) is used.
F (float) —

Example: DTCB
Before Execution After Execution
SOTU DTCB(W) S1 D1
D10 D20 48 Upper byte 12345
I1 D10 D20
(0030h) (3039h)

57
D11 Lower byte
(0039h)

10-22 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 10: DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS

SWAP (Data Swap)

S1 → D1
SWAP(*) S1(R) D1(R) REP When input is on, upper and lower byte- or word-data of a word- or double-word-data
***** ***** ** assigned by S1 are exchanged, and the result is stored to destination assigned by D1.

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) Binary data to swap — — — — — — X — 1-99
D1 (Destination 1) Destination to store conversion result — — — — — — X — 1-99

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

Since the SWAP instruction is executed in each scan while input is on, a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used.

Valid Data Types

W (word) X When a D (data register) is assigned as the source or destination, 1 point (word data) or 2 points (double-word
I (integer) — data) are used. When repeat is assigned, the quantity of device words increases in 1- or 2-point increments.
D (double word) X
L (long) —
F (float) —

Examples: SWAP
• Data Type: W (word)

When input I0 is turned on, upper- and lower-byte data of the 16-bit data in data register D10 assigned by source device S1 are exchanged, and the
result is stored to data register D20 assigned by destination device D1.

Before Execution After Execution

SWAP(W) S1 D1 REP
I0 D10 D20 12345 14640
D10 D20
(3039h) (3930h)

• Data Type: D (double-word)

When input I1 is turned on, upper- and lower-word data of the 32-bit data in data registers D10 and D11 assigned by source device S1 are
exchanged, and the result is stored to data registers D20 and D21 assigned by destination device D1.

Before Execution After Execution

SWAP(D) S1 D1 REP
I1 D10 D20 D10 100 D20 200
D11 200 D21 100

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 10-23

10: DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS

10-24 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

11: WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS
This chapter describes the week programmer instructions that are used to turn outputs on and off on the specified days of the
week or dates and times.

WKTIM (Week Timer)

Compares the specified day of the week, start time, and end time with the current time and outputs that result.

Note: The WKTIM instruction is compatible with the FC5A Series MicroSmart WKTIM instruction. For details on the WKTIM instruction, see
Chapter 9 "WKTIM (Week Timer)" in the "FC5A Series MicroSmart Pentra User's Manual Advanced Volume".

WKTBL (Week Table)

Sets the specified month and day as a special date.

Note: The WKTBL instruction is compatible with the FC5A Series MicroSmart WKTBL instruction. For details on the WKTBL instruction, see
Chapter 9 "WKTBL (Week Table)" in the "FC5A Series MicroSmart Pentra User's Manual Advanced Volume".

WEEK (Weekly Timer)

Compares the specified day of the week, ON time, and OFF time with the current time and outputs that result.

WEEK S1 S2 S3 D1

***** ***** ***** *****

Note: For details on the WEEK instruction, see "WEEK (Weekly Timer)" on page 11-3.

YEAR (Yearly Timer)

Compares the specified date with the current date and outputs that result. This allows the special dates within a one-year period
to be specified.

Note: For details on the YEAR instruction, see "YEAR (Yearly Timer)" on page 11-16.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 11-1

11: WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS

Differences in the week programmer instructions

There are four types of week programmer instructions: the WKTIM instruction, the WKTBL instruction, the WEEK instruction,
and the YEAR instruction. The initial values of the WEEK and YEAR instructions, such as the day of the week, ON time, OFF
time, and special dates, can be easily configured in the dialog box for the instruction. The initial values of the WKTIM and
WKTBL instructions must be configured using data registers.

Comparing the WKTIM and WEEK instructions

Item WKTIM Instruction WEEK Instruction

Number of instructions that can be
No limit 10
used in one ladder program
Number of patterns that can be
1 pattern 20 patterns
configured in one instruction
Pulse output function No Yes
Configure initial values using the dialog box
Initial value configuration method Configure initial values using data registers
in WindLDR
Configuration pattern preview function No Yes

Comparing the WKTBL and YEAR instructions

Item WKTBL Instruction YEAR Instruction

Number of instructions that can be
No limit 10
used in one ladder program
Number of patterns that can be
20 patterns 20 patterns
configured in one instruction
Pulse output function No Yes
Specify date
Calendar specification methods Specify date Specify day of the week
Specify end of the month
Configure initial values using Configure initial values using the dialog box
Initial value configuration method
data registers in the ladder program in WindLDR
Configuration pattern preview function No Yes

11-2 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 11: WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS

WEEK (Weekly Timer)

The WEEK instruction compares the specified day of the week, ON time, and OFF
WEEK S1 S2 S3 D1 time with the current time and outputs that result.

When the input is on, the output specified by D1 is turned on when the day of the
***** ***** ***** *****
week and the time specified by the ON settings match the current day of the
week and time.

The output specified by D1 is also turned off when the day of the week and the
time specified by the OFF settings match the current day of the week and time.

If the ON settings are Monday 13:00 and the OFF settings are Wednesday 18:00, output D1 turns on and off as follows.
When the WEEK instruction input is ON on Monday 13:00, output D1 turns ON on Monday 13:00 and it turns OFF on Wednesday
18:00.
(In this diagram the WEEK instruction input is turned on at 0:00 on Monday)

Day of the week Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday
0:00 13:00 18:00
Time

ON
Input M0000
OFF

ON
Output Q0
OFF

ON settings Day of the week : Monday OFF settings Day of the week : Wednesday
Time : 13:00 Time : 18:00

Notes:
• A maximum of 10 WEEK instructions can be used in a user program.
• Normally the output is only updated when the current time and the time for the ON/OFF settings matches, but when the WEEK instruction input
changes from off to on, the output state at the current time is determined according to the ON/OFF settings and the output is turned on or off.
For details, see "Timing Chart when the Input Turns On during the Configured Interval" on page 11-10.
• When pulse output is enabled, output is turned on for one scan at the ON settings time. For pulse output, see "6. Pulse Output" on page 11-
5 or "6. Pulse Output" on page 11-8.
• When the ON time is set to a value larger than 2,359, the OFF time is set to a value larger than 2,400, or the lower 2 digits of ON/OFF time
is set to a value larger than 59, a user program execution error will occur.
• When the day of the week is not specified, a user program execution error will occur.
• The WEEK instruction cannot be used in an interrupt program. If used, a user program execution error will result, turning on special internal
relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart. For details about the user program execution errors, see "User Program
Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) First data register — — — — — — — —
S2 (Source 2) Initialization input — — X — — — — — —
S3 (Source 3) Number of parameter tabs — — — — — — — X —
D1 (Destination 1) Output port — X — — — — — —

Special data registers cannot be designated as S1. Internal relays M0 through M7997 and M10000 through M17497 can be designated as D1.
Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 11-3

11: WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS

Settings
There are two methods to configure the day of the week and the time for the WEEK instruction. Specify the method on the
Devices tab with Data register settings.
• Configuring the day of the week and the time as fixed settings
The day of the week and the time for the ON/OFF settings are uniquely determined. The day of the week and the time for
the ON/OFF settings cannot be changed while the FC6A Series MicroSmart is running. For details, see "To configure the day
of the week and the time as fixed settings" on page 11-4.
• Configuring the day of the week and the time by specifying data registers
The day of the week and the time for the ON/OFF settings are configured according to the values stored in the specified data
registers. The day of the week and the time for the ON/OFF settings can be changed while the FC6A Series MicroSmart is
running. For details, see "To configure the days of the week and the time by specifying data registers" on page 11-7.

To configure the day of the week and the time as fixed settings
The day of the week and the time for the ON/OFF settings are uniquely determined. The day of the week and the time for
the ON/OFF settings cannot be changed while the FC6A Series MicroSmart is running.

• Devices tab

1.

2. 3. 5.

6. 4.

1. Data register settings

This setting determines whether to configure the day of the week and the time as fixed settings or to indirectly specify them
with data registers.
To configure the day of the week and the time as fixed settings, clear this check box.

Unselected check box

The day of the week and the time are fixed settings. The day of the week and the time are configured on the parameter
tabs. The day of the week and the time cannot be changed while the FC6A Series MicroSmart is running. For the settings,
see "Parameter tab" on page 11-5.
Note: When this check box is selected, the settings for the day of the week and the time are indirectly specified with data registers.
Configure the day of the week and the time by using data registers. The day of the week and the time can be changed while the FC6A Series
MicroSmart is running. For directions specific to data registers, see "To configure the days of the week and the time by specifying data
registers" on page 11-7.

2. S1 (source 1): First Data Register

This setting is not configured when configuring the day of the week and the time as fixed settings.

3. S2 (source 2): Initialization Input

This setting is not configured when configuring the day of the week and the time as fixed settings.

4. S3 (source 3): Number of parameter tabs

This setting configures the number of parameter tabs. When this value is increased or decreased, the number of parameter tabs
displayed on the dialog box increases or decreases. 6 bytes of the user program region are used for each parameter tab.
For the settings, see "Parameter tab" on page 11-5.

11-4 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 11: WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS

5. D1 (destination 1): Output

This setting configures the output for the results when the configured day of the week and time and the current day of the week
and time are compared.

Setting Description
Tag Name Specifies the tag name or the device address for each device.
Device Address Shows the device address that corresponds to the tag name.
Comment Shows the comment for the device address. This item can be edited.

6. Pulse Output
This setting configures the operation for D1 (output). This setting is applied to all parameter tabs.

Selected check box

When the day of the week and the time configured in the ON settings matches the current day of the week and the time, the
output is turned on for only one scan.

Unselected check box

The output is turned on and off according to the ON settings and the OFF settings.

• Parameter tab
This tab configures the ON/OFF settings for the output. A maximum of 20 parameter tabs can be configured for one WEEK
instruction.

1.

2.

1. ON settings
This section configures the day of the week and the time to turn on the output. The output is turned on at the specified time for
the specified day of the week.

Setting Description Range

Day of the week Specifies the days of the week. —
Hour: 0 to 23
ON time Used to enter the time. Set the time in a range from 00:00 to 23:59.
Minute: 0 to 59

2. OFF settings
This section configures the day of the week and the time to turn off the output. The output is turned off at the specified time for
the specified day of the week.

Setting Description Range

Day of the week Specifies the days of the week. —
Hour: 0 to 24
OFF time Used to enter the time. Set the time in a range from 00:00 to 24:00.
Minute: 0 to 59

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 11-5

11: WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS

Note: When the time is duplicated in the settings on other tabs, the settings on the tab with the larger tab number are valid.
For example, if ON time is 8:00 and OFF time is 9:00 on the P 1 tab and ON time is 9:00 and OFF time is 10:00 on the P 2 tab, the 9:00 setting
is duplicated on the two tabs and OFF time for the P 1 tab is disabled. In this situation, the output is on from 8:00 to 10:00.

Time 7:00 8:00 9:00 10:00 11:00

ON time OFF time

ON
P 1 tab settings
OFF

ON time OFF time

ON
P 2 tab settings
OFF

ON
Output D1
OFF

If ON time is 9:00 and OFF time is 10:00 on the P 1 tab and ON time is 8:00 and OFF time is 9:00 on the P 2 tab, the 9:00 setting is duplicated
on the two tabs and ON time for the P 1 tab is disabled. In this situation, the output is on from 8:00 to 9:00.

Time 7 00 8 00 9 00 10 00 11 00

ON time OFF time

ON
P 1 tab settings
OFF

ON time OFF time

ON
P 2 tab settings
OFF

ON
Output D1
OFF

• Preview

The preview shows the ON/OFF state for the output based on the settings configured on the parameter tabs as a time chart.
The preview can be shown as a week or a day.

Setting Description
Week Select this radio button when showing the preview as a week.
Day Select this radio button when showing the preview as a day.

11-6 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 11: WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS

To configure the days of the week and the time by specifying data registers
The day of the week and the time for the ON/OFF settings are configured according to the values stored in the specified data
registers. The day of the week and the time for the ON/OFF settings can be changed while the FC6A Series MicroSmart is running.
Note: When the day of the week or time in the ON/OFF settings is modified with the WEEK instruction input turned on, it is not reflected in the
output operation until the current day of the week and time match the day of the week and time in the changed ON/OFF settings.
To immediately reflect this in the output operation, turn the WEEK instruction off and then on again after changing the day of the week or time.

• Devices tab

1.

2. 3. 5.

6. 4.

7.

1. Data register settings

This setting selects whether to configure the day of the week and the time as fixed settings or to indirectly specify them with
data registers. To configure the day of the week and the time by specifying data registers, select this check box.
Selected check box
The day of the week and the time settings are indirectly specified by data registers. Configure the day of the week and the
time by using data registers. The day of the week and the time can be changed while the FC6A Series MicroSmart is running.
For allocating the data register region, see "Data Register Allocation" on page 11-9.
The data registers can be initialized with the days of the week and the times configured on the parameter tabs by turning on
the initialization input. For initialization, see "3. S2 (source 2): Initialization Input" on page 11-8.

Note: When this check box is not selected, the day of the week and the time are fixed settings. The day of the week and the time are
configured on the parameter tabs. The day of the week and the time cannot be changed while the FC6A Series MicroSmart is running. For
fixed settings, see "To configure the day of the week and the time as fixed settings" on page 11-4.

2. S1 (source 1): First Data Register

This setting specifies the start of the data register region to store the days of the week and time settings for the WEEK
instruction.
This setting is only used when indirectly specifying the settings for the WEEK instruction with data registers.

Setting Description
Tag Name Specifies the tag name or the device address for the device.
Device Address Shows the device address that corresponds to the tag name.
Shows the range of data registers used to store the settings. This item changes when the device address or the
Used Data Registers
number of parameter tabs changes.
Comment Shows the comment for the device address. This item can be edited.

For allocating the data register region, see "Parameter tab" on page 11-8.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 11-7

11: WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS

3. S2 (source 2): Initialization Input

This setting specifies the device to initialize the days of the week and the times stored in the data register region that starts
from S1 (source 1).
The values configured on the parameter tabs are stored in the data registers by turning on the initialization input.
This setting is only used when indirectly specifying the settings for the WEEK instruction with data registers.

4. S3 (source 3): The number of parameter tabs

This setting configures the number of parameter tabs.
This setting is shared in common with "To configure the day of the week and the time as fixed settings". See "4. S3 (source
3): Number of parameter tabs" on page 11-4.

5. D1 (destination 1): Output

This setting configures the output for the results when the configured day of the week and time and the current day of the
week and time are compared.
This setting is shared in common with "To configure the day of the week and the time as fixed settings". See "5. D1
(destination 1): Output" on page 11-5.

6. Pulse Output
This setting configures the operation for D1 (output). This setting is applied to all parameter tabs and is shared in common
with "To configure the day of the week and the time as fixed settings". See "6. Pulse Output" on page 11-5.

7. Data Register Allocation

Click this button to display the Device Allocation dialog box. As shown below, a table showing the data registers and their
corresponding WEEK instruction settings is displayed on the dialog box (8). Click Allocate Comments (9) and you can
configure the comments for the data registers that correspond to the names of the settings.
This button is only used when indirectly specifying the settings for the WEEK instruction with data registers.

• Device Allocation dialog box

8.

9.

• Parameter tab
This tab configures the ON/OFF settings for the output. A maximum of 20 parameter tabs can be configured for 1 WEEK
instruction.
If indirectly specifying the settings for the WEEK instruction with data registers, the settings configured on the parameter tabs are
stored in the data registers when the initialization input is turned on.
This setting is shared in common with "To configure the day of the week and the time as fixed settings". See "Parameter tab" on
page 11-5.

• Preview
The preview shows the ON/OFF state for the output based on the settings configured on the parameter tabs as a time chart.
This function is shared in common with "To configure the day of the week and the time as fixed settings". See "Preview" on page
11-6.

11-8 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 11: WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS

Data Register Allocation

If indirectly specifying the settings for the WEEK instruction with data registers, the settings are allocated to the data registers as
follows.

Storage Destination Data Size (word) R (Read)/W (Write) Setting

Start address+0 1 R/W Day of the week
Start address+1 1 R/W P 1 tab ON time
Start address+2 1 R/W OFF time
Start address+3 1 R/W Day of the week
Start address+4 1 R/W P 2 tab ON time
Start address+5 1 R/W OFF time
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
Start address+57 1 R/W Day of the week
Start address+58 1 R/W P 20 tab ON time
Start address+59 1 R/W OFF time

• Day of the week data register allocation

The day of the week for the ON settings and the day of the week for the OFF settings are allocated as bits in 1 data register as
follows.

ON settings day of the week OFF settings day of the week

Bit Bit Bit Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Reserved Saturday Friday Thursday Wednesday Tuesday Monday Sunday Reserved Saturday Friday Thursday Wednesday Tuesday Monday Sunday

0: Disabled (check box not selected)

Data register (1 word)
1: Enabled (check box selected)

Example day of the week settings

[To configure the output to turn on Monday and to turn off Friday]

Monday is enabled in the ON settings, Friday is enabled in the OFF settings

ON settings OFF settings

Bit Bit Bit Bit
15 8 7 0

Reserved Saturday Friday Thursday Wednesday Tuesday Monday Sunday Reserved Saturday Friday Thursday Wednesday Tuesday Monday Sunday
Day of the week setting (ON): 0000010
Day of the week setting (OFF): 0100000
The value of the data register is 1000100000 (binary) = 544 (decimal).

[To configure the output to turn on Monday and Thursday and to turn off Tuesday and Saturday]

Monday and Thursday are enabled in the ON settings, Tuesday and Saturday are enabled in the OFF settings

ON settings OFF settings

Bit Bit Bit Bit
15 8 7 0

Reserved Saturday Friday Thursday Wednesday Tuesday Monday Sunday Reserved Saturday Friday Thursday Wednesday Tuesday Monday Sunday
Day of the week setting (ON): 0010010
Day of the week setting (OFF): 1000100
The value of the data register is 1001001000100 (binary) = 4676 (decimal).
The ON time and the OFF time are stored in the data register as follows.
12:34 23:45

For 12:34 1234 (Decimal) For 23:45 2345 (Decimal)

Data register (1 word) Data register (1 word)

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 11-9

11: WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS

Timing Chart when the Input Turns On during the Configured Interval
When the input turns on or off during the interval between the ON settings and the OFF settings, and when the input is turns on
or off after 0:00 on the date configured by the ON settings while pulse output is enabled, the timing chart is as follows.

■ When pulse output is disabled

Setting details
ON
Monday 13:00
Settings
OFF
Wednesday 18:00
Settings
Output Q0

[When the input is on before the day of the week and time specified by the ON settings]
On Monday at 0:00 when input M0000 is turned on, the result of the current date compared with the ON and OFF settings is not
within the ON and OFF settings (Monday 13:00 to Wednesday 18:00). Therefore, the output remains off.
Afterward, on Monday at 13:00, output Q0 turns on, and it turns off on Wednesday at 18:00.

Day of the week Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday
0:00 13:00 18:00
Time

ON
Input M0000
OFF

ON
Output Q0
OFF

ON settings Day of the week : Monday OFF settings Day of the week : Wednesday
Time : 13:00 Time : 18:00

[When the input is turned on or off during the interval between the ON and OFF settings]
On Tuesday at 6:00 when input M0000 is turned on, the result of the current date compared with the ON and OFF settings is
within the ON and OFF settings (Monday 13:00 to Wednesday 18:00). Therefore, the output turns on. Afterward, if input M0000
is turned off before the OFF settings, the output also turns off at the same time.

Day of the week Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday
13:00 6:00 15:00 18:00
Time

ON
Input M0000
OFF

ON
Output Q0
OFF

ON settings Day of the week : Monday OFF settings Day of the week : Wednesday
Time : 13:00 Time : 18:00

11-10 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 11: WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS

■ When pulse output is enabled

Setting details
ON settings Sunday 0:00
Output Q0

[When the input turns on before the day of the week and time specified by the ON settings]
On Sunday at 0:00, input M0000 is on, so output Q0 turns on for one scan only on Sunday at 0:00.

Day of the week Saturday Sunday

6:00 0:00
Time

ON
Input M0000
OFF
1 scan

ON
Output Q0
OFF

ON settings Day of the week : Sunday

Time : 0:00

[When the input turns on during the day of the week and time specified by the ON settings]
On Sunday at 0:00:30 (between Sunday 0:00:00 and 0:00:59), when input M0000 changes from off to on, output Q1 turns on
for one scan only.

Day of the week Saturday Sunday

0:00:00 0:00:30 0:00:59
Time

ON
Input M0000
OFF
1 scan

ON
Output Q0
OFF

ON settings Day of the week : Sunday

Time : 0:00

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 11-11

11: WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS

Examples: WEEK

[To turn on output Q0 Monday to Friday each week from 8:30 to 17:15]

Parameter tab

Configure the tab as shown above and set D1 to Q0.

WEEK S1 S2 S3 D1

1 Q0
M8125

[To turn on output Q0 Tuesday, Wednesday, and Saturday each week from 20:30 to 1:15 the next day]

Parameter tab

Configure the tab as shown above and set D1 to Q0.

WEEK S1 S2 S3 D1

1 Q0
M8125

11-12 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 11: WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS

[To turn on output Q0 Monday, Wednesday, and Friday each week from 6:00 to 9:00, 15:00 to 18:00, and 22:00 to 0:00 the next day]

Parameter tab
Configure the settings using three tabs.
On P 1 tab, configure the output to turn on Monday, Wednesday, and Friday from 6:00 to 9:00.

On P 2 tab, configure the output to turn on Monday, Wednesday, and Friday from 15:00 to 18:00.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 11-13

11: WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS

On P 3 tab, configure the output to turn on Monday, Wednesday, and Friday from 22:00 to 0:00 the next day.

Configure the tabs as shown above and set D1 to Q0.

WEEK S1 S2 S3 D1

3 Q0
M8125

11-14 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 11: WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS

[To indirectly specify the settings with data registers]

This example describes turning on output M0100 Monday to Friday each week from 8:30 to 17:15 as an example.
Select the Data register settings check box and set S1 to D0000 and S2 to M0000.

Parameter tab

Data register allocation

The settings on the P 1 tab are allocated to data registers D0 to D2 as shown in the table below. The settings configured on the
parameter tab are stored in D0 to D2 by turning on initialization input S2.

Data Register Setting Initial Setting

D0 Day of the week setting 15934 (Monday to Friday, both ON settings and OFF settings)
D1 P 1 tab ON time 830
D2 OFF time 1715

• The initialization input (M1) turns on with the first

scan and the initial settings configured on the P 1
M8120 M0
tab are stored in D0 to D2.

SOTU
M1

• The WEEK instruction starts operating according to

WEEK S1 S2 S3 D1
the values of data registers D0 to D2.
D0 M0 1 M100
M8125

• When M10 turns on, the ON time (D1) changes to

MOV(W) S1 - D1 - REP
SOTU 9:00 and the OFF time (D2) changes to 17:00.
900 D1
M10

MOV(W) S1 - D1 - REP • When M1 turns on, all of the WEEK instruction

settings (D0 to D2) return to the initial settings.
1700 D2

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 11-15

11: WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS

YEAR (Yearly Timer)

The YEAR instruction compares the specified date with the current date and
outputs that result. With this instruction you can specify special dates within a
one year period (A "special date" is a date configured with ON/OFF settings
specified by the YEAR instruction).

When the input is on, the output specified by D1 is turned on when the date
specified by the ON settings matches the current date.

The output is turned off when the date specified by the OFF settings matches the
current date.

When the ON settings are December 15, 2012 and the OFF settings are January
20, 2013, output D1 turns on and off as follows.

Year 2012 2013

Month 11 12 1 2

Day 15th 20th

ON

Output D1
OFF

ON settings Month : December OFF settings Month : January

Day : 15th Day : 20th

Notes:
• A maximum of 10 YEAR instructions can be used in a user program.

• Normally the output is only updated when the current date and the date for the ON/OFF settings matches, but when the YEAR instruction
input changes from off to on, the output state at the current date is determined according to the ON/OFF settings and the output is turned on
or off.
For details, see "Timing Chart when the Input Turns On during the Configured Interval" on page 11-25.
• When pulse output is enabled, output is turned on for one scan at the instant (0:00) the date changes to the ON date.
When the YEAR instruction input changes from off to on, the output state at the current date is judged according to the ON/OFF settings, and
the output is turned on for 1 scan only.
For pulse output, see "6. Pulse Output" on page 11-18 or "6. Pulse Output" on page 11-22.
• When the year data is outside the range of 2000 to 2099, the month data is outside the range of 1 to 12, the day data is outside the range of
1 to 31, the week data is outside the range of 1 to 5, and the day of the week data is outside the range of 0 to 6, a user program execution
error will occur.

• The YEAR instruction cannot be used in an interrupt program.

If used, a user program execution error will result, turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart.
For details about the user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

• When the yearly setting or monthly setting is enabled and a date that does not exist according to the month or year is set for the ON setting
or the OFF setting, the output turns on or off on the first day of the next month.

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) First data register — — — — — — — —
S2 (Source 2) Initialization input — — X — — — — — —
S3 (Source 3) Number of parameter tabs — — — — — — — X —
D1 (Destination 1) Output port — X — — — — — —

Special data registers cannot be designated as S1. Internal relays M0 through M7997 and M10000 through M17497 can be designated as D1.
Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1.

11-16 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 11: WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS

Settings
There are two methods to configure dates for the YEAR instruction. Specify the method on the Devices tab with Data register
settings.

• Configure the dates as a fixed setting

The dates for the ON/OFF settings are uniquely determined. The dates for the ON/OFF settings cannot be changed while the
FC6A Series MicroSmart is running. For details, see "To configure the dates as a fixed setting" on page 11-17.

• Configuring the dates by specifying data registers

The dates for the ON/OFF settings are configured according to the values stored in the specified data registers. The dates for
the ON/OFF settings can be changed while the FC6A Series MicroSmart is running. For details, see "To configure the dates
by specifying data registers" on page 11-21.

To configure the dates as a fixed setting

The dates for the ON/OFF settings are uniquely determined. The dates for the ON/OFF settings cannot be changed while the FC6A
Series MicroSmart is running.

• Devices tab

1.

2. 3. 5.

6. 4.

1. Data register settings

This setting selects whether to configure YEAR instruction dates as fixed settings or to indirectly specify them with data registers.
To configure the dates as fixed settings, clear this check box.
Unselected check box

The dates are fixed settings.

The dates are configured on the parameter tabs. The dates cannot be changed while the FC6A Series MicroSmart is running.
For the settings, see "Parameter tab" on page 11-5.
Note: When this check box is selected, the settings for dates are indirectly specified with data registers. Configure the dates by using data
registers. The dates can be changed while the FC6A Series MicroSmart is running. For indirection specification with data registers, see "To
configure the dates by specifying data registers" on page 11-21.

2. S1 (source 1): First Data Register

This setting is not configured when configuring the dates as fixed settings.

3. S2 (source 2): Initialization Input

This setting is not configured when configuring the dates as fixed settings.

4. S3 (source 3): Number of parameter tabs

This setting configures the number of parameter tabs. When this value is increased or decreased, the number of parameter tabs
displayed on the dialog box increases or decreases. 10 bytes of the user program region are used for each Parameter tab.
For the settings, see "Parameter tab" on page 11-18.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 11-17

11: WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS

5. D1 (destination 1): Output

This setting configures the output for the results when the configured dates and the current date are compared.

Setting Description
Tag Name Specifies the tag name or the device address for each device.
Device Address Shows the device address that corresponds to the tag name.
Comment Shows the comment for the device address. This item can be edited.

6. Pulse Output
This setting configures the operation for D1 (output). This setting is applied to all parameter tabs.
Selected check box

When the current date changes to the date in the ON settings, the output is turned on for only one scan.
Unselected check box

The output is turned on and off according to the ON settings and the OFF settings.

• Parameter tab
This tab configures the settings for the output. A maximum of 20 parameter tabs can be configured for 1 YEAR instruction.

1. 2.

3.

4.

1. Yearly
When Yearly is selected, the Month and Day settings are valid every year.
At this time, you can configure whether or not to make the Month and Day settings valid yearly from a year until another
year with Year.

2. Monthly
The settings for the selected tab are valid each month. At this time, Month is disabled.

3. ON settings
This section configures the date to turn on the output. The output is turned on at 0:00 on the configured date.

Setting Description Range

Year Specifies the year to turn on the output. 2000 to 2099
Month Specifies the month to turn on the output. 1 to 12
Day Specifies the day to turn on the output. 1 to 31
Month and Day
Specifies the day as the day of the week to turn on the output. Specify the week in
Setting Day of the week 1 to 6
the range of the 1st to the 5th (or the last) week and set the day of the week.
End of month Specify the end of month to turn on the output on the last day of the month. —

11-18 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 11: WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS

4. OFF settings
This section configures the date to turn off the output. The output is turned off at 0:00 on the configured date.

Setting Description Range

Year Specifies the year to turn off the output. 2000 to 2099
Month Specifies the month to turn off the output. 1 to 12
Day Specifies the day to turn off the output. 1 to 31
Month and Day
Specifies the day as the day of the week to turn on the output. Specify the week in
Setting Day of the week 1 to 6
the range of the 1st to the 5th (or the last) week and set the day of the week.
End of month Specify the end of month to turn off the output on the last day of the month. —
This item specifies whether or not to turn off the output after the number of
specified days from when it was turned on.
Specify ON duration 1 to 30
If this setting is enabled, the OFF settings are disabled. This setting can be set in a
range from 1 day to 30 days.

Note: When the date is duplicated in the settings on other tabs, the settings on the tab with the larger tab number are valid.
For example, if the ON date is the 8th of every month and the OFF date is the 16th of every month on the P 1 tab and the ON date is the 16th of
every month and the OFF date is the 22nd of every month on the P 2 tab, the 16th of every month setting is duplicated on the two tabs and the ON
settings for the P 2 tab are valid. In this situation, the output is on from the 8th to the 22nd of every month.

Month
Year
ON date OFF date
8th of 16th of
P 1 tab settings every month every month

ON date OFF date

16th of 22nd of
P 2 tab settings every month every month

Output D1

If the ON date is the 16th of every month and the OFF date is the 22nd of every month on the P 1 tab and the ON date is the 8th of every month
and the OFF date is the 16th of every month on the P 2 tab, the 16th of every month setting is duplicated on the two tabs and the ON settings for
the P 1 tab are disabled. In this situation, the output is on from the 8th to the 16th of every month.

Month
Year
ON date OFF date
16th of 22nd of
P 1 tab settings
every month every month

ON date OFF date

8th of 16th of
P 2 tab settings every month every month

Output D1

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 11-19

11: WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS

• Preview

The preview shows the ON/OFF state for the output based on the settings configured on the parameter tabs in a calendar.
The dates that are set to ON are highlighted in orange. Three months are shown at one time.

Setting Description
Year Specifies the year to show in the preview.
Scrollbar You can change the month shown in the preview by moving the scrollbar.

11-20 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 11: WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS

To configure the dates by specifying data registers

The dates for the ON/OFF settings are configured according to the values stored in the specified data registers.
The dates for the ON/OFF settings can be changed while the FC6A Series MicroSmart is running.
Note: When a special date in the ON/OFF settings is modified with the YEAR instruction input turned on, it is not reflected in the output operation
until the current date and time match the changed special date.
To immediately reflect this in the output operation, turn the YEAR instruction off and then on again after changing the special date.

• Devices tab

1.

2. 3. 5.

6. 4.

7.

1. Data register settings

This setting selects whether to configure YEAR instruction dates as fixed settings or to indirectly specify them with data
registers.
To configure the dates by specifying data registers, select this check box.
Selected check box
The date settings are indirectly specified by data registers. Configure the dates by using data registers. The dates can be
changed while the FC6A Series MicroSmart is running. For allocating the data register region, see "Data Register Allocation"
on page 11-23.
The data registers can be initialized with the days of the week and the times configured on the parameter tabs by turning on
the initialization input. For initialization, see "3. S2 (source 2): Initialization Input" on page 11-21.
Note: When this check box is not selected, the dates are fixed settings. The dates are configured on the parameter tabs. The dates cannot
be changed while the FC6A Series MicroSmart is running. For fixed settings, see "To configure the dates as a fixed setting" on page 11-17.

2. S1 (source 1): First Data Register

This setting specifies the start of the data register region to store the dates for the YEAR instruction.
This setting is only used when indirectly specifying the dates with data registers.

Setting Description
Tag Name Specifies the tag name or the device address for the device.
Device Address Shows the device address that corresponds to the tag name.
Shows the range of data registers used to store the settings. This item changes when the device address or the number
Used Data Registers
of parameter tabs changes.
Comment Shows the comment for the device address. This item can be edited.

For allocating the data register region, see "Data Register Allocation" on page 11-23.

3. S2 (source 2): Initialization Input

This setting specifies the device to initialize the dates stored in the data register region that starts from S1 (source 1).
The values configured on the parameter tabs are stored in the data registers by turning on the initialization input.
This setting is only used when indirectly specifying the settings for the YEAR instruction with data registers.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 11-21

11: WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS

4. S3 (source 3): The number of parameter tabs

This setting configures the number of parameter tabs.
This setting is shared in common with "To configure the dates as a fixed setting". See "4. S3 (source 3): Number of parameter
tabs" on page 11-17.

5. D1 (destination 1): Output

This setting configures the output for the results when the configured dates and the current date are compared.
This setting is shared in common with "To configure the dates as a fixed setting". See "5. D1 (destination 1): Output" on page
11-18.

6. Pulse Output
This setting configures the operation for D1 (output). This setting is applied to all parameter tabs.
This setting is shared in common with "To configure the dates as a fixed setting". See "6. Pulse Output" on page 11-18.

7. Data Register Allocation

Click this button to display the Device Allocation dialog box. As shown below, a table of the data registers and their
corresponding YEAR instruction settings is displayed on the dialog box (8). Click Allocate Comments (9) and you can
configure the comments for the data registers that correspond to the names of the settings.
This button is only used when indirectly specifying the settings for the YEAR instruction with data registers.

• Device Allocation dialog box

8.

9.

• Parameter tab
This tab configures the settings for the output. A maximum of 20 parameter tabs can be configured for 1 YEAR instruction.
If indirectly specifying the settings for the YEAR instruction with data registers, the settings configured on the parameter tabs are
stored in the data registers when the initialization input is turned on.
This setting is shared in common with "To configure the dates as a fixed setting". See "Parameter tab" on page 11-18.

• Preview
The preview shows the ON/OFF state for the output based on the settings configured on the parameter tabs in a calendar.
This function is shared in common with "To configure the dates as a fixed setting". See "Preview" on page 11-20.

11-22 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 11: WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS

Data Register Allocation

The settings configured on the Parameter tabs are allocated to the data registers as follows.
Storage destination Data size (word) R (Read)/W (Write) Setting
Start address+0 1 R/W Year
ON setting
Start address+1 1 R/W Month, Day or Day of the week
Start address+2 1 R/W P 1 tab Year
OFF setting Month, Day or Day of the week (number
Start address+3 1 R/W
of days when specified to remain on)
Start address+4 1 R/W Year
ON setting
Start address+5 1 R/W Month, Day or Day of the week
Start address+6 1 R/W P 2 tab Year
OFF setting Month, Day or Day of the week (number
Start address+7 1 R/W
of days when specified to remain on)
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
Start address+76 1 R/W Year
ON setting
Start address+77 1 R/W Month, Day or Day of the week
Start address+78 1 R/W P 20 tab Year
OFF setting Month, Day or Day of the week (number
Start address+79 1 R/W
of days when specified to remain on)

• Month, Day or Day of the week data register allocation

The Month, Day or Day of the week are allocated as bits in 1 data register as follows.

● Month, Day Data register (1 word)

Reserved Month setting Reserved Day setting

Bit Bit Bit Bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

January to December 1st to 31st

● Month, Week, Day of the week Data register (1 word)

Reserved Month setting Reserved Week setting Day of the week setting

Bit Bit Bit Bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

January to December 1st to 5th (or the last) Sunday to Saturday

Week setting assignments Day of the week assignments

(Binary) (Decimal) (Binary) (Decimal)
001000 = 8 1st 000 = 0 Sunday
010000 = 16 2nd 001 = 1 Monday
011000 = 24 3rd 010 = 2 Tuesday
100000 = 32 4th 011 = 3 Wednesday
101000 = 40 5th 100 = 4 Thursday
110000 = 48 Last 101 = 5 Friday
110 = 6 Saturday
● Month, End of month

Reserved Month setting Reserved

bit bit bit bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

January to December

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 11-23

11: WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS

Example day of the week settings

[When configured to turn on the output on January 1st]

January 1st
Reserved Month setting Reserved Day setting

Bit Bit Bit Bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
Month setting: 0001 = 1
Day setting: 00001 = 1
The value of the data register is 100000001 (binary) = 257 (decimal).

[When configured to turn on the output on December 31st]

December 31st
Reserved Month setting Reserved Day setting

Bit Bit Bit Bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1
Month setting: 1100 = 12
Day setting: 11111 = 31
The value of the data register is 110000011111 (binary) = 3103 (decimal).

[When configured to turn on the output on the 1st Monday of January]

1st Monday of January

Reserved Month setting Reserved Week setting Day of the week setting

Bit Bit Bit Bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1
Month setting: 0001 = 1 (January)
Week setting: 001 = 1 (1st)
Day of the week setting: 001 = 1 (Monday)
The value of the data register is 100001001 (binary) = 265 (decimal).

[When configured to turn on the output on the 4th Thursday of June]

4th Thursday of June

Reserved Month setting Reserved Week setting Day of the week setting
Bit Bit Bit Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0
Month setting: 0110 = 6 (June)
Week setting: 100 = 4 (4th)
Day of the week setting: 100 = 4 (Thursday)
The value of the data register is 11000100100 (binary) = 1572 (decimal).

[When configured to turn on the output on the Final]

Final
Reserved Month setting Reserved Week setting Day of the week setting
Bit Bit Bit Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0
Month setting: 0110 = 6 (June)
Week setting: 110 = 6 (final)
Day of the week setting: 100 = 4 (Thursday)
The value of the data register is 11000110100 (binary) = 1588 (decimal).

11-24 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 11: WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS

Timing Chart when the Input Turns On during the Configured Interval
When the input turns on or off during the interval between the ON settings and the OFF settings, and when the input turns on or
off after 0:00 on the date configured by the ON settings when pulse output is enabled, the timing chart is as follows.

• When pulse output is disabled

When the input is turned on, the current date and the ON and OFF settings are compared and the output turns on or off.

Settings
ON settings February 15, 2012
YEAR S1 S2 S3 D1
OFF settings February 17, 2012
1 Q0
Output port Q0 M0000

[When the input is on before the day specified by the ON settings]

On February 13, 2012, when the input is turned on, the result of the current date compared with the ON and OFF settings is not
within the ON and OFF settings (February 15 to February 17, 2012). Therefore, the output remains off.

February 2012
Current date 13th 14th 15th 16th 17th

ON
Input M0000
OFF

ON
Output Q0
OFF

Judgment ON settings OFF settings

[When the input is turned on or off during the interval between the ON and OFF settings]

On February 15, 2012, when the input is turned on, the result of the current date compared with the ON and OFF settings is within
the ON and OFF settings (February 15 to February 17, 2012). Therefore, the output turns on. The output turns off when the input
is turned off.
On February 16, 2012, when the input is turned on, the result of the current date compared with the ON and OFF settings is that
the output is turned on.

February 2012
Current date 13th 14th 15th 16th 17th

ON
Input M0000
OFF

ON
Output Q0
OFF

ON settings Judgment Judgment OFF settings

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 11-25

11: WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS

• When pulse output is enabled

The input is determined to be on or off at 0:00 on the date of the ON settings and the output is turned on. The current date is not
compared with the ON settings when the input is turned on.

Settings
P 1 tab ON settings July 2, 2012
YEAR S1 S2 S3 D1
P 2 tab ON settings July 4, 2012
2 Q0
Output port Q0 M0000

[When the input turns on before the day specified by the ON settings]
The result of the input being determined at 0:00 on July 2, 2012 is to turn on the output for one scan.
The result of the input being determined at 0:00 on July 4, 2012 is to turn on the output for one scan.

July 2012
Current date 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th

ON
Input M0000
OFF

ON
Output Q0
OFF

P 1 tab P 2 tab
ON settings ON settings

[When the input turns on exactly on the day specified by the ON settings]
When the input turns on at 0:00 on July 2, 2012, the output turns on for one scan.
When the input turns on after 0:00 on July 4, 2012, the output turns on for one scan.

July 2012
Current date 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th

ON
Input M0000
OFF

ON
Output Q0
OFF

P 1 tab P 2 tab
ON settings ON settings

11-26 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 11: WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS

Examples: YEAR
• To configure the dates as fixed settings

[To turn on Q0 from 0:00 on September 1, 2011, to 0:00 on June 25, 2013]

*** 2011 2012 2013 2014 ***

ON date : 2011/09/01 ON

OFF date : 2013/06/25 OFF

Yearly : OFF
9/1 6/25
Monthly : OFF

Parameter tab

Configure the tab as shown above and set D1 to Q0.

YEAR S1 S2 S3 D1
1 Q0
M8125

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 11-27

11: WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS

[To turn on output Q0 from 0:00 on August 12 to 0:00 on August 15 every year]

*** 2009 2010 2011 2012 ***

ON date : 2000/08/12 ON

OFF date : 2099/08/15 OFF

Yearly : ON
8/12 8/15 8/12 8/15 8/12 8/15 8/12 8/15
Monthly : OFF

Parameter tab

Configure the tab as shown above and set D1 to Q0.

YEAR S1 S2 S3 D1
1 Q0
M8125

11-28 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 11: WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS

[To turn on output Q0 only on the 2nd Monday of each month from 2000 to 2099]

*** January February March April ***

ON date : 2000/**/2nd Monday ON

OFF date : 2099/**/2nd Monday + 1 day OFF

Yearly : ON
2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd
Monthly : ON Monday Monday Monday Monday Monday Monday Monday Monday
+ + + +
1 day 1 day 1 day 1 day

Parameter tab

Configure the tab as shown above and set D1 to Q0.

YEAR S1 S2 S3 D1
1 Q0
M8125

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 11-29

11: WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS

[To turn on output Q0 on the last day of every month between 2013 and 2020]

January February March April

ON date : 2013/**/end of month ON
OFF date : 2020/**/end of month OFF
+ 1 day
Yearly : ON 31st 1st 28th/29th 1st 31st 1st 30th 1st
Monthly : ON

Parameter tab

Configure the tab as shown above and set D1 to Q0.

YEAR S1 S2 S3 D1
1 Q0
M8125

11-30 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 11: WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS

• To configure the dates by specifying data registers

[To turn on M100 from 0:00 on September 1, 2011, to 0:00 on June 25, 2013]

*** 2011 2012 2013 2014 ***

ON date : 2011/09/01 ON

OFF date : 2013/06/25 OFF

Yearly : OFF
9/1 6/25
Monthly : OFF

Devices tab Parameter tab

Data register allocation

The settings on the P 1 tab are allocated to data registers D0 to D3 as shown in the table below. The settings configured on the
P 1 tab are stored in D0 to D3 by turning on initialization input S2.

Data register Setting Initial setting

D0 Year 2011
ON settings
D1 Month, Day 2305 (September 1st)
P 1 tab
D2 Year 2013
OFF settings
D3 Month, Day 1561 (June 25th)

• The initial settings configured on the P 1 tab are

stored in D0 to D3 at the first scan.
M8120 M0

• When M1 turns on, all of the YEAR instruction

SOTU settings (D0 to D3) return to the initial settings.
M1

• The YEAR instruction starts operating according to

YEAR S1 S2 S3 D1
the values of data registers D0 to D3.
D0 M0 1 M100
M8125

• When M10 turns on, the ON settings year changes to

MOV(W) S1 - D1 - REP
SOTU 2013 (D0) and the OFF settings year changes to
2013 D0 2020 (D2).
M10

MOV(W) S1 - D1 - REP
2020 D2

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 11-31

11: WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS

11-32 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

12: DISPLAY INSTRUCTIONS
Introduction
This chapter describes the display instructions that display specified data on the HMI module LCD and external devices.

MSG (Message)
Displays the specified data on the HMI module LCD.

MSG S1
*****

When the input is on, a message is displayed on the HMI module LCD according to the content configured in the MSG (Message)
dialog box.
The MSG instruction functions are as follows.
Device values can be displayed.
• Word device values can be displayed as numeric values according to the specified data type.
For details, see "Insert Word Device" on page 12-4.
• Word device values can be displayed as bar graphs.
For details, see "Insert Bar Graph" on page 12-8.
• Text can be displayed and switched according to the value of a bit device (input/output, internal relay, shift register, timer contact, or counter
contact).
For details, see "Insert Bit Device" on page 12-6.
Arbitrary text can be displayed.
• The specified text can be displayed.
For details, see "MSG (Message) dialog box" on page 12-2.
The text display effects can be configured.
• Text can be scrolled, blinked, or inverted.
For details, see "Insert Text with Effect" on page 12-7.
Date/time data can be displayed.
• The current date/time and the date/time when the input to the MSG instruction is turned on can be displayed on the LCD.
For details, see "7. Special Data" on page 12-3.
The language for displayed text can be selected from 9 languages.
• Text can be displayed in 9 languages using 4 types of character sets.
For details, see "MSG Instruction Common Settings" on page 12-9.
The text display settings can be configured.
• The scroll unit, scroll speed, and blinking speed can be configured.
For details, see "MSG Instruction Common Settings" on page 12-9.
Device values can be modified.
• Device values displayed with the MSG instruction can be modified on the HMI module.
For details, see "Modifying Device Values on the HMI Module" on page 12-17.

Notes:
• A maximum of 50 MSG instructions can be entered in a user program, but only one MSG instruction message can be displayed on the HMI
module LCD. S1 for the MSG instruction stores the MSG instruction priority. When the display conditions for multiple MSG instructions are
satisfied, the messages are displayed according to the priority set for the MSG instruction.
For MSG instruction priority, see "10. Priority" on page 12-3.
• The MSG instruction cannot be used during an interrupt program. If it is used during an interrupt program, a user program execution error
occurs, the execution of the instruction is canceled, and the next instruction is executed.
For user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) Priority — — — — — — — X —

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 12-1

12: DISPLAY INSTRUCTIONS

Settings
For the MSG instruction settings, there are settings for the individual MSG instruction and settings that are common to all the MSG
instructions.
Note: Settings that are common to all the MSG instructions are modified in the Function Area Settings dialog box of WindLDR. For details, see
"MSG Instruction Common Settings" on page 12-9.

■ MSG Instruction Individual Settings

The individual settings configure items such as the text to display, the devices, and the priority.
The individual settings are configured in the MSG (Message) dialog box.

MSG (Message) dialog box

10. 11.

7. 8. 9.
1.
3.
4.
5.
6.

2. 12.

1. LCD Display
Configures the screen that is displayed on the HMI module LCD by placing text and devices in the selected area with the mouse
cursor. Enter the text with the keyboard at the cursor position. The character input method (insert/overwrite) is changed by
clicking Insert (9).
Note: Text entered on the LCD Display (1) with the keyboard cannot be set to scroll, blink, or invert. To scroll, blink, or invert the text, enter the
text with Text with Effect (5) and configure the display options. For details on inserting text with effects, see "Insert Text with Effect" on page
12-7.

2. Work Area
This area is used when editing the LCD display. This area is for temporarily relocating text and device data.
Text and device data at the cursor position can be moved between the LCD Display and the Work Area with or (12).
When the dialog is closed, the work area data is discarded.

3. Word Device
Inserts a word device at the cursor position. The value of the specified word device is displayed on the HMI module LCD. For
details, see "Insert Word Device" on page 12-4.

4. Bit Device
Inserts a bit device in the area specified by the cursor. Two different items of text can be switched between and displayed on the
HMI module LCD according to the value of the specified bit device. For details, see "Insert Bit Device" on page 12-6.

5. Text with Effect

Inserts text in the area specified by the cursor. The specified text is displayed on the HMI module LCD. For details, see "Insert
Text with Effect" on page 12-7.

6. Bar Graph
Inserts a bar graph in the area specified by the cursor. The value of the specified device is displayed as a bar graph on the HMI
module LCD. For details, see "Insert Bar Graph" on page 12-8.

12-2 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 12: DISPLAY INSTRUCTIONS

7. Special Data
Special data such as the current date and time can be entered at the cursor position. Select the data to enter on the special data
list window popped up when Special Data is pressed. Size of the area used on the LCD display varies based on the selected
special data.

Display Occupied Area

Special Data (Rows x
Display Type Display Example (December 1, 2015, 13:30) columns)
Current date YYYY/MM/DD 2015/12/01 1 x 10
Current time HH:MM 13:30 1x5
Date the input to the MSG instruction is turned on YYYY/MM/DD 2015/12/01 1 x 10
Time the input to the MSG instruction is turned on HH:MM 13:30 1x5

8. Special Character
A special character can be entered at the cursor position. Select the character to enter on the special characters list window
popped up when Special Character is pressed. The special characters that can be used are as follows.

Special Characters List

°C °F ° ±

9. Insert/Overwrite
Selects insert or overwrite as the character input mode. Click this button to switch the input mode.

10. Priority
The priority of the MSG instruction can be configured between 0 to 49. 0 is the highest priority and 49 is the lowest priority.
• The same priority cannot be set for multiple MSG instructions.

• When inputs to two or more MSG instructions turns on, the message of the MSG instruction with the highest priority is displayed, out of all
the MSG instructions with inputs that are on.

• When the MSG instruction input with the highest priority changes from on to off, the message for the MSG instruction with the next highest
priority is displayed (the priority is checked when the input changes).

Note: When you press the (up) or (down) button on the HMI module, the messages are switched between the MSG instructions that have
inputs that are on. Messages are also switched when the acknowledgement for the MSG instruction is enabled.

Motor 5
STOP AT Example: Message output
10:12 in Priority 30
!! ACTION !!

Motor 2
3000 Example: Message output
hours in Priority 10
!! MAINTENANCE !!

Running
Date and current time
2015/DEC/01/TUE
09:00:12

11. Acknowledgment
When acknowledgment is enabled, the message continues to be displayed even when the MSG instruction input turns off. The
message is closed when the (OK) button on the HMI module is pressed, and then the message for the MSG instruction with
the next highest priority is displayed, out of all the MSG instructions with inputs that are on at that time.
If the input is on for the MSG instruction that had acknowledgment enabled, the message is not closed even when the (up)
button is pressed.

12. / buttons
Text and device data at the cursor position are moved between the LCD Display and the Work Area.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 12-3

12: DISPLAY INSTRUCTIONS

Insert Word Device

The value of the specified word device can be displayed on the HMI module LCD.

1.

2.

3.

4.

1. Device
Enter the device to display.
Valid Devices

W (word) TC, TP, CC, CP, D

I (integer) D
D (double word) CC, CP, D
L (long) D
F (float) D

2. Data Type and Conversion Type

Select the display type for the specified device. The size of the area used on the LCD display varies based on the specified data
type and conversion type.

Data Type Conversion Type Occupied Area Example on LCD

Decimal 5 65535
W (word)
Hexadecimal 4 FFFF
I (integer) Decimal 6 -32768
Decimal 10 4294967295
D (double word)
Hexadecimal 8 FFFFFFFF
L (long) Decimal 11 -2147483648
F (float) Decimal 13 1.234567E-01

3. Option
Configure the options for the specified device to blink, invert the text, or allow/prohibit value editing. For the blinking speed, see
"MSG Instruction Common Settings" on page 12-9.

Display Options Description

Blinking Blinks the value of the specified device.
Invert Inverts the display of the specified value.
Disable Editing Value Prohibits editing the specified device value using the HMI module.

4. Occupied Area
Shows the size of the area to be used on the LCD display (rows: 1, columns: 4 to 13). The area is determined by the selected
data type and conversion type.

12-4 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 12: DISPLAY INSTRUCTIONS

Floating Point Value Notation on LCD

Whether or not F (float) LCD notation uses decimal notation or exponent notation is determined according to the single-
precision floating point definition in IEEE 754 and the internal system function included in the CPU module.

The IEEE 754 single precision format consists of three fields: a 23-bit fraction, f; an 8-bit biased exponent, e; and 1-bit sign,
s. These fields are stored contiguously in one 32-bit word, as shown in the figure below. Bits 0:22 contain the 23-bit fraction,
f, with bit 0 being the least significant bit of the fraction and bit 22 being the most significant; bits 23:30 contain the 8-bit
biased exponent, e, with bit 23 being the least significant bit of the biased exponent and bit 30 being the most significant;
and the highest-order bit 31 contains the sign bit, s.

Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit

31 30 23 22 0

s e[30:23] f[22:0]

8-bit biased exponent 23-bit fraction

Sign bit (0: positive, 1: negative)

The table below shows the correspondence between the values of the three constituent fields s, e, and f and the value
represented by the single precision format bit pattern.
When the value is ±0, denormalized number, or normalized number, the value is displayed according to the internal system
function of the CPU module.

Value Exponent Field e Fraction Field f Representation

±0 e=0 f=0 0
Denormal numbers e=0 f≈0 • Displayed in decimal notation
0.0001 ≤ | Value | < 9,999,999.5
(Number of significant digits is 7 digits, 8th
digit is rounded)
Normal numbers 0<e<255 Arbitrary
• Displayed in exponent notation
| Value | < 0.0001
| Value | ≥ 9,999,999.5
±∞ (± infinities) f=0 INF
e=255
NaNs (Not a number) f≈0 NAN

Example: This table shows the representation on the LCD for the following floating-point values.

Value Representation in LCD

1234567 1234567
12345678 1.234568E+07
1234567.8 1234568
0.0001 0.0001
0.00001 1E-05
0.000001 1E-06
0.0000001 1E-07
0.123456 0.123456
0.1234567 0.1234567
0.12345678 0.1234568
0.0000012 1.2E-06
1.2345678 1.234568
0 0
0.0001234568 0.0001234568

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 12-5

12: DISPLAY INSTRUCTIONS

Insert Bit Device

Two different items of text can be switched between and displayed on the HMI module LCD according to the value of the specified
bit device (when on/when off).

1.

2.

3. 6. 7.

4.

5.

1. Device
Enter the device to display.
Valid Devices

I Q M R T C D
X X X X X X —

2. Display Option
Configure the options to blink or invert the text. For the blinking speed, see "MSG Instruction Common Settings" on page 12-9.

Display Option Description

Blinking Blinks the specified text.
Invert Inverts the display of the specified text.

3. Occupied Area
Shows the size of the area to be used on the LCD display (rows: 1, columns: 1 to 24). The display size is determined by the
selected range on the LCD display area (or work area). If multiple rows are selected, the area at the top line in the selected
range is used.

4. ON Text
Enter the text to display when the specified device is on. Up to 24 single-byte characters can be entered. A space is also counted
as one character.

5. OFF Text
Enter the text to display when the specified device is off. Up to 24 single-byte characters can be entered. A space is also counted
as one character.

6. Special Character
Enters a special character at the cursor position. Select the character to enter on the special characters list window popped up
when Special Character is pressed. For the special characters, see "8. Special Character" on page 12-3.

7. Insert/Overwrite
Selects whether to insert or overwrite characters when entering new characters.

12-6 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 12: DISPLAY INSTRUCTIONS

Insert Text with Effect

The specified text can be displayed on the HMI module LCD.

[When scrolling is disabled] [When scrolling is enabled]

1.

2.
3.
5. 6. 5. 6.

4. 4.

1. Display Option
Configure the options to scroll, blink, or invert the specified text. For the scroll unit, scroll speed, and blinking speed, see "MSG
Instruction Common Settings" on page 12-9.

Display Options Description

Scroll Scrolls the specified text.
Blinking Blinks the specified text.
Invert Invert the display of the specified text.

2. Occupied Area
Shows the size of the area to be used on the LCD display (rows: 1, columns: 1 to 24). The occupied area is determined by the
selected range on the LCD display area (or work area). If multiple rows are selected, the area at the top line in the selected
range is used.

3. Input Text Directly

Directly enter the characters to display. A space is also counted as one character. If scrolling is disabled, the message can be
entered up to 24 single-byte characters. However, you cannot enter a number of characters that exceeds the occupied area. If
scrolling is enabled, the message can be entered up to 48 single-byte characters.

4. Select from Text Manager

Select the text to display from the text manager. This can be selected only when the scroll is enabled.

5. Special Character
Enters a special character at the cursor position. Select the character to enter on the special characters list window popped up
when Special Character is pressed. For the special characters, see "8. Special Character" on page 12-3.

6. Insert/Overwrite
Selects whether to insert or overwrite characters when entering new characters.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 12-7

12: DISPLAY INSTRUCTIONS

Insert Bar Graph

The value of the specified device can be displayed as a bar graph on the HMI module LCD.

1.

2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

7.

1. Device
Enter the device to display as a bar graph.
Valid Devices

W (word) TC, TP, CC, CP, D

I (integer) D
D (double word) CC, CP, D
L (long) D
F (float) —

2. Data Type
Selects the data type for the specified device.
Data Type

W (word) X
I (integer) X
D (double word) X
L (long) X
F (float) —
For data types, see "Data Types for Advanced Instructions" on page 3-7.
3. Maximum
Enter the maximum value for the bar graph. If the device value is larger than the maximum value, the bar graph is displayed as
the maximum value. The valid range varies based on the data type. For data types, see "Data Types for Advanced Instructions"
on page 3-7.
4. Minimum
Enter the minimum value for the bar graph. If the device value is smaller than the minimum value, the bar graph is displayed as
the minimum value. The valid range varies based on the data type. For data types, see "Data Types for Advanced Instructions"
on page 3-7.
5. Origin
Enter the value to be the origin of the bar graph. If the device value is larger than the origin value, the bar graph is displayed on
the right side of the origin value. If the device value is smaller than the origin value, the bar graph is displayed on the left side
of the origin value. The valid range varies based on the data type. For data types, see "Data Types for Advanced Instructions" on
page 3-7. The origin value must satisfy the condition of Minimum ≤ Origin ≤ Maximum.

Line A monitor
Target count: 30000 Min ≤ Origin ≤ Max
Prod. count: 14500

6. Occupied Area
The occupied area is determined by the selected range on the LCD display area (or work area). If multiple rows are selected, the
area at the top line in the selected range is used (rows: 1, columns: 1 to 24).

12-8 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 12: DISPLAY INSTRUCTIONS

7. Blinking Settings
Blink the bar graph when the value of the specified device exceeds the upper or lower limit.
For the blinking speed, see "MSG Instruction Common Settings" on page 12-9.
Blinking Settings Description
Upper limit The bar graph is blinked when the value of the specified device is larger than the upper limit.
Lower limit The bar graph is blinked when the value of the specified device is smaller than the lower limit.

Maximum, minimum, upper limit, and lower limit values must satisfy the following condition.

Line A monitor
Target count: 30000 Min < Lower limit < Upper limit < Max
Prod. count: 14500

■ MSG Instruction Common Settings

The common settings, character set, scroll unit, scroll speed, and blinking speed, for the message to display can be configured.
The common settings are configured in the LCD tab of the HMI Module Configuration dialog box that is displayed from the
WindLDR Expansion Modules Configuration.
Note: The common settings for the MSG instructions are applicable for all MSG (message) instructions in the user program. For the MSG instruction
individual settings, see "MSG Instruction Individual Settings" on page 12-2.

HMI Module Configuration dialog box LCD tab

1.
2.
3.
4.

1. Character Set
The character set used for the messages can be configured from the following.
Selection Character Set Languages Usable in the MSG Instruction
European ISO-8859-1 (Latin 1) Italian, English, Dutch, Spanish, German, French
Japanese Shift-JIS Japanese
Chinese GB2312 Chinese (simplified)
Cyrillic ANSI 1251 Russian

2. Scroll Unit
The unit to scroll the texts can be configured.
One character Scrolls the text in 1 character units.
One dot Scrolls the text in 1 dot units.

3. Scroll Speed
The speed to scroll the texts can be configured. The setting range is 500 to 1,000 ms.
4. Blink Speed
The speed to blink the texts can be configured. The setting range is 500 to 1,000 ms.
Note: The MSG instruction character set can be configured irrespective of the HMI module system menu language.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 12-9

12: DISPLAY INSTRUCTIONS

MSG Instruction Configuration Example

[Display the room temperature when M0000 is on and the outdoor temperature when M0000 is off]

The room temperature/outdoor temperature value is stored in D0002. Create a ladder program that stores
the room temperature value when M0000 is on and the outside temperature value when M0000 is off.

IDEC room temp is IDEC outdoor temp is

Now: 28°C Now: -5 ° C

2015/12/01 2015/12/01

Bar graph is used to Show the rise and fall in temperature visually.
Displays the current date.

■ Settings
Configure the following items.

1. Bit Device
IDEC room temp is
4. Special Character
2. Text with Effect Now: 2 8°C
5. Bar Graph
3. Word Device
2 0 1 5/1 2/0 1
6. Special Data

Setting Items Setting Details

Device M0000
Display Options All disabled (scroll, blink, invert)
1. Bit Device
ON Text IDEC room temp is
OFF Text IDEC outdoor temp is
Text Now:
2. Text with Effect
Display Options All disabled (scroll, blink, invert)
Device D0002
3. Word Device Data Type I (integer)
Conversion Type Decimal
4. Special Character °C
Device D0002
Data Type I (integer)
Max 50
5. Bar Graph
Min -20
Origin 0
Blinking Settings Disabled
6. Special Data Current date

12-10 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 12: DISPLAY INSTRUCTIONS

■ Operation Procedure
1. Right-click at the location to insert the MSG instruction, and click Advanced Instructions > Display > MSG (Message).
The MSG (Message) dialog box is displayed.

Configuring the bit device

2. Select the area to insert the parameter and click Bit Device.

The Insert Bit Device dialog box opens.

3. Configure the parameters so that the room temperature is displayed when M0000 is on and the outdoor temperature is
displayed when M0000 is off. Set Device to "M0000". Using the keyboard, enter "IDEC room temp is" as the ON Text and
"IDEC outdoor temp is" as the OFF Text. Under Display Option, disable all of the options.

Displayed when M0000 is on

I D E C r o om t e m p i s

Displayed when M0000 is off

I D E C o utdoor t e m p i s

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 12-11

12: DISPLAY INSTRUCTIONS

4. After the settings are configured, click OK.

The configured content is displayed on the LCD display area.

Configuring the text with effect

5. Select the six-column area from the start of the second row and click Text with Effect.

Note: The text can also be entered directly on the LCD display area. In the sample above, move the cursor to the start of the second line and enter
"Now:" with the keyboard. When you directly enter the text, proceed to "Configuring the word device" on page 12-13, step 8.
The Insert Text with Effect dialog box is displayed.

6. In Text, enter "Now:" with the keyboard. Under Display Option, disable all of the options.

I D E C r o om t e m p i s
Now:

12-12 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 12: DISPLAY INSTRUCTIONS

7. After the settings are configured, click OK.

The configured content is displayed on the LCD display area.

Configuring the word device

8. Select the area at the ninth column on the second row and click Word Device.

The Insert Word Device dialog box is displayed.

9. Set Device to "D0002", Data Type to "Integer (I)", and Conversion Type to "Decimal".
Under Display Option, disable all of the options.

I D E C r o om t e m p i s
Now: 28

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 12-13

12: DISPLAY INSTRUCTIONS

10. After the settings are configured, click OK.

The configured content is displayed on the LCD display area.

Configuring the special character

11. Select the area at the 15th column on the second row and click Special Character.

The Special Characters popup window is displayed.

12. Double-click on °C.

I D E C r o om t e m p i s
Now: 28 䰳

The configured content is displayed on the LCD display area.

12-14 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 12: DISPLAY INSTRUCTIONS

Configuring the bar graph

13. Select the entire area on the third line and click Bar Graph.

The Insert Bar Graph popup window is displayed.

14. Set Device to "D0002", Data Type to "Integer (I)", Max to "50", Min to "-20", and Origin to "0".
Disable the blinking settings.

I D E C r o om t e m p i s
Now: 28°C

Min Origin Max

15. After the settings are configured, click OK.

The configured content is displayed on the LCD screen area.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 12-15

12: DISPLAY INSTRUCTIONS

Configuring the special data

16. Select the left edge of the fourth line and click Special Data.

The Special Data window is poped up.

17. Double-click on the Current date.

I D E C r o om t e m p i s
Now: 28°C

2015/12/01

18. After the settings are configured, click OK.

The configured content is displayed on the LCD display area.

This concludes configuring the settings.

LCD display
When M0000 is on, the room temperature stored in D0002
IDEC room temp is
is displayed as the numeric value (°C) and bar graph.
Now: 28°C

2015/12/01

When M0000 is off, the outdoor temperature stored in D0002

IDEC outdoor temp is
is displayed as the numeric value (°C) and bar graph.
Now: -5° C

2015/12/01

12-16 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 12: DISPLAY INSTRUCTIONS

Modifying Device Values on the HMI Module

The values of the word devices displayed on the HMI module LCD can be modified using the HMI module operation buttons.
The values cannot be modified when the user program is stopped.

[To modify the value of word device CP0]

Line A monitor
Plan: CPO Actual:CCO
Diff: DO
Bar Graph CC0

When the user program is running and the input to the MSG instruction is turned on, the following screen will be displayed on the
LCD.

Line A monitor
Plan: 60000 Actual:20000
Diff: 40000

While the above message is displayed, press and hold the (OK) button and the cursor is displayed on the devices that can be
modified.

Line A monitor
Plan: 60000 Actual:20000
Diff: 40000

Move the cursor to the device you wish to edit using the (up) (down) (left) (right) buttons and press the (OK)
button to change the device in the editable state.

Line A monitor
Plan: 6
60000 Actual:20000
Diff: 40000

Press the (right) button to move the cursor to the fourth digit, and then use the (up) button to modify the target value to
"65000".

Line A monitor
Plan: 65000
5 Actual:20000
Diff: 40000

Press the (OK) button to confirm the modifications.

Line A monitor
Plan: 65000 Actual:20000
Diff: 40000

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 12-17

12: DISPLAY INSTRUCTIONS

Scrolling text example

[Character Set: European scroll speed: 500 ms]

When a text with effect is set to scroll, the text is displayed on the HMI module LCD as follows.

When scrolling a text longer than the specified area on When scrolling a text shorter than or equal to the
the LCD specified area on the LCD
Text: "IDEC Corporation MICRO Smart" Text: "IDEC Corporation"

I D E C C o r por a ti on MICRO S mart I DEC Corporation

500 msec 500 msec

I D E C C o r por a ti on MICRO Sm art DEC Corporation I

500 msec 500 msec

I D E C C o r por a ti on MICRO Sma rt EC Corporation ID

500 msec 500 msec

I D E C C o r por a ti on MICRO Smar t C Corporation I DE

500 msec 500 msec

I D EC C o r por a ti on MICRO Smart Corporation I DEC

500 msec 500 msec

I D E C C o r por a ti on MICRO Smart Corporation I DEC

500 msec

orporation I DEC C

a ti o n MICRO Sma rt

500 msec

ti on MICRO Smar t

500 msec

500 msec

I D E C C o r por

500 msec

I D E C C o r por a

500 msec

I D E C C o r por a t

500 msec

I D E C C o r por a ti

12-18 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 12: DISPLAY INSTRUCTIONS

[Character Set: European, Scroll speed: 500 ms, Scroll unit: 1-dot]
When a text with effect is set to scroll, the text is displayed on the LCD of the HMI module as follows.
Text: "IDEC Corporation"

1234567812345678123456781234567812345678123456781234567812
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
IDEC Corporation. 11
12
13
14
15
16
1
2

62.5 msec

62.5 msec

62.5 msec

62.5 msec

62.5 msec

62.5 msec

62.5 msec

62.5 msec

1 character (8 dots) is scrolled in 500 ms

62.5 msec

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 12-19

12: DISPLAY INSTRUCTIONS

DISP (Display)

Displays the specified data on a 7-segment display.

DISP S1 Q LAT DAT When the input is on, the data specified by S1 is displayed
BCD4 ***** ***** L L
on the 7-segment display.
Quantity of digits: Display data can be 0 through 65535 (FFFFh).
1 to 5 (decimal) Data phase:
1 to 4 (hex) Low or High

Conversion: Latch phase:

BCD or BIN Low or High

Note: Always use transistor output to display data using the DISP instruction.

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) Data to display — — — — X*1 X*1 X — —
Q (Output) Display data output — X X*2 — — — — — —

For the valid device address range, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.
*1 When T (timer) or C (counter) is used as S1, the timer/counter current value (TC or CC) is read out.
*2 Internal relays M0 through M7997 and M10000 through M17497 can be designated as Q. Special internal relays cannot be designated as Q.

Conversion
BCD:To connect BCD (decimal) display units
BIN:To connect BIN (hexadecimal) display units

Latch Phase*1 and Data Phase*1

Select the latch and data phases to match the phases of the display units in consideration of sink or source output of the output
module.
*1 The LAT (latch phase) and DAT (data phase) settings will differ depending on the 7-segment display sink output specification and source output
specification. Configure these settings according to the specifications of the 7-segment display.

Specify the data to display on the 7-segment display with S1 (the display data). Specify the output for the display data with Q.
Starting from the device specified with Q, the specified data (4 points + number of digits) is sequentially allocated by the display
data and the number of display digits.
For example, if the number of display digits is 4 digits and the display data output is set to Q0, Q0 to Q7 are allocated (Q0 to Q3
are allocated to the data signal to the display, Q4 to Q7 are allocated to the digit selection signal).
Notes:
• A maximum of 8 DISP instructions can be entered in a user program.

• The displayable range is 0 to 65535 (FFFFh).

• Displaying one digit of data requires 3 scan times after the input to the DISP instruction is turned on. Keep the input to the DISP instruction
for the period of time shown below to process all digits of the display data.
Display Processing Time
3 scan times × Quantity of digits
When the scan time is less than 2 ms, the data cannot be displayed correctly. When the scan time is too short to ensure normal display, set a
value of 3 or more (in ms) to data register D8022 (constant scan time preset value).

12-20 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 12: DISPLAY INSTRUCTIONS

Operation Example
To display the 4-digit current value of counter C010 on a 7-segment display (IDEC DD3S-F31N) connected to the transistor sink
output module.

DISP S1 Q LAT DAT When input I0 is on, the 4-digit current value of counter C10
BCD4 C10 Q30 L H is displayed on 7-segment digital display units.

Output Wiring Diagram

8-Transistor Sink
Output Module
(FC6A-T08K1)
Q30
Q31
Q32
Q33
Q34
Q35
Q36
Q37
COM(–)
+V (+)
(–)
24V DC
(+) (+) (+) (+) Power
(–) (–) (–) (–) Supply
LATCH LATCH LATCH LATCH
A A A A
B B B B
C C C C
D D D D
103 102 101 100

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 12-21

12: DISPLAY INSTRUCTIONS

DGRD (Digital Read)

When input is on, the setting values for the connected digital
DGRD I Q D1 switch are stored in the device specified by D1.
BCD4 ***** ***** ***** This instruction can be used to change preset values for
timer and counter instructions using digital switches.
First output number
First input number
Quantity of digits:
1 to 5 (decimal)
1 to 4 (hex)
Conversion:
BCD or BIN

Note: Always use transistor output to display data using the DGRD instruction.

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

I First input number to read X — — — — — — — —
Q First output number for digit selection — X — — — — — — —
D1 (Destination 1) Destination to store results — — — — — — X — —

For the valid device address range, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.
The DGRD instruction can read 65535 (5 digits) at the maximum. When the read value exceeds 65,535 with the quantity of digits
set to 5, a user program execution error will result, turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the CPU module.
Note: When transferring a user program containing more than 16 DGRD instructions to the CPU, a user program syntax error occurs, turning on the
ERR LED. The user program cannot be executed.

Conversion
BCD:To connect BCD (decimal) digital switches
BIN:To connect BIN (hexadecimal) digital switches
Four points from the input specified by I are allocated as the reading inputs.
For example, when I is set to I0, I0 to I3 are allocated.
The number of digits specified by the number of display digits from the output specified by Q are allocated as the digit selection
outputs.
For example, if the number of display digits is three digits, and Q is set to Q0, Q0 to Q2 are allocated.
Notes:
• A maximum of 16 DGRD instructions can be entered in a user program.

• Reading digital switch data requires the following time after the input to the DGRD instruction is turned on. Keep the input to the DGRD
instruction for the period of time shown below to read the digital switch data. For example, when reading data from 5 digital switches to the
destination device, 14 scans are required.
Digital Switch Data Reading Time
2 scan times × (Quantity of digits + 2)
The DGRD instruction requires a scan time longer than the filter time plus 6 ms.
Minimum Required Scan Time
(Scan time) ≥ (Filter time) + 6 ms
• As necessary, adjust the scan time using the constant scan time (D8022) function. The filter time differs according to the input that is used as
the reading input.
When specifying CPU module inputs as the reading inputs: I0 to I27
See the input filter time configured in the WindLDR Function Area Settings. The initial value is 3 ms.
When specifying input module inputs as the reading inputs: From I30
There is no filter time, so calculate the value by replacing the filter time with the input delay time.
• The data that can be read using this instruction is 0 through 65535 (5 digits), or FFFFh. A user program execution error will occur when a
value of 65,536 or greater is specified as a five digit decimal code and the processing will not be executed.
For user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

12-22 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 12: DISPLAY INSTRUCTIONS

Operation Example
The following example demonstrates a program where digital switches (IDEC DFBN-031D-B) have been connected to the 16-I/O
type transistor sink output module and those setting values are read into D0010.

DGRD I Q D1 When input I5 is on, the 4-digit value from BCD digital switches is read to
BCD4 I30 Q30 D10 data register D10.

I/O Wiring Diagram

16-point Transistor
8-point DC Input Sink Output
(FC6A-N08B1) (FC6A-T16K3) Digital Switches
C 8
I30 Q30
I31 Q31 0
4
10 2
I32 Q32
I33 Q33 1
I34 Q34
I35 Q35
I36 Q36 C 8
I37 Q37 4
COM COM(–) 101 2
COM +V 1

C 8
2
4
10 2
1
(+)
(–)
C 8
24V DC
4
Power 103 2
Supply 1

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 12-23

12: DISPLAY INSTRUCTIONS

12-24 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

13: PROGRAM BRANCHING INSTRUCTIONS
Introduction
This chapter describes the ladder program branching instructions that are used for branching program execution, looping ladder
program execution, and creating ladder program subroutines.
Ladder program instruction execution branches from the LJMP (label jump) instruction and the DJNZ (decrement jump non-zero)
instruction to the location where the LABEL instruction has been entered. Programming tools include “either/or” options between
numerous portions of a program and the ability to call one of several subroutines which return execution to where the normal
program stopped.
For the differences between user-defined macros and subroutines, see "Differences between User-defined Macros and
Subroutines" on page A-5.

LABEL (Label)
This instruction sets the label number.
LABEL
The label number that can be specified is 0 to 255.
***
An END instruction may be used to separate a tagged portion of the program from the main program. In this way, scan
time is minimized by not executing the program branch unless input conditions are satisfied.

Note: A single label number cannot be used more than once.

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

Label number Tag for LJMP and LCAL — — — — — — — 0-255 —

LJMP (Label Jump)

When input is on, jump to the address with label 0 through 255 assigned by S1.
LJMP S1
When input is off, no jump takes place, and program execution proceeds with the next instruction.
*****
The LJMP instruction is used as an “either/or” choice between two portions of a program. Program
execution does not return to the instruction following the LJMP instruction, after the program branch.

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) Label number — — — — — — X 0-255 —

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

Since the LJMP instruction is executed in each scan while input is on, a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used.

Note: Make sure that a LABEL instruction of the label number used for a LJMP instruction is programmed. When designating S1 using other than a
constant, the value for the label is a variable. When using a variable for a label, make sure that all probable LABEL numbers are included in the user
program. If a matching label does not exist, a user program execution error will result, turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on
the FC6A Series MicroSmart. For details about the user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 13-1

13: PROGRAM BRANCHING INSTRUCTIONS

Example: LJMP and LABEL

The following example demonstrates a program that jumps to three different portions of the program depending on the input.

LJMP S1 When input I0 is on, program execution jumps to label 0.

I0 0

LJMP S1 When input I1 is on, program execution jumps to label 1.

I1 1

LJMP S1 When input I2 is on, program execution jumps to label 2.

I2 2

END

LABEL
0

M8121 is the 1-s clock special internal relay.

M8121 Q0 When jump occurs to label 0, output Q0 oscillates in 1-s increments.

END

LABEL
1

M8122 is the 100-ms clock special internal relay.

M8122 Q1 When jump occurs to label 1, output Q1 oscillates in 100-ms increments.

END

LABEL
2

M8123 is the 10-ms clock special internal relay.

M8123 Q2
When jump occurs to label 2, output Q2 oscillates in 10-ms increments.
END

Using the Timer Instruction with Program Branching

When the timer start input of the TML, TIM, TMH or TMS instruction is already on, countdown begins immediately at the location
jumped to, starting with the timer current value. When using a program branch, it is important to make sure that timers are
initialized when desired, after the jump. If it is necessary to initialize the timer instruction (set to the preset value) after the jump,
the timer’s start input should be kept off for one or more scan cycles before initialization. Otherwise, the timer input on will not be
recognized.

Using the SOTU/SOTD Instructions with Program Branching

Check that pulse inputs of counters and shift registers, and inputs of single outputs (SOTU and SOTD) are maintained during the
jump, if required. Hold the input off for one or more scan cycles after the jump for the rising or falling edge transition to be
recognized.

Although normally, the SOTU instruction produces a pulse for

LABEL one scan, when used in a program branch the SOTU pulse will
0 last only until the next time the same SOTU instruction is Q1 Internal ON
executed. Memory OFF
SOTU
I1 Q1 In the example on the left, the program branch will loop as long ON
Q1 Output OFF
as internal relay M0 remains on. However, the SOTU produces a
LJMP S1 pulse output only during the first loop. END END
M0 0

Since the END instruction is not executed as long as M0 remains on, output Q1 is not turned on even if input I1 is on.

13-2 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 13: PROGRAM BRANCHING INSTRUCTIONS

LCAL (Label Call)

When input is on, the address with label 0 through 255 assigned by S1 is called. When input is off, no call
LCAL S1 takes place, and program execution proceeds with the next instruction.
*****
The LCAL instruction calls a subroutine, and returns to the main program after the branch is executed. A
LRET instruction (see below) must be placed at the end of a program branch which is called, so that normal
program execution resumes by returning to the instruction following the LCAL instruction.

Note: The END instruction must be used to separate the main program from any subroutines called by the
LCAL instruction.

A maximum of four LCAL instructions can be nested. When more than four LCAL instructions are nested, a
user program execution error will result, turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the
FC6A Series MicroSmart.

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) Label number to call — — — — — — X 0-255 —

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

Since the LCAL instruction is executed in each scan while input is on, a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used.

Note: Make sure that a LABEL instruction of the label number used for a LCAL instruction is programmed. When designating S1 using other than a
constant, the value for the label is a variable. When using a variable for a label, make sure that all probable LABEL numbers are included in the user
program. If a matching label does not exist, a user program execution error will result, turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on
the FC6A Series MicroSmart.

LRET (Label Return)

This instruction returns to the address of the LCAL (label call) instruction.
LRET This instruction is placed at the end of a subroutine called by the LCAL instruction. When the subroutine is completed,
normal program execution resumes by returning to the instruction following the LCAL instruction.

The LRET must be placed at the end of the subroutine starting with a LABEL instruction. When the LRET is programmed
at other places, a user program execution error will result, turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on
the FC6A Series MicroSmart.

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

— — — — — — — — — — —

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 13-3

13: PROGRAM BRANCHING INSTRUCTIONS

Correct Structure for Calling Subroutine

When a LCAL instruction is executed, the remaining program instructions on the same rung may not be executed upon return, if
input conditions are changed by the subroutine. After the LRET instruction of a subroutine, program execution begins with the
instruction following the LCAL instruction, depending on current input condition.
When instructions following a LCAL instruction must be executed after the subroutine is called, make sure the subroutine does not
change input conditions unfavorably. In addition, include subsequent instructions in a new ladder line, separated from the LCAL
instruction.

Correct Incorrect
MOV(W) S1 – D1 – REP MOV(W) S1 – D1 – REP
I0 D0 D1 I0 D0 D1

LCAL S1 LCAL S1
0 0

S S
I0 M0 M0

MOV(W) S1 – D1 – REP MOV(W) S1 – D1 – REP

D20 D21 D20 D21

Separate the ladder line for each LCAL instruction. I0 status may be changed by the subroutine upon return.

Example: LCAL and LRET

The following example demonstrates a program that calls three different portions of program depending on the input. When the
subroutine is complete, program execution returns to the instruction following the LCAL instruction.

LCAL S1 When input I0 is on, program execution jumps to label 0.

I0 0

LCAL S1 When input I1 is on, program execution jumps to label 1.

I1 1

LCAL S1 When input I2 is on, program execution jumps to label 2.

I2 2

END

LABEL
0
M8121 is the 1-s clock special internal relay.
When jump occurs to label 0, output Q0 oscillates in 1-s increments.
M8121 Q0

LRET Program execution returns to the address of input I1.

LABEL
1
M8122 is the 100-ms clock special internal relay.

When jump occurs to label 1, output Q1 oscillates in 100-ms increments.

M8122 Q1
Program execution returns to the address of input I2.
LRET

LABEL
2
M8123 is the 10-ms clock special internal relay.

M8123 Q2 When jump occurs to label 2, output Q2 oscillates in 10-ms increments.

LRET Program execution returns to the address of END.

13-4 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 13: PROGRAM BRANCHING INSTRUCTIONS

DJNZ (Decrement Jump Non-zero)

When input is on, the value stored in the data register assigned by S1 is decremented by one and
DJNZ S1 S2 is checked. If the resultant value is not 0, program execution jumps to address with label 0
***** ***** through 255 assigned by S2. If the decrement results in 0, no jump takes place, and program
execution proceeds with the next instruction.

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) Decrement value — — — — — — X — —
S2 (Source 2) Label number to jump to — — — — — — X 0-255 —

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

Since the DJNZ instruction is executed in each scan while input is on, a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used.

The label number can be 0 through 255. Make sure that a LABEL instruction of the label number used for a DJNZ instruction is programmed. When
designating S2 using a data register, the value for the label is a variable. When using a variable for a label, make sure that all probable LABEL
numbers are included in the user program. If a matching label does not exist, a user program execution error will result, turning on special internal
relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 13-5

13: PROGRAM BRANCHING INSTRUCTIONS

Example: DJNZ and LABEL

The following example demonstrates a program to store consecutive values 1,000 through 1,049 to data registers D100 through
D149, respectively.

MOV(W) S1 – D1 – REP M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay.

M8120 1049 D0
At start-up, MOV instructions store initial data.
MOV(W) S1 – D1 – REP 1049 → D0 to store the value for the first cycle.
50 D1
50 → D1 to determine the jump cycles.

LABEL
255

IMOV(W) S1 – S2 D1 – D2 REP IMOV moves D0 data 1049 to D1049 in the first cycle.
M8120 D0 D99 D1

DEC(W) S/D DEC decrements D0 data to 1048.

D0

DJNZ S1 S2 DJNZ jumps to label 255 until D1 value reduces to 0.

D1 255

END

1st cycle: D1 50 Destination: D99 + 50 = D149 D0 1049 D149 1049

2nd cycle: D1 49 Destination: D99 + 49 = D148 D0 1048 D148 1048

3rd cycle: D1 48 Destination: D99 + 48 = D147 D0 1047 D147 1047

4th cycle: D1 47 Destination: D99 + 47 = D146 D0 1046 D146 1046

49th cycle: D1 2 Destination: D99 + 2 = D101 D0 1001 D101 1001

50th cycle: D1 1 Destination: D99 + 1 = D100 D0 1000 D100 1000

13-6 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

14: REFRESH INSTRUCTIONS
Introduction
This chapter describes the refresh instructions that update the status of input contacts, external output , and the current value of
the high-speed counter, to the latest value during a ladder scan.

IOREF (I/O Refresh)

When input is on, 1-bit I/O data assigned by source device S1 is refreshed immediately regardless of the
IOREF S1 scan time.
*****
When I (input) is used as S1, the actual input status is immediately read into an internal relay starting with
M300 allocated to each input available on the FC6A Series MicroSmart.

When Q (output) is used as S1, the output data in the RAM is immediately written to the actual output
available on the FC6A Series MicroSmart.

Refresh instructions are useful when a real-time response is required in a user program which has a long
scan time. The refresh instruction is most effective when using the refresh instruction at a ladder step
immediately before using the data.

The IOREF instruction can be used with an interrupt input or timer interrupt to refresh data.

Valid Devices
Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat
S1 (Source 1) I/O for refresh X X — — — — — — —

Only inputs and outputs available on the CPU module can be specified for S1 of the IOREF instruction. Input and output numbers for remote I/O
slaves cannot be designated as S1. For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

Input Device Addresses and Allocated Internal Relays

Internal relays for storage are allocated by input device. For example, when I10 is designated as S1, the latest value of I10 is set
to M310.

Internal Internal Internal Internal

Input Device Input Device Input Device Input Device
Relay Relay Relay Relay
I0 M300 I10 M310 I20 M320 I30 M330
I1 M301 I11 M311 I21 M321 I31 M331
I2 M302 I12 M312 I22 M322 I32 M332
I3 M303 I13 M313 I23 M323 I33 M333
I4 M304 I14 M314 I24 M324 I34 M334
I5 M305 I15 M315 I25 M325 I35 M335
I6 M306 I16 M316 I26 M326
I7 M307 I17 M317 I27 M327

During normal execution of a user program, I/O statuses are refreshed simultaneously when the END instruction is executed at the
end of a scan. When a real-time response is needed to execute an interrupt, the IOREF instruction can be used. When the input to
the IOREF instruction is turned on, the status of the designated input or output is read or written immediately.
When the IOREF instruction is executed for an input, the filter does not take effect and the input status at the moment is read to
a corresponding internal relay.
The actual input status of the same input number is read to the internal input memory when the END instruction is executed as in
the normal scanning, then the filter value has effect as designated in the Function Area Settings. See Chapter 5 "Functions and
Settings" - "Input Filter" in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s Manual".

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 14-1

14: REFRESH INSTRUCTIONS

Example: IOREF
The following example demonstrates a program that transfers the input I0 status to output Q0 using the IOREF instruction. Input
I2 is designated as an interrupt input. For the interrupt input function, see Chapter 5 "Functions and Settings" - "Interrupt Input"
in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s Manual".

M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay.

MOV(W) S1 – D1 – REP
M8120 0 D8033 D8033 stores 0 to designate jump destination label 0 for interrupt input I2.

Main Program

END

When input I2 is on, program execution jumps to label 0.

LABEL
0
M8125 is the in-operation output special internal relay.
IOREF S1
I0 IOREF immediately reads input I0 status to internal relay M300.
M8125

M300 turns on or off the output Q0 internal memory.

M300 Q0
Another IOREF immediately writes the output Q0 internal memory status to actual
IOREF S1
Q0 output Q0.
M8125

LRET Program execution returns to the main program.

14-2 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 14: REFRESH INSTRUCTIONS

HSCRF (High-speed Counter Refresh)

When the input is on, the current values of the high-speed counters (select from group 1 to group 6) allocated to
HSCRF special data registers are updated to the latest values. (The group number of the selected high-speed counter is
* displayed under the advanced instruction symbol.)

The current values of six high-speed counters HSC1 through HSC6 are usually updated in every scan. The HSCRF can
be used in any place in the ladder diagram where you want to read the updated high-speed counter current value.

For the high-speed counter function, see Chapter 5 "Functions and Settings" - "High-Speed Counter" in the "FC6A
Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s Manual".

Example: HSCRF
The following example demonstrates a program that updates the current value of high-speed counter HSC1 using the HSCRF
instruction. For the timer interrupt, see Chapter 5 "Functions and Settings" - "Timer Interrupt" in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-
in-One Type User’s Manual".

M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay.

MOV(W) S1 – D1 – REP
M8120 0 D8036 D8036 stores 0 to designate jump destination label 0 for timer interrupt.

Main Program

The interrupt program is separated from the main program by the END
END instruction.

LABEL While the CPU is running, program execution jumps to label 0 repeatedly
0 at intervals selected in the Function Area Settings.

HSCRF M8125 is the in-operation output special internal relay.

M8125 1 HSCRF updates the HSC1 current value in data registers D8050 and
D8051.
CMP>(D) S1 – S2 – D1 – REP
D8050 150000 Q1 When D8050/D8051 exceeds 150,000, Q1 is turned on.
M8125
IOREF immediately writes the output Q1 internal memory status to actual
IOREF S1 output Q1.
M8125 Q1
Each time the interrupt program is completed, program execution returns
LRET to the main program at the address where timer interrupt occurred.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 14-3

14: REFRESH INSTRUCTIONS

FRQRF (Frequency Measurement Refresh)

When the input is on, the frequency measurement values (select from group 1 to group 4) allocated to special data
FRQRF registers are updated to the latest values. (The group number of the selected high-speed counter is displayed under
* the advanced instruction symbol.)

Before the measured results are reflected in special data registers, it takes a maximum of approximately 250 ms + the
scan time, but by using the FRQRF instruction, control processing using the latest current values of the frequency
measurements can be performed in any location in the user program.

For the frequency measurement function, see Chapter 5 "Frequency Measurement" in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart
All-in-One Type User’s Manual".

Example: FRQRF
Periodically update the current value of the frequency measurement value (D8060, D8061) using the FRQRF instruction in an
interrupt program.
When the frequency measurement value becomes 5,000 or greater, turn on the error signal (Q1).

MOV(W) S1 – D1 – REP Store 0 in D8036 and specify LABEL 0 as the interrupt program to execute
M8120 0 D8036 when the timer interrupt occurs.

Main Program

The interrupt program is separated from the main program by the END
END instruction.

LABEL Interrupt program starts.

0
Update the current value (D8060, D8061) of the frequency measurement
FRQRF
1 value.
M8125

CMP>(D) S1 – S2 – D1 – REP When the frequency measurement value becomes 5,000 or greater, turn on
M8125 D8060 5000 Q1 Q1 as the error signal.

IOREF S1 The status of output Q1 is reflected in the external output.

M8125 Q1

LRET Interrupt program ends.

14-4 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 14: REFRESH INSTRUCTIONS

COMRF (Communication Refresh)

Execute reading of received data and writing of send data for port 2 and 3 (communication port refresh) during user
COMRF program processing.

When implementing an application that requires a communication response from the communication cartridge in a
time interval that is shorter than the scan time of FC6A Series MicroSmart, program it with the COMRF instruction.

Regardless of the presence of the COMRF instruction, reading received data and writing send data for expanded
communication port is executed in END processing.

Note: This instruction cannot be used in interrupt programs. If this instruction is used in an interrupt program, a user
program execution error will occur.
For user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

Example: COMRF
The following example demonstrates a program to execute COMRF instructions among other instructions.

Before executing the RXD instruction, COMRF refreshes send and receive data of
COMRF
the expansion communication ports.

RXD S1 D1 D2
M0 3 100 M1 D498

BMOV(W) S1 N-W D1
M1 D0 100 D500

TXD S1 D1 D2
4 100 M0 D502

R
M1

COMRF After executing the TXD instruction, COMRF refreshes send and receive data of
the expansion communication ports.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 14-5

14: REFRESH INSTRUCTIONS

14-6 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

15: INTERRUPT CONTROL INSTRUCTIONS
Introduction
This chapter describes interrupt control instructions that prohibit and allow user interrupt operations (interrupt input, timer
interrupt).

DI (Disable Interrupt)
When input is on, interrupt inputs and timer interrupt assigned by source device S1 are disabled.
DI S1
**

EI (Enable Interrupt)
When input is on, interrupt inputs and timer interrupt assigned by source device S1 are enabled.
EI S1
**

Valid Devices
Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat
S1 (Source 1) Interrupt inputs and timer interrupt — — — — — — — X*1 —

*1 Group 1 through Group 6 or Timer Interrupt can be set.

Interrupt inputs I0 through I7 and timer interrupt selected in the Function Area Settings are normally enabled when the CPU starts. When the DI
instruction is executed, interrupt inputs and timer interrupt designated as source device S1 are disabled even if the interrupt condition is met in the
user program area subsequent to the DI instruction. When the EI instruction is executed, disabled interrupt inputs and timer interrupt designated as
source device S1 are enabled again in the user program area subsequent to the EI instruction. Different interrupts can be selected for the DI and EI
instructions to disable and enable interrupt inputs selectively. For Interrupt Input and Timer Interrupt, see Chapter 5 "Functions and Settings" -
"Interrupt Input" and "Timer Interrupt" in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s Manual".

Make sure that interrupt inputs and timer interrupt designated as source device S1 are selected in the Function Area Settings. Otherwise, when the
DI or EI instruction is executed, a user program execution error will result, turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the FC6A
Series MicroSmart.

The DI and EI instructions cannot be used in an interrupt program. If used, a user program execution error will result, turning on special internal
relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart. For details about the user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution
Errors" on page 3-10.

Special Internal Relays M8137-M8143, M8167, and M8144: Interrupt Status

Special internal relays M8137 through M8143, M8167, and M8144 are provided to indicate whether interrupt inputs and timer
interrupt are enabled or disabled.

Interrupt Interrupt Enabled Interrupt Disabled

Group 1 (I0/-) M8137 ON M8137 OFF
Group 2 (I2/I2) M8140 ON M8140 OFF
Group 3 (I3/I3) M8141 ON M8141 OFF
Group 4 (I5/I4) M8142 ON M8142 OFF
Group 5 (I6/I5) M8143 ON M8143 OFF
Group 6 (I7/-) M8167 ON M8167 OFF
Timer Interrupt M8144 ON M8144 OFF

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 15-1

15: INTERRUPT CONTROL INSTRUCTIONS

Programming WindLDR
In the DI (Disable Interrupt) or EI (Enable Interrupt) dialog box, select the check box on the left of Interrupt Groups 1 through 6
or Timer Interrupt to select source device S1. The example below selects interrupt groups 2, 3, and timer interrupt for the DI
instruction, and a 22 will be shown as source device S1.

The total of selected interrupt inputs and timer interrupt

DI S1 is shown as source device S1.
22
Interrupt S1 Value
Group 1 (I0/-) 0
Group 2 (I2/I2) 2
Group 3 (I3/I3) 4
Group 4 (I5/I4) 8
Group 5 (I6/I5) 32
Group 6 (I7/-) 64
Timer Interrupt 16

15-2 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 15: INTERRUPT CONTROL INSTRUCTIONS

Example: DI and EI
The following example demonstrates a program that will disable and enable interrupt inputs and timer interrupt selectively. For the
interrupt input and timer interrupt functions, see Chapter 5 "Functions and Settings" - "Interrupt Input" and "Timer Interrupt" in
the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s Manual". In this example, inputs I2 and I3 are designated as interrupt inputs
and timer interrupt is used with interrupt intervals of 100 ms.

MOV(W) S1 – D1 – REP M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay.

M8120 0 D8033
D8033 stores jump destination label number 0 for interrupt input I2.
MOV(W) S1 – D1 – REP
1 D8034 D8034 stores jump destination label number 1 for interrupt input I3.
D8036 stores jump destination label number 2 for timer interrupt.
MOV(W) S1 – D1 – REP
2 D8036
When input I10 is on, DI disables interrupt inputs I2, I3, and timer interrupt, then
DI S1
22 M8071, M8072, and M8144 turn off.
I10

EI S1 When input I11 is on and I10 is off, EI enables interrupt inputs I2 and I3, then M8071
I11 I10 6 and M8072 turn on.

EI S1 When input I12 is on and I10 is off, EI enables timer interrupt, then M8144 turns on.
I12 I10 16

END End of the main program.

LABEL When input I2 is on, program execution jumps to label 0.

0
M8125 is the in-operation output special internal relay.
ALT D1
ALT turns on or off the output Q2 internal memory.
M8125 Q2
IOREF immediately writes the output Q2 internal memory status to actual output Q2.
IOREF S1
M8125 Q2

LRET Program execution returns to the main program.

LABEL When input I3 is on, program execution jumps to label 1.

1

ALT D1 M8125 is the in-operation output special internal relay.

M8125 Q3 ALT turns on or off the output Q3 internal memory.

IOREF S1 IOREF immediately writes the output Q3 internal memory status to actual output Q3.
M8125 Q3

LRET Program execution returns to the main program.

LABEL Timer interrupt occurs every 100 ms, then program execution jumps to label 2.
2

ALT D1 M8125 is the in-operation output special internal relay.

M8125 Q4 ALT turns on or off the output Q4 internal memory.

IOREF S1 IOREF immediately writes the output Q4 internal memory status to actual output Q4.
M8125 Q4

LRET Program execution returns to the main program.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 15-3

15: INTERRUPT CONTROL INSTRUCTIONS

15-4 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

16: COORDINATE CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS
Introduction
This chapter describes the coordinate conversion Y
instructions that convert one data point to another
value using the linear relationship between the values
(X2, Y2)
of X and Y.
(X1, Y1)

X
(X0, Y0)

XYFS (XY Format Set)

When input is on, the format for XY conversion is set. The XY
XYFS(*) S1 X0 Y0 ..... Xn Yn coordinates define the linear relationship between X and Y.
* ***** ***** ***** *****
No. of XY Coordinates n
2 to 32 0 ≤ n ≤ 31

Valid Devices
Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat
S1 (Source 1) Format number — — — — — — — 0 to 7 —
X0 through Xn X value X X X X X X X 0 to 65,535 —
0 to 65,535
Y0 through Yn Y value X X X X X X X —
–32,768 to 32,767
For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.
When T (timer) or C (counter) is used as X0 through Xn or Y0 through Yn, the timer/counter current value (TC or CC) is displayed.

S1 (Format number)
Select a format number 0 through 7. A maximum of 8 formats for XY conversion can be set.

Xn (X value), Yn (Y value)
Enter values for the X and Y coordinates. Two different data ranges are available depending on the data type.

Data Type Word Integer

Xn (X value) 0 to 65,535 0 to 65,535
Yn (Y value) 0 to 65,535 –32,768 to 32,767

Y Y

65,535 32,767

Valid Coordinates
X
0 65,535

X –32,768
0 65,535

Valid Data Types

W (word) X When a bit device such as I (input), Q (output), M (internal relay), or R (shift register) is assigned as Xn or Yn, 16
I (integer) X points are used.
D (double word) — When a word device such as T (timer), C (counter), or D (data register) is assigned as Xn or Yn, 1 point is used.
L (long) —
F (float) —

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 16-1

16: COORDINATE CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS

Note: The XYFS instruction cannot be used in an interrupt program.

If used, a user program execution error will result, turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart. For
details about the user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

CVXTY (Convert X to Y)
When input is on, the X value assigned by device S2 is converted into the
CVXTY(*) S1 S2 D1 corresponding Y value according to the linear relationship defined in the XYFS
* ***** ***** instruction. Device S1 selects a format from a maximum of 8 XY conversion formats.
The conversion result is set to the device assigned by D1.

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) Format number — — — — — — — 0 to 7 —
S2 (Source 2) X value X X X X X X X 0 to 65,535 —
D1 (Destination 1) Destination to store results — X X X X X — —

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.
Internal relays M0 through M7997 and M10000 through M17497 can be designated as D1. Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1.
When T (timer) or C (counter) is used as S2, the timer/counter current value (TC or CC) is displayed. When T (timer) or C (counter) is used as D1,
the data is written in as a preset value (TP or CP) which can be 0 through 65,535.

S1 (Format number)

Select a format number 0 through 7 which have been set using the XYFS instruction. When an XYFS instruction with the corresponding format
number is not programmed, or when XYFS and CVXTY instructions of the same format number have different data type designations, a user
program execution error will result, turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart. For details about the
user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

S2 (X value)

Enter a value for the X coordinate to convert, within the range specified in the XYFS instruction.

D1 (Destination to store results)

The conversion result of the Y value is stored to the destination.

Data Type Word Integer

S2 (X value) 0 to 65,535 0 to 65,535
D1 (Y value) 0 to 65,535 –32,768 to 32,767

Y Y

65,535 32,767

Valid Coordinates
X
0 65,535

X –32,768
0 65,535

Valid Data Types

W (word) X When a bit device such as I (input), Q (output), M (internal relay), or R (shift register) is assigned as S2 or D1, 16
I (integer) X points are used.
D (double word) — When a word device such as T (timer), C (counter), or D (data register) is assigned as S2 or D1, 1 point is used.
L (long) —
F (float) —

Data Conversion Error

The data conversion error is ±0.5.

Note: The CVXTY instruction cannot be used in an interrupt program.

If used, a user program execution error will result, turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart. For
details about the user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

16-2 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 16: COORDINATE CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS

CVYTX (Convert Y to X)
When input is on, the Y value assigned by device S2 is converted into the
CVYTX(*) S1 S2 D1 corresponding X value according to the linear relationship defined in the XYFS
* ***** ***** instruction. Device S1 selects a format from a maximum of 8 XY conversion formats.
The conversion result is set to the device assigned by D1.

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) Format number — — — — — — — 0 to 7 —
0 to 65,535
S2 (Source 2) Y value X X X X X X X —
–32,768 to 32,767
D1 (Destination 1) Destination to store results — X X X X X — —

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.
Internal relays M0 through M7997 and M10000 through M17497 can be designated as D1. Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1.
When T (timer) or C (counter) is used as S2, the timer/counter current value (TC or CC) is displayed. When T (timer) or C (counter) is used as D1,
the data is written in as a preset value (TP or CP) which can be 0 through 65,535.

S1 (Format number)

Select a format number 0 through 7 which have been set using the XYFS instruction. When an XYFS instruction with the corresponding format
number is not programmed, or when XYFS and CVYTX instructions of the same format number have different data type designations, a user
program execution error will result, turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart. For details about the
user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.
S2 (Y value)

Enter a value for the Y coordinate to convert, within the range specified in the XYFS instruction. Two different data ranges are available depending
on the data type.

D1 (Destination to store results)

The conversion result of the X value is stored to the destination.

Data Type Word Integer

S2 (Y value) 0 to 65,535 –32,768 to 32,767
D1 (X value) 0 to 65,535 0 to 65,535

Y Y

65,535 32,767

Valid Coordinates
X
0 65,535

X –32,768
0 65,535

Valid Data Types

W (word) X When a bit device such as I (input), Q (output), M (internal relay), or R (shift register) is assigned as S2 or D1, 16
I (integer) X points are used.
D (double word) — When a word device such as T (timer), C (counter), or D (data register) is assigned as S2 or D1, 1 point (integer
L (long) — data) is used.
F (float) —

Data Conversion Error

The data conversion error is ±0.5.

Note: The CVYTX instruction cannot be used in an interrupt program.

If used, a user program execution error will result, turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart. For
details about the user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 16-3

16: COORDINATE CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS

Example: Linear Conversion

The following example demonstrates setting up two coordinate points to define the linear relationship between X and Y. The two
points are (X0, Y0) = (0, 0) and (X1, Y1) = (8,000, 4,000). Once these are set, there is an X to Y conversion, as well as a Y to X
conversion.

M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay.

XYFS(I) S1 X0 Y0 X1 Y1
At startup, XYFS specifies two points.
M8120 0 0 0 8000 4000
When input I0 is on, CVXTY converts the value in D10 and stores
CVXTY(I) S1 S2 D1 the result in D20.
I0 0 D10 D20
When input I1 is on, CVYTX converts the value in D11 and stores
CVYTX(I) S1 S2 S1 the result in D21.
I1 0 D11 D21

END

The graph shows the linear relationship that is defined by the two
points:
Y
(X1, Y1)
1
Y = −X
2
D11 (2,500) If the value in data register D10 is 2,000, the value assigned to
D20 is 1,000.

D20 (1,000) For Y to X conversion, the following equation is used:

X = 2Y
0
(X0, Y0) D10 D21 8,000 X If the value in data register D11 is 2,500, the value assigned to
(2,000) (5,000) D21 is 5,000.

16-4 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 16: COORDINATE CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS

Example: Overlapping Coordinates

In this example, the XYFS instruction sets up three coordinate points, which define two different linear relationships between X
and Y. The three points are: (X0, Y0) = (0, 100), (X1, Y1) = (100, 0), and (X2, Y2) = (300, 100). The two line segments define
overlapping coordinates for X. That is, for each value of Y within the designated range, there would be two X values assigned.

M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal

XYFS(I) S1 X0 Y0 X1 Y1 X2 Y2 relay.
M8120 0 0 100 100 0 300 100
At startup, XYFS specifies three points.
CVXTY(I) S1 S2 D1 CVXTY converts the current value in C10 and
I0 0 C10 D90
stores the result in D90.

CVYTX(I) S1 S2 S1 CVYTX converts the value in D95 and stores

I1 0 D95 D30 the result in D30.

END

(X0, Y0) (X2, Y2)

Y
(0, 100) (300, 100)
100

D90 (75)

D95 (40)
(X1, Y1)
(100, 0)

0
D30 100 C10 300 X
(60) (250)

The first line segment defines the following relationship for X to Y conversion:

Y = – X + 100

The second line segment defines another relationship for X to Y conversion:

1
Y = – X – 50
2
For X to Y conversion, each value of X has only one corresponding value for Y. If the current value of counter C10 is 250, the value assigned to D90
is 75.
For Y to X conversion, the XYFS instruction assigns two possible values of X for each value of Y. The relationship defined by the first two points has
priority in these cases. The line between points (X0, Y0) and (X1, Y1), that is, the line between (0, 100) and (100, 0), has priority in defining the
relationship for Y to X conversion (X = –Y + 100).

Therefore, if the value in data register D95 is 40, the value assigned to D30 is 60, not 180.

Exactly the same two line segments might also be defined by the XYFS instruction, except that the point (300, 100) could be assigned first, as (X0,
Y0), and the point (100, 0) could be defined next, as (X1, Y1). In this case, this linear relationship would have priority.

In this case, if the value in data register D95 is 40, the value assigned to D30 is 180, not 60.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 16-5

16: COORDINATE CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS

16-6 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

17: AVERAGE INSTRUCTIONS
Introduction
This chapter describes the average instructions that average the specified data.

AVRG (Average)
When input is on, sampling data assigned by device S1 is
AVRG(*) S1 S2 S3 D1 D2 processed according to sampling conditions assigned by devices
***** ***** ***** ***** ***** S2 and S3.
When sampling is complete, average, maximum, and minimum
values are stored to 3 consecutive devices starting with device
assigned by D1, then sampling completion output assigned by
device D2 is turned on.

Data Type W, I D, L, F
Average D1 D1·D1+1
Maximum value D1+1 D1+2·D1+3
Minimum value D1+2 D1+4·D1+5

The AVRG instruction is effective for data processing of analog input values. A maximum of eight AVRG instructions can be programmed in a user
program.

Valid Devices
Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat
S1 (Source 1) Sampling data X X X X X X X — —
S2 (Source 2) Sampling end input X X X X — — — — —
S3 (Source 3) Sampling cycles (scan times) X X X X X X X 0-65,535 —
D1 (Destination 1) First device address to store results — — — — — — X — —
D2 (Destination 2) Sampling completion output — X — — — — — —

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.
Internal relays M0 through M7997 and M10000 through M17497 can be designated as D2. Special internal relays cannot be designated as D2.
When T (timer) or C (counter) is used as S1 or S3, the timer/counter current value (TC or CC) is displayed.
When F (float) data is selected, only data registers can be designated as S1 and D1.
While input is on, the AVRG instruction is executed in each scan. When the quantity of sampling cycles (scan times) designated by device S3 is 1
through 65,535, sampling data designated by device S1 is processed in each scan. When the designated sampling cycles have been completed, the
average value of the sampling data is set to the device designated by D1 (data type W or I) or D1·D1+1 (data type D, L, or F). The maximum value
of the sampling data is set to the next device, D1+1 (data type W or I) or D1+2·D1+3 (data type D, L, or F). The minimum value of the sampling
data is set to the next device, D1+2 (data type W or I) or D1+4·D1+5 (data type D, L, or F). The sampling completion output designated by device
D2 is turned on.
When the quantity of sampling cycles designated by device S3 is 0, sampling is started when the input to the AVRG instruction is turned on, and
stopped when the sampling end input designated by device S2 is turned on. Then, the average, maximum, and minimum values are set to 3 devices
starting with device designated by D1.
When the sampling exceeds 65,535 cycles, the average, maximum, and minimum values at this point are set to 3 devices starting with device
designated by D1, and sampling continues.
When the sampling end input is turned on before the sampling cycles designated by device S3 have been completed, sampling is stopped and the
results at this point are set to 3 devices starting with device designated by D1.
The average value is calculated to units, rounding the fractions of one decimal place.
When the sampling end input is not used, designate an internal relay or another valid device as a dummy for source device S2.
When F (float) data is selected and S1 does not comply with the normal floating-point format, a user program execution error will result, turning on
special internal relay M8004 and ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart. When an error occurs, incorrect S1 data are skipped. Average, maximum,
and minimum values are calculated from correct S1 data, and set to 3 devices starting with the device designated by D1. For details about user
program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 17-1

17: AVERAGE INSTRUCTIONS

Valid Data Types

W (word) X When a bit device such as I (input), Q (output), M (internal relay), or R (shift register) is assigned as the source,
I (integer) X 16 points (word or integer data) or 32 points (double-word or long data) are used.
D (double word) X When a word device such as T (timer), C (counter), or D (data register) is assigned as the source, 1 point (word
L (long) X or integer data) or 2 points (double-word, long, or float data) are used.
F (float) X

Example: AVRG
The following example demonstrates a program that calculates the average values of data register D100 and store the result to
data register D200 every 500 scans.

AVRG(W) S1 S2 S3 D1 D2 M8125 is the in-operation output special internal relay.

M8125 D100 I10 500 D200 M100

When the sampling end input does not turn on

While sampling end input I10 is off, the average, maximum, and minimum values are calculated every 500 scans and stored to
data registers D200, D201, and D202, respectively. Sampling completion output M100 is set every 500 scans.

1st scan 2nd scan 500th scan 1st scan 2nd scan

Sampling Data D100 512 497 521 499 478

ON
In-operation Special IR M8125 OFF

ON
Sampling End Input I10 OFF

ON
Sampling Completion Output M100 OFF

Average Value D200 500

Maximum Value D201 530

Minimum Value D202 480

Values are set every 500 scans.

When the sampling end input turns on

When sampling end input I10 turns on, the average, maximum, and minimum values at this point are stored to data registers
D200, D201, and D202, respectively. Sampling completion output M100 is also set. When sampling end input I10 turns off,
sampling resumes starting at the first scan.

151st scan 152nd scan 153rd scan XXXth scan 1st scan

Sampling Data D100 489 510 509 504 493

ON
In-operation Special IR M8125 OFF

ON
Sampling End Input I10 OFF

ON
Sampling Completion Output M100 OFF

Average Value D200 502

Maximum Value D201 513

Minimum Value D202 485

Values are set when I10 is turned on.

17-2 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS
Introduction
This chapter describes the pulse output instructions that output pulses of a specified frequency from the pulse output ports.

PULS (Pulse Output)

The PULS instruction outputs pulses of the specified frequency from the pulse
PULS S1 S2 D1 output ports with a fixed duty cycle.

1 When the input is on, pulses are output with a fixed duty cycle according to the
***** ***** *****
control register settings specified by S1.

When the initialization input specified by S2 is turned on, the initial values
PULS S1 S2 D1 configured in the WindLDR PULS dialog box, on the Settings tab, are stored in
2 the control registers.
***** ***** *****
The pulse control information (output on/output complete/error) is stored in the
internal relays specified by D1 as the operation status.
PULS S1 S2 D1
3 ***** ***** *****

PULS S1 S2 D1

4 ***** ***** *****

Note: Configure multiple PULS (pulse output), PWM (pulse width modulation), RAMP (trapezoidal control), and ARAMP (RAMP with table)
instructions so that they do not share the same pulse output port.
However, the ZRN (zero return) instruction can be configured with the same pulse output port as the PULS (pulse output), PWM (pulse width
modulation), RAMP (trapezoidal control), and ARAMP (RAMP with table) instructions.

Notes:
• If a pulse output instruction is simultaneous executed with the same pulse output port, a user program execution will occur.
Error code 48 will be stored in D8006 and instructions that were executed after the initial instruction will be canceled.
• The PULS instruction cannot be used in an interrupt program. If used in an interrupt program, a user program execution error will occur.
Error code 18 will be stored in D8006 and instruction execution will be canceled.
• If a pulse output instruction is executed with the relay output type, a user program execution will occur.
Error code 19 is stored in D8006 and instruction execution is canceled.

• For details about the user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

Valid Devices
Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat
S1 (Source 1) Control register — — — — — — — —
S2 (Source 2) Initialization input X — X — — — — — —
D1 (Destination 1) Operation status — — — — — — — —

Special data registers cannot be designated as S1. Internal relays M0000 through M1277 can be designated as D1. Special internal relays cannot
be designated as D1.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 18-1

18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

Settings
■ Devices tab

2. 3. 4. 5.

1.

1. Select Mode
Selects the configuration mode. FC6A Standard Mode or FC5A (except FC5A-D12X1E) Compatible Mode can be
selected.
Select FC5A (except FC5A-D12X1E) Compatible Mode to use the FC5A Series MicroSmart PULS instruction specification.
When changing the PLC type from the FC5A/FC4A Series MicroSmart, FC5A (except FC5A-D12X1E) Compatible Mode is
automatically selected.
The lowest frequency that can be used with FC5A (except FC5A-D12X1E) Compatible Mode is 20 Hz*1.
*1 The lower limit value for the frequency that the FC5A Series MicroSmart can output is 10 Hz, but in compatibility mode this is 20 Hz.
Notes:
• The lowest frequency of pulses that can be output in FC5A (except FC5A-D12X1E) Compatible Mode is 20 Hz. A frequency lower than 20 Hz
cannot be output. If such a value is specified, the pulse frequency designation error will occur.
• The highest frequency of pulses that can be output with PULS3 in FC5A (except FC5A-D12X1E) Compatible Mode is 5 kHz. A frequency higher
than 5 kHz cannot be output. If such a value is specified, the pulse frequency error will occur.

The rest of this section is written under the assumption that FC6A Standard Mode has been selected.
Note: For details on the FC5A (except FC5A-D12X1E) Compatible Mode settings, refer to the PULS instruction in Chapter 15 "Pulse Output
Instructions" in the "FC5A Series MicroSmart Pentra User's Manual Advanced Volume".

2. Select instruction
This item selects which PULS instruction to use ("PULS1", "PULS2", "PULS3", or "PULS4").
The pulse output and the frequency that can be set are determined by the instruction and the CPU module type.

All-in-One Type

Instruction Pulse output Configurable Frequency

PULS1 Q0
15 Hz to 100 kHz (increments of 1 Hz)
PULS2 Q1
PULS3 Q2
15 Hz to 5 kHz (increments of 1 Hz)
PULS4 Q3

CAN J1939 All-in-One Type

Instruction Pulse output Configurable Frequency

PULS1 Q0
PULS2 Q2
15 Hz to 100 kHz (increments of 1 Hz)
PULS3 Q4
PULS4 Q6

18-2 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

3. S1 (source 1): Control register

S1 specifies the starting number for the data registers to use with PULS1, PULS2, PULS3, or PULS4 instructions.
Starting from the specified number, 8 consecutive 16-bit data registers are used.
The range of available data register numbers is D0000 to D7992 and D10000 to D55992.
The operation mode and pulse frequency settings differ by the CPU module type and the instruction.

Storage Setting
Function Reference
destination All-in-One Type CAN J1939 All-in-One Type
Output pulse PULS1, PULS2:
Starting number+0 frequency 15 to 100,000
PULS1 to PULS4:
(high word)*1 (increments of 1 Hz) "6. Output pulse frequency" on
15 to 100,000
Output pulse PULS3, PULS4: page 18-4
(increments of 1 Hz)
Starting number+1 frequency 15 to 5,000
(low word)*1 (increments of 1 Hz)
Preset value
Starting number+2
(high word)*1
1 to 100,000,000 pulses "8. Preset value" on page 18-4
Preset value
Starting number+3
(low word)*1
Current value
Starting number+4
(high word)*1
1 to 100,000,000 pulses "9. Current value" on page 18-4
Current value
Starting number+5
(low word)*1
Starting number+6 Error status 0 to 4 "10. Error status" on page 18-4
Starting number+7 Reserved

*1 The upper and lower data registers change according to the 32-bit data storage method specified.
For details, see "32-bit Data Storage" on page 3-9.

4. S2 (source 2): Initialization Input

S2 specifies the initialization input. When the initialization input is turned on, the initial values configured in the WindLDR PULS
dialog box, on the Settings tab, are stored in the control registers. An external input or an internal relay can be specified.
When the initialization input is on, the initial values are written to the data registers with each scan. (Even when the PULS
instruction is not executed (when not on), if the initialization input is turned on, the initial values are stored in the data
registers.) To only initialize the values one time, use the initialization input in combination with the SOTU (single output up)
instruction or the SOTD (single output down) instruction.

5. D1 (destination 1): Operation Status

D1 specifies the starting number of the internal relays that store the operation status.
Starting from the specified internal relay, 3 sequential internal relays are used.
The range of available internal relays is M0000 to M7995 and M10000 to M17495.

Storage
Function Setting
Destination
This relay turns on during pulse output.
Starting 0: Pulse output OFF This relay turns off when pulse output stops.
Pulse output ON
number+0 1: Pulse output ON This relay turns off when the specified number of pulses are output
and output ends.
Starting Pulse output 0: Pulse output not complete This relay turns on when pulse output is complete.
number+1 complete 1: Pulse output complete This relay turns off when pulse output starts.
Starting 0: None When pulse counting is enabled, this relay turns on when a pulse is
Overflow
number+2 1: An overflow has occurred output that exceeds the configured preset value.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 18-3

18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

■ Settings tab
This tab configures the operation of the PULS instruction.

6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

6. Output pulse frequency

Specifies the pulse frequency. The output frequency error is ±5%.
The setting differs by the CPU module type and the instruction.

Configurable Range
CPU Module Type Instruction
Setting Value Frequency
PULS1, PULS2 15 to 100,000 15 Hz to 100 kHz (increments of 1 Hz)
All-in-One Type
PULS3, PULS4 15 to 5,000 15 Hz to 5 kHz (increments of 1 Hz)
CAN J1939 All-in-One Type PULS1 to PULS4 15 to 100,000 15 Hz to 100 kHz (increments of 1 Hz)

7. Pulse counting
Enables or disables pulse counting.
If Enable pulse counting is specified, the number of pulses specified by the preset value (8) is output.
If Disable pulse counting is specified, pulses are continuously output while the PULS instruction input is on.

8. Preset value
When the setting for 7. Pulse counting is Enable pulse counting, this setting specifies the number of pulses to output.

9. Current value
Specifies the device (data register) that will store the number of pulses that were output.
The current value is updated when the PULS instruction is executed at each scan.

10. Error status

Outputs the error code that corresponds to the content of an error when there is an error in the settings. If a configuration error
occurs when the PULS instruction input changes from off to on, a user program execution error will occur and error code 20 will
be stored in D8006.

Error
Status Description
Code
0 Normal —
PULS1, PULS2: The pulse frequency was not set between 15 and 100,000.
Pulse frequency All-in-One Type
2 PULS3, PULS4: The pulse frequency was not set between 1 and 5,000.
designation error
CAN J1939 All-in-One Type PULS1 to PULS4: The pulse frequency was not set between 15 and 100,000.
Preset value
4 If Enable pulse counting is specified, the preset value was not set between 1 and 100,000,000.
designation error

18-4 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

Examples: PULS
PULS1 instruction (pulse counting enabled) timing chart

[PULS1 instruction, S1 is specified as D0200, D1 is specified as internal relay M0050]

PULS S1 S2 D1
1 D0200 M0000 M0050
PULS1 instruction
input

PULS1 instruction input

Output pulse D0200, D0201 f1 f2 f3

frequency

Preset value D0203, D0204 n1 n2 n3

n1 n2
f1 f2

Output pulse Q0

Pulse output ON M0050

Pulse output complete M0051

f1, f2, f3 = frequency

n1, n2, n3 = output pulse count

When the PULS1 instruction input changes from off to on, M0050 turns on and pulses with the frequency configured by D0200 and
D0201 are output. When the number of pulses configured by D202 and D203 are output, pulse output stops. If the value of D0200
and D0201 changes during pulse output, pulses are output with the frequency based on that value.
When the PULS1 instruction input changes from on to off, M0050 turns off and M0051 turns on at the same time.
The changes from the initialization input are not reflected while the PULS1 instruction input is on. If you wish to initialize the data
registers with the initialization input, turn the initialization input on after turning off the input.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 18-5

18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

PULS2 instruction (pulse counting disabled) timing chart

[PULS2 instruction, S1 is specified as D0100, D1 is specified as internal relay M0200]

PULS S1 S2 D1
2 D0100 M0000 M0200
PULS2 instruction
input

PULS2 instruction input

Output pulse D0101, D0100 f1 f2 f3

frequency
f1 f2

Output pulse Q0

Pulse output ON M0200

Pulse output M0201

complete
f1, f2, f3 = pulse frequency

When the PULS2 instruction input changes from off to on, M0200 turns on and pulses with the frequency configured by D0101 and
D0100 are output. If the value of D0101 and D0100 changes during pulse output, pulses are output with the frequency based on
that value.
When the PULS2 instruction input changes from on to off, M0200 turns off and M0201 turns on at the same time.
The changes from the initialization input are not reflected while the PULS2 instruction input is on. If you wish to initialize the data
registers with the initialization input, turn the initialization input on after turning off the input.

18-6 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

Sample program
This section describes an example program that outputs 5,000 pulses (each at 200 Hz) and then 60,000 pulses (each at 500 Hz)
from output Q0

Turn on initialization input (M0000)

M8120 M0000

MOV(D) S1 - D1 - REP
SOTU Store 500 (500 Hz) in frequency
500 D0000
M0101 (D0000, D0001)

MOV(D) S1 - D1 - REP
60000 D0002 60,000 is stored in the preset value
(D0002, D0003). Ladder (1)

S
M0001 Turn on M0001 to output next pulse

PULS S1 S2 D1
When the PULS1 instruction input (I0) turns on, a 200 Hz frequency
1 D0000 M0000 M0100 pulse is output, and after 5,000 pulses, pulse output complete
I0000 M0101
(M0101) turns on and pulse output stops.
Then ladder (1) is executed, and after the frequency and preset
value are changed, a 500 Hz pulse is output, and after 60,000 pulses,
pulse output complete (M0101) turns on and pulse output stops.

SOTU R Pulse output complete (M0101) turns off (pulse output not complete)
M0001 M0101

Settings

Function Device Address Setting Value Details

Output pulse frequency D0000, D0001 200 200 Hz
Pulse counting — 1 Enable pulse counting
Preset value D0002, D0003 60000 Preset value=60,000

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 18-7

18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

PWM (Variable Duty Cycle Pulse Output)

The PWM instruction outputs pulses of the specified frequency and duty cycle
PWM S1 S2 D1 from the pulse output ports.

1 When the input is on, pulses are output according to the control register settings
***** ***** *****
specified by S1.

The pulse control information (output on/output complete/error) is stored in the

PWM S1 S2 D1 internal relays specified by D1 as the operation status.
2 ***** ***** ***** When the initialization input specified by S2 is turned on, the initial values
configured in the WindLDR PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) dialog box, on the
Settings tab, are stored in the control registers.
PWM S1 S2 D1
3 ***** ***** *****

PWM S1 S2 D1

4 ***** ***** *****

Notes:
• If a pulse output instruction is simultaneous executed with the same pulse output port, a user program execution will occur.
Error code 48 will be stored in D8006 and instructions that were executed after the initial instruction will be canceled.

• The PWM instruction cannot be used in an interrupt program. If used in an interrupt program, a user program execution error will occur.
Error code 18 will be stored in D8006 and instruction execution will be canceled.

• If a pulse output instruction is executed with the relay output type, a user program execution will occur.
Error code 19 is stored in D8006 and instruction execution is canceled.

• For details about the user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

Valid Devices
Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat
S1 (Source 1) Control register — — — — — — — —
S2 (Source 2) Initialization input X — X — — — — — —
D1 (Destination 1) Operation status — — — — — — — —

Special data registers cannot be designated as S1. Internal relays M0000 through M1277 can be designated as D1. Special internal relays cannot
be designated as D1.

18-8 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

Settings
■ Devices tab

2. 3. 4. 5.

1.

1. Select Mode
Selects the configuration mode. FC6A Standard Mode, FC4A Compatible Mode, FC5A (except FC5A-D12X1E)
Compatible Mode, or FC5A-D12X1E Compatible Mode can be selected.
To use the PWM instruction with the FC4A Series MicroSmart, the FC5A Series MicroSmart, or the FC5A-D12 PWM instruction
specification, select one of the FC compatibility modes. When changing the PLC type from the FC4A Series MicroSmart, FC4A
Compatible Mode is automatically selected. When changing the PLC type from the FC5A or FC5A-D12, FC5A (except FC5A-
D12X1E) Compatible Mode or FC5A-D12X1E Compatible Mode is automatically selected.
The frequency that can be specified in FC compatibility mode is an approximate value of the FC4A, FC5A, and FC5A-D12 PWM
instruction frequencies.
Note: The pulse frequencies that can be output in FC compatibility mode are as follows.

FC5A (except FC5A-D12X1E)

Operation Mode FC4A Compatible Mode FC5A-D12X1E Compatible Mode
Compatible Mode
Operation mode 0 15 Hz (fixed) 15 Hz (fixed) 15 Hz (fixed)
Operation mode 1 27 Hz (fixed) 46 Hz (fixed) 61 Hz (fixed)
Operation mode 2 218 Hz (fixed) 366 Hz (fixed) 488 Hz (fixed)

The rest of this section is written under the assumption that FC6A Standard Mode has been selected.
Notes:
• For details on the FC4A Compatible Mode settings, refer to the PWM instruction in Chapter 2 "Instructions" in the "FC4A Series MicroSmart
Pentra User's Manual".
• For details on the settings in FC5A (except FC5A-D12X1E) Compatible Mode and FC5A-D12X1E Compatible Mode, refer to the PWM
instruction in Chapter 13 "Pulse Instructions" in the FC5A Series MicroSmart Pentra User's Manual Advanced Volume.

2. Select instruction
This item selects which PWM instruction to use ("PWM1", "PWM2", "PWM3", or "PWM4").
The pulse output that can be set is determined by the instruction and the CPU module type.

All-in-One Type

Configurable Range
Instruction Pulse Output
Frequency Duty Cycle
PWM1 Q0
PWM2 Q1
15 Hz to 5 kHz (increments of 1 Hz) 0.1 to 100.0 (increments of 0.1%)
PWM3 Q2
PWM4 Q3

CAN J1939 All-in-One Type

Configurable Range
Instruction Pulse Output
Frequency Duty Cycle
PWM1 Q0
PWM2 Q2
15 Hz to 5 kHz (increments of 1 Hz) 0.1 to 100.0 (increments of 0.1%)
PWM3 Q4
PWM4 Q6

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 18-9

18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

3. S1 (source 1): Control register

S1 specifies the starting number for the data registers to use with PWM1, PWM2, PWM3, or PWM4 instructions.
Starting from the specified number, 8 consecutive 16-bit data registers are used.
The range of available data register numbers is D0000 to D7992 and D10000 to D55992.

Storage
Function Setting Reference
Destination
Starting number+0 Output pulse frequency 15 to 5,000 (increments of 1 Hz) "6. Output pulse frequency" on page 18-11
Starting number+1 Pulse duty cycle (ON ratio) 1 to 100% "7. Pulse width ratio" on page 18-11
Starting number+2 Preset value (high word)*1
1 to 100,000,000 pulses "9. Preset value" on page 18-11
Starting number+3 Preset value (low word)*1
*1
Starting number+4 Current value (high word)
1 to 100,000,000 pulses "10. Current value" on page 18-11
Starting number+5 Current value (low word)*1
Starting number+6 Error status 0 to 4 "11. Error status" on page 18-11
Starting number+7 Reserved

*1 The upper and lower data registers change according to the 32-bit data storage method specified.
For details, see "32-bit Data Storage" on page 3-9.

4. S2 (source 2): Initialization Input

S2 specifies the initialization input. When the initialization input S2 is turned on, the initial values configured in the WindLDR
PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) dialog box, on the Settings tab, are stored in the control registers. An external input or an
internal relay can be specified.
When the initialization input is on, the initial values are written to the data registers with each scan. To only initialize the values
one time, use the initialization input in combination with the SOTU (single output up) instruction or the SOTD (single output
down) instruction.

5. D1 (destination 1): Operation Status

D1 specifies the starting number of the internal relays to use with PWM instructions.
Starting from the specified internal relay, 3 sequential internal relays are used.
The range of available internal relay numbers is M0000 to M7995 and M10000 to M17495.

Storage Destination Function Setting

This relay turns on during pulse output.
0: Pulse output OFF This relay turns off when pulse output stops.
Starting number+0 Pulse output ON
1: Pulse output ON This relay turns off when the specified number of pulses
are output and output ends.
Pulse output 0: Pulse output not complete This relay turns on when pulse output is complete.
Starting number+1
complete 1: Pulse output complete This relay turns off when pulse output stops.
0: None When pulse counting is enabled, this relay turns on when
Starting number+2 Overflow
1: An overflow has occurred a pulse is output that exceeds the configured preset value.

18-10 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

■ Settings tab

6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.

6. Output pulse frequency

Specifies the frequency of the pulses to output.
The frequency is specified between 15 Hz and 5 kHz in 1 Hz increments.
The pulse frequency error is within ±5%.

7. Pulse width ratio

This setting specifies the ON ratio (duty cycle) for the pulse frequency to output.
The pulse width ratio is specified between 0.1% and 100.0% in 0.1% increments.

8. Pulse counting
Enables or disables pulse counting.
If Enable pulse counting is specified, the number of pulses specified by the preset value (9) is output.
If Disable pulse counting is specified, pulses are continuously output while the PULS instruction input is on.

9. Preset value
When the setting for 8. Pulse counting is Enable pulse counting, this setting specifies the number of pulses to output.

10. Current value

Specifies the device (data register) that will store the number of pulses that were output.
The current value is updated when the PWM instruction is executed at each scan.

11. Error status

Outputs the error code that corresponds to the content of an error when there is an error in the settings. If a configuration error
occurs when the PWM instruction input changes from off to on, a user program execution error will occur and error code 20 will
be stored in D8006.

Error Code Status Description

0 Normal —
1 Output frequency designation error The pulse frequency was not set between 15 and 5,000.
2 Pulse width ratio designation error The pulse width ratio was not set between 1 and 1,000.
If Enable pulse counting is specified, the preset value was not set between
4 Preset value designation error
1 and 100,000,000.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 18-11

18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

Examples: PWM
PWM1 instruction (pulse counting enabled) timing chart

[PWM1 instruction, S1 is specified as D200, D1 is specified as internal relay M0050]

PWM S1 S2 D1
1 D0200 M0000 M0050
PWM1 instruction
input

PWM1 instruction input

Pulse width ratio D0201 w1 w2 w3

Preset value D0202, D0203 n1 n2 n3

n1 n2

w1 w2

Output pulse Q0

Pulse output ON M0050

Pulse output complete M0051

w1, w2, w3 = pulse width ratio

n1, n2, n3 = output pulse count

When the PWM1 instruction input changes from off to on, M0050 turns on and pulses with the width ratio configured by D0201 are
output. When the number of pulses configured by D0202 and D0203 are output, pulse output stops. If the value of D0201 changes
during pulse output, pulses are output with the width ratio based on that value.
When the PWM1 instruction input changes from on to off, M0050 turns off and M0051 turns on at the same time.
The changes from the initialization input are not reflected while the PWM1 instruction input is on. If you wish to initialize the data
registers with the initialization input, turn the initialization input on after turning off the input.

18-12 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

PWM2 instruction (pulse counting disabled) timing chart

[PWM2 instruction, S1 is specified as D0100, D1 is specified as internal relay M0200]

PWM S1 S2 D1
2 D0100 M0000 M0200
PWM2 instruction
input

PWM2 instruction input

Pulse width ratio D0101 w1 w2 w3

w1 w2

Output pulse Q15

Pulse output ON M0200

Pulse output M0201

complete
w1, w2, w3 = pulse width ratio

When the PWM2 instruction input changes from off to on, M0200 turns on and pulses with the width ratio configured by D0101 are
output. If the value of D0101 changes during pulse output, pulses are output with the width ratio based on that value.
When the PWM2 instruction input changes from on to off, M0200 turns off and M0201 turns on at the same time.
The changes from the initialization input are not reflected while the PWM2 instruction input is on. If you wish to initialize the data
registers with the initialization input, turn the initialization input on after turning off the input.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 18-13

18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

Sample program
This section describes an example program that outputs a pulse with the pulse width ratio of 30% when I0 is off, and a pulse with
the pulse width ratio of 60% when I0 is on.

Turn on initialization input (M0000)

M8120 M0000

MOV(W) S1 - D1 - REP
Set pulse width ratio (D0001) to 30 (30% ON)
300 D0001
I0000

MOV(W) S1 - D1 - REP
Set pulse width ratio (D0001) to 60 (60% ON)
600 D0001
I0000

PWM S1 S2 D1 When PWM1 instruction input (I0001) turns on, start output
of a pulse with the pulse width ratio of 30% or 60%
1 D0001 M0000 M0100
I0001

Settings

Function Device address Setting value Details

Output pulse frequency D0000 50 50 Hz
Pulse width ratio D0001 300 30%
Pulse counting — Disable pulse counting —
Preset value D0002, D0003 — —

18-14 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

RAMP (Trapezoidal Control)

The RAMP instruction outputs pulses with a frequency change function.
RAMP S1 S2 D1 When the input is on, pulses of the initial pulse frequency specified by S1 are
1 output, and then the pulse frequency is increased by a fixed ratio until it reaches
***** ***** *****
the steady pulse frequency.

After steady pulse output at the steady pulse frequency, the pulse frequency is
RAMP S1 S2 D1 decreased before the pulse count reaches the preset value specified by S1, and
2 then pulse output stops when the preset value is reached.
***** ***** *****

RAMP S1 S2 D1

3 ***** ***** *****

RAMP S1 S2 D1

4 ***** ***** *****

Frequency Frequency
increase ratio decrease ratio
Frequency increase and
10 ms decrease ratios are the same 10 ms
Steady pulse
frequency

Initial pulse
frequency

Frequency increase time Frequency decrease time

Frequency increase and area = Preset value
decrease times are the same

When the initialization input specified by S2 is turned on, the initial values configured in the WindLDR RAMP (Trapezoidal
Control) dialog box, on the Settings tab, are stored in the control registers.
The pulse control information (output on/output complete/error) is stored in the internal relays specified by D1 as the operation
status.
Notes:
• If a pulse output instruction is simultaneous executed with the same pulse output port, a user program execution will occur.
Error code 48 will be stored in D8006 and instructions that were executed after the initial instruction will be canceled.

• The PULS instruction cannot be used in an interrupt program. If used in an interrupt program, a user program execution error will occur.
Error code 18 will be stored in D8006 and instruction execution will be canceled.

• If a pulse output instruction is executed with the relay output type, a user program execution will occur.
Error code 19 is stored in D8006 and instruction execution is canceled.

• For details about the user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

Valid Devices
Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat
S1 (Source 1) Control register — — — — — — — —
S2 (Source 2) Initialization input X — X — — — — — —
D1 (Destination 1) Operation status — — — — — — — —

Special data registers cannot be designated as S1. Internal relays M0000 through M1277 can be designated as D1. Special internal relays cannot
be designated as D1.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 18-15

18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

Settings
■ Devices tab

2. 3. 4. 5.

1.

1. Select Mode
Selects the configuration mode. FC6A Standard Mode or FC5A (except FC5A-D12X1E) Compatible Mode can be
selected.
Select FC5A (except FC5A-D12X1E) Compatible Mode to use the FC5A Series MicroSmart PULS instruction specification.
When changing the PLC type from the FC5A/FC4A Series MicroSmart, FC5A (except FC5A-D12X1E) Compatible Mode is
automatically selected.
The lowest frequency that can be used with FC5A (except FC5A-D12X1E) Compatible Mode is 20 Hz*1.
*1 The lower limit value for the frequency that the FC5A Series MicroSmart can output is 10 Hz, but in compatibility mode this is 20 Hz.
Notes:
• The lowest frequency of pulses that can be output in FC5A (except FC5A-D12X1E) Compatible Mode is 20 Hz. A frequency lower than 20 Hz
cannot be output. If such a value is specified, the pulse frequency designation error will occur.
• The highest frequency of pulses that can be output with RAMP3 in FC5A (except FC5A-D12X1E) Compatible Mode is 5 kHz. A frequency
higher than 5 kHz cannot be output. If such a value is specified, the pulse frequency error will occur.

The rest of this section is written under the assumption that FC6A Standard Mode has been selected.
Note: For details on the FC5A (except FC5A-D12X1E) Compatible Mode settings, refer to the RAMP3 instruction in Chapter 15 "Pulse Output
Instructions" in the "FC5A Series MicroSmart Pentra User's Manual Advanced Volume".

2. Select instruction
This item selects which RAMP instruction to use ("RAMP1", "RAMP2", "RAMP3" or "RAMP4").
The pulse output port and the reversible control mode and frequency that can be set differ by the instruction and CPU module
type.
For limitations based on the combination of instruction, reversible control mode, and the pulse output mode, see "9. Reversible
control enable" on page 18-18.

18-16 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

3. S1 (source 1): Control register

S1 specifies the starting number of the data registers to use with RAMP1, RAMP2, RAMP3 or RAMP4 instructions.
Starting from the specified number, 12 consecutive 16-bit data registers are used.
The range of available data register numbers is D0000 to D7988 and D10000 to D55988.
Setting
Storage
Function CAN J1939 All-in- Reference
Destination All-in-One Type
One Type
Steady pulse frequency RAMP1, RAMP2:
Starting number+0
(high word)*1 15 to 100,000
RAMP1 to RAMP4:
(increments of 1 Hz) "6. Steady pulse
15 to 100,000
Steady pulse frequency RAMP3, RAMP4: frequency" on page 18-18
Starting number+1 (increments of 1 Hz)
(low word)*1 15 to 5,000
(increments of 1 Hz)
Initial pulse frequency RAMP1, RAMP2:
Starting number+2
(high word)*1 15 to 100,000
RAMP1 to RAMP4:
(increments of 1 Hz) "7. Initial pulse frequency"
15 to 100,000
Initial pulse frequency RAMP3, RAMP4: on page 18-18
Starting number+3 (increments of 1 Hz)
(low word)*1 15 to 5,000
(increments of 1 Hz)
"8. Frequency change
Starting number+4 Frequency change time 10 to 10,000 ms
time" on page 18-18
0: Forward "10. Control direction" on
Starting number+5 Control direction
1: Reverse page 18-19
Starting number+6 Preset value (high word)*1 When specify absolute position mode is disabled:
1 to 100,000,000 pulses "12. Preset value" on page
Starting number+7 Preset value (low word)*1 When specify absolute position mode is enabled: 18-19
-2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 pulses
Starting number+8 Current value (high word)*1 "13. Current value" on
1 to 100,000,000 pulses*2
Starting number+9 Current value (low word)*1 page 18-19
"14. Error status" on page
Starting number+10 Error status 0 to 4
18-20
Starting number+11 Reserved
*1 The upper and lower data registers change according to the 32-bit data storage method specified.
For details, see "32-bit Data Storage" on page 3-9.
*2 Stores the number of pulses that were output, regardless of whether specify absolute position mode is enabled or disabled. For details on
specify absolute position mode, see "ABS (Set Absolute Position)" on page 18-59.

4. S2 (source 2): Initialization Input

S2 specifies the initialization input.
When the initialization input S2 is turned on, the initial values configured in the WindLDR RAMP (Ramp Pulse Output) dialog
box, on the Settings tab, are stored in the control registers.
An external input or an internal relay can be specified.
When the initialization input is on, the initial values are written to the data registers with each scan. To only initialize the values
one time, use the initialization input in combination with the SOTU (single output up) instruction or the SOTD (single output
down) instruction.

5. D1 (destination 1): Operation Status

D1 specifies the starting number of the internal relays to use with the RAMP instructions. Starting from the specified internal relay,
4 sequential internal relays are used. The range of available internal relay numbers is M0000 to M7994 and M10000 to M17494.
Storage
Function Setting
Destination
This relay turns on during pulse output.
Starting Pulse output 0: Pulse output OFF This relay turns off when pulse output stops.
number+0 ON 1: Pulse output ON This relay turns off when the specified number of pulses are output
and output ends.
Starting Pulse output 0: Pulse output not complete This relay turns on when pulse output is complete.
number+1 complete 1: Pulse output complete This relay turns off when pulse output starts.
Starting Pulse output 0: Steady pulse output This relay turns off when the pulse output status is steady.
number+2 status 1: Changing output pulse frequency This relay turns on when the pulse output is changing.
When pulse counting is enabled, this relay turns on when a pulse is
output that exceeds the configured preset value. Pulse output
Starting 0: None continues even if an the overflow occurs during steady output or
Overflow
number+3 1: An overflow has occurred while the pulse frequency is changing.
However, pulse counting is suspended at the point when the
overflow occurred.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 18-17

18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

■ Settings tab

6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.

6. Steady pulse frequency

This setting specifies the steady pulse frequency after the pulse frequency increases. The output frequency error is ±5%.
The corresponding instruction and frequency differ by the CPU module type.

Configurable Range
CPU Module Type Instruction
Setting Value Frequency
RAMP1, RAMP2 15 to 100,000 15 Hz to 100 kHz (increments of 1 Hz)
All-in-One Type
RAMP3, RAMP4 15 to 50,000 15 Hz to 5 kHz (increments of 1 Hz)
CAN J1939 All-in-One Type RAMP1 to RAMP4 15 to 100,000 15 Hz to 100 kHz (increments of 1 Hz)

7. Initial pulse frequency

This setting specifies the frequency when pulse output starts. The output frequency error is ±5%.
The corresponding instruction and frequency differ by the CPU module type.

Configurable Range
CPU Module Type Instruction
Setting Value Frequency
RAMP1, RAMP2 15 to 100,000 15 Hz to 100 kHz (increments of 1 Hz)
All-in-One Type
RAMP3, RAMP4 15 to 50,000 15 Hz to 5 kHz (increments of 1 Hz)
CAN J1939 All-in-One Type RAMP1 to RAMP4 15 to 100,000 15 Hz to 100 kHz (increments of 1 Hz)

8. Frequency change time

This setting specifies the time to increase and decrease the pulse frequency.
Set the time between 10 and 10,000 ms in increments of 10 ms. The first digit of the setting is ignored. For example, if 144 is
entered, the set value is 140 ms.

9. Reversible control enable

This setting enables or disables reversible control and selects the reversible control method from the following reversible control
modes. There are two modes for the pulse output mode: single-pulse and dual-pulse. They can be combined with reversible
control as follows. (This is an example when RAMP1 is used with the All-in-One Type.)

Reversible Control Enable Operation Pattern

Select this option when using pulse output in a single
Reversible control disabled Q0
direction. Pulse A and pulse B can be used independently.

Reversible control Pulse A is used as pulse output. Pulse B on/off is used as Q0

Single-pulse output reversible control.
Q2

Reversible control Pulse A is used as forward pulse (CW) output. Q0

Dual-pulse output Pulse B is used as reverse pulse (CCW) output.
Q1

18-18 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

The ports used on the FC6A Series MicroSmart vary based on the instruction used, the combination of the pulse output mode
and reversible control, and the model used.

Port Used
All-in-One Type CAN J1939 All-in-One Type
Instruction Operating Condition
Pulse Output Reversible Pulse Output Reversible
Port Control Port Port Control Port
Reversible control disabled Q0 — Q0 —
RAMP1 Reversible control (single-pulse output) Q0 Q2*1 Q0 Q1
Reversible control (dual-pulse output) Q0, Q1*2 — Q0, Q1 —
Reversible control disabled Q1 — Q2 —
RAMP2 Reversible control (single-pulse output) Q1 Q3*1 Q2 Q3
Reversible control (dual-pulse output) — — Q2, Q3 —
Reversible control disabled Q2 — Q4 —
RAMP3 Reversible control (single-pulse output) — — Q4 Q5
Reversible control (dual-pulse output) — — Q4, Q5 —
Reversible control disabled Q3 — Q6 —
RAMP4 Reversible control (single-pulse output) — — Q6 Q7
Reversible control (dual-pulse output) — — Q6, Q7 —

*1 When using single-pulse output mode with the All-in-One Type, Q2 or Q3 will be used, so an instruction that uses the same pulse output port
can no longer be used.
*2 When using dual-pulse output mode with the All-in-One Type, Q1 will be used, so an instruction that uses the same pulse output port can no
longer be used.

10. Control direction

When reversible control is enabled, store 0 in this data register for forward operation and store 1 in this data register for reverse
operation.
This is ignored when specify absolute position mode is Enabled. If the absolute position counter value subtracted from the
target position is positive, Forward is automatically selected, and pulses are output. If negative, Reverse is automatically
selected, and pulses are output.

11. Absolute Position Mode

When the target position is specified with preset count (12), pulses are output by automatically calculating the number of pulses
and direction from the difference between the current position stored in the absolute position counter (D8240 to D8247) and the
target position.

Specify Absolute
Overview
Position
The RAMP instruction will be executed by specifying Control direction and Preset value.
Disabled
The number of pulses specified by Preset value is output.
The RAMP instruction will be executed by specifying the target absolute position (target position) in Preset value.
The instruction will be executed by calculating the number of pulses to output and the direction from the absolute
Enabled
position managed by the absolute position counter and the target position specified by Preset value.
The Control direction setting is ignored.

Notes:
• If Reversible control disabled is selected for reversible control enable, specify absolute position mode is disabled.
• If the corresponding absolute position counter initialized flag in D8239 (absolute position control status) is 0 (not initialized), a user program
execution error will occur even if the instruction is executed with specify absolute position mode set to Enabled. After starting operation of
the ladder program, execute the ABS instruction that corresponds to the applicable output port one time.

12. Preset value

If specify absolute position mode is Disabled, set the total number of pulses to output between 1 and 100,000,000.
If specify absolute position mode is Enabled, specify the absolute position. The number of pulses will be output in the amount
of the absolute value of the value that is the result of subtracting the absolute position counter value from the absolute position.

13. Current value

Regardless of whether specify absolute position mode is enabled or disabled, the number of pulses output from the pulse output
port is stored in the data registers.
The current value is updated when the RAMP instruction is executed at each scan.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 18-19

18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

14. Error status

If a configuration error occurs when the RAMP instruction input changes from off to on, M8004 (user program execution error)
is turned on and this register is set to the error code.

Error Code Description Details

0 Normal —
RAMP1, The pulse frequency was not set between
RAMP2 15 and 100,000.
All-in-One Type
Initial pulse frequency RAMP3, The pulse frequency was not set between
2
designation error RAMP4 15 and 5,000.
RAMP1 to The pulse frequency was not set between
CAN J1939 All-in-One Type
RAMP4 15 and 100,000.
3 Preset value designation error The preset value was not set between 1 to 100,000,000.
RAMP1, The pulse frequency was not set between
RAMP2 15 and 100,000.
All-in-One Type
Steady pulse frequency RAMP3, The pulse frequency was not set between
4
designation error RAMP4 15 and 5,000.
RAMP1 to The pulse frequency was not set between
CAN J1939 All-in-One Type
RAMP4 15 and 100,000.
Frequency change time
5 The frequency change time was not set between 10 and 10,000.
designation error
Control direction designation
7 The control direction was not set to 0 or 1.
error
8 Exceeded pulse count error The number of frequency change pulses exceed the total number of output pulses.*1
The initial pulse frequency was set to the same frequency as the steady pulse frequency or it was set to a value larger than the
9
steady pulse frequency.*2

*1 The number of pulses in the frequency change region calculated by the initial pulse frequency, steady pulse frequency, and frequency change
time has exceeded the total number of output pulses. Adjust the settings by decreasing the steady or initial pulse frequency or by shortening
the frequency change time.
*2 Set the initial pulse frequency so that it is lower than the steady pulse frequency.

18-20 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

RAMP1 instruction (reversible control disabled) timing chart

RAMP1 instruction, S1 is specified as D0200, D1 is specified as internal relay M0050

RAMP S1 S2 D1
1 D0200 M0000 M0050
PAMP instruction
input

RAMP instruction input

Steady pulse
frequency
Initial pulse
Pulse frequency Q0 Frequency Frequency frequency
change time change time
Pulse output ON M0050

Pulse output
complete M0051

Pulse output M0052

status
When the RAMP instruction input is on, pulses are output according to the settings configured by the control registers. M0050
turns on during pulse output. M0052 turns on or off while increasing or decreasing the pulse frequency. Pulses are output
according to the frequency change time, until they reach the steady pulse frequency (from the initial pulse frequency). When the
frequency change time is specified as 100, the steady pulse frequency is reached in 100 ms by increasing or decreasing the
frequency every 10 ms. Pulse output stops when the pulses configured by the preset value are output. (The number of pulses is
also counted while changing the frequency.) At this time, M0050 turns off and M0051 turns on.
If the RAMP instruction input turns off during pulse output, pulse output is canceled. If the RAMP instruction input turns on again,
the pulse count is reset and pulse counting starts. Even if the contents of the control registers are changed during pulse output,
the change is not reflected in the pulse output operation. The changed content is reflected the next time the RAMP instruction is
executed.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 18-21

18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

RAMP1 instruction (reversible control enabled, single-pulse output mode) timing chart

RAMP1 instruction, S1 is specified as D0200, D1 is specified as internal relay M0050

RAMP S1 S2 D1
1 D0200 M0000 M0050
RAMP instruction
input

RAMP instruction input

Control direction D0203 0 (Forward) 1 (Reverse)

Pulse frequency Q0

Reversible control
signal Q2

Pulse output ON M0050

Pulse output complete M0051

Pulse output status M0052

When the RAMP instruction input is on, pulses are output according to the settings configured by the control registers. The
reversible control signal is output from Q2. When pulse output starts, M0050 turns on. M0052 turns on while the pulse frequency
is increasing or decreasing. Pulses are output so that the frequency reaches the steady pulse frequency from the initial pulse
frequency in the frequency change time. When the frequency change time is specified as 100, the steady pulse frequency is
reached in 100 ms by increasing or decreasing the frequency every 10 ms.
Pulse output stops when the pulses configured by the preset value are output. (The number of pulses is also counted while
changing the frequency.) At this time, M0050 turns off and M0051 turns on.
If the RAMP instruction input turns off during pulse output, pulse output is canceled. If this input turns on again, the operation
starts from the beginning. Even if the contents of the data registers are changed during pulse output, the change is not reflected
in the pulse output operation. The changed content is reflected the next time the RAMP instruction is started.

18-22 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

RAMP1 instruction (reversible control enabled, dual-pulse output mode) timing chart

RAMP1 instruction, S1 is specified as D0200, D1 is specified as internal relay M0050

RAMP S1 S2 D1
1 D0200 M0000 M0050
RAMP instruction
input

RAMP instruction input

Forward pulse Q0

Reverse pulse Q1

Control direction D0203 0 (Forward) 1 (Reverse)

Pulse output ON M0050

Pulse output M0051

complete

Pulse output status M0052

When the RAMP instruction input changes from off to on, pulses are output from Q0 or Q1 according to the settings configured by
the control registers.
When pulse output starts, M0050 turns on. M0052 turns on while the pulse frequency is increasing or decreasing.
Pulses are output so that the frequency reaches the steady pulse frequency from the initial pulse frequency in the frequency
change time. When the frequency change time is specified as 100, the steady pulse frequency is reached in 100 ms by increasing
or decreasing the frequency every 10 ms.
Pulse output stops when the pulses configured by the preset value are output. (The number of pulses is also counted while
changing the frequency.) At this time, M0050 turns off and M0051 turns on.
If the RAMP instruction input turns off during pulse output, pulse output is canceled. If this input turns on again, the operation
starts from the beginning. Even if the contents of the data registers are changed during pulse output, the change is not reflected
in the pulse output operation. The changed content is reflected the next time the RAMP instruction is started.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 18-23

18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

Example:

To output 48,000 pulses with the frequency change function (reversible control disabled) from Q0

Turn on initialization input (M0000)

M8120 M0000

RAMP S1 S2 D1 When the RAMP instruction input (I0) turns on, pulse output
starts
1 D0000 M0000 M0100
I0000

Setting

Function Device Address Setting Value Details

Steady pulse frequency D0000, D0001 600 6,000 Hz
Initial pulse frequency D0002, D0003 30 300 Hz
Frequency change time D0004 2000 2,000 ms
Reversible control enable — Disable —
Control direction D0005 — —
Absolute Position Mode — — —
Preset value D0006, D0007 48000 Preset value=48,000

18-24 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

To output 100,000 pulses with the frequency change function (reversible control by single-pulse output) from Q0

When the RAMP instruction input (I0) changes from off to on, pulse output starts. When I1 is off, the reversible control signal (Q2)
turns off (forward).
When I1 is on, the reversible control signal (Q2) turns on (reverse).

Turn on initialization input (M0000)

M8120 M0000

RAMP S1 S2 D1 When the RAMP instruction input (I0) turns on, pulse output
starts
1 D0000 M0000 M0100
I0000

MOV(W) S1 - D1 - REP
When I1 is off, store 0 (forward) in control direction (D0003)
0 D0003
I0001

MOV(W) S1 - D1 - REP
When I1 is on, store 1 (reverse) in control direction (D0003)
1 D0003
I0001

Setting

Function Device Address Setting Value Details

Steady pulse frequency D0000, D0001 1000 10 kHz
Initial pulse frequency D0002, D0003 50 500 Hz
Frequency change time D0004 2000 2,000 ms
Reversible control enable — Single-pulse output —
Control direction D0005 Forward Forward=0
Absolute Position Mode — Disable —
Preset value D0006, D0007 100000 Preset value=100,000

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 18-25

18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

To output 1,000,000 pulses with the frequency change function (reversible control by dual-pulse output)

When the RAMP instruction input (I0) changes from off to on, pulse output starts. For forward when I1 is off, pulses (CW) are
output from Q0.
For reverse when I1 is on, pulses (CCW) are output from Q1.

Turn on initialization input (M0000)

M8120 M0000

RAMP S1 S2 D1
When the RAMP instruction input (I0) turns on, pulse output
1 D0000 M0000 M0100 starts
I0000

MOV(W) S1 - D1 - REP
When I1 is off, store 0 (forward) in control direction
0 D0003 (D0003), and output pulses from Q0
I0001

MOV(W) S1 - D1 - REP
When I1 is on, store 1 (reverse) in control direction
1 D0003 (D0003), and output pulses from Q1
I0001

Setting

Function Device Address Setting Value Details

Steady pulse frequency D0000, D0001 3000 30 Hz
Initial pulse frequency D0002, D0003 1000 10 kHz
Frequency change time D0004 2000 2,000 ms
Reversible control enable — Dual-pulse output —
Control direction D0005 Forward Forward=0
Absolute Position Mode — Disable —
Preset value D0006, D0007 1000000 Preset value=1,000,000

18-26 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

ZRN (Zero Return)

The ZRN instruction outputs pulses while monitoring multiple signals to
ZRN S1 S2 S3 D1 perform a zero return.

n When the input is on, pulses are output according to the frequency
***** ***** ***** *****
change settings stored in the control register specified by S1.

The pulse control information (output on/output complete/error) is

stored in the internal relays specified by D2 as the operation status.

When the initialization input specified by S2 is turned on, the initial

values configured in the WindLDR ZRN (Zero Return) dialog box are
stored in the control registers.

The zero return method an be selected a ZRN mode 0 or ZRN mode 1.

ZRN Mode 0
The zero return is performed by monitoring only the proximity signal specified by S3.

(1) When a rise in the proximity signal is detected, the frequency

[Hz]
changes from the initial pulse frequency to the creep pulse
Initial pulse frequency frequency.
(2) When a fall in the proximity signal is detected, pulse output stops.
Creep pulse frequency
[t]
(1) (2)
ON
Proximity signal OFF

ZRN Mode 1
The zero return is performed by monitoring the proximity signal (decrease frequency trigger) specified by S3 and the origin
signal (stop trigger) specified by S4.
After stopping pulse output with the origin signal, the complete signal specified by D2 can be output.
For ZRN mode 1, the timing to start monitoring the origin signal can be selected from the following two types.

Start monitoring the origin signal with the rise in the proximity signal

(1) The rise in the proximity signal is detected, the frequency starts
[Hz] Frequency Frequency being decreased, and at the same time the origin signal starts
increase time decrease time
being monitored.
Steady pulse frequency (2) The rise in the origin signal is detected and pulse output is stopped.
(3) When pulse output stops, the complete signal turns on at the
Initial pulse frequency
same time.
(3)
Creep pulse frequency (4) The on period for the complete signal is one scan or longer but
[t]
less than two scans.
(1)
S3: Proximity signal ON
OFF

(2)
S4: Origin signal ON
OFF

D2: Complete signal ON (4)

OFF

One scan or longer but less than two scans

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 18-27

18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

Start monitoring the origin signal with the fall in the proximity signal

(1) The rise in the proximity signal is detected and the frequency
[Hz] Frequency Frequency
increase time decrease time starts being decreased.
(2) The fall in the proximity signal is detected and the origin signal
Steady pulse frequency
starts being monitored.
(3) The rise in the origin signal is detected and pulse output is
Initial pulse frequency
stopped.
(4)
Creep pulse frequency (4) When pulse output stops, the complete signal turns on at the
[t]
same time.
(1) (2)
S3: Proximity signal ON
OFF
(5) The on period for the complete signal is one scan or longer but
(3) less than two scans.
S4: Origin signal ON
OFF

D2: Complete signal ON (5)

OFF

One scan or longer but less than two scans

Notes:
• If a pulse output instruction is simultaneous executed with the same pulse output port, a user program execution will occur. Error code 48 will
be stored in D8006 and instructions that were executed after the initial instruction will be canceled.

• The ZRN instruction cannot be used in an interrupt program. If used in an interrupt program, a user program execution error will occur.
Error code 18 will be stored in D8006 and instruction execution will be canceled.

• If a pulse output instruction is executed with the relay output type, a user program execution will occur. Error code 19 will be stored in D8006
and instruction execution will be canceled.
• For details about the user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

Valid Devices
Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat
S1 (Source 1) Control register — — — — — — — —
S2 (Source 2) Initialization input X — X — — — — — —
S3 (Source 3) Proximity signal X — X — — — — — —
S4 (Source 4) Origin signal X — X — — — — — —
D1 (Destination 1) Operation status — — — — — — — —
D2 (Destination 2) Complete signal — X — — — — — —

Special data registers cannot be designated as S1. Internal relays M0000 through M1277 can be designated as D1. Special internal relays cannot
be designated as D1 and D2.

18-28 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

Settings
■ Devices tab

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

1.

1. Select Mode
Selects the configuration mode. FC6A Standard Mode or FC5A (except FC5A-D12X1E) Compatible Mode can be
selected.
Select FC5A (except FC5A-D12X1E) Compatible Mode to use the FC5A Series MicroSmart ZRN instruction specification.
When changing the PLC type from the FC5A/FC4A Series MicroSmart, FC5A (except FC5A-D12X1E) Compatible Mode is
automatically selected.
The lowest frequency that can be used with FC5A (except FC5A-D12X1E) Compatible Mode is 20 Hz.
Note: The lowest frequency of pulses that can be output in FC5A (except FC5A-D12X1E) Compatible Mode is 20 Hz. A frequency lower than 20 Hz
cannot be output. If such a value is specified, the pulse frequency error will occur.

The rest of this section is written under the assumption that FC6A Standard Mode has been selected.
Note: For details on the FC5A (except FC5A-D12X1E) Compatible Mode settings, refer to the ZRN instruction in Chapter 15 "Pulse Output
Instructions" in the "FC5A Series MicroSmart Pentra User's Manual Advanced Volume".

2. Select instruction
This item selects which ZRN instruction to use ("ZRN1", "ZRN2", "ZRN3" or "ZRN4").
The pulse output port and the reversible control mode and frequency that can be set differ by the instruction and CPU module
type.
For limitations due to the combination of instruction, reversible control mode, and the pulse output mode, see "17. Reversible
control enable" on page 18-33.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 18-29

18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

3. S1 (source 1): Control register

S1 specifies the starting number of the data registers to use with ZRN1, ZRN2, ZRN3 or ZRN4 instructions.
Starting from the specified number, 14 consecutive 16-bit data registers are used.
The range of available data register numbers is D0000 to D7986 and D10000 to D55986.

Setting
Storage
Function CAN J1939 All-in- Reference
Destination All-in-One Type
One Type
Initial pulse frequency ZRN1, ZRN2: 15 to 100,000
Starting number+0 ZRN1 to ZRN4:
(high word)*1 (increments of 1 Hz) "10. Initial Pulse
15 to 100,000
Initial pulse frequency ZRN3, ZRN4: 15 to 5,000 Frequency" on page 18-32
Starting number+1 (increments of 1 Hz)
(low word)*1 (increments of 1 Hz)
Creep pulse frequency ZRN1, ZRN2: 15 to 100,000
Starting number+2 ZRN1 to ZRN4:
(high word)*1 (increments of 1 Hz) "11. Creep Pulse
15 to 100,000
Creep pulse frequency ZRN3, ZRN4: 15 to 5,000 Frequency" on page 18-32
Starting number+3 (increments of 1 Hz)
(low word)*1 (increments of 1 Hz)
"12. Error status" on page
Starting number+4 Error status 10 to 10,000 ms
18-32
Starting number+5 Reserved
Steady pulse frequency ZRN1, ZRN2: 15 to 100,000
Starting number+6 ZRN1 to ZRN4:
(high word)*1 *2 (increments of 1 Hz) "13. Steady pulse
15 to 100,000
Steady pulse frequency ZRN3, ZRN4: 15 to 5,000 frequency" on page 18-32
Starting number+7 (increments of 1 Hz)
(low word)*1 *2 (increments of 1 Hz)
"14. Acceleration time" on
Starting number+8 Acceleration time*2 10 to 10,000 ms
page 18-32
"15. Deceleration time" on
Starting number+9 Deceleration time*2 10 to 10,000 ms
page 18-33
0: Forward "18. Control direction" on
Starting number+10 Control direction*2 *3
1: Reverse page 18-33
Starting number+11 Reserved
Starting number+12 Reserved
Starting number+13 Reserved
*1 The upper and lower data registers change according to the 32-bit data storage method specified. For details, see "32-bit Data Storage" on
page 3-9.
*2 When ZRN mode 0 is specified for the zero return method, starting number+6 to +10 are invalid.
*3 Valid only when Reversible control (single-pulse output) or Reversible control (dual-pulse output) is selected for reversible control enable.

4. S2 (source 2): Initialization Input

S2 specifies the initialization input. When the initialization input S2 is turned on, the initial values configured in the WindLDR
ZRN (Zero Return) dialog box, on the Settings tab, are stored in the control registers. An external input or an internal relay
can be specified.
When the initialization input is on, the initial values are written to the data registers with each scan. (Even when the ZRN
instruction is not executed (when not on), if the initialization input is turned on, the initial values are stored in the data
registers.) To only initialize the values one time, use the initialization input in combination with the SOTU (single output up)
instruction or the SOTD (single output down) instruction.

5. S3 (source 3): Proximity Signal

S3 specifies the proximity signal. The pulse frequency starts being decreased with the rise in the proximity signal.
An external input or an internal relay can be specified for the proximity signal.
Detection Speed Input Device Description
An interrupt is used to read the proximity signal. The proximity signal can be read without
High-speed I0, I1, I3, I4, I6, I7
being affected by the user program scan.
I2, I5, I10 to I27
I30 to I627 The information updated in the END processing is read as the proximity signal. It is affected
Normal
M0000 to M7997 by the user program scan.
M10000 to M17497

Notes:
• Do not use the same input or internal relay as the proximity signal for the ZRN1, ZRN2, ZRN3 and ZRN4 instructions. If they operate
simultaneously, pulse output may not stop even if the proximity signal changes from on to off.
• To use the high-speed proximity signal, set the relevant input to Normal Input under Special Input on Function Area Settings. Do not
use the input as interrupt input, catch input, high-speed counter, or frequency measurement.
• When using the high-speed proximity signal, ensure that no bounce occurs in the proximity signal.

18-30 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

6. S4 (source 4): Origin Input

S4 specifies the origin signal. The rise in the origin signal is detected and pulse output is stopped. An external input or an
internal relay can be specified. When ZRN mode 0 is selected for 9. Zero return method, the origin signal is ignored, even when
specified.

Detection Speed Input Device Description

An interrupt is used to read the origin signal.
High-speed I0, I1, I3, I4, I6, I7
The origin signal is read without being affected by the user program scan.
I2, I5, I10 to I27
I30 - I627 The information updated in the END processing is read as the origin signal.
Normal
M0000 to M7997 It is affected by the user program scan.
M10000 to M17497

Notes:
• Do not use the same input or internal relay as the origin signal for the ZRN1, ZRN2, ZRN3, or ZRN4 instructions.
If they operate simultaneously, pulse output may not stop even if the origin signal changes from on to off.
• To use a high-speed origin signal, set the relevant input to Normal Input under Special Inputs on Function Area Settings. Do not use
the input as interrupt input, catch input, high-speed counter, or frequency measurement.

• When using a high-speed origin signal, ensure that no bounce occurs in the origin signal.

7. D1 (destination 1): Operation Status

D1 specifies the starting number of the internal relays that store the operation status.
Starting from the specified relay, 4 sequential relays are used.
The range of available internal relays is M0000 to M7994 and M10000 to M17494.

Storage
Function Setting
Destination
This relay turns on during pulse output. This relay turns
0: Pulse output OFF
Starting number+0 Pulse output ON off when ZRN instruction input is turned off or when pulse
1: Pulse output ON
output is complete.
Pulse output 0: Pulse output not complete This relay turns on when pulse output is complete.
Starting number+1
complete 1: Pulse output complete This relay turns off when pulse output starts.
This relay turns on when the pulse output status is
Pulse output 0: Steady pulse output
Starting number+2 changing.
status 1: Changing output pulse frequency
This relay turns off when the pulse output status is steady.
This relay turns on when the zero return operation is
Zero return 0: Zero return not complete
Starting number+3 complete.
complete 1: Zero return complete
This relay turns off when the zero return operation starts.

8. D2 (destination 2): Complete Output

D2 specifies the complete signal. When the rise in the complete signal is detected and pulse output is stopped, the complete
signal can be output. An external output or an internal relay can be specified.
This can only be set when ZRN mode 1 is specified for the zero return method. This can be omitted if not using the complete
signal. When ZRN mode 0 is specified, the complete signal is ignored, even when specified.
Note: When an external output (Q0 to Q17) is specified, the complete signal is turned on regardless of the ZRN instruction execution timing with
the ladder and the I/O refresh timing. After the complete signal is turned on, it is reset to off when the ZRN instruction is executed a second time.

ZRN instruction execution timing

(1)
ON
Origin signal OFF

ON
Complete signal OFF

(2) (3) (4)

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 18-31

18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

■ Settings tab
This tab configures the operation of the ZRN instruction functions.

9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.

9. ZRN Mode
Select ZRN mode 0 or ZRN mode 1 for the zero return method according to the applicable system.
Setting Description
ZRN mode 0 The zero return is performed by monitoring only the proximity signal.
ZRN mode 1 The zero return is performed by monitoring the proximity signal and the origin signal.

10. Initial Pulse Frequency

Specifies the frequency when pulse output starts.
Set between 15 Hz and 100,000 Hz in 1 Hz increments. When using the ZRN3 or ZRN4 instruction with the All-in-One Type, set
between 15 Hz and 5,000 Hz in 1 Hz increments. The output frequency error is within ±5%.

11. Creep Pulse Frequency

After decreasing the pulse frequency has completed, this specifies the frequency when the pulses are steady.
Set between 15 Hz and 100,000 Hz in 1 Hz increments. When using the ZRN3 or ZRN4 instruction with the All-in-One Type, set
between 15 Hz and 5,000 Hz in 1 Hz increments. The output frequency error is within ±5%.

12. Error status

Outputs the error code that corresponds to the content of an error when there is an error in the settings. If a configuration error
occurs when the ZRN instruction is being executed, M8004 (user program execution error) is turned on and this relay is set to
the error code.
Error Code Status Description
0 Normal —
The initial pulse frequency, creep pulse frequency, or steady pulse frequency
2 Pulse frequency designation error
was not set to a value between 15 to 100,000 Hz.
5 Frequency change time designation error The frequency change time was not set between 10 and 10,000.
7 Control direction designation error The control direction was not set to 0 or 1.
The initial pulse frequency was set to the same frequency as the steady pulse frequency or it was set to a value larger
9
than the steady pulse frequency.*1
The creep pulse frequency was set to the same frequency as the steady pulse frequency or it was set to a value larger
10
than the steady pulse frequency.*2
*1 Set the initial pulse frequency so that it is lower than the steady pulse frequency.
*2 Set the creep pulse frequency so that it is lower than the steady pulse frequency.

13. Steady pulse frequency

After increasing the pulse frequency has completed, this specifies the frequency when the pulses are steady.
Set between 15 Hz and 100,000 Hz in 1 Hz increments. When using the ZRN3 or ZRN4 instruction with the All-in-One Type, set
between 15 Hz and 5,000 Hz in 1 Hz increments. The output frequency error is within ±5%.

14. Acceleration time

This setting specifies the time to increase the pulse frequency.
Set the time between 10 and 10,000 ms in increments of 10 ms. The digit in the ones place of the set value stored in the data
register is ignored. For example, if 144 is entered, the set value is 140 ms.

18-32 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

15. Deceleration time

This setting specifies the time to decrease the pulse frequency.
Set the time between 10 and 10,000 ms in increments of 10 ms. The digit in the ones place of the set value stored in the data
register is ignored.

16. Trigger to start monitoring origin input

Specifies the timing to start the origin signal monitor.

Timing Description
Proximity signal OFF→ON After the proximity signal changes from off to on, the change from off to on in the origin signal is monitored.
After the proximity signal changes from off to on and then next changes from on to off, the change from off
Proximity signal ON→OFF
to on in the origin signal is monitored.

17. Reversible control enable

Selects the reversible control method from the following reversible control modes when ZRN mode 1 is selected for 9. Zero
return method. (This is an example when ZRN1 is used with the All-in-One Type.)

Reversible Control Enable Operation Pattern

Select this option when using pulse output in a single
Reversible control disabled Q0
direction. Pulse A and pulse B can be used independently.

Reversible control Single-pulse Pulse A is used as pulse output. Pulse B on/off is used as Q0
output reversible control.
Q2

Reversible control Dual-pulse Pulse A is used as forward pulse (CW) output.Pulse B is Q0

output used as reverse pulse (CCW) output.
Q1

The ports used on the FC6A Series MicroSmart vary based on the instruction used, the combination of the pulse output mode
and reversible control, and the model used.

Port Used
All-in-One Type CAN J1939 All-in-One Type
Command Operating Condition
Pulse Output Reversible Pulse Output Reversible
Port Control Port Port Control Port
Reversible control disabled Q0 — Q0 —
ZRN1 Reversible control Single-pulse output mode Q0 Q2 Q0 Q1
Reversible control Dual-pulse output mode Q0, Q1 — Q0, Q1 —
Reversible control disabled Q1 — Q2 —
ZRN2 Reversible control Single-pulse output mode Q1 Q3 Q2 Q3
Reversible control Dual-pulse output mode — — Q2, Q3 —
Reversible control disabled Q2 — Q4 —
ZRN3 Reversible control Single-pulse output mode — — Q4 Q5
Reversible control Dual-pulse output mode — — Q4, Q5 —
Reversible control disabled Q3 — Q6 —
ZRN4 Reversible control Single-pulse output mode — — Q6 Q7
Reversible control Dual-pulse output mode — — Q6, Q7 —

18. Control direction

When reversible control is enabled, store 0 in this data register for forward operation and store 1 in this data register for reverse
operation.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 18-33

18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

ZRM Mode 0 (When Using Only the Proximity Signal) Timing Chart

ZRN1 instruction, S1 is specified as data register D0200, S3 is specified as external input I2, D1 is specified as internal
relay M0010

ZRN S1 S2 S3 S4 D1 D2

ZRN instruction
1 D0200 M0000 I0002 M0010
input
Initial speed

Creep speed

Pulse frequency Q0

ZRN1 instruction input

Proximity signal I2

Pulse output ON M0010

Pulse output
complete M0011

Pulse output
status M0012

Zero return
complete M0013

• When the ZRN1 instruction changes from off to on, pulses are output at the initial pulse frequency.

• When pulse output starts, M0010 turns on, and M0011 and M0013 turn off.

• The pulses are steady so M0012 turns off.

• When I2 changes from off to on, pulses are output at the creep pulse frequency.

• When I2 changes from on to off, pulse output stops.

• When pulse output stops, M0010 turns off, and M0011 and M0013 turn on.

• If the ZRN1 instruction input turns off during pulse output, pulse output stops. If the input turns on again, the operation starts from the
beginning.

• Even if the contents of the data registers are changed during pulse output, the change is not reflected in pulse output operation. The
changed content is reflected the next time the ZRN1 instruction is started.

18-34 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

ZRM Mode 1 (When Using the Proximity Signal and Origin Signal) Timing Chart

ZRN1 instruction, S1 is specified as data register D0200, S3 is specified as external input I2, D1 is specified as internal
relay M0010

ZRN S1 S2 S3 S4 D1 D2

ZRN instruction
1 D0200 M0000 I0002 I0003 M0010 M0100
input
Steady pulse frequency

Pulse frequency Q0 Initial pulse frequency

Creep pulse frequency

ZRN1 instruction input

Proximity signal I2

Origin signal I3

Complete signal M0100

Pulse output ON M0010

Pulse output
M0011
complete

Pulse output
M0012
status

Zero return
M0013
complete

• When the ZRN1 instruction changes from off to on, pulses are output at the initial pulse frequency, and then pulses are output so that the
frequency reaches the steady pulse frequency from the initial pulse frequency in the frequency change time. When the frequency change
time is specified as 100, the steady pulse frequency is reached in 100 ms by increasing or decreasing the frequency every 10 ms.

• When pulse output starts, M0010 turns on and M0011 turns off.

• While the pulse speed is increasing or decreasing, M0012 turns on.

• When I2 changes from off to on, the pulse speed starts to decrease and reaches the creep pulse frequency.

• When I3 is detected as changing from off to on, pulse output stops.

• When pulse output stops, M0100 turns on. M0100 turns on for one scan or longer but less than two scans.

• When M0100 changes from on to off and the zero return operation has completed, M0013 turns on.

• Then when pulse output stops, M0010 turns off and M0011 turns on.

• If the ZRN1 instruction input turns off during pulse output, pulse output stops. If the input turns on again, the operation starts from the
beginning.

• Even if the contents of the data registers are changed during pulse output, the change is not reflected in pulse output operation. The
changed content is reflected the next time the ZRN1 instruction is started.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 18-35

18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

Example:

To perform a zero return operation with proximity signal I2, initial pulse frequency 3 kHz, and creep pulse frequency 800 Hz

Turn on initialization input (M0000)

M8120 M0000

R Pulse output ON (M0100) off

M0100

R
Pulse output complete (M0101) off
M0101

R Pulse output status (M0102) off

M0102

ZRN S1 S1 S3 S4 D1 D2 When the ZRN1 instruction input turns on, pulse

I0001
1 D0000 M0000 I0002 M0100 output starts

Setting

Function Device Address Preset Value Details

Initial pulse frequency D0000 3000 3 kHz
Creep pulse frequency D0002 800 800 Hz

18-36 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

ARAMP (RAMP with Table)

The ARAMP instructions output pulses with the frequency change
function according to the information in the frequency table.
ARAMP S1 S2 S3 D1 D2
A frequency change and target frequency are set for each step, and the
1 ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** pulse frequency is controlled through the combination of these steps.
When the number of pulses that were output reaches the preset value,
the next step that is specified for each step is executed. You can
ARAMP S1 S2 S3 D1 D2 configure a maximum of 18 steps.
2 The pulse output operation can be selected from the following two
***** ***** ***** ***** *****
operations with the step option settings.
• The pulse frequency is changed at a constant rate until it reaches the
ARAMP S1 S2 S3 D1 D2 steady pulse frequency, and then a steady frequency of pulses is
output at the steady pulse frequency.
3 ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** (Step 1 to 3 operations in the diagram below)
• After outputting pulses that maintain the frequency in the previous
ARAMP S1 S2 S3 D1 D2 step, the frequency is changed at a constant rate until it reaches the
steady pulse frequency.
4 ***** ***** ***** ***** ***** (Step 4 operation in the diagram below)

Frequency
Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4
Before Before Before After

Steady pulse
frequency

Steady pulse
frequency

Steady pulse
frequency

Time

Frequency change time Frequency change time

When the initialization input specified by S2 is turned on, the initial values configured in the WindLDR ARAMP (Ramp Pulse
Output with Table) are stored in the control registers.
When the interrupt input specified by S3 is turned on, the step being executed is aborted and the interrupt step is executed.
The preset value and the steady pulse frequency for the running step are stored in the monitor registers specified by D1.
The control status including the pulse output status (output on/output direction/output complete) is stored in the operation status
specified by D2.
Notes:
• If a pulse output instruction is simultaneous executed with the same pulse output port, a user program execution will occur.
Error code 48 will be stored in D8006 and instructions that were executed after the initial instruction will be canceled.
• The ARAMP instruction cannot be used in an interrupt program. If used in an interrupt program, a user program execution error will occur.
Error code 18 will be stored in D8006 and instruction execution will be canceled.
• If a pulse output instruction is executed with the relay output type, a user program execution will occur.
Error code 19 is stored in D8006 and instruction execution is canceled.
• For details about the user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

Valid Devices
Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat
S1 (Source 1) Control register — — — — — — — —
S2 (Source 2) Initialization input X — X — — — — — —
S3 (Source 3) Interrupt input X — X — — — — — —
D1 (Destination 1) Monitor register — — — — — — — —
D2 (Destination 2) Operation status — — — — — — — —
Special data registers cannot be designated as S1. Internal relays M0000 through M1277 can be designated as D1. Special internal relays cannot
be designated as D1.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 18-37

18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

Settings
■ Devices tab

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

7.

1. Select instruction
This item selects which ARAMP instruction to use ("ARAMP1", "ARAMP2", "ARAMP3" or "ARAMP4").
The output port, reversible control mode, and operation mode that can be selected differ by the instruction and CPU module
type.
For limitations based on the combination of instruction, reversible control mode, and the pulse output mode, see "8. Reversible
control enable" on page 18-43.

18-38 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

2. S1 (source 1): Control Register

S1 specifies the starting number of the data registers to use with the ARAMP1, ARAMP2, ARAMP3 or ARAMP4 instruction.
Starting from the specified data register, "2+8 x N (N: number of steps)" consecutive 16-bit data registers are used.
The range of available data register numbers depends on the number of steps.
If the number of steps is 1, 10 words are required, so the range is D0000 to D7990 and D10000 to D55990.
If the number of steps is 18, 146 words are required, so the range is D0000 to D7854 and D10000 to D55854.
The steps operate with the settings that are configured when the steps start. If the settings for a step are changed after it starts
running, those changes are not reflected while the step is running.
Setting
Storage
Function CAN J1939 All-in- Reference
Destination All-in-One Type
One Type
"11. Interrupt step
Starting number+0 Interrupt number 1 to 18
number" on page 18-43
Starting number+1 Reserved
Step 1 (8 words)
ARAMP1, ARAMP2:
15 to 100,000
ARAMP1 to ARAMP4:
Starting number+2, (increments of 1 Hz) "13. Steady pulse
Steady pulse frequency 15 to 100,000
Starting number+3 ARAMP3, ARAMP4: frequency" on page 18-44
(increments of 1 Hz)
15 to 5,000
(increments of 1 Hz)
Starting number+4 Reserved
"14. Frequency change
Starting number+5 Frequency change time 10 to 10,000 ms
time" on page 18-44
Starting number+6 Preset value (high word)*1 "15. Preset value" on page
1 to 100,000,000 pulses
Starting number+7 Preset value (low word)*1 18-44
"16. Step options" on page
Starting number+8 Step options 0 to 3
18-44
"17. Next step number" on
Starting number+9 Next step number 1 to 18
page 18-45
Step 2 (8 words)
ARAMP1, ARAMP2: 15 to
100,000 ARAMP1 to ARAMP4:
Starting number+10, (increments of 1 Hz) "13. Steady pulse
Steady pulse frequency 15 to 100,000
Starting number+11 ARAMP3, ARAMP4: frequency" on page 18-44
15 to 5,000 (increments of 1 Hz)
(increments of 1 Hz)
: : : :
"17. Next step number" on
Starting number+17 Next step number 1 to 18
page 18-45
:
Step N (8 words)
ARAMP1, ARAMP2:
Starting 15 to 100,000 ARAMP1 to ARAMP4:
number+2+N x 8-8 (increments of 1 Hz) "13. Steady pulse
Steady pulse frequency 15 to 100,000
Starting ARAMP3, ARAMP4: frequency" on page 18-44
number+3+N x 8-8 15 to 5,000 (increments of 1 Hz)
(increments of 1 Hz)
: : : :
Starting "17. Next step number" on
Next step number 1 to 18
number+9+N x 8-8 page 18-45
*1 The upper and lower data registers change according to the 32-bit data storage method specified.
For details, see "32-bit Data Storage" on page 3-9.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 18-39

18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

3. S2 (source 2): Initialization Input

S2 specifies the initialization input.
When the initialization input S2 is turned on, the initial values configured in the WindLDR ARAMP (Advanced Ramp) dialog
box, on the Settings tab, are stored in the control registers. An external input or an internal relay can be specified.
When the initialization input is on, the initial values are stored in the data registers with each scan. (Even when the ARAMP
instruction is not executed (when not on), if the initialization input is turned on, the initial values are stored in the data
registers.) To only initialize the values one time, use the initialization input in combination with the SOTU (single output up)
instruction or the SOTD (single output down) instruction.

4. S3 (source 3): Interrupt Input

S3 specifies the interrupt input.
When the interrupt input changes from off to on, the pulse output process for the running step is aborted, and pulse output
starts with the settings for the step configured by the interrupt step number (10). When pulse output for the interrupt step
completes, pulse output starts for the next step according to the next step number (16).
The following example shows the interrupt input turning on during step 2 when configured to output pulses in order from step 1
to step 18.

Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 3 to 11 are canceled

Steady pulse frequency

Steady pulse frequency

Step 12 Step 13 Step 14

Frequency When the interrupt input is turned on,
change time step 2 processing is aborted and step 12 starts
When the interrupt input turns on, step 2 which is currently outputting pulses is aborted, and pulse output starts from the step
number set as the interrupt step number (step 12). When step 12 completes, pulses are output for the next step according to
the set order of steps.

An external input or internal relay can be specified as the interrupt input.

The detection speed differs by the used device.

Detection Speed Device Number Description

An interrupt is used to read the interrupt input.
High-speed I0, I2, I3, I5, I6, I7 The interrupt input can be read without being affected by the user
program scan.
The information updated in the END processing is read as the interrupt
I2, I5, I10 to I27, I30 to I627
Normal input.
M0000 to M7997, M10000 to M17497
It is affected by the user program scan.

S3 is omitted if not using an interrupt input.

Notes:
• Do not use the same input or internal relay as the interrupt input signal for the ARAMP1, ARAMP2, ARAMP3, or ARAMP4 instructions.

• To use a high-speed interrupt input signal, set the relevant input to Normal Input under Special Inputs on Function Area Settings. Do
not use the input as interrupt input, catch input, high-speed counter, or frequency measurement.

• When using the high-speed interrupt input, ensure that no bounce occurs in the interrupt input.

• When the interrupt input is turned on, the control direction (forward or reverse) is unchanged regardless of the control direction of the
interrupted step.

18-40 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

5. D1 (destination 1): Monitor Register

D1 specifies the starting number of the data registers to use with ARAMP1, ARAMP2, ARAMP3 or ARAMP4. Starting from the
specified number, 11 consecutive 16-bit data registers are used. The range of available data register numbers is D0000 to D0991
and D10000 to D55991. The contents of the monitor registers are read-only.

Setting
Address Function CAN J1939 All-in- Reference
All-in-One Type
One Type
"Next step number" on
Starting number+0 Next step number 0 to 18
page 18-41
"Running step number" on
Starting number+1 Running step number 1 to 18
page 18-41
Steady pulse frequency ARAMP1, ARAMP2:
Starting number+2
monitor (high word)*1 15 to 100,000
ARAMP1 to ARAMP4:
(increments of 1 Hz) "Steady pulse frequency
15 to 100,000
Frequency change time ARAMP3, ARAMP4: monitor" on page 18-41
Starting number+3 (increments of 1 Hz)
monitor (low word)*1 15 to 5,000
(increments of 1 Hz)
Starting number+4 Reserved
Frequency change time 10 to 10,000 (increments of 10 ms) "Frequency change time
Starting number+5
monitor The first digit of the setting is discarded. monitor" on page 18-41
Preset value monitor
Starting number+6
(high word)*1 "Preset value monitor" on
1 to 100,000,000 pulses
Preset value monitor page 18-41
Starting number+7
(low word)*1
Starting number+8 Current value (high word)*1 "Current value" on page
1 to 100,000,000 pulses
Starting number+9 Current value (low word)*1 18-41
"Error status" on page 18-
Starting number+10 Error status 0 to 9
42
*1 The upper and lower data registers change according to the 32-bit data storage method specified.
For details, see "32-bit Data Storage" on page 3-9.

Next step number

This register stores the number of the step to execute next.
If the next step is 0, pulse output ends after the currently executed step is complete.

Running step number

This register stores the number of the step that is currently being executed.

Steady pulse frequency monitor

This register stores the steady pulse frequency for the step that is currently being executed.

Frequency change time monitor

This register stores the frequency change time for the step that is currently being executed.
Set the time between 10 and 10,000 ms in increments of 10 ms. The first digit of the setting is discarded. For example, if
144 is entered, the set value is 140 ms.

Preset value monitor

This register stores the number of pulses to output for the running step.

Current value
This register stores the number of pulses that have been output for the step that is currently being executed. The current
value is updated when the ARAMP instruction is executed at each scan.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 18-41

18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

Error status
Outputs the error code that corresponds to the content of an error when there is an error in the settings. If a configuration
error occurs when a step starts executing, a user program execution error will occur, and the error code 20 is stored in
D8006.

Error Code Status Description

0 Normal —
3 Preset value designation error The preset value was not set between 1 to 100,000,000.
The steady pulse frequency
ARAMP1,
was not set between 15 and
ARAMP2
100,000.
All-in-One Type
The steady pulse frequency
Steady pulse frequency designation ARAMP3,
4 was not set between 15 and
error ARAMP4
5,000.
The steady pulse frequency
ARAMP1 to
CAN J1939 All-in-One Type was not set between 15 and
ARAMP4
100,000.
Frequency change time designation
5 The frequency change time was not set between 10 and 10,000.
error
7 Step options designation error The step options were not set to a valid value.
8 Next step number destination error The next step number was not set between 0 and 18.
9 Interrupt number destination error The interrupt number was not set between 1 and 18.

6. D2 (destination 2): Operation Status

D2 specifies the starting number of the internal relays to use with ARAMP1, ARAMP2, ARAMP3 and ARAMP4 instructions.
Starting from the specified internal relay, 5 sequential internal relays are used.
The range of available internal relay numbers is M0000 to M7993 and M10000 to M17493.

Address Description
This relay turns on during pulse output.
Pulse output 0: Pulse output OFF This relay turns off when the ARAMP instruction output stops.
Starting number+0
ON 1: Pulse output ON This relay turns off when the specified number of pulses are
output and output ends
This relay turns on when pulse output completes.
Pulse output 0: Pulse output not complete This relay turns on when the step number currently being
Starting number+1
complete 1: Pulse output complete executed is 0.
This relay turns off when the ARAMP instruction output starts.
Pulse output 0: Steady pulse output This relay turns off when the pulse output status is steady.
Starting number+2
status 1: Changing output pulse frequency This relay turns on when the pulse output is changing.
This relay turns on when the pulses output exceed the
configured preset value.
0: None Pulse output continues even if an the overflow occurs during
Starting number+3 Overflow
1: An overflow has occurred steady output or while the pulse frequency is changing.
However, pulse counting (current value data register) is
suspended at the point when the overflow occurred.
This relay turns off when the output direction of the pulses
Pulse output 0: Forward being output is forward.
Starting number+4
direction 1: Reverse This relay turns on when the output direction of the pulses
being output is reverse.

7. Preview
Displays a preview of the configured ARAMP instruction operation. The change in pulse output frequency, forward/reverse
operation, and the execution order of the steps can be checked.
The vertical axis indicates the pulse frequency and the horizontal axis indicates time.
The width of each step is locked, so the actual proportion of the horizontal axis is not accurate.

18-42 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

■ Settings tab

8.
9.
10.
11.

8. Reversible control enable

This setting enables or disables reversible control and selects the reversible control method from the following modes. There are
two modes for the pulse output mode: single-pulse and dual-pulse. They can be combined with reversible control as follows.
(This is an example when ARAMP is used with the All-in-One Type.)

Reversible Control Enable Operation Pattern

Select this option when using pulse output in a single
Reversible control disabled Q0
direction. Pulse A and pulse B can be used independently.

Reversible control Pulse A is used as pulse output. Pulse B on/off is used as Q0

Single-pulse output reversible control.
Q2

Reversible control Pulse A is used as forward pulse (CW) output. Q0

Dual-pulse output Pulse B is used as reverse pulse (CCW) output.
Q1

The ports used on the FC6A Series MicroSmart varies based on the instruction used, the combination of the pulse output mode
and reversible control, and the model used.

Port Used
All-in-One Type CAN J1939 All-in-One Type
Instruction Operating Condition
Pulse Output Reversible Pulse Output Reversible
Port Control Port Port Control Port
Reversible control disabled Q0 — Q0 —
ARAMP1 Reversible control (single-pulse output) Q0 Q2*1 Q0 Q1
Reversible control (dual-pulse output) Q0, Q1*2 — Q0, Q1 —
Reversible control disabled Q1 — Q2 —
ARAMP2 Reversible control (single-pulse output) Q1 Q3*1 Q2 Q3
Reversible control (dual-pulse output) — — Q2, Q3 —
Reversible control disabled Q2 — Q4 —
ARAMP3 Reversible control (single-pulse output) — — Q4 Q5
Reversible control (dual-pulse output) — — Q4, Q5 —
Reversible control disabled Q3 — Q6 —
ARAMP4 Reversible control (single-pulse output) — — Q6 Q7
Reversible control (dual-pulse output) — — Q6, Q7 —

*1 When using single-pulse output, Q2 or Q3 will be used, so a Q2 or Q3 pulse output instruction cannot be used.
*2 When using dual-pulse output, Q1 will be used, so a Q1 pulse output instruction cannot be used.

9. Number of steps
This setting specifies the number of steps. The maximum is 18.

10. Start step number

When the input changes from off to on, pulse output starts with the settings for the step configured as the start step number.

11. Interrupt step number

When the interrupt input changes from off to on, the pulse output process for the running step is aborted, and pulse output
restarts with the settings for the step configured by the interrupt step number.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 18-43

18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

■ Ramp Table tab

12.
13.
14.
15.

16.
17.

12. Step numbers

This option selects the step number to configure. The output frequency error is ±5%.

13. Steady pulse frequency

This setting specifies the frequency at the steady output state before or after changing the frequency.

CPU Module Type Instruction Steady Pulse Frequency

ARAMP1, ARAMP2 Set this value in the range of 15 to 100,000 (increments of 1 Hz).
All-in-One Type
ARAMP3, ARAMP4 Set this value in the range of 15 to 5,000 (increments of 1 Hz).
CAN J1939 All-in-One Type ARAMP1 to ARAMP4 Set this value in the range of 15 to 100,000 (increments of 1 Hz).

14. Frequency change time

This setting specifies the time to change the pulses.
Set this value in the range of 10 to 10,000 (increments of 10 ms).
The first digit of the setting is discarded. For example, if 144 is entered, the set value is 140 ms.

15. Preset value

This setting configures the number of pulses to output from 1 to 100,000,000.

16. Step options

This setting configures the step direction and the execution timing of the change in the pulses.

Bit Bit Bit Bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Timing of change Step direction

0 : Before 0 : Forward
1 : After 1 : Reverse

Control direction
When reversible control is enabled, store 0 in this data register for forward operation and store 1 in this data register for reverse
operation.

18-44 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

Acceleration/deceleration control
The frequency changes as shown in the following diagram according to the setting for the execution timing of the change. In the
Before column, the frequency changes and then becomes steady. When the number of pulses in the preset value is output, the
instruction transitions to the next step. In the After column, the steady pulse frequency is maintained, then the frequency
changes, and the instruction transitions to the next step.

Before After

Increase

Decrease

Note: Depending on the combination of steps and the interrupt input timing, forward and reverse may switch at high frequencies. Program the user
program so that forward and reverse can be switched according to the application specifications that will be used.

17. Next step number

This setting specifies the number of the next step to be executed after the output for the currently executed step is completed.
When the next step number is set to 0, that step becomes the last step, and when pulse output at that step is complete, pulse
output will end.

ARAMP1 instruction (reversible control disabled) timing chart

ARAMP1 instruction, S1 is specified as data register D0200, S2 is specified as internal relay M0000, S3 is disabled, D1 is
specified as data register D0000, D2 is specified as internal relay M0050

ARAMP S1 S2 S3 D1 D2

1 D0200 M0000 D0000 M0050

ARAMP instruction
input

ARAMP instruction input

Pulse frequency Q0

Pulse output ON M0050

Pulse output
M0051
complete

Pulse output status M0052

When the ARAMP instruction input changes from off to on, pulses are output according to the settings configured by the data
registers. When pulse output starts, M0050 turns on. M0052 turns on while the pulse frequency is increasing or decreasing. When
the number of pulses configured for each step is output, the next step is executed. When pulse output is complete for the step
where the next step number is set to 0, then the pulses will stop. In this situation, M0050 turns off and M0051 turns on.
If the ARAMP instruction input turns off during pulse output, pulse output ends. If the ARAMP instruction input turns on again, the
operation starts from the beginning. Even if the contents of the data registers are changed during pulse output, the change is not
reflected in the pulse output operation. The changed content is reflected the next time the ARAMP instruction is started.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 18-45

18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

ARAMP1 instruction (single-pulse output reversible control enabled) timing chart

ARAMP1 instruction, S1 is specified as data register D0200, S2 is specified as internal relay M0000, S3 is disabled, D1 is
specified as data register D0000, D2 is specified as internal relay M0050

ARAMP S1 S2 S3 D1 D2
1 D0200 M0000 D0000 M0050
ARAMP instruction
input

ARAMP instruction input

Control direction 0 (Forward) 1 (Reverse)

Pulse frequency Q0

Reversible control Q2 (All-in-One Type)

signal Q1 (CAN J1939 All-in-One Type)

Pulse output ON M0050

Pulse output complete M0051

Pulse output status M0052

When the ARAMP instruction input changes from off to on, pulses are output from Q0 according to the settings configured by the
data registers. The reversible control signal is output from Q2 or Q1. When pulse output starts, M0050 turns on. M0052 turns on
while the pulse frequency is increasing or decreasing. When the number of pulses configured for each step is output, the next step
is executed. When pulse output is complete for the step where the next step number is set to 0, then the pulses will stop. In this
situation, M0050 turns off and M0051 turns on.
If the ARAMP instruction input turns off during pulse output, pulse output ends. If this input turns on again, the operation starts
from the beginning. Even if the contents of the data registers are changed during pulse output, the change is not reflected in the
pulse output operation. The changed content is reflected the next time the ARAMP instruction is started.
In this application, switching between forward and reverse must be executed when the pulse frequency is decreased to the
minimum value, so a step is inserted to decrease the frequency before reversing.

18-46 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

ARAMP1 instruction (dual-pulse output reversible control enabled) timing chart

All-in-One Type, ARAMP1 instruction, S1 is specified as data register D0200, S2 is specified as internal relay M0000, S3 is
disabled, D1 is specified as data register D0000, D2 is specified as internal relay M0050

ARAMP S1 S2 S3 D1 D2
1 D0200 M0000 D0000 M0050
ARAMP instruction
input

ARAMP instruction input

Forward pulse (CW) Q0

Reverse pulse (CCW) Q1

Control direction 0 (Forward) 1 (Reverse)

Pulse output ON M0050

Pulse output
M0051
complete

Pulse output status M0052

When the ARAMP instruction input changes from off to on, pulses are output from Q0 according to the settings configured by the
data registers. The reversible control signal is output from Q0 or Q1. When pulse output starts, M0050 turns on. M0052 turns on
while the pulse frequency is increasing or decreasing. The pulses increase and decrease according to the frequency change time
until they reach the steady pulse frequency from the current pulse frequency. When the configured number of pulses are output,
the pulses stop. In this situation, M0050 turns off and M0051 turns on.
If the ARAMP instruction input turns off during pulse output, pulse output ends. If the ARAMP instruction input turns on again, the
operation starts from the beginning. Even if the contents of the data registers are changed during pulse output, the change is not
reflected in the pulse output operation. The changed content is reflected the next time the ARAMP instruction is started.
In this application, switching between forward and reverse must be executed when the pulse frequency is decreased to the
minimum value, so a step is inserted to decrease the frequency before reversing.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 18-47

18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

Sample program
When outputting pulses as shown in the diagram below with the frequency change function (reversible control
disabled) using the following settings
The pulses are output from Q0.
10 kHz
Step 1 Step 2 Step 3

Preset value 4,000 Preset value 4,000 Preset value 4,000

1 kHz

100 Hz

15 Hz
Frequency change time Frequency change time Frequency change time
2,000 ms 2,000 ms 4,000 ms

Initialize the data registers when the PLC starts

M8120 M0000

ARAMP S1 S2 S3 D1 D2 When the ARAMP instruction input (I0) turns on, pulse
output starts
1 D0000 M0000 D0030 M0050
I0

Basic settings

Function Device Address Setting Value Details

Reversible control enable — Disable —
Number of steps — 3 —
Start step number — 1 Step 1
Interrupt step number D0000 — —

18-48 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

Step 1 settings

Function Device Address Setting Value Details

Steady pulse frequency D0002, D0003 100 100 Hz
Frequency change time D0005 2000 2,000 ms
Preset value D0006, D0007 4000 Preset value=4,000
Control direction — — —
Acceleration/deceleration control D0008 Acceleration/deceleration later After=2
Next step number D0009 2 Step 2

Step 2 settings

Function Device Address Setting Value Details

Steady pulse frequency D0010, D0011 1000 1,000 Hz
Frequency change time D0013 2000 2,000 ms
Preset value D0014, D0015 4000 Preset value=4,000
Control direction — — —
Acceleration/deceleration control D0016 Acceleration/deceleration later After=2
Next step number D0017 3 Step 3

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 18-49

18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

Step 3 settings

Function Device Address Setting Value Details

Steady pulse frequency D0018, D0019 15 15 Hz
Frequency change time D0021 4000 4,000 ms
Preset value D0022, D0023 4000 Preset value=4,000
Control direction — — —
Acceleration/deceleration control D0024 Acceleration/deceleration later After=2
Next step number D0025 0 0=End output

When outputting pulses as shown in the diagram below with the frequency change function (single-pulse output
reversible control enabled) using the following settings
Pulses are output from Q0 and the reversible control signal is output from Q2.

100 kHz Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4

Preset value 5,000 Preset value 5,000 Preset value 5,000 Preset value 5,000

1 kHz

Q0
15 Hz
Frequency Frequency Frequency Frequency
change time change time change time change time
3,000 ms 3,000 ms 3,000 ms 3,000 ms
ON
Q2
OFF
Forward Reverse

When I2 turns on, the initialization input (M0000) is turned

on and the ARAMP instruction control register values are
I0002 M0000 initialized

ARAMP S1 S2 S3 D1 D2 When the ARAMP instruction input (I0) turns on, pulse
1 D0000 M0000 D0040 M0050 output starts
I0000

MOV(W) S1 - D1 - REP

5000 D0002 When the MOV instruction input (I1) turns on, the steady
I0001
pulse frequencies for step 2 and step 4 (D0002, D0003 and
MOV(W) S1 - D1 - REP D0018, D0019) are changed to 5 kHz.

5000 D0018

18-50 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

Basic settings

Function Device Address Setting Value Details

Reversible control enable — Single-pulse output —
Number of steps — 4 —
Start step number — 1 Step 1
Interrupt step number D0000 — —

Step 1 settings

Function Device Address Setting Value Details

Steady pulse frequency D0002, D0003 100 1 kHz
Frequency change time D0005 3000 3,000 ms
Preset value D0006, D0007 5000 Preset value=5,000
Control direction — Forward Forward
Acceleration/deceleration control D0008 Acceleration/deceleration later After=2
Next step number D0009 2 Step 2

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 18-51

18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

Step 2 settings

Function Device Address Setting Value Details

Steady pulse frequency D0010, D0011 15 15 Hz
Frequency change time D0013 3000 3,000 ms
Preset value D0014, D0015 5000 Preset value=5,000
Control direction — Forward Forward
Acceleration/deceleration control D0016 Acceleration/deceleration later After=2
Next step number D0017 3 Step 3

Step 3 settings

Function Device Address Setting Value Details

Steady pulse frequency D0018, D0019 100 1 kHz
Frequency change time D0021 3000 3,000 ms
Preset value D0022, D0023 5000 Preset value=5,000
Control direction — Reverse Reverse
Acceleration/deceleration control D0024 Acceleration/deceleration first Before=0
Next step number D0025 4 Step 4

18-52 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

Step 4 settings

Function Device Address Setting Value Details

Steady pulse frequency D0026, D0027 15 15 Hz
Frequency change time D0028 3000 3,000 ms
Preset value D0029, D0030 5000 Preset value=5,000
Control direction — Reverse Reverse
Acceleration/deceleration control D0032 Acceleration/deceleration first Before=0
Next step number D0033 0 Step 0 (end)

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 18-53

18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

When outputting pulses as shown in the diagram below with the frequency change function (single-pulse output
reversible control disabled) using the following settings
The pulses are output from Q0.

Interrupt Step
100 kHz Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5

Preset value 100,000 Preset value 100,000 Preset value 1,000,000 Preset value 1,000,000 Preset value 100,000

50 kHz

10 kHz

Preset value 3,000

5 kHz
Frequency
change time
5,000 ms
15 Hz
Frequency change time Frequency change time Frequency change time Frequency change time Frequency change time
5,000 ms 5,000 ms 8,000 ms 8,000 ms 8,000 ms

When I2 turns on, the initialization input (M0000) is turned

on and the ARAMP instruction control register values are
I0002 M0000 initialized

ARAMP S1 S2 S3 D1 D2 When the ARAMP instruction input (I0) turns on, pulse
output starts
1 D0000 M0000 M0100 D0023 M0060
I0000

When I1 turns on, the interrupt input (M0100) is turned on

and the interrupt step is executed
I0001 M0100

18-54 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

Basic settings

Function Device Address Setting Value Details

Reversible control enable — Disable —
Number of steps — 6 —
Start step number — 1 Step 1
Interrupt step number D0000 6 Step 6

Step 1 settings

Function Device Address Setting Value Details

Steady pulse frequency D0002, D0003 5000 5 kHz
Frequency change time D0005 5000 5,000 ms
Preset value D0006, D0007 100000 Preset value=100,000
Control direction — — —
Acceleration/deceleration control D0008 Acceleration/deceleration later After=2
Next step number D0009 2 Step 2

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 18-55

18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

Step 2 settings

Function Device Address Setting Value Details

Steady pulse frequency D0010, D0011 10000 10 kHz
Frequency change time D0013 5000 5,000 ms
Preset value D0014, D0015 100000 Preset value=100,000
Control direction — — —
Acceleration/deceleration control D0016 Acceleration/deceleration later After=2
Next step number D0017 3 Step 3

Step 3 settings

Function Device Address Setting Value Details

Steady pulse frequency D0018, D0019 50000 50 kHz
Frequency change time D0021 8000 8,000 ms
Preset value D0022, D0023 1000000 Preset value=1,000,000
Control direction — — —
Acceleration/deceleration control D0024 Acceleration/deceleration later After=2
Next step number D0025 4 Step 4

18-56 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

Step 4 settings

Function Device Address Setting Value Details

Steady pulse frequency D0026, D0027 5000 5 kHz
Frequency change time D0028 8000 8,000 ms
Preset value D0029, D0030 1000000 Preset value=1,000,000
Control direction — — —
Acceleration/deceleration control D0032 Acceleration/deceleration later After=2
Next step number D0033 5 Step 5

Step 5 settings

Function Device Address Setting Value Details

Steady pulse frequency D0034, D00035 15 12 Hz
Frequency change time D0036 8000 8,000 ms
Preset value D0037, D0038 100000 Preset value=100,000
Control direction — — —
Acceleration/deceleration control D0040 Acceleration/deceleration later After=2
Next step number D0041 0 0=End output

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 18-57

18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

Step 6 settings

Function Device Address Setting Value Details

Steady pulse frequency D0042, D0043 15 12 Hz
Frequency change time D0044 5000 5000 ms
Preset value D0045, D0046 2000 Preset value=2,000
Control direction — — —
Acceleration/deceleration control D0048 Acceleration/deceleration first Before=0
Next step number D0049 0 0=End output

18-58 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

ABS (Set Absolute Position)

The ABS instruction initializes the absolute position counter for pulse output.

ABS S1
1 *****

ABS S1
2 *****

ABS S1
3 *****

ABS S1
4 *****

Operation
When the input is on, the values of special data registers D8240 to D8247 (absolute position counters) are updated to the initial
values specified by S1.
When updated, 1 is stored in the absolute position counter initialized flag in special data register D8239 (absolute position control
status).
Notes:
• Do not execute the ABS instruction while the RAMP, ARAMP, ZRN, or JOG instructions are being executed. The absolute position counters may
be initialized with an unintended value.

• Program the user program so that the ABS instruction will be executed after user program execution starts and before specifying the absolute
position and executing the RAMP (Trapezoidal Control) instruction.
• When multiple ABS instructions are executed in the same scan, the content of the last executed ABS instruction is reflected in the absolute
value counters.

• The ABS instruction cannot be used in an interrupt program. If used in an interrupt program, a user program execution error will occur. Error
code 18 will be stored in D8006 and instruction execution will be canceled.
• If a pulse output instruction is executed with the relay output type, a user program execution will occur.
Error code 19 will be stored in D8006 and instruction execution will be canceled.

• For user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

Valid Devices
Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat
S1 (Source 1) Initial value — — — — — — X X —

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 18-59

18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

Settings
■ Devices tab

1. 2.

1. Select instruction
This item selects which ABS instruction to use ("ABS1", "ABS2", "ABS3", or "ABS4").
The absolute position counter to be initialized differs with the instruction.

Special Data Instructions that Update the Absolute

Command Absolute Position Counter Description
Register*1*2*3 Position Counter*4
High word D8240
ABS1 Absolute Position Counter 1 ABS1/RAMP1*5/ARAMP1/ZRN1/JOG1
Low word D8241
High word D8242
ABS2 Absolute Position Counter 2 -2147483648 ABS2/RAMP2*5/ARAMP2/ZRN2/JOG2
Low word D8243
to
High word D8244
ABS3 Absolute Position Counter 3 2147483647 ABS3/RAMP3*5/ARAMP3/ZRN3/JOG3
Low word D8245
High word D8246
ABS4 Absolute Position Counter 4 ABS4/RAMP4*5/ARAMP4/ZRN4/JOG4
Low word D8247
*1 The upper and lower data registers change according to the 32-bit data storage method specified. For details, see "32-bit Data Storage" on
page 3-9.
*2 The values of the absolute position counters are retained by the backup battery even when the power is turned off. When a keep data error
occurs, the values are initialized to 0.
*3 The special data registers are read only. To change the values of D8240 to D8247, use the ABS instruction.
*4 When the RAMP, ARAMP, ZRN, and JOG instructions are used with Reversible control disabled, the absolute position counters are not
updated.
*5 When specify absolute position mode is enabled in the RAMP instruction, the target position is specified as the absolute position. When using
specify absolute position mode in the RAMP instruction, initialize the corresponding absolute position counter in advance with the ABS
instruction. For details, see "RAMP (Trapezoidal Control)" on page 18-15.

The initialized status of D8240 to D8247 can be checked with the absolute position counter initialized flags defined in D8239
(absolute position control status).
When the FC6A Series MicroSmart switches from stop to run, 0 (not initialized) is stored in the absolute position counter
initialized flags. Then when the absolute position counters are initialized using the ABS instruction, 1 (initialized) is stored.

Device Number Parameter Name Bit Position Description

bit0: Absolute Position Counter 1 Initialized Flag
bit1: Absolute Position Counter 2 Initialized Flag 0: Not initialized
D8239 Absolute Position Control Status bit2: Absolute Position Counter 3 Initialized Flag 1: Initialized
bit3: Absolute Position Counter 4 Initialized Flag
bit4 to bit15 Reserved

18-60 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

2. S1 (source 1): Initial Value

Specifies the starting number of the device that stores the value for initialization or a constant.
Starting from the specified number, 2 continuous words of data registers are used.
The range of available data register numbers is D0000 to D7998, D8000 to D8498, and D10000 to D55998. The data type is L
(long).

Storage Destination Setting

Starting number+1 Initial value (high word)*1
-2147483648 to 2147483647
Starting number+2 Initial value (low word)*1

*1 The upper and lower data registers change according to the 32-bit data storage method specified. For details, see "32-bit Data Storage" on
page 3-9.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 18-61

18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

Example:

Return
start
ZRN S1 S2 S3 S4 D1 D2
1 D0000 M0000 I0000 ***** M0100 *****
M0050
Return
complete
ABS S1
1 100
M0101
Return Return Return
start complete start
R
M0050 M0101 M0050

After the power is turned on, the ZRN1 instruction is started and a zero return is performed.
After the zero return operation completes, absolute position counter 1 is initialized to 100 with the ABS1 instruction.

Setting

Function Preset Value

Select instruction ABS1
Tag name 100 (constant)

18-62 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

JOG (JOG Operation)

The JOG instruction output pulses with a frequency change.

JOG S1 S2 S3 D1
1 ***** ***** ***** *****

JOG S1 S2 S3 D1
2 ***** ***** ***** *****

JOG S1 S2 S3 D1
3 ***** ***** ***** *****

JOG S1 S2 S3 D1
4 ***** ***** ***** *****

Operation
When the input is on and the JOG input specified by S3 is turned on, pulses of the initial pulse frequency specified by S1 are
output, and then the pulse frequency is increased at a constant rate until it reaches the steady pulse frequency. When the steady
pulse frequency is reached, steady pulses are output.
When the JOG input specified by S3 is turned off, the pulses slow at a constant rate until the initial pulse frequency is reached, and
when the initial pulse frequency is reached, pulse output stops.
The pulse control information (output on/output complete/error) is stored in the internal relays specified by D1 as the operation
status.
When the initialization input specified by S2 is turned on, the initial values configured in the WindLDR JOG (JOG Control) dialog
box, on the Settings tab, are stored in the control registers.
Notes:
• If a pulse output instruction is simultaneous executed with the same pulse output port, a user program execution will occur.
Error code 48 will be stored in D8006 and instructions that were executed after the initial instruction will be canceled.
• The JOG instruction cannot be used in an interrupt program. If used in an interrupt program, a user program execution error will occur. Error
code 18 will be stored in D8006 and instruction execution will be canceled.

• If a pulse output instruction is executed with the relay output type, a user program execution will occur.
Error code 19 will be stored in D8006 and instruction execution will be canceled.
• For user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

Valid Devices
Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat
S1 (Source 1) Control register — — — — — — — —
S2 (Source 2) Initialization input X — X — — — — — —
S3 (Source 3) JOG input X — X — — — — — —
D1 (Destination 1) Status code — — — — — — — —

Special data registers cannot be designated as S1. Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 18-63

18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

Settings
■ Devices tab

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

1. Select instruction
This item selects which JOG instruction to use ("JOG1", "JOG2", "JOG3", or "JOG4").
The output port and reversible control mode that can be selected differ by the instruction and CPU module type.
For limitations due to the combination of instruction, reversible control mode, and the pulse output mode, see "10. Reversible
control enable" on page 18-66.

2. S1 (source 1): Control register

S1 specifies the starting number for the data registers to use with the JOG1, JOG2, JOG3, or JOG4 instruction.
Starting from the specified number, 12 continuous words of data registers are used.
The range of available data register numbers is D0000 to D7988 and D10000 to D55988.

Setting
Storage
Function CAN J1939 All-in- Reference
Destination All-in-One Type
One Type
JOG1, JOG2:
Steady pulse frequency
Starting number+0 15 to 100,000
(high word)*1 JOG1 to JOG4:
(increments of 1 Hz) "6. Steady pulse frequency" on
15 to 100,000
JOG3, JOG4: page 18-66
Steady pulse frequency (increments of 1 Hz)
Starting number+1 15 to 5,000
(low word)*1
(increments of 1 Hz)
JOG1, JOG2:
Initial pulse frequency
Starting number+2 15 to 100,000
(high word)*1 JOG1 to JOG4:
(increments of 1 Hz) "7. Initial pulse frequency" on
15 to 100,000
JOG3, JOG4: page 18-66
Initial pulse frequency (increments of 1 Hz)
Starting number+3 15 to 5000
(low word)*1
(increments of 1 Hz)
"8. Acceleration time" on page
Starting number+4 Acceleration time 10 to 10,000 (ms)
18-66
"9. Deceleration time" on page
Starting number+5 Deceleration time 10 to 10,000 (ms)
18-66
0: Forward "11. Control direction" on
Starting number+6 Control direction
1: Reverse page 18-67
Starting number+7 Reserved
Starting number+8 Current value (high word)*1 "12. Current value" on page
1 to 100,000,000 pulses*2
Starting number+9 Current value (low word)*1 18-67
"13. Error status" on page 18-
Starting number+10 Error status 0 to 3
67
Starting number+11 Reserved

*1 The upper and lower data registers change according to the 32-bit data storage method specified. For details, see "32-bit Data Storage" on
page 3-9.
*2 When starting pulse output, the current value is reset.

18-64 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

3. S2 (source 2): Initialization Input

S2 specifies the initialization input.
When the initialization input is turned on, the initial values configured in the WindLDR JOG (JOG) dialog box, on the Settings
tab, are stored in the control registers. An external input or an internal relay can be specified.
When the initialization input is on, the initial values are stored in the data registers with each scan. (Even when the JOG
instruction is not executed (when not on), if the initialization input is turned on, the initial values are stored in the data
registers.) To only initialize the values one time, use the initialization input in combination with the SOTU (single output up)
instruction or the SOTD (single output down) instruction.

4. S3 (source 3): JOG Input

S3 specifies the jog input.
When the JOG input is turned on, pulses of the initial pulse frequency are output, and then the pulse frequency is increased until
it reaches the steady pulse frequency.
When the JOG input is turned off, pulse output stops after the pulse frequency is decreased until the initial pulse frequency is
reached.
An external input or an internal relay can be specified.
When the JOG input is turned off while the pulse frequency is increasing, pulse output stops after the pulse frequency is
decreased until the initial pulse frequency is reached.
When the JOG input is turned on while the pulse frequency is decreasing, the pulse frequency is increased until the steady pulse
frequency is reached.

5. D1 (destination 1): Operation Status

D1 specifies the starting address of the internal relays to use with the JOG instruction.
Starting from the specified relay, 4 sequential relays are used.
The range of available internal relays is M0000 to M7994 and M10000 to M17494.

Storage Destination Function Setting

0: Pulse output OFF This relay turns on during pulse output.
Starting number+0 Pulse output ON
1: Pulse output ON This relay turns off when pulse output stops.
0: Pulse output not complete This relay turns on when pulse output completes.
Starting number+1 Pulse output complete
1: Pulse output complete This relay turns off when pulse output starts.
This relay turns on when the pulse output status is
0: Steady pulse output
steady.
Starting number+2 Pulse output status 1: Changing output pulse
This relay turns off when the pulse output status is
frequency
changing frequency.
Starting number+3 Reserved

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 18-65

18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

■ Settings tab

6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.

6. Steady pulse frequency

This setting specifies the steady pulse frequency after the pulse frequency is increased. Set between 15 and 100 kHz in 1 Hz
increments. The output frequency error is within ±5%.
For JOG3 and JOG4 with the All-in-One Type, set between 15 and 5 kHz in 1 Hz increments.

7. Initial pulse frequency

Specifies the frequency when pulse output starts. Set between 15 and 100 kHz in 1 Hz increments. The output frequency error
is within ±5%.
For JOG3 and JOG4 with the All-in-One Type, set between 15 and 5 kHz in 1 Hz increments.

8. Acceleration time
Specifies the time to increase the pulse frequency. Set the value in the range of 10 to 10,000 ms in increments of 10 ms. The
digit in the ones place of the set value is discarded. For example, if 144 is entered, the set value is 140 ms.

9. Deceleration time
This setting specifies the time to decrease the pulse frequency. Set the value in the range of 10 to 10,000 ms in increments of
10 ms. The digit in the ones place of the set value is discarded. For example, if 144 is entered, the set value is 140 ms.

10. Reversible control enable

This setting enables or disables reversible control and selects the reversible control method from the following reversible control
modes. There are two modes for the pulse output mode: single-pulse output mode and dual-pulse output mode. They can be
combined with reversible control as follows. (This is an example when JOG1 is used with the All-in-One Type.)

Reversible Control Enable Operation Pattern

Select this option when using pulse output in a single
Reversible control disabled Q0
direction. Pulse A and pulse B can be used independently.
Reversible control Single-pulse Pulse A is used as pulse output. Pulse B on/off is used as Q0
output reversible control. Q2

Pulse A is used as forward pulse (CW) output.Pulse B is Q0

Reversible control Dual-pulse output
used as reverse pulse (CCW) output. Q1

The used ports differ by the instruction used, the combination of the pulse output mode and reversible control, and the model
used.

Port Used
All-in-One Type CAN J1939 All-in-One Type
Command Operating Condition
Pulse Output Reversible Pulse Output Reversible
Port Control Port Port Control Port
Reversible control disabled Q0 — Q0 —
JOG1 Reversible control Single-pulse output Q0 Q2*1 Q0 Q1
Reversible control Dual-pulse output Q0, Q1*2 — Q0, Q1 —
Reversible control disabled Q1 — Q2 —
JOG2 Reversible control Single-pulse output Q1 Q3*1 Q2 Q3
Reversible control Dual-pulse output — — Q2, Q3 —

18-66 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

Port Used
All-in-One Type CAN J1939 All-in-One Type
Command Operating Condition
Pulse Output Reversible Pulse Output Reversible
Port Control Port Port Control Port
Reversible control disabled Q2 — Q4 —
JOG3 Reversible control Single-pulse output — — Q4 Q5
Reversible control Dual-pulse output — — Q4, Q5 —
Reversible control disabled Q3 — Q6 —
JOG4 Reversible control Single-pulse output — — Q6 Q7
Reversible control Dual-pulse output — — Q6, Q7 —

*1 When using single-pulse output mode with the All-in-One Type, Q2 or Q3 will be used, so an instruction that uses the same pulse output port
can no longer be used.
*2 When using dual-pulse output mode with the All-in-One Type, Q1 will be used, so an instruction that uses the same pulse output port can no
longer be used.

11. Control direction

When reversible control is enabled, store 0 in this data register for forward operation and store 1 in this data register for reverse
operation.

12. Current value

The number of pulses output from the pulse output port is stored in the data registers.
The current value is updated when the JOG instruction is executed at each scan.
When starting pulse output, the current value is reset.

13. Error status

Outputs the error code that corresponds to the content of an error when there is an error in the settings. If a configuration error
occurs when a step starts running, a user program execution error will occur, and error code 20 is stored in D8006.

Error Code List

Error Code Status Description

0 Normal —
JOG1, The initial pulse frequency was not set between 15 and
JOG2 100,000.
All-in-One Type
JOG3, The initial pulse frequency was not set between 15 and
Initial pulse frequency
2 JOG4 5,000.
designation error
JOG1
CAN J1939 All-in-One The initial pulse frequency was not set between 15 and
to
Type 100,000.
JOG4
JOG1, The steady pulse frequency was not set between 15 and
JOG2 100,000.
All-in-One Type
JOG3, The steady pulse frequency was not set between 15 and
Steady pulse frequency
4 JOG4 5,000.
designation error
JOG1
CAN J1939 All-in-One The steady pulse frequency was not set between 15 and
to
Type 100,000.
JOG4
Frequency change time
5 The acceleration time was not set between 10 and 10,000.
designation error
Control direction
7 The control direction was not set to 0 or 1.
designation error
The initial pulse frequency was set to the same frequency as the steady pulse frequency or it was set to a value larger than
9
the steady pulse frequency.*1
*1 Set the initial pulse frequency so that it is lower than the steady pulse frequency.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 18-67

18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

JOG1 Instruction (Reversible Control Disabled) Timing Chart

With the All-in-One Type, JOG1 instruction, S1 is specified as D0200, D1 is specified as internal relay M0050

JOG S1 S2 S3 D1

M0000
1 D0200 M0010 I0004 M0050

JOG instruction M0000

input

JOG input I0004

Steady pulse frequency

Initial pulse frequency

Pulse output port Q0000

Pulse output ON M0050

Pulse output M0051

complete

Pulse output status M0052

• When the JOG1 input is on, the I4 monitor starts. When I4 is turned on, pulses are output according to the settings configured by the control
registers.

• M0050 turns on during pulse output. M0052 turns on while the pulse frequency is increasing, and M0052 turns off while decreasing.

• Pulses are output so that the frequency reaches the steady pulse frequency from the initial pulse frequency in the acceleration time. The
frequency increases or decreases every 10 ms.
• When I4 turns off, the frequency starts to decrease, and then when the frequency reaches the initial pulse frequency, pulse output stops. At
this time, M0050 turns off and M0051 turns on.

• If I4 turns off while the frequency is increasing, the frequency starts to decrease, and then when the frequency reaches the initial pulse
frequency, pulse output stops.

• If I4 turns on while the frequency is decreasing, it once again starts to increase, and pulses are output so the frequency reaches the steady
pulse frequency.
• Even if the contents of the control registers are changed during pulse output, the change is not reflected in the operation of pulse output.
The changed content will be reflected when pulses are next output after pulse output is first stopped and M0050 is turned off.

Example:

When performing a JOG operation by outputting pulses with a frequency change (reversible control disabled) from Q0

Initialization
Initialize input
Turn on initialization input (M0000)
R
M8120 M0000
Control Initialization JOG input Operation
register input status
When the JOG instruction input (M0001) is on and
JOG S1 S2 S3 D1
the JOG input (I0) is turned on, pulse output starts.
1 D0000 M0000 I0000 M0010
M0001

18-68 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

Setting

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 18-69

18: PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS

18-70 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

19: PID CONTROL INSTRUCTION
Introduction
This chapter describes the PID control instructions that perform auto tuning and PID control for temperature control and other purposes.

PID (PID Control)

Executes PID control and outputs that result. When auto tuning is performed, the optimal PID parameters (proportional
gain, integral time, and derivative time) and control action are automatically calculated.
This instruction is compatible with the FC5A Series MicroSmart PID instruction. When temperature control is performed using
the FC5A Series MicroSmart PID instruction, the same temperature control can be achieved by replacing it with the FC6A
Series MicroSmart and the FC6A Series MicroSmart PID instruction.

PID S1 S2 S3 S4 D1
***** ***** ***** ***** *****

Notes:
• The PID instruction and the PIDA instruction can be mixed in a single program, and a maximum of 32 instructions can be used.
• For details on the PID instruction, see Chapter 14 "PID Instruction" in the "FC5A Series MicroSmart Pentra User's Manual Advanced Volume".

PIDA (PID Control)

Executes PID control and outputs that result. When auto tuning is performed, the optimal PID constants are calculated.
When auto/manual mode is switched, the balance-less and bumpless function automatically operates to prevent rapid
changes in the output manipulated variable.
A maximum of four alarm types, out of nine, can be set to detect process variable errors for multiple conditions.

PIDA S1 S2 S3 S4
***** ***** ***** *****

Notes:
• The PID instruction and the PIDA instruction can be mixed in a single program, and a maximum of 32 instructions can be used.
• For details on the PIDA instruction, see "PIDA (PID Control)" on page 19-3.

PIDD (PID with Derivative Decay)

Executes PID control and outputs that result. The PID control parameters stored in the control registers are handled as data
type F (float), and fine adjustments can be made to the control parameters such as proportional gain, integral gain, and
derivative gain. Multiple PIDD instructions can also be combined to execute the cascade control.

PIDD ** S1 S2 S3 SP PV MV
***** ***** ***** ***** ***** *****

Notes:
• A maximum of 32 PIDD instructions can be used in a user program. PID and PIDA instructions are counted separately.
• For details on the PIDD instruction, see "PIDD (PID with Derivative Decay)" on page 19-26.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 19-1

19: PID CONTROL INSTRUCTION

Differences between PID, PIDA, PIDD Instructions and PID Module

There are three types of PID control instructions, the PID instruction, the PIDA instruction, and the PIDD instruction. PID
control can also be performed using the PID module. The differences between the various PID instructions and the PID
module are as follows.

PID PIDA PIDD

Item PID Module
Instruction Instruction Instruction
Both PID and PIDA instructions:
Limit on number of instructions 32 —
32 total
W (Word)/
I (Integer)
Data type of parameters W (Word)/I (Integer) F (Float)
(To tenths
place)
Cascade control function No No Yes Yes
Heating/cooling control No No No Yes
Auto/manual switching Yes Yes Yes Yes
Step response Limit cycle Ultimate gain
Method
method method method
Auto tuning Execute when No Can be
Execute at any
Execution timing starting the executed at
time
PID instruction any time
ARW (anti-reset windup) Yes Yes Yes Yes
Balance-less and bumpless function No Yes Yes Yes
Upper limit alarm
Yes Yes No Yes
Lower limit alarm
Upper/lower limits alarm
Upper/lower limits range alarm
Alarm types Process high alarm
Process low alarm No Yes No Yes
Upper limit alarm with standby
Lower limit alarm with standby
Upper/lower limits alarm with standby
PIDST
PIDA PIDD PID module
Parameters instruction, PID
instruction instruction settings
instruction
Use Device
Check and modify parameters Use a dedicated monitor screen
Monitor in WindLDR Monitor
Trend graph display No Yes
FC5A Series
FT1A Touch
IDEC instruction compatibility MicroSmart PID No No
PID instruction
instruction

19-2 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 19: PID CONTROL INSTRUCTION

PIDA (PID Control)

The PID instruction executes PID control and outputs the result. When auto tuning is performed, the optimal PID parameters are
calculated.
When auto/manual mode is switched, the balance-less and bumpless function automatically operates to prevent rapid changes in
the output manipulated variable.
Four alarm types, out of nine, can be set to detect process variable errors for multiple conditions.

PIDA S1 S2 S3 S4
***** ***** ***** *****

Operation
When the input is on, auto tuning and PID control are performed.

• Special technical knowledge about the PID control is required to use the PIDA function of the FC6A Series MicroSmart.
Warning Use of the PIDA function without understanding the PID control may cause the FC6A Series MicroSmart to perform
unexpected operation, resulting in disorder of the control system, damage, or accidents.

• When using the PIDA instruction for feedback control, emergency stop and interlocking circuits must be configured
outside the FC6A Series MicroSmart. If these are configured in the internal circuit and the process variable is not input
correctly, there is a risk of no longer being able to perform proper feedback control, which may damage connected
devices or cause accidents.
For PID control, see "PID Control" on page 19-23.

The PIDA instruction cannot be used in an interrupt program. If used in an interrupt program, a user program execution
Caution error occurs, the execution of the instruction is canceled, and the next instruction is executed.
For user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

Note: The PIDA instruction and the PID instruction can be mixed in a single program, and a maximum of 32 instructions can be used.

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) Control registers — — — — — — — —
S2 (Source 2) Initialization input X — X — — — — — —
S3 (Source 3) Control relays — — — — — — — —
S4 (Source 4) Set point — — — — — — — —

Special data registers cannot be designated as S1 and S4. Special internal relays cannot be designated as S3.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 19-3

19: PID CONTROL INSTRUCTION

Settings
The PIDA (PID Control) dialog box contains the Devices tab, Input tab, Control tab, and Output tab.
The Devices tab configures the devices used with the PIDA instruction. The Input, Control, and Output tabs configure the
initial values of the parameters for the PIDA instruction.

■Devices tab

1. 2. 3. 4.

5.

1. S1 (source 1): Control Register

Specify the starting device to store the PIDA instruction parameters.
The devices that can be specified are data registers D0000 to D7960 and D10000 to D55960.
40 words are used starting from the specified data register.
When the initialization input is turned on, the control registers are initialized with the values set on the Input tab, the Control
tab, and the Output tab.
For initialization, see "2. S2 (source 2): Initialization Input" on page 19-4.
For the control registers, see "S1: Control Registers" on page 19-16.

2. S2 (source 2): Initialization Input

Specify the device to initialize the control registers.
The values configured on the Input tab, Control tab, and Output tab are stored in the control registers and control relays
when the initialization input turns on*1. An external input or an internal relay can be specified.
*1 If you want the initialization to be performed just one time, please use a SOTU (single output up) or a SOTD (single output down) instruction.

3. S3 (source 3): Control Relay

Specify the device to output control of PID control and the control results of the PIDA instruction.
16 bits are used starting from the specified device.
The devices that can be specified are internal relays M0000 to M7980 and M10000 to M17480. Special internal relays cannot be
specified.
The role of each bit is different. You can switch between auto and manual mode for the PIDA instruction and execute auto
tuning by turning the bits on and off. The PIDA instruction control result and process variable error are also output as alarms.
For tag names, device addresses, and comments, see "S3: Control Relay" on page 19-21.

4. S4 (source 4): Set Point

Shows the device that stores the PID control set point. When a data register is specified in S1 (source 1), S1+7 is automatically
allocated.
The set point (S1+7) is one data register out of the 40 words of data registers used by the control registers (1). This is
automatically displayed when a starting device is specified in the control registers (1).

19-4 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 19: PID CONTROL INSTRUCTION

5. Device Allocation
Click this button to display the Device Allocation dialog box. The table containing the data registers and internal relays and
corresponding PIDA instruction settings is displayed in the dialog box (6).
Click Allocate Comments (7) to set the content in the table as the comments of the devices.
Device Allocation dialog box

6.

7.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 19-5

19: PID CONTROL INSTRUCTION

■Input tab
This tab configures the input parameters for the PIDA instruction.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
10. 11. 12. 13.
8.
9.

7.

1. Process Variable (S1+0)

Configure the input for the PID control. The process variable is linearly converted and given to the PID control for the input
value. The value can be specified as Analog Input or Data Register.
When Analog Input is specified
Specify the module with the analog input you want to specify as the process variable and its analog input number to set as
PID control input.
Analog Module Configure: Select the analog input module.
Select the module as the CPU/HMI module or expansion module 1 to 15.
Analog Input No.: Select the input number on the analog input module.
Select as AI0 to AI7.
The analog input value is also stored in a control register (S1+0) as a read-only value.
For control registers, see "1. S1 (source 1): Control Register" on page 19-4.
Notes:
• To use an analog input, the analog input must be configured in advance. For details on analog input settings, see Chapter 9 "Analog Module"
in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s Manual".
• When using an analog input, the analog volume value cannot be used as the process variable. However, the analog volume value can be used
as the process variable by specifying Data Register as the process variable and specifying a special data register that stores the analog
volume value.
• When Analog Input is specified, the minimum value and the maximum value of the analog input settings are used as the minimum value
and the maximum value for the input.
When Data Register is specified
The value stored in S1+0 of the control registers is used as the PID control input.
The range of stored values is minimum value (5) ≤ process variable ≤ maximum value (4). For control registers, see "1. S1
(source 1): Control Register" on page 19-4.
Configure parameters 2. Device Address through 5. Minimum Value when data register is selected as the process variable.
2. Device Address
Shows the first data register (S1+0) of the control registers configured on the Devices tab.
3. Data Type
Select the process variable (1) data type as W (word) or I (integer).
4. Maximum Value, 5. Minimum Value
Set the process variable (1) range as a maximum value and a minimum value. Set the input settings in PID control (process
variable, Alarm 1 (process high alarm) value, and Alarm 2 (process low alarm) value) and the set point within the maximum and
minimum value range. The maximum value and minimum value can be configured within the range of the data type (3).
• When the data type is I (integer): -32,768 to +32,767.
• When the data type is W (word): 0 to 65,535
Note: If the process variable (1) is larger than the maximum value (4), or if the process variable (1) is smaller than the minimum value (5),
status code 109 is stored in the operating status (S1+2) and PID control stops.
For status code details, see "Operation status (S1+2)" on page 19-19.

19-6 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 19: PID CONTROL INSTRUCTION

6. Sampling Period (S1+5)

Set the cycle to execute the PID control.
PID control will only be executed at the end of the scan.
When the sampling period is set lower than the scan time, PID control is not executed with the set sampling period, it will be
executed with the same period as the scan time.
When the sampling period is set longer than the scan time, if the scan has not finished when the sampling period has elapsed,
PID control will wait until the scan ends and then be executed.
Due to the above factors, an error will occur between the sampling period and the actual PID control execution timing.
The sampling period can be set from 0.01 to 100.00 seconds in 0.01 second increments.
Sampling period ≤ Scan time
PIDA instruction executed PIDA instruction executed PIDA instruction executed PIDA instruction executed PIDA instruction executed
0 ms 60 ms 120 ms 180 ms 240 ms
Scan time
60 ms
0 ms 80 ms 160 ms 240 ms
Sampling period
40 ms

PID control executed PID control executed PID control executed PID control executed PID control executed
Sampling period > Scan time
PIDA instruction executed PIDA instruction executed PIDA instruction executed PIDA instruction executed PIDA instruction executed
0 ms 60 ms 120 ms 180 ms 240 ms
Scan time
(60 ms)
0 ms 80 ms 160 ms 240 ms
Sampling period
(40 ms)

PID control executed PID control executed PID control executed PID control executed
7. Advanced/Basic
Click this button to show or hide the advanced settings.
On the Input tab, Sampling Period (6) can be set as an advanced setting.

8. Alarm 1 (Process High Alarm) (S1+3)

Set the upper limit value of the process variable (1).
The alarm 1 value can be set in the range between the alarm 2 value (process low alarm) (9) and the maximum value (4).
If the process variable is higher than or equal to the alarm 1 value, the alarm 1 output (S3+3) turns on.
If the process variable is lower than the alarm 1 value, the alarm 1 output (S3+3) turns off.

9. Alarm 2 (Process Low Alarm) (S1+4)

Set the lower limit value of the process variable (1).
The alarm 2 value can be set in the range between the minimum value (5) and the alarm 1 value (process high alarm) (8).
If the process variable is lower than or equal to the alarm 2 value, the alarm 2 output (S3+4) turns on.
If the process variable is higher than the alarm 2 value, the alarm 2 output (S3+4) turns off.
A maximum of four alarms (Alarm 3 to Alarm 6) can be configured for the process variable in PID control.
Individually configure Alarm Type (10), Alarm Value (11), Hysteresis (12), and Delay Time (13).

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 19-7

19: PID CONTROL INSTRUCTION

10. Alarm Type

Select the type of alarm action from the following.
Type Action Example
No Alarm Action Do not output an alarm. -
Set point: 200.0°C 5.0°C
Alarm value: 5.0°C
Turns ON the alarm output when process variable ≥ Hysteresis: 2.0°C 2.0°C
(set point + alarm value). ON
Turns OFF the alarm output when process variable ≤
(set point + alarm value - hysteresis).
When (set point + alarm value - hysteresis) < process OFF
variable < (set point + alarm value), the alarm output 200.0°C 203.0°C 205.0°C
maintains the state of the previous scan. When process variable ≥ 205.0°C, the alarm output is turned ON.
When process variable ≤ 203.0°C, the alarm output is turned OFF.
Upper Limit Alarm
Alarm value Set point: 200.0°C 5.0°C
Hysteresis Alarm value: -5.0°C
Hysteresis: 2.0°C 2.0°C
ON
ON

OFF
OFF
- Alarm action point Set point + Alarm action point
193.0°C 195.0°C 200.0°C
When process variable ≥ 195.0°C, the alarm output is turned ON.
When process variable ≤ 193.0°C, the alarm output is turned OFF.
Set point: 200.0°C
5.0°C
Alarm value: 5.0°C
Hysteresis: 2.0°C 2.0°C
Turns ON the alarm output when process variable ≤
(set point + alarm value). ON

Turns OFF the alarm output when process variable ≥

(set point + alarm value + hysteresis).
OFF
When (set point + alarm value) < process variable <
200.0°C 205.0°C 207.0°C
(set point + alarm value + hysteresis), the alarm
When process variable ≤ 205.0°C, the alarm output is turned ON.
output maintains the state of the previous scan.
When process variable ≥ 207.0°C, the alarm output is turned OFF.
Lower Limit Alarm
Alarm value Set point: 200.0°C
5.0°C
Hysteresis Alarm value: -5.0°C
Hysteresis: 2.0°C 2.0°C
ON
ON

OFF
OFF
- Alarm action point Set point + Alarm action point
195.0°C 197.0°C 200.0°C
When process variable ≤ 195.0°C, the alarm output is turned ON.
When process variable ≥ 197.0°C, the alarm output is turned OFF.
Turns ON the alarm output when process variable ≥ Set point: 200.0°C
5.0°C 5.0°C
(set point + alarm value). Alarm value: 5.0°C
Turns ON the alarm output when process variable ≤ Hysteresis: 2.0°C 2.0°C 2.0°C
(set point - alarm value).
Turns OFF the alarm output when (set point - alarm ON
value + hysteresis) ≤ process variable ≤ (set point +
alarm value - hysteresis).
When (set point + alarm value - hysteresis) < process
OFF
variable < (set point + alarm value), the alarm output
maintains the state of the previous scan. 195.0°C 197.0°C 200.0°C 203.0°C 205.0°C

Upper/Lower Limit When (set point - alarm value) < process variable < When process variable ≥ 205.0°C, the alarm output is turned ON.
(set point - alarm value + hysteresis), the alarm When process variable ≤ 195.0°C, the alarm output is turned ON.
Alarm
output maintains the state of the previous scan. When 197.0°C ≤ process variable ≤ 203.0°C, the alarm output is turned OFF.
Alarm value Alarm value

Hysteresis Hysteresis

ON

OFF
Alarm action point Set point Alarm action point

19-8 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 19: PID CONTROL INSTRUCTION

Type Action Example

Turns ON the alarm output when (set point - alarm Set point: 200.0°C
5.0°C 5.0°C
value) ≤ process variable ≤ (set point + alarm value). Alarm value: 5.0°C
Turns OFF the alarm output when process variable ≥ Hysteresis: 2.0°C 2.0°C 2.0°C
(set point + alarm value + hysteresis).
Turns OFF the alarm output when process variable ≤ ON
(set point - alarm value - hysteresis).
When (set point + alarm value) < process variable <
(set point + alarm value + hysteresis), the alarm
OFF
output maintains the state of the previous scan.
When (set point - alarm value - hysteresis) < process 193.0°C 195.0°C 200.0°C 205.0°C 207.0°C
Upper/Lower Limit variable < (set point - alarm value), the alarm output When 195.0°C ≤ process variable ≤ 205.0°C, the alarm output is turned ON.
Range Alarm maintains the state of the previous scan. When process variable ≥ 207.0°C, the alarm output is turned OFF.
When process variable ≤ 193.0°C, the alarm output is turned OFF.
Alarm value Alarm value

Hysteresis Hysteresis

ON

OFF
Alarm action point Set point Alarm action point
Turns ON the alarm output when process variable ≥ Alarm value: 205.0°C
alarm value. Hysteresis: 2.0°C 2.0°C
Turns OFF the alarm output when process variable ≤
(alarm value - hysteresis). ON
When (alarm value - hysteresis) < process variable <
alarm value, the alarm output maintains the state of
the previous scan. OFF
Process High Alarm Hysteresis 203.0°C 205.0°C

ON
When process variable ≥ 205.0°C, the alarm output is turned ON.
When process variable ≤ 203.0°C, the alarm output is turned OFF.
OFF
Alarm action point
Turns ON the alarm output when process variable ≤ Alarm value: 195.0°C
alarm value. Hysteresis: 2.0°C 2.0°C
Turns OFF the alarm output when process variable ≥
(alarm value + hysteresis). ON
When alarm value < process variable < (alarm value
+ hysteresis), the alarm output maintains the state of
the previous scan. OFF
Process Low Alarm Hysteresis 195.0°C 197.0°C
When process variable ≤ 195.0°C, the alarm output is turned ON.
ON When process variable ≥ 197.0°C, the alarm output is turned OFF.

OFF
Alarm action point
Turns ON the alarm output when process variable ≥ Set point: 200.0°C
5.0°C
(set point + alarm value). Alarm value: 5.0°C
Turns OFF the alarm output when process variable ≤ Hysteresis: 2.0°C 2.0°C
(set point + alarm value - hysteresis).
When (set point + alarm value - hysteresis) < process ON
variable < (set point + alarm value), the alarm output
maintains the state of the previous scan.
The gray-colored portion is where the standby
OFF
function operates.
Upper Limit Alarm 200.0°C 203.0°C 205.0°C
with Standby Alarm value When process variable ≥ 205.0°C, the alarm output is turned ON.
Hysteresis When process variable ≤ 203.0°C, the alarm output is turned OFF.

ON

OFF
- Alarm action point Set point + Alarm action point

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 19-9

19: PID CONTROL INSTRUCTION

Type Action Example

Turns ON the alarm output when process variable ≤ Set point: 200.0°C
(set point + alarm value). Alarm value: -5.0°C 5.0°C
Turns OFF the alarm output when process variable ≥ Hysteresis: 2.0°C 2.0°C
(set point + alarm value + hysteresis).
When (set point + alarm value) < process variable < ON
(set point + alarm value + hysteresis), the alarm
output maintains the state of the previous scan.
The gray-colored portion is where the standby
OFF
function operates.
Lower Limit Alarm 195.0°C 197.0°C 200.0°C
with Standby Alarm value
When process variable ≤ 195.0°C, the alarm output is turned ON.
Hysteresis When process variable ≥ 197.0°C, the alarm output is turned OFF.

ON

OFF
- Alarm action point Set point + Alarm action point
Turns ON the alarm output when process variable ≥ Set point: 200.0°C
(set point + alarm value). Alarm value: 5.0°C 5.0°C 5.0°C
Turns ON the alarm output when process variable ≤ Hysteresis: 2.0°C 2.0°C 2.0°C
(set point - alarm value).
Turns OFF the alarm output when (set point - alarm ON
value + hysteresis) ≤ process variable ≤ (set point +
alarm value - hysteresis).
When (set point + alarm value - hysteresis) < process
OFF
variable < (set point + alarm value), the alarm output
maintains the state of the previous scan. 195.0°C 197.0°C 200.0°C 203.0°C 205.0°C
When (set point - alarm value) < process variable <
When process variable ≥ 205.0°C, the alarm output is turned ON.
(set point - alarm value + hysteresis), the alarm
Upper/Lower Limit When process variable ≤ 195.0°C, the alarm output is turned ON.
output maintains the state of the previous scan.
Alarm with Standby The gray-colored portion is where the standby When 197.0°C ≤ process variable ≤ 203.0°C, the alarm output is
turned OFF.
function operates.

Alarm value Alarm value

Hysteresis Hysteresis

ON

Alarm action point Set point Alarm action point

Notes:
• Alarm action point
This indicates the point where the alarm output changes from OFF to ON.
• Standby function
This function does not immediately turn ON the alarm output when starting execution of the PIDA instruction, even when the process
variable is in the alarm output ON range.
The standby function is canceled when the process variable enters the alarm output OFF range, and when the process variable enters the
alarm output ON range, the alarm output will turn ON.
If the set point is changed, the standby function will be enabled again.

(Alarm output ON range) (Alarm output ON range)

Process variable
(Alarm output OFF range)

ON
PID instruction input
OFF

ON
Alarm output
OFF

Cancel standby

19-10 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 19: PID CONTROL INSTRUCTION

11. Alarm Value

Set the value that will be the trigger condition for Alarm Type (10). The value to set differs by the alarm type.
The content for the alarm value is as follows.
Alarm Type Alarm Value Range
When the process variable is current/voltage
Upper Limit Alarm or a data register:
-32,768 to 32,767*1
When the process variable is a thermocouple
or resistance temperature detector and the
Lower Limit Alarm data type is set to Celsius or Fahrenheit:
-3,276.8 to 3,276.7ºC/ºF*1
Set the deviation from the set point.
When the process variable is current/voltage
Upper/Lower Limit Alarm or a data register:
0 to 65,535*1
When the process variable is a thermocouple
or resistance temperature detector and the
Upper/Lower Limit Range Alarm data type is set to Celsius or Fahrenheit:
0.0 to 6,553.5ºC/ºF*1
Process High Alarm Set the value where the alarm will operate as
Minimum to maximum*1
Process Low Alarm an absolute value.

When the process variable is current/voltage

Upper Limit Alarm with Standby or a data register:
-32,768 to 32,767*1
Set the deviation from the set point. When the process variable is a thermocouple
or resistance temperature detector and the
Lower Limit Alarm with Standby data type is set to Celsius or Fahrenheit:
-3,276.8 to 3,276.7ºC/ºF*1

When the process variable is current/voltage

or a data register:
0 to 65,535*1
Upper/Lower Limit Alarm with Standby Set the deviation from the set point. When the process variable is a thermocouple
or resistance temperature detector and the
data type is set to Celsius or Fahrenheit:
0.0 to 6,553.5ºC/ºF*1
*1 No alarm action when the alarm value is 0.
12. Hysteresis
Set the range from the alarm action point to when the alarm output changes from ON to OFF.
When hysteresis is set to a large value, the alarm output will not change by slight variations. When hysteresis is set to a small
value, the alarm output will change by slight variations near the alarm action point, which may negatively impact connected
equipment.
The range is 0.1 to 6,553.5 (°C/°F) or 1 to 65,535 (voltage/current input).
However, when the alarm type is Upper/Lower Limit Alarm or Upper/Lower Limit Alarm with Standby, you must set
hysteresis so that 1 ≤ hysteresis < Alarm Value (11) is satisfied.
13. Delay Time
Set the time until the alarm output is turned ON after the condition to turn the alarm output ON is satisfied.
The delay time prevents the alarm output from turning ON unintentionally when there are fluctuations in the process variable
due to the effects of noise.
After the condition to turn the alarm output ON has been satisfied, if it is no longer satisfied by when the delay time elapses, the
alarm output does not turn ON.
The range is 0 to 10,000 s. When 0, the delay time is disabled.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 19-11

19: PID CONTROL INSTRUCTION

■Control tab
This tab configures the control parameters for the PIDA instruction.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

10.

1. Control Mode (S1+6)

Select PID (PID Control), P (Proportional Control), PI (PI Control) or PD (PD Control) according to the characteristics
of the target application.
For details about each control, see "PID Control" on page 19-23.

2. Control Action (S3+0)

• Select the control action from Direct Control Action or Reverse Control Action.
• Direct control action operates to increase the output manipulated variable when the process variable is higher than the set point.
Cooling equipment uses this operation. Reverse control action operates to increase the output manipulated variable when the process
variable is lower than the set point. Heating furnaces uses this operation. (S3+0) is read-only.
Output manipulated Output manipulated
variable variable
Set Point Set Point

100% 100%

0% 0%

Process variable Process variable

Proportional Band Proportional Band
Direct control action Reverse control action

3. Set Point (S1+7)

The set point can be set between the minimum value and the maximum value of the process variable. The setting unit for the
set point is as follows.
When Analog Input thermocouple input or resistance temperature detector input is set for the process variable, it can be set in
units of 0.1°C/°F.
When Data Register or Analog Input voltage input, current input, thermistor, or resistance measurement is set for the
process variable, it can be set in units of 1.

19-12 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 19: PID CONTROL INSTRUCTION

4. Proportional Band (S1+8)

The proportional action changes the output proportional to the deviation between the set point and process variable.
If the process variable is in the range of the proportional band, the control output (S3+6) turns on or in proportional to the
deviation. If the process variable is out of the proportional band, the control output (S3+6) is always on or off.
When the proportional band is made larger, the control output (S3+6) turns on and off from a state where the deviation is large,
so overshooting (process variable goes above the set point), undershooting (process variable falls below the set point), and
hunting (process variable is in an unstable undulating state) decrease, but it takes time until the process variable reaches the set
point and the offset between the set point and the process variable becomes larger.
When the proportional band is made smaller, the control output starts turning on and off at near the set point, so the time until
the process variable reaches the set point decreases and the offset also becomes smaller, but hunting increases. If the
proportional band is set extremely small, the control is the same as on/off operation.
When auto tuning is used, the appropriate proportional band can be automatically set for the target application. For details, see
"Auto Tuning (AT)" on page 19-24.
The proportional band can be set from ±0.01 to ±100.00% in 0.01% increments.
5. Integral Time (S1+9)
With only the proportional action, an offset occurs between the set point and the process variable even when the target
application is in a stable state. In order to bring this offset close to 0, the integral action is required. Integral time is a factor that
determines the manipulated variable by the integral action. If the integral time is too short, the integral action becomes too large,
which causes hunting of a long cycle. Conversely, if the integral time is too long, the processing until the set point is reached will
take time. The integral execution range is - proportional band to + proportional band. If the process variable goes out of the
proportional band due to a change in the set point or a disturbance, the integration calculation stops. As a result, the response of
the output manipulated variable against the change in set point improves and undershoot and overshoot can be reduced.
When auto tuning is used, the appropriate integral time can be automatically set for the target application. For details, see "Auto
Tuning (AT)" on page 19-24.
The integral time can be set from 0.1 to 6,553.5 seconds in 0.1 second increments.
6. Derivative Time (S1+10)
When the set point changes or when the difference between the set point and the process variable increases due to a
disturbance, the derivative action quickly brings the process variable close to the set point by increasing the manipulated
variable. When the derivative time is decreased, the derivative action becomes weaker and the response to rapid temperature
changes becomes slower. The action to control rapid temperature increases also becomes weaker, so the time to reach the set
point will become shorter, but overshoot will occur more easily. When the derivative time is increased, the derivative action
becomes large and the response to rapid temperature changes becomes faster. The action to control rapid temperature
increases also becomes more powerful, so the time to reach the set point will become longer, but overshoot will occur less easily.
When auto tuning is used, the appropriate derivative time can be automatically set for the target application. For details, see
"Auto Tuning (AT)" on page 19-24.
The derivative time can be set from 0.1 to 6,553.5 seconds in 0.1 second increments.
7. Derivative Gain (S1+11)
When the derivative gain is set to a small value, the output manipulated variable is more easily affected by noise and changes in
the set point. When the derivative gain is set to a large value, the output manipulated variable is less easily affected by noise
and changes in the set point, but stability at normal times decreases. When noise or changes in the process variable occur,
normally set this to 20 to 30%.
The derivative gain can be set from 0 to 100% in 1% increments.
8. ARW (Anti-Reset Windup) (S1+12)
Set the point to start the integral action. If the integral term is enabled from the start of execution of the PIDA instruction,
overshoot may be caused. Overshoot can be controlled by delaying the integral action with ARW linked to the proportional band.
ARW is normally 100%, which results in appropriate control with little overshoot. If ARW is set too small, overshoot can be
eliminated, but an offset may occur.
The ARW can be set from 0 to 100%.
For example, when ARW=50% and proportional band=20.00%, the integral action starts from when the deviation becomes
smaller than 10%.
9. AT (Auto Tuning) Bias (S1+13)
Set the bias value for the auto tuning.
The auto tuning start point is determined by the AT bias value in 1 increments.
Process Variable Value AT Start Point
When process variable ≤ (set point - AT bias value) Set point - AT bias value
When process variable ≥ (set point + AT bias value) Set point + AT bias value
When (set point - AT bias value) < process variable < (set point + AT bias value) Set point

For details, see "Auto Tuning (AT)" on page 19-24.

The AT bias can be set in the range of process variable minimum value < (set point - AT bias setting value) or process
variable maximum value > (set point + AT bias setting value) in units of 1.
10. Advanced/Basic
Click this button to show or hide the advanced settings.
On the Control tab, Derivative Gain (7) can be set as an advanced setting.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 19-13

19: PID CONTROL INSTRUCTION

■Output tab
This tab configures the output parameters for the PIDA instruction.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.

1. Output Manipulated Variable (analog value) (S1+19)

Set the output for the PID control. The value can be specified as Analog Output or Data Register. The manipulated variable
calculated with the PIDA instruction according to the output manipulated variable limit (6) setting is stored.

When Analog Output is specified

Configure the module with the analog output you want to configure as the output manipulated variable (analog value)
destination and its analog number.
Analog Module Configure Select the analog output module.
Select the module as the CPU module, HMI module, or expansion module 1 to 15.
Analog Output No.: Select the output number on the analog output module.
Select as AQ0 to AQ7.
• For auto mode, the analog value stored in the output manipulated variable (S1+19) undergoes linear conversion in the range of
the maximum value and the minimum value of the analog output and is output.
• For manual mode, the value stored in the manual mode output manipulated variable (S1+17) undergoes linear conversion in the
range of the maximum value and the minimum value of the analog output and is output.
For switching between auto/manual mode, see "Auto/manual mode (S3+1)" on page 19-21.
The value of the output manipulated variable is automatically stored in the special data register that corresponds to the
analog output.
For allocating special data registers, see "Special Internal Relay Device Addresses" on page 2-3.
Note: To use an analog output, the analog output must be configured in advance.
For details on analog output settings, see Chapter 9 "Analog Module" in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s Manual".

When Data Register is specified

Specify the device to store the output manipulated variable.
• For auto mode, the output manipulated variable for PID control is stored in output manipulated variable (analog value) (S1+19)
for the control register.
• It is stored in the range of minimum value (5) ≤ output manipulated variable ≤ maximum value (4).
• For manual mode, the stored value is that the one, stored in the manual
mode output manipulated variable (S1+17), is converted linearly in the range of minimum value (5) and maximum value (4).
Configure parameters 2. Device Address through 5. Minimum Value when data register is selected as the process variable.

2. Device Address
Shows the control register (S1+19) configured on the devices tab when Data Register is specified as the output manipulated
variable (1).
3. Data Type
Select the output manipulated variable (1) data type as W (word) or I (integer).

19-14 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 19: PID CONTROL INSTRUCTION

4. Maximum Value, 5. Minimum Value

When Analog Output is specified for Output Manipulated Variable
This setting is disabled.
When Data Register is specified for Output Manipulated Variable
A value that is the PIDA instruction output manipulated variable having undergone linear conversion in the range of
maximum value (4) and minimum value (5) is stored in the set data register.
6. Output Manipulated Variable Limit
Set the output manipulated variable by restricting the manipulated variable calculated by the PIDA instruction.
When Disabled
The manipulated variable calculated by the PIDA instruction is the output manipulated variable.
When Enable (upper and lower limits)
When the manipulated variable calculated by the PIDA instruction exceeds the output manipulated variable upper limit or
lower limit, the upper limit value or the lower limit value is set as the output manipulated variable.
When Enable (percentage)
The result of the manipulated variable calculated by the PIDA instruction multiplied by 1 to 99% is set as the output
manipulated variable. The output manipulated variable lower limit (8) is disabled at this time.
7. Output Manipulated Variable Upper Limit/percentage (S1+14)
When Output manipulated variable restriction is Output manipulated variable (upper limit, lower limit)
Set the upper limit value of the output manipulated variable for the control output. When the manipulated variable
calculated by the PIDA instruction is higher than or equal to the output manipulated variable upper limit value, the set upper
limit value is set as the output manipulated variable for the control output. When setting the output manipulated variable
upper limit value, you must set the output manipulated variable upper limit value so that it satisfies output manipulated
variable lower limit value < output manipulated variable upper limit value.
The output manipulated variable upper limit value can be set from 0 to 100% in 1% increments.
When Enable (percentage)
The result of the manipulated variable calculated by the PIDA instruction multiplied by 1 to 99% is set as the output manipulated variable.
Output manipulated variable = manipulated variable calculated by the PIDA instruction x output manipulated variable (scaling factor)
8. Output Manipulated Variable Lower Limit (S1+15)
When Enable (upper and lower limits)
Set the lower limit value of the output manipulated variable for the control output. When the manipulated variable calculated by the
PIDA instruction is lower than or equal to the output manipulated variable lower limit value, the set lower limit value is set as the
output manipulated variable for the control output. When setting the output manipulated variable lower limit value, you must set the
output manipulated variable lower limit value so that it satisfies output manipulated variable lower limit value < output manipulated
variable upper limit value. The output manipulated variable lower limit value can be set from 0 to 100% in 1% increments.
When Enable (percentage)
The output manipulated variable lower limit is disabled.
9. Manual Mode Output MV (S1+17)
Set the output manipulated variable for manual mode. To enable this function, Auto/manual mode (S3+1) must be turned on.
The manual mode output manipulated variable is enabled for the output manipulated variable, the output manipulated variable
(digital value), and the control output.
For switching between auto/manual mode, see "Auto/manual mode (S3+1)" on page 19-21.
The manual mode output manipulated variable can be set from 0.00 to 100.00% in 0.01% increments. When the output
manipulated variable limit is Output manipulated variable (upper limit, lower limit), the manual mode output manipulated
variable must be set between output manipulated variable lower limit value and output manipulated variable upper limit value.
10. Output MV Rate-of-Change (S1+16)
Set the output manipulated variable to change in a second. When the output manipulated variable rate of change is 0%/second,
this function is disabled.
When the difference between the set point and process variable is large, the normal output switches from off to on as shown in
the diagram on the next page, but by setting the output manipulated variable rate of change, the rate of change for the output
manipulated variable can be changed as shown in the diagram on the next page.
The output manipulated variable rate of change can be set from 0 to 100%/second in 1% increments.
Normal output Output when the output manipulated variable rate of change is set
100% s 20% s 10% s
ON

OFF
1s 5s 10 s
This function is suitable for the control of high-temperature heaters (elements composed of molybdenum, tungsten, platinum,
used at approximately 1,500 to 1,800°C) that burn out when rapidly energized.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 19-15

19: PID CONTROL INSTRUCTION

11. Proportional Band Offset (S1+20)

Sets the offset for the proportional band. The output manipulated variable (S1+1) can be increased or decreased by the value
set as the proportional band offset.
For example, if the proportional band offset is set to 20%, the output manipulated variable (S1+1) is increased by 20%.
The proportional band offset can be set from -100 to 100%.
12. Control Period (S1+21)
Set the cycle to perform on/off control of the control (S3+5) output according to the output manipulated variable. The on pulse
width for the control period varies according to the output manipulated variable.
The control period can be set from 0.1 to 50.0 seconds in 0.1 second increments.
When control period: 5 seconds (set value 50)
Output manipulated Output manipulated Output manipulated
variable (80%) variable (60%) variable (50%)

OFF ON (4 s) OFF ON (3 s) OFF ON (2.5 s) OFF ON

Control output
5s 5s 5s

13. Advanced/Basic
Click this button and you can show or hide the advanced settings. On the Output tab, Output Manipulated Variable Limit (6),
Output Manipulated Variable Upper Limit/Percentage (7), Output Manipulated Variable Lower Limit (8), Manual Mode Output MV
(9), Output MV Rate-of-Change (10), Proportional Band Offset (11), and Control Period (12) can be set as advanced settings.

S1: Control Registers

Storage
Function Setting Details R/W
Destination
• When Analog Input is specified
AI0 to AI5 can be selected. S1+0 is read-only.
S1+0 Process variable • When Data Register is specified R/W
Store a value that satisfies process variable minimum value ≤ process
variable ≤ process variable maximum value. S1+0 is readable/writable.
S1+1 Output manipulated variable Store a value between 0 and 100 (0% to 100%). R
Store the PIDA instruction execution status or error status.
S1+2 Operation status R
For details, see "Operation status (S1+2)" on page 19-19.
Set a value that satisfies alarm 2 value (process low alarm) < alarm 1 value ≤
process variable maximum.
S1+3 Alarm 1 (process high alarm) R/W
Operates as process variable maximum value when alarm 1 value ≤ alarm 2
value (process low alarm) or alarm 1 value > process variable maximum value.
Set a value that satisfies process variable minimum value ≤ alarm 2 value <
alarm 1 value (process high alarm)
S1+4 Alarm 2 (process low alarm) R/W
Operates as process variable minimum value when alarm 2 value < process
value minimum value or alarm 1 value (process high alarm) ≤ alarm 2 value.
Set a value between 1 and 10,000 (0.01 to 100.00 seconds).
S1+5 Sampling period Sampling period of 0 operates as 0.01 seconds and 10,001 or higher operates R/W
as 100.00 seconds.
Select the control mode.
0: PID control
1: Proportional control
S1+6 Control mode R/W
2: PI control
3: PD control
Operates as 0 (PID Control) when a value other than those listed above.
Set a value that satisfies process variable minimum value ≤ set point ≤
process variable maximum value.
S1+7 Set point When set point < process variable minimum value or process variable R/W
maximum value < set point, a set point configuration error occurs and the
previous set point is retained.
Set a value between 1 and 10,000 (±0.01 to ±100.00%)
S1+8 Proportional band Proportional band of 0 operates as ±0.01% and 10,001 or higher operates as R/W
±100.00%.
Set a value between 1 and 65,535 (0.1 to 6553.5 seconds).
S1+9 Integral time R/W
When integral time is 0, integral time is disabled.

19-16 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 19: PID CONTROL INSTRUCTION

Storage
Function Setting Details R/W
Destination
Set a value between 1 and 65,535 (0.1 to 6553.5 seconds).
S1+10 Derivative time R/W
When derivative time is 0, derivative time is disabled.
Set a value between 0 and 100 (0 to 100%)
S1+11 Derivative gain R/W
Derivative gain of 0 operates as 0% and 101 or higher operates as 100%.
Set a value between 0 and 100 (0 to 100%)
S1+12 ARW R/W
ARW of 101 or higher operates as 100%.
Set a value that satisfies process variable minimum value < (set point - AT bias
setting value) and process variable maximum value > (set point + AT bias
S1+13 AT bias R/W
setting value). When a value is set that does not satisfy both conditions listed
above, 133 is stored in the operation status (S1+2).
• When Enable (upper and lower limits)
Set a value between 0 and 100 (0 to 100%)
Operates as 100 for a value other than 0 to 100.
• When Enable (percentage)
Output manipulated variable
S1+14 Set a value between 10001 and 10099 (1 to 99%) R/W
upper limit/percentage
Operates as the "Output manipulated variable upper limit" for a value
other than 10001 to 10099.
Output manipulated variable = manipulated variable calculated by the
PIDA instruction x scaling factor
Set a value between 0 and 100 (0 to 100%)
Output manipulated variable Operates as 0 for a value other than 0 to 100. Set a value that satisfies
S1+15 R/W
lower limit Output manipulated variable lower limit value < Output manipulated variable
upper limit value.
Output manipulated variable Set a value between 0 and 100 (0 to 100%/second)
S1+16 R/W
rate of change If not 0 to 100, output manipulated variable rate of change is disabled.
Set a value between 0 and 10000 (0.00 to 100.00%). Set a value that
satisfies output manipulated variable lower limit value ≤ manual mode output
manipulated variable ≤ output manipulated variable upper limit value.
Manual mode output
S1+17 When the output manipulated variable limit enable (S3+2) is ON, this R/W
manipulated variable
operates as the output manipulated variable lower limit value for a value
other than one between the output manipulated variable lower limit value
and the output manipulated variable upper limit value.
Output manipulated variable is stored as a value between -32,768 and
+32,767 (-327.68 to +327.67%).
Output manipulated variable The output manipulated variable (% value) is unknown while auto tuning is
S1+18 R
(% value) executing.
For manual mode, the manual mode output manipulated variable value is not
stored.
• When Analog Output is specified for the output manipulated variable
The S1+1 output manipulated variable (%) undergoes linear conversion in
the range of the minimum and maximum values of the analog output, and
Output manipulated variable that value is stored.
S1+19 R
(Analog value) • When Data Register is specified for the output manipulated variable
The output manipulated variable (%) stored in S1+1 is linearly converted
with the minimum and maximum output values, and the converted value is
stored in S1+19.
Set a value between -100 and 100 (-100 to 100%)
S1+20 Proportional band offset Proportional band offset of -101 or lower operates as -100% and 101 or R/W
higher operates as 100%.
Set a value between 1 and 500 (0.1 to 50.0 seconds)
S1+21 Control period Control period of 0 operates as 0.1 seconds and 501 or higher operates as R/W
50.0 seconds.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 19-17

19: PID CONTROL INSTRUCTION

Storage
Function Setting Details R/W
Destination
Set the Alarm 3 action type.
0: No Alarm Action
1: Upper Limit Alarm
2: Lower Limit Alarm
3: Upper/Lower Limit Alarm
4: Upper/Lower Limit Range Alarm
S1+22 Alarm 3 action R/W
5: Process High Alarm
6: Process Low Alarm
7: Upper Limit Alarm with Standby
8: Lower Limit Alarm with Standby
9: Upper/Lower Limit Alarm with Standby
Operates as 0 (No Alarm Action) for value other than those listed above.
Set the value that will be the trigger condition for the Alarm 3 action.
S1+23 Alarm 3 value R/W
For details, see "Alarm 3 value (S1+23)" on page 19-20.
Set the range from the alarm action point to when the alarm output changes
from ON to OFF.
Set a value that satisfies the following conditions in the range of 1 to 65,535
(0.1 to 6,553.5 (°C/°F), 1 to 65,535 (voltage/current input)).
• When Alarm 3 action is set to Upper/Lower Limit Alarm or Upper/
S1+24 Alarm 3 hysteresis Lower Limit Alarm with Standby R/W
1 ≤ Alarm 3 hysteresis < Alarm 3 value
• When Alarm 3 action is not set to Upper/Lower Limit Alarm or Upper/
Lower Limit Alarm with Standby
1 ≤ Alarm 3 hysteresis ≤ 65,535
When 0, hysteresis operates as 1 (0.1 (°C/°F) or 1 (voltage/current input)).
Set the time until the alarm output is turned ON after the condition to turn
the alarm output ON is satisfied.
S1+25 Alarm 3 delay time Set as 0 (delay time disabled) or in the range of 1 to 10,000 (1 to 10,000 R/W
seconds).
When 10,001 or higher, delay time operates as 10,000 seconds.
Set the Alarm 4 action type.
S1+26 Alarm 4 action R/W
The setting details are the same as Alarm 3 action (S1+22).
Set the value that will be the trigger condition for the Alarm 4 action.
S1+27 Alarm 4 value R/W
The setting details are the same as Alarm 3 value (S1+23).
Set the range from the alarm action point to when the alarm output changes
S1+28 Alarm 4 hysteresis from ON to OFF. R/W
The setting details are the same as Alarm 3 hysteresis (S1+24).
Set the time until the alarm output is turned ON after the condition to turn
S1+29 Alarm 4 delay time the alarm output ON is satisfied. R/W
The setting details are the same as Alarm 3 delay time (S1+25).
Set the Alarm 5 action type.
S1+30 Alarm 5 action R/W
The setting details are the same as Alarm 3 action (S1+22).
Set the value that will be the trigger condition for the Alarm 5 action.
S1+31 Alarm 5 value R/W
The setting details are the same as Alarm 3 value (S1+23).
Set the range from the alarm action point to when the alarm output changes
S1+32 Alarm 5 hysteresis from ON to OFF. R/W
The setting details are the same as Alarm 3 hysteresis (S1+24).
Set the time until the alarm output is turned ON after the condition to turn
S1+33 Alarm 5 delay time the alarm output ON is satisfied. R/W
The setting details are the same as Alarm 3 delay time (S1+25).
Set the Alarm 6 action type.
S1+34 Alarm 6 action R/W
The setting details are the same as Alarm 3 action (S1+22).
Set the value that will be the trigger condition for the Alarm 6 action.
S1+35 Alarm 6 value R/W
The setting details are the same as Alarm 3 value (S1+23).
Set the range from the alarm action point to when the alarm output changes
S1+36 Alarm 6 hysteresis from ON to OFF. R/W
The setting details are the same as Alarm 3 hysteresis (S1+24).
Set the time until the alarm output is turned ON after the condition to turn
S1+37 Alarm 6 delay time the alarm output ON is satisfied. R/W
The setting details are the same as Alarm 3 delay time (S1+25).
S1+38
— Reserved — — —
S1+39

19-18 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 19: PID CONTROL INSTRUCTION

Operation status (S1+2)

Indicates the PIDA instruction execution status or error status.
• X in the table indicates the elapsed time from the start of AT until the set point is reached. X is incremented by 1 every 10 minutes. 9 is
stored if the elapsed time is equal to or longer than 90 minutes.
• x in the table indicates the elapsed time from the start of PID instruction until the set point is reached. x is incremented by 1 every 10
minutes. 9 is stored if the elapsed time is equal to or longer than 90 minutes.
• If an error code (status code value is equal to or greater than 100 and less than 120) is set for the operation status, execution for PID control
is stopped. Set the correct parameters and then turn on the PIDA instruction input once again.

Status Code Status Description Status Classification

1x Auto tuning in progress
AT is normally executed
2x Auto tuning ended
5x P/PI/PID control in progress
PID control is normally executed
6x Set point is reached (Changes from 5x to 6x onace the set point is reached.)
Output manipulated variable restriction upper limit value < output manipulated
103 PID control execution stop
variable restriction lower limit value was set.
104 — Reserved — —
A value was set for the set point that does not satisfy process variable minimum value
106 PID control execution stop
≤ set point ≤ process variable maximum value.
Process variable > process variable maximum value or process variable < process
109 PID control execution stop
variable minimum value was set.
120 The control mode was set to a value other than 0 to 3. PID control execution continues
121 The sampling period was set to 0 or 10,001 or greater. PID control execution continues
122 The proportional band was set to 0 or a value of 10,001 or greater. PID control execution continues
123 The derivative gain was set to 0 or a value of 101 or greater. PID control execution continues
124 The integral start factor (ARW) was set to a value of 101 or greater. PID control execution continues
A value was set for the alarm 1 value (process high alarm) that does not satisfy alarm
125 2 value (process low alarm) < alarm 1 value (process high alarm) ≤ process variable PID control execution continues
maximum value.
A value was set for the alarm 2 value (process low alarm) that does not satisfy
126 process variable minimum value ≤ alarm 2 value (process low alarm) < alarm 1 value PID control execution continues
(process high alarm).
The output manipulated variable restriction upper limit value was set to a value
127 PID control execution continues
between 101 to 10,000 or 10,100 to 65,535.
The output manipulated variable restriction lower limit value was set to a value of 101
128 PID control execution continues
or higher. PID execution continues
129 The output manipulated variable rate of change was set to a value of 101 or higher. PID control execution continues
The manual mode output manipulated variable was set to a value that does not satisfy
130 output manipulated variable restriction lower limit value ≤ manual mode output PID control execution continues
manipulated variable ≤ output manipulated variable restriction upper limit value.
131 The proportional band offset value was set to a value that is not between -100 to 100. PID control execution continues
132 The control cycle was set to 0 or a value of 501 or greater. PID control execution continues
A value was set that does not satisfy process variable minimum value < (set point - AT bias
133 PID control execution continues
setting value) and process variable maximum value > (set point + AT bias setting value).
The PIDA instruction is executed, and from the second and subsequent scans, a value PID control execution continues
134 is set for the set point that does not satisfy minimum value ≤ set point ≤ maximum (Maintains the set point in the normal
value. range up to the previous scan.)
135 to 199 — Reserved — —
200 The alarm type for Alarm 3 was set to a value of 10 or higher. PID control execution continues
201 The alarm type for Alarm 4 was set to a value of 10 or higher. PID control execution continues
202 The alarm type for Alarm 5 was set to a value of 10 or higher. PID control execution continues
203 The alarm type for Alarm 6 was set to a value of 10 or higher. PID control execution continues
204 to 209 — Reserved — —
The action point for Alarm 3 with the set alarm value exceeded the process variable
210 PID control execution continues
minimum value or maximum value.
The action point for Alarm 4 with the set alarm value exceeded the process variable
211 PID control execution continues
minimum value or maximum value.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 19-19

19: PID CONTROL INSTRUCTION

Status Code Status Description Status Classification

The action point for Alarm 5 with the set alarm value exceeded the process variable
212 PID control control execution continues
minimum value or maximum value.
The action point for Alarm 6 with the set alarm value exceeded the process variable
213 PID control execution continues
minimum value or maximum value.
214 to 219 — Reserved — —
The action point for Alarm 3 with the set hysteresis exceeded the process variable
220 PID control execution continues
minimum value or maximum value.
The action point for Alarm 4 with the set hysteresis exceeded the process variable
221 PID control execution continues
minimum value or maximum value.
The action point for Alarm 5 with the set hysteresis exceeded the process variable
222 PID control execution continues
minimum value or maximum value.
The action point for Alarm 6 with the set hysteresis exceeded the process variable
223 PID control execution continues
minimum value or maximum value.
224 to 229 — Reserved — —
230 The Alarm 3 delay time was set to a value of 10,001 or higher. PID control execution continues
231 The Alarm 4 delay time was set to a value of 10,001 or higher. PID control execution continues
232 The Alarm 5 delay time was set to a value of 10,001 or higher. PID control execution continues
233 The Alarm 6 delay time was set to a value of 10,001 or higher. PID control execution continues
234 to 239 — Reserved — —
When the Alarm 3 alarm type was set to the upper/lower limit alarm or the upper/
240 lower limit alarm with standby, the Alarm 3 hysteresis was set to a value that does not PID control execution continues
satisfy hysteresis < alarm value.
When the Alarm 4 alarm type was set to the upper/lower limit alarm or the upper/
241 lower limit alarm with standby, the Alarm 4 hysteresis was set to a value that does not PID control execution continues
satisfy hysteresis < alarm value.
When the Alarm 5 alarm type was set to the upper/lower limit alarm or the upper/
242 lower limit alarm with standby, the Alarm 5 hysteresis was set to a value that does not PID control execution continues
satisfy hysteresis < alarm value.
When the Alarm 6 alarm type was set to the upper/lower limit alarm or the upper/
243 lower limit alarm with standby, the Alarm 6 hysteresis was set to a value that does not PID control execution continues
satisfy hysteresis < alarm value.
244 to
— Reserved — —
65535

Alarm 3 value (S1+23)

Set the value that will be the trigger condition for the alarm. The value to set differs by the alarm type.
The content for the alarm value is as follows.

Alarm Type Alarm Value Range

Upper Limit Alarm
-32,768 to 32,767*1
Lower Limit Alarm
Set the deviation value from the set point.
Upper/Lower Limit Alarm
0 to 65,535*1
Upper/Lower Limit Range Alarm
Process High Alarm Set the value where the alarm will operate as an
Minimum to maximum
Process Low Alarm absolute value.
Upper Limit Alarm with Standby
-32,768 to 32,767*1
Lower Limit Alarm with Standby Set the deviation value from the set point.
Upper/Lower Limit Alarm with Standby 0 to 65,535*1
*1 No alarm action when the alarm value is 0.

S2: Initialization Input

When the initialize input is on, the control registers (data registers) are overwritten with the values configured on the WindLDR
input tab, control tab, and output tab. If you want the initialization to be performed just one time, please use a SOTU (shot up)
or a SOTD (shot down) instruction.

19-20 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 19: PID CONTROL INSTRUCTION

S3: Control Relay

Device Function Setting Details R/W
0 (OFF): Reverse control action
S3+0 Control action R
1 (ON): Direct control action
0 (OFF): Auto
S3+1 Auto/manual mode R/W
1 (ON): Manual
Output manipulated variable 0 (OFF): Disabled
S3+2 R/W
limit enable 1 (ON): Enabled (operates with S1+14, 15 settings)
S3+3 Alarm 1 output Turns on when process variable (S1+0) ≥ alarm 1 value (process high alarm) (S1+3). R
S3+4 Alarm 2 output Turns on when process variable (S1+0) ≤ alarm 2 value (process low alarm) (S1+4). R
S3+5 Control output Turns on and off according to the control period and output manipulated variable. R
Starts auto tuning when execute auto tuning is turned on.
S3+6 AT execution R/W
Stops auto tuning if execute auto tuning is turned off while auto tuning is executed.
S3+7 AT complete output Turns on after auto tuning ends R
Turns ON when the process variable (S1+0) is outside the Alarm 3 action (S1+22) range.
S3+8 Alarm 3 output R
Turns OFF when the process variable (S1+0) is inside the Alarm 3 action (S1+22) range.
Turns ON when the process variable (S1+0) is outside the Alarm 4 action (S1+26) range.
S3+9 Alarm 4 output R
Turns OFF when the process variable (S1+0) is inside the Alarm 4 action (S1+26) range.
Turns ON when the process variable (S1+0) is outside the Alarm 5 action (S1+30) range.
S3+10 Alarm 5 output R
Turns OFF when the process variable (S1+0) is inside the Alarm 5 action (S1+30) range.
Turns ON when the process variable (S1+0) is outside the Alarm 6 action (S1+34) range.
S3+11 Alarm 6 output R
Turns OFF when the process variable (S1+0) is inside the Alarm 6 action (S1+34) range.
S3+12 to
— Reserved — — —
S3+15

Operation action (S3+0)

In direct control action, PID instruction operates to increase the output manipulated variable when the process variable is higher
than the set point. Cooling equipment uses this operation. In reverse control action, PID instruction operates to increase the
output manipulated variable when the process variable is lower than the set point. Heating furnaces uses this operation.

Output manipulated Output manipulated

variable variable
Set Point Set Point

100% 100%

0% 0%

Process variable Process variable

Proportional Band Proportional Band
Direct control action Reverse control action

Auto/manual mode (S3+1)

In auto mode, PIDA instruction controls the output according to the manipulated variable calculated by the PID instruction. In
manual mode, PIDA instruction controls the output with the manual mode output manipulated variable (S1+17). To use manual
mode, you must set the manual mode output manipulated variable in advance.

Output manipulated variable limit enable (S3+2)

You can enable or disable the output manipulated variable restriction using the output manipulated variable upper limit value
(S1+14) and the output manipulated variable lower limit value (S1+15).

Alarm 1 output (S3+3)

Turns on if the process variable (S1+0) is higher than or equal to the alarm 1 value (process high alarm) (S1+3). This is read-only data.

Alarm 2 output (S3+4)

Turns on if the process variable (S1+0) is lower than or equal to the alarm 2 value (process low alarm) (S1+4). This is read-only data.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 19-21

19: PID CONTROL INSTRUCTION

Control output (S3+5)

When PIDA instruction is in auto mode, the control output turns on and off according to the manipulated variable calculated by
the PIDA instruction and the control period (S1+21). When PIDA instruction is in manual mode, the control output turns on and
off according to the manual mode output manipulated variable (S1+17) and the control period.

AT execution (S3+6)
When the execute auto tuning is turned on, auto tuning is initiated. Once auto tuning is finished, it is turned off automatically.
The auto tuning is terminated if it is turned off while auto tuning is executed.

AT complete output (S3+7)

The auto tuning completion output is turned on when the auto tuning is successfully completed.

Alarm 3 output (S3+8)

Turns ON when the process variable (S1+0) is outside the Alarm 3 action (S1+22) range.
Turns OFF when the process variable (S1+0) is inside the Alarm 3 action (S1+22) range. This is read-only data.

Alarm 4 output (S3+9)

Turns ON when the process variable (S1+0) is outside the Alarm 4 action (S1+26) range.
Turns OFF when the process variable (S1+0) is inside the Alarm 4 action (S1+26) range. This is read-only data.

Alarm 5 output (S3+10)

Turns ON when the process variable (S1+0) is outside the Alarm 5 action (S1+30) range.
Turns OFF when the process variable (S1+0) is inside the Alarm 5 action (S1+30) range. This is read-only data.

Alarm 6 output (S3+11)

Turns ON when the process variable (S1+0) is outside the Alarm 6 action (S1+34) range.
Turns OFF when the process variable (S1+0) is inside the Alarm 6 action (S1+34) range. This is read-only data.

19-22 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 19: PID CONTROL INSTRUCTION

PID Control
PID control performs adjustment operations to cancel the deviation between a single set point and the process variable that is
present in normal temperature control. The types of PID control that can be used with the FC6A Series MicroSmart are as follows.
■Proportional control
Proportional control outputs the manipulated variable in the proportional band that is proportional to the deviation between the set
point and the process variable. The output is turned on until the process variable reaches the A point (the proportional band), and
when it exceeds this (it enters the proportional band), the control output starts to be turned on and off at the control cycle, and
then when the set point is exceeded, the control output is turned completely off. Along with the rise in temperature from the A
point to the set point, the control output on time becomes shorter and the off time becomes longer. An offset always occurs with
Proportional control. The P action is suitable for processes with no wasted time such as gas pressure control and level control.
When set to Proportional control, integral time and derivative time are automatically ignored.
Temperature Proportional band Offset
Set point

A point

Time
• When the proportional band is made smaller, the control output turns on or off from near the set point, so the time until the process variable
rises in temperature to the set point decreases and the offset also becomes smaller, but hunting increases.
• When the proportional band is made larger, the control output turns on or off from a temperature considerably lower than the target
temperature, so auto tuning and hunting eliminate, but it takes time until the process variable rises in temperature to the set point and the
offset between the set point and the process variable becomes larger.

■PI control
The I action automatically corrects the offset generated by Proportional control. However, for rapid changes in temperature due to
disturbances, it will take time until the temperature stabilizes. The PI action is suitable for temperature control with a slow rate of change.
When set to PI control, derivative time is automatically 0.
Temperature Proportional band

Set point

Disturbance

Time
• If the integral time is too small, I (integral) control becomes more powerful and the offset can be corrected in a short amount of time, but this
may cause long cycles of hunting.
• If the integral time is too large, I (integral) control becomes weaker and it takes time to correct the offset.

■PD control
Compared to Proportional control, PD control increases the response to rapid temperature changes due to disturbances, stabilizes
control in a short amount of time, and attempts to improve the transient response characteristics. PD control is suitable to
temperature control with a fast rate of change.
When set to PD control, integral time is automatically 0.
Temperature Proportional band
Set point

Disturbance

Time
• When the derivative time is decreased, the D (derivative) control becomes weaker and the response to rapid temperature changes becomes
slower. The action to control rapid temperature increases also becomes weaker, so the rise in temperature time to the set point will become
faster, but overshooting the set point will occur more easily.
• When the derivative time is increased, the D (derivative) control becomes more powerful and the response to rapid temperature changes
becomes faster. The action to control rapid temperature increases also becomes more powerful, so the rise in temperature time to the set
point will become slower, but overshooting the set point will occur less easily.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 19-23

19: PID CONTROL INSTRUCTION

■PID control
PID controls overshooting and hunting in Proportional control, corrects the offset in I (integral) control, and makes rapid
temperature changes due to disturbances converge on the set point in a short amount of time in D (derivative) control. Ideal
temperature control can be performed by using PID control. The parameters for the proportional band, integral time, and
derivative time in PID control can be automatically set with auto tuning.

Temperature
Set point

Disturbance

Time

Auto Tuning (AT)

Optimal temperature control parameters will differ according to the characteristics of the subject to control. When performing PID
control, the proportional band (P), integral time (I), and derivative time (D) can be automatically set by executing auto tuning.
• Perform auto tuning during test operation.
• When auto tuning is executed near normal temperatures, temperature fluctuations cannot be imposed, so auto tuning may not end normally.
In such cases, set the values for P, I, and D manually.
• When auto turning is executed once, so long as the process is not changed, it is not necessary to execute auto tuning again.

■Auto tuning (AT)

In order to automatically set the proportional band (P), integral time (I), and derivative time (D), fluctuations must be forcibly
imposed on the subject to control to set each value to the optimal value. In order to perform optimal auto tuning, fluctuations
must be imposed when the process variable has reached a value near the set point. Fluctuations can be imposed when the process
variable is near the set point by setting the AT bias. The relationship between the set point, AT bias, auto tuning start point, and
fluctuation start point is as follows.
Process variable (PV) ≤ set point (SP) - AT bias setting value
When the AT bias setting is set to 20°C, fluctuations will start when the process variable (PV) reaches a temperature 20°C lower
than the set point (SP).

1. Measuring PID constants

Temperature Proportional band 2. Calculate PID constants
SP 3. Control with the PID constants set with AT
4 4. AT bias setting value (20)
SP-20
AT: When the AT execution bit is turned on

AT Time

1 2 3

Set point (SP) - AT bias setting value < process variable (PV) < set point (SP) + AT bias setting value
Fluctuations will start when the process variable (PV) reaches the set point (SP).

1. Measuring PID constants

Temperature Proportional band 2. Calculate PID constants
SP+20 3. Control with the PID constants set with AT
4 4. AT bias setting value (20)
SP
4 AT: When the AT execution bit is turned on
SP-20

AT Time

1 2 3

19-24 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 19: PID CONTROL INSTRUCTION

Process variable (PV) ≥ set point (SP) + AT bias setting value

When the AT bias setting is set to 20°C, fluctuations will start when the process variable (PV) reaches a temperature 20°C higher
than the set point (SP).

1. Measuring PID constants

Temperature 2. Calculate PID constants
3. Control with the PID constants set with AT
4. AT bias setting value (20)
SP+20
4 AT: When the AT execution bit is turned on
SP

AT Time

1 2 3

■To execute auto tuning (AT)

To execute auto tuning, turn on the auto tuning execution flag (S3+6) when the PIDA instruction input is on. The values for P, I,
and D will be automatically calculated. While auto tuning is executing, 1 is stored in the operation status (S1+2).
When auto tuning ends, the auto tuning execution flag (S3+6) turns off automatically, 2 is stored in the operation status (S1+2),
and the auto tuning completed output (S3+7) turns on.

■To cancel auto tuning (AT) execution

To cancel auto tuning while it is executing, turn off the auto tuning execution flag (S3+6). When the auto tuning execution flag
(S3+6) is turned off, auto tuning stops, 2 is stored in the operation status (S1+2), and the auto tuning completed output (S3+7)
turns on.
If auto tuning is canceled without completing, the values for P, I, and D are restored to the values before auto tuning was
executed.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 19-25

19: PID CONTROL INSTRUCTION

PIDD (PID with Derivative Decay)

Executes PID control and outputs that result. The PID control parameters stored in the control registers are handled as data type
F (float), and fine adjustments can be made to the control parameters such as proportional gain, integral gain, and derivative gain.
Multiple PIDD instructions can also be combined to execute the cascade control.

PIDD ** S1 S2 S3 SP PV MV
***** ***** ***** ***** ***** *****

Operation
When the input is on, PID control is performed.

Knowledge of PID control is required to use the PIDD instruction. If this instruction is used without an
Warning
understanding of PID control, there is a possibility of control that was not intended by the user. Please use the
PIDD instruction with a full understanding of PID control and the PIDD instruction.
When performing feedback control using the PIDD instruction, emergency stop and interlocking circuits must
be configured outside the FC6A Series MicroSmart according to the user application. If these are configured in
the internal circuit and the process variable is not input correctly, there is a risk of no longer being able to
perform proper feedback control, which may damage connected devices or cause accidents.

The PIDD instruction cannot be used in an interrupt program. If the instruction is used in an interrupt program, a user
Caution
program execution error occurs, the execution of the instruction is canceled, and the next instruction is executed.
For user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

Note: A maximum of 32 PIDD instructions can be used in a user program.

Valid Devices
The control register uses 100 data registers, and the control relay uses 32 internal relays.

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) Control registers — — — — — — X*1 — —
S2 (Source 2) Initialization input X — X — — — — — —
S3 (Source 3) Control relays — — X*2 — — — — — —

*1 D0 to D7900, and D10000 to D55900 can be specified. Special data registers cannot be used.
*2 M0 to M7960, and M10000 to M17460 can be specified. Special internal relays cannot be used.

19-26 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 19: PID CONTROL INSTRUCTION

Settings
The PIDD (PID with Derivative Decay) dialog box contains the Device tab, Controller tab, and Tuning tab.
The devices used with the PIDD instruction are configured in the Device tab.
The initial values of the PIDD instruction parameters are configured in Controller and Tuning tabs.

■Device tab

1. 2. 3.

4.

1. S1 (source 1): Control Register

Specify the starting device of the data register range that stores the PIDD instruction control parameters.
Starting from the specified data register, 100 data registers are used. The devices that can be specified as data registers are
data registers D0000 to D7900 and D10000 to D55900.
When the PIDD instruction initialization input is turned on, the control registers are initialized with the values set on the
Controller and Tuning tabs.
For the control registers, see "S1: Control Registers" on page 19-32.

2. S2 (source 2): Initialization Input

Specify the device that initializes the PIDD instruction control registers and control relays.
The device that can be specified as the initialization input is an external input or internal relay.
The parameters set on the Controller and Tuning tabs in the PIDD instruction dialog box are the initial values of the PIDD
instruction control registers and control relays. These initial values are downloaded to the PLC as the user program and stored in
the PLC's ROM. When the initialization input is on, the initial values of the PIDD instruction in ROM are stored in the control
registers and control relays.
While the initialization input is on, the initialization is performed at each scan. Use the SOTU instruction (single output up) or the
SOTD (single output down) instruction to turn on the initialization input for only one scan.

3. S3 (source 3): Control Relay

Specify the bit devices that will control PID control and store the status of PIDD instructions.
Starting from the specified internal relay, 32 internal relays are used. The devices that can be specified are internal relays M0 to
M7960 and M10000 to M17460. Special internal relays cannot be specified.
The role of each control relay bit is different. The operation of PIDD instruction such as direct control action/reverse control
action, derivative action enabled/disabled, and auto mode/manual mode/cascade control mode can be toggled by turning the
corresponding bit on and off.
For the control relays, see "S3: Control Relay" on page 19-21.

4. PIDD No.
Assign a unique number from 0 to 31 to identify each PIDD instruction.
When performing the cascade control, specify the master PIDD instruction by its PIDD number.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 19-27

19: PID CONTROL INSTRUCTION

■Controller tab
This tab is used to configure the control parameters of the PIDD instruction.
To store the initial settings of the PIDD instruction that are set on the Controller tab in the control registers and control relays,
turn on the initialization input for the corresponding PIDD instruction after the user program is downloaded to the FC6A Series
MicroSmart.

1.
2.
3.

4.

5.

6.

7.
8.

1. Control Mode and Set Point (S3+1 to S3+3)

Specifies the PID control mode and the referenced set point.
Select Auto Mode - LSP (S1+2, S1+3) or Cascade Control - RSP (S1+4, S1+5).

When Auto Mode - LSP (S1+2, S1+3) is selected

The PIDD instruction becomes Auto Mode. Auto Mode Select (S3+2) will be on, Manual Mode Select (S3+1) will be off, and
Cascade Control Mode Select (S3+3) will be off.
When set to Auto Mode, store the set point in Set Point (SP) (S1+2, S1+3) in the range of SP Low Limit and SP High Limit.
If the value of Set Point (SP) (S1+2, S1+3) is higher than SP High Limit, the PID control set point will be SP High Limit. If the
value of Set Point (SP) (S1+2, S1+3) is lower than SP Low Limit, the PID control set point will be SP Low Limit. If the set point
is outside the range of the high limit and low limit, error code 106 will be stored in Error Status (S1+34, S1+35).

When Cascade Control - RSP (S1+4, S1+5) is selected

The PIDD instruction becomes Cascade Control Mode. Cascade Control Mode Select (S3+3) will be on, Manual Mode Select
(S3+1) will be off, and Auto Mode Select (S3+2) will be off.
When set to Cascade Control Mode, store the set point in Remote Set Point (RSP) (S1+4, S1+5) in the range of 0.0 and 100.0%.
When another PIDD instruction is specified as Master PIDD No., Output Manipulated Variable (MV) (S1+16, S1+17) of the
specified PIDD instruction is automatically loaded into Remote Set Point (RSP) (S1+4, S1+5).
Remote Set Point (RSP) (S1+4, S1+5) will be converted to the full scale of SP Lower Range Value (S1+44, S1+45) to SP Upper
Range Value (S1+46, S1+47). If the converted set point is higher than SP High Limit (S1+28, S1+29), the set point will be SP
High Limit. If the converted set point is lower than SP Low Limit (S1+26, S1+27), the set point will be SP Low Limit. The
converted set point is stored in Set Point (SP) (S1+2, S1+3).

19-28 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 19: PID CONTROL INSTRUCTION

SP Upper Range Value (S1+46, S1+47)

Remote Set Point (RSP) SP High Limit (S1+28, S1+29)
(S1+4, S1+5)

Full Scale of
0.0 to 100.0% Set Point (SP) (S1+2, S1+3)
Set Point (SP)

SP Low Limit (S1+26, S1+27)

SP Lower Range Value (S1+44, S1+45)

2. Control Action (S3+0)

Select Reverse Control Action or Direct Control Action. When Reverse Control Action is selected, Control Action (S3+0)
will be off. When Direct Control Action is selected, Control Action (S3+0) will be on.
For Reverse Control Action, when PIDD instruction Process Variable (PV) becomes larger than Set Point (SP), Output
Manipulated Variable (MV) becomes smaller. Reverse Control Action is used for applications such as heating control.
For Direct Control Action, when PIDD instruction Process Variable (PV) becomes larger than Set Point (SP), Output Manipulated
Variable (MV) also becomes larger. Direct Control Action is used for applications such as cooling control.

3. Kp Dependent (S3+8)
Select Dependent or Independent. When Dependent is selected, Kp Dependent (S3+8) will be off. When Independent is
selected, Kp Dependent (S3+8) will be on.
When Kp Dependent is selected, the integral and derivative actions grow larger in proportion to Kp (Gain) (S1+6, S1+7). When
Kp Independent is selected, Kp (Gain) (S1+6, S1+7) has no effect on the integral and derivative actions.

4. Process Variable (PV) (S1+0, S1+1)

Select Analog Input or Data Register as the process variable (PV) for PID control.

When Analog Input is specified

A built-in analog input in the CPU or an analog input of the analog cartridge or analog module can be selected as the process
variable (PV) of the PIDD instruction. Specify the analog input with the module and analog input number.

Module: Select the module having the analog input to specify.

CPU/HMI Module: Built-in analog input, analog cartridge
Expansion Module 1 to 15: Analog module
Analog Input No.: Select the analog input number from AI0 to AI7.
The input value of the specified analog input will be converted to the full scale of PV Lower Range Value (S1+22, S1+23) to
PV Upper Range Value (S1+24, S1+25), and that converted value will be the process variable (PV) for PID control. The
process variable is stored in Process Variable (PV) (S1+0, S1+1).

PV Upper Range Value (S1+24, S1+25)

Full Scale of
Full Scale of
Process Process Variable (PV) (S1+0, S1+1)
Analog Input
Variable (PV)

PV Lower Range Value (S1+22, S1+23)

Notes:
• When Analog Input is specified, the analog cartridge or analog module must be configured in the Expansion Editor.
For details on how to configure analog inputs, see Chapter 9 "Analog Module" in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s Manual".

• The analog volume on the CPU module cannot be specified as an analog input.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 19-29

19: PID CONTROL INSTRUCTION

When Data Register is specified

A data register can be specified as the process variable (PV) of the PIDD instruction. The PIDD instruction loads the value
(data type F (float)) stored in the two data registers starting from the specified data register as the process variable.
If the data register value is higher than PV Upper Range Value, the process variable will be PV Upper Range Value. If the
data register value is lower than PV Lower Range Value, the process variable will be PV Lower Range Value. The process
variable is stored in Process Variable (PV) (S1+0, S1+1).

PV Upper Range Value (S1+24, S1+25)

Full Scale of
Data Register
Process Process Variable (PV) (S1+0, S1+1)
(Float Value)
Variable (PV)

PV Lower Range Value (S1+22, S1+23)

Data Registers*1: D0000 to D7998 and D10000 to D55998

Data Type: F (float)
*1 Two consecutive data registers are used. The data register to specify cannot be overlapped with the control register range.

5. PV Upper Range Value (URV) (S1+24, S1+25), PV Lower Range Value (LRV) (S1+22, S1+23)
Sets the full scale of Process Variable (PV) (S1+0, S1+1) with the minimum and maximum values.
If the process variable is higher than PV Upper Range Value (S1+24, S1+25), Process Variable (PV) (S1+0, S1+1) will be PV
Upper Range Value. If the process variable is lower than PV Lower Range Value (S1+22, S1+23), Process Variable (PV) (S1+0,
S1+1) will be PV Lower Range Value. Error code 109 will be stored in Error Status (S1+34, S1+35) in those cases.
PV Upper Range Value (S1+24, S1+25) and PV Lower Range Value (S1+22, S1+23) are set as data type F (float) between
-32,768.0 to 65,535.0.

6. SP High Limit (S1+28, S1+29), SP Low Limit (S1+26, S1+27)

Sets the upper limit and lower limit of Set Point (SP) (S1+2, S1+3).
If the value of Set Point (SP) (S1+2, S1+3) is higher than SP High Limit (S1+28, S1+29), the PIDD control set point will be SP
High Limit. If the value of Set Point (SP) (S1+2, S1+3) is lower than SP Low Limit (S1+26, S1+27), the PIDD control set point
will be SP Low Limit.
SP High Limit (S1+28, S1+29) and SP Low Limit (S1+26, S1+27) are set as data type F (float) between SP Lower Range Value
(S1+44, S1+45) and SP Upper Range Value (S1+46, S1+47).
SP Lower Range Value (S1+44, S1+45) and SP Upper Range Value (S1+46, S1+47) are automatically set to the values of PV
Lower Range Value (S1+22, S1+23) and PV Upper Range Value (S1+24, S1+25). The full scale of the set point (SP) is the same
as the full scale of the process variable (PV).

7. Set Point (SP) (S1+2, S1+3)

Sets the set point (SP) for PID control.
Set Point (SP) (S1+2, S1+3) is set as data type F (float) between SP Low Limit (S1+26, S1+27) and SP High Limit (S1+28,
S1+29).

8. MV High Limit (S1+32, S1+33), MV Low Limit (S1+30, S1+31)

Sets the upper limit and lower limit of Output Manipulated Variable (MV) (S1+16, S1+17).
If the output manipulated variable calculated with PID control (0 to 100%) is greater than MV High Limit (S1+32, S1+33),
Output Manipulated Variable (MV) (S1+16, S1+17) will be MV High Limit. If the output manipulated variable calculated with PID
control (0 to 100%) is less than MV Low Limit (S1+30, S1+31), Output Manipulated Variable (MV) (S1+16, S1+17) will be MV
Low Limit.
MV High Limit (S1+32, S1+33) and MV Low Limit (S1+30, S1+31) are set as data type F (float) between 0.0 and 100.0 (0.0 and
100.0%).

19-30 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 19: PID CONTROL INSTRUCTION

■Tuning tab
This tab is used to configure the tuning parameters of the PIDD instruction.
To store the initial values of the PIDD instruction that are set on the Tuning tab in the control registers and control relays, turn on
the initialization input for the corresponding PIDD instruction after the user program is downloaded to the FC6A Series MicroSmart.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

1. Kp (Gain) (S1+6, S1+7)

Sets the proportional gain for PID control. The proportional action changes the output in proportion to the difference (called the
offset) between the set point (SP) and the process variable (PV). If the process variable is within the range of the proportional
band, the output manipulated variable proportional to the deviation is output.
When the proportional gain is made smaller, overshooting (process variable goes above the set point), undershooting (process
variable falls below the set point), and hunting (process variable is in an unstable undulating state) decrease, but it takes time
until the process variable reaches the set point and the offset between the set point and the process variable becomes larger.
When proportional gain is made larger, the time until the process variable reaches the set point decreases and the offset
becomes smaller, but hunting increases.
Kp (Gain) (S1+6, S1+7) is set as data type F (float) between 0.00001 and 100.0 (0.00001 and 100.0%).

2. Ki (Integral) (S1+8, S1+9)

Sets the integral gain for PID control. With only the proportional action, an offset occurs between the set point and the process
variable even when the subject to control has reached a stable state. In order to bring this offset close to 0, the integral action
is required. Integral gain is the factor that determines the output manipulated variable by the integral action.
When integral gain is increased, the integral action becomes stronger and the set point is quickly reached, but this causes
hunting with a long cycle. When integral gain is decreased, it will take time to reach the set point.
Ki (Integral) (S1+8, S1+9) is set as data type F (float) between 0.00001 and 100.0 (0.00001 and 100.0 times/minute).

3. Kd (Derivative) (S1+10, S1+11)

Sets the derivative gain for PID control. The derivative action changes the output manipulated variable and rapidly stabilizes the
process variable when there is a change in the process variable due to a factor such as an external disturbance. Derivative gain
is the factor that determines the output manipulated variable by the derivative action.
When derivative gain is decreased, the derivative action becomes weaker and the response to rapid process variable changes
becomes worse. When derivative gain is increased, the derivative action becomes stronger and the response to rapid changes in
the process variable becomes faster, but the control becomes sensitive to changes in the process variable and changes in the
output manipulated variable will become more severe.
Kd (Derivative) (S1+10, S1+11) is set as data type F (float) between 0.00001 and 100.0 (0.00001 and 100.0 seconds).

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 19-31

19: PID CONTROL INSTRUCTION

4. Disable Kd (Derivative) (S3+9)

Select the Disable Kd (Derivative) check box to disable the derivative action. Derivative Action (S3+9) will be on.
Clear the Disable Kd (Derivative) check box to enable the derivative action. Derivative Action (S3+9) will be off.

5. Disable Kd (Derivative) Decay (S3+10)

Select the Disable Kd (Derivative) Decay check box to disable the derivative decay. Derivative Decay (S3+10) will be on.
Clear the Disable Kd (Derivative) Decay check box to enable the derivative decay. The derivative decay is applied to the derivative
action, and it prevents drastic changes in the output manipulated variable. Derivative Decay (S3+10) will be off.

6. Enable PV Tracking (S3+7)

Select the Enable PV Tracking check box to enable PV tracking. PV Tracking (S3+7) will be on. When the PIDD instruction is
in Manual Mode and PV tracking is enabled, the value of Process Variable (PV) (S1+0, S1+1) is copied to Set Point (SP) (S1+2,
S1+3). When switching from Manual Mode to Auto Mode, the output manipulated variable (MV) will be maintained because no
offset will occur between the process variable (PV) and set point (SP).
Clear the Enable PV Tracking check box to disable PV tracking. PV Tracking (S3+7) will be off.

S1: Control Registers

Modifiable
Allocation Function Setting Details R/W during
Execution
Stores the process variable for PID control.
S1+0, S1+1 Process Variable (PV) R —
Read-only.
Sets the set point for PID control. Set the set point between SP Low
Limit and SP High Limit.
If the set point is higher than SP High Limit, the instruction operates
S1+2, S1+3 Set Point (SP) R/W Yes
with SP High Limit. If the set point is lower than SP Low Limit, the
instruction operates with SP Low Limit. If the set point is out of range,
error code 106 will be stored in Error Status (S1+34, S1+35).
Set the master PIDD instruction output manipulated variable between
0.0 and 100.0%.
For Cascade Control Mode, the value of Remote Set Point (RSP) will be
converted to the full scale of SP Lower Range Value (S1+44, S1+45)
S1+4, S1+5 Remote Set Point (RSP) to SP Upper Range Value (S1+46, S1+47). If the converted set point R/W Yes
is higher than SP High Limit (S1+28, S1+29), the set point will be SP
High Limit. If the converted set point is lower than SP Low Limit
(S1+26, S1+27), the set point will be SP Low Limit. The converted set
point is stored in Set Point (SP) (S1+2, S1+3).
Set proportional gain between 0.00001 and 100.0 (0.00001 and
100.0%).
If the proportional gain value is less than 0.00001, the instruction
S1+6, S1+7 Kp (Gain) R/W Yes
operates with 0.00001%. If the proportional gain value is greater than
100.0, the instruction operates with 100.0%. If the value is out of
range, error code 122 will be stored in Error Status (S1+34, S1+35).
Set integral gain between 0.00001 and 100.0 (0.00001 and
100.0 times/minute).
S1+8, S1+9 Ki (Integral) If the integral gain value is less than 0.00001, the instruction operates R/W Yes
with 0.00001 times/minute. If the integral gain value is greater than
100.0, the instruction operates with 100.0 times/minute.
Set derivative gain between 0.00001 and 100.0 (0.00001 and
100.0 seconds).
S1+10, S1+11 Kd (Derivative) If the derivative gain value is less than 0.00001, the instruction R/W Yes
operates with 0.00001 seconds. If the derivative gain value is greater
than 100.0, the instruction operates with 100.0 seconds.
S1+12, S1+13 — Reserved — — — —

19-32 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 19: PID CONTROL INSTRUCTION

Modifiable
Allocation Function Setting Details R/W during
Execution
When the PIDD instruction is in Manual Mode, set the output
manipulated variable between 0.0 and 100.0%.
If the value of Manual Output Manipulated Variable is less than 0.0%,
Manual Output Manipulated
S1+14, S1+15 the instruction operates with 0.0. If the value of Manual Output R/W Yes
Variable
Manipulated Variable is greater than 100.0, the instruction operates
with 100.0. If the value is out of range, error code 130 will be stored
in Error Status (S1+34, S1+35).
Stores the output manipulated variable of the PIDD instruction.
Output Manipulated Variable
S1+16, S1+17 The value is stored between MV Low Limit (S1+30, S1+31) and MV R —
(MV)
High Limit (S1+32, S1+33).
S1+18 to
— Reserved — — — —
S1+21
Set PV Lower Range Value between -32,768.0 and 65,535.0.
If the PV Lower Range Value is outside the range of -32,768.0 and
65,535.0, or if PV Upper Range Value ≤ PV Lower Range Value, PV
Lower Range Value will be reverted to the original value, and the
execution of PID control will continue. If the PV Lower Range Value is
out of the range, error code 102 will be stored in Error Status (S1+34,
S1+22, S1+23 PV Lower Range Value (LRV) R/W Yes
S1+35).
However, if PV Lower Range Value is out of the range or if PV Upper
Range Value ≤ PV Lower Range Value at the first scan of PIDD
instruction execution, the execution of PID control will stop. The
execution of PID control will start once the value within the range is
set and the error is eliminated.
Set PV Upper Range Value between -32,768.0 and 65,535.0.
If the PV Upper Range Value is outside the range of -32,768.0 and
65,535.0, or if PV Upper Range Value ≤ PV Lower Range Value, PV
Upper Range Value will be reverted to the original value, and the
execution of PID control will continue. If the PV Upper Range Value is
out of the range, error code 102 will be stored in Error Status (S1+34,
S1+24, S1+25 PV Upper Range Value (URV) R/W Yes
S1+35).
However, if PV Upper Range Value is out of the range or if PV Upper
Range Value ≤ PV Lower Range Value at the first scan of PIDD
instruction execution, the execution of PID control will stop. The
execution of PID control will start once the value within the range is
set and the error is eliminated.
Set SP Low Limit between SP Lower Range Value (S1+44, S1+45) and
SP Upper Range Value (S1+46, S1+47).
If the value of SP Low Limit is lower than SP Lower Range Value
(S1+44, S1+45), the instruction operates with SP Lower Range Value.
S1+26, S1+27 SP Low Limit If the value of SP Low Limit is higher than SP Upper Range Value R/W Yes
(S1+46, S1+47), the instruction operates with SP Upper Range Value.
If SP High Limit ≤ SP Low Limit, the instruction operates with SP
Lower Range Value. Error code 106 will be stored in Error Status
(S1+34, S1+35) in those cases.
Set SP High Limit between SP Lower Range Value (S1+44, S1+45)
and SP Upper Range Value (S1+46, S1+47).
If the value of SP High Limit is lower than SP Lower Range Value
(S1+44, S1+45), the instruction operates with SP Lower Range Value.
S1+28, S1+29 SP High Limit If the value of SP High Limit is higher than SP Upper Range Value R/W Yes
(S1+46, S1+47), the instruction operates with SP Upper Range Value.
If SP High Limit ≤ SP Low Limit, the instruction operates with SP
Upper Range Value. Error code 106 will be stored in Error Status
(S1+34, S1+35) in those cases.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 19-33

19: PID CONTROL INSTRUCTION

Modifiable
Allocation Function Setting Details R/W during
Execution
Set MV Low Limit between 0.0 and 100.0 (0.0 and 100.0%).
If the value of MV Low Limit is less than 0.0 or greater than 100.0, the
instruction operates with 0.0. If MV High Limit ≤ MV Low Limit, the
S1+30, S1+31 MV Low Limit R/W Yes
instruction operates with MV Low Limit as 0.0 and MV High Limit as
100.0. Error code 103 will be stored in Error Status (S1+34, S1+35) in
those cases.
Set MV High Limit between 0.0 and 100.0 (0.0 and 100.0%).
If the value of MV High Limit is less than 0.0 or greater than 100.0, the
instruction operates with 100.0. If MV High Limit ≤ MV Low Limit, the
S1+32, S1+33 MV High Limit R/W Yes
instruction operates with MV Low Limit as 0.0 and MV High Limit as
100.0. Error code 103 will be stored in Error Status (S1+34, S1+35) in
those cases.

The PIDD instruction error status is stored as data type D (double-

word).
S1+34, S1+35 Error Status R —
For details on error codes, see "Error Status (S1+34, S1+35)" on page
19-34.

S1+36 to
— Reserved — — — —
S1+43
S1+44, S1+45 SP Lower Range Value Stores the same value as PV Lower Range Value (S1+22, S1+23). R —
S1+46, S1+47 SP Upper Range Value Stores the same value as PV Upper Range Value (S1+24, S1+25). R —
Set the output manipulated variable while PID Inhibit (S3+11) is on
and PID control is inhibited. Set the value as data type F (float)
Output Manipulated Variable between 0.0 and 100.0 (0.0 and 100.0%).
S1+48, S1+49 R/W Yes
while PID Control is Inhibited While PID Inhibit (S3+11) is off, the value of Output Manipulated
Variable (S1+16, S1+17) for the PIDD instruction is copied to "Output
Manipulated Variable while PID Control is Inhibited (S1+48, S1+49)".
Stores the proportion (%) of the difference (offset) between the set point
S1+50, S1+51 Input Deviation (Offset) R —
(SP) and process variable (PV) for the full scale of the process variable.
S1+52 to
— Reserved — — — —
S1+99

Error Status (S1+34, S1+35)

Indicates the PIDD error status.

Status Error Check

Error Code Status Description Countermeasure
Classification with WindLDR

The analog input specified for Analog PID control

101 Check the analog module settings. Yes
Input is not configured. execution stops

PV Upper Range Value or PV Lower

PID control
Range Value is out of the range when
Check if PV Upper Range Value or PV execution stops
the PIDD instruction is started.
Lower Range Value is set to an out-of-
102 PV Upper Range Value or PV Lower Yes
range value, and check if PV Lower PID control
Range Value is set to an out-of-range Range Value ≥ PV Upper Range Value. execution
value while the PIDD instruction is being
continues
executed.

Check if MV High Limit or MV Low Limit is PID control

An out-of-range value is set to MV High
103 set to an out-of-range value, and check if execution Yes
Limit or MV Low Limit.
MV Low Limit ≥ MV High Limit. continues

Check if SP High Limit or SP Low Limit is PID control

An out-of-range value is set to SP High
106 set to an out-of-range value, and check if execution Yes
Limit or SP Low Limit.
SP Low Limit ≥ SP High Limit. continues

19-34 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 19: PID CONTROL INSTRUCTION

Status Error Check

Error Code Status Description Countermeasure
Classification with WindLDR
Process Variable (PV) is set to a value Check if the process variable is outside PID control
109 outside the range of PV Lower Range the range of PV Lower Range Value to execution No
Value to PV Upper Range Value. PV Upper Range Value. continues
PID control
Kp (Gain) is set to a value outside the
122 Check the Kp (Gain) setting. execution No
range of 0.00001 to 100.0.
continues
PID control
Manual Mode Output MV is set to a value Check the value of Manual Mode Output
130 execution No
outside the range of 0.0 to 100.0. MV.
continues
Others — Reserved — — — —

S3: Control Relay

Modifiable
Storage
Function Setting Details R/W during
Destination
Execution
0 (OFF): Reverse Control Action
S3+0 Control Action R/W Yes
1 (ON): Direct Control Action
Set to 1 (ON) to switch the PIDD instruction to Manual Mode. S3+1
S3+1 Manual Mode Select R/W Yes
automatically changes to 0 (OFF).
Set to 1 (ON) to switch the PIDD instruction to Auto Mode. S3+2
S3+2 Auto Mode Select R/W Yes
automatically changes to 0 (OFF).
Set to 1 (ON) to switch the PIDD instruction to Cascade Control
S3+3 Cascade Control Mode Select R/W Yes
Mode. S3+3 automatically changes to 0 (OFF).
Changes to 1 (ON) while PIDD instruction is in Manual Mode.
S3+4 Manual Mode Active R —
Changes to 0 (OFF) when the mode is not Manual Mode.
Changes to 1 (ON) while PIDD instruction is in Auto Mode.
S3+5 Auto Mode Active R —
Changes to 0 (OFF) when the mode is not Auto Mode.
Changes to 1 (ON) while PIDD instruction is in Cascade Control
S3+6 Cascade Control Mode Active Mode. R —
Changes to 0 (OFF) when the mode is not Cascade Control Mode.
0 (OFF): PV tracking disabled
S3+7 PV Tracking R/W Yes
1 (ON): PV tracking enabled
0 (OFF): Kp dependent
S3+8 Kp Dependent R/W Yes
1 (ON): Kp independent
0 (OFF): Derivative enabled
S3+9 Derivative R/W Yes
1 (ON): Derivative disabled
0 (OFF): Derivative decay enabled
S3+10 Derivative Decay R/W Yes
1 (ON): Derivative decay disabled
0 (OFF): PID operation
S3+11 PID Inhibit R/W Yes
1 (ON): PID inhibited
Changes to 1 (ON) when PID control is temporarily stopped, such
S3+12 PID Control Inhibit Monitor as when PID control parameters are changed or when PID control R —
is inhibited.
Derivative Action Execution
S3+13 Changes to 1 (ON) while executing the derivative action. R —
Monitor
S3+14 to
— Reserved — — — —
S3+31

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 19-35

19: PID CONTROL INSTRUCTION

PID Monitor
Function Description
While PID control is executing, you can graphically monitor the PIDA/PIDD instruction parameters. From the PID Monitor dialog
box, you can also directly change the values of data registers and internal relays that are being used by the PIDA/PIDD
instructions, and check the operation of the PIDA/PIDD instructions while adjusting the PID control parameters.
Note: The PID monitor operates according to the PIDA/PIDD instruction settings in the ladder program displayed on the WindLDR and not
according to the settings in the PLC. If the device allocations for the PIDA/PIDD instruction in the PLC and the PIDA/PIDD instruction in WindLDR
are different, the PID instruction is not correctly monitored.

Starting the PID Monitor

Operation Procedure
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Online > Monitor > Monitor.
The monitor starts.

2. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Online > Monitor > PID Monitor.
The PID Monitor dialog box is displayed.

3. On the PID Monitor dialog box, click button (show/hide PID monitor table).
The PID monitor table is displayed.

19-36 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 19: PID CONTROL INSTRUCTION

PID Monitor Dialog Box

2. 3. 4. 5.
1.
6. 9.
7.

8.

10.

11.

12.

1. Target
Select the PIDA/PIDD instruction to monitor. All PIDA/PIDD instructions in the ladder program opened in WindLDR are displayed.
The PIDA/PIDD instructions can be identified by the program name and line number in the main program or subroutine where
the instructions are used.

2. Refer to PID settings

Opens a dialog box for the PIDA/PIDD instruction being monitored so that you can confirm the settings.

3. Jump to target PID instruction

Moves the cursor of the ladder editor to the position of the PIDA/PIDD instruction being monitored.

4. Show/hide PID monitor table

You can show or hide PID Monitor Table (11) and Apply Tuned Value button (12).

5. PID monitor settings

Opens the PID Monitor Settings dialog box. For details, see "PID Monitor Settings Dialog Box" on page 19-41.

6. Primary parameters panel

You can check the values of the process variable (PV), set point (SP), and manipulated variable (MV). For the MV, the analog
value can be checked with the horizontal bar graph, and the digital value (on/off) can be checked with the color of the OUT
indicator. When the OUT indicator is white, the output is off. When it is green, the output is on.
The colors of the values for the process variable (PV), set point (SP), and manipulated variable (MV) can be changed in the PID
Monitor Settings dialog box. For details, see "PID Monitor Settings Dialog Box" on page 19-41.
When a PIDA instruction is selected, a digital value (on/off) can be checked with the color of the OUT indicator. The OUT
indicator is white when output is off, and green when output is on.
When a PIDD instruction is selected and manual mode is on, the manipulated variable (MV) text box is enabled, and the manual
output manipulated variable (S1+14, S1+15) can be set. The value can be set between 0.0 and 100.0 in the unit of percentage.

7. PID parameters panel

When a PIDA instruction is selected, you can check the values of the proportional band (P), integral time (I), and derivative time (D).
When a PIDD instruction is selected, you can check the values of the proportional gain (Kp), integral gain (Ki), and derivative
gain (Kd).

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 19-37

19: PID CONTROL INSTRUCTION

8. Send Command
When a PIDA instruction is selected, you can send commands to the FC6A Series MicroSmart to execute/stop AT for PID control
and to switch manual/auto mode. Click this button to display a popup menu and click the menu to send the command.

When a PIDD instruction is selected, you can send the following commands to the FC6A Series MicroSmart: Change PID control
mode (manual/auto/cascade), enable/disable PV tracking, proportional gain dependent/independent, enable/disable derivative
control, and enable/disable derivative decay. Click this button to display a popup menu and click the corresponding item to send
the command.

19-38 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 19: PID CONTROL INSTRUCTION

9. Status indicators
You can check the primary statuses for PID control with the colored indicators.
When a PIDA instruction is selected, the indicators in the following table are displayed.

Indicator Name Background Color Status

Gray PID control stopped
PID
Green PID control is executed
Gray AT stopped
AT
Green AT is being executed
Gray Auto mode
MANUAL
Green Manual mode
Gray Normal operation
A1
Red Alarm 1 output is ON
Gray Normal operation
A2
Red Alarm 2 output is ON
Gray Normal operation
A3
Red Alarm 3 output is ON
Gray Normal operation
A4
Red Alarm 4 output is ON
Gray Normal operation
A5
Red Alarm 5 output is ON
Gray Normal operation
A6
Red Alarm 6 output is ON

When a PIDD instruction is selected, the indicators in the following table are displayed.

Indicator Name Background Color Status

Gray Other mode
MANUAL
Green Manual mode
Gray Other mode
AUTO
Green Auto mode
Gray Other mode
CASCADE
Green Cascade control mode
Gray PV tracking disabled
PV Tracking
Green PV tracking enabled
Gray Kp independent
Kp Dependent
Green Kp dependent
Gray Derivative action disabled
Kd
Green Derivative action enabled
Gray Derivative decay disabled
Kd Decay
Green Derivative decay enabled

10. Trend graph

When a PIDA instruction is selected, you can monitor the values of the process variable (PV), set point (SP), manipulated
variable (MV), alarm 1 value (process high alarm), and alarm 2 value (process low alarm) with the trend graph.
When a PIDD instruction is selected, you can monitor the values of the process variable (PV), set point (SP), and output
manipulated variable (MV) with the trend graph.
Shown values, colors, maximum value, and minimum value can be changed in the PID Monitor Settings dialog box.
For details, see "PID Monitor Settings Dialog Box" on page 19-41.
Note: When plots on the trend graph reach the right edge of the graph, the center of the graph moves to the left edge and the new log information
is displayed from the center of the graph. You can check the past log information by moving the scrollbar. The log information retains a maximum of
10,000 items of information. When the log information has reached 10,000 items of information, the log information is deleted from the oldest
items, and the new log information is recorded. The log information displayed on the trend graph is deleted when the dialog box is closed or when
the PIDA/PIDD instruction being monitored is changed.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 19-39

19: PID CONTROL INSTRUCTION

11. PID monitor table

You can check the function name, current value, and device address for data registers and internal relays used by the PIDA/
PIDD instruction. The current values displayed in white cells can be changed. Showing/hiding items can be changed in the PID
Monitor Settings dialog box. For details, see "PID Monitor Settings Dialog Box" on page 19-41.

12. Apply Tuned Value

By clicking Apply Tuned Value, you can reflect the PID control parameters adjusted in PID monitor table (11) as the initial
setting values for the PIDA/PIDD instruction selected in Target (1). To store the reflected initial setting values to FC6A Series
MicroSmart ROM, you must end the monitor and download the user program to the FC6A Series MicroSmart.

Changing PID Monitor Settings

Operation Procedure
1. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Online > Monitor > Monitor.
The monitor starts.

2. From the WindLDR menu bar, select Online > Monitor > PID Monitor.
The PID Monitor dialog box is displayed.

3. In the PID Monitor dialog box, click button (PID monitor settings).
The PID Monitor Settings dialog box is displayed.

19-40 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 19: PID CONTROL INSTRUCTION

PID Monitor Settings Dialog Box

1.

3.
2.

4.

1. Parameter Settings (Chart)

You can show or hide the parameters displayed on the trend graph in the PID Monitor dialog box, and also specify the colors.
Select the check box for each item to show it, or clear the check box to hide it. The color of the button on the right side of each
item is the display color for that item. Press button to display the list of colors and select the color to change the display
color. The selected color is applied to the primary parameters panel in the PID Monitor dialog box.
When a PIDA instruction is selected, you can change the settings of the process variable (PV), set point (SP), output
manipulated variable (MV), alarm 1 value (process high alarm), and alarm 2 value (process low alarm).
When a PIDD instruction is selected, you can change the settings of the process variable (PV), set point (SP), and output
manipulated variable (MV).

2. Scaling Settings
You can set the scaling for the vertical axis of the trend graph in the PID Monitor dialog box. When the auto scaling check box
is selected, the Maximum Value and the Minimum Value for the vertical axis are automatically adjusted for the values displayed
on the trend graph. When the check box is cleared, the Maximum Value and the Minimum Value are set according to the entered
values.

3. PID monitor table settings

You can show or hide the items on the PID monitor table. Select the check box for each item to show it, or clear the check box
to hide it.

4. Default
All settings are set to their initial values.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 19-41

19: PID CONTROL INSTRUCTION

Application Example
This section describes an application example using the PIDA instruction.
Note: You must change the settings according to the application's actual system configuration and operating status.

The following two system configurations are described for applications that set the set point for the control target temperature to
200°C and perform PID control.
• PID control via ON/OFF output

• PID control via analog output

Operation
• PID control is performed based on the temperature input to the analog cartridge and the manipulated variable is output.
The set point is 200ºC.

• The control mode is PID (PID control) and the control action is reverse control action.

• Alarm 1 output (S3+3) is turned ON when the process variable reaches 250°C, and the heater is stopped or the power is adjusted.

PID control via ON/OFF output

System configuration

I0

FC6A-PJ2CP

IN0
RTD A B B’
TC + - NC

Q0 Q1 COM0(+) V0(-)

Alarm Lamp

+ –

Thermocouple +

Heater

–
Fuse

SSR
(Solid State Relay)

19-42 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 19: PID CONTROL INSTRUCTION

Ladder program
Process variable
PID control (after conversion) Initialize Pulse Control action Set point
enable input
PIDA S1 S2 S3 S4 1.
D0000 M8120 M0000 D0007
I0000
Analog input
Alarm 1 output status error PIDA error Alarm lamp

R
M0003 M0020 M0021 Q0001 2.

Control output Heater output

M0005 Q0000
Analog Status to Analog input
PID control the Analog Cartridge status error
enable input
CMP>=(W) S1 - S2 - D1 - REP
D8172 5 M0020
I0000
3.
Alarm 1 output Alarm lamp

S
M0003 Q0001
Analog input
status error

M0020
PID control Operating status PIDA error
enable input
ICMP>=(W) S1 S2 S3 D1
4.
109 D0002 103 M0021
I0000

PIDA error Alarm lamp

S 5.
M0021 Q0001

Device Address Comment Device Address Comment

D0000 Process variable (after conversion) M0000 Control action
D0002 Operating status M0003 Alarm 1 output
D0007 Set point M0005 Control output
D8172 Analog Status to the Analog Cartridge M0020 Analog input status error
I0000 PID control enable input M0021 PIDA error
Q0000 Heater output M8120 Initialize Pulse
Q0001 Alarm lamp

1. The PIDA instruction operates when I0 is ON.

2. When M0003 (Alarm 1 output (process high alarm)) is OFF and M0020 is OFF (the analog input status error for the
analog cartridge is 0 to 2), Q0 (heater output) turns ON/OFF according to the manipulated variable and control period
calculated by PID control. The heater output turns OFF when an error occurs.
3. When the analog input status error for the analog cartridge is 5, 6, or 8 to 11, M0020 turns ON.
4. When M0003 (Alarm 1 output (process high alarm)) is ON or M0020 is ON (when the analog input status error for the
analog cartridge is 5, 6, or 8 to 11), Q1 (alarm lamp) turns ON.
5. The operating status of the PIDA instruction is judged, and when an error occurs, M0021 turns ON and Q1 (alarm lamp)
turns ON.

Note:
The analog status for the analog cartridge is as follows.
• Analog input status error
0: Operating normally
1: Converting data
2: Initializing
5, 6: Wiring error
8 to 11: Analog cartridge error
For details, see Chapter 10 "Analog Cartridge" in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s Manual".

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 19-43

19: PID CONTROL INSTRUCTION

PIDA (PIDA control) instruction dialog box configuration procedure

Use the default value for settings that are not described in this procedure.

1. The Devices tab configures the devices used with the PIDA instruction.

• Set S1 (Control Register) to D0000 (1).

• Set S2 (Initialization Input) to M8120 (2).
• Set S3 (Control Relay) to M0000 (3).
• S4 (Set Point) is automatically set to D0007 (4).

1. 2. 3. 4.

2. Click the Input tab and configure the items.

• For the process variable (PV), select Analog Input, and then select CPU/HMI Module and AI002 (1).
• For Alarm 1, set the alarm value for the process high alarm to 250.0 (2).
• For Alarm 2, set the alarm value for the process low alarm to 0.0 (3).

1.

2.
3.

19-44 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 19: PID CONTROL INSTRUCTION

3. Click the Control tab and configure the items.

• For Control Mode, select PID (PID Control) (1).
• For Control Action, select Reverse Control Action (2).
• For Set Point (SP), set 200.0 (3).

1.
2.
3.

4. Click the Output tab and configure the items.

• For Output Manipulated Variable (MV), select Data Register (1).

1.

5. Click OK to close the PIDA (PIDA Control) dialog box.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 19-45

19: PID CONTROL INSTRUCTION

6. Use the Module Configuration Editor to configure the analog input for the analog cartridge.
On the Configuration tab, in the PLCs group, select Expansion Modules.

7. Select FC6A-PJ2CP in the expansion modules and cartridges list and drag and drop it to the module configuration area.

8. Click the FC6A-PJ2CP analog cartridge that was interested in the module configuration area and click Configure.
The Analog Parameters Configuration (Cartridge Slot 1) dialog box is displayed.

9. Configure the items.

• For channel IN0 : AI2 Data Type, select Celsius (°C) (1).

1.

10. Click OK to close the Analog Parameters Configuration (Cartridge Slot 1) dialog box.

19-46 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 19: PID CONTROL INSTRUCTION

PID control via analog output

System configuration

I0

FC6A-PJ2CP FC6A-PK2AV

IN0
RTD A B B’ OUT0
TC + - NC + - NC

Q1 COM0(+) V0(-)

Alarm Lamp

Thyristor Unit
Analog input wiring differs by the thyristor
unit and operation mode that is used.

+ –
+
Thermocouple L1 1

Adjust the AC line power

Heater with phase control.
2

L2 –
3
Fuse

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 19-47

19: PID CONTROL INSTRUCTION

Ladder program

Analog Status to Analog input

PID control the Analog Cartridge status error
enable input
CMP>=(W) S1 - S2 - D1 - REP
D8172 5 M0020
I0000
Analog Status to Analog output 1.
the Analog Cartridge status error

CMP>=(W) S1 - S2 - D1 - REP
D8176 5 M0021
Process variable
PID control (after conversion) Initialize pulse Control action Set point
Analog input Analog output
enable input status error status error PIDA S1 S2 S3 S4
D0000 M8120 M0000 D0007
I0000 M0020 M0021
Operating status
Operating status
error
2.
ICMP>=(W) S1 S2 S3 D1
109 D0002 103 M0022
Analog Value to
PID control the Analog Cartridge
enable input
MOV(W) S1 - D1 - REP
3.
0 D8174
I0000
Analog output
status error

M0020
Analog input
status error

M0021
Analog output
PID control Operating status status error
enable input
ICMP>=(W) S1 S2 S3 D1

I0000
109 D0002 103 M0021 4.
Analog input Alarm
status error lamp

Q0001 5.
M0020
Analog output
status error

M0021

PID error

M0022

Alarm 1 output

M0003

Device Address Comment Device Address Comment

D0000 Process variable (after conversion) M0000 Control action
D0002 Operating status M0003 Alarm 1 output
D0007 Set point M0020 Analog input status error
D8178 Analog Status to the Analog Cartridge M0021 Analog output status error
D8186 Analog Value to the Analog Cartridge M0022 PID error
D8188 Analog Status to the Analog Cartridge M8120 Initialize pulse
I0000 PID control enable input
Q0001 Alarm lamp

1. When I0000 is ON and the analog input status error for the analog cartridge is 5, 6, or 8 to 11, M0020 turns ON.
When the analog output status error for the analog cartridge is 8 to 11, M0021 turns ON.
2. The PID instruction operates when I0000 is ON and both M0020 and M0021 are OFF.
The operating status of the PID instruction is judged, and when an error occurs, M0022 turns ON.
3. When M0020 or M0021 is ON, or when I0000 is OFF (when the PID instruction is stopped), 0 is stored in D8186 and 0 V
is output from AQ4.
4. The operating status of the PID instruction is judged, and when an error occurs, M0021 turns ON.
5. When either M0020, M0021, M0022, or M0003 (Alarm 1 output (process high alarm)) is ON, Q0001 (alarm lamp) turns ON.

19-48 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 19: PID CONTROL INSTRUCTION

Note:

The analog status for the analog cartridge is as follows.

• Analog input status error
0: Operating normally
1: Converting data
2: Initializing
5, 6: Wiring error
8 to 11: Analog cartridge error
• Analog output status error
0: Operating normally
2: Initializing
3: Parameter setting error
5, 6: Wiring error
8 to 11: Analog cartridge error
For details, see Chapter 10 "Analog Cartridge" in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s Manual".

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 19-49

19: PID CONTROL INSTRUCTION

PID instruction dialog box configuration procedure

Use the default value for settings that are not described in this procedure.

1. The Devices tab configures the devices used with the PID instruction.

• Set S1 (Control Register) to D0000 (1).

• Set S2 (Initialization Input) to M8120 (2).
• Set S3 (Control Relay) to M0000 (3).
• S4 (Set Point) is automatically set to D0007 (4).

1. 2. 3. 4.

2. Click the Input tab and configure the items.

• For Process Variable (PV), select Analog Input, and then select AI002 (1).
• For Alarm 1, set the alarm value for the process high alarm to 250.0 (2).
For Alarm 2, set the alarm value for the process low alarm to 0.0 (3).

1.

2.
3.

19-50 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 19: PID CONTROL INSTRUCTION

3. Click the Control tab and configure the items.

• For Control Mode, select PID (PID Control) (1).
• For Control Action, select Reverse Control Action (2).
• For Set Point (SP), set 200.0 (3).

1.
2.
3.

4. Click the Output tab and configure the items.

• For Output Manipulated Variable (MV), select Analog Output, and then select AQ004 (1).

1.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 19-51

19: PID CONTROL INSTRUCTION

5. Use the Module Configuration Editor to configure the analog input for the analog cartridge.
On the Configuration tab, in the PLCs group, select Expansion Modules.

6. Select FC6A-PJ2CP in the expansion modules and cartridges list and drag and drop it to the module configuration area.

7. Click the FC6A-PJ2CP analog cartridge that was interested in the module configuration area and click Configure.
The Analog Parameters Configuration (Cartridge Slot 1) dialog box is displayed.

8. Configure the items.

• For channel IN0 : AI2 Data Type, select Celsius (°C) (1).

1.

9. Click OK to close the Analog Parameters Configuration (Cartridge Slot 1) dialog box.

19-52 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 19: PID CONTROL INSTRUCTION

10. Select FC6A-PK2AV in the expansion modules and cartridges list and drag and drop it to the module configuration area.

11. Click the FC6A-PK2AV analog cartridge that was interested in the module configuration area and click Configure.
The Analog Parameters Configuration (Cartridge Slot 2) dialog box is displayed.

12. Configure the items.

• For channel OUT0 : AQ4 Signal Type, select 0 to 10V DC (1).

1.

13. Click OK to close the Analog Parameters Configuration (Cartridge Slot 2) dialog box.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 19-53

19: PID CONTROL INSTRUCTION

19-54 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

20: DUAL / TEACHING TIMER INSTRUCTIONS
Introduction
This chapter describes the dual/teaching timer instructions that cyclically turn outputs on and off in the specified time interval.
Four dual timers are available and the ON/OFF duration can be selected from 1 ms up to 65,535 s.
Teaching timer instruction measures the ON duration of the start input for the teaching timer instruction and stores the measured
data to a designated data register, which can be used as a preset value for a timer instruction.

DTML (1-s Dual Timer)

While input is on, destination device D1 repeats to turn on and off for a
DTML S1 S2 D1 D2 duration assigned by devices S1 and S2, respectively.
***** ***** ***** *****
When the input is off, D1 turns off.

The time range is 0 through 65,535 s.

DTIM (100-ms Dual Timer)

While input is on, destination device D1 repeats to turn on and off for a
DTIM S1 S2 D1 D2 duration assigned by devices S1 and S2, respectively.
***** ***** ***** *****
When the input is off, D1 turns off.

The time range is 0 through 6,553.5 s.

DTMH (10-ms Dual Timer)

While input is on, destination device D1 repeats to turn on and off for a
DTMH S1 S2 D1 D2 duration assigned by devices S1 and S2, respectively.
***** ***** ***** *****
When the input is off, D1 turns off.

The time range is 0 through 655.35 s.

DTMS (1-ms Dual Timer)

While input is on, destination device D1 repeats to turn on and off for a
DTMS S1 S2 D1 D2 duration assigned by devices S1 and S2, respectively.
***** ***** ***** *****
When the input is off, D1 turns off.

The time range is 0 through 65.535 s.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 20-1

20: DUAL / TEACHING TIMER INSTRUCTIONS

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant

S1 (Source 1) ON duration — — — — — — X 0-65,535
S2 (Source 2) OFF duration — — — — — — X 0-65,535
D1 (Destination 1) Dual timer output — X X — — — —
D2 (Destination 2) System work area — — — — — — X —

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

Internal relays M0-7997 and M10000-17497 can be designated as D1. Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1.

Destination device D2 (system work area) uses 2 data registers starting with the device designated as D2. Data registers D0-D7998 and D10000-
D55998 can be designated as D2. The two data registers are used for a system work area. Do not use these data registers for destinations of other
advanced instructions, and do not change values of these data registers using the monitor function on WindLDR. If the data in these data registers
are changed, the dual timer does not operate correctly.

The dual timer instructions cannot be used in an interrupt program. If used, a user program execution error will result, turning on special internal
relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart.

When a user program execution error occurs, the execution of the instruction is canceled and the next instruction is executed. The data in D1
(destination 1) is unchanged. For details about the user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

Examples: DTML, DTIM, DTMH, DTMS

While input I0 is on, four dual timer instructions turn on and off the
DTML S1 S2 D1 D2 destination devices according to the on and off durations assigned by source
I0 2 1 M10 D100 devices S1 and S2.

DTIM S1 S2 D1 D2
10 5 M20 D200

DTMH S1 S2 D1 D2
50 25 M30 D300

DTMS S1 S2 D1 D2
250 125 M40 D400

ON
I0 OFF

ON
M10 OFF
2s 1s

ON
M20 OFF
1s 0.5 s

ON
M30 OFF
500 ms 250 ms

ON
M40 OFF
250 ms 125 ms

Instruction Increments S1 ON Duration S2 OFF Duration

DTML 1s 2 1s×2=2s 1 1s×1=1s
DTIM 100 ms 10 100 ms × 10 = 1 s 5 100 ms × 5 = 0.5 s
DTMH 10 ms 50 10 ms × 50 = 500 ms 25 10 ms × 25 = 250 ms
DTMS 1 ms 250 1 ms × 250 = 250 ms 125 1 ms × 125 = 125 ms

For the timer accuracy of timer instructions, see "TML, TIM, TMH, and TMS (Timer)" on page 4-7.

20-2 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 20: DUAL / TEACHING TIMER INSTRUCTIONS

TTIM (Teaching Timer)

While input is on, the ON duration is measured in units of 100 ms and the measured value is stored to a
TTIM D1 data register assigned by destination device D1.
*****
When the input is off, D1 turns off.

The measured time range is 0 through 6,553.5 s.

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant

D1 (Destination 1) Measured value — — — — — — X —

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

Destination device D1 (measured value) uses 3 data registers starting with the device designated as D1. Data registers D0-D7997 and D10000-
D55997 can be designated as D1. Subsequent two data registers starting with destination device D1+1 are used for a system work area. Do not use
these two data registers for destinations of other advanced instructions, and do not change values of these data registers using the monitor function
on WindLDR. If the data in these data registers are changed, the teaching timer does not operate correctly.

The teaching timer instruction cannot be used in an interrupt program. If used, a user program execution error will result, turning on special internal
relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart. For details about the user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution
Errors" on page 3-10.

When a user program execution error occurs, the execution of the instruction is canceled and the next instruction is executed. The data in D1
(destination 1) is unchanged. For details about the user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

Examples: TTIM
When input I0 is turned on, TTIM resets data register D100 to zero and starts to store the ON duration of
TTIM D1 input I0 to data register D100, measured in units of 100 ms.
I0 D100
When input I0 is turned off, TTIM stops the measurement, and data register D100 maintains the measured
value of the ON duration.

ON
I0 OFF
1,500 ms

D100 Value 0 15

The following example demonstrates a program to measure the ON duration of input I0 and to use the ON duration as a preset
value for 100-ms timer instruction TIM.

When input I1 is turned on, 100-ms timer T0 starts to operate with a preset
TIM T0 value stored in data register D0.
I1 D0
While input I0 is on, TTIM measures the ON duration of input I0 and stores
TTIM D1 the measured value in units of 100 ms to data register D100.
I0 D100
When input I0 is turned off, MOV(W) stores the D100 value to data register
D0 as a preset value for timer T0.
SOTD MOV(W) S1 – D1 – REP
I0 D100 D0

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 20-3

20: DUAL / TEACHING TIMER INSTRUCTIONS

20-4 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

21: TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTION INSTRUCTIONS
Introduction
This chapter describes the trigonometric function instructions that are used to calculate sine, cosine, and tangent from an angle.

RAD (Degree to Radian)

S1·S1+1° × π/180 → D1·D1+1 rad
RAD(F) S1 D1
When input is on, the degree value assigned by source device S1 is converted into a radian value
***** *****
and stored to the destination assigned by device D1.

Valid Devices
Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat
S1 (Source 1) Degree value to convert into radian — — — — — — X X —
D1 (Destination 1) Destination to store conversion results — — — — — — X — —

For the valid device address range, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.
When the conversion result is not within the range between –3.402823 × 1038 and –1.175495 × 10–38 or between 1.175495 × 10–38 and
3.402823 × 1038, special internal relay M8003 (carry or borrow) is turned on except when the conversion result is 0. When the conversion result is
between –1.175495 × 10–38 and 1.175495 × 10–38, the destination device designated by D1 stores 0.

Not Zero
Overflow Overflow

M8003 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

Execution Result –3.402823×1038 –1.175495×10–38 0 1.175495×10–38 3.402823×1038

When the data designated by S1 does not comply with the normal floating-point format, a user program execution error will result, turning on
special internal relay M8004 and ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart. For details about the user program execution errors, see "User Program
Execution Errors" on page 3-10.
Since the RAD instruction is executed in each scan while input is on, a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used.

Valid Data Types

W (word) — Since floating point data is used, the source and destination devices use two consecutive data registers.
I (integer) —
D (double word) —
L (long) —
F (float) X

Example: RAD
When input I1 is turned on, the degree value of data registers D10 and D11 assigned by
SOTU RAD(F) S1 D1 source device S1 is converted into a radian value and stored to data registers D20 and
I1 D10 D20 D21 assigned by destination device D1.

270° × π/180 → 4.712389 rad

S1 D1

D10·D11 270.0 D20·D21 4.712389

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 21-1

21: TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTION INSTRUCTIONS

DEG (Radian to Degree)

S1·S1+1 rad × 180/π → D1·D1+1°
DEG(F) S1 D1 When input is on, the radian value assigned by source device S1 is converted into a degree value
***** ***** and stored to the destination assigned by device D1.

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) Radian value to convert into degree — — — — — — X X —
D1 (Destination 1) Destination to store conversion results — — — — — — X — —

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

When the conversion result is not within the range between –3.402823 × 1038 and –1.175495 × 10–38 or between 1.175495 × 10–38 and
3.402823 × 1038, special internal relay M8003 (carry or borrow) is turned on except when the conversion result is 0. When the conversion result is
below –3.402823 × 1038 or over 3.402823 × 1038, causing an overflow, the destination device designated by D1 stores a value of minus or plus
infinity.

Not Zero
Overflow Overflow

M8003 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

Execution Result –3.402823×1038 –1.175495×10–38 0 1.175495×10–38 3.402823×1038

When the data designated by S1 does not comply with the normal floating-point format, a user program execution error will result, turning on
special internal relay M8004 and ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart. For details about the user program execution errors, see "User Program
Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

Since the DEG instruction is executed in each scan while input is on, a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used.

Valid Data Types

W (word) — Since floating point data is used, the source and destination devices use two consecutive data registers.
I (integer) —
D (double word) —
L (long) —
F (float) X

Example: DEG
When input I1 is turned on, the radian value of data registers D10 and D11 assigned by
SOTU DEG(F) S1 D1 source device S1 is converted into a degree value and stored to data registers D20 and
I1 D10 D20 D21 assigned by destination device D1.

4.712389 rad × 180/π → 270.0°

S1 D1

D10·D11 4.712389 D20·D21 270.0

21-2 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 21: TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTION INSTRUCTIONS

SIN (Sine)
sin S1·S1+1 → D1·D1+1
SIN(F) S1 D1 When input is on, the sine of the radian value assigned by source device S1 is stored to the
***** ***** destination assigned by device D1.

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) Radian value to convert into sine value — — — — — — X X —
D1 (Destination 1) Destination to store conversion results — — — — — — X — —

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

When the data designated by S1 does not comply with the normal floating-point format, a user program execution error will result, turning on
special internal relay M8004 and ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart. For details about the user program execution errors, see "User Program
Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

Since the SIN instruction is executed in each scan while input is on, a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used.

Valid Data Types

W (word) — Since the floating point data type is used, the source and destination devices use two consecutive data registers.
I (integer) —
D (double word) —
L (long) —
F (float) X

Example: SIN
When input I1 is turned on, the sine of the radian value of data registers D10 and D11
SOTU SIN(F) S1 D1 assigned by source device S1 is stored to data registers D20 and D21 assigned by
I1 D10 D20 destination device D1.

3.926991 rad = 5π/4 rad

sin 5π/4 → –0.7071069

S1 D1

D10·D11 3.926991 D20·D21 –0.7071069

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 21-3

21: TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTION INSTRUCTIONS

COS (Cosine)
cos S1·S1+1 → D1·D1+1
COS(F) S1 D1 When input is on, the cosine of the radian value assigned by source device S1 is stored to the
***** ***** destination assigned by device D1.

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) Radian value to convert into cosine value — — — — — — X X —
D1 (Destination 1) Destination to store conversion results — — — — — — X — —

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

When the data designated by S1 does not comply with the normal floating-point format, a user program execution error will result, turning on
special internal relay M8004 and ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart. For details about the user program execution errors, see "User Program
Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

Since the COS instruction is executed in each scan while input is on, a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used.

Valid Data Types

W (word) — Since floating point data is used, the source and destination devices use two consecutive data registers.
I (integer) —
D (double word) —
L (long) —
F (float) X

Example: COS
When input I1 is turned on, the cosine of the radian value of data registers D10 and D11
SOTU COS(F) S1 D1 assigned by source device S1 is stored to data registers D20 and D21 assigned by
I1 D10 D20 destination device D1.

3.926991 rad = 5π/4 rad

cos 5π/4 → –0.7071068

S1 D1

D10·D11 3.926991 D20·D21 –0.7071068

21-4 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 21: TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTION INSTRUCTIONS

TAN (Tangent)
tan S1·S1+1 → D1·D1+1
TAN(F) S1 D1 When input is on, the tangent of the radian value assigned by source device S1 is stored to the
***** ***** destination assigned by device D1.

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) Radian value to convert into tangent value — — — — — — X X —
D1 (Destination 1) Destination to store conversion results — — — — — — X — —

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

When the conversion result is not within the range between –3.402823 × 1038 and –1.175495 × 10–38 or between 1.175495 × 10–38 and
3.402823 × 1038, special internal relay M8003 (carry or borrow) is turned on except when the conversion result is 0. When the conversion result is
below –3.402823 × 1038 or over 3.402823 × 1038, causing an overflow, the destination device designated by D1 stores a value of minus or plus
infinity.

Not Zero
Overflow Overflow

M8003 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

Execution Result –3.402823×1038 –1.175495×10–38 0 1.175495×10–38 3.402823×1038

When the data designated by S1 does not comply with the normal floating-point format, a user program execution error will result, turning on
special internal relay M8004 and ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart. For details about the user program execution errors, see "User Program
Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

Since the TAN instruction is executed in each scan while input is on, a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used.

Valid Data Types

W (word) — Since floating point data is used, the source and destination devices use two consecutive data registers.
I (integer) —
D (double word) —
L (long) —
F (float) X

Example: TAN
When input I1 is turned on, the tangent of the radian value of data registers D10 and
SOTU TAN(F) S1 D1 D11 assigned by source device S1 is stored to data registers D20 and D21 assigned by
I1 D10 D20 destination device D1.

3.926991 rad = 5π/4 rad

tan 5π/4 → 1.0

S1 D1

D10·D11 3.926991 D20·D21 1.0

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 21-5

21: TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTION INSTRUCTIONS

ASIN (Arc Sine)

asin S1·S1+1 → D1·D1+1 rad
ASIN(F) S1 D1 When input is on, the arc sine of the value assigned by source device S1 is stored in radians to
***** ***** the destination assigned by device D1.

The S1·S1+1 value must be within the following range:

-1.0 ≤ S1·S1+1 ≤ 1.0

If the S1·S1+1 value is not within this range, 0 is stored to D1·D1+1.

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) Arc sine value to convert into radian — — — — — — X X —
D1 (Destination 1) Destination to store conversion results — — — — — — X — —
For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

When the data designated by source device S1 is not within the range between –1.0 and 1.0 or does not comply with the normal floating-point
format, a user program execution error will result, turning on special internal relay M8004 and ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart. For details
about the user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

Since the ASIN instruction is executed in each scan while input is on, a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used.

Valid Data Types

W (word) — Since floating point data is used, the source and destination devices use two consecutive data registers.
I (integer) —
D (double word) —
L (long) —
F (float) X

Example: ASIN
When input I1 is turned on, the arc sine of the value of data registers D10 and D11
SOTU ASIN(F) S1 D1 assigned by source device S1 is stored to data registers D20 and D21 assigned by
I1 D10 D20 destination device D1.

asin –0.7071069 → –0.7853984 rad

–0.7853984 rad = – π/4 rad

S1 D1

D10·D11 –0.7071069 D20·D21 –0.7853984

21-6 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 21: TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTION INSTRUCTIONS

ACOS (Arc Cosine)

acos S1·S1+1 → D1·D1+1 rad
ACOS(F) S1 D1
When input is on, the arc cosine of the value assigned by source device S1 is stored in radians to
***** *****
the destination assigned by device D1.

The S1·S1+1 value must be within the following range:

-1.0 ≤ S1·S1+1 ≤ 1.0

If the S1·S1+1 value is not within this range, 0 is stored to D1·D1+1.

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) Arc cosine value to convert into radian — — — — — — X X —
D1 (Destination 1) Destination to store conversion results — — — — — — X — —
For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

When the data designated by source device S1 is not within the range between –1.0 and 1.0 or does not comply with the normal floating-point
format, a user program execution error will result, turning on special internal relay M8004 and ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart. For details
about the user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

Since the ACOS instruction is executed in each scan while input is on, a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used.

Valid Data Types

W (word) — Since floating point data is used, the source and destination devices use two consecutive data registers.
I (integer) —
D (double word) —
L (long) —
F (float) X

Example: ACOS
When input I1 is turned on, the arc cosine of the value of data registers D10 and D11
SOTU ACOS(F) S1 D1 assigned by source device S1 is stored to data registers D20 and D21 assigned by
I1 D10 D20 destination device D1.

acos –0.7071068 → 2.356194 rad

2.356194 rad = 3π/4 rad

S1 D1
S1 D1
D10·D11 –0.7071068 D20·D21 2.356194
D10·D11 –0.7071068 D20·D21 2.356194

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 21-7

21: TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTION INSTRUCTIONS

ATAN (Arc Tangent)

atan S1·S1+1 → D1·D1+1 rad
ATAN(F) S1 D1 When input is on, the arc tangent of the value assigned by source device S1 is stored in radians
***** ***** to the destination assigned by device D1.

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) Arc tangent value to convert into radian — — — — — — X X —
D1 (Destination 1) Destination to store conversion results — — — — — — X — —

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

When the data designated by source device S1 does not comply with the normal floating-point format, a user program execution error will result,
turning on special internal relay M8004 and ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart. For details about the user program execution errors, see "User
Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

Since the ATAN instruction is executed in each scan while input is on, a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used.

Valid Data Types

W (word) — Since floating point data is used, the source and destination devices use two consecutive data registers.
I (integer) —
D (double word) —
L (long) —
F (float) X

Example: ATAN
When input I1 is turned on, the arc tangent of the value of data registers D10 and D11
SOTU ATAN(F) S1 D1 assigned by source device S1 is stored to data registers D20 and D21 assigned by
I1 D10 D20 destination device D1.

atan 0.4142136 → 0.3926991 rad

0.3926991 rad = π/8 rad

S1 D1

D10·D11 0.4142136 D20·D21 0.3926991

21-8 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

22: LOGARITHM / POWER INSTRUCTIONS
Introduction
This chapter describes logarithm function and power function instructions that are are used to calculate logarithms and powers for
specified data.

LOGE (Natural Logarithm)

loge S1·S1+1 → D1·D1+1
LOGE(F) S1 D1
When input is on, the natural logarithm of the binary data assigned by source device S1 is stored
***** *****
to the destination assigned by device D1.

Valid Devices
Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat
S1 (Source 1) Binary data to convert into natural logarithm — — — — — — X X —
D1 (Destination 1) Destination to store conversion results — — — — — — X — —

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.
When the operation result is not within the range between –3.402823 × 1038 and –1.175495 × 10–38 or between 1.175495 × 10–38 and
3.402823 × 1038, special internal relay M8003 (carry or borrow) is turned on except when the result is 0. For details, see "Carry and Borrow in
Floating-Point Data Processing" on page 3-8.
When the value of S1 (source 1) is 0, a user program execution error occurs.
When the value of S1 (source 1) is less than 0, a user program execution error occurs.
When the data designated by source device S1 does not comply with the normal floating-point format, a user program execution error occurs, and
the execution of the instruction is canceled. The value of D1 is left unchanged and the next instruction is executed.
When a user program execution error occurs, special internal relay M8004 and ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart are turned on. For details
about the user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.
Since the LOGE instruction is executed in each scan while input is on, a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used.

Valid Data Types

W (word) — Since floating point data is used, the source and destination devices use two consecutive data registers.
I (integer) —
D (double word) —
L (long) —
F (float) X

Example: LOGE
When input I1 is on, the natural logarithm of the binary data of data registers D10 and
SOTU LOGE(F) S1 D1 D11 assigned by source device S1 is stored to data registers D20 and D21 assigned by
I1 D10 D20 destination device D1.

loge 86.0 → 4.454347

S1 D1

D10·D11 86.0 D20·D21 4.454347

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 22-1

22: LOGARITHM / POWER INSTRUCTIONS

LOG10 (Common Logarithm)

log10 S1·S1+1 → D1·D1+1
LOG10(F) S1 D1
When input is on, the common logarithm of the binary data assigned by source device S1 is
***** *****
stored to the destination assigned by device D1.

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) Binary data to convert into common logarithm — — — — — — X X —
D1 (Destination 1) Destination to store conversion results — — — — — — X — —

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

When the operation result is not within the range between –3.402823 × 1038 and –1.175495 × 10–38 or between 1.175495 × 10–38 and
3.402823 × 1038, special internal relay M8003 (carry or borrow) is turned on except when the result is 0. For details, see "Carry and Borrow in
Floating-Point Data Processing" on page 3-8.

When the value of S1 (source 1) is 0, a user program execution error occurs.

When the value of S1 (source 1) is less than 0, a user program execution error occurs.
When the data designated by source device S1 does not comply with the normal floating-point format, a user program execution error occurs, and
the execution of the instruction is canceled. The value of D1 is left unchanged and the next instruction is executed.
When a user program execution error occurs, special internal relay M8004 and ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart are turned on. For details
about the user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.
Since the LOG10 instruction is executed in each scan while input is on, a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used.

Valid Data Types

W (word) — Since floating point data is used, the source and destination devices use two consecutive data registers.
I (integer) —
D (double word) —
L (long) —
F (float) X

Example: LOG10
When input I1 is on, the common logarithm of the binary data of data registers D10 and
SOTU LOG10(F) S1 D1 D11 assigned by source device S1 is stored to data registers D20 and D21 assigned by
I1 D10 D20 destination device D1.

log10 0.0000278 → –4.555954

S1 D1

D10·D11 0.0000278 D20·D21 –4.555954

22-2 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 22: LOGARITHM / POWER INSTRUCTIONS

EXP (Exponent)
eS1·S1+1 → D1·D1+1
EXP(F) S1 D1
When input is on, e is raised to the power S1·S1+1 assigned by source device S1 and is stored to
***** *****
the destination assigned by device D1.

e (base of natural logarithm) = 2.7182818

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) Binary data of exponent — — — — — — X X —
D1 (Destination 1) Destination to store results — — — — — — X — —

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

When the operation result is not within the range between –3.402823 × 1038 and –1.175495 × 10–38 or between 1.175495 × 10–38 and
3.402823 × 1038, special internal relay M8003 (carry or borrow) is turned on except when the result is 0. For details, see "Carry and Borrow in
Floating-Point Data Processing" on page 3-8.

When the operation result is between –1.175495 × 10–38 and 1.175495 × 10–38, the destination device designated by D1 stores 0. When the
operation result is less than –3.402823 × 1038 or larger than 3.402823 × 1038, causing an overflow, the destination device designated by D1 stores a
value of minus or plus infinity.

When the data designated by source device S1 does not comply with the normal floating-point format, a user program execution error occurs, and
the execution of the instruction is canceled. The value of D1 is left unchanged and the next instruction is executed.
When a user program execution error occurs, special internal relay M8004 and ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart are turned on. For details
about the user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.
Since the EXP instruction is executed in each scan while input is on, a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used.

Valid Data Types

W (word) — Since floating point data is used, the source and destination devices use two consecutive data registers.
I (integer) —
D (double word) —
L (long) —
F (float) X

Example: EXP
When input I1 is on, e is raised to the data of data registers D10 and D11 assigned by
SOTU EXP(F) S1 D1 source device S1 and the operation result is stored to data registers D20 and D21
I1 D10 D20 assigned by destination device D1.

e2 = 2.71828182 → 7.389056

S1 D1

D10·D11 2.0 D20·D21 7.389056

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 22-3

22: LOGARITHM / POWER INSTRUCTIONS

POW (Power)
S1·S1+1S2·S2+1 → D1·D1+1
POW(F) S1 S2 D1
When input is on, data assigned by source device S1 is raised to the power S2·S2+1
***** ***** *****
assigned by source device S2 and the operation result is stored to the destination
assigned by device D1.

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) Binary data of base — — — — — — X X —
S2 (Source 2) Binary data of exponent — — — — — — X X —
D1 (Destination 1) Destination to store results — — — — — — X — —

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

When the operation result is not within the range between –3.402823 × 1038 and –1.175495 × 10–38 or between 1.175495 × 10–38 to
3.402823 × 1038, special internal relay M8003 (carry or borrow) is turned on, except when the result is 0. For details, see "Carry and Borrow in
Floating-Point Data Processing" on page 3-8.

When the operation result is between –1.175495 × 10–38 and 1.175495 × 10–38, the destination device designated by D1 stores 0. When the
operation result is less than –3.402823 × 1038 or greater than 3.402823 × 1038, causing an overflow, the destination device designated by D1 stores
a value of minus or plus infinity.

When one of the following conditions occurs, a user program execution error occurs.

• The data designated by source device S1 is less than 0 and the data designated by source device S2 is not an integer.
• The data designated by source device S1 is 0 and the data designated by source device S2 is less than or equal to 0.

When the data designated by source device S1 or S2 does not comply with the normal floating-point format, a user program execution error occurs,
and the execution of the instruction is canceled. The value of D1 is left unchanged and the next instruction is executed.
When a user program execution error occurs, special internal relay M8004 and ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart are turned on. For details
about the user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.
Since the POW instruction is executed in each scan while input is on, a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used.

Valid Data Types

W (word) — Since floating point data is used, the source and destination devices use two consecutive data registers.
I (integer) —
D (double word) —
L (long) —
F (float) X

Example: POW
When input I1 is on, the data of data registers D10 and D11 assigned by
SOTU POW(F) S1 S2 D1 source device S1 is raised to the power D20·D20+1 assigned by source device
I1 D10 D20 D30 S2 and the operation result is stored to data registers D30 and D31 assigned
by destination device D1.

41.25 → 5.656854

S1 S2 D1

D10·D11 4.0 D20·D21 1.25 D30·D31 5.656854

22-4 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

23: FILE DATA PROCESSING INSTRUCTIONS
Introduction
This chapter describes the file data processing instructions that handle the FIFO (first-in first-out) data structure. FIFOF (FIFO
Format) instructions initialize the FIFO data files storing the data. FIEX (First-In Execute) instructions store new data to the FIFO
data files, and FOEX (First-Out Execute) instructions retrieve the stored data from the FIFO data files. The first data to be stored to
the FIFO data files by FIEX instructions will be the first data to be retrieved by FOEX instructions.
NDSRC (N Data Search) instructions search a designated value through a specified range.

FIFOF (FIFO Format)

When input is on, FIFOF instruction initializes an FIFO data file. Each data
FIFOF(W) S1 S2 D1 D2 file has unique number 0 through 9. A maximum of 10 data files can be used
* *** *** ***** ***** in a user program.

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

N (File Number) File Number — — — — — — — 0-9 —
S1 (Source 1) Quantity of data registers per record — — — — — — — 1-255 —
S2 (Source 2) Quantity of records — — — — — — — 2-255 —
D1 (Destination 1) First data register to store FIFO data file — — — — — — X — —
D2 (Destination 2) FIFO status output — — — — — — — —
For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

Special internal relays cannot be designated as D2.

Since the FIFOF instruction is executed in each scan while input is on, a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used.

Valid Data Types

W (word) X When an M (internal relay) is assigned as the D2, three internal relays starting with the device assigned by D2
I (integer) — are used.
D (double word) — When a D (data register) is assigned as the D1, S1×S2+2 data registers starting with the device assigned by D1
L (long) — are used.
F (float) —

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 23-1

23: FILE DATA PROCESSING INSTRUCTIONS

Destination Device D1 (FIFO Data File)

FIFO data files are initialized when corresponding FIFOF instructions are executed. FIFO data file is placed in the area starting with
the device designated by D1 and occupies as many as S1×S2+2 data registers. The size of each record is equal to S1. S1-1 records
of data can be stored in an FIFO data file using FIEX instructions. The stored data can be retrieved from the FIFO data file using
FOEX instructions.

Device Function Description

The FI pointer indicates the position to store new data into the FIFO data file. When an
FIEX instruction is executed, the new data in data registers starting with the device
designated by S1 of the FIEX instruction is stored at the position indicated by the FI
D1+0 FI pointer pointer, and the FI pointer is incremented by 1 to indicate the position to store the next
data.
When the FI pointer indicates the last record of the FIFO data file, and an FIEX
instruction is executed, the FI pointer will return to 0.
The FO pointer indicates the position to retrieve the stored data from the FIFO data
file. When an FOEX instruction is executed, the data at the position indicated by the
FIFO pointer is retrieved and stored to the data registers starting with the device
D1+1 FO pointer designated by D1 of the FOEX instruction, and the FO pointer is incremented by 1 to
indicate the position to retrieve the next data.
When the FO pointer indicates the last record of the FIFO data file, and an FOEX
instruction is executed, the FO pointer will return to 0.
D1+2
... Record 0 The first record to store the data.
D1+(S1+1)
D1+(S1+2)
... Record 1 The second record to store the data.
D1+(S1×2+1)

D1+(S1×(S2–1)+2)
... Record S2–1 The last record to store the data.
D1+(S1×S2+1)

Destination Device D2 (FIFO Status Output)

When FIEX or FOEX instructions are executed, the following internal relays are turned on or off according to the execution status.

D2 Assignments Function Description

When the value stored in the FI pointer (D1+0) is equal to the value stored in the FO
pointer (D1+1) – 1, the FIFO data file is full, and no more data can be stored. If an FIEX
D2+0 Data file full output
instruction is executed when the FIFO data file is full, no operation is executed, and the
data file full output (D2+0) will be turned on.
When the value stored in the FI pointer (D1+0) is equal to the value stored in the FO
pointer (D1+1), the FIFO data file is empty. If an FOEX instruction is executed when the
D2+1 Data file empty output
FIFO data file is empty, no operation is executed, and the data file empty output (D2+1)
will be turned on.
The value stored in the FI or FO pointer can be 0 through S2–1. When an FIEX or FOEX
Pointer out of range
D2+2 instruction is executed while the FI or FO pointer value exceeds the valid range, no
output
operation is executed, and the pointer out of range output (D2+2) will be turned on.

Note: The FIFOF instruction cannot be used in an interrupt program.

If used, a user program execution error will result, turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart. For
details about the user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

23-2 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 23: FILE DATA PROCESSING INSTRUCTIONS

FIEX (First-In Execute)

When input is on, the data stored in data registers starting with the device assigned by S1 is stored to the
FIEX(W) S1
corresponding FIFO data file.
* *****

Valid Devices
Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat
N (File Number) File number — — — — — — — 0-9 —
S1 (Source 1) First data register to store data to FIFO data file — — — — — — X — —

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

Make sure that FIEX instructions are executed after the corresponding FIFOF instruction has initialized the FIFO data file. If FIEX instructions are
executed without executing the corresponding FIFOF instruction, a user program execution error will result, turning on special internal relay M8004
and the ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart.

When a user program execution error occurs, the execution of the instruction is canceled and the next instruction is executed. For details about the
user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

Since the FIEX instruction is executed in each scan while input is on, a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used.

Valid Data Types

W (word) X When a D (data register) is assigned as the source, as many data registers as the value stored in device S1 of
I (integer) — the corresponding FIFOF instruction are used.
D (double word) —
L (long) —
F (float) —

FOEX (First-Out Execute)

When input is on, the data is retrieved from the corresponding FIFO data file and stored to the data
FOEX(W) D1
registers starting with the device assigned by D1.
* *****

Valid Devices
Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat
N (File Number) File number — — — — — — — 0-9 —
D1 (Destination 1) First data register number to store data — — — — — — X — —

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

Make sure that FOEX instructions are executed after the corresponding FIFOF instruction has initialized the FIFO data file. If FOEX instructions are
executed without executing the corresponding FIFOF instruction, a user program execution error will result, turning on special internal relay M8004
and the ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart.

When a user program execution error occurs, the execution of the instruction is canceled and the next instruction is executed. For details about the
user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

Since the FOEX instruction is executed in each scan while input is on, a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used.

Valid Data Types

W (word) X When a D (data register) is assigned as the destination, as many data registers as the value stored in device S1
I (integer) — of the corresponding FIFOF instruction are used.
D (double word) —
L (long) —
F (float) —

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 23-3

23: FILE DATA PROCESSING INSTRUCTIONS

Example: FIFOF, FIEX, and FOEX

This program demonstrates a user program of the FIFOX, FIEX, and FOEX instructions to use an FIFO data file.

File number: 2
Quantity of data registers per record: 3
Quantity of records: 4
FIFO Data file: D100 through D113 (3×4+2 data registers)
FIFO status outputs: M100 through M102

Ladder Diagram
M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay.
MOV(W) S1 – D1 R REP When the CPU starts, MOV sets 0 to FI and FO pointers, and FIFOF initializes
M8120 0 D100 2
FIFO data file 2.
FIFOF(W) S1 S2 D1 D2
2 3 4 D100 M100
When input I0 is turned on, the data in D10 through D12 are stored to the
SOTU FIEX(W) S1 FIFO data file 2.
I0 2 D10

SOTU FIEX(W) S1 When input I1 is turned on, the data in D20 through D22 are stored to the
I1 2 D20 FIFO data file 2.

SOTU FOEX(W) D1 When input I2 is turned on, the first data is retrieved from the FIFO data file 2
I2 2 D50 and stored to D50 through D52.

FIFO Data File

The table below shows the data stored in FIFO data file 2 when inputs I0, I1, and I2 are turned on in this order. Only valid data
managed by the FIFOF, FIEX, and FOEX instructions are shown in the table.

Function Device Address Input I0 Input I1 Input I2

FI Pointer D100 1 2 2
FO Pointer D101 0 0 1
Record 0 D102 through D104 D10, D11, D12 D10, D11, D12 —
Record 1 D105 through D107 — D20, D21, D22 D20, D21, D22
Record 2 D108 through D110 — — —
Record 3 D111 through D113 — — —

23-4 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 23: FILE DATA PROCESSING INSTRUCTIONS

NDSRC (N Data Search)

When input is on, a value specified by device S1 is searched for. Data
NDSRC(*) S1 S2 S3 D1 registers are searched, starting with the data register assigned by device S2.
***** ***** ***** ***** Device S3 specifies the quantity of 1-word or 2-word blocks of data registers
to search, depending on the data type.

The offset of the data register where a match first occurred is stored in data
register assigned by device D1. The number of matches is stored in the next
data register. When the search results in no match, 65,535 is stored in device
D1 and 0 is stored in device D+1.

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) Value to be sought — — — — — — X X —
S2 (Source 2) First data register number to search — — — — — — X — —
S3 (Source 3) Quantity of blocks to search — — — — — — X X —
D1 (Destination 1) Search result — — — — — — X — —

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

Source S1 data specifies the value to be sought and the valid range depends on the data type.

The search range cannot straddle data registers and non-retentive data registers. Make sure that the sum of data register numbers designated by
S1 and S2 does not result in a different data register range.

For source S3 and destination D1, 1 word is always used without regard to the data type.
Destination D1 occupies two consecutive data registers starting with the device designated by D1. Data registers D0-D7997 and D10000-D55997
can be designated as destination D1.

When F (float) data is selected and S1 does not comply with the normal floating-point format, a user program execution error will result, turning on
special internal relay M8004 and ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart. When a user program execution error occurs, the execution of the
instruction is canceled and the next instruction is executed.

When data in S2 to S2+(S3) does not comply with floating-point format, the data is skipped to continue the search and the results are stored in D1
and D1+1.

The NDSRC instruction cannot be used in an interrupt program.

If used, a user program execution error will result, turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart.

When S3 is zero or the sum of S2 and S3 is not within the valid data register range, a user program execution error will result, turning on special
internal relay M8004 and ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart. When a user program execution error occurs, the execution of the instruction is
canceled and the next instruction is executed.

For details about the user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

Since the NDSRC instruction is executed in each scan while input is on, a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used.

Valid Data Types

W (word) X When a word device such as D (data register) is assigned as the source, 1 point (word or integer data) or 2
I (integer) X points (double-word, long, or float data) are used.
D (double word) X
L (long) X
F (float) X

Quantity of Source and Destination Devices

Depending on the data type, source devices S1 and S2 use a different quantity of devices. Source device S3 and destination device
D1 always use 1 word without regards to the data type.

Device W (word), I (integer) D (double word), L (long), F (float)

S1, S2 1 word device 2 word devices
S3, D1 1 word device 1 word device

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 23-5

23: FILE DATA PROCESSING INSTRUCTIONS

Examples: NDSRC
The following examples demonstrate the NDSRC instruction that searches the data of three different data types.
• Data Type: Word

NDSRC(W) S1 S2 S3 D1
I0 D10 D100 5 D200

D10 1234 D99 1234

Search Offset
D100 145 0

D101 1234 1 (match)

Result D200 1 Offset of first match
D102 458 2
D201 2 Quantity of matches
D103 1234 3 (match)

D104 652 4

D105 1234

• Data Type: Double Word

NDSRC(D) S1 S2 S3 D1
I0 D10 D100 5 D200

D10·D11 12345678 D98·D99 12345678

Search Offset
D100·D101 1459997 0

D102·D103 12345678 2 (match)

Result D200 2 Offset of first match
D104·D105 4584557 4
D201 3 Quantity of matches
D106·D107 12345678 6 (match)

D108·D109 12345678 8 (match)

D110·D111 1234457

• Data Type: Float

NDSRC(F) S1 S2 S3 D1
I0 D10 D100 5 D200

D10·D11 0.4521 D98·D99 12

Search Offset
D100·D101 0.0 0

D102·D103 0.224 2
Result D200 6 Offset of first match
D104·D105 0.124 4
D201 1 Quantity of matches
D106·D107 0.4521 6 (match)

D108·D109 3.245 8

D110·D111 12244

23-6 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

24: CLOCK INSTRUCTIONS
Introduction
TADD (time addition) and TSUB (time subtraction) instructions add or subtract time data in two different modes. The data can be
selected from time (hour, minute, and second) or date/time (year, month, day, day of week, hour, minute, and second).
HTOS (HMS to s) and STOH (s to HMS) instructions perform conversion of time data between hours, minutes, seconds and
seconds.
HOUR (hour meter) instruction measures the on duration of the input and compares the total duration to a preset value. When the
preset value is reached, an output or internal relay is turned on.

TADD (Time Addition)

S1 + S2 → D1, CY
TADD S1 S2 D1
When input is on, time data assigned by source device S2 are added to date/time data
Mode *** *** *****
assigned by source device S1, depending on the selected mode. The result is stored
to destination device D1 and carry (M8003).

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

Mode Selection of S1 data range — — — — — — — 0, 1 —
S1 (Source 1) Date/time data to add to — — — — — — X — —
S2 (Source 2) Time data to add — — — — — — X — —
D1 (Destination 1) Destination to store results — — — — — — X — —

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

When Mode 0 is selected, source devices S1 and S2 and destination device D1 occupy 3 consecutive data registers starting with the designated
device. Data registers D0-D7997 and D10000-D55997 can be designated as these devices.

When Mode 1 is selected, source device S1 and destination device D1 occupy 7 consecutive data registers starting with the designated device. Data
registers D0-D7993 and D10000-D55993 can be designated as these devices. Source device S2 occupies 3 consecutive data registers starting with
the designated device. Data registers D0-D7997 and D10000-D55997 can be designated as source device S2.

Since the TADD instruction is executed in each scan while input is on, a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 24-1

24: CLOCK INSTRUCTIONS

Mode 0
When mode 0 is selected, time data (hour, minute, and second) stored in 3 data registers starting with source device S2 are added to the time data
(hour, minute, and second) stored in 3 data registers starting with source device S1. The results are stored to 3 data registers starting with
destination device D1.

Source 1 Source 2 Destination 1

Hour Hour Hour
S1 S2 D1
(0-23) (0-23) (0-23)

Minute Minute Minute

S1+1
(0-59) + S2+1
(0-59)
D1+1
(0-59)

Second Second Second

S1+2 S2+2 D1+2
(0-59) (0-59) (0-59)

Hour data can be 0 through 23. Minute and second data can be 0 through 59.
When the execution result exceeds 23:59:59, the result is subtracted by 24 hours and stored to the data register designated by destination device
D1, turning on special internal relay M8003 (carry).
When any of the hour, minute, or second data exceeds the valid range, a user program execution error will result, turning on special internal relay
M8004 and the ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart.
When a user program execution error occurs, the execution of the instruction is canceled and the next instruction is executed. For details about the
user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

Mode 1
When mode 1 is selected, time data (hour, minute, and second) stored in 3 data registers starting with source device S2 are added to the date/time
data (year, month, day, day of week, hour, minute, and second) stored in 7 data registers starting with source device S1. The results are stored to 7
data registers starting with destination device D1.

Source 1 Destination 1
Year Year
S1 D1
(0-99) (0-99)

Month Month
S1+1 D1+1
(1-12) (1-12)

Day Day
S1+2 D1+2
(1-31) (1-31)

D of W
S1+3 (Note) D1+3
Source 2 (0-6)

Hour Hour Hour

S1+4 S2 D1+4
(0-23) (0-65535) (0-23)

Minute Minute Minute

S1+5
(0-59) + S2+1
(0-59)
D1+5
(0-59)

Second Second Second

S1+6 S2+2 D1+6
(0-59) (0-59) (0-59)

Note: Device S1+3 in source 1 is not used for execution and need not be designated.

TADD instruction supports leap years.

For source 1: Year data can be 0 through 99. Month data 1 through 12. Day data 1 through 31. Hour data 0 through 23. Minute and second data 0
through 59.
Year data 0 through 99 is processed as year 2000 through 2099.
For source 2: Hour data can be 0 through 65,535. Minute and second data can be 0 through 59.
Destination 1: The day of week is calculated automatically from the resultant year, month, and day, and stored to device D1+3.
Day of week data represent: 0 (Sunday), 1 (Monday), 2 (Tuesday), 3 (Wednesday), 4 (Thursday), 5 (Friday), and 6 (Saturday).
When source 1 contains invalid day/time data, a user program execution error will result, turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED
on the FC6A Series MicroSmart.
When the execution result exceeds 99 year 12 month 31 day 23:59:59, a user program execution error will result, turning on special internal relay
M8004 and the ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart.
When a user program execution error occurs, the execution of the instruction is canceled and the next instruction is executed. For details about the
user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

24-2 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 24: CLOCK INSTRUCTIONS

Examples: TADD
The following examples demonstrate the TADD instruction that will add time data in two different modes.
• Mode 0

SOTU TADD S1 S2 D1
I0 0 D0 D10 D20

Source 1 Source 2 Destination 1

9 5 14
D0 D10 D20
(Hour) (Hour) (Hour)

30 10 40
D1
(Minute) + D11
(Minute)
D21
(Minute)

40 5 45
D2 D12 D22
(Second) (Second) (Second)

When the result exceeds 23:59:59, the resultant hour data is subtracted by 24, turning on special internal relay M8003 (carry).

Source 1 Source 2 Destination 1

15 10 2
D0 D10 D20
(Hour) (Hour) (Hour)

50 20 11
D1
(Minute) + D11
(Minute)
D21
(Minute)

40 30 10
D2 D12 D22
(Second) (Second) (Second)

• Mode 1

SOTU TADD S1 S2 D1
I0 1 D8008 D100 D200

Source 1 Destination 1
7 7
D8008 D200
(Year) (Year)

8 8
D8009 D201
(Month) (Month)

23 23
D8010 D202
(Day) (Day)

4 4
D8011 (Note) D203
(D of W) Source 2 (D of W)

10 10 20
D8012 D100 D204
(Hour) (Hour) (Hour)

20 15 35
D8013
(Minute) + D101
(Minute)
D205
(Minute)

30 25 55
D8014 D102 D206
(Second) (Second) (Second)

Note: D8011 in source 1 is not used for execution and does not need to be designated. The day of week is calculated automatically from the
resultant year, month, and day, and stored to D203 of destination 1.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 24-3

24: CLOCK INSTRUCTIONS

When the result exceeds 23:59:59, the resultant hour data is subtracted by a multiple of 24 and the day data is incremented.

Source 1 Destination 1
7 7
D8008 D200
(Year) (Year)

8 8
D8009 D201
(Month) (Month)

23 25
D8010 D202
(Day) (Day)

4 6
D8011 (Note) D203
(D of W) Source 2 (D of W)

20 30 3
D8012 D100 D204
(Hour) (Hour) (Hour)

30 35 5
D8013
(Minute) + D101
(Minute)
D205
(Minute)

40 15 55
D8014 D102 D206
(Second) (Second) (Second)

Note: D8011 in source 1 is not used for execution and does not need to be designated. The day of week is calculated automatically from the
resultant year, month, and day, and stored to D203 of destination 1.

24-4 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 24: CLOCK INSTRUCTIONS

TSUB (Time Subtraction)

S1 – S2 → D1, CY
TSUB S1 S2 D1
When input is on, time data assigned by source device S2 is subtracted from date/
Mode *** *** *****
time data assigned by source device S1, depending on the selected mode. The result
is stored to destination device D1 and borrow (M8003).

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

Mode Selection of S1 data range — — — — — — — 0, 1 —
S1 (Source 1) Date/time data to subtract from — — — — — — X — —
S2 (Source 2) Time data to subtract — — — — — — X — —
D1 (Destination 1) Destination to store results — — — — — — X — —

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

When Mode 0 is selected, source devices S1 and S2 and destination device D1 occupy 3 consecutive data registers starting with the designated
device. Data D0-D7997 and D10000-D55997 can be designated as these devices.

When Mode 1 is selected, source device S1 and destination device D1 occupy 7 consecutive data registers starting with the designated device. Data
registers D0-D7993 and D10000-D55993 can be designated as these devices. Source device S2 occupies 3 consecutive data registers starting with
the designated device. Data registers D0-D7997 and D10000-D55997 can be designated as source device S2.

Since the TSUB instruction is executed in each scan while input is on, a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 24-5

24: CLOCK INSTRUCTIONS

Mode 0
When mode 0 is selected, time data (hour, minute, and second) stored in 3 data registers starting with source device S2 is subtracted from the time
data (hour, minute, and second) stored in 3 data registers starting with source device S1. The results are stored to 3 data registers starting with
destination device D1.

Source 1 Source 2 Destination 1

Hour Hour Hour
S1 S2 D1
(0-23) (0-23) (0-23)

Minute Minute Minute

S1+1
(0-59) – S2+1
(0-59)
D1+1
(0-59)

Second Second Second

S1+2 S2+2 D1+2
(0-59) (0-59) (0-59)

Hour data can be 0 through 23. Minute and second data can be 0 through 59.
When the execution result is less than 00:00:00, 24 hour is added to the result and stored to the data register designated by destination device D1,
turning on special internal relay M8003 (borrow).
When any of the hour, minute, or second data exceeds the valid range, a user program execution error will result, turning on special internal relay
M8004 and the ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart.
When a user program execution error occurs, the execution of the instruction is canceled and the next instruction is executed. For details about the
user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

Mode 1
When mode 1 is selected, time data (hour, minute, and second) stored in 3 data registers starting with source device S2 is subtracted from the date/
time data (year, month, day, day of week, hour, minute, and second) stored in 7 data registers starting with source device S1. The results are stored
to 7 data registers starting with destination device D1.

Source 1 Destination 1
Year Year
S1 D1
(0-99) (0-99)

Month Month
S1+1 D1+1
(1-12) (1-12)

Day Day
S1+2 D1+2
(1-31) (1-31)

D of W
S1+3 (Note) D1+3
Source 2 (0-6)

Hour Hour Hour

S1+4 S2 D1+4
(0-23) (0-65535) (0-23)

Minute Minute Minute

S1+5
(0-59) – S2+1
(0-59)
D1+5
(0-59)

Second Second Second

S1+6 S2+2 D1+6
(0-59) (0-59) (0-59)

Note: Device S1+3 in source 1 is not used for execution and need not be designated.

TSUB instruction supports leap years.

For source 1: Year data can be 0 through 99. Month data 1 through 12. Day data 1 through 31. Hour data 0 through 23. Minute and second data 0
through 59.
Year data 0 through 99 is processed as year 2000 through 2099.
For source 2: Hour data can be 0 through 65,535. Minute and second data can be 0 through 59.
Destination 1: The day of week is calculated automatically from the resultant year, month, and day, and stored to device D1+3.
Day of week data represent: 0 (Sunday), 1 (Monday), 2 (Tuesday), 3 (Wednesday), 4 (Thursday), 5 (Friday), and 6 (Saturday).
When source 1 contains invalid day/time data, a user program execution error will result, turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED
on the FC6A Series MicroSmart.
When the execution result is less than 00 year 1 month 1 day 00:00:00, a user program execution error will result, turning on special internal relay
M8004 and the ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart.
When a user program execution error occurs, the execution of the instruction is canceled and the next instruction is executed. For details about the
user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

24-6 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 24: CLOCK INSTRUCTIONS

Examples: TSUB
The following examples demonstrate the TSUB instruction to that will subtract time data in two different modes.
• Mode 0

SOTU TSUB S1 S2 D1
I0 0 D0 D10 D20

Source 1 Source 2 Destination 1

20 10 10
D0 D10 D20
(Hour) (Hour) (Hour)

30 10 20
D1
(Minute) – D11
(Minute)
D21
(Minute)

40 5 35
D2 D12 D22
(Second) (Second) (Second)

When the result is less than 00:00:00, 24 is added to the result, turning on special internal relay M8003 (borrow).

Source 1 Source 2 Destination 1

8 10 21
D0 D10 D20
(Hour) (Hour) (Hour)

10 30 39
D1
(Minute) – D11
(Minute)
D21
(Minute)

5 30 35
D2 D12 D22
(Second) (Second) (Second)

• Mode 1

SOTU TSUB S1 S2 D1
I0 1 D8008 D100 D200

Source 1 Destination 1
7 7
D8008 D200
(Year) (Year)

8 8
D8009 D201
(Month) (Month)

23 23
D8010 D202
(Day) (Day)

4 4
D8011 (Note) D203
(D of W) Source 2 (D of W)

10 5 5
D8012 D100 D204
(Hour) (Hour) (Hour)

20 15 5
D8013
(Minute) – D101
(Minute)
D205
(Minute)

30 25 5
D8014 D102 D206
(Second) (Second) (Second)

Note: D8011 in source 1 is not used for execution and does not need to be designated. The day of week is calculated automatically from the
resultant year, month, and day, and stored to D203 of destination 1.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 24-7

24: CLOCK INSTRUCTIONS

When the result is less than 00:00:00, 24 is added to the result, and the day data is decremented.

Source 1 Destination 1
7 7
D8008 D200
(Year) (Year)

8 8
D8009 D201
(Month) (Month)

23 22
D8010 D202
(Day) (Day)

4 (Note) 3
D8011 D203
(D of W) Source 2 (D of W)

20 30 13
D8012 D100 D204
(Hour) (Hour) (Hour)

30 40 49
D8013
(Minute) – D101
(Minute)
D205
(Minute)

40 50 50
D8014 D102 D206
(Second) (Second) (Second)

Note: D8011 in source 1 is not used for execution and does not need to be designated. The day of week is calculated automatically from the
resultant year, month, and day, and stored to D203 of destination 1.

24-8 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 24: CLOCK INSTRUCTIONS

HTOS (HMS to Sec)

Hours, minutes, seconds → Seconds
HTOS S1 D1
When input is on, time data in hours, minutes, and seconds assigned by source device S1 is
***** *****
converted into seconds. The result is stored to destination device D1.

Valid Devices
Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat
S1 (Source 1) Time data in hours, minutes, seconds — — — — — — X — —
D1 (Destination 1) Destination to store results — — — — — — X — —

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

Source device S1 occupies 3 consecutive data registers starting with the designated device. Data registers D0-D7997 and D10000-D55997 can be
designated as source device S1.

Destination device D1 occupies 2 consecutive data registers to store double-word data, starting with the designated device. Data registers D0-
D7998 and D10000-D55998 can be designated as destination device D1.

Hour data can be 0 through 65,535. Minute and second data can be 0 through 59.

When any of the hour, minute, or second data exceeds the valid range, a user program execution error will result, turning on special internal relay
M8004 and the ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart. When a user program execution error occurs, the execution of the instruction is canceled
and the next instruction is executed.

When the execution of the instruction is canceled, the data in D1 and D1+1 is left unchanged. For details about the user program execution errors,
see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

Since the HTOS instruction is executed in each scan while input is on, a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used.

Examples: HTOS
The following examples demonstrate the HTOS instruction that will convert time data in hours, minutes, and seconds into seconds
and store the results to two consecutive data registers.

HTOS S1 D1
I0 D0 D100

Source 1
2
D0
(Hour) Destination 1
10 7840
D1 D100·D101
(Minute) (Second)

40
D2
(Second)

Source 1
40
D0
(Hour) Destination 1
30 145820
D1 D100·D101
(Minute) (Second)

20
D2
(Second)

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 24-9

24: CLOCK INSTRUCTIONS

STOH (S to HMS)
Seconds → Hours, minutes, seconds
STOH S1 D1
When input is on, time data in seconds assigned by source device S1 is converted into hours,
***** *****
minutes, and seconds. The result is stored to destination device D1.

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) Time data in seconds — — — — — — X X —
D1 (Destination 1) Destination to store results — — — — — — X — —

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

Source device S1 occupies 2 consecutive data registers to store double-word data, starting with the designated device. Data registers D0-D7998 and
D10000-D55998 can be designated as source device S1.

Destination device D1 occupies 3 consecutive data registers starting with the designated device. Data registers D0-D7997 and D10000-D55997 can
be designated as destination device D1.

Second data for source device S1 can be 0 through 4,294,967,295.

When the conversion result exceeds 65,535 hours 59 minutes 59 seconds, special internal relay M8003 (carry) is turned on. For example, when the
conversion result is 65,537 hours 0 minute 0 second, destination 1 stores 1 hour 0 minute 0 second, turning on special internal relay M8003 (carry).

Since the STOH instruction is executed in each scan while input is on, a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used.

Examples: STOH
The following examples demonstrate the STOH instruction that will convert time data in seconds into hours, minutes, and seconds
and store the results to three consecutive data registers.

STOH S1 D1
I0 D5 D100

Destination 1
3
D100
Source 1 (Hour)

12345 25
D5·D6 D101
(Second) (Minute)

45
D102
(Second)

Destination 1
3429
D100
Source 1 (Hour)

12345678 21
D5·D6 D101
(Second) (Minute)

18
D102
(Second)

24-10 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 24: CLOCK INSTRUCTIONS

HOUR (Hour Meter)

S1 ↔ D1 → D2
HOUR S1 D1 D2 D3
While input is on, the ON duration of the input is measured. The measured
***** ***** ***** *****
time value (hour, minute, and second) is stored to 3 consecutive data
registers assigned by destination device D1 and compared with the preset
value assigned by source device S1.

When the D1 value reaches the S1 value, an output or internal relay

assigned by destination device D2 is turned on.

The data registers specified by D3 and D3+1 are used as the system work
area.

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) Preset value — — — — — — X 0-65,535 —
D1 (Destination 1) Measured input ON duration — — — — — — X — —
D2 (Destination 2) Comparison output — X — — — — — —
D3 (Destination 3) System work area — — — — — — X — —

For valid device address ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

Source device S1 can be designated by a data register or constant.

Source device S1, when designated by a data register, and destination device D1 occupy 3 consecutive data registers starting with the designated
device to store hour, minute, and second data. Data registers D0-D7997 and D10000-D55997 can be designated as these devices.

When source device S1 is designated by a constant, the preset value can be 0 through 65,535 in hours, then minutes and seconds are set to 0.
Special internal relays cannot be designated as destination device D2.

Destination device D3 requires two data registers reserved for system work area.

Hour data can be 0 through 65,535. Minute and second data can be 0 through 59.

When the measured input ON duration value in destination device D1 reaches the preset value designated by source device S1, the comparison
output designated by destination device D2 turns on. As long as the input remains on, the measured input ON duration value continues to increase.
When the measured input ON duration value exceeds 65,535 hours 59 minutes 59 seconds, the value returns to 0 hours 0 minutes 0 seconds to
repeat another measuring cycle, with the comparison output remaining on.

When any of the hour, minute, or second data of source device S1 exceeds the valid range, a user program execution error will result, turning on
special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart, but the input ON duration is measured.

When any of the hour, minute, or second data of source device S1 is changed to an invalid value after the comparison output has turned on, the
comparison output is turned off. Then a user program execution error will result, turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the
FC6A Series MicroSmart, but the input ON duration measurement is continued. For user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution
Errors" on page 3-10.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 24-11

24: CLOCK INSTRUCTIONS

Examples: HOUR
The following examples demonstrate the HOUR instruction that will measure the input ON duration value in hours, minutes, and
seconds and to compare the value in two different ways.
• Source Device S1: Data Register

D0·D1·D2 ↔ D100·D101·D102 → Q2
HOUR S1 D1 D2 D3
D0 D100 Q2 D1900 While input I0 is on, the ON duration is measured. The measured time
I0
value (hour, minute, and second) is stored to data registers
Source 1 Destination 1 D100·D101·D102 assigned by destination device D1 and compared with the
preset value stored in data registers D0·D1·D2 assigned by source device
50 3
D0 D100 S1.
(Hour) (Hour)
When the measured value reaches the preset value, output Q2 assigned by
35 25
D1 D101 destination device D2 is turned on.
(Minute) (Minute)
Data registers D1900 and D1901 assigned by destination device D3 are
55 45
D2 D102 reserved for system work area.
(Second) (Second)

• Source Device S1: Constant

50 ↔ D100·D101·D102 → Q2
HOUR S1 D1 D2 D3
50 D100 Q2 D1900 While input I0 is on, the ON duration is measured. The measured time
I0
value (hour, minute, and second) is stored to data registers
Source 1 Destination 1 D100·D101·D102 assigned by destination device D1 and compared with 50
hours assigned by source device S1.
50 3
Constant D100
(Hour) (Hour) When the measured value reaches 50 hours, output Q2 assigned by
destination device D2 is turned on.
25
D101
(Minute) Data registers D1900 and D1901 assigned by destination device D3 are
reserved for system work area.
45
D102
(Second)

24-12 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

25: DATA LOG INSTRUCTIONS
Introduction
This chapter describes the data log instructions that save the log data of specified devices to the SD memory card.

DLOG (Data Log)

The DLOG instruction saves the values of the specified devices in the specified
DLOG S1 D1 D2 data format as a CSV file on the SD memory card.

When the input is on, the date and time and the values of the specified devices
***** ***** *****
are output to the CSV file in the folder assigned by S1. When the execution of the
instruction finishes, the device assigned by D1 is turned on and the execution
status is stored to the device assigned by D2.

When the folder assigned by S1 does not exist on the SD memory card, that
folder is created. The folder path is "FCDATA01\DATALOG\User specified folder."
For details on the folder structure, see Chapter 11 "SD Memory Card" in the
"FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s Manual".

The CSV file name is "DATE.csv." The date when the DLOG instruction is turned
on is used as DATE.

Example: If the date is December 30, 2015, the file name is "20151230.csv".

When a CSV file with the same date does not exist in the folder designated by S1, the CSV file is created and the header and the
log data is output.

Output example

Time D0010 Header

2015/12/30 08:30:23 12345 Log data

When a CSV file with the same date already exists in the folder designated by S1, only the log data is appended to the CSV file.

Output example

Time D0010
2015/12/30 08:30:23 12345
2015/12/30 17:30:23 1212 Appended log data

When the execution of DLOG instruction finishes, the device designated by D1 is turned on and the status code is stored to the
device designated by D2 according to the execution result. For status codes, see "3. D2 (destination 2): Execution Status" on page
25-3.
Notes:

• The time required to create a new CSV file (create a file and output header) is 510 µs.

• When the FC6A Series MicroSmart starts running and DLOG instruction is executed, the header is appended to the CSV file even if the same
DLOG instruction was executed previously within the same day.

Output example

Time D0010 Header

2015/12/30 08:30:23 12345 Log data
Time D0020 Appended header
2015/12/30 17:30:23 1212 Log data

• For details on the SD memory card specification, see Chapter 11 "SD Memory Card" in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s
Manual".

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 25-1

25: DATA LOG INSTRUCTIONS

Notes:

• The number of DLOG instructions that can be programmed in a user program is 48. However, make sure that the folder name specified by the
DLOG instruction is not duplicated by any folder names specified by the other DLOG instructions. When the folders are duplicated, log data
with a mixed format is output to the same CSV file.

• The DLOG instruction cannot be used in an interrupt program. If used, a user program execution error will result, turning on special internal
relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart. For details about the user program execution errors, see "User Program
Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

• While the input to DLOG instruction is on, log data is repeatedly output to the CSV file. When you want to output the log data only one time,
add a SOTU (single output up instruction) or SOTD (single output down instruction) to the input condition. For SOTU or SOTD, see "SOTU
and SOTD (Single Output Up and Down)" on page 4-26.

• The process of writing data to the SD memory card for the DLOG instruction takes several scans. Once a DLOG instruction is executed, the
process continues until the log data transfer is complete, regardless of any change in the instruction input. While the log data is being written
to the SD memory card, instructions are not being executed, even when the inputs to DLOG instructions are turned on. To execute the DLOG
instruction again, confirm that the previous data transfer process has finished, and then execute the instruction.

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) Folder name (Note) — — — — — — — — —
D1 (Destination 1) Completion output — X — — — — — —
D2 (Destination 2) Execution status — — — — — — — —

Note: Specify the folder name by entering characters.

Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1. Special data registers cannot be designated as D2.

Settings

2. 3. 1.
5. 6. 7. 8.

4.

9.
10.

1. S1 (source 1): Folder Name

Specify the folder name on the SD memory card to store the log data with a desired text up to 8 single-byte alphanumeric
characters.

Notes:

• The following single-byte characters cannot be used in the folder names:

/\:*?"<>|#{}%&~

• Consecutive periods cannot be used in folder names.

• A period cannot be used at the start or the end of the folder name.

• Single-byte spaces at the start or the end of the folder name are omitted.

2. D1 (destination 1): Completion Output

Specify the device that turns on when the transfer of log data to a SD card and the execution of the DLOG instruction are
complete. This device is turned on regardless of the success or failure of transferring log data to the SD memory card.

25-2 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 25: DATA LOG INSTRUCTIONS

3. D2 (destination 2): Execution Status

Specify the device to store the status code. One of the following status codes is stored according to the DLOG instruction
execution status and result.

Status Code Status Description

0 Normal —
1 SD memory card insertion error The SD memory card is not inserted
2 SD memory card capacity error The SD memory card is full
3 SD memory card writing error Writing log data to the SD memory card fails
4 CSV file capacity error The CSV file exceeds 5 MB
5 SD memory card protection error The SD memory card is write protected
DLOG instruction is executed while another DLOG instruction or TRACE
6 SD memory card access error
instruction is being executed
7 Characters conversion error Converting log data to numeric characters fails
8 Folder creation error Creating the folder fails
9 CSV file open error Opening the CSV file fails
32 Executing DLOG instruction Writing log data to SD memory card is in progress

4. Settings
The following is a list of the device and display types that can be set as the data to be output to the CSV files.

Display Type Valid Devices

DEC(W) TC, TP, CC, CP, D
DEC(I) D
DEC(D) CC, CP, D
DEC(L) D
DEC(F) D
HEX(W) TC, TP, CC, CP, D
HEX(D) CC, CP, D
BIN(B) I, Q, M, R, T, C

5. Tag Name
Enter tag names or device addresses to specify the devices whose values are output to the CSV files.

6. Device Address
When the devices are specified as tag names, the corresponding device addresses are shown.

7. Display Type
Select the display type from the following table for each device for when the device values are output to the CSV file.

Display Type Range Maximum Characters

DEC(W) 0 to 65,535 5
DEC(I) -32,768 to 32,767 6
DEC(D) 0 to 4,294,967,295 10
DEC(L) -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 11
DEC(F) -3.402823E+38 to 3.402823E+38 13
HEX(W) 0000 to FFFF 4
HEX(D) 00000000 to FFFFFFFF 8
BIN(B) 0 or 1 1

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 25-3

25: DATA LOG INSTRUCTIONS

8. Repeat
The data in as many consecutive devices as the specified repeat, starting from the specified device address, are output to the
SD memory card.
For example, when the display type of D10 is DEC(W) and the repeat is set to 5, the data is output to SD memory card as
follows.

Time D0010 D0011 D0012 D0013 D0014 Header

2015/12/30 15:40:00 12345 1 5 12 111 Log data 1
2015/12/30 15:41:00 1212 3 7 35 222 Log data 2
2015/12/30 15:42:00 345 4 99 79 333 Log data 3

9. Logging data size

The amount of memory that the DLOG instruction uses for the current log settings is shown. The amount of memory used
increases when a device to log the data is added. You can register up to a maximum of 64 devices (the total amount of memory
must be less than or equal to 1,024 bytes). One byte of memory area is required for each character.

10. Remaining size

The amount of free memory (the difference between the logging data size and 1,024 bytes) is shown.

CSV File Output Format and File Format Configuration

• Output format

The CSV file output format is as follows.

Time,D0010,D0020,D0030,D0050,D0060
2015/12/30 15:40:00,12345,1,5,12,111
2015/12/30 15:41:00,1212,3,7,35,222
2015/12/30 15:42:00,345,4,99,79,333

When the DLOG instruction is executed and the CSV file for the same date does not exist in the folder designated by S1, a new
CSV file is created and the header and the log data 1 are output as shown in above output format example. If the DLOG instruction
is executed again on the same date, the log data 2 is appended to the CSV file. Similarly, if the DLOG instruction is executed again
on the same date, log data 3 is appended to the CSV file.
When the date changes and the DLOG instruction is executed, a new CSV file with a new file name is created and the header and
the log data is output.

• File format

The decimal symbol and separating character in CSV files can be specified in the function area settings. For details, see Chapter 11
"SD Memory Card" in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s Manual".

25-4 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 25: DATA LOG INSTRUCTIONS

Examples: DLOG
When M0 is turned on, the decimal values of D0 through D5 (data type W (word)) and D10 (data type F (floating point)) are saved
in a CSV file in the "RESULT" folder on the SD memory card every 10 seconds.

Output example

Time D0000 D0001 D0002 D0003 D0004 D0005 D0010

2012/02/06 10:20:30 12345 0 0 56789 0 0 -3.402823E+38
2012/02/06 10:20:40 12345 0 0 56789 0 0 -3.402823E+38
2012/02/06 10:20:50 12345 0 0 56789 0 0 -3.402823E+38

The sample user program described below operates as follows.

• M100 is turned on when the transfer of log data has finished transferring to the SD memory card is complete.

• The DLOG instruction status code is stored in D100.

• The status code saved in D100 is checked and Q0 is turned on if an error occurs.

• Configuration Procedure

1. Create the ladder program.

TIM T0 DLOG S1 D1 D2

M0 T0 100 RESULT M100 D100

CMP<> (W) S1 - S2 - D1 - REP

SOTU
M100 D100 0 Q0

2. Configure the DLOG instruction.

Configure the Devices tab.
(1) Designate M0100 as D1 (Completion Output).
(2) Designate D0100 as D2 (Execution Status).

(1) (2)

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 25-5

25: DATA LOG INSTRUCTIONS

Configure the Settings tab.

(3) Enter "RESULT" in S1 (Folder Name).
(4) Configure D0000 to output the decimal value of D0000 to the CSV files with the data type W (word).
(5) Set the repeat to 6 to output the values of D0000 through D0005 to the CSV files.
(6) Configure D0010 to output the decimal value of D0010 to the CSV files with the data type F (float).

(3)

(4) (5)
(6)

The configuration is now completed.

• Operation Description

10 seconds after M0 is turned on, the DLOG instruction is executed one time. When the DLOG instruction is executed, the data
of D0 through D5 and D10 are output to the CSV file on the SD memory card as decimal values along with the current date and
time.
The saved location of CSV files is FCDATA01\DATALOG\RESULT. The oldest data is saved at the top of the log data, and the latest
data is saved at the bottom of the log data.
When the execution of the DLOG instruction is complete, the completion output M100 is turned on and the CMP instruction is
executed once. The CMP instruction compares the status code stored in the execution status D100 with 0 and turns Q0 on or off.
Q0 is turned on when an error occurs in the DLOG instruction.
While M0 is on, the log data is appended to the CSV file every 10 seconds.

Output results
Time D0000 D0001 D0002 D0003 D0004 D0005 D0010
2012/02/06 10:20:30 12345 0 0 56789 0 0 -3.402823E+38
2012/02/06 10:20:40 12345 0 0 56789 0 0 -3.402823E+38
2012/02/06 10:20:50 12345 0 0 56789 0 0 -3.402823E+38

25-6 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 25: DATA LOG INSTRUCTIONS

TRACE (Data Trace)

The TRACE instruction saves the values for the previous number of scans for the
TRACE S1 D1 D2 specified device in the specified data format as a CSV file on the SD memory card.

When the input is turned on, the date and time and the values of the previous
***** ***** *****
scans for the specified device are output to the CSV file in the folder assigned by
S1. When the execution of the instruction finishes, the device assigned by D1 is
turned on and the execution status is stored to the device assigned by D2.

When the folder assigned by S1 does not exist on the SD memory card, that
folder is created. The folder path is "FCDATA01\TRACE\User specified folder." For
details on the folder structure, see Chapter 11 "SD Memory Card" in the "FC6A
Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s Manual".

The CSV file name is "DATE.csv." The date when the TRACE instruction is turned
on is used as DATE.

Example: If the date is December 30, 2015, the file name is "20151230.csv".

When a CSV file with the same date does not exist in the folder designated by S1, the CSV file is created and the trace data is
output. The oldest data is output at the top of the trace data, and the latest data is output at the bottom of the trace data.

Output example

Triggered at: 2012/02/06 08:30:23 Header row 1

Scan D0010 Header row 2
Old 12345 Data 2 scans before
12345 Data 1 scan before
New 12345 Latest data

When a CSV file for the same date already exists in the folder designated by S1, the header and trace data are appended to the
CSV file.

Output example

Triggered at: 2012/02/06 08:30:23

Scan D0010
Old 12345
12345
New 12345

Triggered at: 2012/02/06 17:16:15 Appended header row 1

Scan D0010 Appended header row 2
Old 1212 Appended data 2 scans before
1212 Appended data 1 scan before
New 1212 Appended latest data

When the execution of the TRACE instruction finishes, the device designated by D1 is turned on and the status code is stored to
the device designated by D2 according to the execution result. For status codes, see "3. D2 (destination 2): Execution Status" on
page 25-9.
Notes:

• The TRACE instruction accumulates data while FC6A Series MicroSmart is running but does not accumulate data when FC6A Series
MicroSmart is stopped.

• Data is accumulated while FC6A Series MicroSmart is running even when the input to the TRACE instruction is off.

• When the input to the TRACE instruction is turned on, the accumulated data is output to the CSV file.

• The time required to create a new CSV file (create a file and output header) is 870 µs.

• Trace data is accumulated even when the MCS (master control set) instruction is on.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 25-7

25: DATA LOG INSTRUCTIONS

Notes:
• The maximum number of TRACE instructions that can be programmed in a user program is three. Make sure that the folder name specified
by the TRACE instruction is not duplicated by any of the folder names specified by the other TRACE instructions. When the folders are
duplicated, trace data with a mixed format is output to the same CSV file.
• The number of scans of which the trace data can be saved to the CSV file when the TRACE instruction is executed one time depends on the
number of devices specified to trace and the display type for each device. For details, see "9. Trace data size" on page 25-10.
• The TRACE instruction cannot be used in an interrupt program. If used, a user program execution error will result, turning on special internal
relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the FC6A Series MicroSmart. For details about the user program execution errors, see "User Program
Execution Errors" on page 3-10.
• Trace data is not accumulated when the TRACE instruction is skipped by the JMP (jump) instruction. For the JMP (jump) instruction, see "JMP
(Jump) and JEND (Jump End)" on page 4-29.
• While the input to the TRACE instruction is on, the trace data is repeatedly output to the CSV file. When you want to output the trace data
only one time, add a SOTU (single output up instruction) or SOTD (single output down instruction) to the input conditions. For SOTU (single
output up instruction) or SOTD (single output down instruction), see "Basic Instructions" - "SOTU and SOTD (Single Output Up and Down)"
on page 4-26.
• The data writing process to the SD memory card for the TRACE instruction takes several scans. Once a TRACE instruction is executed, the
process continues until the trace data transfer is complete, regardless of any change in the instruction input. While the trace data is being
written to the SD memory card, the instruction is not executed even when the input to the TRACE instructions are turned on. To execute the
TRACE instruction again, confirm that the previous data writing process has finished, and then execute the instruction.

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) Folder name (Note) — — — — — — — — —
D1 (Destination 1) Completion output — X — — — — — —
D2 (Destination 2) Execution status — — — — — — — —

Note: Specify the folder name by entering characters.

Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1. Special data registers cannot be designated as D2.

Settings

2. 3. 1.
5. 6. 7. 8.

4.

9.
10.
11.

1. S1 (source 1): Folder Name

Specify the folder name on the SD memory card that will store the trace data using up to 8 single-byte alphanumeric characters.
Notes:
• The following single-byte characters cannot be used in folder names:
/\:*?"<>|#{}%&~
• Consecutive periods cannot be used in folder names.
• A period cannot be used at the start or the end of the folder name.
• Single-byte spaces at the start or the end of the folder name are omitted.

25-8 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 25: DATA LOG INSTRUCTIONS

2. D1 (destination 1): Completion Output

Specifies the device that turns on when the transfer of trace data to SD card and the execution of the TRACE instruction are
complete. This device turns on regardless of the success or failure of the transfer of trace data to the SD memory card.

3. D2 (destination 2): Execution Status

Specifies the data register to store the status code. One of the following status codes is stored according to the TRACE
instruction execution status and result.

Status Code Status Description

0 Normal —
1 SD memory card insertion error The SD memory card is not inserted
2 SD memory card capacity error The SD memory card is full
3 SD memory card writing error Writing trace data to the SD memory card fails
4 CSV file capacity error The CSV file exceeds 5 MB
5 SD memory card protection error The SD memory card is write protected
The TRACE instruction is executed while another DLOG instruction or TRACE
6 SD memory card access error
instruction is being executed
7 Characters conversion error Converting trace data to numeric characters fails
8 Folder creation error Creating the folder fails
9 CSV file open error Opening the CSV file fails
32 Executing TRACE instruction Writing trace data to SD memory card fails

4. Settings
The following is a list of the device and display types that can be set as the data to be output to the CSV files.

Display Type Valid Devices

DEC(W) TC, TP, CC, CP, D
DEC(I) D
DEC(D) CC, CP, D
DEC(L) D
DEC(F) D
HEX(W) TC, TP, CC, CP, D
HEX(D) CC, CP, D
BIN(B) I, Q, M, R, T, C

5. Tag Name
Enter tag names or device addresses to specify the devices to the CSV files.

6. Device Address
When the devices are specified as tag names, the corresponding device addresses are shown.

7. Display Type
Select the display type from the following table for each device for when the device values are output to the CSV file.

Display Type Range Maximum Characters

DEC(W) 0 to 65,535 5
DEC(I) -32,768 to 32,767 6
DEC(D) 0 to 4,294,967,295 10
DEC(L) -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 11
DEC(F) -3.402823E+38 to 3.402823E+38 13
HEX(W) 0000 to FFFF 4
HEX(D) 00000000 to FFFFFFFF 8
BIN(B) 0 or 1 1

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 25-9

25: DATA LOG INSTRUCTIONS

8. Repeat
The data in as many consecutive devices as the specified repeat, starting from the specified device address, are output to the
SD memory card.
For example, when the display type of D10 is DEC(W) and the repeat is set to 8, the data is output to SD memory card as
follows.

Triggered at: 2015/12/30 15:40:30 Header row 1

Scan D0010 D0011 D0012 D0013 D0014 D0015 D0016 D0017 Header row 2
Old 1 9 17 25 33 41 49 57 Data 7 scans before
2 10 18 26 34 42 50 58 Data 6 scans before
3 11 19 27 35 43 51 59 Data 5 scans before
4 12 20 28 36 44 52 60 Data 4 scans before
5 13 21 29 37 45 53 61 Data 3 scans before
6 14 22 30 38 46 54 62 Data 2 scans before
7 15 23 31 39 47 55 63 Data 1 scan before
New 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 Latest data

9. Trace data size

The amount of memory that the TRACE instruction uses for the current trace settings is shown. The amount of memory used
increases when a device to trace the data is added. You can register up to a maximum of 64 devices (the total amount of
memory must be less than or equal to 1,024 bytes). One byte of memory area is required for each character.

10. Remaining size

The amount of free memory (the difference between the trace data size and 1,024 bytes) is shown.

11. The number of scans

How many scans of trace data can be accumulated with the current trace settings is shown. The number of scans of data that
can be accumulated depends on the format of the trace data to output. If there is little data to output per scan, the data for
many scans can be accumulated.

CSV File Output Format and File Format Configuration

• Output format

The CSV file output format is as follows.

Triggered at:,2015/12/30 15:40:30

Scan,D0010,D0020,D0030,D0040,D0050,D0060,D0070,D0080
Old,1,9,17,25,33,41,49,57
,2,10,18,26,34,42,50,58
,3,11,19,27,35,43,51,59
,4,12,20,28,36,44,52,60
,5,13,21,29,37,45,53,61
,6,14,22,30,38,46,54,62
,7,15,23,31,39,47,55,63
New,8,16,24,32,40,48,56,64

When the TRACE instruction is executed and the CSV file for the same date does not exist in the folder designated by S1, a new
CSV file is created and the trace data is output as shown in above output format example. When the date changes and the TRACE
instruction is executed, a new CSV file is created with a new file name.

25-10 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 25: DATA LOG INSTRUCTIONS

• File format

The decimal symbol and separating character in CSV files can be specified in the function area settings. For details, see Chapter 11
"SD Memory Card" in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s Manual".

Examples: TRACE
When M0 is turned on, the accumulated data of D0 through D5 (data type W (word)) and D10 (data type F (floating point)) are
saved as decimal values in a CSV file on the "RESULT" folder on the SD memory card.

Output sample

Triggered at: 2012/02/06 10:20:30

Scan D0000 D0001 D0002 D0003 D0004 D0005 D0010
Old 12345 2 12345 56789 1 56789 -3.402823E+38
12345 2 12347 56789 1 56788 -3.402823E+38
12345 2 12349 56789 1 56787 -3.402823E+38
: : : : : : : :
12345 2 12379 56789 1 56772 -3.402823E+38
12345 2 12381 56789 1 56771 -3.402823E+38
New 12345 2 12383 56789 1 56770 -3.402823E+38

The sample user program described below operates as follows.

• M100 is turned on when the writing trace data to the SD memory card completes.

• The TRACE instruction status code is stored to D100.

• The execution status saved in D100 is checked and Q0 is turned on if an error occurs.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 25-11

25: DATA LOG INSTRUCTIONS

• Configuration Procedure

1. Create the ladder program.

TRACE S1 D1 D2
SOTU
M0 RESULT M100 D100

CMP<>(W) S1 - S2 - D1 - REP
SOTU
M100 D100 0 Q0

2. Configure the TRACE instruction.

Configure the Devices tab.
(1) Designate M0100 as D1 (Completion Output).
(2) Designate D0100 as D2 (Execution Status).

(1) (2)

Configure the Settings tab.

(3) Enter "RESULT" in S1 (Folder Name).
(4) Configure D0000 to output the decimal value of D0000 to the CSV files with the data type W (word).
(5) Set the repeat to 6 to output the values of D0000 through D0005 to the CSV files.
(6) Configure D0010 to output the value of D0010 to the CSV files with the data type F (float).

(3)

(4) (5)
(6)

The configuration is now completed.

25-12 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 25: DATA LOG INSTRUCTIONS

• Operation Description

When M0 is turned on, the TRACE instruction is executed one time. When the TRACE instruction is executed, the data of D0
through D5 and D10 in the previous 17 scans is output to a CSV file on the SD memory card as decimal values along with the
date and time of the execution.
The saved location of CSV files is FCDATA01\TRACE\RESULT. The oldest data is saved at the top of the trace data, and the latest
data is saved at the bottom of the trace data.
When the execution of the TRACE instruction completes, the completion output M100 is turned on and the CMP instruction is
executed once. The CMP instruction compares the status code stored in the execution status D100 with 0 and turns Q0 on or off.
Q0 is turned on when an error occurs in the TRACE instruction.

Output results

Triggered at: 2012/02/06 10:20:30

Scan D0000 D0001 D0002 D0003 D0004 D0005 D0010
Old 12345 2 12345 56789 1 56789 -3.402823E+38
12345 2 12347 56789 1 56788 -3.402823E+38
12345 2 12349 56789 1 56787 -3.402823E+38
12345 2 12351 56789 1 56786 -3.402823E+38
12345 2 12353 56789 1 56785 -3.402823E+38
12345 2 12355 56789 1 56784 -3.402823E+38
12345 2 12357 56789 1 56783 -3.402823E+38
12345 2 12359 56789 1 56782 -3.402823E+38
12345 2 12361 56789 1 56781 -3.402823E+38
12345 2 12363 56789 1 56780 -3.402823E+38
12345 2 12365 56789 1 56779 -3.402823E+38
12345 2 12367 56789 1 56778 -3.402823E+38
12345 2 12369 56789 1 56777 -3.402823E+38
12345 2 12371 56789 1 56776 -3.402823E+38
12345 2 12373 56789 1 56775 -3.402823E+38
12345 2 12375 56789 1 56774 -3.402823E+38
New 12345 2 12377 56789 1 56773 -3.402823E+38

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 25-13

25: DATA LOG INSTRUCTIONS

25-14 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

26: SCRIPT
Introduction
This chapter describes the SCRPT instruction that calls and executes scripts from the ladder program.

SCRPT (Script)
Executes the specified script.

Symbol

SCRPT S1 D1

***** *****

Operation
When the input turns on, the script that corresponds to the script ID specified by S1 is executed. When the script is finished
executing, the execution status and the execution time are stored in D1 and D1+1. To use the SCRPT instruction, you must create
a script to execute in Script Manager dialog box beforehand.

For an overview of the script function, see "Script Function Overview" on page 26-3.
For editing scripts, see "Script Programming and Management" on page 26-5.

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) Script ID — — — — — — X 1-255 —
D1 (Destination 1) Execution results — — — — — — — —

Special data registers cannot be designated as D1.

Settings
S1 (source 1): Script ID
Specify the script ID. A constant or data register can be specified.

D1 (destination 1): Execution results

Specify the data register where the execution results are stored. Two data registers starting with the specified data register are
used. The script execution status (error code at script completion) is stored in D1. The execution time from when the script
execution is started until it is completed is stored in D1+1 in 100 µs increments.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 26-1

26: SCRIPT

Execution results
The execution results (D1, D1+1) store the execution status and the execution time.

Execution status
Numeric Value Status Error Cause
0 Normal termination —
1 Arithmetic error Division by zero, floating point format error
2 Script ID error The specified script does not exist
3 Device access error Invalid device specified, device boundary exceeded

If any error occurs other than the script ID error, script processing is canceled and the execution of the SCRPT instruction is
terminated. If the script ID error occurs, D1 and D1+1 are updated and execution of the SCRPT instruction terminates.
Execution time
The execution time from when the execution of the specified script is started until it is completed is stored in 100 µs
increments. For example, when it takes 1.45 ms to execute the specified script, 15 is stored as the execution time. When it
takes 6,553.5 ms or longer to execute the specified script, 65535 is stored as the execution time. The SCRPT instruction
execution time is affected by interrupt processing or other processing that occurs during the execution.
If any error occurs other than the script ID error, the script execution time from when the script execution is started until the
error occurs is stored as the execution time. If the script ID error occurs, zero is stored as the execution time.

Script selection
To specify a registered script ID for S1 in WindLDR, click Refer button on the SCRPT (Script) dialog box to open Script Manager
dialog box. Choose the script ID to execute and click on Select button on Script Manager dialog box. The selected ID will be
entered to S1.

26-2 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 26: SCRIPT

Script Function Overview

A script is a function for programming complicated processing with conditional branch, logical operations, arithmetic operations,
and functions as text.
The programmed scripts can be executed in a ladder program.
For example, the logical AND operation is written as follows.

M0100 M0101 ⇔ ← The script is programmed as text.

[M0100] && [M0101]

■Script Programming and Management

Scripts are programmed using the Script Editor dialog box in WindLDR and managed with the Script Manager dialog box.
Notes:
• In Script Editor, you can program scripts by selecting conditional expressions, operators, and functions from a list, and you can also check
them for errors. The scripts can also be exported as text files, so they can be edited using a text editor such as Notepad. If you save an
edited script as a text file, it can be imported into Script Editor.
For details, see "Script Editor" on page 26-8.
• In Script Manager, you can manage the scripts as a group by adding scripts created in Script Editor or deleting them. For details, see "Script
Manager" on page 26-7.

Script Data Type

The data type for the range of data that will be handled in the script must be configured by taking into consideration the details of
the processing in the script including the maximum and minimum values of data that will be handled and whether negative
numbers and real numbers are required.
Note: The data type is configured in Script Editor. For how to configure it, see "Script Editor" on page 26-8.

Data Types
The following five data types can be processed in a script. For details about data types in ladder, see "Data Types for Advanced
Instructions" on page 3-7.

Quantity of Data
Data Type Symbol Bits Range of Decimal Values
Registers Used
Word (Unsigned 16 bits) W 16 bits 1 0 to 65,535
Integer (Signed 16 bits) I 16 bits 1 –32,768 to 32,767
Double Word (Unsigned 32 bits) D 32 bits 2 0 to 4,294,967,295
Long (Signed 32 bits) L 32 bits 2 –2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647
Float (Floating point) F 32 bits 2 –3.402823×1038 to 3.402823×1038

Note: Some functions cannot be used if the data type is different. Check the function in the notation list.
See "Programming Scripts" on page 26-12.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 26-3

26: SCRIPT

Device List
This section shows the devices that can be used in Script Editor and the device notation.
This section describes available devices and its notation that can be used in the Script Editor dialog box.
Note: The device ranges differ depending on each FC6A Series MicroSmart. Specify the devices within the device range of the selected FC6A Series
MicroSmart. For device ranges, see "Device Addresses" on page 2-1.

Notation in Script Editor

Device
16-I/O Type 24-I/O Type 40-I/O Type
I (Inputs) I0 to I10 I0 to I15 I0 to I27
I30 to I307
I (Expansion input relays) I30 to I187
I310 to I627
Q (Outputs) Q0 to Q6 Q0 to Q11 Q0 to Q17
Q30 to Q307
Q (Expansion outputs) Q30 to Q187
Q310 to Q627
M0000 to M7997,
M (Internal relays)
Bit device M10000 to M17497
M (Special internal relays) M8000 to M8317
R (Shift registers) R000 to R255
C (Counter contacts) T000 to T1023
T (Timer contacts) C000 to C511
D0000.0 ... D0000.15 to D7999.0 ... D7999.15
D (Data register bits)
D10000.0 ... D10000.15 to D55999.0 ... D55999.15
D (Specifying special data register bits) DD8000.0 ... D8000.15 to D8499.0 ... D8499.15
D0000 to D7999
D (Data registers)
D10000 to D55999
D (Special data registers) D8000 to D8499
Word device TC (Timer current values) TC000 to TC1023
TP (Timer preset values) TP000 to TP1023
CC (Counter current values) CC000 to CC511
CP (Counter preset values) CP000 to CP511

Calculations in which both bit and word devices are used are not allowed.
Bit devices are always processed as bits, and values of those devices are 0 (OFF) or 1 (ON).

26-4 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 26: SCRIPT

Script Programming and Management

Script Registration Procedure
This section describes the procedure to create and register a script. The registered script can be executed by specifying the script
ID in the SCRPT instruction.

1. On the Project Window, double-click Script Manager.

Script Manager dialog box opens.

2. Click Add.

Script Editor dialog box opens.

3. Specify Script ID.

When creating a new script, enter the script ID (1 to 255).

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 26-5

26: SCRIPT

4. Enter Script Name.

The script name can be entered up to 40 single-byte alphanumeric characters.

5. Select Data Type.

Note: The script is executed with the selected data type.

6. In Script, write the program.

Note: To create a script using the sample codes provided by WindLDR, under Function list, select Category and Function, and then click Insert
Format. The sample code displayed in Format is inserted at the cursor position in Script.

7. After you finish creating the script, click OK.

You are returned to the Script Manager dialog box and the created script is displayed in List of scripts.

8. Click Close.

A save confirmation message is displayed.

9. Click OK.

The script is saved and the Script Manager dialog box is closed.
Notes:

• If you click No, the script is not saved and the Script Manager dialog box is closed.

• Script Manager can also be opened from the SCRPT (Script) dialog box.
Click Refer to open Script Manager.

26-6 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 26: SCRIPT

Script Manager
In the Script Manager dialog box, you can add scripts created in the Script Editor dialog box or delete registered scripts.

1.
3.
4.
5.

2.

6. 7.

1. List of scripts
Shows the list of registered scripts.

Script ID: Shows the script ID of the registered scripts (1 to 255).

Error: Shows OK if the registered script has no errors. Shows NG if there are any errors.
Script name: Shows the name of the registered scripts.
Used: Shows whether or not the registered scripts are used in this project.

2. Script
Shows the contents of the script selected in the List of scripts.

3. Add
Click this button to display the Script Editor dialog box in order to create and add a script.
For details, see "Script Editor" on page 26-8.

4. Edit
Click this button to open the Script Editor dialog box in order to edit the script selected in the List of scripts.
For details, see "Script Editor" on page 26-8.

5. Delete
Click this button to delete the script selected in the List of scripts.

6. Select
This can only be used when Script Manager has been opened from the SCRPT instruction dialog box.
Select a script in the list of scripts and click this button to enter the selected script ID in S1 on the dialog box.

7. Close
Click this button to close Script Manager.
Note: If you click Close when the list of scripts was modified, a save confirmation message is displayed. Click Yes on the confirmation message to
save the changes. Click No to discard the changes and close Script Manager.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 26-7

26: SCRIPT

Script Editor
Script Editor is where you create new scripts and edit the scripts selected in Script Manager.

1.
2. 3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.

(Description)

14.
15. 16.

1. Script ID
When creating a new script, enter the script ID (1 to 255). When editing an existing script, this shows the script ID that was set.

2. Script Name
Enter the script name. The script name can be entered up to 40 characters.

3. Data Type
Select the data type to process in the script. For details about the data types, see "Script Data Type" on page 26-3.

4. Script
Enter the script.
The restrictions for one script are a maximum of 240 characters per line and a maximum of 1,024 lines per script.

5. Error Check
Click this button to check errors in the current script.

6. Import
Click this button to display the Open dialog box so you can import a script program.
If you select a script that was saved (exported) as a text file (*.txt) and click Open, the selected script is inserted at the current
cursor position in the current script.

26-8 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 26: SCRIPT

7. Export
Click this button to display the Save As dialog box so you can export the script program.
If you select the location to save the script, enter a file name, and click Save, the current script is saved as a text file (*.txt). The
saved script can be inserted with Import.

8. Options
Click this button to display the Options dialog box.
In the Options dialog box, you can configure the font for the text used in the Script text box, the colors, the tab indents, and
other settings. For details, see "Script Formatting Options Dialog Box" on page 26-11.

9. Find
Click this button to display the Find dialog box.
You can search the entered text in the script.

Note: If you first select an area in the Script and then click Find, you can search only in the selected area.

10. Replace
Click this button to display the Replace dialog box.
Enter the text to search in the script in Find What and enter the text to replace it with in Replace With.

Notes:

• This is an effective tool when replacing device addresses.

• If you first select an area in the Script and then click Replace, you can search and replace text only in the selected area.

11. Show/Hide Function List

This button shows and hides Function List and Output.
Note: Click and drag the bottom right corner of Script Editor and you can change the size of the box for editing scripts. By hiding Function List and
Output, you can increase the size of the script editing area (text box) and make it easier to edit the script.

12. Cursor
Shows the current cursor position in the Script text box as the line number and the column number.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 26-9

26: SCRIPT

13. Function List

Category: Shows the function category list.

Function: Shows the list of functions in the selected category.
Format: Shows a programming example of the selected function.
Description: Shows a description of the selected function.
Insert Format: Click this button to insert the content displayed in Format at the cursor position.
Insert Device: Click this button to open the Tag Editor dialog box.
Specify a device address and click OK to insert the specified device address at the cursor position.

14. Script Compilation Output

Shows the details of errors when there are errors in the script in the error check.
If you double-click a comment displayed in Script Compilation Output, the section that corresponds to the error is highlighted
in the Script.
Note: Depending on the error, the error may exist on a line that differs from the line displayed in the output, or it may show multiple errors.

15. OK
Click this button to perform the error check on the current script, and then return to Script Manager after the script is saved.
Note: If there are any errors in the current script the save confirmation message is displayed. Scripts that contain errors can be saved.

16. Cancel
Click this button to return to Script Manager without saving the current script.

26-10 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 26: SCRIPT

Script Formatting Options Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to specify Font, Size, Tab indent, and Color used in the Script Editor Script text box.

■Font
Enter or select the font name for text displayed in Script.

■Size
Enter or select the size (pixels) of text displayed in Script.

■Sample
Shows a sample of text that will be displayed in the Script text box with the character font and the character size specified by
Font and Size.

■Colors
Shows the colors for Comment, Keyword, and Device.
Click the colored buttons to display the Theme Colors dialog box.

Characters that are not comments, keywords, or devices are all shown in black.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 26-11

26: SCRIPT

Programming Scripts
Format List
This section describes the notation for control statements, operators, functions, and other elements, and it also describes their
operation.
Except for comments, enter everything as single-byte characters. For specific programming examples, see "Script Programming
Examples" on page 26-19.

Control Statements
Conditional expressions are written here as , , .
Executable lines are written as , , and so on.

■Conditional branch

Format Description

if ( )
Execution line is executed if the conditional expression is satisfied.
{ ; }

if ( )
{ ; } Execution line 1 is executed if the conditional expression is satisfied.
else Execution line 2 is executed if it is not satisfied.
if
{ ; }
else
else if if ( )
{ ; } Execution line 1 is executed if the conditional expression 1 is satisfied.
else if ( ) Conditional expression 2 is evaluated if conditional expression 1 is not satisfied,
and execution line 2 is executed if conditional expression 2 is satisfied.
{ ; }
else Execution line 3 is executed if conditional expression 2 is not satisfied too.
{ ; }

switch ( )
{
case constant 1:
;
break; Execution line 1 is executed if the value of conditional expression matches constant 1.
switch
case constant 2: Execution line 2 is executed if the value of conditional expression matches constant 2.
case
; Execution line 3 is executed if the value of conditional expression does not match
default
break; constant 1 nor constant 2.
default:
:
break;
}

■Repeat

Format Description

while ( ) Execution line is repeatedly executed while the conditional expression is satisfied.
{ The execution will go into an infinite loop when the conditional expression is always
while
; satisfied, so do not use fixed values or devices that do not change as the conditional
} expression.

26-12 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 26: SCRIPT

■Halt and exit

Format Description

while ( )
{
if ( ) Process will be as follows while the conditional expression 1 is satisfied.
{
Execution line 2 is continuously executed while the conditional expression 2 is not
break ; satisfied.
break; Once the conditional expression 2 is satisfied, the execution goes out of the loop by
}
break (not executing execution line 2), and execution line 3 is executed.
;
}
;

switch ( )
{
case constant 1:
; When the conditional expression matches the constant 1, execution line 1 is executed
break;
break and the switch execution is terminated by break. Evaluation for constant 2 is not
case constant 2:
executed, and the execution moves to execution line 3.
;
break;
}
;
return return; Script will exit and the next instruction in the user program is executed.

Operator
Device, constant, and temporary device are described as , here, and expressions are described as , , .

■Relational operator

Operator Format Description

== == Compares if is equal to .

!= != Compares if is not equal to .

< < Compares if is less than .

<= <= Compares if is less than or equal to .

> > Compares if is greater than .

>= >= Compares if is greater than or equal to .

■Logical operator

Operator Format Description

&& ( ) && ( ) Calculates the logical product (AND) of and .

|| ( ) || ( ) Calculates the logical sum (OR) of and .

! !( ) Inverse the logic of .

■Arithmetic operator

Operator Format Description

+ + Adds and .

- - Subtracts from .

* * Multiplies and .

/ / Divides by .

% % Calculates remainder after dividing by .

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 26-13

26: SCRIPT

■Bit operator

Operator Format Description

Calculates the logical product (AND) of each bit of and .
& & Data types W (word), I (integer), D (double word), and L (long) can be used. F (float)
cannot be used.
Calculates the logical sum (OR) of each bit of and .
| | Data types W (word), I (integer), D (double word), and L (long) can be used. F (float)
cannot be used.
Calculates the exclusive logical sum (XOR) of each bit of and .
^ ^ Data types W (word), I (integer), D (double word), and L (long) can be used. F (float)
cannot be used.
Inverse the logic of each bits of .
For word devices and fixed values, 0 will be 65,535, and 65,535 will be 0.
~ ~ For bit device, 0 will be 1, and 1 will be 0.
Data types W (word), I (integer), D (double word), and L (long) can be used. F (float)
cannot be used.
Shifts each bit of to the left for bit(s).
<< << Data types W (word), I (integer), D (double word), and L (long) can be used. F (float)
cannot be used.
Shifts each bit of to the right for bit(s).
>> >> Data types W (word), I (integer), D (double word), and L (long) can be used. F (float)
cannot be used.

Function
Device, constant, and temporary device are described as , , , ... here.

■Bit function

Function Format Description

Turns bit device to 1.
Bit set SET( );
This is the same result as = 1;.
Turns bit device to 0.
Bit reset RST( );
This is the same result as = 0;.
Reverses the 1 and 0 of bit device .
Bit reverse REV( );
This is the same result as =~ ;.

■Word function

Arithmetic operation

Function Format Description

Maximum value out of , , is returned.
Maximum value MAX( , , ) • This can be used for all data types.
• Up to 15 arguments can be defined.
Minimum value out of , , is returned.
Mininum value MIN( , , ) • This can be used for all data types.
• Up to 15 arguments can be defined.
Exponential Exponential function of is returned.
EXP( )
function • This can only be used for data type F (float).
Natural logarithm (base is e) for is returned.
Natural logarithm
LOGE( ) • This can only be used for data type F (float).
(base: e)
• Set a value larger than 0 for argument.
Common logarithm (base is 10) for is returned.
Common logarithm
LOG10( ) • This can only be used for data type F (float).
(Base: 10)
• Set a value larger than 0 for argument.
to the power is returned.
Exponentiation POW( , )
• This can only be used for data type F (float).

26-14 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 26: SCRIPT

Function Format Description

Square root of is returned.
Square root ROOT( )
• This can only be used for data type F (float).
Sine of (-1 to +1) is returned.
Sine SIN( ) Specify arbitrary formula to represent angle (units in radian) for argument .
• This can only be used for data type F (float).
Cosine of (-1 to +1) is returned.
Cosine COS( ) Specify arbitrary formula to represent angle (units in radian) for argument .
• This can only be used for data type F (float).
Tangent of (-1 to +1) is returned.
Tangent TAN( ) Specify arbitrary formula to represent angle (units in radian) for argument .
• This can only be used for data type F (float).
Arcsine of (-1 to +1) in radian value (-π/2 to +π/2) is returned.
Arcsine ASIN( ) Specify arbitrary formula for argument .
• This can only be used for data type F (float).
Arccosine of (-1 to +1) in radian value (0 to π) is returned.
Arccosine ACOS( ) Specify arbitrary formula for argument .
• This can only be used for data type F (float).
Arctangent of (-1 to +1) in radian value (-π/2 to +π/2) is returned.
Arctangent ATAN( ); Specify arbitrary formula for argument .
• This can only be used for data type F (float).
Conversion from Value of is converted from degree (°) to radian, and the value is returned.
RAD( );
Angle to Radian • This can only be used for data type F (float).
Conversion from Value of is converted from radian to degree (°), and the value is returned.
DEG( );
Radian to Angle • This can only be used for data type F (float).

Data type conversion

Function Format Description

BCD value of is returned in binary value.
Conversion from
BCD2BIN( ) • Data types W (word), I (integer), D (double word), and L (long) can be used.
BCD to Binary
F (float) cannot be used.
Binary value of is returned in BCD value.
Conversion from
BIN2BCD( ) • Data types W (word), I (integer), D (double word), and L (long) can be used.
Binary to BCD
F (float) cannot be used.
Float value of is returned in binary value.
Conversion from Values after the decimal point is truncated.
FLOAT2BIN( )
float to Binary • Data types W (word), I (integer), D (double word), and L (long) can be used.
F (float) cannot be used.
Conversion from Binary value of is returned in float value.
BIN2FLOAT( )
Binary to float • This can be used with data types D (double word) and L (long).
Decimal number value is converted to a character string, and store in order with
Conversion from
as a starting device.
Decimal to String DEC2ASCII( , )
• Data types W (word), I (integer), D (double word), and L (long) can be used.
character
F (float) cannot be used.
Conversion from Character string is returned as decimal number value.
String character to ASCII2DEC( ) • Data types W (word), I (integer), D (double word), and L (long) can be used.
Decimal F (float) cannot be used.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 26-15

26: SCRIPT

Data comparison and copy

Function Format Description

: Starting device of comparison target 1
: Starting device of comparison target 2
: Range of comparison (in words)
Values of device for words and values of device for words are
Data
MEMCMP( , , ) compared.
comparison
1 is returned if all the values of devices match, and 0 is returned if any of the value does
not match.
• Specified range is compared in word unit, and result is returned.
• Up to 64 words can be compared.
: Starting device of copy source
: Starting device of copy target
: Range of copy (in words)
Data copy MEMCPY( , , )
Values from for words are copied to for words respectively.
• Specified range is compared in word unit, and result is returned.
• Up to 64 words can be copied.
Bit device : Starting device of copy target (bit device)
(1 word length)
: Starting device of copy source (bit device)
to BITS2BITS( , );
Copies one word worth of data from to .
Bit device
(1 word length) • 16 bits are processed from the starting bit device as one word.

Bit device : Starting device of copy target (word device)

(1 word length) : Starting device of copy source (bit device)
BITS2WORD( , );
to Copies one word worth of data from to .
Word device • 16 bits are processed from the starting bit device as one word.

Word device : Starting device of copy target (bit device)

to : Starting device of copy source (word device)
WORD2BITS( , );
Bit device Copies one word worth of data from to .
(1 word length) • 16 bits are processed from the starting bit device as one word.

Offset

Function Format Description

: Reference device
: Device to store the offset value (0 to 32767)
Specifies the device at words from .
Indirect read
Specify OFFSET function to the right of the assignment statement.
Format example: C = OFFSET( , )=
Operation: Stores the value of device at words from into .
Indirect
OFFSET( , ) Indirect write
specification
Specify OFFSET function to the left of the assignment statement.
Format example: OFFSET( , ) =
Operation: Stores the value of into the device at words from
.
• Store the value appropriate for the data type as the offset value.
For example, when the data type is I (integer), store the offset value of I
(integer) into the device.

26-16 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 26: SCRIPT

Character string operations

When handling strings, the NULL terminating character (0x00) is the end of the string. The NULL terminating character is not
included in the length of the string.

Function Format Description

: Starting device of copy source
: Starting device that stores the source character string to copy
Character string STRCUT( , , , : Copy start position (0 to 127)
copy ) : Character count to copy (1 to 128)
From the character string starting from , character string from bytes forward
for characters are stored into for characters.
Character string
STRLEN( ) Returns the length of the character string that starts from .
length
Concatenation of Concatenates the character string that starts from to the character string that starts
STRCAT( , );
character strings from and stores at the start.
Searches for the character string that starts from in the character string that starts
Character string from and returns the position in that string where it was found (number of
STRSTR( , );
search characters from the start-1).
• The maximum character string length that can be searched is 128 characters.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 26-17

26: SCRIPT

Other
This section describes definitions for constant, device, temporary device, and comment.

■Constant
Constant can be defined as decimal or hexadecimal number.

Sample definition of decimal numbers

1234 Define the numeric value directly.

-1234 Define the negative number with a "-" (minus) symbol at the beginning.

12.34 Decimal number can be defined for real numbers (float).

Define a "." (period) between the whole numbers and decimal numbers.

There are 2 ways to define hexadecimal numbers.

Sample definition of hexadecimal numbers

0x12AB Define "0" (zero) and "x" (lower case x) at the beginning of the value.

12ABh Append "h" at the tail of the value.

■Device Address
Device Address is defined with the device symbol and address within "[" and "]".
Definition of the device
[Device symbol and address] (Space between the device symbol and address is not required.)

Sample definition
[D0100]

■Temporary Device
Temporary device is a device that can be used only inside the script. It can store a value and can be used as a variable.
It is defined with a device symbol "@" followed by address (1 – 32).

Definition of the temporary device

@address (Space between the device symbol "@" and address is not required.)

Sample definition
@2 Temporary device number 2

Note: All the values for temporary devices are set to "0" when the execution of the script is started.

■Comment
A note defined in the script is called a comment. The line with "//" defined at the beginning of a line will become a comment.
"//" is defined with a single-byte. Double-byte characters can be written after "//".
Definition of comment
// Arbitrary note

Sample definition
// Store the initial value to calculation data [D0100] for process A ← This line is not executed.
[D0100] = 1234;
:
:

Notes:

• Describing comments to explain the contents of the script is useful especially when another person works on the scripts or when some time
has passed after editing the scripts.
• Comments are ignored (not executed) when the script is executed, so they can be defined freely without interfering the execution time.

26-18 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 26: SCRIPT

Script Programming Examples

This section describes script programming examples for control statements, arithmetic operators, and functions, as well as their
operations.

1. Control Statements
Example 1.1 Conditional branch

Script

if ([D0100])
{
[D0102] = 100;
}

Operation Description
If the value of D0100 is not 0, then 100 is stored in D0102.
Example 1.2 Conditional branch

Script

if ([D0100])
{
[D0102] = [D0103] + [D0104] + [D0105];
}

Operation Description
If the value of D0100 is not 0, the value of D0103, D0104, and D0105 are added and the result is stored in D0102.
Example 1.3 Conditional branch

Script

if (0 != [D0100])
{
if (0 != [D0102])
{
[D0103] = 0x1234;
}
}

Operation Description
If the value of D0100 is not 0 and the value of D0102 is not 0 either, 0x1234 is stored in D0103.
If the value of D0100 is not 0 and the value of D0102 is 0, then nothing is executed.
If the value of D0100 is 0, then nothing is executed regardless of the value of D0102.
Example 1.4 Conditional branch

Script

if ((0 != [D0100]) || (0 != [D0102]))

{
[D0103] = 100;
}
else
{
[D0104] = [D0105] + 100;
}

Operation Description
If either the value of D0100 or the value of D0102 is not 0, then 100 is stored in D0103.
If the values of both D0100 and D0102 are 0, 100 is added to D0105 and the result is stored in D0104.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 26-19

26: SCRIPT

Example 1.5 Conditional branch

Script

if ([D0100] == 0)
{
[D0102] = 0x1234;
}
else if ([D0100] == 1)
{
[D0102] = 0x5678;
}
else
{
[D0102] = 0x9999;
}

Operation Description
If the value of D0100 is 0, then 0x1234 is stored in D0102.
If the value of D0100 is 1, then 0x5678 is stored in D0102.
If the value of D0100 is not 0 nor 1, then 0x9999 is stored in D0102.
Example 1.6 Conditional branch

Script

if ([D0100])
{
if ([D0102])
{
if ([D0103])
{
[D0104] = 100;
}
else
{
[D0104] = 200;
}
}
}

Operation Description
If the value of D0100, D0102, and D0103 are all not 0, then 100 is stored in D0104.
If the values of D0100 and the value of D0102 are not 0 and the value of D0103 is 0, then 200 is stored in D0104.
If either the value of D0100 or D0102 is 0, then nothing is executed regardless of the value of D0103.
Example 1.7 Iteration

Script

[D0100] = 10;
[D0102] = 10;

while (0 < [D0100])

{
[D0102] = [D0102] + 1;
[D0100] = [D0100] - 1;
}

Operation Description
If the value of D0100 is larger than 0, then 1 is repeatedly added to the value of D0102 and 1 is repeatedly subtracted from the
value of D0100.
In the script example above, when the while statement repeats ten times, the value of D0100 becomes 0 and the while statement
ends.
After this script is executed, the value of D0100 is 0 and the value of D0102 is 20.

26-20 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 26: SCRIPT

Example 1.8 Iteration

Script

[D0100] = 0;
[D0102] = 3;
[D0103] = 5;

while ([D0100] == 0)
{
[D0102] = [D0102] + 1;

if ([D0103] == [D0102])
{
SET([M0000]);
break;
}
}

Operation Description
While the value of D0100 is 0, the while statement is repeated.
Inside the while statement, if the values of D0102 and D0103 are equal, the while statement will terminate, and after [M0000]
changes to 1, execution breaks out of the while statement.
In the example script above, the values of D0102 and D0103 are equal when the while statement repeats twice, and after M0000
changes to 1, execution breaks out of the while statement loop. After execution, the value of D0100 is 0, the value of D0102 is 5,
the value of D0103 is 5, and M0000 is 1.

Example 1.9 Indirect write and indirect read using iteration (while statement)
Script

//Transfer D0010 through D0019 to D0100 through D0109

// Initialize the offset value

[D0000] = 0;

// Loop ten times

while ([D0000] < 10)
{
// Transfer 1 word by indirect assignment
OFFSET([D0100] , [D0000]) = OFFSET([D0010] , [D0000]);
// Increment indirect value
[D0000] = [D0000] + 1
}

Operation Description
This script stores the values of D0010 through D0019 in D0100 through D0109.
It operates as follows.
First, the offset value D0000 is initialized and set to 0.
First iteration (loop) : The value of D0000 is 0, so the condition "[D0000] < 10" is true and the statements inside while are executed.
• The value of D0010, 0 words from D0010, is stored in D0100, 0 words from D0100.
• 1 is added to the value of offset value D0000, so that it becomes 1.
Second iteration (loop) : The value of D0000 is 1, so the condition "[D0000] < 10" is true and the statements inside while are executed.
• The value of D0011, 1 word from D0010, is stored in D0101, 1 word from D0100.
• 1 is added to the value of offset value D0000, so that it becomes 2.
:
(Repeats in the same manner for the third to ninth iterations)
:
Tenth iteration (loop) : The value of D0000 is 9, so the condition "[D0000] < 10" is true and the statements inside while are executed.
• The value of D0019, 9 words from D0010, is stored in D0109, 9 words from D0100.
• 1 is added to the value of offset value D0000, so that it becomes 10.
The value of D0000 is 10, so the condition "[D0000] < 10" is false and execution breaks out of the while loop.
After execution, the values of D0100 through D0109 are the same with the values of D0010 through D0019.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 26-21

26: SCRIPT

Example 1.10 Decimal to octal conversion using a while statement

Script

// Convert a decimal value to octal

// - For example, convert 10 (dec) to 12 (oct), 16 (dec) to 20 (oct)
// - Convert a value to octal up to 4 digits max

@1 = 0; // while counter
@2 = [D0100]; // gets original data
@3 = 1; // decimal base
@4 = 0; // calculation results

// repeat four times

while (@1 < 4)
{
// Extract 1st octal digit from original data. Store working result in @10.
@10 = @2 % 8;
//Convert the extracted results to decimal and add to the results
@4 = @4 + (@10 * @3);

//Increase the decimal base by one digit

@3 = @3 * 10;
// Decrease the original data by one digit
@2 = @2 / 8;
// If @2 is 0, exit the white statement
if (0 == @2)
{
break;
}

// Increment while counter by 1

@1 = @1 + 1;

// Store the calculation result in D0200

[D0200] = @4;

Operation Description
This example converts a decimal value to octal using a while statement.
By repeating the process to divide the original decimal data by 8 and converting each digit to octal in a while statement, the
conversion is implemented up to four digits.
The original decimal value is stored in D0100. After the script is executed, the converted octal value is stored in D0200.

Example 1.11 Conditional branch with switch

Script

switch ([D0100])
{
case 10:
[D0200] = 0x1234;
break;
case 999:
[D0200] = 0x5678;
SET([D0000.01]);
break;
}

Operation Description
If the value of D0100 is 10, then 0x1234 is stored in D0200.
If the value of D0100 is 999, then 0x5678 is stored in D0200 and D0000.01 is set to 1.
If the value of D0100 is not 10 nor 999, then nothing is executed.

26-22 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 26: SCRIPT

Example 1.12 Conditional branch with switch using the default statement

Script

switch ([D0100])
{
case 0:
[D0102] = 0x1234;
break;
case 1:
[D0102] = 0x5678;
break;
default:
[D0102] = 0x9999;
break;
}

Operation Description
If the value of D0100 is 0, then 0x1234 is stored in D0102.
If the value of D0100 is 1, then 0x5678 is stored in D0102.
If the value of D0100 is not 0 nor 1, then 0x9999 is stored in D0102.

Example 1.13 Terminate the script with the return statement

Script

if (0x1234 == [D0100])
{
[D0102] = 0x5678;
return;
}
[D0103] = 0;

Operation Description
If the value of D0100 is not 0x1234, then 0 is stored in D0103.
If the value of D0100 is 0x1234, then 0x5678 is stored in D0102 and the script is terminated.
The return statement does not break out of a loop like the break statement, it terminates the script execution.

Example 1.14 Break out of a loop with the break statement

Script

[D0100] = 0;
[D0102] = 3;
[D0103] = 5;

while ([D0100] == 0)
{
[D0102] = [D0102] + 1;

if ([D0102] == [D0103)
{
SET([D0000.01]);
break;
}
}

Operation Description
While the value of D0100 is 0, the while statement is repeated until D0102 and D0103 match.
Inside the while statement, if the values of D0102 and D0103 are equal, the while statement will end and execution breaks out of
the while statement.
In the example above, the values of D0102 and D0103 match when the while statement is repeated twice, and after D0000.01
changes to 1, the while statement ends. After execution, the value of D0100 is 0, the value of D0102 is 5, the value of D0103 is 5,
and the value of D0000.01 is 1.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 26-23

26: SCRIPT

2. Relational Operators
Example 2.1 Equal to

Script

if ([D0100] == [D0102])
{
[D0103] = 0x100;
}

Operation Description
If the value of D0100 is equal to the value of D0102, then 0x100 is stored in D0103.
Example 2.2 Not equal to

Script

if ([D0100] != [D0102])
{
[D0103] = 0x100;
}

Operation Description
If the value of D0100 is not equal to the value of D0102, then 0x100 is stored in D0103.
Example 2.3 Less than

Script

if ([D0100] < [D0102])

{
[D0103] = 0xl00;
}

Operation Description
If the value of D0100 is less than the value of D0102, then 0x100 is stored in D0103.
Example 2.4 Less than or equal to

Script

if ([D0100] <= [D0102])

{
[D0103] = 0xl00;
}

Operation Description
If the value of D0100 is less than or equal to the value of D0102, then 0x100 is stored in D0103.
Example 2.5 Greater than

Script

if ([D0100] > [D0102])

{
[D0103] = 0xl00;
}

Operation Description
If the value of D0100 is greater than the value of D0102, then 0x100 is stored in D0103.
Example 2.6 Greater than or equal to

Script

if ([D0100] >= [D0102])

{
[D0103] = 0xl00;
}

Operation Description
If the value of D0100 is greater than or equal to the value of D0102, then 0x100 is stored in D0103.

26-24 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 26: SCRIPT

3. Logical Operators
Example 3.1 Logical AND

Script

if (([D0100] == [D0200]) && ([D0300] == [D0400] + [D0500]))

{
[D0600] = 100;
}

Operation Description
If the value of D0100 is equal to the value of D0200, and if the value of D0300 is equal to the value of D0400 and D0500 added
together, then 100 is stored in D0600.
If either ([D0100] == [D0200]) or ([D0300] == [D0400] + [D0500]) is false, the processing in the brackets “{ }” is not executed.
Example 3.2 Logical OR

Script

if ((0 != [D0100]) || (0 != [D0200]))

{
[D0300] = 100;
}

Operation Description
If the value of D0100 is not 0 or the value of D0102 is not 0, then 100 is stored in D0300.
If either one of them is true, the processing in the brackets “ ” is executed.
Example 3.3 Logical inversion

Script

if (!([D0100] == 0x1234))
{
[D0300] = 100;
}

Operation Description
If the value of D0100 is not equal to 0x1234, then 100 is stored in D0300.
Example 3.4 Logical inversion

Script

if (!(0 !=[D0100]))
{
[D0300] = 100 ;
}

Operation Description
If the value of D0100 is 0, then 100 is stored in D0300.
This is the same as the code "if (0==[D0100]))".

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 26-25

26: SCRIPT

4. Arithmetic Operators
Example 4.1 Addition

Script

[D0300] = [D0100] + [D0200];

Operation Description
The values of D0100 and D0200 are added together and the result is stored in D0300.

Example 4.2 Subtraction

Script

[D0300] = [D0100] - [D0200];

Operation Description
The value of D0200 is subtracted from the value of D0100 and the result is stored in D0300.

Example 4.3 Multiplication

Script

[D0300] = [D0100] * [D0200];

Operation Description
The values of D0100 and D0200 are multiplied together and the result is stored in D0300.

Example 4.4 Division

Script

[D0300] = [D0100] / [D0200];

Operation Description
The value of D0100 is divided by the value of D0200 and the result is stored in D0300.

Example 4.5 Modulo

Script

[D0300] = [D0100] % [D0200];

Operation Description
The value of D0100 is divided by the value of D0200 and the remainder is stored in D0300.

26-26 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 26: SCRIPT

5. Bitwise Operators
Example 5.1 Logical AND

Script

if ([D0000.01] & [D0001.01])

{
SET([D0002.01)]);
}
else
{
RST([D0002.01]);
}

Operation Description
If the bitwise logical AND operation on the value of D0000.01 and the value of D0001.01 is 1, D0002.01 is changed to 1.
If the bitwise logical AND operation on the value of D0000.01 and the value of D0001.01 is 0, D0002.01 is changed to 0.
The operation is the same as the following ladder diagram.
D0000.01 D0001.01 D0002.01

Example 5.2 Logical OR

Script

if ([D0000.01] | [D0001.01])
{
SET([D0002.01]);
}
else
{
RST([D0002.01]);
}

Operation Description
If the bitwise logical OR operation on the value of D0000.01 and the value of D0001.01 is 1, D0002.01 is changed to 1.
If the bitwise logical OR operation on the value of D0000.01 and the value of D0001.01 is 0, D0002.01 is changed to 0.
The operation is the same as the following ladder diagram.
D0000.01 D0002.01

D0001.01

Example 5.3 Logical XOR (exclusive OR)

Script

[D0200] = [D0100] ^ 0xFF;

Operation Description
The logical XOR operation on the value of D0100 and each bit in 0xFF is stored in D0200.
For example, if the value of D0100 is 15 (0x0F), then 240 (0xF0) is stored in D0200.
Example 5.4 Inversion

Script

[D0200] = ~[D0100];

Operation Description
The bits in the value of D0100 are inverted and stored in D0200.
For example, if the value of D0100 is 0, then 65,535 is stored in D0200.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 26-27

26: SCRIPT

Example 5.5 Inversion

Script

if (([D0000.01] & ~[D0001.01]) | [D0002.01])

{
SET([D0003.01]);
}
else
{
RST([D0003.01]);
}

Operation Description
If the bitwise logical OR operation on the value of D0002.01 and the result of the bitwise logical AND operation on the value of
D0000.01 and the inverted result of the value of D0001.01 is 1, then D0003.01 is changed to 1.
If the bitwise logical OR operation on the value of D0002.01 and the result of the bitwise logical AND operation on the value of
D0000.01 and the inverted result of the value of D0001.01 is 0, then D0003.01 is changed to 0.
The operation is the same as the following ladder diagram.

D0000.01 D0001.01 D0003.01

D0002.01

Example 5.6 Left shift

Script

[D0300] = [D0100] << [D0200];

Operation Description
The value of D0100 is shifted to the left by the value of D0200 and the result is stored in D0300.
For example, if the value of D0100 is 1 and the value of D0200 is 3, 1 is shifted 3 bits to the left, and the result of 8 is stored in
D0300.

Example 5.7 Right shift

Script

[D0300] = [D0100] >> [D0200];

Operation Description
The value of D0100 is shifted to the right by the value of D0200 and the result is stored in D0300.
For example, if the value of D0100 is 8 and the value of D0200 is 3, 8 is shifted 3 bits to the right, and the result of 1 is stored in
D0300.

26-28 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 26: SCRIPT

6. Bit Functions
Example 6.1 Set a bit

Script

SET([D0000.01]);

Operation Description
Turns D0000.01 to 1. The result is the same as [D0000.01] = 1.
Example 6.2 Reset a bit

Script

RST([D0000.01]);

Operation Description
Turns D0000.01 to 0. The result is the same as [D0000.01] = 0.
Example 6.3 Invert a bit

Script

REV([D0000.01]);

Operation Description
Inverts 1 and 0 in D0000.01. The result is the same as [D0000.01] = ~[D0000.01].

7. Word Functions
Arithmetic operations
Example 7.1 Maximum value

Script

[D0200] = MAX([D0100], [D0110], [D0120], [D0130], [D0140]);

Operation Description
Out of the values stored in D0100, D0110, D0120, D0130, and D0140, the maximum value is stored in D0200.
Up to 15 arguments can be used.

Example 7.2 Mininum value

Script

[D0200] = MIN([D0100], [D0110], [D0120], [D0130], [D0140]);

Operation Description
Out of the values stored in D0100, D0110, D0120, D0130, and D0140, the minimum value is stored in D0200.
Up to 15 arguments can be used.

Example 7.3 Exponential function

Script

[D0010] = EXP([D0020]);

Operation Description
Calculates the exponential function of the value of D0020 and the result is stored in D0010.
Only the data type F (float) can be used.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 26-29

26: SCRIPT

Example 7.4 Natural logarithm

Script

[D0010] = LOGE([D0020]);

Operation Description
Calculates the natural logarithm of the value of D0020 and the result is stored in D0010.
Only the data type F (float) can be used.

Example 7.5 Common logarithm

Script

[D0010] = LOG10([D0020]);

Operation Description
Calculates the logarithm of the value of D0020 with 10 as the base and the result is stored in D0010.
Only the data type F (float) can be used.

Example 7.6 Power

Script

[D0010] = POW([D0020],[D0030]);

Operation Description
Calculates the power of the values.
For example, if the value of D0020 is 10 and the value of D0030 is 5, the function calculates 10 to the power of 5 and stores the
result in D0010.
Only the data type F (float) can be used.

Example 7.7 Square root

Script

[D0010] = ROOT([D0020]);

Operation Description
Calculates the square root of the value of [D0020] and the result is stored in [D0010].
Only the data type F (float) can be used.

Example 7.8 Sine

Script

[D0010] = SIN([D0020]);

Operation Description
Calculates the sine of the radian value of D0020 and stores the result in D0010.
Only the data type F (float) can be used.

Example 7.9 Cosine

Script

[D0010] = COS([D0020]);

Operation Description
Calculates the cosine of the radian value of D0020 and stores the result in D0010.
Only the data type F (float) can be used.

26-30 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 26: SCRIPT

Example 7.10 Tangent

Script

[D0010] = TAN([D0020]);

Operation Description
Calculates the tangent of the radian value of D0020 and stores the result in D0010.
Only the data type F (float) can be used.

Example 7.11 Arcsine

Script

[D0010] = ASIN([D0020]);

Operation Description
Calculates the arcsine of the value of D0020 and stores the result as radians in D0010.
Only the data type F (float) can be used.

Example 7.12 Arccosine

Script

[D0010] = ACOS([D0020]);

Operation Description
Calculates the arccosine of the value of D0020 and stores the result as radians in D0010.
Only the data type F (float) can be used.

Example 7.13 Arctangent

Script

[D0010] = ATAN([D0020]);

Operation Description
Calculates the arctangent of the value of D0020 and stores the result as radians in D0010.
Only the data type F (float) can be used.

Example 7.14 Convert angle to radians

Script

[D0010] = RAD([D0020]);

Operation Description
Converts the value of D0020 from degrees (°) to radians and stores the result in D0010.
Only the data type F (float) can be used.
Example 7.15 Convert radians to angle

Script

[D0010] = DEG([D0020]);

Operation Description
Converts the value of D0020 from radians to degrees (°) and stores the result in D0010.
Only the data type F (float) can be used.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 26-31

26: SCRIPT

Data type conversions

Example 7.16 Convert BCD to binary

Script

[D0200] = BCD2BIN([D0100]);

Operation Description
Converts the BCD value in D0100 to a binary value and stores it in D0200.
For example, if the BCD value 10 (16 as a binary value) is stored in D0100, 10 (binary value) is stored in D0200.
Example 7.17 Convert binary to BCD

Script

[D0200] = BIN2BCD([D0100]);

Operation Description
Converts the binary value in D0100 to a BCD value and stores it in D0200.
For example, if the binary value 16 (10 as a BCD value) is stored in D0100, 16 (BCD value) is stored in D0200.
Example 7.18 Convert float to binary

Script

[D0200] = FLOAT2BIN([D0100]);

Operation Description
Converts the float value in D0100 to a binary value and stores it in D0200.
For example, if the data type F (float) 1234.0 (0x449A4000 as a binary value) is stored in D0100, 1234 (binary value) is stored in
D0200. If the data type F (float) 1234.56 (0x449A51EC as a binary value) is stored in D0100, the value after the decimal point is
truncated and 1234 (binary value) is stored in D0200.
Example 7.19 Convert binary to float
Script

[D0200] = BIN2FLOAT([D0100]);

Operation Description
Converts the binary value in D0100 to a float value and stores it in D0200.
For example, if the binary value 1234 is stored in D0100, the float value 1234.0 (0x449A4000 as a binary value) is stored in D0200.
Example 7.20 Convert decimal to string

Script

DEC2ASCII([D0100], [D0200]);

Operation Description
Converts the decimal numeric value in D0200 to a string and stores it in order with D0100 as the starting address.
Notes:

• This function can be used with data types W (word), I (integer), D (double word), and L (long).

• The NULL terminating character (0x00) is added to the end of the string.

Converting 1234 (when the data type is W (word))

Stored Value
Device
Device Stored Value Upper Byte Lower Byte
D0200 1234 D0100 '1' = 0x31 '2' = 0x32
D0101 '3' = 0x33 '4' = 0x34
D0102 0x00 0x00
Terminating character

26-32 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 26: SCRIPT

Converting -12345 (when the data type is I (integer))

Stored Value
Device
Device Stored Value Upper Byte Lower Byte
D0200 -12345 D0100 '-' = 0x2D '1' = 0x31
D0101 '2' = 0x32 '3' = 0x33
D0102 '4' = 0x34 '5' = 0x35
D0103 0x00 0x00
Terminating character

Converting 1234567890 (when the data type is D (double word))

Stored Value
Device
Device Stored Value Upper Byte Lower Byte
D0200 D0100 '1' = 0x31 '2' = 0x32
1234567890
D0201 D0101 '3' = 0x33 '4' = 0x34
D0102 '5' = 0x35 '6' = 0x36
D0103 '7' = 0x37 '8' = 0x38
D0104 '9' = 0x39 '0' = 0x30
D0105 0x00 0x00
Terminating character

Converting -1234567890 (when the data type is L (long))

Stored Value
Device
Device Stored Value Upper Byte Lower Byte
D0200 D0100 '-' = 0x2D '1' = 0x31
-1234567890
D0201 D0101 '2' = 0x32 '3' = 0x33
D0102 '4' = 0x34 '5' = 0x35
D0103 '6' = 0x36 '7' = 0x37
D0104 '8' = 0x38 '9' = 0x39
D0105 '0' = 0x30 0x00
Terminating character

Example 7.21 Convert string to decimal

Script

[D0100] = ASCII2DEC([D0200]);

Operation Description
Converts the stored string starting at D0200 to a decimal and stores the result in D0100.
The number of digits that can be converted is the maximum number of digits for each data type with added sign.
If the string to convert contains a NULL or characters that cannot be converted to numeric values, the string is converted up to
that character.
Notes:
• This function can be used with data types W (word), I (integer), D (double word), and L (long).
• The NULL terminating character (0x00) is added to the end of the string.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 26-33

26: SCRIPT

Setting the string "1234" (when the data type is W (word))

Stored Value
Device
Upper Byte Lower Byte Device Stored Value
D0200 '1' = 0x31 '2' = 0x32 D0100 1234
D0201 '3' = 0x33 '4' = 0x34
D0202 0x00 0x00
Terminating character

Setting the string "1234567" (when the data type is D (double word))

Stored Value
Device
Upper Byte Lower Byte Device Stored Value
D0200 '1' = 0x31 '2' = 0x32 D0100 12345
D0201 '3' = 0x33 '4' = 0x34
D0202 '5' = 0x35 '6' = 0x36
D0203 '7' = 0x37 0x00
Terminating character

Setting the string "-12345" (when the data type is I (integer))

Stored Value
Device
Upper Byte Lower Byte Device Stored Value
D0200 '-' = 0x2D '1' = 0x31 D0100 -12345
D0201 '2' = 0x32 '3' = 0x33
D0202 '4' = 0x34 '5' = 0x35
D0203 0x00 0x00
Terminating character

String "1234567890" (when the data type is L (long))

Stored Value
Device
Upper Byte Lower Byte Device Stored Value
D0200 '1' = 0x31 '2' = 0x32 D0100 1234567890
D0201 '3' = 0x33 '4' = 0x34
D0202 '5' = 0x35 '6' = 0x36
D0203 '7' = 0x37 '8' = 0x38
D0204 '9' = 0x39 '0' = 0x30
D0205 0x00 0x00
Terminating character

26-34 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 26: SCRIPT

Data comparison and copying

Example 7.22 Word-unit data comparison

Script

[D0000] = MEMCMP([D0100], [D0200], 10);

Operation Description
Compares the values of 10 words from D0100 (up to D0109) with the values of 10 words from D0200 (up to D0209).
If the value for each is entirely equal, 1 is stored in D0000. If even a single one is not equal, 0 is stored.

Compare each

D0100 D0200
D0101 D0201
D0102 D0202

D0107 D0207
D0108 D0208
D0109 D0209

Note: Even if the data type is set to D (double word), L (long), or F (float), the comparison is performed from the starting device in word units.

Example 7.23 Bit-unit data comparison

Script

[D0000] = MEMCMP([D0100.02], [D0200.00], 10);

Operation Description
Compares the third bit of D0100 through the third bit of D0109 with the state of the bits from the first bit of D0200 through the
first bit of D0209.
If the value for each is entirely equal, 1 is stored in D0000. If even a single one is not equal, 0 is stored.

Compare each

3rd bit of D0100 1st bit of D0200

3rd bit of D0101 1st bit of D0201
3rd bit of D0102 1st bit of D0202

3rd bit of D0107 1st bit of D0207

3rd bit of D0108 1st bit of D0208
3rd bit of D0109 1st bit of D0209

Note: Even if the data type is set to D (double word), L (long), or F (float), the comparison is performed from the starting device in bit units.

Example 7.24 Word-unit data copy

Script

MEMCPY([D0100], [D0200], 10);

Operation Description
Copies the value of 10 word devices from D0200 (up to D0209) to 10 word devices from D0100 (up to D0109).

Copy each

D0100 D0200
D0101 D0201
D0102 D0202

D0107 D0207
D0108 D0208
D0109 D0209

Note: Even if the data type is set to D (double word), L (long), or F (float), the data is copied from the starting device in word units.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 26-35

26: SCRIPT

Example 7.25 Bit-unit data copy

Script

MEMCPY([D0200.00], [D0100.02], 10);

Operation Description
Copies the third bit of 10 words from D0100 (up to D0109) to the bit state for 10 bits of devices from D0200 (up to D0209).

Copy each

1st bit of D0200 3rd bit of D0100

1st bit of D0201 3rd bit of D0101
1st bit of D0202 3rd bit of D0102

1st bit of D0207 3rd bit of D0107

1st bit of D0208 3rd bit of D0108
1st bit of D0209 3rd bit of D0109

Note: Even if the data type is set to D (double word), L (long), or F (float), the bits are copied from the starting device in bit units.

Example 7.26 Copy 1 word from bit devices to bit devices

Script

BITS2BITS(I004, M0000);

Operation Description
A value of 1 word length from I004 (I004 to I023) is copied to the bit states of a 1 word region from M0000 (M0000 to M0017).

Copy each

M0000 I004
M0001 I005

M0017 I023

Example 7.27 Copy 1 word from bit devices to a word device

Script

BITS2WORD(I004, D0000);

Operation Description
A value of 1 word length from I004 (to I023) is copied to the value of device D0000.
This is the same as BITS2BITS (I004, D0000.0);.

Example 7.28 Copy 1 word from a word device to bit devices

Script

WORD2BITS(D0100, M0000);

Operation Description
The value of device D0100 is copied to the bit states of a value of 1 word length from M0000 (M0000 to M0017).
This is the same as BITS2BITS (D1000.0, M0000);.

26-36 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 26: SCRIPT

String Operations
Strings are set as continuous data registers of 1 word or more. 2 bytes of data are 1 word and they are set from upper byte to
lower byte in order. Set 00h at the end of the string.
Example 7.29 Copy a string

Script

STRCUT([D0100], [D0200], 2, 3);

Operation Description
Stores in order from D0100 character count 3 (3 characters worth) from start position 2 (starting from 0, so the 3rd character) of
the string "ABCDEFG" that starts from D0200.
Note: The start position can be specified in the range from 0 to 127, the character count can be specified in the range from 1 to 128.

Copy from string "ABCDEFG" at start position 2 for a character count of 3

Device Stored Value Start position Character count Device Stored Value
Upper Byte 'A' = 0x41 0 Upper Byte 'C' = 0x43
D0200 D0100
Lower Byte 'B' = 0x42 Lower Byte 'D' = 0x44
Upper Byte 'C' = 0x43 ←2 Upper Byte 'E' = 0x45
D0201 D0101
Lower Byte 'D' = 0x44 3 characters Lower Byte 0x00 Terminating character

Upper Byte 'E' = 0x45

D0202
Lower Byte 'F' = 0x46
Upper Byte 'G' = 0x47
D0203
Lower Byte 0x00 Terminating character

Script

STRUCT([D0100], [D0200], 1, 4);

Copy from string "ABCDEFG" at start position 1 for a character count of 4

Device Stored Value Start position Character count Device Stored Value
Upper Byte 'A' = 0x41 0 Upper Byte 'B' = 0x42
D0200 D0100
Lower Byte 'B' = 0x42 ←1 Lower Byte 'C' = 0x43
Upper Byte 'C' = 0x43 ←2 Upper Byte 'D' = 0x44
D0201 4 characters D0101
Lower Byte 'D' = 0x44 3 Lower Byte 'E' = 0x45
Upper Byte 'E' = 0x45 4 Upper Byte 0x00 Terminating character
D0202 D0101
Lower Byte 'F' = 0x46 5 Lower Byte 0x00
Upper Byte 'G' = 0x47 :
D0203
Lower Byte 0x00 Terminating character

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 26-37

26: SCRIPT

Example 7.30 Count a string

Script

[D0100] = STRLEN([D0200]);

Operation Description
Finds the length (character count) of the string starting from D0200 and stores the result in D0100.
Note: The NULL terminating character (0x00) is the end of the string. (The terminating character is not included in the string length.)

Device Stored Value Device Stored Value

Upper Byte 'A' = 0x41 Character count
D0200 D0100 7
Lower Byte 'B' = 0x42
Upper Byte 'C' = 0x43
D0201
Lower Byte 'D' = 0x44
Upper Byte 'E' = 0x45
D0202
Lower Byte 'F' = 0x46
Upper Byte 'G' = 0x47
D0203
Lower Byte 0x00 Terminating character

Device Stored Value Device Stored Value

Upper Byte 'A' = 0x41
D0200 Character count D0100 3
Lower Byte 'B' = 0x42
Upper Byte 'C' = 0x43
D0201
Lower Byte 0x00 Terminating character
Upper Byte 'E' = 0x45
D0202
Lower Byte 'F' = 0x46
Upper Byte 'G' = 0x47
D0203
Lower Byte 0x00

Example 7.31 Concatenate strings

Script

STRCAT([D0100], [D0200]);

Operation Description
Appends the string starting from D0200 to the string starting from D0100.
Note: The NULL terminating character (0x00) is the end of the string. (The terminating character is not included in the string length.)

Device Stored Value Device Stored Value

Upper Byte 'A' = 0x41 Upper Byte 'A' = 0x41
D0100 D0100
Lower Byte 'B' = 0x42 Lower Byte 'B' = 0x42
Upper Byte 'C' = 0x43 Upper Byte 'C' = 0x43
D0101 D0101
Lower Byte 0x00 Terminating Lower Byte 'D' = 0x44
character Concatenate
Upper Byte 'E' = 0x45
D0102
Device Stored Value Lower Byte 'F' = 0x46
Upper Byte 'D' = 0x44 Upper Byte 'G' = 0x47
D0200 D0103
Lower Byte 'E' = 0x45 Lower Byte 0x00 Terminating character

Upper Byte 'F' = 0x46

D0201
Lower Byte 'G' = 0x47
Upper Byte 0x00 Terminating character
D0202
Lower Byte 0x00

26-38 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 26: SCRIPT

Example 7.32 Search a string

Script

[D0000] = STRSTR([D0100], [D0200]);

Operation Description
Searches for the search string "DEFG" that starts from D0200 in the string to be searched "ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO" that starts from
D0100 and stores the position of the occurrence of the string in D0000. If not found, -1 is stored in D0000.

If "?" is specified as a character to search for, it is handled as any single-byte character.

When specifying "?" (0x3F) as a character, specify it as "~?" (0x7E3F) in two bytes.
When specifying "~" (0x7E) as a character, specify it as "~~" (0x7E7E) in two bytes.

Note: The maximum length of the search string is 128 characters.

When searching for "DEFG" and the string was found

Search string String to be searched Search result
Device Stored Value Device Stored Value Position Device Stored Value
Upper Byte 'D' = 0x44 Upper Byte 'A' = 0x41 0
D0200 D0100 D0000 3
Lower Byte 'E' = 0x45 Lower Byte 'B' = 0x42 1
Upper Byte 'F' = 0x46 Upper Byte 'C' = 0x43 2
D0201 D0101
Lower Byte 'G' = 0x47 Lower Byte 'D' = 0x44 ←3
Upper Byte 0x00 Terminating character Upper Byte 'E' = 0x45 4
D0202 D0102
Lower Byte 0x00 Lower Byte 'F' = 0x46 5
Upper Byte 'G' = 0x47 6
D0103
Lower Byte 'H' = 0x48 7
Upper Byte 'I' = 0x49 8
D0104
Lower Byte 'J' = 0x4A 9
Upper Byte 'K' = 0x47 10
D0105
Lower Byte 'L' = 0x4C 11
Upper Byte 'M' = 0x4D 12
D0106
Lower Byte 'N' = 0x4E 13
Upper Byte 'O' = 0x4F 14
D0107
Lower Byte 0x00 Terminating character

When searching for "WXYZ" and the string was not found
Search string String to be searched Search result
Device Stored Value Device Stored Value Position Device Stored Value
Upper Byte 'W' = 0x57 Upper Byte 'A' = 0x41 0
D0200 D0100 D0000 -1
Lower Byte 'X' = 0x58 Lower Byte 'B' = 0x42 1
Upper Byte 'Y' = 0x59 Upper Byte 'C' = 0x43 2
D0201 D0101
Lower Byte 'Z' = 0x5A Lower Byte 'D' = 0x44 3
Upper Byte 0x00 Terminating character Upper Byte 'E' = 0x45 4
D0202 D0102
Lower Byte 0x00 Lower Byte 'F' = 0x46 5
Upper Byte 'G' = 0x47 6
D0103
Lower Byte 'H' = 0x48 7
Upper Byte 'I' = 0x49 8
D0104
Lower Byte 'J' = 0x4A 9
Upper Byte 'K' = 0x47 10
D0105
Lower Byte 'L' = 0x4C 11
Upper Byte 'M' = 0x4D 12
D0106
Lower Byte 'N' = 0x4E 13
Upper Byte 'O' = 0x4F 14
D0107
Lower Byte 0x00 Terminating character

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 26-39

26: SCRIPT

When searching for "?" as any single-byte character

Search string String to be searched Search result
Device Stored Value Device Stored Value Position Device Stored Value
Upper Byte 'E' = 0x45 Upper Byte 'A' = 0x41 0
D0200 D0100 D0000 4
Lower Byte '?' = 0x3F Lower Byte 'B' = 0x42 1
Upper Byte 'G' = 0x47 Upper Byte 'C' = 0x43 2
D0201 D0101
Lower Byte 'H' = 0x48 Lower Byte 'D' = 0x44 3
Upper Byte 0x00 Terminating character Upper Byte 'E' = 0x45 ←4
D0202 D0102
Lower Byte 0x00 Lower Byte 'F' = 0x46 5
Upper Byte 'G' = 0x47 6
D0103
Lower Byte 'H' = 0x48 7
Upper Byte 'I' = 0x49 8
D0104
Lower Byte 'J' = 0x4A 9
Upper Byte 'K' = 0x47 10
D0105
Lower Byte 'L' = 0x4C 11
Upper Byte 'M' = 0x4D 12
D0106
Lower Byte 'N' = 0x4E 13
Upper Byte 'O' = 0x4F 14
D0107
Lower Byte 0x00 Terminating character

When searching for "?" as a character

Search string String to be searched Search result
Device Stored Value Device Stored Value Position Device Stored Value
Upper Byte 'E' = 0x45 Upper Byte 'A' = 0x41 0
D0200 D0100 D0000 4
Lower Byte '~' = 0x7E Lower Byte 'B' = 0x42 1
Upper Byte '?' = 0x3F Upper Byte 'C' = 0x43 2
D0201 D0101
Lower Byte 'G' = 0x47 Lower Byte 'D' = 0x44 3
Upper Byte 'H' = 0x48 Upper Byte 'E' = 0x45 ←4
D0202 D0102
Lower Byte 0x00 Terminating character Lower Byte '?' = 0x3F 5
Upper Byte 'G' = 0x47 6
D0103
Lower Byte 'H' = 0x48 7
Upper Byte 'I' = 0x49 8
D0104
Lower Byte 'J' = 0x4A 9
Upper Byte 'K' = 0x47 10
D0105
Lower Byte 'L' = 0x4C 11
Upper Byte 'M' = 0x4D 12
D0106
Lower Byte 'N' = 0x4E 13
Upper Byte 'O' = 0x4F 14
D0107
Lower Byte 0x00 Terminating character

When searching for "~" as a character

Search string String to be searched Search result
Device Stored Value Device Stored Value Position Device Stored Value
Upper Byte 'E' = 0x45 Upper Byte 'A' = 0x41 0
D0200 D0100 D0000 4
Lower Byte '~' = 0x7E Lower Byte 'B' = 0x42 1
Upper Byte '~' = 0x7E Upper Byte 'C' = 0x43 2
D0201 D0101
Lower Byte 'G' = 0x47 Lower Byte 'D' = 0x44 3
Upper Byte 'H' = 0x48 Upper Byte 'E' = 0x45 ←4
D0202 D0102
Lower Byte 0x00 Terminating character Lower Byte '~' = 0x7E 5
Upper Byte 'G' = 0x47 6
D0103
Lower Byte 'H' = 0x48 7
Upper Byte 'I' = 0x49 8
D0104
Lower Byte 'J' = 0x4A 9
Upper Byte 'K' = 0x47 10
D0105
Lower Byte 'L' = 0x4C 11
Upper Byte 'M' = 0x4D 12
D0106
Lower Byte 'N' = 0x4E 13
Upper Byte 'O' = 0x4F 14
D0107
Lower Byte 0x00 Terminating character

26-40 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 26: SCRIPT

Indirect assignment
Example 7.33 Indirect read

Script

[D0200] = OFFSET([D0010],[D0020]);

Operation Description
When the value of D0020 is 8, the value of D0018, the device 8 words from D0010, is read and stored in D0200.

D0010 0000 D0020 0008

+8
D0200 1234 D0018 1234
Read

Example 7.34 Indirect write

Script

OFFSET([D0010],[D0020]) = 1234;

Operation Description
When the value of D0020 is 3, the constant 1234 is stored in D0013, the device 3 words from D0010.

D0010 0000 D0020 0003

+3
1234 D0013 1234
Write

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 26-41

26: SCRIPT

Important Notes
This section describes important notes when programming scripts.
Important Notes Regarding While Definition
■Define so the execution does not go into an infinite loop.
The execution expression is repeatedly executed while the conditional expression is satisfied.
However, it will go into an infinite loop when the conditional expression is satisfied continually.

[D0100] = 10;

while (0 != [D0100])
{
[D0200] = [D0200] + 1;
}

In the conditional expression of the while definition, it states to exit the loop when the value of D0100 turns 0. However, the value
stored in D0100 is not changed after string 10 in the first line of the script, so the execution goes into an infinite loop.
When using the while definition, define it so the execution will not go into an infinite loop.
If the execution becomes an infinite loop, the scan time will exceed the watchdog timer setting and a watchdog timer error will
occur.

The value of D0100 becomes 0 when the while definition is repeated 10 times in the following example, and the execution will get
out of the while definition.

[D0100] = 10;

while (0 != [D0100])
{
[D0200] = [D0200] + 1;
[D0100] = [D0100] - 1;
}

About the Priority of the Operator

Operators are processed in the order from the left in each line. When multiple operations are combined, the operators are
processed in the following priorities.

Priority Operator
High ()
! ~ - (Negative number)
* / %
+ - (Subtraction)
<< >>
&
^
|
< <= > >=
== !=
&&
||
Low =

26-42 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

27: FLOW CALCULATION INSTRUCTIONS
This chapter describes the flow calculation instructions that output flow volume and the accumulated flow volume.

SCALE (Convert Analog Input)

This instruction scales the analog input value according to the coordinates between two specified points and outputs that result.

Symbol

SCALE(*) S1 S2 S3 D1 D2
***** ***** ***** ***** *****

Operation
When the input is on, the value of the data register specified by S1 is scaled according to the settings in the data register specified
by S2, then the calculated result is stored in the output value (D1+0, D1+1).
As shown in the diagram below, scaling is calculated by substituting the input value into a linear function that has been derived
from four points that are set by the output maximum value, output minimum value, input maximum value, input minimum value,
which are configured by S2.

Output maximum value

(S2+2, S2+3)

Output value
(D1+0, D1+1)

Output minimum value

(S2+4, S2+5)

0 Input Input value Input

minimum value maximum value
(S2+1) (S1) (S2+0)

Notes:
• The SCALE instruction cannot be used in an interrupt program. If used in an interrupt program, a user program execution error occurs, the
execution of the instruction is canceled, and the next instruction is executed.
For user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

• If the value of S1 or S2 is out of range, the result is a user program execution error. Error code 28 is stored in D8006, and the output value
(D1+0, D1+1) and the output value (dead band) (D1+2, D1+3) are not updated.
For user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

• In the following cases, a user program execution error will occur. Error code 46 is stored in D8006, and the output value (D1+0, D1+1) and
the output value (dead band) (D1+2, D1+3) are not updated. For user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on
page 3-10.

• When the input minimum value (S2+1) is the input maximum value (S2+0) or higher (input minimum value (S2+1) ≥ input maximum
value (S2+0))

• When the output minimum value (S2+4, S2+5) is the output maximum value (S2+2, S2+3) or higher (output minimum value (S2+4,
S2+5) ≥ output maximum value (S2+2, S2+3))

• When the output maximum value, the output minimum value, or the dead band (S2+6, S2+7) is INF (infinity) or NAN (not a number)

• When the dead band (S2+6, S2+7) is negative

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 27-1

27: FLOW CALCULATION INSTRUCTIONS

Dead Band Function

The dead band function filters minute changes in the value input to the SCALE instruction.
The SCALE instruction always retains the following two values.
Output value: The result of scaling the input value with each scan
Output value (dead band): The result of filtering the input value with the dead band
The fluctuation range to perform filtering is set as the dead band.
If the fluctuation range of the output value is smaller than the dead band, the output value (dead band) is not updated.

Output value
Output value (dead band)

Dead band

When the SCALE instruction is executed, it stores the value scaled in the first scan in output value (D1+0, D1+1) and updates the
output value (dead band) (D1+2, D1+3).
The operation at this time differs according to whether or not the dead band is enabled.
When the dead band is enabled
The output value (D1+0, D1+1) and the output value (dead band) (D1+2, D1+3) are compared, and the value is stored
depending on which of the absolute value of that difference (D1+4, D1+5) and the size of the dead band (S2+6, S2+7) are larger.
• If the absolute value of the difference (D1+4, D1+5) between the output value (D1+0, D1+1) and the output value (dead band)
(D1+2, D1+3) is less than the dead band (S2+6, S2+7)
The output value (D1+0, D1+1) is not stored in the output value (dead band) (D1+2, D1+3).
• If the absolute value of the difference (D1+4, D1+5) between the output value (D1+0, D1+1) and the output value (dead band)
(D1+2, D1+3) is greater than or equal to the dead band (S2+6, S2+7)
The output value (D1+0, D1+1) is stored in the output value (dead band) (D1+2, D1+3) and output value (dead band) change
notification (D2+0) turns on for one scan.
If the dead band is disabled (dead band (S2+6, S2+7)=0)
The output value (D1+0, D1+1) is stored in the output value (dead band) (D1+2, D1+3) with each scan.

27-2 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 27: FLOW CALCULATION INSTRUCTIONS

Example 1: When the dead band is enabled

When the dead band (S2+6, S2+7) is 100 and initial value of the output value (dead band) (D1+2, D1+3) is 0, the operation
in regard to the output value (D1+0, D1+1) is as follows.
Output Value (dead Absolute Value of the Difference Output Value (dead band)
Output Value
Cycle band) between the Output Value and the Change Notification
(D1+0, D1+1)
(D1+2, D1+3) Output Value (dead band) (D1+4, D1+5) (D2+0)
1st scan 10 0 10 OFF
2nd scan 50 0 50 OFF
3rd scan 100 100 100 ON
4th scan 50 100 50 OFF
5th scan 0 0 100 ON
6th scan -50 0 50 OFF
7th scan -100 -100 100 ON
1st scan 2nd scan 3rd scan 4th scan 5th scan 6th scan 7th scan
Output value (dead band) change notification ON
(D2+0) OFF
(3) (3) (3)
Dead band (S2+6, S2+7) 100
=100
50
Output value 10
(D1+0, D1+1)
-50

-100

(2)

100
Output value (dead band)
(2) (2)
(D1+2, D1+3)
Initial value 0
(1) (1) (1) (1)

-100
(1) Since the absolute value of the difference (D1+4, D1+5) between the output value and the output value (dead band) is
less than the dead band, the output value (D1+0, D1+1) is not stored in the output value (dead band) (D1+2, D1+3).
(2) Since the absolute value of the difference (D1+4, D1+5) between the output value and the output value (dead band) is greater
than or equal to the dead band, the output value (D1+0, D1+1) is stored in the output value (dead band) (D1+2, D1+3).
(3) Output value (dead band) change notification (D2+0) turns on for one scan when (2) occurs.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 27-3

27: FLOW CALCULATION INSTRUCTIONS

Example 2: When the dead band is disabled

When the dead band (S2+6, S2+7) is 0 and initial value of the output value (dead band) (D1+2, D1+3) is 0, the output
value (D1+0, D1+1) is stored in the output value (dead band) (D1+2, D1+3) with each scan.
Output Value (dead band)
Cycle Output Value (D1+0, D1+1)
(D1+2, D1+3)
1st scan 10 10
2nd scan 50 50
3rd scan 100 100
4th scan 50 50
5th scan 0 0
6th scan -50 -50
7th scan -100 -100

1st scan 2nd scan 3rd scan 4th scan 5th scan 6th scan 7th scan

Dead band (S2+6, S2+7) 100

=0
50
Output value 10
(D1+0, D1+1)
-50

-100

100

50
Output value (dead band) 10
(D1+2, D1+3)
-50

-100

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) Input value — — — — — — X — —
S2 (Source 2) Control register — — — — — — — —
S3 (Source 3) Initialization input X — X — — — — — —
D1 (Destination 1) Output register — — — — — — — —
D2 (Destination 2) Output relay — X — — — — — —

Special data registers cannot be designated as S2 and D1. Special internal relays cannot be designated as D2.

Data Types

Data Type W (word) I (integer) D (double word) L (long) F (float)

Specifiable Yes Yes — — —

The data type setting is only reflected in the input value.

27-4 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 27: FLOW CALCULATION INSTRUCTIONS

Settings
The SCALE (Scale Analog Value) dialog box contains the Devices tab and the Settings tab.
The Devices tab configures the devices used with the SCALE instruction. The Settings tab configures the initial values of the
SCALE instruction parameters.

■ Devices tab

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

(6)

(1) S1 (Source 1): Input Value

Specify the data register as the device that stores the input value to convert.
If the input value is greater than the input maximum value (S2+0) (input value > input maximum value (S2+0)), the input
maximum value (S2+0) is scaled.
If the input value is less than the input minimum value (S2+1) (input minimum value (S2+1) > input value), the input
minimum value (S2+1) is scaled.
(2) S2 (Source 2): Control Register
Specify the data register that stores the input maximum value, input minimum value, output maximum value, output
minimum value, and the dead band.
8 continuous words are used starting from the specified data register.
For details on the control registers, see "S2: Control registers" on page 27-7.

(3) S3 (Source 3): Initialization Input

Specify the input or internal relay as the device to initialize the control registers.
When the initialization input is on, the initial values configured on the Settings tab in the SCALE (Scale Analog Value)
dialog box are stored in the control registers.
When the initialization input is on, the initial values are stored in the data registers with each scan. To execute initialization
only once, add the SOTU instruction (single output up) or the SOTD (single output down) instruction to the input conditions.
For how to configure the initial values, see "(2) Initial Value" on page 27-7.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 27-5

27: FLOW CALCULATION INSTRUCTIONS

(4) D1 (Destination 1): Output Register

Specify the data register that will store the output value, the output value (dead band), and the amount of output change.
6 continuous words are used starting from the specified data register.
Storage
Function Setting Data Types
Destination
D1+0
Output value Stores the value after scaling with each scan.
D1+1
If the dead band is disabled (dead band (S2+6, S2+7) is 0), the output value
(D1+0, D1+1) is stored in the output value (dead band) with each scan.
If the dead band is enabled (dead band (S2+6, S2+7) is not 0), output value
(dead band) change notification (D2+0) turns on and the output value (D1+0, F (float)
D1+2 Output value
D1+1) is stored in the output value (dead band) only when the absolute value of
D1+3 (dead band)
the difference between the output value (D1+0, D1+1) and the output value
(dead band) is greater than or equal to the dead band (S2+6, S2+7)) (difference
≥ dead band (S2+6, S2+7)).
For details, see "Dead Band Function" on page 27-2.
Stores the absolute value of the difference between the output value (D1+0,
D1+1) and the output value (dead band) (D1+2, D1+3).

D1+4 Amount of output Absolute value of difference

F (float)*1
D1+5 change (D1+4, D1+5)

Output value (dead band) Output value

(D1+2, D1+3) (D1+0, D1+1)

*1 The data range is 0 and 1.175494E-38 to 3.402823E+38.

(5) D2 (Destination 2): Output Relay

Specify the output or internal relay to store the output value (dead band) change notification and the input value alarm
output. 2 continuous words are used starting from the specified device.
Storage
Function Setting
Destination
This relay turns on for one scan if the absolute value of the difference between the output value
Output value
(D1+0, D1+1) and the output value (dead band) (D1+2, D1+3) is greater than the dead band
D2+0 (dead band) change
(S2+6, S2+7). At that time, the output value (D1+0, D1+1) is stored in the output value (dead
notification
band) (D1+2, D1+3).
This relay turns on when the input value (S1) is greater than the input maximum value (S2+0) or
when the input value is less than the input minimum value (S2+1). At that time, if the input value
Input value warning
D2+1 (S1) is greater than the input maximum value (S2+0), it is scaled by the input maximum value
output
(S2+0). If the input value (S1) is less than the input minimum value (S2+1), it is scaled by the input
minimum value (S2+1).

(6) Device Allocation

Click this button to display the Device Allocation dialog box. As shown next, a table of the data registers and internal
relays and their corresponding SCALE instruction settings are displayed in the dialog box (7). Click Allocate Comments (8)
and you can configure the comments for the data registers and internal relays that correspond to the content of the settings.
Device Allocation dialog box

(7)

(8)

27-6 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 27: FLOW CALCULATION INSTRUCTIONS

■ Settings tab

(1)

(2)

(1) Data Type

Select the data type of the input value (S1) as "W (word)" or "I (integer)".
(2) Initial Value
Configure the initial values of the functions that will be stored in the control registers when the initialization input is on. For
the range of initial values, see "S2: Control registers" on page 27-7.

S2: Control registers

Storage
Function Setting Data Types
Destination
*1
Set as input maximum value > input minimum value (S2+0) .
Input maximum
S2+0 For W (word), the initial value is 65,535.
value
For I (integer), the initial value is 32,767. W (word)
Set as input minimum value < input maximum value (S2+1)*1. I (integer)
Input minimum
S2+1 For W (word), the initial value is 0.
value
For I (integer), the initial value is -32,768.
S2+2 Output Set as output maximum value > output minimum value (S2+4, S2+5)*1.
S2+3 maximum value The initial value is 100.0.
F (float)
S2+4 Output Set as output minimum value < output maximum value (S2+2, S2+3)*1.
S2+5 minimum value The initial value is 0.0.
The absolute value of the difference between the output value (D1+0, D1+1) and the
output value (dead band (D1+2, D1+3) is sampled, and output value (dead band)
change notification (D2+0) turns on only if the absolute value of the difference is
S2+6 greater than or equal to the dead band (difference ≥ dead band). At that time, the
Dead band F (float)*2
S2+7 output value (dead band) (D1+2, D1+3) is stored in the output value (D1+0, D1+1).
If the dead band is 0, the dead band function is disabled and the output value (D1+0,
D1+1) is stored in the output value (dead band) (D1+2, D1+3) with each scan.
The initial value is 0.

*1 If the conditions for the settings cannot be satisfied, a user program execution error will occur and the output value and output value (dead
band) will not be updated.
*2 The data range is 0 and 1.175494E-38 to 3.402823E+38.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 27-7

27: FLOW CALCULATION INSTRUCTIONS

Operation Example

To convert an analog input value from 0 to 4,095 to 0 to 65,535

Create the following ladder program.

SCALE(*) S1 S2 S3 D1 D2
D0000 D0050 M8120 D0150 M0050
M0000

(1) Specify D0000, where the analog input value is stored, for S1.
(2) Initialize the settings with the initialize pulse, and when M0000 turns on, the calculation is performed with the SCALE
instruction.

SCALE instruction settings

Devices tab

Settings Description
S1 (input value) D0000
S2 (control register) D0050
S3 (initialization input) M8120
D1 (output register) D0150
D2 (output relay) M0050

Settings tab

Settings Description
Data type Word (W)
Input maximum value 4,095
Input minimum value 0
Output maximum value 65,535
Output minimum value 0
Deadband 10

27-8 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 27: FLOW CALCULATION INSTRUCTIONS

FLWA (Analog Flow Totalizer)

This instruction samples the instantaneous flow (volume per unit of time) and stores the accumulated flow volume (the volume of
a material that has passed through for an arbitrary period) to a log.

Symbol

FLWA S1 S2 S3 D1 D2
***** ***** ***** ***** *****

Operation
The flow rate is sampled at a fixed cycle and the accumulated flow volume is calculated. That result is stored in the device
specified by D2 (logged data).
The FLWA instruction has a totalizer function that samples and accumulates the flow rate and a log output function that
temporarily saves the accumulated volume at the desired time.

Note: When using an analog output type flow meter, the FLWA instruction can be used to monitor the flow volume by converting the analog value
output from the flow meter to the flow rate with the SCALE instruction.
For details on the SCALE instruction, see "SCALE (Convert Analog Input)" on page 27-1.
When using a pulse output type flow meter, the FLWP instruction can be used to monitor the flow volume. For details on the FLWP instruction, see
"FLWP (Pulse Flow Totalizer)" on page 27-18.

Notes:
• The FLWA instruction cannot be used in an interrupt program. If used in an interrupt program, a user program execution error occurs, the
execution of the instruction is canceled, and the next instruction is executed.
For user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.

• The FLWA instruction cannot be simultaneously used with the LABEL, LJMP, LCAL, LRET, JMP, JEND, MCS, and MCR instructions.

Totalizer Function Overview

When the input is on, if the enable totalizer input (S2) is turned on, the flow rate (S1+0, S1+1) starts being sampled.
When the enable totalizer input is on, totalization is performed (updating the accumulated flow volume work area and
accumulated time work area).
When the enable totalizer input is off, totalization is paused. (The accumulated flow volume work area and the accumulated time
work area values are retained.)

ON
Input
OFF

ON
Enable totalizer input (S2)
OFF
Sampling
period
Flow rate
(S1+0, S1+1)

Accumulated flow volume work area

(D1+4, D1+5)

Accumulated time work area

(D1+6, D1+7)

Note: For details on the totalizer function such as the operation immediately after the input is turned on and the operation when the enable totalizer
input (S2) is once again turned on, see "Totalizer Function" on page 27-11.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 27-9

27: FLOW CALCULATION INSTRUCTIONS

Log Output Function Overview

When the input is on, if the log execution input (S3) is turned on, the logged data (D2) is updated regardless of the enable
totalizer input (S2) on/off status. The maximum amount of logged data is 35 items.
When the enable totalizer input is off, totalization is paused. (The accumulated flow volume work area and the accumulated time
work area values are retained.)

ON
Input
OFF

ON
Enable totalizer input (S2)
OFF

ON
Log execution input (S3)
OFF
Sampling
period

Flow rate
(S1+0, S1+1)

Accumulated flow volume work area

(D1+4, D1+5)

Accumulated time work area

(D1+6, D1+7)

Logged data (D2) Update Update

Note: For details on the log output function such as the operation immediately after the input is turned on, the operation when the enable totalizer
input (S2) is once again turned on, and the logged data updating when the log execution input (S3) is turned on, see "Log Output Function" on page
27-13.

Valid Devices
Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat
S1 (Source 1) Flow rate — — — — — — X — —
S2 (Source 2) Enable totalizer input X — X — — — — — —
S3 (Source 3) Log execution input X — X — — — — — —
D1 (Destination 1) Status — — — — — — — —
D2 (Destination 2) Logged data — — — — — — — —

Special data registers cannot be used.

27-10 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 27: FLOW CALCULATION INSTRUCTIONS

Function Descriptions
■ Totalizer Function
Starting Totalization
This section describes the operation from turning on the input to starting totalization.

ON
Input
OFF
(1)
ON
Enable totalizer input (S2)
OFF
(2) (3) (4)

Flow rate
(S1+0, S1+1)

Sampling
period
Accumulated flow volume work area
(D1+4, D1+5)

Accumulated time work area

(D1+6, D1+7)

(1) If the input is turned on, the operation status (D1+0), the amount of logged data (D2+0), the accumulated flow volume
work area, the accumulated time work area, and the logged data (D2+2 to D2+2+(6×maximum amount of logged data))
are initialized to "0".
(2) If the enable totalizer input (S2) is turned on, sampling starts. The accumulated time work area (D1+6, D1+7) count starts
at the same time.
(3) The amount to add calculated from the flow rate (S1+0, S1+1) when sampled and the elapsed time is added to the
accumulated flow volume work area (D1+4, D1+5).
(4) Afterward the operation in (3) is repeated.

Pausing and Restarting Totalization

This section describes the operation to pause and restart totalization by turning the enable totalizer input (S2) on and off.

ON
Input
OFF
(1)
ON
Enable totalizer input (S2)
OFF
(2) (3) (4)
A
Flow rate
(S1+0, S1+1)
Sampling
period

Accumulated flow volume work area

(D1+4, D1+5)

Accumulated time work area

(D1+6, D1+7)

(1) While the totalization is being executed, if the enable totalizer input is turned off, sampling is paused and updating the
accumulated flow volume work area (D1+4, D1+5) and the accumulated time work area (D1+6, D1+7) is stopped. The
accumulated flow volume work area and the accumulated time work area values are retained.
During the period from the previous sampling to (1), the flow rate is not added to the accumulated flow volume work area,
even if it is larger than "0".
(2) If the enable totalizer input once again changes from off to on, totalization restarts.
The processing is the same as (2) in "Starting Totalization" on page 27-11.
(3) The accumulated flow volume and the accumulated time for the sampling period are calculated.
The processing is the same as (3) in "Starting Totalization" on page 27-11.
(4) Afterward the operation in (3) is repeated.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 27-11

27: FLOW CALCULATION INSTRUCTIONS

Ending Totalization
To end totalization by turning off the input
This section describes the end operation for totalization when ending totalization by turning off the input.

ON
Input
OFF
(1)
ON
Enable totalizer input (S2)
OFF
A (2)

Flow rate
(S1+0, S1+1)

Sampling
period
Accumulated flow volume work area
(D1+4, D1+5)

Accumulated time work area

(D1+6, D1+7)

(1) When the input is off, updating the accumulated flow volume work area and the accumulated time work area is stopped.
The accumulated flow volume work area and the accumulated time work area values are retained.
During the period from the previous sampling to (1) (=A), the flow rate is not added to the accumulated flow volume work
area, even if it is larger than "0".
(2) When the input is off, the accumulated flow volume work area and the accumulated time work area values are retained,
even if the enable totalizer input is turned off.

To end totalization by turning off the enable totalizer input (S2)

This section describes the end operation for totalization when ending totalization by turning off the enable totalizer input
(S2).

ON
Input
OFF

ON (2)
Enable totalizer input (S2)
OFF
(1) (3)

Flow rate
(S1+0, S1+1)
Sampling
period
Accumulated flow volume work area
(D1+4, D1+5)

Accumulated time work area

(D1+6, D1+7)

(1) When the enable totalizer input is off, totalization (updating the accumulated flow volume work area and the accumulated
time work area) is stopped.
The accumulated flow volume work area and the accumulated time work area values are retained.
(2) Even if the input is turned off, no processing is performed as totalization was stopped in (1).
The accumulated flow volume work area and the accumulated time work area values are retained.
(3) When the input is off, no processing is performed even if the enable totalizer input is turned on.
The accumulated flow volume work area and the accumulated time work area values are retained.

27-12 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 27: FLOW CALCULATION INSTRUCTIONS

■ Log Output Function

Log output
When the input is on
This section describes the log output operation when the input is on.
ON
Input
OFF
(3)
ON
Enable totalizer input (S2)
OFF
(1) (4)
ON
Log execution input (S3)
OFF
Sampling
period

Flow rate
(S1+0, S1+1)

Accumulated flow volume work area

(D1+4, D1+5)
(2)

Accumulated time work area

(D1+6, D1+7)

Logged data (D2) Update Update

(1) When the enable totalizer input (S2) is on, if the log execution input (S3) is turned on, the log is updated and the
accumulated flow volume work area and the accumulated time work area values are initialized to "0".
(2) The amount to add calculated from the flow rate (S1+0, S1+1) and the elapsed time is added to the accumulated flow
volume work area.
When the enable totalizer input is on, the sampling period is retained even during the log update processing.
(3) When the enable totalizer input is off, sampling is paused and updating the accumulated flow volume work area and the
accumulated time work area is stopped.
The accumulated flow volume work area and the accumulated time work area values are retained.
(4) Even when the enable totalizer input is off, if the input is on, the log is output in the same manner as (1).
When the input is off
When the input is off, no processing is performed even if the log execution input (S3) is turned on.
Log Updating
The logged data can be recorded from log 1 to log 35. Log 1 is the newest logged data.
Each time the log is updated, 1 is added to the amount of logged data (1) and the old logged data is pushed back by one item (2).
When the maximum amount of logged data is reached, the oldest log is deleted (3).
The date/time information (4) and accumulated flow volume (5) is stored in log 1.
The accumulated time (6) unit is converted from "ms" to "s" and stored in log 1.

(4) Date/time information Amount of

Latest log (5) Accumulated flow volume logged data (1)
(6) Accumulated time Log 1
Log 2
Log 3
Log 4
Log 5
(2)
Log 6
Log 7
Log 8
Log 9
When the maximum quantity of logged data is 10 Log 10
Log 11 Delete (3)
Log 12

Log 34
Log 35
The maximum amount of logged data to use is specified on the Settings tab in the FLWA (Analog Flow Totalizer) dialog box.
Note: For details on the date/time information, the accumulated flow volume, and the accumulated time recorded in the log, see "(5) D2
(Destination 2): Logged Data" on page 27-15.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 27-13

27: FLOW CALCULATION INSTRUCTIONS

Settings
The FLWA (Analog Flow Totalizer) dialog box contains the Devices tab and the Settings tab.

■ Devices tab

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

Settings Description
Tag name Specifies the tag name or the device address for the device.
Device address Shows the device address that corresponds to the tag name.
Comment Shows the comment for the device address. This item can be edited.

(1) S1 (Source 1): Flow Rate

Specify the device that stores the flow rate. 2 continuous words (S1+0, S1+1) are used starting from the set device.
The valid range for flow rate is 0 or 1.175494E-38 to 3.402823E+38 *1.
*1 The upper and lower data registers change according to the 32-bit data storage method specified. For details, see Chapter 3
"Instructions Reference" - "32-bit Data Storage" on page 3-9.

Note: If the flow rate value is outside the valid range, a user program execution error occurs, M8004 turns on, error code 28 is stored in D8006, and
execution of the instruction is canceled. 10 is also stored in the status (D1) at the same time.
For user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.
(2) S2 (Source 2): Enable Totalizer Input
Specify the device to enable totalization processing of the flow rate.
When the enable totalizer input is off, totalization is paused. When on, totalization is executed.
For details on the enable totalizer input, see "Function Descriptions" on page 27-11.
(3) S3 (Source 3): Log Execution Input
Specify the device to execute and stop the logging process that updates the log and initializes the accumulated flow volume
work area and the accumulated time work area to "0".
When the log execution input changes from off to on, the logging process is executed.
For details on the log execution input, see "Log Output Function" on page 27-13.
(4) D1 (Destination 1): Status
Specify the device to store the status including the error during FLWA instruction execution. 10 continuous words are used
starting from the set device.

Storage
Function Description
Destination
Stores the status including the error during FLWA instruction execution.
D1+0 Operation status 0 : Normal
10 : Flow rate out of range during sampling
D1+1
System work area
…

D1+9

27-14 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 27: FLOW CALCULATION INSTRUCTIONS

(5) D2 (Destination 2): Logged Data

Specify the device to store the data that is logged. A maximum of 212 continuous words are used starting from the set
device.

Note: The number of data registers that are used for logged data changes according to the maximum amount of logged data.
The number of data registers used for logged data is 2+6×the maximum amount of logged data.

Storage
Function Description Data Range
Destination
D2+0 Amount of logged data Stores the amount of logged data that has been recorded. W (word): 0 to 35
D2+1 Reserved — —
When the log execution input (S3) changes from off to on (during log
D2+2 updating), these devices store the content of special data registers D (double word):
Log time
D2+3 D8008 to D8014 (current calendar/time values) converted to the 0 to 4,294,967,295*2
number of seconds*1 from January 1st, 1970.
When the log execution input (S3) changes from off to on (during log
updating), these devices store the accumulated flow volume. F (float):
D2+4 Log 1 Accumulated
For the processing when an accumulated flow volume overflow or 0, 1.175494E-38 to
D2+5 flow volume
underflow has occurred, see "Carry and Borrow in Floating-Point Data 3.402823E+38*2
Processing" on page 3-8.
When the log execution input (S3) changes from off to on (during log
D2+6 Accumulated D (double word):
updating), these devices store the accumulated time.
D2+7 time 0 to 4,294,967,295*2
The unit is "s".
…

…
D2+206
Log time
D2+207
D2+208 Accumulated
Log 35 Same as log 1. Same as log 1.
D2+209 flow volume
D2+210 Accumulated
D2+211 time
*1 The time expressed as the number of seconds from 00:00:00 on January 1st, 1970.
(For example, if the date/time is 00:00:00 on January 1st, 2015, the value is 1,420,070,400 seconds.)
*2 The upper and lower data registers change according to the 32-bit data storage method specified. For details, see Chapter 3 "Instructions
Reference" - "32-bit Data Storage" on page 3-9.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 27-15

27: FLOW CALCULATION INSTRUCTIONS

■ Settings tab

(1)
(2)
(3)

(1) Flow Rate Unit

Select the time unit for flow rate that will be stored in the flow rate (S1+0, S1+1) from the following.
"Second", "Minute", "Hour", "Days"

(2) Sampling Period

Specifies the time interval to sample the flow rate in 0.1 s increments.
The range is 0.1 to 6,553.5.

(3) Max Quantity of Log Data

Species the maximum amount of logged data that can be recorded.
The number of data registers that are used for the logged data (D2) changes according to the maximum amount of logged
data.
The number of data registers used for logged data (D2) is 2+6×the maximum amount of logged data.
The range is 1 to 35.

27-16 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 27: FLOW CALCULATION INSTRUCTIONS

Operation Example

Configuration Example

Devices tag

Item Description Comments

S1 (flow rate) D0010 The value of the analog input value converted to the flow rate.
S2 (enable totalizer input) M0050
S3 (log execution input) M0100 WEEK instruction output. Set to turn on for one scan every day at 00:00.
D1 (status) D0150
D2 (logged data) M0150

Settings tag

Item Description Comments

Flow rate unit Second
Sampling period 0.1 sec
Max quantity of logged data 10

Example program

SCALE(W) S1 S2 S3 D1 D2 • If input M0000 turns on, the result of analog input value D8058 being
1 D8058 D0000 M0020 D0010 M0030 converted to the flow rate is stored in D0010 with each scan.
M0000
• Sampling of the flow rate D0010 and totalization starts by turning on
FLWA S1 S2 S3 D1 D2 input M0000 and enable totalizer input M0050.

M0000
1 D0010 M0050 M0100 D0150 D0200 • The operation status is stored in D1 (status).
• By turning on M0100 for one scan every day at 00:00 with the WEEK
WEEK S1 S2 S3 D1 instruction, S3 (log execution input) turns on and the current log
1 M0100 information is stored in D2 (logged data).
M0000

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 27-17

27: FLOW CALCULATION INSTRUCTIONS

FLWP (Pulse Flow Totalizer)

This instruction monitors a counter that measures the number of pulses and calculates the flow rate at a fixed cycle. It also stores
the accumulated flow volume (the amount that flowed for an arbitrary period) to a log.

Symbol

FLWP(*) S1 S2 S3 D1 D2
***** ***** ***** ***** *****

Operation
The FLWP instruction calculates the flow rate and the accumulated flow volume by acquiring the pulse signal output from a pulse
output type flow meter using a counter and monitoring the value of that counter. That result is stored in the devices specified by
D1 (status) and D2 (logged data).
The FLWP instruction has a flow rate calculation function that calculates the flow rate from pulses, a totalizer function that
accumulates the flow volume, and a log output function to temporarily save the accumulated volume at the desired time.

Note: When using an analog output type flow meter, the FLWA instruction can be used to monitor the flow volume. For details on the FLWA
instruction, see "FLWA (Analog Flow Totalizer)" on page 27-9.

Notes:
• The maximum frequency of pulses that the FLWP instruction supports is 10 kHz.
• Output the log in a cycle within 119 hours.
• The FLWP instruction cannot be used in an interrupt program. If used in an interrupt program, a user program execution error occurs, the
execution of the instruction is canceled, and the next instruction is executed.
For user program execution errors, see "User Program Execution Errors" on page 3-10.
• The FLWP instruction must be executed with each scan as set or it cannot correctly measure the time. Therefore, it cannot be simultaneously
used with the LABEL, LJMP, LCAL, LRET, JMP, JEND, MCS, and MCR instructions.
Flow Rate Calculation Function Overview
When the input is on, if the enable totalizer input (S2) is turned on, the amount that the flow counter (S1+0, S1+1)
increased is added to the flow volume work area with each scan. The flow rate (D1+0, D1+1) is updated every second with
the result that is calculated from the flow volume work area.
If the enable totalizer input is turned off, the flow rate is initialized to "0" and updating the flow rate is stopped.

ON
Input
OFF
ON
Enable totalizer input (S2)
OFF

Flow counter
(S1+0, S1+1)

Flow rate
update cycle
Flow volume work area
1s
(D1+8, D1+9)

Flow rate
(D1+0, D1+1)

Note: For details on the flow calculation function such as the operation immediately after the input is turned on and the operation when the enable
totalizer input is once again turned on, see "Flow Rate Function" on page 27-20.

27-18 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 27: FLOW CALCULATION INSTRUCTIONS

Totalizer Function Overview

When the input is on, if the enable totalizer input (S2) is turned on, totalization starts.
When the enable totalizer input is on, the amount that the flow counter (S1+0, S1+1) increased is added to the
accumulated flow volume work area with each scan. The accumulated time work area count also starts at the same time.
When the enable totalizer input is off, totalization is paused. (The accumulated flow volume work area and the accumulated
time work area values are retained.)

ON
Input
OFF
ON
Enable totalizer input (S2)
OFF

Flow counter
S1+0, S1+1

Accumulated flow volume work area

(system work area)

Accumulated time work area

(system work area)

Note: For details on the totalizer function such as the operation immediately after the input is turned on and the operation when the enable totalizer
input is once again turned on, see "Totalizer Function" on page 27-22.
Log Output Function Overview
When the input is on, if the log execution input (S3) is turned on, the logged data (D2) is updated regardless of the enable
totalizer input (S2) on/off status. The maximum amount of logged data is 35 items.
When the enable totalizer input is off, totalization is paused. The accumulated flow volume work area and the accumulated
time work area values are retained.

ON
Input
OFF
ON
Enable totalizer input (S2)
OFF

ON
Log execution input (S3)
OFF

Flow counter
(S1)

Accumulated flow volume work area

(system work area)

Accumulated time work area

(system work area)

Logged data (D2) Update Update

Note: For details on the log output function such as the operation immediately after the input is turned on, the operation when the enable totalizer
input (S2) is once again turned on, and the logged data updating when the log execution input (S3) is turned on, see "Log Output Function" on page
27-23.

Valid Devices

Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat

S1 (Source 1) Flow counter — — — — — — X — —
S2 (Source 2) Enable totalizer input X — X — — — — — —
S3 (Source 3) Log execution input X — X — — — — — —
D1 (Destination 1) Status — — — — — — — —
D2 (Destination 2) Logged data — — — — — — — —

Special data registers cannot be used.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 27-19

27: FLOW CALCULATION INSTRUCTIONS

Function Descriptions
■ Flow Rate Function

Starting the Flow Rate Calculation

This section describes the operation from turning on the input to starting the flow rate calculation.

ON
Input
OFF
(1)
ON
Enable totalizer input (S2)
OFF
(2) (3) (4)

Flow counter
S1+0, S1+1

Flow rate
update cycle
Flow volume work area
1s
D1+8, D1+9

Flow rate
D1+0, D1+1

(1) If the input is turned on, the flow volume work area and the flow rate (D1+0, D1+1) are initialized to "0".
(2) If the enable totalizer input (S2) is turned on, sampling of the flow counter (S1+0, S1+1) starts, and the amount that the
flow counter increased is added to the flow volume work area with each scan.
(3) When the enable totalizer input is on, the flow volume is calculated from the flow volume work area each second and stored
in the flow rate.
The flow rate calculation is executed at a cycle of 1 second regardless of whether the log execution input (S3) is turned on
or off.
(4) (2) and (3) are then repeated.

Note: The flow rate formula is as follows.

Flow volume work area

Flow rate = ×T
K factor
T has the following values depending on the set flow rate unit.
T (s) = 1
T (min) = 60
T (hour) = 60×60 = 360
T (day) = 60×60×24 = 8,640

27-20 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 27: FLOW CALCULATION INSTRUCTIONS

Pausing the Flow Rate Calculation

This section describes the operation from turning on the input to pausing the flow rate calculation.

ON
Input
OFF
ON
Enable totalizer input (S2)
OFF
(1) (2) (3) (4)

Flow counter
(S1+0, S1+1)

Flow rate
update cycle
Flow volume work area
1s
(D1+8, D1+9)

Flow rate
(D1+0, D1+1)

(1) If the enable totalizer input (S2) is turned off, the flow rate is initialized to "0".
(2) If the enable totalizer input (S2) is turned on, sampling of the flow counter (S1+0, S1+1) starts, and the amount that the
flow counter (S1) increased is added to the flow volume work area with each scan. The processing is the same as (2) in
"Starting the Flow Rate Calculation" on page 27-20.
(3) 1 second after the enable totalizer input is turned on, the flow rate is calculated from the flow volume work area and stored
in the flow rate (D1+0, D1+1).
Regardless of whether or not the log execution input (S3) is on or off, the flow rate is calculated in a 1 second cycle (the
processing is the same as (3) in "Starting the Flow Rate Calculation" on page 27-20).
(4) (2) and (3) are then repeated.

Ending the Flow Rate Calculation

This section describes the operation to end the flow rate calculation.

ON
Input
OFF
(1) (2) (3) (4)
ON
Enable totalizer input (S2)
OFF
Flow rate
update cycle
Flow counter 1s
(S1+0, S1+1)

Flow volume work area

(D1+8, D1+9)

Flow rate
(D1+0, D1+1)

(1) If the input is turned off when the enable totalizer input (S2) is on, the flow volume work area and flow rate are initialized to
"0" and the instruction ends.
(2) If the input is turned on when the enable totalizer input is on, the flow rate calculation starts.
(3) If the enable totalizer input is turned off, the flow rate is initialized to "0" and the flow rate calculation is paused (the
processing is the same as (1) in "Pausing the Flow Rate Calculation" on page 27-21).
(4) If the input is turned off, the flow volume work area and the flow rate (D1+0, D1+1) are initialized to "0" and the instruction
ends.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 27-21

27: FLOW CALCULATION INSTRUCTIONS

■ Totalizer Function
Starting and Pausing Totalization
This section describes the operation from turning on the input to starting and pausing totalization.

ON
Input
OFF

ON
(1) (2) (3) (4)
Enable totalizer input (S2)
OFF

Flow counter
(S1+0, S1+1)

Accumulated flow volume work area

(system work area)

Accumulated time work area

(system work area)

(1) If the input is turned on, the operation status (D1+2), the amount of logged data (D2), the accumulated flow volume work
area, the accumulated time work area, and the logged data (D2+2 to D2+2+(6×maximum amount of logged data)) are
initialized to "0".
(2) If the enable totalizer input (S2) is turned on while the input is on, sampling of the flow counter starts, and the amount that
the flow counter increased is added to the accumulated flow volume work area with each scan. The accumulated time work
area also starts being measured at the same time.
(3) If the enable totalizer input is turned off, updating the accumulated flow volume work area and the accumulated time work
area is paused.
(4) If the enable totalizer input is once again changed from off to on, the operation is the same as in (2) without initializing the
accumulated flow volume work area and the accumulated time work area.

Ending Totalization
The section describes the operation to end totalization.

ON
Input
OFF
(1) (2) (4)
ON
Enable totalizer input (S2)
OFF
(3)

Flow counter
(S1+0, S1+1)

Accumulated flow volume work area

(system work area)

Accumulated time work area

(system work area)

(1) If the input is turned off when the enable totalizer input (S2) is on, updating the accumulated flow volume work area and the
accumulated time work area is stopped. The accumulated flow volume work area and the accumulated time work area
values are retained.
(2) If the input is turned on, the accumulated flow volume work area and the accumulated time work area are initialized to "0".
If the enable totalizer input is on at this time, updating the accumulated flow volume work area and the accumulated time
work area starts.
(3) If the enable totalizer input is turned off, updating the accumulated flow volume work area and the accumulated time work
area is paused.
The processing is the same as (3) in "Starting and Pausing Totalization" on page 27-22.
(4) If the input is turned off, the totalization processing stops. The accumulated flow volume work area and the accumulated
time work area values are retained.

27-22 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 27: FLOW CALCULATION INSTRUCTIONS

■ Log Output Function

Log output
When the input is on
This section describes the log output operation when the input is on.

ON
Input
OFF

ON
Enable totalizer input (S2)
OFF
(1) (2) (3)
ON
Log execution input (S3)
OFF

Flow counter
(S1+0, S1+1)

Accumulated flow volume work area

(system work area)

Accumulated time work area

(system work area)

Logged data (D2) Update Update

(1) When the enable totalizer input (S2) is on, if the log execution input (S3) is turned on, the log is updated and the
accumulated flow volume work area and the accumulated time work area values are initialized to "0".
(2) If the enable totalizer input is turned off, sampling is paused and updating the accumulated flow volume work area and the
accumulated time work area is stopped. The accumulated flow volume work area and the accumulated time work area
values are retained.
(3) Even when the enable totalizer input is off, if the input is on, the log output processing is performed in the same manner
as (1).

When the input is off

When the input is off, no processing is performed even if the log execution input (S3) is turned on.

Log Updating
The logged data can be recorded from log 1 to log 35. Log 1 is the newest logged data.
Each time the log is updated, 1 is added to the amount of logged data (1) and the old logged data is pushed back by one item (2).
When the maximum amount of logged data is reached, the oldest log is deleted (3).
The date/time information (4) and accumulated flow volume (5) is stored in log 1.
The accumulated time (6) unit is converted from "ms" to "s" and stored in log 1.

(4) Date/time information Amount of

Latest log (5) Accumulated flow volume logged data (1)
(6) Accumulated time Log 1
Log 2
Log 3
Log 4
Log 5
(2)
Log 6
Log 7
Log 8
Log 9
When the maximum quantity of logged data is 10 Log 10
Log 11 Delete (3)
Log 12

Log 34
Log 35
The maximum amount of logged data to use is specified on the Settings tab in the FLWP (Pulse Flow Totalizer) dialog box.
Note: For details on the date/time information, the accumulated flow volume, and the accumulated time recorded in the log, see "(5) D2
(Destination 2): Logged Data" on page 27-25.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 27-23

27: FLOW CALCULATION INSTRUCTIONS

Settings
The FLWP (Pulse Flow Totalizer) dialog box contains the Devices tab and the Settings tab.

■ Devices tab

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

Settings Description
Tag name Specifies the tag name or the device address for the device.
Device address Shows the device address that corresponds to the tag name.
Comment Shows the comment for the device address. This item can be edited.

(1) S1 (Source 1): Flow Counter

The flow counter setting differs according to the "(2) Counter Type" on page 27-26 operation type. Starting from the set
device, a number of continuous devices are used according to the data type.

When Counter Type is "Free Run"

Specify the device that stores the counter value that is used to continuously add pulses. To find the number of pulse count
for each scan, calculate it from the difference between the flow counter of the previous scan and latest flow counter.

When Counter Type is "Difference"

Specify the device that stores the number of pulse count for each scan.

The setting range differs according to "(2) Counter Type" on page 27-26.
If Data Type is "Word (W)", the range is 0 to 65,535.
If Data Type is "Double (D)", the range is 0 to 4,294,967,295*1.

*1 The upper and lower data registers change according to the 32-bit data storage method specified. For details, see Chapter 3
"Instructions Reference" - "32-bit Data Storage" on page 3-9.

(2) S2 (Source 2): Enable Totalizer Input

Set the device to enable flow volume totalization.
When the enable totalizer input is off, totalization is paused. When on, totalization is executed.
For details on the enable totalizer input, see "Function Descriptions" on page 27-20.

(3) S3 (Source 3): Log Execution Input

Specify the device to execute and stop the logging process that updates the log and initializes the accumulated flow volume
work area and the accumulated time work area to "0".
When the log execution input changes from off to on, the logging process is executed.
While the FLWP instruction is being executed, execute the next logging process within 119 hours of the previous logging
process.
For details on the log execution input, see "Log Output Function" on page 27-23.

27-24 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 27: FLOW CALCULATION INSTRUCTIONS

(4) D1 (Destination 1): Status

Stores the status including the flow rate and the error during FLWP instruction execution. 16 continuous words are used
starting from the set device.

Storage
Function Description
Destination
D1+0 Stores the flow rate calculated every second. The flow rate unit F (float):
Flow rate
D1+1 conforms to the K factor and flow rate unit settings. 1.175494E-38 to 3.402823E+38*1
D1+2 Operation status Stores the status including the error during FLWP instruction execution.
D1+3
System work area
…

D1+15

*1 The upper and lower data registers change according to the 32-bit data storage method specified. For details, see Chapter 3 "Instructions
Reference" - "32-bit Data Storage" on page 3-9.

(5) D2 (Destination 2): Logged Data

Specify the device to store the data that is logged. A maximum of 212 continuous words are used starting from the set
device.
Note: The number of data registers that are used for logged data changes according to the maximum amount of logged data.
The number of data registers used for logged data is 2+6×the maximum amount of logged data.

Storage
Function Description Range
Destination
Amount of logged
D2+0 Stores the amount of logged data that has been recorded. W (word): 0 to 35
data
D2+1 Reserved — —
When the log execution input (S3) changes from off to on
D2+2 (during log updating), these devices store the content of special D (double word):
Log time
D2+3 data registers D8008 to D8014 (current calendar/time values) 0 to 4,294,967,295*2
converted to the number of seconds*1 from January 1st, 1970.
When the log execution input (S3) changes from off to on
(during log updating), these devices store the accumulated flow
F (float):
D2+4 Log Accumulated volume.
0, 1.175494E-38 to
D2+5 1 flow volume For the processing when an accumulated flow volume overflow
3.402823E+38*2
or underflow has occurred, see "Carry and Borrow in Floating-
Point Data Processing" on page 3-8.
When the log execution input (S3) changes from off to on
D2+6 Accumulated (during log updating), these devices store the accumulated D (double word):
D2+7 time time. 0 to 4,294,967,295*2
The unit is "s".
…

D2+206
Log time
D2+207
D2+208 Log Accumulated
Same as log 1. Same as log 1.
D2+209 35 flow volume
D2+210 Accumulated
D2+211 time

*1 The time expressed as the number of seconds from 00:00:00 on January 1st, 1970.
(For example, if the date/time is 00:00:00 on January 1st, 2015, the value is 1,420,070,400 seconds.)
*2 The upper and lower data registers change according to the 32-bit data storage method specified. For details, see Chapter 3 "Instructions
Reference" - "32-bit Data Storage" on page 3-9.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 27-25

27: FLOW CALCULATION INSTRUCTIONS

■ Settings tab

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)

(1) Data Type

Select the flow counter data type as "Word (W)" or "Double (D)". The initial value is "Double (D)".

Word (W): S1+0 is handled as the flow counter.

Double (D): S1+0 and S1+1 are handled as the flow counter.

(2) Counter Type

Select the operation type for the flow counter that samples the pulses as "Free Run" or "Difference".

Free Run: An addition-only free run operation is performed without initializing the flow counter. The free run
operation resets the count to 0 and continues counting when the count exceeds the upper limit of the
data type (65,535 (W), 4,294,967,295 (D)).
Difference: The number of pulse count for each scan is stored in the flow counter.
For example, use this option when you will count pulses with two different types of counters, calculate
that difference in the ladder, and directly store that to the flow counter.

(3) Flow Rate Unit

Select the time unit for flow rate that will be stored in the flow rate (D1+0, D1+1) from the following.
"Second", "Minute", "Hour", "Days"
(4) K factor
Specify the constant that indicates the number of pulses per unit quantity that is output by the flow meter.
The unit differs according to the flow meter (liter, gallon, etc.), and this unit does not affect the operation of the FLWP
instruction.
For example, if the flow meter outputs 10 pulses for a flow of 1 liter, the K factor is specified as 10 [pulses/liter].
The setting range is 0 and 1.175494E-38 to 3.402823E+38.
(5) Max Quantity of Log Data
Species the maximum amount of logged data that can be recorded.
The number of data registers that are used for the logged data (D2) changes according to the maximum amount of logged
data.
The number of data registers used for logged data (D2) is 2+6×the maximum amount of logged data.
The range is 1 to 35.

27-26 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 27: FLOW CALCULATION INSTRUCTIONS

Operation Example

Configuration Example

Devices tag

Item Description Comments

S1 (Flow Counter) D8120 G1 high-speed counter measurement value.
S2 (Enable Totalizer Input) M0050
S3 (Log Execution Input) M0100 WEEK instruction output. Set to turn on for one scan every day at 00:00.
D1 (Status) D0150
D2 (Logged Data) M0150

Settings tag

Item Description Comments

Data Type Double (D)
Counter Type Free Run
Flow Rate Unit Second
K factor 5.5344
Max Quantity of Log Data 10

Example program
• Totalization starts by turning on input M0000 and S2 (enable totalization
FLWP S1 S2 S3 D1 D2 input).
1 D8120 M0050 M0100 D0150 D0150
M0000 • The flow volume is calculated based on the accumulated value and the
operation status is stored in D1 (status).
WEEK S1 S2 S3 D1
1 M0100 • By turning on M0100 for one scan every day at 00:00 with the WEEK
M0000 instruction, S3 (logging trigger input) turns on and the current log
information is stored in D2 (logged data).

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 27-27

27: FLOW CALCULATION INSTRUCTIONS

27-28 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

28: USER-DEFINED MACRO INSTRUCTION
This chapter describes the instruction that executes registered user-defined macros.
A user-defined macro is a ladder program that has been registered with an arbitrary number and name, and that can be used
multiple times within the main program. For creating user-defined macros, see "User-defined macro registration procedure" on
page 28-4.
For the differences between user-defined macros and subroutines, see "Differences between User-defined Macros and
Subroutines" on page A-5.
■

UMACRO (User-defined Macro)

Executes the user-defined macro with the specified number.

Symbol

UMACRO S1 A1 An
***** ***** *****

Operation
When the input is on, the user-defined macro that corresponds to the specified user-defined macro number will be executed.
When the input is off, the user-defined macro that corresponds to the specified user-defined macro number will not be executed.
You can set the argument devices that will be used in the user-defined macro that is executed by the UMACRO instruction.
Argument devices are devices that the user-defined macro will actually use when the UMACRO instruction is executed. For
example, when I0001 is set for A1, A0001 will operate as I0001 in the user-defined macro.

Valid Devices
Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat
S1 (Source 1) User-defined Macro Number — — — — — — — X*1 —
*2 Argument Device 1 to n
A1 ... An X X X X X X X X —
(n is 1 ≤ n ≤ 100)

*1 The valid range of S1 (user-defined macro number) is 0 to 255.

*2 A1 to A100 are argument devices that will be used in the user-defined macro. The argument devices that will be used can be configured in the
"User-defined Macro dialog box" on page 28-3, and 0 to 100 argument devices can be used.
For example, when Number of arguments is set to 5 in the "User-defined Macro dialog box" on page 28-3, argument devices A1 to A5 can be
used. When Number of arguments is set to 0 in the "User-defined Macro dialog box" on page 28-3, argument devices cannot be used.

Operation Example
The following ladder program will execute the UMACRO instruction when main program input I0000 is turned on. When the
UMACRO instruction is executed, user-defined macro number 0 will be executed.
A0001 will operate as I0001 in the user-defined macro because A1 of the UMACRO instruction has been set to I0001. Therefore,
the MOV instruction will be executed when I0001 is turned on.

Main program

UMACRO S1 A1
0 I0001
I0000

User-defined macro (user-defined macro number S1: 0)

MOV(W) S1 - D1 - REP
D0000 D0001
A0001
Note: You can save time and effort in writing similar ladder programs and creating new ladder programs by turning a ladder program into a user-
defined macro.

Note: The UMACRO, JMP, JEND, MCR, MCS, LCAL, LJMP, LRET, LABEL, DJNZ, and END instructions cannot be used in a user-defined macro.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 28-1

28: USER-DEFINED MACRO INSTRUCTION

Settings

(1)

(2)

(1) S1 (source 1): User-defined Macro Number

Enter the number of the user-defined macro to execute. Only a constant can be set.
Click to display the User-defined Macro dialog box, which is used to set the user-defined macro number. For details, see
"User-defined Macro dialog box" on page 28-3.

(2) Argument Settings

Use this area to configure the devices that will be passed to the user-defined macro that is set with the user-defined macro
number (1). Sets the device address or tag name according to the device type of the displayed arguments. The number of
arguments and the device types can be changed in the User-defined Macro dialog box.

28-2 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 28: USER-DEFINED MACRO INSTRUCTION

User-defined Macro dialog box

Set the number for the user-defined macro or edit the user-defined macro with the selected number.

(1) (2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(1) No.
Sets the number for the user-defined macro.

(2) Name
Enter the user-defined macro name.

(3) Number of arguments

Selects the number of arguments to use. You can specify the number between 0 and 100.

(4) Device Type

Selects the device type of each argument. When using an argument device in the user-defined macro, it will operate as the
device type specified here.

(5) Enable Protection

Select the Enable Protection check box to allow setting a password for the user-defined macro. When protection is
enabled, you will be prompted to enter the password when displaying the ladder program for the user-defined macro.
For example, enable this option to allow the use of the created user-defined macro, but also to keep the ladder program for
the user-defined macro private.

(6) Disable a password protection.

The argument settings cannot be changed when protection is enabled. To change the argument settings, click this button
and enter the password to disable protection.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 28-3

28: USER-DEFINED MACRO INSTRUCTION

User-defined macro registration procedure

This section describes the procedure to create and register a user-defined macro.
A registered user-defined macro can be executed by specifying the user-defined macro number in the UMACRO instruction.

1. Right-click User-defined Macro in the Project window and click New.

The User-defined Macro dialog box will be displayed.

2. Configure the user-defined macro.

• Set the user-defined macro number with No. (1).
• Enter the name of the user-defined macro number in Name (2).
• Select the number of arguments to use in the user-defined macro in Number of arguments (3).
• Select the device type of the arguments with Device Type (4).

(1) (2)

(3)
(4)

Note: You can prevent the settings in the User-defined Macro dialog box from being changed by selecting the Enable
Protection check box and setting a password.

3. Click OK to close the User-defined Macro dialog box.

The configured user-defined macro number, name, and argument settings will be displayed in the Project window.
The Editor will also be displayed to create a ladder program in the user-defined macro.

28-4 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 28: USER-DEFINED MACRO INSTRUCTION

4. Create a ladder program in the Editor for the created user-defined macro in the same manner as the main program and
subroutines. Use the argument devices (A1 to A100) configured in the User-defined Macro dialog box as required.
The created user-defined macro can be executed with the UMACRO instruction.

Note: The UMACRO, JMP, JEND, MCR, MCS, LCAL, LJMP, LRET, LABEL, DJNZ, and END instructions cannot be used in a user-
defined macro.
Note: The arguments configured in the User-defined Macro dialog box can be used in the user-defined macro as devices. For
example, if the device type of A1 is set to data register in the User-defined Macro dialog box, A1 can be used in the same
manner as a data register.

This concludes registering a user-defined macro.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 28-5

28: USER-DEFINED MACRO INSTRUCTION

28-6 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

APPENDIX

Execution Times for Instructions

Execution times for basic and advanced instructions of the FC6A Series MicroSmart are listed below.
Repeat is not assigned for any device.

Instruction Device and Condition Execution Time (μs)

― 0.05
LOD
Using data register 0.13
― 0.06
LODN
Using data register 0.23
― 0.05
OUT
Using data register 0.17
― 0.05
OUTN
Using data register 0.17
― 0.05
SET, RST
Using data register 0.17
― 0.04
AND,
Using data register 0.12
― 0.05
ANDN
Using data register 0.23
― 0.04
OR
Using data register 0.21
― 0.05
ORN
Using data register 0.23
AND · LOD, OR · LOD ― 0.03
BPS ― 0.02
BRD ― 0.02
BPP ― 0.02
TML, TIM, TMH, TMS ― 3.46
TMLO, TIMO, TMHO, TMSO ― 3.44
CNT ― 3.26
CDP ― 3.48
CUD ― 3.38
CNTD, CDPD, CUDD ― 18.9
CC=, CC>= ― 1.85
DC=, DC>= ― 2.24
SFR, SFRN N bits 7.04 + 0.04n
SOTU, SOTD ― 2.04
MCS, MCR, JMP, JEND ― ―
END ― ―
NOP ― ―
M→M 4.38
MOV (W, I)
D→D 0.18
M→M 4.46
MOVN (W, I)
D→D 0.19
M→M 14.6
MOV (D, L)
D→D 0.36
M→M 14.7
MOVN (D, L)
D→D 0.39
MOV (F) ― 0.37
M+D→M+D 8.4
IMOV, IMOVN (W)
D+D→D+D 8.56
IMOV, IMOVN (D) D+D→D+D 18.8
IMOV (F) ― 13.9

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 A-1

APPENDIX

Instruction Device and Condition Execution Time (μs)

BMOV D→D 16.1 + 1.2n
M+D→M+D 13.4
IBMV, IBMVN
D+D→D+D 13.4
NSET (W, I) D→D 2.28 + 2.2n
NSET (D, L) D→D 2.2 + 12.6n
NSET (F) D→D 2.2 + 12.6n
NRS (W, I) D, D→D 5.84 + 0.64n
NRS (D, L) D, D→D 11.1 + 5.7n
NRS (F) D, D→D 11.0 + 5.8n
XCHG (W) D⇔D 5.32
XCHG (D) D⇔D 26.0
TCCST (W) D→T 4.68
TCCST (D) D→T 15.0
CMP (=, <>, <, >, <=, >=) (W, I) D⇔D→M 27.6
CMP (=, <>, <, >, <=, >=) (D, L) D⇔D→M 38.0
CMP (=, <>, <, >, <=, >=) (F) D⇔D→M 38.2
ICMP (>=) D⇔D⇔D→M 29.0
ICMP (D, L, F) D⇔D⇔D→M 44.6
LC (=, <>,<, >, <=, >=) (W, I) D⇔D 4.84
LC (=, <>,<, >, <=, >=) (D, L) D⇔D 15.2
LC (=, <>,<, >, <=, >=) (F) D⇔D 15.3
M+M→D 11.6
ADD (W, I)
D+D→D 11.7
M+M→D 27.2
ADD (D, L)
D+D→D 27.2
ADD (F) D+D→D 27.8
M-M→D 11.6
SUB (W, I)
D-D→D 11.7
M-M→D 27.2
SUB (D, L)
D-D→D 27.2
SUB (F) D-D→D 27.4
M×M→D 11.2
MUL (W, I)
D×D→D 11.3
M×M→D 27.2
MUL (D, L)
D×D→D 27.2
MUL (F) D×D→D 27.4
M÷M→D 7.0
DIV (W, I)
D÷D→D 6.96
M÷M→D 28.0
DIV (D, L)
D÷D→D 28.0
DIV (F) D÷D→D 28.0
INC (W, I) ― 8.92
INC (D, L) ― 19.3
DEC (W, I) ― 8.92
DEC (D, L) ― 19.2
ROOT (W) D →D 6.24
ROOT (D) D →D 18.0
ROOT (F) D →D 19.4
SUM (W, I) D, D→D 11.3 + 0.8n
SUM (D, L) D, D→D 16.6 + 6.0n
SUM (F) D, D→D 16.8 + 7.0n
RNDM D, D→D 6.84
M · M→D 6.08
ANDW, ORW, XORW (W)
D · D→D 6.2
ANDW, ORW, XORW (D) D · D→D 21.6
SFTL, SFTR N_B=100 14.10

A-2 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 APPENDIX

Instruction Device and Condition Execution Time (μs)

BCDLS D→D, S1=1 10.36
WSFT D→D 15.6 + 1.4n
ROTL, ROTR (W) D, bits=1 9.1
HTOB (W) D→D 4.94
BTOH (W) D→D 4.94
HTOA (W) D→D 7.20
ATOH (W) D→D 5.48 + 0.88n
BTOA (W) D→D 5.88 + 0.72n
ATOB (W) D→D 5.84 + 0.76n
ENCO (W) M→D, bits=16 3.9 + 0.8n
DECO D→M 9.6
BCNT M→D, bits=16 ―
ALT ― 8.00
W, I→F 10.2
D, L→F 15.3
CVDT
F→W, I 10.3
F→D, L 15.5
DTDV D→D 4.78
DTCB D→D 4.96
SWAP (W) ― 4.46
SWAP (D) ― 14.9
WKTIM ― ―
WKTBL ― ―
WEEK ― ―
YEAR ― ―
MSG ― ―
DISP ― ―
DGRD ― ―
LABEL ― ―
LJMP ― ―
LCAL ― ―
LRET ― ―
DJNZ ― ―
IOREF ― 9.48
HSCRF ― 8.32
FRQRF ― ―
COMRF ― ―
DI ― 7.44
EI ― 2.07
XYFS ― ―
CVXTY ― ―
CVYTX ― ―
AVRG (W, I) S3=10 7.76
AVRG (D, L) S3=10 13.5
AVRG (F) S3=10 14.4
PULS ― ―
PWM ― ―
RAMP ― ―
ZRN ― ―
ARAMP ― ―
ABS ― ―
JOG ― ―
PID ― ―
PIDA ― ―
PIDD ― ―
DTML, DTIM, DTMH ― 14.6

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 A-3

APPENDIX

Instruction Device and Condition Execution Time (μs)

DTMS ― 13.7
TTIM ― 4.56
RAD F→F 28.4
DEG F→F 28.4
SIN F→F 18.2
COS F→F 18.4
TAN F→F 17.6
ASIN F→F 24.4
ACOS F→F 24.6
ATAN F→F 22.8
LOGE F→F 19.00
LOG10 F→F 19.40
EXP F→F 22.1
POW F→F 34.0
FIFOF ― 23.2
FIEX ― 21.6
FOEX ― 21.6
NDSRC (W, I) D, D, D→D 12.10
NDSRC (D, L) D, D, D→D 43.0
NDSRC (F) D, D, D→D 43.6
TADD ― 12.8
TSUB ― 12.8
HOUR D→D, Y, D 8.0
HTOS D→D 10.0
STOH D→D 15.4
DLOG ― ―
TRACE ― ―
SCRPT ― ―
SCALE ― ―
FLWA ― ―
FLWP ― ―
UMACRO ― ―
TXD ― ―
RXD ― ―
ETXD ― ―
ERXD ― ―
PING ― ―
EMAIL ― ―

Processing in One Scan

While the FC6A Series MicroSmart is running, the FC6A Series MicroSmart performs operations repeatedly such as input refreshing,
ladder program processing, and error checking.
A scan is the execution of all instructions from address zero to the END instruction. The time required for this execution is referred
to as one scan time. The scan time varies with respect to program length.
The current value of the scan time is stored to special data register D8023 (scan time current value), and the maximum value of
the scan time is stored to special data register D8024 (scan time maximum value). These values can be viewed on the PLC status
dialog box of WindLDR while monitoring on a computer.
Executing Program Instructions
During the scan time, program instructions are processed sequentially starting with the first line of the ladder program, except for
interrupt program execution. One scan time of a ladder program is approximately equal to the total execution time of each
instruction shown on preceding pages.
Watchdog Timer
The watchdog timer monitors the time required for one program cycle (scan time) to prevent hardware malfunction. When the
processing time for one scan exceeds the allowed time, a watchdog timer error occurs and the system is reset. If this is the case,
place NOP instructions in the ladder diagram. The NOP instruction resets the watchdog timer. For details on the watchdog timer,
see Chapter 5 "Watchdog Timer Settings" in the "FC6A Series MicroSmart All-in-One Type User’s Manual".

A-4 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 APPENDIX

Breakdown of END Processing Time

The END processing time depends on the FC6A Series MicroSmart settings and system configuration. The maximum values for the
END processing time are as follows.

Item Processing Time

END processing 640 µs

Differences between User-defined Macros and Subroutines

User-defined macros and subroutines are both functions that group the processing used multiple times into a single unit, and then
execute that processing with a call instruction, but they have the following differences.

Item User-defined Macro Subroutine

User-defined macros are created in the User-
Subroutines are created after the END instruction
defined macro editor. The user-defined macro
Created location and call in the ladder program. The subroutine of the
code for the corresponding user-defined macro
method corresponding label number is called each time
number is inserted into the location of the
the LCAL instruction is executed.
UMACRO instruction.
When multiple UMACRO instructions are used
The size of the user program will not increase if
with the same user-defined macro number, the
User program size the LCAL instruction is used multiple times with
size of the user program will increase by each
the same label number.
use.
Argument device Argument devices can be used. Argument devices cannot be used.
Another user-defined macro cannot be called in Another subroutine can be called in the
Multi-stage calls
the user-defined macro. subroutine.

■User-defined macro

Main program User-defined macro editor

Editing After conversion to ladder program

UMACRO S1 UMACRO S1
1 1 User-defined macro
I0000 I0000
(user-defined macro number S1: 1)

User-defined macro
(user-defined macro number S1: 1)
Insert

UMACRO S1 UMACRO S1
1 1
I0001 I0001

User-defined macro
(user-defined macro number S1: 1)

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 A-5

APPENDIX

■Subroutine

Main program

LCAL S1
1
I0000

LCAL S1
1
I0001

Call
END

LABEL

Subroutine
(Label number S1: 1)

LRET

Instruction Bytes
The byte quantities for basic and advanced instructions are listed below.

Qty of Bytes Qty of Bytes

Basic When Using Bits Basic When Using Bits
Instruction When Using Bit Instruction When Using Bit
Specified in Data Specified in Data
Devices Devices
Registers Registers
LOD 12 8 TMSO — 12
LODN 12 12 CNT — 12
OUT 8 8 CDP — 12
OUTN 8 8 CUD — 12
SET 8 8 CNTD — 12
RST 8 8 CDPD — 12
AND 12 8 CUDD — 12
ANDN 12 12 CC= — 12
OR 12 8 CC>= — 12
ORN 12 12 DC= — 12-16
AND LOD — 8 DC>= — 12-16
OR LOD — 8 SFR — 12
BPS — 4 SFRN — 12
BRD — 4 SOTU — 8
BPP — 4 SOTD — 8
TML — 12 MCS — 4
TIM — 12 MCR — 4
TMH — 12 JMP — 12
TMS — 12 JEND — 4
TMLO — 12 END — 4
TIMO — 12
TMHO — 12

A-6 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 APPENDIX

Advanced Instruction Qty of Bytes Advanced Instruction Qty of Bytes

NOP 8 WSFT 16-20
MOV (W, I) 16-20 ROTL, ROTR (W) 12-16
MOVN (W, I) 16-20 HTOB (W) 12-20
MOV (D, L) 16-20 BTOH (W) 12-20
MOVN (D, L) 16-20 HTOA (W) 16-24
MOV (F) 16-20 ATOH (W) 16-24
IMOV, IMOVN (W) 20-28 BTOA (W) 16-24
IMOV, IMOVN (D) 20-28 ATOB (W) 16-24
IMOV (F) 20-28 ENCO (W) 16-20
BMOV 16-20 DECO 16-20
IBMV, IBMVN 20-28 BCNT 16-20
NSET (W, I) 16-1544 ALT 12
NSET (D, L) 16-1544 CVDT 16-20
NSET (F) 16-1544 DTDV 12-16
NRS (W, I) 16-24 DTCB 12-16
NRS (D, L) 16-24 SWAP (W) 16-20
NRS (F) 16-24 SWAP (D) 16-20
XCHG (W) 12-16 WKTIM 20-24
XCHG (D) 12-16 WKTBL 12-92
TCCST (W) 16-20 WEEK 20-140
TCCST (D) 16-20 YEAR 28-220
CMP (=, <>, <, >, <=, >=) (W, I) 20-28 MSG 12-
CMP (=, <>, <, >, <=, >=) (D, L) 20-28 DISP 16
CMP (=, <>, <, >, <=, >=) (F) 20-28 DGRD 16-20
ICMP (>=) 16-28 LABEL 12
ICMP (D, L, F) 16-28 LJMP 12
LC (=, <>, <, >, <=, >=) (W, I) 12-20 LCAL 12
LC (=, <>, <, >, <=, >=) (D, L) 12-20 LRET 8
LC (=, <>, <, >, <=, >=) (F) 12-20 DJNZ 12-16
ADD (W, I) 16-28 IOREF 12
ADD (D, L) 16-28 HSCRF 8
ADD (F) 16-28 FRQRF 8
SUB (W, I) 16-28 COMRF 8
SUB (D, L) 16-28 DI 12
SUB (F) 16-28 EI 12
MUL (W, I) 16-28 XYFS 24-272
MUL (D, L) 16-28 CVXTY 16-20
MUL (F) 16-28 CVYTX 16-20
DIV (W, I) 16-28 AVRG (W, I) 20-24
DIV (D, L) 16-28 AVRG (D, L) 20-24
DIV (F) 16-28 AVRG (F) 20-24
INC (W, I) 12 PULS 12-28
INC (D, L) 12 PWM 12-28
DEC (W, I) 12 RAMP 12-36
DEC (D, L) 12 ZRN 16, 52
ROOT (W) 12-20 ARAMP 40-316
ROOT (D) 12-20 ABS 12-16
ROOT (F) 12-20 JOG 36
SUM (W, I) 16-24 PID 20-28
SUM (D, L) 16-24 PIDA 112-116
SUM (F) 16-24 PIDD 272-276
RNDM 16-20 DTML, DTIM, DTMH 16-24
ANDW, ORW, XORW (W) 16-28 DTMS 16-24
ANDW, ORW, XORW (D) 16-28 TTIM 12
SFTL, SFTR 16-24 RAD 12-20
BCDLS 12-16 DEG 12-20

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 A-7

APPENDIX

Advanced Instruction Qty of Bytes Advanced Instruction Qty of Bytes

SIN 12-20 TSUB 16-24
COS 12-20 HOUR 20-24
TAN 12-20 HTOS 12-16
ASIN 12-20 STOH 12-20
ACOS 12-20 DLOG 28-408
ATAN 12-20 TRACE 28-408
LOGE 20 SCRPT 16-20
LOG10 20 SCALE 36-44
EXP 20 FLWA 24-32
POW 16-24 FLWP 28-36
FIFOF 24 UMACRO 24-624
FIEX 12-16 TXD 20-
FOEX 12-16 RXD 20-
NDSRC (W, I) 16-28 ETXD 20-
NDSRC (D, L) 16-28 ERXD 20-
NDSRC (F) 16-28 PING 16-20
TADD 16-24 EMAIL 16-20

A-8 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 APPENDIX

User Program Execution Error

This error indicates that invalid data is found during execution of a user program. When this error occurs, the ERR LED and special
internal relay M8004 (user program execution error) turned on. The detailed information of this error can be viewed from the error
code stored in special data register D8006 (user program execution error code).

User Program
Execution Error Code Error Details
(D8006)
1 Source/destination device exceeds range.
2 MUL result exceeds data type range.
3 DIV result exceeds data type range, or division by 0.
4 BCDLS has S1 or S1+1 exceeding 9999.
5 S1 is 10,000 or higher in the HTOB(W) instruction, or S1 is 100,000,000 or higher in the HTOB(D) instruction.
6 BTOH has any digit of S1 exceeding 9.
7 HTOA/ATOH/BTOA/ATOB has quantity of digits to convert out of range.
8 ATOH/ATOB has non-ASCII data for S1 through S1+4.
In the WEEK instruction, the ON time data exceeds range (hour data is 24 or higher, minute data is 60 or higher),
9
or the OFF time data exceeds range (hour data is 25 or higher, minute data is 60 or higher).
In the YEAR instruction, the month and day data exceeds range (month data is 13 or higher, day data is 32 or
10
higher).
CVXTY/CVYTX is executed without matching XYFS.
12
XYFS and CVXTY/CVYTX have the same S1, but have different data types.
13 CVXTY/CVYTX has S2 exceeding the value specified in XYFS.
14 Label in LJMP, LCAL, or DJNZ is not found.
16 PID instruction execution error.
Attempt was made to execute an instruction that cannot be used in an interrupt program:
SOTU, SOTD, TML, TIM, TMH, TMS, CNT, CDP, CUD, SFR, SFRN, WEEK, YEAR, MSG, TXD, RXD, DI, EI, XYFS,
18
CVXTY, CVYTX, AVRG, PULS, PWM, RAMP, ZRN, ARAMP, DTML, DTIM, DTMH, DTMS, TTIM, FIFOF, NDSRL, HOUR,
ETXD, ERXD, DLOG, and TRACE (see "Instructions Reference" on page 3-1).
19 Attempt was made to execute an instruction that is not available for the PLC.
20 JOG, ABS, HZRN, PULS, PWM, RAMP, ZRN, or ARAMP has an invalid value in control registers.
21 DECO has S1 exceeding 255.
22 BCNT has S2 exceeding 256.
23 ICMP>= has S1 < S3.
25 BCDLS has S2 exceeding 7.
26 DI or EI is executed when interrupt input or timer interrupt is not programmed in the Function Area Settings.
27 Work area is broken when using DTML, DTIM, DTMH, DTMS, or TTIM.
28 S1 for trigonometric function instruction is invalid.
29 Result of F (float) data type instruction exceeds the data type range.
30 The number of bits configured in the SFTL/SFTR instruction or SFR FB exceeds the valid range.
In the FIFOF instruction, the FIEX instruction or the FOEX instruction was executed before the FIFO data file was
31
registered.
TADD, TSUB, HOUR, or HTOS has invalid data for source device S1 or HOUR FB has invalid data for the Preset
32
value.
34 NDSRC has invalid data for source device S3.
35 In the SUM instruction, the execution result exceeds the valid range for the selected data type, or S2 data is 0.
36 DLOG/TRACE is executed but the capacity of CSV file exceeds 5 MB.
41 SD memory card is write protected.
The result of execution using the SCRPT instruction is a value that indicates anything other than normal
42
completion.
43 The minimum value is greater than the maximum value in RCMP FB.
44 The shift registers specified by the start shift register and the number of bits in SFR FB does not exist.
In RPULS FB, the minimum value of ON time is greater than the maximum value of ON time, or the maximum
45
value of ON time is greater than the cycle time.

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 A-9

APPENDIX

A-10 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

INDEX

# 100-ms FIFOF 23-1

dual timer 20-1 FOEX 23-3
10-ms FRQRF 14-4
dual timer 20-1 HOUR 24-11
1-ms dual timer 20-1 HSCRF 14-3
1-s HTOA 10-5
dual timer 20-1 HTOB 10-1
32-bit Data Storage 3-9 IBMV 5-10
IBMVN 5-12
A About the Priority of the Operator 26-42 ICMP>= 6-6
ACOS 21-7 IMOV 5-6
ADD 7-1 IMOVN 5-8
adding counter CNT 4-11 INC 7-13
addition 7-1 input condition 3-6
advanced instruction IOREF 14-1
ACOS 21-7 LABEL 13-1
ADD 7-1 LC< 6-8
ALT 10-18 LC<= 6-8
ANDW 8-1 LC<> 6-8
ASIN 21-6 LC= 6-8
ATAN 21-8 LC> 6-8
ATOB 10-12 LC>= 6-8
ATOH 10-7 LCAL 13-3
AVRG 17-1 list 3-3
BCDLS 9-5 LJMP 13-1
BCNT 10-17 LOG10 22-2
BMOV 5-9 LOGE 22-1
BTOA 10-9 LRET 13-3
BTOH 10-3 MOV 5-1
CMP< 6-1 MOVN 5-5
CMP<= 6-1 MUL 7-1
CMP<> 6-1 NDSRC 23-5
CMP= 6-1 NOP 3-11
CMP> 6-1 NRS 5-14
CMP>= 6-1 NSET 5-13
COMRF 14-5 ORW 8-1
COS 21-4 POW 22-4
CVDT 10-19 RAD 21-1
CVXTY 16-2 ROOT 7-14
CVYTX 16-3 ROTL 9-8
data types 3-7 ROTR 9-10
DEC 7-13 SFTL 9-1
DECO 10-16 SFTR 9-3
DEG 21-2 SIN 21-3
DGRD 12-22 structure 3-6
DI 15-1 SUB 7-1
DISP 12-20 SUM 7-15
DIV 7-1 SWAP 10-23
DJNZ 13-5 TADD 24-1
DTCB 10-22 TAN 21-5
DTDV 10-21 TCCST 5-16
DTIM 20-1 TSUB 24-5
DTMH 20-1 TTIM 20-3
DTMS 20-1 WSFT 9-7
EI 15-1 XCHG 5-15
ENCO 10-15 XORW 8-1
EXP 22-3 XYFS 16-1
FIEX 23-3 Advanced instructions

1 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 INDEX-1

INDEX

ARAMP 18-37 change

DLOG 25-1 counter preset and current values 4-11
PULS 18-1 timer preset and current values 4-8
PWM 18-8 changing
RAMP 18-15 preset values for timers and counters 4-17
WEEK 11-3 Character string operations 26-17
YEAR 11-16 clear button 4-17
ZRN 18-27 clearing
ALT 10-18 changed preset values 4-17
alternate output 10-18 clock
Analog flow totalizer (FLWA) 27-9 instructions 24-1
AND and ANDN instructions 4-4 CMP< 6-1
AND LOD instruction 4-5 CMP<= 6-1
AND word 8-1 CMP<> 6-1
ANDW 8-1 CMP= 6-1
arc CMP> 6-1
cosine 21-7 CMP>= 6-1
sine 21-6 CNT, CDP, and CUD instructions 4-11
tangent 21-8 CNTD, CDPD, and CUDD instructions 4-14
Arithmetic operation 26-14 Comment 26-18
Arithmetic operator 26-13, 26-26 common logarithm 22-2
ASCII communication
to BCD 10-12 refresh 14-5
to hex 10-7 Communication Adapter Information 2-21
ASIN 21-6 compare
ATAN 21-8 equal to 6-1
ATOB 10-12 greater than 6-1
ATOH 10-7 or equal to 6-1
average 17-1 less than 6-1
AVRG 17-1 or equal to 6-1
unequal to 6-1
B basic comparison
instructions 3-1, 4-1 result
BCD M8150, M8151, M8152 6-2, 6-6
left shift 9-5 COMRF 14-5
to ASCII 10-9 Conditional branch 26-12
to hex 10-3 confirm
BCDLS 9-5 button 4-17
BCNT 10-17 confirming changed preset values 4-17
bidirectional shift register 4-25 Constant 26-18
binary arithmetic instructions 7-1 Control signal status 2-23
bit count 10-17 Control Statements 26-12, 26-19
Bit function 26-14, 26-29 conversion 12-20, 12-22
Bit operator 26-14 linear 16-4
Bitwise Operators 26-27 convert
block move 5-9 data type 10-19
BMOV 5-9 X to Y 16-2
BMOV/WSFT executing flag M8024 5-9, 9-7 Y to X 16-3
Boolean computation instructions 8-1 coordinate conversion instructions 16-1
Borrow 2-7, 3-10 COS 21-4
BPS, BRD, and BPP instructions 4-6 cosine 21-4
breakdown of END processing time A-5 counter
BTOA 10-9 adding (up) counter 4-11
BTOH 10-3 and shift register in master control circuit 4-28
bytes A-6 comparison instructions 4-18
C Carry 3-10 double-word
carry adding (up) 4-14
and borrow 7-16 dual-pulse reversible 4-15
or borrow signals 7-2 up/down selection reversible 4-16
Carry/ 2-7 dual-pulse reversible 4-12
Carry/Borrow 2-7 up/down selection reversible 4-13
CC= and CC>= instructions 4-18 CSV File 25-4, 25-10

INDEX-2 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 INDEX

current value DTDV 10-21

change DTIM 20-1
counter 4-11 DTMH 20-1
timer 4-8 DTMS 20-1
CVDT 10-19 dual/teaching timer instructions 20-1
CVXTY 16-2 dual-pulse reversible counter CDP 4-12
CVYTX 16-3
E edit user program 1-4
D data EI 15-1
combine 10-22 enable
comparison instructions 6-1 interrupt 15-1
conversion ENCO 10-15
error 16-2, 16-3 encode 10-15
instructions 10-1 END
divide 10-21 instruction 4-30
input 4-22 processing time, breakdown A-5
movement error
timer/counter preset value 4-17 code
phase 12-20 user program execution A-9
swap 10-23 exchange 5-15
type 3-6 exclusive OR word 8-1
types for advanced instructions 3-7 execution
Data comparison and copy 26-16 times for instructions A-1
data register EXP 22-3
comparison instructions 4-20 exponent 22-3
double-word
data move 5-2 F FIEX 23-3
Data type conversion 26-15 FIFO format 23-1
DC= and DC>= instructions 4-20 FIFOF 23-1
DEC 7-13 file data processing instructions 23-1
decimal values and hexadecimal storage 3-7 first-in execute 23-3
DECO 10-16 first-out execute 23-3
decode 10-16 FOEX 23-3
decrement 7-13 Format List 26-12
jump non-zero 13-5 format number 16-1, 16-2, 16-3
DEG 21-2 forward shift register 4-22
degree 21-2 frequency measurement
destination device 3-6 refresh 14-4
Device 2-1 FRQRF 14-4
device Function 26-14
areas discontinuity 3-11 List 26-10
Device Address 26-18 H Halt and exit 26-13
DGRD 12-22 hex to
DI 15-1 ASCII 10-5
digital BCD 10-1
read 12-22 hexadecimal storage decimal values 3-7
disable high-speed counter
interrupt 15-1 refresh 14-3
discontinuity of device areas 3-11 HMS to s 24-9
DISP 12-20 HOUR 24-11
display 12-20 hour meter 24-11
DIV 7-1 HSCRF 14-3
division 7-1 HTOA 10-5
DJNZ 13-5 HTOB 10-1
double-word
adding counter CNTD 4-14 I I/O
counter 4-14 refresh 14-1
data move in data registers 5-2 IBMV 5-10
dual-pulse reversible counter CDPD 4-15 IBMVN 5-12
up/down selection reversible counter CUDD 4-16 ICMP>= 6-6
download IMOV 5-6
program 1-10 IMOVN 5-8
DTCB 10-22 INC 7-13

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 INDEX-3

INDEX

increment 7-13 M master

indirect control instruction 4-27
bit move 5-10 MCS and MCR instructions 4-27
bit move not 5-12 Message (MSG) 12-1
move 5-6 monitor
move not 5-8 operation 1-12
input MOV 5-1
condition for advanced instructions 3-6 move 5-1
instruction bytes A-6 instructions 5-1
instructions not 5-5
average 17-1 MOVN 5-5
binary arithmetic 7-1 MUL 7-1
Boolean computation 8-1 multiple
clock 24-1 OUT and OUTN 4-2
coordinate conversion 16-1 usage of MCS instructions 4-28
data comparison 6-1 multiplication 7-1
data conversion 10-1
dual/teaching timer 20-1 N N data
file data processing 23-1 repeat set 5-14
logarithm/power 22-1 search 23-5
move 5-1 set 5-13
program branching 13-1 natural logarithm 22-1
prohibited 4-31 NDSRC 23-5
shift/rotate 9-1 no operation 3-11
trigonometric function 21-1 NOP 3-11
interval compare greater than or equal to 6-6 NRS 5-14
IOREF 14-1 NSET 5-13

J JMP and JEND instructions 4-29 O off-delay

JOG operation (JOG) 18-63 100-ms timer 4-10
jump instructions 4-29 10-ms timer 4-10
1-ms timer 4-10
L LABEL 13-1 1-s timer 4-10
label 13-1 timer 4-10
call 13-3 Offset 26-16
jump 13-1 opcode 3-6
return 13-3 operation
latch phase 12-20 basics 1-1
LC< 6-8 Operator 26-13
LC<= 6-8 Optional Cartridge Information 2-21
LC<> 6-8 OR and ORN instructions 4-4
LC= 6-8 OR LOD instruction 4-5
LC> 6-8 OR word 8-1
LC>= 6-8 ORW 8-1
LCAL 13-3 OUT and OUTN
linear conversion 16-4 instructions 4-1
list multiple 4-2
advanced instruction 3-3 overlapping coordinates 16-5
basic instruction 3-1
LJMP 13-1 P PIDA (PID Control) 19-3
load compare PIDD (PID with Derivative Decay) 19-26
equal to 6-8 PLC Selection 1-2
greater than 6-8 PLC status 4-17
or equal to 6-8 POW 22-4
less than 6-8 power 22-4
or equal to 6-8 failure
unequal to 6-8 memory protection 4-9
LOD and LODN instructions 4-1 preset
LOG10 22-2 values
logarithm/power instructions 22-1 change counter 4-11
LOGE 22-1 change timer 4-8
Logical operator 26-13, 26-25 changing 4-17
LRET 13-3 restoring 4-17

INDEX-4 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726

 INDEX

program branching right 9-3

instructions 13-1 shift/rotate instructions 9-1
using with SOTU/SOTD instructions 13-2 simulate operation 1-9
using with timer instruction 13-2 SIN 21-3
programming sine 21-3
DI or EI using WindLDR 15-2 single output instruction 4-26
Programming Scripts 26-12 SOTU and SOTD instructions 4-26
prohibited SOTU/SOTD instructions using with program branching 13-2
instructions 4-31 source
ladder programs 4-31 and destination devices 3-6
proximity signal 18-27 device 3-6
pulse Special data register device addresses 2-13
input 4-22 special dates 11-16
Pulse flow totalizer (FLWP) 27-18 special internal relay
for interrupt status 15-1
Q quit WindLDR 1-12 Special internal relay device addresses 2-3
specified date 11-16
R RAD 21-1
start
radian 21-1
WindLDR 1-1, 1-3
Relational operator 26-13, 26-24
start/stop
Repeat 26-12
operation 1-15
repeat
schematic 1-15
cycles 3-6
using power supply 1-16
designation 3-6
using WindLDR 1-15
operation
structure of an advanced instruction 3-6
ADD and SUB instructions 7-6
SUB 7-1
ANDW, ORW, and XORW instructions 8-3
subroutine 13-4
data comparison instructions 6-4
subtraction 7-1
DIV instruction 7-10
SUM 7-15
indirect bit move instruction 5-11
sum 7-15
move instructions 5-3
SWAP 10-23
MUL instruction 7-8
reset T TADD 24-1
input 4-22 TAN 21-5
restore timer/counter preset values 4-17 tangent 21-5
restriction on ladder programming 4-31 TCCST 5-16
reverse teaching timer 20-3
shift register 4-24 Temporary Device 26-18
Reversible control 18-18, 18-43 time
ROOT 7-14 addition 24-1
rotate subtraction 24-5
left 9-8 timer
right 9-10 100-ms off-delay 4-10
ROTL 9-8 10-ms off-delay 4-10
ROTR 9-10 1-ms off-delay 4-10
RS232C DSR Control Signal Status 2-23 1-s off-delay 4-10
RS232C DTR Output Control Signal Option 2-24 accuracy 4-8
rung 1-3, 1-4 instruction using with program branching 13-2
or counter
S s to HMS 24-10
as destination device 3-6
Scale conversion instruction (SCALE) 27-1
as source device 3-6
Script (SCRPT) 26-1
timer/counter
Script Editor 26-8
current value
Script Manager 26-7
store 5-16
Script Programming Examples 26-19
TML, TIM, TMH, and TMS instructions 4-7
SET and RST instructions 4-3
TMLO, TIMO, TMHO, and TMSO instructions 4-10
SFR and SFRN instructions 4-22
TRACE 25-7
SFTL 9-1
trigonometric function instructions 21-1
SFTR 9-3
TSUB 24-5
shift
TTIM 20-3
left 9-1
register U UMACRO 28-1
instructions 4-22 up

FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726 INDEX-5

INDEX

counter CNT 4-11

up/down selection reversible counter CUD 4-13
User Program Execution Errors 3-10
User-defined Macro 28-1

W Week Table (WKTBL) 11-1

Week Timer (WKTIM) 11-1
WindLDR
programming
DI or EI 15-2
quit 1-12
start 1-1, 1-3
Word function 26-14, 26-29
word shift 9-7
WSFT 9-7

X XCHG 5-15
XORW 8-1
XY format set 16-1
XYFS 16-1

INDEX-6 FC6A SERIES MICROSMART LAD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FC9Y-B1726